a

A) etsy
RNS

Oa)

’ "yae'® ee
Peas Vit ban Ve
q 4 '

Sa A
* wu »

Vie
ae Say gy ae
Wu ihte ga gala
bats, ;

Sih

¥
PA!
SS
>

aN
ae

.
:

A aD ON a
Rh

*
ieee.

cg eS ky
Weleet
*

Py Sy4
Cre
°

_ o 5 > WS 5 72 = by,
YR > > > We . 2 OH
Ci i 2 AVE 2 - PR? 3)

wn = n” ‘ _ w z wo
SHLINS, S3IUVYAIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOLLLSNI_ NYINOSHLINS

no Zs 2 ay Nee ” z a
: = < s < = < =

=| = = = x = a =i
Z a é; ]

& Oi tN: a Nai Je: a
5 : TN) . .

Z Ee WY? E Wy 2 = 2,
2 a * Z a cial 2 a —-

S |
ONIAN INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31YVYG17 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN IN

Vy, ee a Ww = a z
iy = =e =A ae 4 =

(Mp a _
i eer | load om a faa fe a
ae Yes = < 2 , = 2s <x ne |
SPA ~ ‘ [a if
f = = = ; ay
ro) eS S = 5 a. 2

Ce, #5" ual =
SHLIWS Salavuai] LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOLLOJILSNI N¥INOSHILIMS iS
: z ps =
ro) os ° ; re) = Oo
ez Z = 2 E E
: = > Ee: > = > =
N S fe = 2 = 2 a
RN 2 i 2 i Z m ee
SONIAN INSTITUTION poe ae a) luvug Toul BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _ If
we, x = Pet ves = =

= = ‘Zz Seer ae shar Xs = =

e a : SG47 BNR 8 2

iE 2 E 2G : eee F

4 > : % >
= 2 a z 7) a ee =

HLINS S3iuyvugi7 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOLLNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S

o _ ” = wo = w”
Sc = o. es! oc S oc
“(payee = <i; ea < a <i
NY oc S a = ” = oc
hs 1 pa fea) _ — ma
=a (oe) = le: Oo _ S =
5 Zz 5 Fe _ z ae
ONIAN” INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NWINOSHLINS S3IYVYdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN It
2 te Zz i : a i Ss % —
Y = fe) = =e
Yi, 2 = o = ow = wo
yy, 2 : = Nee 5 : : :
YM > = Hine ANN = > = Pe |
PETE 0} _ w Ss SS \N be Dw — za
Ee City is eas KS = fhe a =
m g m > s ™ 2 m
(29) = n a = ap) = n
HLINS SSIYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NYINOSHLIWNS S
w : Fa is ” Pinte ” = )
= Wy, : = < = < =
= YELM 4 = = = + = =
Sy Oe Z = = E 2y
= a nee a = a 2
ONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS SaluYvu¥dit LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ Ih
yy Zz Lh za i z de P<
Y, “a ad 7) 7) ul 7)
ly, = e 2 a = : =
(OR A = = NY xj = ‘5
ee 5 c x S S Sy . Cc <x G
ep 7 m < . a Le ee
ie = WY o = ae =
S 5 Tet S = 2
=m a
HLINS SAIYVUSIT “UU BRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NYINOSHLINS S$
z ie = ep = e S
; oO VS¥AG = : TSW = Re.
\ — S> > oO Ea per ft se) rs S> >> o \ SS =
<a load (si “\ a >. (9 JA a 5 a\ a BOS Es
2 ce Se = 2H 2 2 EE 2s) > QS 2

2 > ais \ 5 2 = Uy 2 i)
2 Ic ss A a '
N m WX : w m nw’ ; m w
= 7) = o = w re
ULIBRARIES) SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Sal uvudIT_LIBRAR
i? = 0, § = = = ce |
— st maa —_ — mas s

5 z 5 = f: 5 z So Y
D o a) ay shh e) on NQores
C ; oO as . O Se fe) a Ni
= ~ = = z = z, = ae
= “SMS > = aN >* = > = SS
2) 2 ” z z 7) = ey LLAL
JNOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31YVYGIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION |, ea
r = Wl = uu = ud
y = oc = ~ ais. ac
c c _< =. < siren <
c 4 a + oc = a
ee Zz Ay a 2 ef = a

LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Saluvudi7 LIBRAR
a i ie ee z ue
D = ee ° = Xe S) ==
] 5 =e] = >) Y NO = a
> ey > = > : ra >
z — 2 = a = =
4 ” m ” m w m
.) = o <= w er w

NOILALILSN! NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NOILNLI
fy < w z weer 2) = Ww
= p= = ae NS s < =
: d 5 z % 5 & ”. = rs = ey
+ g e ZR 2 2 Gh
2 i Zz iS = = 2 Yi
> = > = evan = > G
Z 7) Zz 7) ie wo Ai ee
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS Saldvuaiy_tIBRAF
3 = Len o ou = wwe uu a
4 i Z a (+ — eat RI = al
4 :& PUL oH =e =, oo 2 =|
: « “iy = s 3 a =
5 ie is e ro) 2 3
= : al z =! z es | Zz
-NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS (S31YVYEIT LIBRARI ES_ SMITHSONIAN” INSTITUTION | NOILALI
5 ee > o ace ro) oe aus e)
: 2 NY 2 2 E Gy, = E

=) Chu he =

a > SIS ke > ras Z <> =
— w os SNS — > o) _ Uf Soa ee fe 0 | _
29 = mS NS Ler as fe ee ee =
= ” 5 = wn = 22) =

LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOJLALILSNI NVINOSHLINS SSIYVYEIT LIBRAF

Zz n a
iets = = g z 2 Yyy <
Zs = ra oN = 4; =a = UY); Zz NN
=L SQ iy f, Ye %
: Z 3 NAG 7) 3 z ;ooN
z fe) rT ATAN CO fH GZ, = oO Se eS ‘XS
= 2 Bae ne oe ey AT ei ng
= > = NY >" = > = bis
77) 2 ” : Fre 7p) z on
_ NYINOSHLIANS S3I¥VYsIt SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNL
S) > : ” os wo > (ap)
Be = ao = [aed sis oc
< = _< = <x : a <
3 5 = ) i 3) =
4 z = ra 3 = iy
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI Saiuvudia LIBRAF
=) = <o — Kus w i) <a w
s Oe a FE le 293) > Ee Si) 5

Supplement to The Australian Zoologist, Vol. 13, Part 4, 1966

2
a

the
ae a

THE

AUSTRALIAN 7, OOLOGIST

Volume 13

1963 - 1966

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES, SYDNEY

Registered at the G.P.O., Sydney, for transmission by post as a_ periodical.

THE
AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST

Issued by the
ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

Volume XIII — Part |

September 18, 1963

Price £1

All communications to be addressed to the Hon. Secretary,
Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,
28 Martin Place, Sydney.

Registered at the G.P.O., Sydney, for transmission by post as a periodical.

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES
Established 1879

REGISTERED UNDER THE COMPANIES ACT 1899 (1917)

Patron:
His Excellency Lieutenant-General Sir Eric Woodward, K.C.M.G., C.B.,
GBE., D'S.0.
Vice-Patrons:
The Right Honourable Sir John Greig Latham, G.C.M.G.
Sir Edward Hallstrom, K.B., F.R.Z.S.
Aubrey Halloran, O.B.E., B.A., LL.B., F.R.Z.S.
COUNCIL, 1962-63
President:
Courtenay Neville Smithers, M.Sc.

Vice-Presidents:
Gilbert Percy Whitley, F.R.Z.S.

Ernest Jeffrey Gadsden, F.R.Z.S.
Basil Joseph Guy Marlow, B.Sc.

Honorary Secretary: John Miles Campbell.
Assistant Honorary Secretary: Mrs. Leone Harford.
Honorary Treasurer: Lyall James Fox McHugh, A.A.S.A., A.C.1.S.

Members of Council:

John Hallstrom. Percy Fincham Harvey.
Anthony Irwin Ormsby, LL.B. Ellis le Geyt Troughton, F.R.ZS.,
Mrs. Leone Harford. C.M.Z.S.
Maxwell Hall Gregg. John Baker.
Lawrence Courtney-Haines, Frank McCamley.
A.Mus.A., L.T.C.L. John Yaldwyn, Ph.D.
Alexander Holmes. Claude Hardy.

Editorial Committee:

Basil Joseph Guy Marlow, B.Sc. Courtenay Neville Smithers, M.Sc.

Alexander Holmes
Honorary Librarian: Mrs. Leone Harford.

OFFICERS (Non-Councillors )

Honorary Solicitor: Aubrey Halloran, O.B.E., B.A., LL.B., F.R.Z.S.
Honorary Auditor: M. S. Davies, F.C.A. (Aust.).
Assistant Honorary Treasurer: Reginald Bowen.

OFFICERS OF SECTIONS.

Conchology Section: Marine Section:
Chairman: F. McCamley. Chairman: L. Thomas.
Hon. Secretary: Mrs. O. Wills. Hon. Secretary: A. Healy.
Entomology Section: Mammals and Reptiles Section:
Chairman: B. Salkilld. Chairman: W. Irvine.
Hon. Secretary: C. Hardy. Hon. Secretary: G. Acland.
Ornithology Section: Aviculture Section:
Chairman: S. G. Lane. Chairman: Mrs. F. Blaxland.

Hon. Secretary: J. M. Hewitt. Hon. Secretary: P. Harvey.

THE AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST

Volume XIII Parte

Notes on the Hawk-Moths and Butterflies of Bandon
Grove, N.S.W.

By Miss M. J. DowLINnG and L. CouRTNEY HAINEs.

Bandon Grove is situated in the Williams River Valley approximately 30
miles inland from the coast and 70 miles north of Newcastle. The Williams River
rises in the Barrington Tops and is joined near the little village of Bandon Grove
by the Chichester River, a smaller stream, having its headwater in the foothills
of the Barrington Tops. These rivers, in places crystal clear, are shaded by
Weeping Willows, Basket Willows, Iron-woods, River Oaks, Lillypillies, and for
bright spots of colour, the Red Bottle-Brushes.

The surrounding countryside consists of undulating “parklands” and although
a good deal of the land has been cleared and taken over for farming and grazing,
heavily wooded hills are still to be found, one not having far to go before finding
oneself amidst the wild beauty of tall timber and virgin forest. In the vicinity
of Bandon Grove the remaining trees consist of Ironbarks, Grey and Spotted
Gums, a few Stringy-barks and Apple Gums, while in marshy areas, and bordering
the shallow creeks, Paper-barks, Tea-trees and Black Wattles predominate.

Along the hillsides and in the gullies, wherever Lantana and Wild Orange
bushes flourish, many species of day-flying Lepidoptera may be observed; it is,
however, in the garden surrounding the homestead, appropriately named
“Canningalla,’ an Aboriginal word meaning “at the foot of the Hills,” that the
authors have done most of their collecting.

The garden is surrounded by Silky Oaks, English Oaks, Pittosporums,
Kurrajongs, Orange Trees and shrubs, among which Duranta, Weigelia, and
Buddleia are the greatest attractants as far as the butterflies are concerned. Along
the fences trail Wistaria and Honeysuckle vines, and hedges of Plumbago and
other sweet smelling plants grow here and there in wild profusion. At the
twilight hour when the still air is heavy with the scent of garden sweets, shadowy
forms of moths are to be observed darting frenziedly from bloom to bloom.
While Hawk-moths carefully investigate the Petunias, Stocks and Honeysuckle
blooms, numerous Owl moths dash madly about the tree-tops, in their whirling
flight silhouetted against the glowing sky-line. On occasions those large fruit-
sucking Noctuas, Ophideres materna and O. salamia are attracted to the house
lights, and frequently their curious caterpillars are found feeding on the large
heart-shaped leaves of a vine belonging to the order Minispermaceae, which
grows abundantly in a nearby gully.

In these charming surroundings of wooded vales, grassy meadows, and
gardens, we have either captured on the wing, or hatched out in our breeding
cages many species of Lepidoptera belonging to the various macro-families of
moths. At this stage, however, we propose to discuss only the Hawk-Moths and
the Butterflies, there being no less than 15 species of the former and 63 of the
latter.

SMITHS wile
Sie A

i

Nov? 210g?

2 HAWK-MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES

ANNOTATED LIST.
Division Heterocera.

Family Sphingidae. Hawk-Moths.

1. Tetrachroa edwardsi Oliff. Edwards Hawk-Moth. A specimen of this scarce
and most attractive hawk came to light about 10.30 p.m. on the evening of
January 30th, 1959. The night was warm with a gentle movement in the air
from the north west. While as yet only a single capture has been made at Bandon
Grove, at least two specimens have been taken on lamp posts in Dungog by school
children, during the summer of 1957.

2. Chromis erotus Cramer. Orange-underwing Hawk. Not at all plentiful, and
until recently four specimens only had been taken at light. During the past two
years, another four were bred out from caterpillars found feeding on Black
Muscatel Grape-vine and Virginia Creeper leaves.

3. Ascosmeryx cinerea Butler. Olive-shades Hawk. A fairly common species
which is readily attracted to light. It occurs from November to February.
Larvae have been found feeding on Grapevine leaves, Rosea, and Cayratia
climatidea, sometimes referred to as Vitis climatidea, “Wild Grape.”

4. Psilogramma menephron casuarinae Walker. Casuarina Hawk-Moth. This
big grey hawk is easily netted as it probes for nectar among the flowers of
Bignonia lindleyana. It is also attracted to some of the sweet smelling lilies.
The handsome caterpillars have been found eating the leaves of the Bignonia.
Tecoma, Variagate Privet, and Common Privet. In other localities larvae have
also been found on Lilac, and on Blue Bush, Notelea longifolia, a native shrub.
Casuarina Hawks are on the wing from December to February.

5. Herse convolvuli L. Convolvulus Hawk-Moth. Specimens have been observed
and captured on the wing during October, November, and again in March.
Although some have been collected at light, the majority of captures are to be
made amidst the garden flowers during the twilight hours. The caterpillars feed
upon Sweet Potato and Convolvulus leaves.

6. Herse godarti Macleay. Inland Hawk. One record only of this interesting
species. The specimen was captured during 1959 by a local school teacher. It
was netted as it hovered over the flowers of the Honeysuckle.

7. Celerio lineata livorniciodes Lucas. Pink-striped Hawk. Four specimens taken
at light during March, 1959. All four made their appearance about 9 o’clock
in the evening.

8. Cephonodes kingii Macleay. Broad-marked Clear-wing. Two of these fascinat-
ing day-flying hawks have been captured, one in the adjoining district of Fosterton
on 14th March, 1959, and the other at Bandon Grove on the following day. At
both places during these two days, several specimens were observed, darting about
in the hot sunshine, their wonderful tail-fans expanded, as they investigated the
garden sweets. The Duranta flowers were mainly favoured at Fosterton, while at
Bandon Grove the blooms of the native Ehretia acuminata were the main attrac-
tion. Several larvae found feeding on Gardenia have been bred out.

9. Cephonodes hylas L. Lesser-marked Clear-wing. A number of specimens have
been bred from caterpillars found feeding on Gardenia.

10. Macroglossum hirundo errans Walker. Humming-bird Hawk-moth. This
strange moth is also called the Bee-hawk. Its presence is usually made known
by a distinct humming sound, produced as it darts and hovers about the flowers
during the dusk. A specimen was captured during the evening of February Sth,
1959, and being such an extremely fast flier, it was some time before it was
successfully netted.

11. Hippotion scrofa Boisduval. Vermillion Under-wing Hawk. A common
species from October to December, when numbers of them may be seen flying
around the Orange blossoms at dusk; but as the shadows of night deepen, they
vanish as quickly and mysteriously as they appeared. Light attracts this species,
and they may often be found clinging to a curtain near an open window. The
forewings of H. scrofa are subject to quite a deal of variation, as far as colour
and markings are concerned.

DOWLING AND HAINES 3

12. Hippotion celerio L. Silver-striped Hawk. Another very common, but
beautiful, hawk, to be observed on the wing for a greater length of time before
retiring for the winter than the previous species. Larvae have been found feeding
on Grape vine, Rosea, and “Wild Grape.”

13. Theretra oldenlandiae firmata Walker. Silver-striped Green-Hawk. Fairly
common from December to February. Mostly attracted to Verbena, Phlox,
Weigelia, Bignonia and Lupin flowers during dusk. This species is also readily
attracted to light. The very striking black and yellow caterpillars feed upon quite
a variety of plants, these being Godartia, Clarkia, Fuschia, Wild Grape vine,
Bignonia and one of the Arum Lilies.

14. Theretra nessus Drury. Golden-striped Hawk. Three specimens of this
splendid hawk were taken at light about eight years ago.

15. Theretra clotho celato Butler. The Barred Brown. Another very fine hawk,
a single example of which was taken at light about the same period as the previous
species. Neither 7. nessus or T. clotho have been observed since.

Division Rhopalocera.
Family Papilionidae. Swallowtails.

1. Eurycus cressida cressida Fabricius. Big Greasy. This northern species has
occurred on three occasions. The first, a male in very good condition, was taken
as it settled on the flowers of a Weigelia on 11th October, 1958. The second, a
perfect female, was caught after it had settled on Orange blossoms on the morning
of 22nd October, 1958. On both occasions the mornings were very hot with a
westerly wind blowing. The third specimen, a male, was observed flying near the
river on the morning of 13th October, 1961.

2. Papilio sarpedon choredon Felder. Blue Triangle. Rather scarce until the
summer of 1959, when a number were observed, but as most of them were in a
worn condition, no attempt was made to net them. A number of eggs and cater-
pillars have been found on the young leaves of Camphor Laurel trees. This
butterfly appears to be quite common in Dungog, a town 9 miles to the south,
though until recent years very few specimens have been seen at Bandon Grove.

3. Papilio macleayanus Leach. Green Swallowtail. Only ten specimens have
been taken, and it is therefore by no means a common butterfly. It was somewhat
more numerous during the season of 1959, when several were observed in the
garden. In this district, however, P. macleayanus seems to prefer gullies, where
it delights in hovering over the blooms of the Rosewood trees and Blackthorn
bushes. This true swallowtail is also attracted to thickets of Lantana growing along
the banks of the rivers.

4. Papilio aegeus aegeus Donovan. Orchard Swallowtail. Fairly common, though
in some years it is more numerous than in others. The caterpillars have been
found feeding on Citrus trees and on a native shrub, the leaves of which gave a
very strong smell of citron when crushed.

5. Papilio anactus Macleay. Dingy Swallowtail. This butterfly, with its gliding
flight, is always plentiful each year. It favours the leaves of the Common Lemon
tree on which to deposit its eggs.

6. Papilio demoleus sthenelus Macleay. Chequered Swallowtail. Until the season
of 1959, only five specimens had been taken. Since then, however, the species has
become more common, and larvae found feeding on Psoralia, have been bred out.
Family Pieridae. Jezabels, Whites and Yellows.

7. Delia nigrina Fabricius. Common Painted White. This attractive butterfly
is usually fairly common during late autumn, and may be seen frequenting the
flowers of the Loquat trees. At Fosterton, some miles to the east of Brandon
Grove, the species occurs in greater numbers. This is probably due to the greater
quantity of Mistletoe, the food-plant of the species, that occurs in that district.

8. Delias aganippe Donovan. Wood White. Mostly observed when the Silky
Oaks are in bloom, and then only on rare occasions, six specimens in all having
been captured over the years. Although there are a number of Wild Cherry trees
growing in the district, the caterpillars of this butterfly have, as yet, not been
found.

a HAWK-MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES

9. Delias harpalyce Donovan. Imperial White. Very scarce. About twelve years
ago a freshly emerged female was watched, and after she had dried her wings in
the rays of the morning sun, was captured. Not a single specimen has been
recorded since.

10. Delias argenthona argenthona Fabricius. Northern Painted White. A female
in fairly good condition was taken as it rested on a Guava tree during the summer
of 1949. (cf. “Proceedings of the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,”
1957-58, page 27.) A second specimen, a female in a rather battered, though
recognizable condition, was caught on the 22nd February, 1962, as it flew slowly
across the countryside in a westerly direction. On the 3rd March, 1962, a third
specimen, a male in perfect condition, was caught after it had visited the flowers
in the garden.

11. Anaphaeis java teutonia Fabricius. Caper White. Together with the Milk-weed
Butterfly, Capers are one of the commonest of the larger butterflies. During the
summer months they are to be seen in hundreds, frequenting particular gullies,
where they breed on the Wild Orange bushes. If one walks past these bushes
clouds of the butterflies rise into the air, only to settle once again when all is
quiet.

12. Catopsilia pyranthe pythias Waterhouse and Lyell. Common Migrant. Each
year, usually about February, this migrating species makes its appearance. An
interesting form, known as C. p. lacteola, occurs during April but these never
frequent the district for any length of time.

13. Catopsilia pomona pomona form crocale Fabricius. Lemon Migrant.
Although Lemon Migrants have been seen on various occasions Over the years,
up until 1962 no specimens had been captured, and so positive identification was
not possible. On 10th January, 1962, however, a single specimen, a female in
perfect condition, was captured and it was found to possess the black antennae
which are characteristic of the form crocale.

14. Appias paulina ega Boisduval. Common Albatross. Until 1959, this migratory
species had not been recorded. During January and February of that year, nine
specimens were captured and in January and February of 1962, this species was
again quite prevalent.

15. Elodina parthia Hewitson. Chalk White. A dainty species, rarely seen in the
garden. It is quite common, however, in nearby gullies where its food-plant, the
Wild Orange, grows.

16. Elodina egnatia angulipennis Lucas. Pearl White. Another species which
deposits its eggs on the tender young shoots of the Wild Orange. Both the Chalk
White and the more fragile Pearl White like to frolic about the Rosewood trees
aug they frequently rest high up, and out of reach of the net, on the dark green
eaves.

17. Huphina perimale scyllara Macleay. Australian Gull. On 3rd September, 1959,
a single female was captured at Bandon Grove. A number of specimens were
seen in this same locality on the 3rd and 4th March, 1962, and three specimens
were captured on the 3rd March, 1962, in the adjoining district of Fosterton.

18. Terias smilax Donovan. Small Yellow. A fairly common butterfly, especially
along the river banks, where they make an attractive sight as they hover over the
long, green grass. The Small Yellow occurs each year during March and April,
although an occasional specimen is sometimes seen as late as May. Once this
butterfly begins to appear, it is quite common.

19. Terias hecabe sulphurata Butler. Common Yellow. A much more robust
species than 7. smilax, and also more common. It may be found flitting joyfully
over the long meadow grass in secluded places along the river banks.

20. Terias libythea zoraide Felder. No-brand Yellow. This species was first
recorded in this district in 1959, and between the 7th and 21st of February of
that year six specimens, three of each sex, were captured. Two more specimens
were caught during November and December 1959, and then no more were
recorded till 1962. During February and March of that year this species was
extremely common.

DOWLING AND HAINES 5

21. Pieris rapae Donovan. Small White. Known locally as the “Cabbage Moth,”
this introduced species has strongly established itself.

Family Danaidae. Milkweed Butterflies.

22. Danaus plexippus L. The Wanderer or Monarch. Of all the butterflies, the
Wanderer is the most plentiful. The reason for this is probably due to the large
quantities of Wild Cotton (Asclepias curassavica), food-plant of the species, which
is to be found growing in the gullies and on the ridges. On occasions hundreds
of these big butterflies have been observed clinging to the leaves on Iron-bark
trees, in the vicinity of which grew a large patch of Wild Cotton. When disturbed
they flew around for a while, only to settle again on the leaves, remaining there
until the next disturbance, when the same performance would be repeated. For
several days prior to dispersing, they were found frequenting the same group of
Iron-barks. Wanderers have been recorded on the wing during all months of the
year.

23. Danaus chrysippus petilia Stoll. Lesser Wanderer. Another very common
species, especially in March, April and May. It is difficult to breed them out
from caterpillars collected during these months, as they are very heavily
parasitized. Larvae gathered before March are usually not parasitized. Lesser
Wanderers are greatly attracted to the bright Zinnia flowers, and also to the vine
Parsonia straminea, a native climber, widespread in coastal districts.

24. Danaus melissa hamata Macleay. Blue Wanderer. Only occasionally observed.
The several specimens collected have all been tattered and worn. These stragglers
from more northern localities are mainly seen during February and March.

25. Euploea corinna corinna Fabricius. Common Crow. Extremely scarce at
Bandon Grove, and more likely to be seen in Dungog. One specimen was
captured many years ago, and two others were taken on 4th November, 1959 and
4th April, 1960.

Family Nymphalidae. Brush-footed Butterflies.

26. Hypolimnas bolina nerina Fabricius. Royal Emperor. By far the finest
butterfly occurring in the district. This species is attracted to bright flowers,
especially zinnias, and may then be caught with a quick side sweep of the net.
Royal Emperors possess the habit of returning often to a favoured leaf or twig,
where they will settle head downwards, and expand their wings to the rays of
the sun. It has been noticed that the females frequently settle on the ground.
Although little variation is to be found in the males, striking aberrations occur
not infrequently in the female sex. There appears to be several distinct forms,
with modifications of each now and then making an appearance. The food-plant
is Paddy’s Lucerne; but as yet the caterpillars have not been found at Bandon
Grove. On one occasion, a female was watched as she deposited an egg; it was,
however, later destroyed by ants. It will be interesting to see whether this
aristocratic butterfly has the same depraved habits as those possessed by its
cousin, the Purple Emperor, Apatura iris L. a denizen of the English woods.
This most noble species is lured from its lofty flight about the tree-tops, to within
range of the net, by placing in the vicinity a dead cat, or hare, in the last
stages of putrification. If this bait can be laid in a wayside puddle, so much the
better.

27. Pyrameis itea Fabricius. Australian Admiral. The Admirals occur quite
freely each year, there being plenty of Stinging Nettles to choose from on which
to lay their eggs. It has been observed quenching its thirst on ripe grapes which
had been pecked by the Silver-eyes (Zosterops lateralis). As this butterfly is a
hibernating species, it is often observed on the wing during sunny days in winter.
28. Pyrameis cardui kershawi McCoy. Australian Painted Lady. An extremely
difficult butterfly to capture. It is very plentiful during the summer months, and
delights in visiting the flowers of the White Stattice. Caterpillars have been found
feeding on a thistle, known locally as the Star Thistle, and also on the little
Golden Everlasting.

29. Precis villida calybe Fabricius. Meadow Argus. A common species, both in
the garden and in the surrounding fields. It possesses a peculiar flat-winged
type of flight, and is most difficult to capture; but during the late afternoon when

6 HAWK-MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES

the air is cooler, Meadow Argus butterflies become sluggish, and can then be
quite easily collected as they flap heavily from one patch of grass to another.
The larvae feed on a variety of plants, namely Blue Weed, Wild Verbena, Aus-
tralian Centaury, Lambs Tongue, Antirhinum and Plantains. Blue Weed
(Verbena bonariensis) and Centaury are the two plants greatly favoured.

30. Eriboea pyrrhus sempronius Fabricius. Tailed Emperor. A few of these
strong flying “giants” are recorded each summer. Unfortunately, it is difficult
to capture specimens with the four tails intact. They are very often attracted
to over-ripened fruit, especially Persimmons, on which they will alight to suck
the fermented juices. Tailed Emperors are also attracted to a white sheet left
hanging from a line. The striking horned caterpillars have been located feeding
on two Wattles, Acacia decurrens and Acacia maidensi and on Kurrajong trees.

31. Acraea andromacha Fabricius. Lesser Glasswing. Until recently this species
was rarely observed in this district. Since 1958, however, numbers have been
captured as they flew in an unobtrusive manner about the pumpkin and lantana

flowers. Specimens are easily netted as they glide in gentle flight along sheltered
lanes.

Family Satyridae. Browns and Ringlets.

32. Heteronympha merope merope Fabricius. Common Brown. Fairly common
from November to April. Localities at which they had occurred plentifully during
past years, were practically abandoned in the 1958-59 season.

33. Heteronympha mirifica Butler. Glade Brown. Very scarce; only three females
have been captured. The males, which are on the wing much earlier in the year
than the females, have never been observed at Bandon Grove.

34. Hypocysta metirius Butler. Common Ringlet. A common butterfly during
February and March.

35. Ypthima arctous Fabricius. Australian Gate-keeper. Frequents grassy areas
and is very abundant.

36. Xenica acantha acantha Donovan. Ringed Xenica. Rather scarce, a few only
observed each year. They appear to favour the hillsides in this district.

Family Lycaenidae. Blues, Coppers and Hairstreaks.

37. Candalides absimilis Felder. Pencilled Blue. From September to December
this swift flying butterfly is often observed visiting the sweet scented blooms of
the Pittosporum tree. The females are at once distinguished from the males by
a white patch on their fore-wings.

38. Hypochrysops ignita ignita Leach. Fiery Jewel. Two of these beautiful little
butterflies have been recorded, one of which was captured. Both were paying
attention to the flowers of the Black Thorn (Bursaria spinosa).

39. Nacaduba lineata Murray. Hairy Lineblue. Prior to the season of 1959,
this species had not been observed. Specimens have since been taken from
February to early May, and eggs and larvae have been found during February
and March on the buds of Ehretia acuminata, a native Peach found growing on
the edges of brush forests. The eggs are deposited on the tight buds of this
plant, and when these buds burst, the larvae hatch out and feed upon the
cramy-white flowers. By the time the flowering period is over the caterpillars
are fully fed and ready to pupate. It is extremely difficult to pick out the larvae,
as their colour matches exactly the flowers to which they cling. Although most
of our captures were made in the vicinity of the food-plant, the Wild Crepe
Myrtle also appears to be attractive to this species of butterfly.

40. Nacaduba biocellata Felder. Double-spotted Lineblue. Three specimens have
been taken on Black Thorn flowers and others have been taken on Wattle
flowers.

41. Nacaduba ancrya florinda Butler. Speckled Lineblue. October appears to be
the month when males of this species are first on the wing, the females not
occurring until April and then only for a brief stay. Males have been seen as
late as May. Most specimens were netted as they frequent the flowers of a
climbing vine (Parsonia straminia).

DOWLING AND HAINES 7

42. Nacaduba felderi Murray. Felder’s Lineblue. Once again the males of this
species appear on the wing long before the females, the former being noticed in
February and the latter in April. Most captures are made when the butterflies
alight on the Parsonia Vine.

43. Ogyris amaryllis amaryllis Hewitson. Amaryllis Azure. A single tattered
example of this butterfly was captured at Fosterton, during the 1954 season.
On the 15th February, 1962, following a period of strong southerly winds, a
second specimen, a male in a battered condition, was found resting on the ground.

44. Ogyris abrota Westwood. Dark-purple Azure. This is a very local species
and is only found where its food-plant, Mistletoe, occurs. Odd specimens have
been observed in very restricted areas where Mistletoe growing on Gum-trees
occurs, and a single example was once seen flying around a River Oak tree on
which Mistletoe had become established. One female has been captured, and a
male has been bred from a pupa found under loose bark of a Gum-tree on which
Mistletoe was growing.

45. lalmenus ictinus Hewitson. Ictinus Hairstreak. These electric coloured
Hairstreaks are plentiful from October to March. The butterflies deposit their
eggs on the Black Wattle (Acacia decurrens) and on two other species of Acacia.
The caterpillars are always attended by Red Meat Ants, and although there are
many eggs and larvae, there is never a corresponding number of pupae. It is
interesting to note that the butterflies have never been found any great distance
from the trees on which they breed.

46. Neolucia serpentata Herrich-Schaeffer. Chequered Blue. Only three specimens
have been taken, the first in September, 1958, the second in January, 1959, and
the third in January, 1962. All of these specimens were in fairly fresh condition.

47. Syntarucus pseudocassius Murray. Plumbago Blue. A common species that
is only found where its food-plant, Plumbago, occurs.

48. Lampides boeticus damoetes Fabricius. Long-tailed Blue. Occasionally
observed in the garden. The eggs and larvae have been found on Lupins.

49. Zizeeria labradus labradus Godart. Common Grass-blue. During the summer
months scores of these little butterflies occur. When the Lucerne is in flower, they
swarm in hundred around the blooms in company with the bees. This is by far
the commonest small species of butterfly in this district.

50. Zizeeria lysimon karsandra Moore. Dark Grass-blue. One female was
captured on 4th May, 1959. This is the second most southern record for this
butterfly, which is usually regarded as a northern species. (cf. “Proceedings of
the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,” 1958-59, page 110.)

51. Paralucia pyrodiscus Rosenstock. Dull Copper. Although Black Thorn, the
food-plant of P. pyrodiscus is fairly common, there has so far been only one
capture of this butterfly. It was taken while resting on the ground, which is
unusual, and was in fairly good condition.

Family Hesperiidae. Skippers.

52. Phoenicops beata Hewitson. Common Red-eye. A specimen was captured
at dusk several years ago while it rested on a verandah rafter.

53. Netrocoryne repanda repanda Felder. Eastern Flat. Two specimens were
captured during 1957-58; both were taken at about mid-day, and on the same
Geranium plant. Several specimens have been taken since then in near-by gullies
where they were flying around the bushes.

54. Traperzites symmomus symmomus Hubner. Symmomus Skipper. A large and
beautiful species, which is occasionally taken on Lantana flowers.

55. Traperzites petalia Hewitson. Common White-spot Skipper. This interesting
skipper has been taken in the adjoining district of Fosterton. It is attracted to
the flowers of the Black Thistle, commonly known as Scotch Thistle.

56. Toxidia parvula Plotz. Parvula Skipper. Found frequenting the sheltered
gullies. The flowers to which they are most attracted are those of Parsonia
straminia and Ehretia acuminata.

8 HAWK-MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES

57. Toxidia doubledayi Felder. Doubleday’s Skipper. This fairly common skipper
is usually attracted to the sweet-scented Black Thorn flowers.

58. Toxidia leucostigma leucostigma Meyrick and Lower. White-brand Skipper.
This species is found inhabiting quiet gullies.

59. Toxidia peroni Latreille. Dingy Garden Skipper. Often to be observed in
the gullies, and in the garden, where it will settle on almost any plant.

60. Taractrocera papyria papyria Boisduval. White-marked Grass Skipper. Three
specimens of this skipper were captured during the summer months of 1959
and 1960.

61. Padraona flavovittata flavovittata Latreille. Yellow-banded grass Skipper.
Mostly found in grassy fields. Though similar in appearance to the next species,
it may be separated at once by a glance at the underside of the hindwings which
are greenish, those of P. hespera being brownish-orange, never green. The food-
plant is Couch grass.

62. Padraona hespera hespera Waterhouse. Common Grass Skipper. A very
common skipper inhabiting similar localities to the previous species. The larvae
feed on Grass.

63. Astycus kreffti ancilla Herrich-Schaeffer. Greenish Skipper. This species
sometimes frequents the flowers of the Lantana, White Stattice and Buddleia.
The larvae feed upon Blady Grass (Imperata arundinacea).

LOCATION OF SPECIMENS.

The specimens on which the above notes are based are in the authors’
collections.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT.

Sincere thanks are due to D. K. McAlpine, M.Sc., Assistant Curator of
Insects at the Australian Museum, for allowing us to compare, for the purpose of
identification, our Hawk Moth captures with those in the Museum’s collection.

Australian Runcinacea (Mollusca: Gastropoda)
By RoBERT BURN
(3 Nantes Street, Newtown, Geelong, Victoria.)

The coastlines of Australia are particularly rich in opisthobranchiate
gastropod molluscs, those of Victoria and New South Wales being the best known.
Hardly a collecting trip passes, however, without the discovery of one or more
new species, or new records, for some particular zoogeographical area. The
present two new species are such discoveries made recently by the writer and
friends.

This work has been carried out as part of a comprehensive study of the
Opisthobranchia of Australia. The writer wishes to thank in particular the
Trustees of the Science and Industry Endowment Fund, C.S.I.R.O., Melbourne,
for a grant-in-aid of this overall study. Thanks also go to Miss Joyce Shaw,
Librarian, National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne, for unfailing help with
references, and to Mr. Charles Gabriel, Melbourne, for similar help. The material
upon which this paper is based has been presented to the National Museum of
Victoria, Melbourne (referred to as N.M.V. in text).

Runcina australis spec. nov. and Ilbia ilbi gen. et spec. nov. are the first
records of the Cephalaspidean suborder Runcinacea (= Peltacea; Odhner 1939,
p. 6) for the whole of Australia. From New Zealand, Odhner described
Runcinella zelandica as a new genus and species (1924, pp. 46-51, pl. 1, fig. 30-32,
text-figs. 6-9). There are two Japanese species at present described and another
has been found once at Mauritius. Beyond these few records, the range of the
Runincinacea is on both coasts of the North Atlantic and in the Mediterranean,
where five species in all have been found.

From this list of species, it is at once obvious that the Runcinacea form a
very small suborder. Comparable with this is the fact that the largest species
is only 8 mm. long (Runcinida elioti) and the majority are less than 4 mm. long.
Unlike the remaining suborders of the Cephalaspidea, the Runcinacea do not
have the dorsum transversely divided into two shields and the foot is without
lateral extensions or parapodia. Furthermore, the anus is terminal in its position
under the posterior mantle and always a little to the right of the median line.
The branchia is small and around or to the right of the anus, or absent. A shell
is present in J/dica and Runcina but is absent in Runcinella, Runcinida and
Ilbia; when present it is haliotiform, very small and terminal in position. There
are no cephalic tentacles; oral tentacles are present only in Ildica. Jaws are
present; the radula has a broad rhachidian and one or two lateral teeth. Gastral
(triturating) plates are present in the gizzard. The female genital organs have a
bursa copulatrix, the male organs an elongate prostate gland. Opaline glands
are present in various forms in three genera (Runcina, Runcinella, Ilbia).

Odhner (1939, pp. 6-7) suggested the division of the cephalaspidean Opistho-
branchia into four suborders, each of which is very clearly defined. The
Runcinacea were separated off by their lack of parapodia and by the presence or
absence of a very rudimentary shell. Their greatest difference, as mentioned above,
is the undivided dorsum of the body, a characteristic which stands them far and
above the three more primitive suborders. However the genital organs, in
particular the external seminal groove, are typically cephalaspidean and prevent
the suborder from being too far removed from its position among the Cephalas-
pidea. According to Odhner’s system the two species described below are classified

as follows:
Class GASTROPODA
Subclass Opisthobranchia
Order CEPALASPIDEA
Suborder Runcinacea
Family Runcinidae
Subfamily Runcininae

Runcina australis spec. nov.
Subfamily Tibinae subfam. nov.
Ilbia ilbi gen. et spec. nov.

AUSTRALIAN RUNCINACEA

BURN 11

DESCRIPTION OF GENERA AND SPECIES
Runcina Forbes 1851

To this genus belong those Runcinacea with an internal shell, a reduced
branchia consisting of a few (3-5) pinnulae just to the right of the anus, and a
radula with a multidentate bicuspid rhachidian and one denticulate philinid
lateral tooth each side (one species has a degenerate radula in which neither rows
nor teeth can be counted, i.e. R. setoensis Baba, 1954, p. 373, fig. 1, F, G, H).
An elongate prostate gland and a terminal seminal vesicle are present on the
male copulatory organ. The colour of the known species is either black or dark
green with a lighter marginal band around the dorsum and foot.

Type by monotypy: R. coronata (Quatrefages 1844) = R. hancocki Forbes
1851. R. coronata was originally described as the type (by monotypy) of Pelta
Quatrefages (1844, p. 151), which was preoccupied by Pelta Beck (1837, Index
Moll., p. 100).

Runcina australis spec. nov.
Figures 1-11

The living animal is elongate oval in shape, widest at mid-length and rather
highly arched across the dorsum. The larger specimen measured 3.5 mm. long
and 1 mm. broad. The foot is as wide as the dorsum, the anterior edge is
thickened and minutely notched in the median line; the tail is a quarter of the
total length, the tail tip is narrowly rounded. The dorsum is smooth, broadly
rounded behind, narrower in front and shallowly concave in the truncate anterior
margin. The overhang or mantle of the dorsum is very narrow but is continuous
all round the body except in front where the dorsum curves down and back into
the head and mouth. Oral tentacles are absent. The eyes are lateral (Fig. 2)
and do not show dorsally as in R. coronata (Pilsbry, 1896, pl. 68, fig. 35, 37, 41)
and R. setoensis (Baba 1954, p. 374, fig. 1, A).

The anus (Fig. 3, a) is just to the right of the median line in its terminal
position between the mantle and the tail. The three minute pinnulae (3))
comprising the branchia are clustered together to the right of the anus; they do
not encroach upon the anus as in R. coronata (Alder and Hancock, 1846, pl. 4,
fig. 4) nor are they as large. Below and in front of the branchia is the common
genital aperture (3c) and leading anteriorly from this the narrow seminal groove
(3s). The anterior end of the seminal groove is in front of and below the right
eye where it enters the male aperture (Fig. 11, wu).

The body colour is greenish-black (like liquorice), the foot and mantle
margins are an ashy yellow. The anterior corners of the dorsum and a small
triangular area over the internal shell are similarly ashy yellow. There is no
spotting whatsoever. The branchia is whitish, the sole of the foot is paler
than the dorsum.

The preserved paratype is 1.5 mm. long and 1.2 mm. broad; the colour is
opaque white with a subepidermally pigmented black dorsum. The large black
eyes show through the anterior dorsum and a few larger cells with hyaline centres
are visible from deep within the integument of the posterior part of the dorsum.
The posterior of the dorsum is trilobed (Fig. 4) as a result of the forward

Fig. 1-11. Runcina australis spec. nov.
Fig. 1. Dorsal view of living animal, holotype specimen.

Fig. 2. Lateral view of same.

Fig. 3. Right lateral posterior of same.
Fig. 4. Dorsal view of preserved paratype.
Fig. 5. Buccal lining, jaws and radula.
Fig. 6. Radula from above.

Fig. 7. Lateral tooth.

Fig. 8. Gizzard plate.

Fig. 9. Detail of surface of same.

Fig. 10. Dorsal view of shell.

Fig. 11. Male copulatory organs.

AUSTRALIAN RUNCINACEA

12

BURN 13

contraction of the intestine and anus. With a large lobe either side of the smaller
median one, the rear end of the paratype is now very similar to that of R. prasina
(Morch 1863) (Bergh, 1872, pl. 24, fig. 27; Pilsbry, 1896, pl. 68, fig. 42) thus
making this characteristic of the latter very suspect. In both the preserved
material and R. prasina the tail is severely drawn forward until it is short and
broadly rounded.

The buccal mass (Fig. 5) is enclosed within a cylindrical sheath of thin
cuticle (y) and within this the jaws (j) and the radular strip (r) are readily observed.
The jaws are dark red in colour, matt in texture from their composition of
minute pointed elements; their shape is squatly triangular, not elongate flask-
shaped as in R. setoensis (Baba 1954, p. 374, fig. 1, 4). The radular strip is
dull yellowish and fairly evenly curved. When removed and flattened, about 30
rows of teeth were counted, each row with the formula 1.1.1. The rhachidian
(Fig. 6, g) is narrow with a high bilobed cusp. The laterals (6 k) have broad
bases with a somewhat philinid swan-necked cusp minutely denticulated along
the inner edge.

The gizzard contains four hyaline plates (Fig. 8) each 0.1 mm. long within
a muscular dilation of the alimentary tract. Their shape is not unlike that of
R. setoensis (Baba loc. cit., fig. 1, C) but the base is not nearly so curved.
There are 10-11 pairs of irregular denticles (Fig. 9) on each plate; these
correspond with the plates in R. calaritana Colosi 1915 in the number of denticle-
bearing laminae and the lateral shape but disagree in the less pronounced
denticles.

The male copulatory organ (Fig. 11) is 1 mm. long; it extends from the
right anterior male aperture to the left beneath the alimentary tract and then
backwards to very near the female glands, thus occupying an even greater space
than in R. calaritana (Pelseneer, 1894, pl. 7, fig. 59). Ectally the organ comprises
a small atrium with a constricted aperture (uw). Into the atrium projects a short
conical penis (z) which surmounts the thick sphincter muscle at the ectal end
of the duct from the prostate gland. This duct (t) is narrow and twisted and is
absent from R. calaritana (Colosi 1915, p. 25, fig. 16; Vayssiére, 1883, pl. 2,
fig. 13) but corresponds to that of I/ldica nana (Bergh 1889, p. 872, pl. 82, fig.
37 b). The prostate gland (d) not cylindriform as in R. calaritana (loc. cit.),
is fusiform with thick glandular walls and a narrow lumen. The inner end of
the prostate gland narrows not to a sphincter as in R. calaritana but to a slender
neck. Beyond the neck is the irregularly fusiform seminal vesicle (dx) with thinner
softer walls and a larger lumen than the prostate. Its contents are yellowish
viscid matters containing sectionally ovoid circular cells packed closely entally
but further apart ectally. The seminal vesicle is very much larger than its counter-
part in R. calaritana (loc. cit.; Pelseneer, 1894, pl. 7, fig. 59) and somewhat
resembles the long prostate gland of Runcinella zelandica (Odhner 1924, pp.
49-50, fig. 8) in its shape and form of connection to the prostate gland.

The female gland mass has a single large white stalk-like cylindrical vesicle
with a curled-over distal end. This is probably the bursa copulatrix (after Odhner,
1924, pp. 48-49, fig. 7-8, b) as it opens directly into the common genital aperture.
(Fig. 3, c).

Fig. 12-20. Ilbia ilbi gen. et spec. nov.

Fig. 12. Dorsal view of living animal, holotype specimen.
Fig. 13. Ventral view of same.

Fig. 14. Lateral view of preserved holotype.

Fig. 15. Labium, jaws and radula.

Fig. 16. Radula.

Fig. 17. Opaline glandulae.

Fig. 18. Gizzard plate.

Fig. 19. Male copulatory organs.

Fig. 20. Bursa copulatrix.

14 AUSTRALIAN RUNCINACEA

From its terminal position over the anus (Fig. 4, x), the 0.1 mm. long shell
was dissected out. Roughly shaped as in R. setoensis (Baba 1954, p. 373, fig.
1, B), the shell (Fig. 10) appears to be not as thin nor as elongate; it is
calcareous.

Material examined: 1 specimen (holotype) from Point Danger, Torquay,
Victoria, 2nd April 1960, collected by R. Burn, N.M.V. reg. No. F21,270; 1
specimen (dissected paratype) from the north side of Long Reef, New South
Wales, 11th June 1961, collected by P. Colman, N.M.V. reg. No. F23,066.

Habitat: The holotype was found crawling among the roots of the green
alga, Caulerpa scalpelliformis, and various minute brown seaweeds, on the side
of a stone in a channel at the edge of the reef at Torquay. The paratype was
found among the branches of a clumping green alga, Valoniopsis, which grows
on the sides of rocks and walls exposed to the sea at Long Reef.

Discussion of Runcina australis

Odhner (1924, p. 51) listed five species as comprising the genus Runcina.
To these Baba (1937, 1954) added two Japanese species. one of which (R. elioti
Baba, 1937) is here removed from Runcina and made the type species of a new
genus, Runcinida, for reasons given below. With the addition of the new species
described above, the genus has seven species. Certain of these species, however,
are undoubtedly identical. But the primary concern is the recognition of the
characteristics of the valid type species of the genus and the correct name of the
Mediterranean species. The type species is R. coronata (Quatrefages, 1844, p.
151, = R. hancocki Forbes, 1851, p. 612) from off the coast of Brittany and
England. Unfortunately its anatomy is not known in detail but the excellent
figures of the living animals (Alder and Hancock, 1846, pp. 289-292, pl. 4,
fig. 1-7) provide a firm basis for the future recognition of the species.

However when the Mediterranean R. coronata (Vayssiére, 1883, pp. 6-28,
pl. 1, fig. 1-12, pl. 2, fig. 13-22; 1885, pp. 104-106, pl. 5, fig. 126-129; Pelseneer,
1894, pp. 17-18, pl. 7, fig. 56-61, non text fig. F which is the type species) is
compared with the type species, obvious differences are at once outstanding.
Both Quatrefages’ figure of R. coronata (Pilsbry, 1896, pl. 68, fig. 35) and
those of Alder and Hancock show that a colour area extends across the anterior
of the dorsum and backwards along either side until shortly behind the eyes
where these colour areas turn medianly and join. Very definite colour areas
encircle each eye and moreover the eyes show strongly through the dorsum.
In the Mediterranean species (Vayssiére, 1883, pl. 1, fig. 1; 1885, pl. 5, fig. 126)
the colour areas are limited to the anterior lateral corners of the dorsum only
and do not join across the dorsum either in front of or behind the eyes, which
it must be emphasised show very weakly dorsally. Another point of difference
that is readily apparent is the shapes of the dorsa. In R. coronata, the sides of
the dorsum are parallel from end to end while in the Mediterranean species the
dorsum is widest at the second third and the anterior corners are a little expanded
laterally. Of the internal anatomy only the gastral plates can be compared;
R. coronata has six laminae (Alder and Hancock, 1846, p. 290. pl. 4, fig. 6)
and the Mediterranean species has 10-11 laminae on each plate. Even with only
these points of difference available, it is impossible to retain the use of the type
name for the Mediterranean species. From the literature it is obvious that this
latter species was re-described as R. calaritana (Colosi 1915, pp. 1-35, fig. 1-18);
special agreement is shown in the gastral plates and the male copulatory organs,
the former characterized by the sharp laminae and the latter by the short terminal
seminal vesicle at the base of a long cylindriform prostate gland (loc. cit., p. 25,
fig. 16). Pruvot-Fol (1954, p. 55) had already suggested that R. calaritana
was a synonym of the Mediterranean species and pointed out that the earlier
R. capreenis (Mazzarelli, 1893) could also be the same species. Unfortunately
the original description of this last species is not available in Australia at the
present time.

BURN 15

The valid species of Runcina are, then, as listed below:
. coronata (Quatrefages, 1844). European Atlantic.
. prasina (Morch, 1863). West Indies.

capreenis (Mazzarelli, 1893). Mediterranean.

. inconspicua Verrill 1901. West North Atlantic.

. calaritana Colosi 1915. Mediterranean.

. setoensis Baba 1954. Japan.

. australis spec. nov. South-eastern Australia.

by Po Pe Pe

by

australis must be grouped with those Runcina in which the dorsum is
pyriform (broadest at the second third of its length) and the eyes show weakly
dorsally. This group is typified by R. calaritana, from which the new species
can be separated by a different colour pattern, details of the shape of the radula
and a much longer seminal vesicle, shorter prostate gland and longer efferent
duct. R. coronata typifies the second group of species with its strongly showing
eyes and near parallel dorsum. To this group also belongs R. setoensis which
differs in its very elongate shape, degenerate radula and 10-11 laminae. R.
inconspicua has a broad foot much wider than the dorsum and R. prasina very
prominent laminae upon the gastral plates. R. prasina and R. inconspicua have
dorsally showing eyes and near parallel sides of the dorsum. Should both species
be refound, it is not impossible that they will prove to be one and the same species.
The trilobed posterior dorsum of R. prasina is as mentioned earlier, a very suspect
characteristic in the light of preserved material of R. australis; fresh material
would most likely reveal a rounded posterior dorsum as in R. inconspicua Verrill
(1901, p. 28, pl. 3, fig. 6).

Ilbia gen. nov.

Runcinidae with a wide mantle all round and without any branchia or
branchial vestige to the right or around the anus. Jaws present; radula with
tricuspidate rhachidian and one denticulate bifid lateral tooth each side. Shell
absent. Tail of foot with a conspicuous pedal furrow. Male copulatory organs
with a short prostate gland. A large posterior dorsal opaline gland present.

Type species: I/bia ilbi spec. nov.

Ilbia ilbi spec. nov.
Figures 12-20

Alive the single specimen was 2.7 mm. long, 0.9 mm. broad and 0.75 mm.
high. The dorsum (Fig. 12) is nearly square anteriorly although shallowly concave
in the front margin, it is narrower than the foot and rounded posteriorly. The
edge of the dorsum (mantle) is wide and overhangs all round except in front
where the dorsum curves down into the head. The mantle has thickened edges
which are curled downwards and touch the upturned foot edges, thus forming a
funnel along either side of the body. The foot (Fig. 13) is rounded anteriorly
and the actual front margin is shallowly concave; the edges are a little upturned;
the tail comprises nearly one third the total length of the animal, it is narrowly
rounded behind. The sole has a posterior middle-line groove, the pedal furrow
(p) which extends forward from the tip to about the fourth fifth of the body
length. The mouth (v) is a narrow vertical slit in the anterio-ventral dorsum.
The small anus is high up under the posterior mantle, a very little to the right
of the middle-line. There is no branchia. Anteriorly in the fold between the
mantle and foot, there is on each side a distinctive elongate oval area of raised
coloured flesh (h) which appears to be homologous with Hancock’s organ in
other suborders of Cephalaspidea. The eyes show dorsally and are small in
size; immediately antero-laterally of each eye is a deep cylindrical pit leading
to the eye. On the posterior right of the dorsum is a large quadrangular shallowly
hollowed area (Fig. 14, 0); this is the position of the opaline gland.

The entire dorsum, sides and sole of the foot are covered with vibratile
cilia. This enables the animal to crawl along on a flat surface equally well either
on the sole or the dorsum, or on the side when both surfaces are used. Apparently
the cilia within the funnel-like fold on each side of the body divert the oxygen
laden water to absorption areas within the lateral folds.

The body colour is pale purple, the viscera and eyes showing black dorsally.

AUSTRALIAN RUNCINACEA

BURN 17

The dorsum, sides of the foot and the sole are all patterned with yellow patches.
On the dorsum there is a middle-line series of five longitudinal patches which
attain neither the anterior nor the posterior edges of the dorsum. On either
side of this but only in the rear part is a shorter series of smaller patches, again
longitudinal. Lateral to these series is yet another series of patches, this time
set “obliquely to the longitudinal, across the posterior of the dorsum these series
join and form an even curve. Around the very posterior of the dorsum is a row
of patches which carry forward discontinuously along both lateral edges. Four
pairs of patches are distinctively placed behind and in front of the eyes (Fig. 12).
The sides of the foot have a few large patches, submarginally positioned around
the edges and the tail crest bears a yellow streak. The sole (fig. 13) has patches
submarginally (showing through from above) and four longitudinal series of
epidermal patches, the median two series of which are connected subepidermally
by a narrow strip of minute white pigment cells. Similar white pigment cells
form areas on the dorsum, an elongate curved pyriform area rear lateral of
each eye and a larger lunate area behind and above the black viscera. The anus
is whitish at its aperture and the Hancock’s organs are reddish orange.

Preserved specimen (Fig. 14) is 1.9 mm. long, 1 mm. broad and 1 mm.
high. The colour is drab greyish-white, the tail and the sole are grey; the area
around the right eye is black and both eyes show as an intense black spot. The
shape has not altered a great deal overall, the tail has shortened a little. The
pedal furrow (Fig. 13, p).is now more prominent. The edges of the foot and
mantle are now more thickened, that of the foot curls over the mantle. The cilia
of the skin are still visible through a medium power microscope, i.e. x40 and
greater.

Fig. 21-22. Ildica nana Bergh 1889.

Fig. 21. Right lateral posterior of animal.

Fig. 22. Radula (both figures adapted from Bergh, 1889).
Fig. 23-24. Runcina calaritana Colosi 1915.

Fig. 23. Right lateral posterior of animal.

Fig. 24. Radula (both figures adapted from Vayssiére, 1883).
Fig. 25-26. Runcinida elioti Baba 1937.

Fig. 25. Right lateral posterior of animal.

Fig. 26. Radula (both figures adapted from Baba 1937).
Fig. 27-28. Runcinella zelandica Odhner 1924.

Fig. 27. Right lateral posterior of animal.

Fig. 28. Radula (both figures adapted from Odhner, 1924).
Fig. 29-30. Ilbia ilbi gen et spec. nov.

Fig. 29. Right lateral posterior of animal.

Fig. 30. Radula.

ABBREVIATIONS
Figs. 1-30.

a — dorsum. m — anus.
b — lJabium. n — branchia.
c — opaline gland. o© — common genital aperture.
d — pedal furrow. p — prostate gland.
dx — eye. q — seminal vesicle.
e — radula. r — lumen of opaline glandulae.
f — seminal grvove. s — female gland mass.
fo — penial coils. t — foot.
fl — atrium. u — flange.
g — mouth. v — rhachidian tooth.
h — shell area. xX — jaw.
j. — cuticularized buccal lining. y — lateral tooth or teeth.
k — penis.

18 AUSTRALIAN RUNCINACEA

The labium (Fig. 15, n) is brown in colour, thickly cuticularized with about
six strong radial grooves about its flange; it lines the inner wall of the mouth and
is attached to the anterior edge of the cuticle bearing the jaws. The jaws (j) are
0.4 mm. long in the major axis, pale yellow in colour, elongate triangularly
oval in shape and composed of large scale-like diamond-shaped elements set
obliquely upon their bases. A few elements of various shapes and sizes are
scattered over the cuticle between the jaws and the radula. The colourless radula
(r), crook-shaped with the neck foremost and 0.7 mm. in length, consists of
25-26 rows of teeth of the formula 1.1.1. The rhachidian is tricuspidate (Fig.
16, g) and has a broad base with wing-like arms; as a whole, the rhachidian is
closer to that of the aplysiid Phyllaplysia, in particular that of Ph. engeli (Marcus
1955, pl. 4, fig. 33, mm) and somewhat that of Ph. lafonti Crosse 1872 (Pilsbry,
1896, pl. 9, fig. 26). The lateral tooth (k) on each side of the rhachidian, is a
combination of the denticulate philinid lateral of Runcina (loc. cit., pl. 68, fig. 36)
and the bifidate cusp of the marginal tooth of Runcinella zelandica Odhner (1924,
p. 46, fig. 6). A thin flange (fl) is present on the rear side of the tooth proper and
its base. The 15-20 denticles on the leading edge of the tooth are larger and stouter
nearer the base; upon the cusp they are smaller, narrower and closer together.

The gizzard plates (Fig. 18) are slightly curved and armed with 8-10 low
blunt transverse laminae, each with two high points. The high points form two
distinct series, one on each side of the middle-line. As usual in the Runcinacea
(Thiele, 1935, p. 1050), four gizzard plates are present.

Anteriorly the genital organs comprise the male copulatory organ (Fig. 19)
which occupies the anterior of the visceral cavity below the buccal mass. This
organ consists of a relatively large atrium (uw) into which the shallow seminal
groove enters. Into the distal portion of the atrium projects the short cylindrical
penis (z) the base of which is contained within the muscular walls of the atrium.
The penis is connected from its basal part by a narrow duct (ft) with lightly
muscled walls and a double spiral in its course to a short dilated penial prolonga-
tion, the prostate gland (d). The walls of this are thick and glandular, the cavity
is spacious. A seminal vesicle, as present in Runcina australis, is lacking.

In the female gland mass, the yellow-orange granular follicles of the
hermaphrodite gland are spread in clusters over the anterior of the colourless
liver. As in Runcina australis and Runcinella zealandica (loc. cit., pp. 48-49,
fig. 7-8 b), a bursa copulatrix (Fig. 20) opens directly into the common genital
aperture; here it is similar to that of the former species in that it has a relatively
short stalk and a curled-over distal end. From the anterior side of the common
genital aperture the seminal groove issues forth and rises up towards the mantle.
Its sides are low ridges rather far apart.

The opaline gland (Fig. 17) whose place of attachment has been mentioned
previously (Fig. 14, 0) in the description of the body, is a large, peculiar structure.
Between 100 and 150 separate glands are present in a compact mass attached
to the inner side of the posterior dorsal surface; many are twisted around others
and all are apparently pervious through minute apertures in the dorsal surface.
Each gland has thick yellowish glandular walls; the lumen of each (e) is narrow
and filled with pale viscid fluid. In shape the glands are elongate fusiform with
somewhat straight sides, the greatest diameter is just below the tip. The tip of
each is bluntly conical. Overall the structure of the opaline gland is very similar
to that of Aplysia punctata (Hoffman, 1932-1939, pp. 470-471, fig. 344, B, fig.
345, A, after Mazzarelli 1889) but is considerably narrower as in Akera bullata
(loc. cit., fig. 344, D, after Perrier and Fischer 1911).

Material examined: 1 specimen (holotype) from Point Lonsdale, Victoria,
10th September 1961, collected by R. Burn and M. Pilbeam, N.M.V. reg. No.
F23,062.

Habitat: The specimen was collected from the alga Enteromorpha (cf.
intestinalis) which grows on the sides of a shallow sandy-bottomed rock pool near
the highest part of the littoral zone.

BURN 19

Discussion of I/bia ilbi

The striking body coloration and patterning of the living animal, the lack
of a branchia, the tricuspidate rhachidian, the opaline gland and the pedal
furrow are the characteristics to be used in distinguishing /. ilbi from all
Runcinacean species. The undivided dorsum, posterior near middle-line anus,
gizzard plates and genital organs unquestionably identify the genus and species as
belonging to the Runcinacea. The lack of a branchia indicates that the genus
deserves the highest position in the classification of the suborder (see discussion
on systematic classification of the Runcinacea). The type of rhachidian and the
dorsal opaline gland point to an even higher position for J/bia than Runcinella
which Odhner described as “a more advanced and specialized type . . . than
Runcina” (1924, p. 51), and suggest a close affinity with the Anaspidea, particu-
larly the Aplysiidae Dolabriferinae.

Both the generic and specific names of /lbia ilbi are derived from the
monogram of the writer’s brother, Jan Lee Burn.

THE SYSTEMATIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE RUNCINACEA

Because of the small number of genera and species hitherto attributed to
the Runcinacea, no systematic classification of the suborder has been felt
necessary. Bergh (1889, pp. 868-869), Pilsbry (1896, pp. 170-171), Odhner
(1924, p. 51), and Thiele (1931, p. 394) merely grouped Runcina and Ildica
together in the case of the first two writers and in the case of the second two
writers added Runcinella with the note that this latter genus is more advanced
and specialized than Runcina. From the literature examined, it is evident that
a clear and concise systematic classification based on several natural characteristics
is readily available for the suborder. The following text indicates the reasonings
for the various new proposals and is based largely on the ideas propounded by
Nils Hj. Odhner in his works on the Opisthobranchia.

It is quite obvious that of all species of Runcinacea one stands apart.
Ildica nana Bergh (1889, pp. 870-872, pl. 82, fig. 27-38) with an external shell,
a long branchia on the rear right side and an arcuate rhachidian tooth is this
species. As all other species have either an internal shell or none at all, an
abbreviated branchia and a denticulate or tricuspidate rhachidian tooth, it is
necessary to decide which is the more primitive, I/dica or the second group.
Odhner’s conceptions regarding evolutionary changes for the systematic classifica-
tion of the Opisthobranchia (1939, pp. 3-25), i.e. that the degeneration of a
part of an animal together with a strong tendency towards detorsion of both
shell and animal among the more primitive forms is evidenced in a natural step
forward, can well be applied to the Runcinacea. The presence of a relatively
strong external shell in J/dica indicates that it is more primitive than Runcina
which has an internal shell. Similarly Runcina has to be considered more primitive
than those species (and genera) in which a shell is totally absent. Thus it is
evident that J/dica nana is the most primitive Runcinacean and that the genus
Runcina follows as next in succession.

However with the complete degeneration of the shell in the evolutionary
scale above Runcina, this characteristic is of no value whatsoever. Therefore
another characteristic, this time a little more subtle in its changes towards
degeneration, is selected. The branchia offers everything desired for a complete
classification.

Although it is already decided that Jldica is the most primitive genus and
Runcina is the next most primitive genus, it serves well to use these genera as
pointers to the succession of changes apparent within genera in the form of the
branchia. In J/ldica (Fig. 21) the branchia (b) is an elongate elegant plume
with small pinnulae alternately placed on either side of the rhachis; its point
of origin is the second third of the body length and it projects considerably beyond
the right posterior margin of the dorsum. Generally speaking the branchia
resembles that of the Pleurobranchacea both in shape and position. Between
Ildica and Runcina considerable change in the shape, type and position of the
branchia have occurred. Instead of the pinnulated plume the pinnulae arise
separately from the body wall without any external interconnections. They are

20 AUSTRALIAN RUNCINACEA

also very severely reduced in number, e.g. three pinnulae in R. australis spec.
nov. (Fig. 3, b) and R. coronata (Quatrefages 1844; Alder and Hancock, 1846,
pl. 18, fig. 5), four pinnulae in R. caloritana Colosi (1915) (Fig. 23, b) and
R. setoensis Baba (1954, p. 373). In the change of position, it is very evident
that a terminal movement has begun. This is further confirmed from a study of
the remaining Runcinids.

Among the species attributed to Runcina, one species (R. elioti Baba) deserves
special attention because of its remarkable branchia and its type of radula.
Although Baba’s description of the branchia (1937, pp. 202-204) is very brief,
the “several plumes arranged in a semi-circle, and lies in the median line beneath
the posterior end of the mantle” (Fig. 25) indicates that it is not at all similar
to the branchia of Runcina. Thus it can be seen that a definite movement has
taken place in a posterior direction. The pinnulae apparently arise separately
from the terminal body wall and they are spread evenly either side of the middle
line (loc. cit., pl. 4, fig. 4). As the radula has non-denticulate lateral teeth in
contradistinction to denticulate ones in Runcina, R. elioti cannot be accepted
within the genus and deserves to be generically separated from that genus.
Runcinida gen. nov. is proposed for this species and it is the type species by
monotypy.

By the understanding of the change from the branchia of Runcina to that of
Runcinida, the doridiform arrangement of the pinnulae (again arising separately
from the terminal wall) in Runcinella Odhner (1924, pp. 48-49, fig. 7-8, a;
Fig. 27) can be seen as the condition occurring after the lateral pinnulae move
ventral-wards. There is also a reduction in the size of the pinnulae indicating
another instance of the gradual degeneration of the branchia. The two lateral
teeth on each side of the rhachidian in the radula and the presence of an infra-
anal sac containing the glandulae of the opaline gland (loc. cit., p. 50, fig. 7, e;
Fig 27, o) are the characteristics validating the genus. In J/bia on the other
hand, there is no branchia present at all but the cilia of the body walls within
the funnels formed by the folding of the foot and mantle margins towards
each other undoubtedly act as guides to respiratory absorption areas. Once
more the details of the radula and the presence of an opaline gland distinguish
the genus from other Runcinids.

The opaline glands of both Runcinella and Ilbia do not appear to differ at
all morphologically. Although smaller and far more numerous in the latter.
both genera have the individual glandulae similarly shaped and with walls com-
posed of gland cells. The outer cutaneous sheath of the glandulae in Runcinella
is no more than a deeply folded skin thus in both genera the glandulae are
pervious to the surface although in Runcinella enclosed in an infra-anal sac.
Colosi (1915) recorded the presence of an anal gland in Runcina calaritana
(Hoffman, 1932-1939, pp. 494-495, Fig. 360, A); this appears to be the first
indication of an opaline gland in the Rucinacea although it is vestigial in its
extent as shown by the glandulae clustered around the central duct which is the
only opening to the surface. It would appear that the Runcinacea are the
systematically highest of all the Cephalaspidean suborders with some close
similarities to the order Anaspidea where opaline glands are present in both
families (Akeratidae and Aplysiidae). Hoffman (loc. cit.) calls the opaline
glands of Runcina calaritana and Runcinella zelandica “analdriisen” but through
comparison with the glands of //bia, they must be considered as opaline glands.

Peculiarly enough the shape of the radular teeth shows some similarities
throughout, particularly at generic level. I/dica (Fig. 22) with its arcuate rhachi-
dian and non-denticulate hamate lateral is much the same as Runcinida but in
addition the latter had an inner bilobed flange minutely denticulated along the
edges and a small median cusp (Fig. 26). In Runcina (Fig. 24), Runcinida
(Fig. 26) and Runcinella (Fig. 28) the rhachidian is medianly divided but in
the latter two genera successively less strongly. The tricuspidate rhachidian of
Ilbia appears to be derived from the multidentate bicuspidate rhachidian of
Runcina and the median cusp of Runcinida. The lateral reduction of the denticles
on each cusp of Runcina plus the building up and strengthening of the median
cusp of Runcinida would result in the rhachidian of J/bia. While the gastral
plates of the Runcinacea are less strongly developed homologies of the gastral

BURN 21

plates of the Scaphandracean Cephalaspidea, family Atyidae (Pilsbry, 1896,
p. 237, frontispiece, fig. 8; Marcus and Marcus, 1959, p. 882, fig. 9-12), only
three plates are present in that family as compared with four throughout the
Runcinacea. Gastral plates are also present in certain other families of
Cephalaspidea (Phanerophthalmidae and Philinidae; loc. cit., pp. 884-892, fig.
23-24), but are again three in number and lacking in strong transverse denticulated
laminae.

From the discussion of the Runcinacean genera and the evolutionary sequence
of them, certain major divisions can be separated off. Primarily two divisions are
seen in the external shell, pinnulate branchia and non-denticulate rhachidian of
Ildica and the internal shell or lack of one, the branchia consisting of separate
pinnulae or lack of same and the denticulate or cuspidate rhachidian of the
remaining genera. For both divisions, family status is proposed, Ildicidae fam.
nov. for the former and Runcinidae (Gray; Pilsbry, 1896, p. 17) for the latter.
The second division (Runcinidae) can also be separated into two subfamilies,
Runcininae for those genera with branchia and a denticulate rhachidian and
Ilbinae for those without branchia and a cuspidate rhachidian. Briefly the
suborder, families, subfamilies and genera can be diagnosed as follows:

Suborder RUNCINACEA

Cephalaspidea in which the dorsum is not divided transversely, the foot is
without parapodia and the anal opening is terminal and just to the right of the
middle line. The gizzard contains four laminated gastral plates. Jaws are present.
Branchia when present posterior right or terminal in position between mantle
and foot.

Family IIdicidae fam. nov.

Runcinacea with an external terminal shell, a pinnulated branchia and a
non-denticulate rhachidian.

Genus Ildica Bergh (1889, pp. 869-870).

Branchia on posterior right of body wall. Minute oral tentacles present.
Penis elongate cylindrical; prostate gland present. Radula with an arcuate
rhachidian bearing a reduced denticle near each side and a smooth hamate lateral
each side of the rhachidian.

Type species: J. nana Bergh (1889).
Family Runcinidae

Runcinacea with or without a terminal rudimentary internal shell, the
branchia when present consisting of individual pinnulae and a denticulate or
cuspidate rhachidian.

Subfamily Runcininae

Branchia present. Rhachidian bilobed, denticulate.

Genus Runcina Forbes (1851, p. 611)

Branchia consisting of 3-4 pinnulae to right of anus. Shell present. Prostate
gland and terminal seminal vesicle present on male copulatory organ. Rhachidian
deeply bilobed with each lobe denticulate, lateral tooth on each side of rhachidian
denticulate, whole radula generate in one species. Opaline gland, composed of
glandulae emptying into a central duct, present in one species at least.

Type species: R. coronata (Quatrefages 1844).
Genus Runcinida gen. nov.

Branchia consisting of a few pinnulae in a semi-circle beneath the posterior
mantle. Shell not known, probably absent. Male copulatory organ not known.
Radula with bilobed minutely denticulate rhachidian which also has a minute
median cusp, and a smooth hamate lateral each side of the rhachidian. Opaline
gland not known.

Type species: R. elioti (Baba 1937).
Genus Runcinella Odhner (1924, pp. 46-47).

Branchia consisting of 4-5 pinnulae doridiformly arranged around the anus.
Shell absent. Male copulatory organ with prostate gland but lacking seminal
vesicle. Rhachidian weakly bilobed, a simple hook-shaped tooth and a bicuspid
larger tooth present on each side of the rhachidian. Opaline gland opening into
an infra-anal sac.

22 AUSTRALIAN RUNCINACEA

Type species: R. zelandica Odhner (loc. cit.).
Subfamily Ibiinae subfam. nov.
Branchia absent. Rhachidian tricuspidate.
Genus /lbia gen nov.

Shell absent. Male copulatory organ with prostate gland but lacking seminal
vesicle. Rhachidian with large cusps, the lateral tooth on each side of the
rhachidian denticulate and bifidate. Opaline gland posterior dorsal, each glandula
with its own aperture.

Type species: J. ilbi spec. nov.

SUMMARY
For the first time, Runcinacean gastropods are described and recorded from

Australia. Two new genera are proposed, Runcinida for Runcina elioti Baba

(1937) from Okinawa and Japan and //bia for Ilbia ilbi spec. nov. from Victoria,

Australia. Two new species, Runcina australis and Ilbia ilbi, are described from

Victoria and New South Wales. A _ systematic classification of the suborder

Runcinacea is proposed with two families, Ildicidae and Runcinidae, the latter

with two subfamilies, Runcininae and Ilbiinae. The five known genera are briefly

described.
REFERENCES

Alder, J. and A. Hancock. 1846. Notices of some new and rare British species
of Naked Mollusca. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 18, pp. 289-294, pl. 18.

Baba, K. 1937. Opisthobranchia of Japan (1). J. Dept. Agric. Kyushu Imp.
Univ., 5 (4), pp. 195-236, pl. 4.

——. 1954. Runcina setoensis, a new and rare species from the Coast of Kii,

Middle Japan (Opisthobranchia). Publ. Seto Mar. Biol. Lab.,3 (3) pp. 373-374.

and I. Hamatani. 1959. The Direct Development in Runcina setoensis

Baba (Opisthobranchia-Cephalaspidae). Ibid., 7 (2), pp. 281-29, pl. 22-24.

Bergh, R. 1872. Malacologische Untersuchungen (C. Semper, Reisen im Archipel

der Philippinen), 1 (4), pp. 175-203, pl. 21-24.

. 1889. Ibid., 3 (16, ii), pp. 815-872, pl. 82-84.

Forbes, E. 1851. In A History of British Molluscs and their Shells, 3, pp. 611-
G12 pla C Ce whien 2s

Hoffman, H. 1932-1939. Opisthobranchia. Bronn, K/. Ordn., 3, Abtlg. If, Buch
Sh xi 247 pp eaepls

Marcus, E. 1955. Opisthobranchia from Brazil. Bol. Fac. Fil. Univ. S. Paulo,
Zool. No. 20, pp. 89-200, pl. 1-30.

Marcus and E. Marcus. 1960. Opisthobranchia aus dem Roten Meer und den
Malediven. Ak. Wiss. Lit. Mainz, 1959 (12), pp. 871-934.

Odhner, N. 1924. New Zealand Mollusca. Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk n. h.
Foren. Kobenhavn, 77, pp. 1-90, pl. 1-2.

——. 1926. Die Opisthobranchien. Further Res. Swed. Antaret. Exped. 1901-
1903, 2 (1), pp. 1-100, pl. 1-3.

——. 1939. Opisthobranchiate Mollusca from the western and northern coasts
of Norway. K. Norske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., 1939, No. 1, pp. 1-93.

Pelseneer, P. 1894. Recherches sur divers opisthobranches. Mem. Cour., Cl.
Sci. Nat. Acad. Roy. Belgique, 53, 3 + 157 BP, pl. 1-25.

Pilsbry, H. 1896. Manual of Conchology, by G. W. Tryon, Jr., 16, pp. 111-262,
pl. 1-74.

Pruvot-Fol, A. 1954. Faune de France, 58: Mollusques Opisthobranches. 448
pp., 173 fig. Paris (Paul Lechevalier).

Quatrefages, A. 1844. Mémoire sur les gastéropodes phlébéntéres (Phlebenterata
Nob.), ordre nouveau de la classe des gasteropodes. Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
(3), 1, pp. 129-133, pl. 3-6 (not seen).

Thiele, J. 1931. Opisthobranchia. Handb. Syst. Weichtierkunde, 1, pp. 377-461.

1935. Ibid., 2, pp. 1123-1154.

Vayssiére, A. 1883. Ann. Sci. Nat. (6), 15, p. 6.

1885. Recherches Zoologiques et Anatomiques sur la Opisthobranches du
Golfe de Marseille, I. Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Mars. Zool., 2, Mem. 3,
pp. 1-180, pl. 1-6.

Verrill, A. 1901. Additions to the fauna of the Bermudas, etc. Trans. Conn.
Acad. Arts. Sci., 11 (1), pp. 15-62, pl. 1-9.

23

The larvae of Gynacantha mocsaryi Forster and
Hydrobasileus brevistylus (Brauer) (Odonata)

By F. C. FRAZER, F.R.ZS.

Some thirty-six species of larvae of Australian Odonata have been described
so far, for the greater part by the late Dr. R. J. Tillyard. It is evident from his
venational studies of the wings of Odonata, that he had at one time a number of
larvae which he never described and it is the more unfortunate that all these
appear to have been lost. In this paper, the larvae of two more species are
described from material which I found in Mr. R. Dobson’s collection. One of
these, the larva of Gynacantha moscaryi Forster, is of unusual interest in that
only two other species belonging to this large genus have been described so far,
one of which, dobsoni Fraser, is also Australian. Another feature also lends
interest to this larva, in that it now confirms that all larvae of this genus possess
setae on the lateral lobes of the labium and so differ markedly from all other
genera of the family Aeshnidae. Tillyard was the first to point out this character
and from it he surmised that the Gynacanthas were the most recent of the
Aeshnidae, thus differing from the opinion expressed by Butler (1904, Trans.
Amer. Ent. Soc. 30; 111-134) who regarded the genus as the most archaic. The
latter pointed out that the early instars of larvae of most of the Aeshnidae
possessed setae which were shed in later instars. It is to be remembered that
Tillyard reversed his theories on the evolution of Odonata in later years and !
feel sure that he would have then shared Butler’s opinion as to the true place
of the genus Gynacantha in the family Aeshnidae.

The early instars of larvae of Gynacantha are unknown so that it is not
possible to say whether they possess setae on the labium or not.

Gynacantha mocsaryi Forster. (Fig. 1.)

Material examined: exuviae of larvae obtained at Helenvale near Cooktown,
N. Queensland, and bred to the imaginal stage at Wahroonga, N. S. Wales by
R. Dobson; 25. i. 51 to 7. iii. 51.

Total length 40 mm. Width of head 9 mm. Greatest breadth of abdomen
7 mm.

Head rather flat on dorsum, approaching that of Anax; eyes protuberant,
prolonged and tapering inwardly and posteriorly as viewed from above; postocular
lobes rounded, coarsely spined, the hinder margin shallowly concave; ocelli not
apparent. Labium kite-shaped, flat, tapering posteriorly to as far as mesocoxae;
median lobe convex with a median V-shaped cleft bounded on each side by a
long outwardly curving spine; the rest of the free border fringed with coarse
hairs. Lateral lobes of Aeshnine build, with broadly squared apex, the outer
angle slightly rounded, the inner prolonged into a stout spine which with its
opposite fellow, fits into the V-shaped cleft when the lobes are apposed; the
inner margin fringed with closely-set, rectangular teeth. Movable hook long and
robust, with several small setae present on the basal half. Below the hook a row
of short but conspicuous setae, five in number, and at base of lobe a cluster of
four or five smaller setae. Prothorax narrower than head, ruff-shaped, broadening
posteriorly and obtusely pointed laterally, its posterior border sinuous and slightly
emarginate; a robust obtusely pointed lobe anteriorly and laterally. Meso- and
metathorax pyriform, its surface undulate; wing-pads meeting at middle line,
extending to the 4th abdominal segment, broad and flat, irregularly pigmented,
especially along the costal portion of wings. Legs longer than is usual for the
Aeshnidae, four-sided with finely spined ridges separating the surfaces; both
femora and tibiae with three dark encircling bands; the second segment of the
tarsus also darkened. Abdomen elongate fusiform, flattened ventrally, rounded

ODONATA

a
il
wi
H)
4

o £
= -
5

Figure 1.—Larva of Gynacantha mocsaryi Forster.
labium and antenna.

Inset, the right half of

Figure 2.—Larva of Hydrobasileus brevistylus (Brauer). Inset, right lateral lobe
of labium.

FRASER 25

or arched dorsally, with four broken lines of dark pigment forming a pattern
extending from segment 4 to 10; no dorsal spines but conspicuous ones on the
sides of segments 7 to 9, gradually lengthening and longest on segment 9. Anal
appendages: appendix-dorsalis 3 mm., slightly bifid at its apex; cerci of almost
the same length, acute at apices; cercoids shortly conical, all processes closely
apposed to form a conical apex to the abdomen.

_ This larva differs from that of dobsoni by the setae’ on the lateral lobes of
labium being very much shorter and by the extra and small setae on the movable-
hook.

Gynacantha dobsoni Fraser.

Gynacantha rosenbergi Tillyard nec Brauer 1916. J. Linn. Soc. Lond. 33: 71.

The larva of this species was described by Dr. Tillyard as that of rosenbergi,
but it is evident from his description of the imago, that he had made an incorrect
identification, dobsoni not being known at that date. G. rosenbergi is a much
larger and more robust species than dobsoni and is readily distinguished by the
broad area of amber tinting at the base of the hindwings from all other species
of Gynacantha.

Hydrobasileus brevistylus (Brauer).

Material examined: exuviae in the Dobson collection from the Barron River,
Kuranda, N. Queensland; 30. ix. 53.

Total length 23 mm. Width of head 8 mm. Greatest breadth of abdomen
(segments 6 and 7) 9 mm.

Head triangular, eyes forming sharp angulations of the posterolateral aspects,
their posterior border almost in line with the occipital which latter is widely but
shallowly emarginate and beset with numerous short spines; these latter forming
a group of four on each side and two more robust ones just internal to the eyes.
Antennae of seven segments, the base short and broad, the remaining segments
slim, elongate, gradually shortening to as far as the apical segment. Labium broad
and deeply cupped, the middle lobe with a curved row of twelve long setae, its
anterior border strongly and angularly convex, without cleft, the border fringed
with widely spaced moderately long setae. Lateral lobes triangular, posterior
border with a few widely spaced short setae similar to those on the middle lobe;
outer border with a moderately long movable hook and nine long setae; on the
inner side of the proximal seta, a small isolated one. Inner border with seven
crenulations each with one long and two short setae. Prothorax transversely
triangular, meso- and metathorax short and robust. Wing-pads broadly triangular,
meeting in the middle line over dorsum, extending posteriorly to as far as the
apical border of the sixth segment. Abdomen almost flattened ventrally but rather
strongly arched dorsally, broadly elliptical in outline; segments 4 to 5 with short
middorsal spines, sixth to eighth with much longer and more robust spines, their
apices strongly curved posteriorly to overlap the segments behind; short lateral
spines on segments 3 to 7 but of great length and robustness on 8 and 9, both
of which overlap widely segment 10 as if to form a protective barrier to the
anal appendages; all these spines thickly fringed with hairs. Anal appendages
very hairy; the appendix-dorsalis broad at base then slim and tapering; cerci slim,
longer than the appendix-dorsalis, their apices in line with the lateral spines of
segments 8 and 9. Legs slim, rather long, hind femora extending to apical
border of segment 7, four-sided and with narrow minutely spined ridges separating
the surfaces. General colouring yellowish but probably pale green during life
with but faint marbling on terminal segments of abdomen and three to four
dark rings on the femora, barely visible on the anterior pair.

26

The Rediscovery of Synlestes weyersi (Odonata:
Chlorolestidae)

By F. C. Fraser, F.R.ZS.

Synlestes weyersi was described by Selys (1868) from a single female
collected by Weyers. The habitat was given as Port Denison and it is important
to note that the same habitat was given for the species Hemiphlebia mirabilis
Selys, some twenty specimens of which were also presented to Selys by Weyers.
As will be seen hereafter, both species were ultimately discovered in Victoria,
from which fact we are led to infer that from lack of data on the specimens
Selys gave the name of the port from which the specimens were sent to him, and
that the two species were actually collected by Weyers in Victoria.

Selys stated that along with these two species four other Odonates were
included as well as a new Panorpid viz.: Cordulia (Synthemis) eustalacta (Bur-
meister), Aeshna brevistyla Rambur, Lestes analis Rambur, Agriolestes (Agrio-
lestes) icteromelas Selys and Bittacus nigriceps Selys, the habitat of the latter
being again given as Port Denison.

Selys described what he thought to be the male of S. weyersi, this being
quite natural as only the one species was known at the time and the wealth of
others afterwards discovered not even suspected. At the same time, the female was
again described, emphasis being laid on the fact that the juxtahumeral orange
stripe was broader than in the described male, in which it occurred as a fine line
only, incomplete both above and below, but nearly complete in the female type.

In 1948, by the courtesy of the authorities of the Musée Royal d Histoire
Naturelle de Belgique, I was enabled to examine both the type female and the
supposed allotype male, as a result of which, and because of the striking differences
in the markings of the thorax, I came to the conclusion that the two were not
conspecific; I] accordingly redescribed the male as a new species under the name of
S. tillyardi (Fraser 1948).

Recently, whilst enjoying the great hospitality of my friends Mr. and Mrs.
Dobson in Jersey, I was afforded the rare opportunity of examining the rich
collection of Odonata which he amassed in Australia; it is probably quite the
largest and most representative of its kind, containing both new material and a
wealth of data as to habitats and distribution of species. Among a long series of
Synlestes tillyardi, I was delighted to find a single male, which, from its markings,
I at once recognized as the opposite sex of the single female weyersi in the
Selysian collection. After nearly a century, it had at last been discovered! The
broad orange-coloured juxtahumeral stripe, so similar to that of the female, left
no room for doubt. The data on the specimen read—‘Yinnar, Victoria, 24. iv.
48. J. H. Courtenay,” and now that the true habitat was known, it seemed highly
probable that more specimens might be obtained. The description of the male and
its differentiation from other species, especially from ftillyardi, follows.

Synlestes weyersi Selys.

Synlestes weyersi Selys, 1868, C. R. Soc. Ent. Belg. 11: 76; Id. 1886 (pars),
Mem. Cour. Acad. Belg. 38: 91; Kirby, 1890, Cat. Odon: 126; Fraser, 1948,
Bull. Mus. R. d’Hist. Nat. Belg. 24: 2-4, figs. 1, 2.

Male. Abdomen 43 mm. Hindwing 28 mm.

Head: labium and bases of mandibles pale yellow; labrum, anterior and
posterior clypeus, frons, vertex and occiput dark blue metallic, the genae glossy
black with slight metallic lustre. The occiput behind presenting an obtuse nipple-
like prominence on both sides. Eyes dark reddish brown but may be dark blue
in life ? Prothorax chrome yellow, the middle lobe with two dark bronzed black
areas, triangular in shape and confluent at a point over the middorsum. Posterior
lobe entirely pale yellow, trilobate. Anterior border of mesothoracic lamina
narrowly bordered with pale yellow. Thorax on dorsum, to as far lateral as the
first lateral suture, dull steely dark purplish or coppery metallic marked with a
broad juxtahumeral stripe of dark ochreous or even ferruginous in colour,
narrowed and partly forked at its lower end, deficient in its uppermost part which

FRASER 27

2 SRE co oy -

Fig. 1. 1 to 4, Left lateral view of thoraces of Synlestes to show extent of metallic
green markings. 1. Synlestes weyersi Selys, from the type male,
2. Synlestes selysi Tillyard, 3. Synlestes nigrescens Tillyard (The
humeral stripe may be quite absent), 4. Synlestes tillyardi Fraser.
5 to 8, Male anal appendages of,—S. Synlestes selysi Tillyard,
6. Synlestes nigrescens Tillyard, 7. Synlestes tillyardi Fraser, all
dorsal views of the left appendage, 8. Synlestes tropicus Tillyard,
right latero-ventral aspect.

28 SYNLESTES WEYERSI

is taken by a black area enclosing a small yellow point. Laterally bright yellow,
paler over the metepimeron and with a complete dark stripe of coppery metallic
on the second lateral suture. Beneath yellow, thinly pruinosed. Legs dark reddish
brown, black on the flexor surfaces. Wings hyaline, pterostigma dark reddish
brown with a pale lining on costal and posterior borders, braced, covering 4 cells,
about 24 times as long as broad, convex posteriorly. Nodal index, 18 to 19
postnodals in forewings, 14 to 16 in the hind; anal vein fusing with posterior
border of wings beneath the discoidal cell, nearer its apex than its base; 3
postdiscoidal cells. Abdomen long and narrow, dark steely purplish black on
dorsum but a duller black on terminal segments; segment | yellow at extreme
base, segments 3 to 6 with basal yellow points not confluent over middorsum;
the sides of segments 1 and 2 and base of 3 laterally pale yellow; beneath dull
yellow infuscated with brown, the terminal segments rather paler beneath. Anal
appendages black, slightly longer than segment 10, the inferiors only about
one fourth the length of superiors which are forcipate, broad at base and again
at apex, presenting a very robust basal medial spine with its apex slightly curved
ventrally and not differing markedly from other related species; no ventral spine
or tubercle on the middle of superiors, the apical third expanded somewhat
spatulate-like and grooved on both upper and lower sides, the inner side slightly
protuberant and furnished with short stiff hairs cr bristles. Inferior appendages
markedly divaricate, broad at base, then constricted and again expanding ovulate.
hairy.

Female. Abdomen 40 mm (ca), Hindwing 32 mm. Differs but slightly
from the male. Pterostigma yellow framed in black, rather longer than in the
male, dilated. Body colouring more brightly metallic (probably not as adult as the
male) and the yellow beneath abdomen broader and paler. The terminal segments
of the abdomen missing.

Habitat: The female was said to have come from Port Denison but on the
evidence now available, it appears certain that this was incorrect and that in all
probability, the insect was collected in Victoria. The allotype male was collected
by J. H. Courtenay at Yinnar, Victoria, 24. iv. 48; a single male now in the
Dobson collection, Jersey. Type female, in the Museum Royal d Histoire
Naturelle, Brussels. S. weyersi differs from all other species by the broad
juxtahumeral orange stripe, which is finely linear in other species or absent in
nigrescens. The nipple-like tubercle behind the occiput also appears to be unique
in the genus as I have not been able to find a similar structure in a large number
of specimens I have examined belonging to other species. The superior anal
appendages are devoid of spines other than the usual robust basal one and their
structure is therefore simpler than in all others. In my paper in the Bull. Musée
Royal Belgique, 1 gave Lestes belladonna Macleay as a synonym of weyersi but
it now seems that this species must have been fillyardi from its northerly habitat.
With all the known species now accurately placed it will be of value to give a
fresh key for their easy determination.

Key to species of Synlestes Selys.

Superior anal appendages of the male greatly elongated and white in colour,
deeply bifid, the outer branch nearly twice the length of the inner.

15 Segment 10 of the female white ................ Episynlestes albicauda Till.
Superior anal appendages of male not bifid; segment 10 of the female

[0) 2X) “PRUs maa att re ee ee a eh nr cnc A Bt Sr aSacryrmace 2:
Prothorax entirely yellowish, without any strongly contrasted black

2 THAT KAN GS 2532 SB settee steer scot Sa ckee ok cate Re gen ce 3:
i Prothorax largely bronzed black with strongly contrasted but restricted
VeEllOW MALKIN GS = yh sche re heaps seat ete eT ae 4.

Superior anal appendages of male with a large robust subapical spine on the

3 ANNE SIGEP eee eee reece eee eee eee Synlestes selysi Tillyard.
: Superior anal appendages of male without a large subapical spine ........

AE Ree a ty ne eae Sty kN RnR Synlestes tropicus Tillyard.

FRASER 29

Superior anal appendages without a medial ventral process; juxtahumeral
stripe of thorax very broad and orange coloured, complete except its

4 UPPeLsPOLMOM ES ieee ween chest osu cacy celts Synlestes weyersi Selys.
; Superior anal appendages of male with a process (spine or tubercle) on
its ventral surface near the middle of appendage; juxtahumeral stripe

of thorax finely linear and incomplete, pale yellow in colour ............ 5).

Pterostigma elongate, covering 4-5 cells; juxtahumeral stripe distinct;
medioventral process a small tubercle ............ Synlestes tillyardi Fraser.
Pterostigma short and stout, covering 3 cells; juxtahumeral stripe indistinct
or obsolete eS VI eEStesmiTlerescensmuillyard:

A new locality for Zizeeria lysimon karsandra Moore,
1865
By J. V. PETERS.

The Dark Grass Blue, Zizeeria lysimon karsandra Moore has been recorded
from the following localities: Townsville, Holbourne Is. (near Bowen), Mackay,
Westwood, Brisbane and Milmerran in Queensland, Port Darwin and Groote
Eylandt in the Northern Territory and Ballina, Richmond River, Wardell, Grafton,
Bandon Grove and Bundanoon in the New South Wales (Dowling, 1961).

On 3rd September, 1961, I captured a single specimen of Z. 1. karsandra
on Quoin Island, some three miles from Gladstone, Queensland. The specimen
is in my collection.

REFERENCES.
Dowling, W. McK., 1961. Capture of Zizeeria lysimon karsandra Moore, 1865

at Bandon Grove, N.S.W. Proc. R. Zool. Soc. N.S.W. 1958-1959:110.
Waterhouse, G. A., 1932. What butterfly is that? Sydney.

Some New Locality Records of Butterflies
By E. O. EDwarps

Zizeeria lysimon karsandra Moore, 1865.

The recorded distribution of this butterfly (Dark Grass-blue) is, according
to Dr. G. A. Waterhouse, “Common from Brisbane to Townsville; also Port
Darwin. I have caught it on the Richmond River and at Holbourne Island; J.
Macqueen finds it commonly at Millmerran, Qld.” The writer has taken it as far
west as Mitchell, Qld., where it was common along the Maranoa River. It was
therefore something of a surprise when my son, Ted Edwards, collected a
specimen at Bundanoon on the Southern Tablelands of New South Wales (98
miles South of Sydney) on 27th March 1959. A careful check of the specimen
revealed it to be true to type though duller above than the Millmerran specimen.
In a letter Mr. L. Haines advises that a specimen was collected at Bandon Grove
near Dungog, New South Wales (150 miles north of Sydney) by Mr. K. Dowling.
It is possible that the range of this butterfly will be found to be much greater
than previously recorded; it could be very easily mistaken in the field for one
of the common blue butterflies.

Neolucia hobartensis hobartensis Miskin, 1890 (Mountain Blue).

On 31st December 1959 at Medlow Bath, on the Blue Mountains of New
South Wales (about 3500 ft.), I collected specimens of this species previously
recorded from high altitudes in Tasmania and at Mount Kosciusko in New South
Wales. The butterflies were flying in an area where Epacris was in bloom. This
is thought to be the foodplant of the larvae.

30

Life History of Pseudalmenus chlorinda chloris
(Lepidoptera: Lycaenidae)

By E. Epwarps and E. O. Epwarps

On 10th January, 1959, in a gully near Katoomba (Blue Mountains, New
South Wales) a search of a 6 ft. high plant of Acacia elata (Cedar Wattle)
revealed a number of larvae attended by small black ants. From their appearance
there was little doubt that these larvae were those of the butterfly Pseudalmenus
chlorinda chloris, as they closely resembled those of the subspecies fisheri as
illustrated and described by Tindale (1953). The attendant ants when disturbed
stuck their tails in the air and when killed smelt strongly.

Another bush of Cedar Wattle, situated nearby, was almost denuded of
its leaves but contained no larvae. A close search resulted in finding two pupae
under a stone a few feet from the base of the plant. These pupae were brought
home and kept in a cool place in a box in the dark with a small entrance into
a cage. The first butterfly (a male) emerged on 30th August 1959 and the second
(a female) emerged on 8th October 1959. This was surprising as it indicated
that the butterflies would be on the wing for a greater period than had been
previously recorded.

Two larvae brought home and fed on A. elata consumed large quantities
of their foodplant, rate of consumption being far above the average local butterfly
larva. This may have given the impression in the past that a large number of
larvae were on the plant, whereas only three or four may denude a small bush.
A visit to the same locality in November 1959 revealed numbers of the butterflies
flying around the top of a tall Cedar Wattle. The tree contained many dead
branches and it appeared as if the attendant ants were nesting in hollows in the
dead branches. The tree was too tall and decayed for a safe investigation. The
butterflies flew high around the top of the tree, too high to be caught. On this
visit both eggs and young larvae were found on small bushes of the foodplant
near the tall tree. At the beginning of December 1961 a visit was again made
and larvae collected near the previous locality. Having cultivated a plant of
Acacia elata it was possible to bring home a supply of larvae. These larvae had
all pupated by the end of December. It was also noted that the larvae were
eating galls on their foodplant.

Waterhouse (1932) refers to collecting “several pupae” but does not describe
the larvae or eggs. It is doubtful if the life history of this subspecies has been
recorded.

Ovum: very pale blue, mandarin shaped, heavily pitted. From two to five
eggs laid together in the forks of the branches or near borer holes along the stems.
None were found on the leaves.

Larva: Black, marked with dark chocolate and dark greenish brown lines
and bands; a biscuit coloured stripe down the sides with a dark mauve stripe
under the biscuit coloured stripe. Head black and concealed under the first
segment. White stripes on each side of the first segment; two yellow oval mark-
ings on the third and eighth segments; two white marks like an inverted V on the
last segment; white hairs on each segment; underneath pale green.

Pupa: Dull black and rough. Found under stones near the foodplant or in
curled leaves or hollows made by borers and occupied by the attendant ants.

It has been found in captivity that the larvae do not seek hollow wood or
curled leaves in which to pupate unless attended by their escorting ants.

A check on other localities similarly situated would be worth while, bearing
in mind that the butterflies keep to the tops of tall specimens of their food plant.
Specimens of the butterfly have been found at Blackheath during sleety weather
(D. McAlpine, personal communication).

REFERENCES.

Tindale, N. B., 1953. New Rhopalocera and a list of species from the Grampian
Mountains, Western Victoria. Rec. S. Austr. Mus. 11:43-68, pls. xvili-xxi,
figs. 1-4.

Waterhouse, G. A., 1932, “What Butterfly is That?” Sydney.

31

Life History of the Butterfly Hesperilla mastersi
(Master’s Skipper)

By E. O. Epwarps

In 1900 Dr. G. A. Waterhouse first named this butterfly, but for 60 years
details of the life history remained unrecorded. In March 1960 Mr. T. H. Guthrie
found the butterfly flying high around trees near Whale Beach, 25 miles north
of Sydney. Varieties of Sword Grass (Gahnia) are frequently the foodplants of
the larvae of the genus Hesperilla and this was suspected as being the foodplant
of the larvae of this butterfly. Mr. Guthrie found that a Sword Grass (Gahnia
melanocarpum) was growing in the vicinity, but exposed plants revealed no signs of
larvae or pupae. A Hesperid egg however was found on the upper side of an
old leaf near the base of a plant of G. melanocarpum, in deep shade among bushes.
This proved to be the egg of H. mastersi. Subsequent investigation revealed that
this species only breeds on plants growing in thick undergrowth, which possibly
accounts for the difficulty of finding the larvae.

Up till 1933 less than 20 specimens were known from Gosford, Katoomba
and Moruya in N.S.W. (Waterhouse, 1932). Since then specimens have been
collected from Port Macquarie and Whale Beach in N.S.W. and Marracoota
(Vic.) by Crosby (1951).

LIFE HISTORY.

(Taken from notes by Mr. Guthrie and larvae sent to me.)

Egg. Typically hesperid; hemispherical with about 24 radial ridges. Size: 1.2
mm. in diameter, 0.9 mm. high.

Larva. Quite distinctive, especially in the early stages, due to a half moon shaped
mark on the rear segments and bright red on the first thoracic segment.
Newly hatched larva is long and cylindrical; very pale lemon yellow with the

Ist thoracic segment bright red: no mid-dorsal line, but a lateral line of deeper

lemon colour; a half moon shaped marking boarded with black on the anal

segment with eight very long hairs protruding from the tail; the body is other-
wise smooth. Head is dark shining brown with minute dimples and a depression
at the centre of the dorsal apex (that is, behind the top of the head).

Full grown larva: Head brown-yellow or mid-brown marked with brown
black. The two areas of colour rather sharply divided. Body, green-yellow with
a lateral white stripe and two dorsal white stripes.

The segment behind the head is yellow and the anal segment orange. Beneath
the larva is yellow.

The larvae live in shelters made by drawing the leaves of the food-plant
together.

Pupa: Dark brown with a distinctive pupal cap of shining dark brown with
low raised, somewhat rounded, area of black, but not high level platforms like
pupal caps of H. donnysa. They pupate in the shelter made by the larva.

As the books in which a description of this butterfly is given have been out
of print for many years, a brief description of the butterfly is given. Male above:
forewing, brown-black suffused with orange brown; large cell spot; 3 subapical
spots; discal spot in area 3 all pale orange hyaline; narrow discal sex mark from
dorsum to vein 4, black, broad central orange band.

Beneath: forewing red-brown; spots as above; extra pale orange hyaline spots
in area la and 2; series of cream apical spots.

Female similar to male but spots in forewing larger and wings more convex.

HESPERILLA MASTERSI

Fig. 1. Larval head of H. mastersi. Dark shaded portion very dark brown.
Lightly shaded portion mid-brown.

Fig. 2. Pupal cap of H. mastersi. Shaded portion dark shining black with a few
dark hairs. Plain portion dark shining brown and relatively smooth.

REFERENCES

Waterhouse, G. A., 1932. “What Butterfly is That?” Sydney.

Crosby, D. F., 1951. Notes on some Eastern Victorian Butterflies with a new
Victorian Record. Vic. Nat. 68: 97-101.

33

The Birds of Canada Bay, N.S.W.
By L. CouURTNEY HAINES.
Plates II-VII.

The various swamps and marshes fringing the tidal bays and backwaters
of the Parramatta River attract numerous species of birds, and in particular those
whose diet consists of insects and marine animals.

One of the most easily accessible of swamps is the mangrove marsh occurring
at the head of Canada Bay, which in turn lies at the extreme end of Hen and
Chicken Bay.

When the tide is out, extensive mud-flats adjoining the mangroves are exposed
and become the feeding grounds of many wading birds; but at the turn of the tide
the exposed banks gradually decrease in area, forcing the feasting birds to seek
refuge. Large wading birds such as herons and egrets move to the mangrove
trees or perch upon old stumps protruding from the water, while the smaller
wading forms fly to the salt-pans, there to await, almost hidden from view
amongst the succulent salt bushes, for the tide to ebb, when once again their
feeding grounds are accessible.

The swamp itself consists of several acres of mangroves, thinning out into
Salicornia covered salt-pans. In close proximity are playing fields possessing a
few she oaks (Casuarina sp.) and box brushes (Tristania sp.). Swamp margins,
overgrown with rank grasses, sedge and reeds, form ideal breeding haunts for
Golden-headed Fantail-warblers (Cisticola exilis).

Although the Concord side of the swamp is bordered by an unattractive
concrete storm-water channel, the Five Dock margin happily supports a number
of coral and gum trees, together with thickets of lantana, blackberry, bramble
and blackthorn bushes, the latter forming satisfactory cover for several species
of passerine birds, amongst which Silvereyes (Zosterops lateralis) and Blue Wrens
(Malurus cyaneus) predominate.

If one follows the Five Dock margin for some little distance, a second
storm-water channel is encountered, and immediately adjoining is a reclaimed
area, top-dressed with black ash material. This forms the main breeding-ground
of the Red-capped Dotterel (Charadrius alexandrinus ruficappilus) and the Black-
fronted Dotterel (C. melanops).

Until recently, two fresh-water ponds, overgrown with bullrushes, lillies
and other aquatic vegetation, were to be found at the end of this reclaimed area.
Here amidst the whispering of the rushes, the sad but musical piping of Little
Grassbirds (Megalurus gramineus) would harmonise with the loud joyous song
of numerous Reedwarblers (Acrocephalus australis). Also in these lush surround-
ings the cradle-like nests of Dusky Moorhens (Gallinula tenebrosa) could be
found; but the ponds, delightful though they were to both birds and bird watcher,
were not allowed to remain, and have completely disappeared.

Canada Bay swamp has been used as a banding station by members of the
Australian Bird-banding Scheme, C.S.I.R.O. With the aid of “mist” nets, and
working in the early hours of the morning, banders have already snared and
ringed Curlew Sandpipers (Calidris ferruginea), Sharp-tailed Stints (Calidris
acuminata) and Golden Plovers (Pluvialis dominica).

During the past eight years and on odd occasions prior to 1954, I have
been interested in listing and studying the bird species frequenting and visiting
this area. Altogether 73 species have been observed; of these 14 are breeding
species, and at least 7 of the migratory waders are regular annual visitors. The
remainder have been generally observed. Some, such as the White-headed Stilt
(Himantopus himantopus), Banded Plover (Zonifer tricolor) and Brown Songlark
(Cinclorhamphus cruralis), being regarded as great rarities, as far as Canada
Bay is concerned.

The arrangement of species in the following list is according to that used
by Messrs. K. A. Hindwood and A. R. McGill, in their book, “The Birds of
Sydney,” 1958.

34

BIRDS OF CANADA BAY

7

B
; REAM Ty

RIVER

FIVEDOCK

Z AREA Cie J/PONDS
IRECLAIMED\
gir men)

mon \

Map showing location of Canada Bay.

HAINES 35

ANNOTATED LIST.

1. Brown Quail Corturnix australis. Two records. A bird was seen walking
along the sloping wall of the storm water channel on Oct. 9, 1954, and another
bird was flushed from cover on Oct. 19, 1957.

2. King Quail Corturnix chinensis. A nest, presumably of this species, constructed
in a rusty jam tin was found during Nov. 1942. The nest contained an egg, the
remains of another egg, and a dead featherless young bird. (Emu 42: 252).

3. Dusky Moorhen Gallinula tenebrosa. The peculiar call of this bird is some-
times discernible in the mangroves. Nest cradles have been located, usually
placed about a foot above water level in the rushes growing in the fresh water
ponds. During summer and autumn months young moorhens have been observed.
4. Little Grebe Podiceps novaehollandiae. Usually present in small numbers
during autumn and winter months.

5. Hoary-headed Grebe Podiceps poliocephalus. Autumn and winter visitor.
More numerous farther downstream at Iron Cove, where scrags of two hundred
or more congregate.

6. Black Cormorant Phalacrocorax carbo. Sometimes observed fishing in the
bay. It is not unusual to see these birds break the surface of the water after a
long dive with an eel writhing in their bill.

7. Little Black Cormorant Phalacrocorax sulcirostris. Regularly observed, but
more common during winter and spring months of 1957. This species fishes the
shallows in large packs.

8. Little Pied Cormorant Phalacrocorax melanoleucus. Numbers always found
inhabiting the outskirts of the mangroves, where they perch with outspread wings,
drying off their plumage. This little cormorant differs considerably from the
preceding species in its habits of feeding, preferring to fish singly, odd birds
being distributed over a large expanse of water. Sometimes birds are noticed
with a chestnut colour staining their white breast and neck plumage. (Emu
ASN 152):

9. Little Tern Sterna albifrons. Nearly always to be observed fishing in the bay
during the warmer months of the year.

10. Crested Tern Sterna bergii. Occasionally observed.

11. Silver Gull Larus novaehollandiae. Common species frequenting the fore-
shores. When stormy weather prevails, hundreds of birds are to be seen inhabiting
adjoining playing fields.

12. Spur-winged plover Lobibyx novaehollandiae. Several always to be found
feeding, either on the mud-banks adjoining the mangroves, or amongst the
salt-pans, depending upon tidal conditions.

13. Banded Plover Zonifer tricolor. A lone bird observed on Sept. 8, 1957.

14. Golden Plover Pluvialis dominica. Arrives in early Sept. when numbers are
still in beautiful nuptial plumage but this soon disappears and is replaced by the
mottled brown, buff and white eclipse dress. As a rule the flock inhabits the
salt pans, where they are almost concealed from view by the colourful Salicornia.
Golden Plover remain in the swamp until April, when they migrate north to
their breeding haunts in North-eastern Siberia. During the month prior to
departure many birds are seen in splendid black, white and golden breeding attire.
Other places favoured by this species, are the muddy foreshores of the bay at
low tide, and rock strewn areas. The birds are cryptically hidden from view in
the latter places.

15. Mongolian Dotterel Charadrius mongolus. Uncommon species. One bird
observed on Oct. 4, 1954. Two birds recorded, feeding along the margin of the
bay on Feb. 19, 1955, whilst eight birds were seen in the swamp on Dec. 30, 1956.
16. Red-capped Dotterel Charadrius alexandrinus. A number of nests have been
found. It is interesting to note that eggs deposited on the black-ash strewn area
are of the dark fawn ground colour type. These are heavily marked with large
patches of dark brown, mainly clustering at the larger end, and generally quite
different in appearance to eggs located on white shingle and sandy places. The
latter form having a creamy-white ground colour, marked all over with small
blotches of brown and underlying markings of lavender. Most nest depressions
are lined with the usual shell chips and pebbles, but nests have also been located
in which the lining is composed of short pieces of grass. This species swims

36 BIRDS OF CANADA BAY

quite well, and I have observed flightless, downy young, when being pursued,
race into the water and swim away to safety. I have also seen a shot adult
female, unable to fly because of an injured wing, escape temporary capture by
plunging into the bay, and swim most buoyantly into mid-stream. Red-capped
Dotterels congregate about the salt pans in large numbers during winter months.
(Proc. R. Zool. Soc. N.S.W. 1958-59: 48).

17. Black-fronted Dotterel Charadrius melanops. Regular inhabitants. Flightless
young often observed during summer months. A depression containing two
slightly incubated eggs was found on Oct. 20, 1956. This nest was lined with
small bones, and nearby was a rodent’s skull, presumably that of the Common
Rat, Mus rattus. Another nest located on Sept. 15, 1957, contained the usual
clutch of three, and was lined with lengths of grass.

18. Eastern Curlew Nemenius madagascariensis. Usually a solitary bird is to be
seen feeding at low tide about the mangroves fringing the bay. On Dec. 26, 1955,
two curlews glided into the salt-pan area, putting down within a few feet of a
grassy bank, behind which I was concealed. It was one of those golden afternoons
and the rays of the setting sun enhanced the rich tints of their plumage consider-
ably, showing to advantage what a fine big wader the Eastern Curlew really is,
when viewed under such ideal conditions.

19. Bar-tailed Godwit Limosa lapponica. The summer of 1954-55 was remarkabie
for the large number of godwits frequenting the marshy backwaters of the
Parramatta River.

20. Grey-tailed Tattler Heteroscelus brevipes. One bird recorded inhabiting the
salt-pans during the 6th and 9th Jan. 1957. ;

21. Curlew Sandpiper Calidris ferruginea. An occasional visitor. This quiet grey
bird can easily be distinguished from the Sharp-tailed Sandpiper, by its decurved
bill and white tail covets shown in flight.

22. Sharp-tailed Sandpiper Calidris acuminata. Arrives in early August, departing
late March. Sometimes arrivals have good traces of their northern latitude breed-
ing dress. This reddish tint is also apparent again during the period preceding
their departure in autumn. Sharp-tailed Sandpipers are usually found inhabiting
the salt-pans and the banks of the creek which wends its way through the
mangroves. The summer of 1954-55 was outstanding for the large numbers
present.

23. Red-necked Stint Calidris ruficollis, An early spring arrival, when odd
birds are to be observed with remnants of their reddish breeding plumage. This
colour soon moults out, and is replaced by a no less attractive colour combina-
tion of soft greys. Stints feed mainly in the company of Red-capped Dotterels,
which they match in size, but can be easily picked out even from a distance by
their more active method of feeding.

24. Japanese Snipe Gallinago hardwickii. Three birds put up from marshy
grassland at the extreme end of the swamp on Oct. 4, 1954.

25. White-headed Stilt Himantopus himantopus. Several birds answering to the
description of this species were observed by the late Donald Montgomery, during
Dec. 1939. It is of interest to mention at this point, that a single example of
this plover, now days rarely seen in the metropolitan area, was recorded by the
author farther down the river at Iron Cove, two years earlier in Dec. 1937. (Proc.
R. Zool Soc. N.S.W. 1958-59: 50).

26. White Ibis Threskiornis molucca. Occasional visitor.

27. White-necked Heron Notophoyx pacifica. One record of a single bird
feeding about the fringes of the fresh-water ponds in Jan. 1956.

28. White-faced Heron Notophoyx novaehollandiae. Common, seen at all times.
Large numbers feed on the exposed mud-banks, whilst solitary birds are
frequently found fishing the shallows.

29. White Egret Egretta alba. Usually found feeding in the shallows, or perched
on mangrove stumps.

30. Nankeen Night-Heron Nycticorax caledonicus. This nocturnal species arrives
at the swamp during dusk; usually one adult bird in the company of several
stripy plumaged immature birds. They are mainly found feeding on the mud-
banks exposed by the receeding tide.

HAINES 37

31. Mangrove Heron Butorides striata. At one time fairly common, but now
days rare in the swamp. Sometimes a single bird is seen at dusk, skulking about
the outskirts of the mangroves adjoining the bay.

32. Black Swan Cygnus atratus. One observation only, Sept. 8, 1957.

33. Black Duck. Anas superciliosa. Occasionally observed.

34. Chestnut-breasted Teal Anas castanea. One male recorded on Aug; 12, 1957.
Earlier in the year, April, 20, at Homebush Bay farther up stream, twenty-six
males of this beautiful teal were observed.

35. Grey Teal Anas gibberifrons. Often encountered, feeding in the shallows
near the mangroves. The autumn and winter of 1957 was extraordinary for
the large numbers of teal inhabiting the backwaters of the Parramatta River.
The vast majority were concentrated farther up the river at Homebush Bay,
where a count of 600 was made on April, 20.

36. Musk Duck Biziura lobata. A number present during autumn and winter
of 1957. As a rule this duck keeps well out in the bay.

37. White-breasted Sea-eagle Haliaetus leucogaster. This fine species is some-
times to be seen floating high above the course of the river.

38. Black-shouldered Kite Elanus notatus. First observed hovering over the
salt-pans on Jan. 19, 1958. A nest containing young the following year, July 30,
1959. These nestlings were banded, one of which was later found dead at
Waterfall, approximately 20 miles south of Sydney. (Band No. 110-27503).

39. Little Falcon Falco longipennis. One observation only. During the afternoon
of Feb. 12, 1956 whilst wandering around the margin of the swamp, I noticed
a number of Red-capped Dotterels, (Charadrius alexandrinus) standing very
still. As I drew nearer to them, they moved their legs up and down in a jerky
manner, but refused to run or fly away from me. Every now and then they
would twist their necks, so as to gaze upwards into the sky. Obviously they
were aware of something of which they were afraid. This proved to be the case,
for very soon a Little Falcon swept low across the swamp. The Dotterels, however
remained stationary for several minutes before flying out into the salt-pans.

40. Nankeen Kestrel Falco cenchroides. Sometimes seen hovering over the
fields and rank grassland.

41. Sacred Kingfisher Halcyon sancta. Two birds, presumably a pair, camped
in the fringes of the mangroves during the winter months of 1955 and 1956.
42. Horsfield Bronze Cuckoo Chalcites basalis. An immature bird observed
on May 26, 1956.

43. Welcome Swallow Hirundo neoxena. Very common during spring and
summer. A few birds remain about the swamp throughout the winter.

44. Fairy Martin Hylochelidon ariel. A single bird recorded flying about the
salt-pan area in company of Welcome Swallows on Nov. 13, 1954. Another record
of a single bird was made on Dec. 11, 1958.

45. Grey Fantail Rhipidura fuliginosa. A solitary bird observed in the mangroves
by Major S. G. Lane on Sept. 23, 1956.

46. Black and White Fantail Rhipidura leucophrys. A common species frequenting
the outskirts of the mangroves and surrounding areas. It is interesting to
note that during the winter the call seems to be restricted to the curious chattering
used when the birds are nesting, presumably as a warning to intruders. This call
is uttered mainly at dusk when birds are enjoying a last minute forage about the
rocks fringing the foreshores; and because of its harshness, blends very well with
the bleak surroundings. An interesting contrast is the sweet nocturnal song of
spring when fantails seem to sing the words, “sweet pretty creature,” some birds
having clearer “diction” than others. Fantails appear to be in excellent plumage
in late autumn, the white markings about the face being most noticeable, and
especially so if the birds are excited, when they are shown to advantage.

47. Restless Flycatcher Seisura inquieta. One female observed feeding in a Coral
Tree on June 11, 1955.

48. Brown Flycatcher Microeca fascinans. The jerky song of this little
flycatcher may be heard continually during the sunny mornings of early spring.

38 BIRDS OF CANADA BAY

49. Rose Robin Petroica rosea. A female of this species was observed
frequenting the mangrove on July 30, 1960.

50. White-fronted Chat Epthianura albifrons. At one time common, nowadays
becoming rare.

$1. Brown Song Lark Cinclorhamphus cruralis. This rare visitor, a male, was
observed on 19 and 20 Oct., 1957.

52. Little Grassbird Megulurus gramineus. Reasonably common, both in the
mangroves and the rushes. Nests discovered in the swamp were built of mangrove
tendrils, and lined with the usual feathers. One nest contained feathers of the
Silver Gull, Larus novaehollandiae, and was placed eight feet up in a sapling.
Another nest was found five feet above mud surface, in outer twigs. The fresh
water ponds contained well concealed nests built amidst the rushes. All nests
were three to four feet above water-level and were constructed of dried rush
fronds. The dismal wailing call notes of this little warbler are to be heard at
most times of the day, and possess a peculiar minor key tone, even although
only one degree of a scale is piped in its song. Calculations of the singing pitch
were made, and birds were discovered performing on notes E natural, F sharp,
G natural, octave F sharp, and octave A respectively above middle C. A curious
chattering call is produced when the species is feeding, and especially when
chivvying their young. Immature birds have been observed in the mangroves and,
like the adults, they run and skip across the surface of the mud with great agility.
53. Reed Warbler Acrocephalus australis. Numerous nests have been found in
the rushes growing in the freshwater ponds. Nests were constructed usually from
24 feet to 4 feet above water surface, and the depth of the water beneath the
nests was approximately 4 feet. Rarely were nests located built on the fringes
of the rush beds! All nests were constructed of dried rush fronds. The several
sets of eggs examined were of the greyish-white ground colour type, and at no
time were atypical eggs discovered in clutches. The complete clutch was always
three in number. The Reed Warbler has never been observed in the mangroves;
sometimes, the loud song of the Brown Honeyeater, Lichmera indistincta, has
been mistaken for that of the Reed Warbler, there being a decided resemblance
in the two species’ call notes.

54. Golden-headed Fantail-warbler Cisticola exilis. Several pairs always found
inhabiting the rank grassland. Throughout the months of winter the male of
this species possesses, like the female, a striped crown and a long tail; but with
the approach of the nesting season cock birds may be easily distinguished from
the hens by gradually assuming a golden crown. A short tail is also adopted
during the nesting season by both sexes. This charming warbler, in size no
larger than a robust grasshopper, is one of the most interesting of birds. It con-
structs a wonderful nest, around which the leaves of living plants are often
carefully sewn, and because of this, the species is also appropriately referred to
as the Tailor Bird. Clutch sizes vary from 2 to 4, and on rare occasions nests
containing a complement of 5 are found. The eggs are blue in colour, adorned
mainly on the larger end with brown and blackish-brown irregular-shaped spots.
The young are to be observed on the wing at the end of summer and early
autumn, their lemon-shaded breast feathering immediately distininguishing them
from the adults.

55. Blue Wren Malurus cyaneus. The explosive warble of this little bird is
remarkably loud when listened to in the mangroves. This is presumably due to
the acoustics of the stillness and cloistered atmosphere of a mangrove forest.
A nest located contained three eggs and was built two feet above the ground in a
lantana bush growing near the edge of the swamp.

56. Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike Coracina novaehollandiae. Nearly always present,
or observed passing over the swamp.

57. Grey-breasted Silver-eye Zosterops lateralis. Common species in the man-
groves, also frequents the Coral Trees and the lantana thickets.

58. Brown Honeyeater Lichmera indistincta. During early spring, the beautiful
cup-shaped nests of this unobtrusively coloured honeyeater are to be found in the
mangroves, and probably rival for smallness of size nests of the Black and
Scarlet Honeyeaters (Myzomela nigra and M. sanguinolenta), two species con-

HAINES 39

sidered to build the smallest nests in Australia, as far as the Meliphagidae are
concerned. The eggs of the Brown-Honeyeater are white, and very sparingly
marked on the larger end with dark brown spots; a clutch of two is the usual
complement. Various positions are selected in which to build, but as a rule no
higher than three feet above the surface of the mud. A nest found in a small
mangrove growing on the fringes of the swamp was placed well out of sight, it
being necessary to push aside the leaves so as to reveal the nest and its contents.
Other nests, however, have been located in the interior of the mangroves attached
to thin twigs and in exposed positions, being easily seen from a distance of
twenty feet or more. During winter months this little honeyeater is found feeding
in the flowering Coral Trees, where its presence is soon made known by its
loud and beautiful singing.

59. Pipit Anthus australis. Several pairs nearly always to be found feeding about
the borders of the salt-pans, or in the coarse grass bordering the water channel.
On Oct. 17, 1957, a nearly fully fledged young was observed, and two days
later, a nest constructed in a rusty paint tin lying on its side amidst the Salicornia
was found. This unusual nest contained three well grown young.

60. Raven Corvus coronoides. Sometimes present in the mangroves, but usually
observed flying over the swamp, towards Homebush Bay, where they congregate
in large numbers.

61. Magpie-lark Grallina cyanoleuca. Frequents the storm-water channel when
He tide is out. At high tide; feeds about the fringes of the salt-pan or adjoining
elds.

62. Black-backed Magpie Gymnorhina tibicen. Breeds in the She Oaks growing
at the extreme end of the swamp. Nests have been observed in top most branches,
forty feet from the ground.

INTRODUCED SPECIES.

63. Rock Dove (Domesticated Pigeon) Columbia livia. Usually frequents the
salt-pans and rocks bordering the bay.

64. Spotted Turtle-dove Streptopelia chinensis. Common in the mangroves, where
many nests are found built of mangrove twigs. Nests are usually placed three
to five feet above the mud surface.

65. Red-whiskered Bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus. Another common species found
apnabifing the mangroves and also the thickets growing round the foreshores of
the bay.

66. Skylark Alauda arvensis. One of the pleasures of a spring morning is to
listen to this introduced species’ glorious song.

67. Common Starling Sturnus vulgaris. During late afternoon it is an interesting
sight to watch huge flocks fly about the swamp before settling down in the
mangroves for the night.

68. Common Myna Acridotheres tristis. This species appears to be more common
than it used to be in the swamp area. Mynas inhabit mainly the playing fields
and salt-pans.

69. Goldfinch Carduelis carduelis. Nests as a rule in the top-most branches of
the taller mangroves. Those discovered have been constructed of wool gathered
from nearby rubbish dumps. One nest examined contained red, yellow, orange
and blue knitting wool worked into it, the egg-cup being lined with white and
yellow thistle-down, making it nearly as colourful as its owner.

70. House Sparrow Passer domesticus. Common species.

71. Spice Finch Lonchura punctulata. Two birds identified as this species were
observed at close range on March 24, 1956. The species was again seen on
Oct. 11, 1958, when approximately eleven were put up from rank grass.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

Through the courtesy of Messrs. K. A. Hindwood and A. R. McGill,
permission was kindly granted to use the illustration of the Reedwarbler, which
appears in their book, “The Birds of Sydney.”

Sincere thanks are also due to Messrs. N. Chaffer and K. A. Hindwood for
the excellent studies of the Little Grassbird, Brown Honeyeater, Golden-headed
Fantail-warbler, and views of Canada Bay.

40

Observations on Some Australian Forest Insects

10. An Indigenous Insect, Panacela lewinae (Lewin) (Lepidoptera:
Eupterotidae) Attacking Exotic Pinus spp. in New South Wales

By K. M. Moore.
(Forestry Commission of New South Wales.)

Plate I.

SUMMARY

Attack by Panacela lewinae (Lewin) (Lewin’s bag-moth) occurred during
1960 on State Forest plantations of Pinus spp.

Results of investigations into the biology, distribution, hosts and previous
records of this insect are given and the various stages are described and figured.
Damage to Pinus spp. and broad-leaved tree species is described.

Coloration of adult males bred from a single colony, is variable.

INTRODUCTION.

A threat of extensive damage to exotic pine plantations in Australia through
the introduction of insect pests which have damaged pine forests in England,
Europe, Canada and the U.S.A. is recognised, but some indigenous insects which
have transferred their feeding habits from the natural flora to Pinus spp. in New
South Wales may also become of economic importance to forestry.

Approximately 80,000 acres of Pinus spp. have been planted by the Forestry
Commission in N.S.W. and investigations into the incidence of insect attack on
these plantations are being made. During the first year, several insects, some of
which appear to be of potential economic importance, were found to be attacking
Pinus spp. and causing varying amounts of damage.

Because of the extent of damage by Panacela lewinae (Lewin) on Mount
Topper State Forest during 1960, an examination of the biology of this insect
was made.

PREVIOUS REFERENCES TO Panacela lewinae.

This species has been referred to by numerous writers under the following

names :—
Bombyx lewinae Lewin (1805); Thaumetopoea lewinii Schaeffer (1853); Pamea
transiens Walker (1855); Oreta sobria Walker (1855); Eriogaster ? simplex
Walk. (1855); Naprepa pilosa Walk. (1865); N. hirta Walk. (1865); Panacela
rufescens Walk. (1865); Semuta pristina Walk. (1865); Turner (1902) gives
Clisiocampa lewinae, Trilocha rufescens and Semuta prisca as synonyms of
Ocinara lewinae, then refers to the species (1922) as Panacela lewinae; Froggatt
(1923) published some of the insect’s biology together with three figures, under
the latter name and with the common name of Lewin’s processional caterpillar
moth; Strand (in Seitz 1929) and Anonymous (C.S.I.R.O., 1955) refer to the
species as Lewinibombyx lewinae (Lew.); specimens in the collection of the
Forestry Commission have been identified at The British Museum, London, as
Triloba simplex Walk., and by I. F. B. Common of C.S.I.R.O. as Panacela
lewinae.

The latter name is used in this paper.

HOSTS.

The following species are known to be hosts of P. lewinae:—Eucalyptus
triantha Link (white mahogany); E. deanei Maiden (Deane’s gum); E. gummifera
(Gaertn.) Hochr. (bloodwood); E. lindleyana DC. (kayer-ro or river pepper-
mint); either E. tinghaensis Blakely & McKie (Tingha stringybark) or E.
McKieana Blakely (McKie’s stringybark); FE. umbra R. T. Baker (bastard
mahogany); E. paniculata Smith (grey ironbark); E. propinqua Deane & Maiden
(small-fruited grey gum); E. piperita Smith (Sydney peppermint); Angophora
floribunda (Sm.) Sweet (rough-barked apple); Acacia filicifolia Cheel et Welch;
A. prominens A. Cunn. ex G. Don. (Gosford wattle); Syncarpia glomulifera
(Sm.) Niedenzu (turpentine); Exocarpus cupressiformis Labill. (native cherry)
(a root-parasite of Eucalyptus spp.); Pinus radiata D. Don. (Monterey pine) and
P. patula Schlect. & Chamisso (spreading-leaved pine).

MOORE 41

A number of larvae collected from E. deanei were reared to adults in the
laboratory on Eucalyptus saligna Smith (Sydney blue gum), and those occurring
on E. triantha, A. floribunda, S. glomulifera and P. radiata were reared on their
respective host-plants.

Larvae could not survive on Callitris rhomboidea R. Br. (Port Jackson
cypress pine) or C. Augelii (Carr.) (white cypress), and although a group of
eggs was laid on the former species in the field, larvae shrivelled during the first
instar. Larvae on S. glomulifera and E. triantha in the immediate vicinity
developed normally.

During 1953 to 1955 severe attack and consequent defoliation by a closely
allied species of Panacela had occurred on E. gummifera and Tristania conferta
R. Br. (brush box) on Bald Knob State Forest, Yabbra S.F. and Donaldson S.F.
(Casino Forestry District: Urbenville Subdistrict), but no records of attack by
Panacela spp. on Pinus spp. could be found.

DISTRIBUTION.

P. lewinae occurs from sea-level to an altitude of about 3,500 feet and has
been collected in New South Wales from Gibraltar Range S.F. and Mount Topper
S.F. (Glen Innes Forestry District: Inverell Subdistrict); Tuggolo S.F. (Tamworth
Subdistrict); Ourimbah S.F. (Newcastle District: Wyong Subdistrict); Cumber-
land S.F. (Metropolitan Forestry District); Macquarie Pass in the Illawarra
district, Uralla on the Northern Tablelands and from Lisarow on the Central
Coast. Froggatt (1923) reported attack occurring as far south as Bateman’s
Bay and Bega on the coast during 1903 and heavy attack in the Gilgai-Bundarra
area on the North-West Slopes during 1911. Turner (1902) records the species
occurring at Brisbane, Queensland; Walker (1865) states that a specimen in the
British Museum is from Swan River (presumably from Western Australia), and
there are specimens from Cronulla, Manly and Port Macquarie, N.S.W., in the
Australian Museum.

DAMAGE.

When feeding on broad-leaved host-plants such as Angophora spp. and
Eucalyptus spp., early instar larvae skeletonise foliage, but during later instars
the leaves are consumed by them. On Pinus spp., larvae feed either at the distal
ends of the needles, or cut through them near the proximal end so that the distal
portions are detached and fall to the ground. Maximum damage to foliage occurs
during November and December when most larvae are in the last instar. Trees of
all ages are attacked.

Large trees of P. radiata and P. patula on Mount Topper S.F., Mt. Mitchell
S.F. and Armidale S.F. which were inspected during December 1960 were not
severely damaged although the shelters of larvae were numerous and widely
distributed on foliage throughout the 570 acres of Pinus spp. on Mt. Topper S.F.
Young trees of P. radiata up to 10 feet in height and large trees of A. floribunda
were defoliated (PI. 1, fig. 1).

BIOLOGY.

Eggs are approximately 0.7 mm. in diameter, opalescent, smooth, more or
less spherical and with the base concave. They occur usually in compact groups
of up to 300, the groups often being completely covered by setae from the distal
portion of the female moth’s abdomen. Eggs may be found during January to
May occurring on all aspects of, and at all heights on, the host-plant, and hatch
during March to May.

Larvae.

Larvae pass through six instars, and during each succeeding instar bear an
increased number of barbed setae and groups of smooth short spines which may
cause severe irritation to the skin when contacted.

Layers of silk which bind several leaves together are constructed by first
instar larvae (Pl. 1, fig. 2). Leaves of broad-leaved species incorporated in the
silken layers are skeletonised by larvae feeding within the shelter where a
considerable quantity of excreta may be retained. Shelters are sometimes con-
structed around the bole of a host-tree at ground-level instead of on the foliage,
and then appear similar to those of Ochrogaster contraria (Walk.) (the bag
shelter or processionary caterpillar).

AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

42

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Verrucae

EXPLANATION OF TEXT-FIGURES.
Panacela lewinae from E. triantha, Lisarow.

OOIDAR WI

Head-capsule of second instar larva.
Head-capsule of third instar larva.
Head-capsule of fourth instar larva.
Head-capsule of sixth instar larva (anterior).
Head-capsule of sixth instar larva (lateral).
Posterior segments of pupa, showing cremaster.
Map of first instar larva.

Map of second instar larva.

Map of sixth instar larva.

43

44 AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

During the third and subsequent instars, a single group of larvae may disperse
into several smaller groups and construct separate shelters on other portions of
the foliage. Additional external layers of silk webbing may be constructed on
the original shelter, thus enlarging the bag.

About 350 larvae of the third and fourth instar may occur in one bag.
Larvae remain in the shelters during the day, usually emerging during the night
when they disperse over the foliage to feed. After feeding for three or four
consecutive nights larvae may remain in the bags without further feeding for
several days. The boles, branches and twigs of some host-plants appear silvery-
grey when covered with the silken strands constructed by larvae as they proceed
to the feeding-sites.

When ecdysis occurs either within the shelters or on their outer surfaces,
exuviae may remain attached to the shelters for many months. During the day
larvae often cause a loud scratching or rustling noise by twitching the head and
thorax and the anterior portion of the abdomen, from side to side. The noise is
apparently caused by the rubbing of the mandibles or the thoracic legs against
the silken threads, and is amplified by the dried foliage incorporated in the silken
bag. When larvae are disturbed, they twist and turn vigorously, often falling to
the ground, or descending on silken threads.

Larvae at Mount Topper S.F. during December 1960 were observed to have
dispersed over the foliage of either the attacked trees or those nearby, or through
the grass below these trees.

Maps showing verrucae and the more usual pattern of the dark areas on
larvae during instars 1, 2 and 6 on E. triantha at Lisarow, are given in figs. 7 to 9.
Because of the large number of barbed setae and spines on larvae of each instar,
their locations are not indicated on the maps.

A last instar larva is figured in colour by Lewin (1805).

Descriptions. (Larvae from E. triantha, Lisarow).

The coloration of larvae from various localities, or from the same colony,
varies considerably.

lst instar. Approximate length up to 5 mm. Head capsule: dark brown to
black, and white absent from epicranium and frons. General coloration: cream
and brown; prothorax with a variable, transverse brown area; meso- and meta-
thorax and abdominal segments 1 & 2 pale fawn; remainder of abdominal
segments dorsally, progressively darker brown posteriorly; segment 10 brown.

2nd Instar. Length, ca. 5 mm. to 8 mm. Head capsule black (fig. 1).
General coloration: similar to 1st instar, but dorsal brown area more extensive
and darker; groups of spines and a few barbed setae arising from red-brown
verrucae, with barbed setae longest on meso-thorax and abdominal segment 10;
spines and setae more numerous than Ist instar.

3rd instar. Length, ca. 8 mm. to 10 mm. Head capsule with white crescent
on epicranium adjacent to apex of frons (fig. 2). General coloration: similar to
2nd instar, but brown areas darker and more extensive.

4th instar. Length, ca. 10 mm. to 13 mm. Head capsule with a white circle
extending across upper half of frons, and an indistinct cream area contiguous to
ocelli; remainder dark brown but paler along median suture of epicranium
(fig. 3). General coloration: similar to 3rd instar, but darker and suffused with
pink; dorsal verrucae now cream; a prominent medio-dorsal longitudinal stripe
dark brown to black; a narrow medio-ventral dark stripe on abdominal segs. | to
9; ventro-lateral verrucae darker and more elongate longitudinally than in previous
instars.

5th instar. Length, ca. 13 mm. to 20 mm. Head capsule and clypeus as in
4th instar, but white area near ocelli more extensive. General coloration: paler
than 4th instar; dorsal area diffused tan, and with median stripe indistinct;
posterior pair of dorsal verrucae and anterior pair on dorsal edge, brown, on
each segment; groups of dorsal spines on each abdominal segment overlapping
medio-dorsally; sometimes a narrow white dorso-lateral stripe above the spiracles,
and two narrow white medio-dorsal stripes; abdominal segment 10 white pos-
teriorly; dark medio-ventral stripe absent.

6th instar. Length, ca. 20 mm. to 28 mm. Head capsule with white circle
as in instars 4 and 5; white area contiguous to ocelli extending to epicranial

MOORE 45

suture (figs. 4 & 5). General coloration: green, mottled brown and orange-brown;
both barbed setae and spines very numerous; a large dense oval tuft of black
spines with bases cream, at centre of each abdominal segment medio-dorsally,
and a smaller tuft on meta-thorax; each group of spines is joined by two thin
white lines which continue on to the meso-and meta-thoracic segments; two thin
white lines above the spiracles each side; posterior of abdominal segment 10
mainly white; barbed setae darker than in Sth instar.

Pupae.

Larvae usually leave the bag shelters to pupate among the foliage, under bark
or among leaves and debris near the base of the host-plant. They construct
thin-walled cocoons of pale brown silk in which their setae are incorporated.
Pupation occupies about five weeks. Pupae are at first red-brown, later becoming
dark red-brown. The cremaster is a dense group of hooked setae (fig. 6).
Adults.

Female moths have a wing-span of about 30 mm. to 35 mm., and the males
of about 23 mm. to 28 mm.

Coloration of males is variable from pale fawn with a pink suffusion, to
dark fawn or grey, and with darker bands of variable width and colour across
the wings. Such variation occurs in the one series bred from the same colony
of larvae. Female moths are usually pale grey, sometimes lightly suffused pink,
with narrow darker grey wavy bands across the wings. The abdomen bears a
large tuft of paler coloured scales distally (Pl. 1, fig. 4).

Life-cycle.

The complete life-cycle occupies twelve months, with the various stages

occurring on the central coast during the following months:—

Adults: December to March

Eggs: January to May

Larvae: Ist instar, March to June; 2nd instar, April to July; 3rd instar, June to

August; 4th instar, July to September; 5th instar, September to November;

6th instar, November to January.
Pupae: December to February.

The various stages are in the collection of the Forestry Commission of
N.S.W.

Parasites.

Specimens of Anamastax sp. (Tachinidae) have been reared from larvae from
Mt. Topper S.F.

Predators.

An adult specimen of Cermatulus nasalis Westwood (Hemiptera: Pentato-
midae) was collected at Mt. Topper S.F., with its proboscis inserted in a last
instar larva, near which were two other flaccid larvae apparently also recently

attacked by it.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

The writer is grateful to Mr. D. K. McAlpine of the Australian Museum,
Sydney, for assistance with references to the species studied, and the identification
of the predator; and to Mr. I. F. B. Common of the Division of Entomology,
C.S.LR.O., for identification of the species and comparison of larvae and adults
with closely allied species.

REFERENCES.

Anonymous (C.S.I.R.O.) (1955). “Common Names of Insects.” Bull. 275.
C.S.I.R.O., Melbourne

Froggatt, W W. (1923). “Forest Insects of Australia,” pp. 61-63. N.S.W. Govt.
Printer.

Herrich-Schaeffer, G. A. (1853). Ausser Schmet. Lepid. Exot. fig. 510.

Lewin, J. W. (1805). “Prodromus Ent.” p. 7. (Coloured pl., 4 figs.). T. Lewin,
London.

Seitz, A. (1929). Macrolepidoptera of the World. 10 (2): 381.

Turner, A. J. (1902). Tr. Roy. Soc. Sth. Aust. 26 (2): 184.

——__________ (1922). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 47 (3): 358.

Walker, F. (1855). List Spec. Lepid. Ins. Coll. Brit. Mus. (5): 1156, 1168;

(6): 1473. Trustees, British Museum.
(1865). ibid. (32): 489, 490, 546, 547 (suppl).

46

Observations on Some Australian Forest Insects

11. Two Species of Lepidopterous Leaf-miners Attacking
Eucalyptus pilularis Smith
By K. M. Moore.
(Forestry Commission of New South Wales.)

SUMMARY.

Severe damage to foliage of E. pilularis Smith (blackbutt) by the leaf-miners
Acrocercops laciniella (Meyrick) (Gracilariidae) and a species of the “Tinea”
nectarea group (Incurvariidae) occurred on State Forests in New South Wales
from July to September, 1959.

Some aspects of the biology of the two species of Lepidoptera are recorded
and leaf-mines, larval head-capsules and setal maps of larvae are figured. Hosts
are given and damage is described.

INTRODUCTION.

Eucalyptus pilularis is of considerable economic importance in New South
Wales, being regarded as one of the most valuable hardwood timbers.

Small scattered populations of various species of leaf-miners of the
Gracilariidae and Incurvariidae are relatively numerous on many tree-species, but
no records of extensive populations of these species in New South Wales could be
located. Newman & Clark (Leaflet No. 165, Dept. of Agriculture, Western
Australia) reported a large population of tineids, the species of which was not
identified, attacking Eucalyptus marginata Smith (jarrah) and E&. rubida in
Western Australia. (According to Blakely (1955) E. rubida does not occur in
Western Australia; and it is probable that the species referred to is E. rudis Endl.
(moitch).

Severe damage by the two leaf-mining Lepidoptera Acrocercops laciniella
(Meyr.) (Gracilariidae) and ‘Tinea’ sp. (a species of the nectarea group within
this genus) (Incurvariidae) occurred during the months of July to September,
1959 on E. pilularis on Olney and Olney East State Forests (Newcastle Forestry
District: Wyong Subdistrict). Damage by both species appeared to be confined to
E. pilularis. The area of attack was at an approximate altitude of 1500 ft., and
extended for several miles along, and on either side of, the Wyong-Olney Road.

(A) Acrocercops laciniella (Meyr.).

HOSTS

This species has been reared by the writer from Angophora floribunda
(Sm.) Sweet (rough-barked apple), A. costata Domin (smooth-barked apple),
Eucalyptus triantha Link (white mahogany), E. saligna Smith (Sydney blue-gum)
and E. pilularis.

DAMAGE.

Foliage of large trees, or coppice and regeneration of all ages and heights,
was attacked and presented a brown, fire scorched appearance, distinguishable
from a considerable distance. Both young and coarse foliage was almost com-
pletely destroyed, and although both upper and lower leaf-surfaces were severely
affected, most of the attack occurred beneath the upper leaf-cuticle. When
maximum damage was apparent, almost every leaf had been attacked, the younger
leaves being curled longitudinally, and the crown-foliage of trees had turned
brown. The palisade tissue in a leaf was often entirely destroyed.

Some three months after the attack had ceased, trees had reproduced crown-
foliage and the stand did not appear to have been greatly affected. It thus
appears that, unless sustained heavy attack occurs, with recurrences of defoliation,
the trees are able to recover, with little or no apparent detrimental effect.

MINES.

Initially, the mines are linear, but as the larvae develop they form an exten-
sive white blotch area with the cuticle of the leaf forming a covering above the

MOORE 47

Fig. 1. Head-capsule, 2nd instar larva, Acrocercops laciniella (Meyr.), showing
dorsal setae on right, ventral setae on left.

Fig. 2. Antenna of 2nd instar larva, A. laciniella.
Fig. 3. Mandible of 2nd instar larva, A. laciniella.

Fig. 4. Head-capsule, 3rd instar larva, A. laciniella, dorsal setae on right, ventral
setae on left.

Fig. 5. Anterior spine on pupa, A. laciniella.

48 AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

mine (fig. 9). The cuticle becomes stained with variable amounts of cream to
brown discoloration due to the more or less liquid larval excreta in the mine.
On E. pilularis the cuticle of the blotch area is stained a darker brown than
that on the other host-species from which A. laciniella has been reared. On
E. pilularis and A. floribunda several mines, which may coalesce, are sometimes
constructed in the one leaf and may contain as many as four larvae.

During the two sap-feeding instars when the linear, and some of the blotch
area of the mines are constructed, larvae feed on the palisade tissue, and the
dark, almost liquid excreta is deposited on the floor of the mine in a serpentine
pattern. The floor of the mine later becomes pitted where the larvae feed deeper
into the spongy tissues and their excreta becomes more solidified and of pellet-
form which is typical of most leaf-eating lepidopterous larvae. This is then
distributed in a narrow band around the perimeter of the mine.

EGGS.

The eggs, approximately 0.6 mm. in diameter, are round, dome-shaped,
smooth and translucent, the surface attached to the leaf being flattened. After
eclosion the chorion is transparent, shiny and clearly visible as a silvery spot
at the commencement of the mine. Adults oviposit either on the upper or lower
leaf-surface of E. pilularis but the eggs have been found to occur only on the
lower leaf-surfaces of A. floribunda, E. triantha and E. saligna. Excreta from a
young larva is faintly visible within the chorion as a pale brown stain or as
minute red-brown spots deposited as the larva cuts its way through the base
of the egg attached to the leaf-surface and commences to mine in the leaf-tissues.

LARVAE.

Larvae of A. laciniella may be found during the period March to December,
and are at times numerous on 4. floribunda during October.

The prognathous mouth-parts of the Ist and 2nd instars (figs. 1 and 3) are
peculiarly adapted to mine the sappy palisade cells of the leaf-tissues, and enable
the larvae to feed only in a forward direction. In the 3rd and 4th instars the
head-capsule is more rounded (fig. 4) produced antero-ventrally, and similar to
that of other leaf-eating lepidopterous larvae. The altered structure of the head-
capsule and mouth-parts thus enables the larva to deepen the floor of the mine
by consuming the spongy mesophyl tissues. The oil-glands and the venation of
the leaf are avoided by the mining larvae, and remain as raised prominences on
the floor of the mine.

During August and September the larvae feed for approximately six weeks,
from eclosion to emergence from the mine through a semicircular slit in the
cuticle (fig. 9).

After leaving the mine, the larvae spin pale pink to orange-brown opaque
cocoons, satiny in appearance, among the debris on the ground. Cocoons may
be found on the under-surfaces of leaves of Pteridion aquilinum L. (bracken
fern), in curled leaves of Eucalyptus spp. and in pieces of curled bark on the
ground beneath the attacked trees. When numerous larvae were held in jars,
pupation always occurred on the outer surface of the blotch portion of the
mine-cuticle.

As many as eight small shiny globules, of the same colour as the cocoon,

are attached to the external surface of the cocoon during its construction.
Description of larva.

Ist instar: Length, approximately 1.5 mm. Head-capsule flattened dorso-
ventrally, about as wide as long, with one lateral ocellus only, each side, and nearer
to the antenna than the anterior ocellus of the 2nd instar; lateral and dorsal setae
absent, but two setae present latero-ventrally; thoracic legs absent and prolegs
without crochets.

2nd instar: Length approx. 2.5 mm. Head-capsule flattened as in Ist instar;
two lateral ocelli each side, and setae as in fig. 1; antennae and mandibles as in
figs. 2 and 3; thoracic legs absent and prolegs without crochets.

MOORE 49

. Setal map, 3rd instar larva, A. laciniella.
. Setal map, 4th instar larva, A. laciniella.

. Prothoracic leg, 3rd instar larva, A. laciniella, showing setal arrange-
ment.

Early-stage mine (lower) and blotch mine, A. laciniella on leaf of
E. pilularis.

50 AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

Larvae are white, pale yellow or pale green during the first two instars, and
during the 2nd instar a prominent medio-dorsal and medio-ventral brown mark
is usually present on each segment.

3rd instar: Length approx. 3.5 mm. Head-capsule not flattened, with four
ocelli, and setae, as in fig. 4; thoracic legs as in fig. 8; prolegs on abdominal
segments 3 to 5, and usually each with three or four crochets, and prolegs on
seg. 6 without crochets. A setal map of this instar larva is given in fig. 6.

4th instar: Length approx. 5 mm. Head-capsule similar to that of 3rd instar,
but with five ocelli each side; thoracic legs as in 3rd instar; prolegs on
abdominal segs. 3 to 5 usually each with six crochets; prolegs on seg. 6 without
crochets (fig. 7).

During the last two instars when the spongy mesophyl of the leaf is
consumed, larvae are usually pink in colour. During the 3rd instar there may be
brown to dark grey medio-dorsal and medio-ventral markings on each segment,
but on 4th instar larvae the darkened areas are usually present only on the pro-
thorax and 10th abdominal segment.

PUPAE.

Length approximately 4.3 mm. The pointed prominence on the anterior end
of the pupa (fig. 5) bears a series of minute spines. The lateral spines and setae
on the abdomen apparently assist the forward movement of the pupa against the
end of the cocoon, when the anterior prominence fractures the silken case through
which the pupa is protruded to about half of its length at the time of emergence
of the adult. The pupal stage occupies about three weeks during September.

ADULTS.

Adults have a wing-span of about 9 mm. The fore-wings are striped longi-
tudinally from the base to the apex with brown, white and gold. At the base of
the apex on the posterior margin of the wing, are two small areas of black scales
surrounding a few white scales. The hindwings are dark grey, narrow, and edged
with grey cilia which are longest on the posterior wing-border. The grey antennae
extend to beyond the wing-tips.

When in a resting position the adult is inclined at about 45 deg. to the object
to which it is attached. This habit appears to be typical of adults of the
Gracilariidae.

The life-cycle of A. laciniella from egg to adult occupies approx. 6 to 8
weeks during September and October, and several generations may occur during
the one year.

Unidentified species of the Braconini (Braconidae) and Chalcidoidea were
reared from mines of this species. Braconid larvae pupate within the mine, in
silken cocoons surrounded by the excreta of the miner. Several small red larvae
of the family Cecidomyiidae (Diptera) found in mines where areas of intense
black staining denote their presence, were reared to the adult stage. These larvae
spin small cocoons in depressions below the black areas in the mines, where they
pupate. The function of the cecidomyiids within the mines of A. laciniella was
not investigated.

(B) A species of the “Tinea” nectarea group.

Attack by this species was concurrent with that of A. laciniella and sometimes
occurred on the same tree. The leaves of the tree-crowns were less affected by
this species than by the gracilariids, as the mines were less extensive and consider-
ably less leaf-area was destroyed by the larvae, although as many as 25 individual
mines occurred in the one leaf.

Young coppice and regeneration were rarely attacked, and the more mature
leaves of the tree-crowns appeared to be the site favoured for oviposition.

MOORE 51

fe

ea je
a9 92 09

el
79

10.

ite

12

13:

Setal map, 2nd instar larva, “Tinea” nectarea group on E. pilularis.
Setal map, 3rd instar larva, “Tinea’ sp. on E. pilularis.

Last instar larva mine, “Tinea” sp., on E. pilularis, showing future pupal
case, and oviposition site near centre.

Mines of “Tinea” sp. on leaf of E. pilularis.

52

AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

VU ope

i | ;
Hua | ain
eh bin apn a eT TTTETR
at Bi

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

i
O25mm

yy NlUtyy

Ang

16

0-25 mm

Dorsal spines and setae on third seg. of pupa, “Tinea” sp.

. Dorsal aspect of terminal seg. of female pupa, “Tinea” sp.
. Dorsal aspect of terminal seg. of male pupa, “Tinea” sp.
. Head-capsule, last instar larva, “Tinea” sp. on E. pilularis, showing dorsal

setae (right) and ventral setae (left).

MOORE 53

MINES.

Construction of the mine is commenced at, and extended around, the site
of oviposition. During early instars, the larvae destroy the palisade and spongy
tissues. Larval excreta is retained in the mine and the upper and lower leaf-
surfaces are stained a mottled light and dark brown. During the penultimate larval
instar the mines may be oval or round, and during the last instar they are oval
in shape (fig. 12). An area beyond the perimeter of the future pupal case is
mined, and becomes translucent as the destruction of the parenchyma proceeds
and the upper and lower leaf-cuticles only are retained.

When larvae have completed feeding, the excreta is moved to the perimeter
of the mine and the upper and lower internal surfaces of the central pupal case
are covered with a layer of silk. The dark, oval pupal case containing the larva
fractures around its edge, is shed from the leaf and falls to the ground. Pupal
cases are approx. 5 mm. by 3 mm. Completed mines are usually found on foliage
during August, and this species completes only one generation each year.

EGGS.

The eggs are about 0.4 mm. in diameter, and are inserted beneath the cuticle
of the leaf. Oviposition occurs during April and May.

LARVAE.

Approximate lengths of larvae are:—1st instar, 1.0 mm; 2nd instar, 2.0 mm.;
3rd instar, 3.7 mm. Larvae are at first white to pale cream, darkening to cream
suffused grey during the last instar. The grey suffusion is caused by numerous
minute, flat grey tubercles situated close together on the surface of the exoskeleton.

The head-capsule (fig. 17) is flattened dorso-ventrally during instars 1 and 2,
and produced antero-ventrally during instar 3. The head is retractable to almost
completely within the prothorax. The prothorax is flattened dorso-ventrally and
wedge-shaped toward the anterior border.

Thoracic legs are absent during all instars, but pseudopods are present on
thoracic segments 2 and 3, and abdominal segments 3 to 6. Dorsal processes
are present on thoracic segments 2 and 3 and on abdominal segment 7 on its
posterior half (figs. 10 and 11). During the 3rd instar abdominal pseudopods on
segs. 3 to 6 bear a transverse line of small spines or crochets across their centres.
During the 2nd instar the minute spines or crochets are barely visible under high
magnification.

PUPAE.

Length approx. 2.8 mm. Segments 3 and 7 are shown in figs. 14 to 16.
Although pupal cases are usually shed from the leaves during August, larvae do
not pupate until March or April of the following year. Pupation usually occupies
about 2 to 3 weeks during April, when adult moths commence emerging. The
pupal exuviae is protruded to about half its length from one end of the pupal
case, remaining attached to it after the adult has emerged.

ADULTS.

Adults have a wing-span of about 5 mm. The forewings are shiny grey-black
with a copper-coloured suffusion. Patches of whitish coloured scales tipped yellow
are on the posterior border at about one quarter of the distance from the base
of the wing, a smaller area near the posterior border at about two thirds the
distance from the base, and a few scales sometimes at two thirds from the base;
a large patch on the costa at two thirds from the base, and a smaller area at
three quarters from the base. Hindwings are grey in colour.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

Thanks are expressed to Mr. I. F. B. Common, of the Division of Ento-
mology, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, for the identifications of the two species of
Lepidoptera.

54

The Butterflies of the Mallacoota District
By D. F. GCrospy, F.R.E:S., F.N:G.V.

The area of Victoria east of Lakes Entrance is an interesting one for the
butterfly collector from two points of view. Firstly because of the comparatively
little collecting done there, and secondly because that which has been done has
yielded records indicating that the area contains a fair proportion of species which
are found more abundantly in New South Wales, and generally not elsewhere
in Victoria.

In order to more or less explore Eastern Victoria entomologically, the author
made trips from Melbourne to Mallacoota in January 1948 and February 1949,
the results of these being reported in the “Victorian Naturalist” (Crosby, 1951).
Two further visits to Mallacoota were made subsequently, the first in late January
1955, and then in early November, 1956.

The purpose of these notes is to bring up-to-date the information given pre-
viously on the butterflies recorded, and to briefly summarize the previous captures.

Hesperilla mastersi Waterhouse, 1900.

Following the first capture of a female on February 10th, 1949, another
female was caught in a nearby locality to the southeast of the Mallacoota town-
ship on January 30th, 1955. This latter specimen was taken in an open sheltered
patch of Gahnia melanocarpa, upon which the species may feed, however, a
careful search failed to yield any evidence of shelters. In the same general area
there were scattered bushes of Gahnia clarkei which also could be the foodplant.
Further investigation of the bushes in the following November also produced no
signs of larvae or shelters. In a recent paper this species has been noted by Burns
(1960) as ocurring north of Cann River, which further extends its range eastwards.

Hesperilla picta (Leach), 1814.

This species has been taken from Nowa Nowa, only a few miles east of
Lakes Entrance (on Gahnia clarkei) through to Mallacoota and nearby Gipsy
Point. Males and females have been taken on the wing in late January, February
and early March. It is interesting to note that Mr. John Landy took a perfect
female on February 17th, 1960 on Wilson’s Promontory, which further extends
the records to the west by about 150 miles. There are good gullies of Gahnia
clarkei in various places in the park there.

Trapezites maheta praxedes (Plotz), 1884.

Three males in very good condition were taken in a sunny spot beside the
road to the east of Mallocoota on January 30th, 1955.

DISTRIBUTION MAP

N. mathewi H. mastersi

2. Ebor 1. Mt. Warning

4. Forster 3. Port Macquarie
5. Myall Lakes 7. Narara, Lisarow
6. Port Stevens 9. Katoomba

7. Woy Woy 10. National Park
8. Narrabeen 11. Bulli Pass

9. Blackheath 12. Illawarra, Clifton
10. Sydney 13. Moruya

13. Moruya 15. Merimbula

14. Narooma 16. Mallacoota

15. Pambula, Merimbula 17. Cann River

18. Flinders Island
19. Launceston, Underwood

CROSBY 55

QUEENSLAND

NEW SOUTH WALES

56 MALLACOOTA BUTTERFLIES

Trapezites symmomus symmomus Hubner, 1823.

Detailed examination of three further male specimens taken at Mallacoota
on January 30th, 1955 together with two taken in February, 1949, at the same
locality confirm them to be the New South Wales subspecies. One somewhat
intermediate example was taken at Tostaree in early February, 1949, and two
further males in January, 1956. These appear to be closer to the typical race
rather than TJ. s. soma Waterhouse, 1932.

Appias leis ega (Boisduval), 1836.

In a pleasant sunlit clearing in the forest near the inlet at Mallacoota, four
males and two females were caught on January 24th, 1955. All were in perfect
condition and apparently bred nearby.

Neolucia mathewi (Miskin), 1890.

In early November 1956 whilst strolling through the forest south of Malla-
coota in search of clumps of Gahnia where H. mastersi may be flying, a shrub
about 10 feet high of Monotoca elliptica (a common coastal shrub with small
starry white flowers, minute orange berries and leaves about } in. long and
4 in. wide and spined at the end) seemed to have a large number of small dark
butterflies flying round it. A number of these were caught and found to be
Neolucia mathewi. A further search revealed them around many similar bushes
in the sun. As there was a high proportion of males, their season must have only
just commenced. This record is of interest as it extends the previously recorded
range on the mainland by about 60 miles to the south. Waterhouse (1932), lists
it as occurring as far south only as Narooma, and at Flinders Island and North
Eastern Tasmania. However there are specimens in the Australian Museum,
Sydney, from Merimbula, N.S.W.

In November of the subsequent year a search was made of the coastal scrub

around Port Albert, but no signs of the species were seen despite an abundance
of the food plant.

The following species were also recorded from the area:

Mesodina halyzia halyzia (Hewitson), 1868. Common, particularly close to the
shore.

Toxidia andersoni (Kirby), 1893. Few odd specimens.

Toxidia doubledayi (Felder), 1862. Occasional specimen.

Toxidia parvulus (Plotz), 1884. Rare.

Toxidia peron (Latrielle), 1824. Common.

Delias harpalyce (Donovan), 1805. Common.

Candalides xanthospilos (Hiibner), 1806. Common throughout.
Ialmenus evagoras evagoras (Donovon), 1805. Common but local.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to thank Mr. C. N. Smithers, Curator of Insects, Australian
Museum, Sydney, and Mr. A. N. Burns, Entomologist, National Museum, Mel-
bourne, for their kind assistance in providing distribution data.

REFERENCES

Burns, A. N., 1960, New and Interesting Records of Butterflies for Victoria,
Vic. Nat. 77 (5): 128-130.

Crosby, D. F., 1951, Notes on Some Eastern Victorian Butterflies, with a New
Victorian Record, Vic. Nat. 68 (6): 99

Waterhouse, G. A., 1932 “What Butterfly is That?” p. 171.

57

Some Notes on the Moths and Butterflies Found
Occurring in the Haberfield and Five Dock
Districts, Sydney, N.S.W.

By L. CourTNEY HAINES.

The Haberfield and Five Dock areas are known as Western Suburbs of
Sydney. Both are old residential districts and until recently still maintained a
few relics of convict days in the form of stone steps and sandstone walls. Both
suburbs adjoin the shores of Iron Cove Bay, with Five Dock extending as far
as Hen and Chicken Bay, a tidal backwater of the Parramatta River.

Before settlement extended on all sides, a “wild” section consisting of several
acres was to be found adjoining Iron Cove. These fields, bordered by hedges of
Lantana and Blackberry were always of interest to the naturalist and it was here
I remember seeing for the first time, those huge butterflies, the Wanderer,
Danaus plexippus, and the even larger Orchard Swallowtail, Papilio aegeus aegeus.

Nowadays, the only area that still remains unspoiled is Rodd’s Peninsula, a
narrow neck of land extending out into Iron Cove. This peninsula is covered
with coarse grasses, Lantana and a creeping vine (Kennedya rubicunda). A few
trim blue-leaved shrubs (Notelea longifolia), a native food-plant of the Casuarina
(privet) Hawk Moth (Psilogramma menephron casuarinae) are also to be found,
while several small Rough-barked Apples (Angophora floribunda) manage to
survive on the wind-blown crest of the peninsula. The latter is one of the food-
plants of a large and lovely Lappet Moth.

Around the foreshores of Iron Cove are patches of Salicornia, Salt bush and
Sedge and here may be found those little unobtrusive butterflies, the Chequered
and Salt-pan Blues (Neolucia serpentata and N. sulpitius sulpitius); their eggs, cater-
pillars and chysalids, always being safely esconced on their food-plants, just above
high-tide mark!

Kunzea bush, called locally Tea-tree, and the food-plant of a very elegant
Notodont Moth, at one time grew plentifully about the districts, but is now, except
for a few retained in gardens, entirely absent, as is also the case with the Wattles.
Although most of the residents are keen gardeners they appear to be, unfor-
tunately, devoid of an appreciation of trees. Apart from the Box-brushes,
therefore, (Tristania) is lopped down outrageously each summer when their shade
would be most welcome, and a few Pepper trees (Schinus mollis) bordering the
quiet side streets, together with a number of Eucalypts growing in the several
painfully well kept parks, very few trees break the monotony of the red tiled
and grey slate roofs which seem to stretch as far as the eye can see.

The majority of day-flying moths and butterflies observed or captured have
been visitors to my garden, lured there by various sweet-smelling flowers.
Foremost among these is Buddleia, which nothing can rival; its mauve flowers,
exuding a scent resembling that of old honey, are attended throughout the day
by the larger butterflies and skippers. The day-flying vine moths are also very
partial to its fragrance. Moths possessing flight periods of a crepuscular nature,
do not appear to be particularly charmed by the Buddleia blooms, but instead
favour the Petunia beds, California Poppies, Honeysuckle flowers and the blooms
of Pittosporum. Loquat tree blossoms and the sweet-smelling Privet flowers also
attract numerous moths belonging to the Noctuid family. The garden pest, known
as Wild Kapok (Araujia albens) which will climb everywhere if one permits it
to do so, not only claims the attention of the little Hawk Moth (Hippotion scrofa),
but also snares it by the proboscis while it is busy probing the depths of the
flowers for nectar. I have, on occasions, set the little fellows free, by gently
withdrawing their long tongues. The already-mentioned California Poppies also
trap these little hawks but not being as tenacious as the Wild Kapok flowers the
moths after a while of frenzidly beating their wings, usually gain their freedom.

The street lamps at night are sometimes worth a visit with the long-handled
net, and on occasions, interesting moths have been added to the collection. One
remarkable capure made at a lamp facing the water-front, was an almost perfect

58 HABERFIELD LEPIDOPTERA

male Xyleutes lituratus (Cossidae). Another “good thing” taken on the lamps
was the Scarce Emperor (Antherea helena), a silk moth of large size, usually
associated with mountainous districts. The more common Emperor Gum-moth
(Antherea eucalypti) is sometimes quite numerous around the lamps. Its eggs
are deposited on the leaves of the Box-brushes, Pepper trees and the Rough-
barked Apple-gums. I have bred out some very attractive forms of this most
variable species. {t is indeed remarkable, as the following will show, the number
of species of Lepidoptera that the persevering collector can find in such well-
settled districts, possessing no bush-land, few trees and fewer open places.

Division: HETEROCERA (The Moths).
The Macro-lepidoptera.

Family Sphingidae, Hawk Moths.
1. Chromis erotus Cramer. Orange Underwing Hawk. Rare, two captures only,
the first in 1937 and the second during the summer of 1946. Both were found
on the footpath beneath the same lamp, in damaged condition.
2. Ascosmeryx cinerea Butler. Olive-shades Hawk. One specimen only, taken
as it flew in to light through an open window on 6th March, 1959.
3. Psilogramma menephron casuarinae Walker. Casuarina Hawk-moth, also
known as the Privet Hawk and the Grey Hawk. A fairly common species, the
males of which are capable of producing a high pitched rasping sound. The
handsome caterpillars are often found feeding upon the Privet hedges and garden
Lilacs. I have also found larvae feeding on Blue Bush (Notelea longifolia), a
native shrub, several of which thrive on Rodd’s Peninsula. -
4. Herse convolvuli L. Convolvulus Hawk-moth, also called Pink-banded Hawk.
Frequently observed at rest on lamp posts. The caterpillars, which are variable
in colour, feed upon Convolvulus Vine and Sweet Potato leaves.
5. Hippotion scrofa Boisduval. Vermillion Under-wing Hawk. A charming small
species, which is sometimes reasonably plentiful. It is attracted readily to the
garden sweets during the early part of the evening; but as the shades of night
deepen, it becomes less active, and adjourns to various resting places, such as
lamp-posts, fences, or very often curtains in the vicinity of open windows. The
forewings of this species are very variable in colour.
6. Hippotion celerio L. Silver-striped Hawk. Several captures of this elegantly
marked Hawk. Like the preceding species, the Silver-striped Hawk does not
hesitate to enter an open window or doorway, to be discovered later in some
obscure corner.

Family Notodontidae, The Prominents.

7. Epicoma melanospila Walker. Barred Satin Moth. Wherever Kunzea bush
flourishes this attractive moth will be found. In days gone by a series of a dozen
or more could be taken during a single evening. The method of capturing
specimens was a simple one; all one needed was an oil-burning lantern, showing a
dispersed yellowish light, with which to search the outer foliage and a killing-
bottle, into which the resting moths were deftly flicked with a finger. If the
lantern produces too concentrated a glare, this moth will either fly or drop
immediately into the long and tangled herbage usually growing at the foot of the
bushes, thus eluding its would-be captor. The males differ from the females by
possessing a black bar on the forewing; this adornment is in addition to the black
spot, which occurs on the forewings of both sexes.

8. Epicoma tristis Lewin. Frosted Brown. One record only and that was a female
captured during the late afternoon of November 24th, 1951, in an extensive
garden surrounding an old manor house, now demolished.

9. Trichetra sparshalii Curtis. Buff-tailed Satin. One female taken on 11th
April, 1952. It was resting on a Boxbrush (Tristania) leaf, on which were a
freshly deposited batch of eggs, protectively covered with the moth’s anal hairs.
Family Lymantriidae, Tussock Moths, Vapourers and Brown-tails.

10. Euproctis crocea Walker. Yellow Tussock. One specimen collected on 3rd
April, 1943.

11. Ascyphas chionitis Turner. Golden-tailed Moth. A common garden species
possessing a short flight period during the twilight hour. The caterpillar is black,
covered with hairs, and adorned with red and white spots, and like the imago is

HAINES 59

very active, appearing always to be in a hurry. It feeds on various plants, among
which tender roseleaves are a favourite.

12. Laelia obsoleta Fabricius. Creamy-winged Tussock. The hairy caterpillars
of this species, sometimes occur commonly on the foliage of the Angophoras
growing on Rodd’s Peninsula. Except for their larger size, the caterpillars closely
resemble in appearance those of the next species.

13. Orgyia anartoides Walker. Australian Vapourer. A- prettily marked moth
in which the females are entirely wingless. Because of their inability to fly, nature
has provided them with an attractiveness so acute, that frollicking gaily dressed
males are lured from afar, and guided unerringly to these hidden charmers of
the night. This attractiveness, more highly developed in some species than others,
is known as “calling.” I have found the caterpillars of this species feeding on
Angophora and an exotic shrub which appears to be one of the Coniferae. They
have also been recorded feeding on Geraniums.

14. Lymantria reducta Walker. White Cedar Moth. A common dingy species
the caterpillars of which ravage and utterly destroy White Cedar trees (Melia
azedarach). These rather horrid looking larvae cluster in great masses around
the trunks of their food-plants during the day, and it is then that they can be
eliminated. The only effective way is to squash them all with a flat stick. They
seem to possess some kind of sense, as those that escape death by dropping into
the grass wander off and make a “camp” elsewhere only to return again each
evening to feed on the leaves of the stricken trees.

Family Anthelidae, Woolly Bears.

15. Anthela acuta Walker. Common Anthela. A common species, subject to
great variation in size, colour, and markings. The larvae are usually called
“hairy grubs” and feed on any soft grasses. They are quite harmless and have a
curious habit of curling up when disturbed or alarmed.

16. Anthela ocellata Walker. Black-spotted Anthela. This moth is somewhat
variable, and during certain seasons is rather common. The newly emerged
females readily assemble the males, and it appears from experiments I carried out
some years ago, that the darkened hours of the morning is the period used for
this purpose.

17. Anthela ferruginosa Walker. Reddish Anthela. Rather scarce, occasional
specimens attracted to light. The species is variable, ranging in colour from red,
which is the most common form, to greyish-brown. One striking example I
possess, has fawn forewings and red hindwings. The caterpillars of A. ferruginosa
are somewhat smaller than those of A. acuta and A. ocellata and are covered
with reddish hairs.

Family Lasiocampidae, Lappet Mothes, Lackeys, Eggars and Drinkers.

18. Entometa fervens Walker. Australian Lappet. A large and handsome species.
The eggs are deposited each summer on the leaves of the Rough-barked
Angophoras growing on Rodd’s Peninsula. The large caterpillars are coloured
according to the twigs upon which they rest. Those that sleep by day on the grey
bark covered trunk of their food-plant, are grey—those found on freshly grown
twigs are some shade of brown, and again, it will be observed, that caterpillars
of a patchy grey and brown appearance, lie upon sections of the bush which
have begun to shed pieces of bark, and thus harmonise perfectly with the mottled
twig to which they cling.

As yet, I have not carried out the necessary experiments to determine whether
these fascinating creatures are capable of changing their colours at “will” to
match that upon which they happen to find themselves, or whether they merely
select that part of the trunk or stems which cryptically affords them the best
concealment.

The following extract taken from H. W. Shepheard-Walwyn’s interesting
book “Nature’s Riddles,” tells of Professor E. B. Poulton’s experiments many
years ago at the Oxford University Museum, with caterpillars of the British
Lappet Moth (Lisiocampa quercifolia L.)

“He (Poulton) obtained a batch of Lappet Moth eggs and provided some
of them with twigs of hawthorn covered with grey lichen, while the remainder
were placed upon twigs of a normal brown colour, and he was very careful to

60 HABERFIELD LEPIDOPTERA

see that the same sort of twigs were always given to the same caterpillars, so
that one batch should always have the lichen covered twigs and the other batch
the brown ones. The consequence was, that the caterpillars which were kept upon
the lichen twigs gradually developed grey markings on their upper surfaces, in
exact imitation of the grey lichen; whereas those which were among the brown
twigs remained the normal brown colour, with the result that each was equally
invisible when reposing upon its particular twigs. Thus, when the caterpillars
were full-grown, those from one batch were totally different from the others,
although they were all of the same brood and the progeny of the same parent.
This very interesting and conclusive experiment I (Shepheard-Walwyn) sub-
sequently repeated myself, and obtained the same results as those which Mr.
Poulton had shown me.”

Although the Australian Lappet Moth caterpillars are extremely well
camouflaged, they by no means escape the attacks of Ichneumon flies, and very
few indeed attain the adult state. The coarse white silken cocoons, surrounded
by two or three leaves to which they are gummed, are quite easy to find, and the
moths emerge, as a rule, during late afternoon. A good deal of variation occurs,
both in size and coloration in the males, while variations of a less obtrusive nature
may be looked for in the females.

19. Digglesia australasiae Fabricius. Lesser Lappet Moth. One capture only.
On the evening of April 8th, 1951, a specimen was picked up in the rays of the
lantern, as it rested on outer foliage of a Privet bush, and was successfully netted.

20. Porela arida Walker. Pastel Shades Moth, Rabbit Moth.. The clustered groups
of grey eggs, and the hairy, though attractive caterpillars of this lasiocampid are
often to be found on Angophora, Kunzea and to a lesser extent Tristania. I have
never known the moth to be attracted to light, but specimens may be easily found
with the aid of a lantern, late at night, resting on their respective food-plants.
If one intends to raise moths from the larval stage, the caterpillars must be
collected when quite small, otherwise there is a possibility of them being para-
sitized by a smalt wasp, the maggots of which eat the internal organs, being
careful however, not to mortally wound their host until they (the wasp larvae)
are ready to pupate. It is not an uncommon sight therefore, to find dead cater-
pillars clinging to a twig, literally covered with the small white cocoons of the
enemy which caused them such a lingering death. The crysalids of this moth
are enclosed in a greyish, softly woven cocoon, around which a few leaves are
fixed.

Family Saturniidae, Emperor and Atlas Moths.

21. Antherea eucalypti Scott. Emperor Gum Moth. A common species. The
white elongated eggs of this variable moth are often to be found deposited side
by side in neat little groups of three or four, usually on the underside of a leaf.
I have found the huge caterpillars feeding on Angophora (Swamp Mahogany),
a Eucalypt that thrives in salt impregnated soil. Tristania, and Pepper Tree
(Schinus mollis).

The cocoons are composed of tough silk, and are of two types, depending
on where the fully-fed caterpillar decides to spin up. Those glued to twigs
amidst outer foliage are usually of a golden colour and unadorned in any way:
but cocoons located adhering to tree trunks are camouflaged with particles of
bark, and appear as nothing more than a slight swelling on the tree.

I have not as yet been successful in assembling with this species, but I
distinctly remember W. H. Mason, a natural-history minded school friend,
telling me many years ago, how he had attracted and caught numerous Emperor
Gum-moths by keeping a freshly emerged female in a cage.

22. Antherea helena White. The Pink-lined Emperor, also called Scarce Emperor.
A remarkable capture of a male in fairly good condition was made at a street
lamp, by the late M. Clayton, during spring of 1940. The vernacular name of
this large silk moth is derived, not from the moth itself; but from its caterpillar
which possesses two pink lateral lines, one on either side. These lines immediately
distinguish it from the larvae of the preceding species, which has yellow lateral
lines.

HAINES 61

Family Arctiidae, Tigers, Ermines and Footmen.

Sub-Family Arctiinae, Tigers and Ermines.

23. Ardices glatignyi Le Guillon. Garden Tiger. At one time very common,
nowadays rare in the district.

24. Ardices curvata Donovan. Red Tiger. Not uncommon. A great deal of
variation occurs in the forewings of this species, some being almost black, while
others are so sparingly marked as to appear at first glance a different species.
In this respect, A. curvata resembles the very variable British Wood Tiger
(Parasemia plantaginus L.). Wood Tigers are, however, partly diurnal, the males
flying during the afternoon in their search for the females, which are mainly
nocturnal and in this respect, differ greatly in habits from A. curvata, in which
both sexes are entirely nocturnal. The larvae are hairy and extremely lively,
and I have found them feeding on soft grasses.

25. Diacrisia canescens Walker. Golden-marked Ermine. Some years quite
common. Usually observed on the wing during the twilight hour.

Sub-Family Lithosiinae, Footmen.

26. Manulca replana Lewin. Common Footman. During the years 1949, 1950
and 1951, this footman was quite common. I first observed caterpillars of the
moth one evening on a paling fence, thinking that they were looking for a place
to spin up, I collected a few and placed them in a large pill-box but after a day
or two, they all died. Obviously, they had been clinging to the fence for reasons
other than that which I had assumed. Making another inspection of the palings,
I again found a batch of the caterpillars, all apparently in a state of coma, but
on examining the palings closely under a pocket lens, I was surprised to find
growing on them, a micro-lichen, and it was upon this that the caterpillars
were grazing.

27. Utethesia pulchella L. Crimson-speckled Footman. Several captures of this
pretty moth have been made. The species is usually regarded as nocturnal,
although I have seen odd ones on the wing during the day. U. pulchella is also
found in England, where its larvae are said to feed on the Common Forget-me-not
(Myosotis).

28. Halone sinuata Walker. Orange-underwing Footman. A common species
which is on the wing from September to March. I can always be sure of finding
specimens at rest on the brick wall of my house, Its period of flight seems to
be just after day-break.

29. Azure cervicalis Walker. Orange-spotted Footman. Two only taken on the
mornings of November 17th and 22nd, 1959.

30. Azure lydia Donovan. Common Bush-footman. A day-flying species, rarely
observed in areas other than woodlands. One capture only—March 24th, 1951.

Family Noctuidae, The Owls, Millers and Semi-loopers.

Other than the day-flying Agaristas, the majority of moths belonging to
this extremely large family appear on the wing in wild erratic flight at the first
shades of night. They are greatly attracted to the blossoms of Kunzea, Privet.
Pittosporum, Loquat, various flowering shrubs, as well as many garden flowers.
Later in the evening when feeding and courtship is over, the Noctuas are readily
attracted to light. With the exception of those indicated as otherwise, the
following species are all more or less common in the Haberfield and Five Dock
districts.

Sub-Family Agaristinae, Day-flying Vine Moths.

31. Cruria donvani Boisduval.

32. Agarista agricola Donovan. Painted Moth. One taken at Kunzea flowers
on 31st December, 1956.

33. Comocrus behri Angas. Two specimens netted while attending the flowers
of the Buddleia; 2nd November, 1958 and 9th March, 1959.

34. Phalaenoides glycinae Lewin.

35. Phalaenoides tristifica Hubner. At one time, this dainty lover of rank
grasslands and water meadows was reasonably common in open spaces bordering
Iron Cove, but nowadays its only stronghold in the district is a tiny corner of
grass and sedge converging on Canada Bay, Five Dock. Unlike the four
Agaristas already mentioned, which fly high and far, gentle P. tristifica loves to

62 HABERFIELD LEPIDOPTERA

flutter low over the sedges and lank grasses, and never wanders far from its
breeding haunts. It is therefore, an exceedingly local species.

Sub-Family Acronyctinae.

36. Cosmodes elegans Donovan.

37. Periphyra sanguinipunctata Guenee. Extremely rare—one taken many years
ago; a second specimen captured on the evening of March Sth, 1962.

38. Prodenia litura Fabricius.

39. Callogramma festiva Donovan. Lily Moth. Common during April, 1956.
The black, yellow and white striped caterpillars of this moth were found breeding
on Oliviers.

40. Ariathisa hydraecioides Guenee.

41. Ariathisa tortisigna Walker.

42. Euplexia nigerrima Guenee.

43. Bathytricha truncata Walker.

44. Thalatha hieroglyphica Turner. Two specimens bred out on March 3rd and
April 7th, 1958, from caterpillars found feeding on Angophoras, growing on
Rodd’s Peninsula.

45. Spodoptera mauritia Boisduval.

46. Amphioggia chordophoroides Lucas.

Sub-Family Agrotinae = Euxoinae.

47. Agrotus infusa Boisduval. Bogong Moth.

48. Euxoa porphyricollis Guenee.

49. Heliothus rubrescens Walker.

50. Graphiphora compta Walker.

Sub-Family Melanchinae.

51. Persectania ewingii Westwood.

52. Sideridis unipuncta Haworth.

53. Sideridis uda Guenee.

54. Dasygaster hollandiae Guenee.

55. Tiracola plagiata Walker. One specimen only taken on 2nd November, 1952.
56. Polia consanguis Guenee.

Sub-Family Erastriinae.

57. Amyna natalis Walker. Whistling Garden Moth.

Sub-Family Euteliinae.

58. Pataeta carbo Guenee. One specimen taken at dusk on 29th January, 1960.
I was rather surprised to take this curious little Noctua so far south, as I had
always regarded it as a northern species. When collecting moths for the late
Dr. A. Jefferis Turner in the Wallangarra and Stanthorpe districts, Southern
Queensland, P. carbo frequently came to my lamps.

Sub-Family Acontiinae.

59. Earias smaragdina Butler. A charming small green species, sometimes
occurring on Rodd’s Peninsula.

59a. Acontia amata Walker. A single specimen of this northern species taken
on February 28th, 1962.

Sub-Family Noctuinae.

60. Pantydia sparsa Guenee.

61. Panilla impropria Walker.

62. Catephia acronyctoides Guenee.

63. Sandava scitisignata Walker.

64. Bertula xyctiphanta Turner.

65. Hydrillodes lentalis Guenee.

66. Anomis crosa Hubner.

Sub-Family Catocalinae.

67. Sericea spectans Guenee. Common Cloak Moth.

68. Sericea mutabilis Turner. Scarce Cloak Moth. A specimen of this extra-
ordinary moth came to light on 30th November, 1959. It appears to be not
anywhere common.

69. Dasypodia cymatodes Guenee. Dingy Cloak Moth.

70. Dasypodia selenophora Guenee. Golden Cloak Moth. One specimen taken
on 14th December, 1952. This moth is golden-yellow on the underside and is a

HAINES 63

much finer species than D. cymatodes which is generally duller in appearance
on the upper surface of the wings and dusky grey on the undersides.

71. Achaea janata L.

72. Chalciope hyppasia Cramer.

73. Grammodes oculicola Walker. A single example observed on Rodd’s Penin-
sula, autumn, 1958.

74. Anna parcemacula Lucas. Numerous larvae occurred on Angophora on
Rodd’s Peninsula during March, 1947. I was successful in rearing only one to the
adult stage.

Sub-Family Phytometriinae.

75. Phytometra albastriata Brem and Gray.

76. Plusia chalcites Esper. Silver Y Moth.

77. Plusia argentifera Guenee.

77a. Mocis (Remigea) aolosa Butler.

Sub-Family Hypeninae.

78. Bracharthron ossicolor Rosenstock.

79. Simplicia robustalis Guenee.

80. Rhapsa suscitalis Walker.

81. Nodaria armatalis Walker.

82. Hypena masurialis Guenee.

Sub-Family Ophiderinae.

83. Artigisa impropria Walker.

Family Syntomidae Ringed Moths.

84. Syntomis annulata Fabricius. Occasionally taken on the Buddleia flowers.
M is a day-flying species and is to be met frequently in the bushland around
ydney.

Family Hypsidae. Greater Ringed Moths and Spotted Moths.

85. Nyctemera amica White. Several specimens of this diurnal species have been
taken. It is particularly common on the sand-dunes surrounding soaks at the
back of Cronulla Beach, Sydney.

Family Geometriidae. Emeralds.

86. Urolitha bipunctifera Walker. A common, pretty, green species which is
often found resting on the underside of Pittosporum leaves late at night. Most
of my captures have been made in September and March, although examples have
been taken as early as July and as late as April.

87. Chlorocoma externa Walker. Uncommon. The caterpillars feed on Wattle.
Three specimens bred during January and February, 1959.

88. Terpna metarhoides Walker. Three specimens only of this elegant species.
The first being bred from a larva found feeding on Angophora, 2nd April, 1950,
and the other two taken in copula on 1st January, 1960.

89. Gelasma rhodocosma Meyrick. One specimen bred out on 17th January,
1955, from a larva found feeding on Angophora.

90. Crypsiphona_ occultaria Donovan. Grey-shades Moth. This attractively
marked grey moth with its striking crimson and black patch on the underside
of the wings, is easily bred out from the smooth green caterpillars found
commonly on the Angophoras. Unlike the Geometers which rest with wings
held up butterfly-like, C. occultaria flattens out, and in this attitude can easily
be mistaken for a Boarmia.

Family Sterrhidae. Wave Moths.

91. Leptomeris rubraria Doubleday. Ruby Wave Moth. A fairly common small
species, often found frequenting the foreshores of the bay.

92. Scopula perlata Walker. Common Wave Moth. Common garden species.

Family Larentiidae. Carpet Moths.

93. Xanthorhoe subidaria Guenee. Common, often attracted to Kunzea blossoms,
also to light. A rare fawn-coloured variety is occasionally captured.

94. Poecilasthena thalassias Meyrick. A delicate pale green moth, which was
remarkably common during the summer of 1947. I always found it active at
dusk, flitting about one particular corner of the garden in which clumps of
Aspidistras and ferns were growing. I have only taken occasional specimens since.

64 HABERFIELD LEPIDOPTERA

95. Euchoeca rubropunctaria Doubleday. Rather scarce in the district. This
species is subject to some interesting variations.

96. Scotocyma euryochra Turner. Extreme variations occur in this species. Two
captures only, 16th September, 1947, and September, 1954.

97. Eucymatoge callizona Lower. Two only. July, 1949 and March Ist, 1950.
98. Chloroclystis laticostata Walker. Rare, one specimen taken on 28th
December, 1950.

98a. Chloroclystis filata Guenee. One specimen taken on 31st October, 1961.

99. Xanthorhoe brujata Guenee.

100. Euphyia subrectaria Guenee. Two specimens taken—March 8th and 9th,
1960.

Family Oenochromatidae. Australian Thorns.

101. Adeixis inostentata Guenee. One specimen bred from a larva found on
Wattle, 16th January, 1959.

Family Boarmiidae. Flat Moths.

102. Ectropis subtinctaria. Guenee. The caterpillars feed on Privet, Kunzea,
Pittosporum and probably other plants.

103. Ectropis excursaria Guenee. A variable species, in which a very distinctly
marked form sometimes occurs.

104. Lophodes sinistraria Guenee. Frequently attracted to light. The black males
are far more common than the fawn coloured females. The caterpillars feed
on Wattle and Kunzea.

104a. Idiodes apicata Guenee. Rather infrequent.

Family Zygaenidae. Burnet and Forresters.

105. Hestiochora tricolor Walker. Tricoloured Burnet. A specimen was bred
out from a very active little caterpillar found feeding on Eucalypt, in 1942. The
full-grown larva was an inch long, covered with reddish-brown hairs, longer at
each end, and made conspicuous by possessing a white dorsal patch. The small
oval chrysalis, light-brown in colour, was enclosed in a semi-transparent silken
cocoon.

Family Limacodidae. Cup Moths.

106. Doratifera vulnerans Lewin. Painted Cup-moth. Common species, its
larvae feeding on Tristania, pepper Trees and Angophora.

107. Doratifera quadriguttata Walker. Common Cup-moth. A fairly common
moth, which deposits its eggs on the same food-plants as D. vulnerans. The
caterpillars have not the same stinging potential as the preceding species, nor do
they “top-off” their cocoons with a well defined lid. I have never at any time,
seen either D. vulnerans or D. quadriguttata on the wing, and have obtained all
my specimens by breeding.

Family Psychidae. Bag Moths.

108. Entometa ignoblis Walker. Faggot Case-moth. Throughout the years three
specimens of the plain brown males of this species have been captured. All
were attracted by light, and were in perfect condition.

109. Metura elongata Saunders. Saunder’s Case-moth. Reasonably common
garden species. The large silken cases adorned with short twigs are often
observed attached to fences.

110. Thyridopteryx hubneri Westwood. Leaf Case-moth. This species is not at
all common.

111. Thyridopteryx herrichii Westwood. Ribbed Case-moth. During years gone
by, frequently found; but nowadays extremely rare in the district.

Family Xyloryctidae. Burrowing Moths.

112. Maroga unipunctata Walker. Cherry-tree Borer. Some years more common
than others. It is readily attracted to light.

Family Cossidae. Wood Moths.

Sub-Family Zeuzerinae.

113. Xyleutes lituratus Donovan. One male in fairly good condition taken at rest
on a lamp-post on the evening of January 15th, 1951. This extremely interesting
capture was nearly overlooked as I assumed it to be at first glance nothing more
exciting than a common Privet Hawk. However, after by-passing it for a hundred

HAINES 65

yards or so, it suddenly struck me that the moth I had seen was “resting up” in a
most extraordinary manner for a hawk. Whereupon I immediately retraced my
steps to the lamp in question and to the reposing moth, which turned out to be a
new record for the district. Not having a net with me, it was necessary to
climb onto a fence, fortunately near at hand, and reaching up, seize the moth
in my fingers. Carrying it in this fashion, I reached home and a killing-jar,
without causing any noticeable damage to its plumage. -

Family Hepialidae. Swift Moths.

114. Perissectis australis Donovan. Common species during February and March.
The males are exceedingly variable.

115. Oncopera albogultata Tindale. One specimen captured at light during
March 1954.

116. Charagia lignivorus Lewin (venusta Scott). The beautiful green and pink
female of this species came to light on the evening of March 13th, 1960.

The Micro-lepidoptera.
Family Tineidae. The little moths belonging to this family are quite numerous,
and are to be found flitting about the garden during the dusk of the evening. A
common, though attractive species, in which the fore-wings are silvery-white,
patterned with brown, is Monopis nivibactella Walker.
Family Glyphipterygidae. Metallic Moths.
Cebysa leucoteles Walker. A’ common garden species during March. The males
suddenly make their appearance a little after midday and remain on the wing in
wild erratic flight for at least two hours, when they all at once disappear with no
further sign of them until the sun is again at its zenith the following day. The
females have only partially developed wings, and because of their inability to
fly, readily assemble the swarming males. I have often found females running
in an agile manner about garden paths. The larvae live in silken bags covered
with scraps of bark or lichen.
Family Oecophoridae.
Well represented, the most striking of which is Cormotypa fascinalis Fabricius,
a species possessing yellow forewings, banded with purple.

Other interesting species are Borea confusella Walker, having black and
white marked forewings and Leptocroca sanguinolenta a species possessing blood-
red colours and occurring only in July and early August. A common dingy species
is Philobota xiphostola Meyrick.

Family Tortricidae. Bell Moths, Leaf Rollers.

Cacoecia australana Lewin. Two examples, collected on 18th September, 1946
and 16th September, 1947.

Family Pyraustidae.

Mecyna gilvata Fabricius. This handsome species, with rather variable forewings,
is sometimes fairly common.

Semioceros murcalis Walker. One specimen, 26th September, 1947.

Hymenia recurvalis Fabricius. Common.

Lygropia quaternalis Zeller.

Polygrammodes localis Walker. A single capture at light on 2nd January, 1955.
Musotinna nitidalis Walker.

Atelocentra chloraspis Meyrick. Scarce. All four specimens in my collection
have been found resting on Pittosporum leaves.

Sylepta clytalis Walker. One specimen collected at light, 23rd March, 1959.
Heliothela ochreipennis Butler. One specimen taken at light, 22nd March, 1959.
Family Pyralidae. Pearl Moths.

Sub-Family Pyralinae.

Endotricha pyrosalis Guenee. A common garden species, the sexes differing both
in colour and markings.

Endotricha docilis Walker. Rare, one capture, 27th December, 1950.

Scenedra decoratalis Walker. Three specimens only. This species is variable and
ranges in ground colour from pale brownish to black.

Pyralis farinalis L. An extremely common introduced species.

Family Schoenobiidae. Rush Moths.

66 HABERFIELD LEPIDOPTERA

Scirpophaga patulella Walker. A pure white moth inhabiting boggy places. It is
usually found clinging head upwards to rushes or grass-stems, around which it
clasps its wings.
Family Crambidae. Grass Moths.
Talis relatalis Walker.
Talis plentiferella Walker. Both species fairly common in grassy fields before
settlement.

Division: RHOPALOCERA (The Butterflies).

Family Papilionidae. Swallowtails.

1. Papilio aegeus aegeus Donovan. Orchard Butterfly. Males are usually observed
during November and March. The females, however, are less frequently seen.
2. Papilio anactus Macleay, Dingy Swallowtail. This butterfly is readily attracted
to Buddleia flowers, and is then not difficult to net.

3. Papilio sarpedon choredon Felder. Blue Triangle. An extremely common
species, greatly attracted to Buddleia. Blue Triangles are fond of flying about a
restricted area for hours at a time, and will immediately chase into neutral
territory any other butterfly that happens to intrude into their domain. The
caterpillars are to be found on the tender leaves of the introduced Camphor
laurel tree, Camphor camphora. Specimens raised in captivity never assume
the beautiful blue of those “born” in the wild state; but are instead, a pale
washed-out colour.

4. Papilio macleayanus Leach. Green Swallowtail. This true swallowtail is
rarely seen and I have only two records of it occurring in the district. The first,
a capture on 20th January, 1955 and the second, an observation the following
season.

Family Pieridae. Jezabels, Whites and Yellows.

5. Delias nigrina Fabricius. Common Jezabel. Fairly common during late
Autumn.

6. Delias harpalyce Donovan. Imperial Painted White. Since the year 1935,
when enormous numbers occurred, very few specimens of this striking butterfly
have been seen. My last capture was a perfect male, taken at Privet flowers on
19th December, 1959.

7. Delias aganippe Donovan. Wood White. Extremely scarce, two specimens
only, and both netted at Buddleia.

8. Delias nysa nysa Fabricius. Nysa Jezabel. Nowhere common. I have only
taken two specimens of this butterfly, and both in my garden. The first in the
autumn of 1940 and the second at Buddleia on April 12th, 1956.

9. Delias argenthona argenthona Fabricius. Northern Painted White. A tattered
female was captured in Haberfield during the summer of 1955 and is probably
the first authentic record for Sydney. (cf. “Proceedings of the Royal Zoological
Society of New South Wales,” 1957-58, page 27.)

10. Catopsilia pyranthe pythias Waterhouse and Lyell. Common migrant. Rather
scarce, several specimens only.

11. Catopsilia pomona pomona Fabricius. Lemon Migrant. A tattered male of
this rare visitor was netted at Buddleia on 22nd November, 1959.

12. Appias paulina ega Boisduval. Common Albatross. Several specimens
captured.

13. Anaphaeis java teutonia Fabricius. Caper White. My first experience of
Caper Whites occurred in the afternoon of October 23rd, 1938. I happened to
be collecting butterflies in a field in Five Dock, when the first specimens began
to appear and being quite new to me, each one as it floated over a hedge growing
down one side of this particular hunting ground of mine, was madly pursued.
Within an hour, however, they began turning up in thousands and it became
quite obvious that a butterfly migration was taking place. All the Caper Whites
collected that day were later destroyed on the setting-boards by a mouse. I
witnessed another similar flight of this remarkable species during the month of
December, 1947. Since then, odd specimens are usually found sampling the
Buddleias each summer.

14. Pieris rapae L. Small White. An introduced species from Europe and at
one time very common; but since the introduction of a small parasitic wasp

HAINES 67

which attacks the larvae of P. rapae, it is fortunately not nearly as numerous
as it once was. The eggs of this butterfly are deposited on Cabbage and
Nasturtium leaves.

15. Terias hecabe sulphurata Butler. Common Grass Yellow. My first capture
of this pretty yellow butterfly occurred in a grassy field adjoining the bay in
the summer of 1936. It has rarely been observed in the district since that year.
16. Terias smilax Donovan. Small Grass Yellow. Oceasional stragglers are
sometimes captured in the garden as they flutter about patches of long grass.

Family Danaidae. Milk-weed Butterflies.

17. Danaus plexippus L. Wanderer, Monarch. Prevalent during late summer
and autumn. The larvae and pupae are to be found on the Wild Cotton, they
may also be searched for on other plants and grasses growing in the vicinity of
the food-plant.

18. Danaus chrysippus petilia Stoll. Lesser Wanderer. One observation only.
19. Danaus melissa hamata Macleay. Blue-spotted Wanderer. A male in fairly
good condition of this visitor from the North was captured in my garden on 7th
November, 1959.

20. Euploea corinna corinna Macleay. Common Crow. Periodically Common
Crows invade the Sydney district and their bright golden chrysalids found
attached to Oleanders seem to attract the attention and comment of many people.
I have also found the caterpillars thriving on the vine known as Mandevilla
suaveolens. Although the Sydney “born” butterflies deposit eggs, and pupae
arising from them, adorn the Oleanders at the end of autumn, they are apparently
unable to survive the winter, and until another irruption of the species in the
North again causes a southern invasion to occur, the butterfly is but seldom
observed.

send Nymphalidae. Nymphs and Emperors.

. Hypolimnas bolina nerina Fabricius. The Royal Emperor. Until the summer
ot 1955, this very fine butterfly was rarely observed in the districts under discussion.
22. Eriboea pyrrhus sempronius Fabricius. Tailed Emperor. Several specimens
observed each autumn; but as it is a high and fast flier, it is difficult to capture
on the wing. Like ‘other members of the Nymphalidae, however, Tailed
Emperors, are attracted to fermenting fruit and I have netted specimens without
any trouble as they sipped the juices of rotten Persimmons. I have also found a
white sheet hung on a clothes line to be an effective attractant.

23. Precis villida calybe Godart. Meadow Argus. A common species, the cater-
pillars of which feed on Plantains and Snapdragons (Antirrhinum).

24. Pyrameis cardui kershawi McCoy. Painted Lady. A pretty butterfly, differing
from the one on the British list, which bears the same vernacular name, by
possessing blue submarginal spots instead of black. The Australian race is also
much smaller and brighter in coloration. In favourable seasons, Painted Ladies
occur in thousands. The larvae feed on different kinds of Everlasting Daisies
(Helichrysum) and allied plants.

25. Vanessa itea Fabricius. Australia Admiral. Specimens are observed on the
wing during various months of the year. I have even noticed odd ones sporting
about the garden on sunny days in mid-winter, which suggests that Admirals are
hibernating butterflies.

Family Satyridae. Browns and Ringlets.

26. Heteronympha merope merope Fabricius. Common Brown. A few males
are usually observed each summer frequenting gardens. The very different looking
females, however, appear to be less catholic in their tastes and do not wander
far from their native tree-shaded haunts. For this reason, the popular name of
Wood Nymph has been given them by collectors.

27. Hypocysta metirius Butler. Common Ringlet. Occasional specimens recorded.
Family Lycaenidae. Blues, Coppers and Hairstreaks.

28. Candalides absimilis Felder. Pencilled Blue. Before the old manor house in
Five Dock with its gardens containing Black Bean trees, food-plant of C.
absimilis, was destroyed, this attractive butterfly was comparatively common.

The species is nearly always attracted to the leaves of the Wistaria and
Pittosporum.

68 HABERFIELD LEPIDOPTERA

29. Candalides heathi heathi Cox. Rayed Blue. Many years ago, this unobtrusive
butterfly was fairly common in the grassy fields adjoining Iron Cove. I have
always regarded C. heathi as a “good thing” and have never known it to wander
from its breeding haunt, which more than likely is some quiet corner in a
meadow. The last capture in the district was made by K. D. Fairy on 19th
February, 1948.

30. Nacaduba lineata Murray. Hairy Lineblue. A female was observed at rest
on a leaf of a Nectarine tree on March 5th, 1950. Unfortunately it flew off
before I could get the net.

31. Nacaduba biocellata Felder. Double-spotted Lineblue. A male in fairly
good condition was captured on 31st January, 1961. It was attending Marguerite
daisies.

32. Zizeeria labradus labradus Godart. Common Grass-blue. Some years more
common than others.

33. Neolucia serpentata Herrich-Schaeffer. Chequered Blue.

34. Neolucia sulpitius sulpitius Miskin. Saltpan Blue. Both these species are
fairly common in areas fringing the bay, which are overgrown with the food-
plant (Salicornia).

35. Lampides boeticus damoetes Fabricius. Long-tailed Blue. The first brood
of this Blue makes its appearance in September. The larvae are to be found
feeding on Dolichos and Lupins. It was extremely common during October,
1949, the species has not been observed in such large numbers since that year.

36. Syntarucus plinius pseudocassius Murray. Plumbago Blue. The stronghold
of this little butterfly was the garden of the old manor-house in Five Dock,
where it could be seen in hundreds during late summer, flying about the hedges
of Plumbago, on which it breeds. This butterfly does not appear to wander far
afield from its breeding haunts, as I have only ever taken one female in the
adjoining suburb of Haberfield.

Family Hesperiidae. Skippers.

37. Badamia exclamationis Fabricius. One remarkable capture of this northern
species at Buddleia on 21st March, 1958. (cf. “The Australian Zoologist,” Vol.
XII, page 351.)

38. Toxidia peroni Latreille. Dingy Garden Skipper. Common species greatly
attracted to Buddleia flowers. I once observed this species “sporting” madly with
a male Orange Palm Skipper. The larvae feed on common grasses.

39. Taractrocera papyria papyria Boisduval. White-marked Grass-Skipper.
Occurs commonly on Rodd’s Peninsula, the first brood making its appearance
as early as August.

40. Padraona flavovittata flavovittata Latreille. Yellow-banded Skipper. A lover
of grassy fields. It is still fairly abundant on Rodd’s Peninsula and is an occasional
visitor to my garden.

41. Cephrenesaugiades sperthias Felder. Orange Palm Skipper. A handsome and
common garden species. I have often found the semi-transparent caterpillars
feeding on palm fronds, from which I have bred out long series of perfect
specimens.

42. Astycus kreffti ancilla WHerrich-Schaeffer. Green Skipper. In days when
hedgerows of Lantana bordered fields in Five Dock, this skipper was quite
abundant; but nowadays it is never seen and it would appear that it has vacated
the district altogether.

LOCATION OF SPECIMENS.
The specimens referred to in this paper are in the author’s collection.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

The author wishes to thank the following: D. K. McAlpine, Assistant Curator
of Insects, Australian Museum, Sydney, for kindly granting permission to use the
Museum’s collections for the purpose of classifying material discussed in the
present paper; Dr. I. F. B. Common, Principal Research Officer, Division of
Entomology, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, for identifying several species; Rev. Colin
Burgess, Rector of St. Oswald’s, Haberfield, for naming some of the plants
mentioned in the text.

69

Observations on Some Australian Forest Insects

14. A Preliminary List of Insects Attacking Pinus spp.
in New South Wales

y K. M. Moore.
(Forestry Commission of New South Wales.)

INTRODUCTION.

A comprehensive survey of the extent and intensity of attack by insects
damaging Pinus spp. was commenced by entomologists of the Forestry Commis-
sion of New South Wales during October, 1960. As only limited information
on insects attacking Pinus spp. ‘in that State has been published, this list is
presented as a record of current and potential insect pests, and as a basis for
future investigations.

The purpose of the survey was primarily to determine the insects causing
damage to exotic pines, rather than to present an extended list of insect species
merely associated with them. Most of the species studied were reared through
the immature stages to the adult stage, and aspects of their biology were examined
as an essential preliminary to further investigations.

A detailed study of the biology of each species, and information concerning
their ecological interactions is of primary importance because of the increasing
areas planted to Pinus spp. Consequently, when the majority of insects actually
attacking Pinus spp. are recorded, the association of other species of insects
with these hosts will also be examined.

More detailed information which will assist in the field identification of these
insect species will be published in future papers.

LIST OF INSECT SPECIES.

The number of insect species studied in these investigations, to July, 1963,

is given under the respective Orders:—

COLEOPTERA (beetles) ee ae Hoo Ate hen 18
COLLEMBOLA (springtails) wade Me tH 1
HEMIPTERA (sap-feeding bugs, scales) rae a fy 13
ISOPTERA (termites) eee ee were 3
LEPIDOPTERA (moths and butterflies) a ve a 38
ORTHOPTERA (phasmatids, tree crickets) et ie 4
THYSANOPTERA (thrips) bt ae aie ee anh 3
Total species... 80
_ Within the various Orders, the aenise of species in ie relevant family is
given:—
COLEOPTERA ISOPTERA __
Anobiidae 1 Rhinoteenitidae 2
Anthribidae 1 LEPIDOPTERA
Cerambycidae 6 Aerelidae 6
Curculionidae 8 Arctiidae 3
Eumolpidae 1 Eupterotida 1
Scolytidae 1 P ar
Geometridae 1
COLLEMBOLA LY LGR i
y Noctuidae ........ 5)
Hypogastruridae_..... nae 1 Notodontidae 1
Oecophoridae 5
HEMIPTERA Psychidae 6
Adelgidae 1 Tortricidae 5
Aphididae... 2 Xyloryctidae 1
Cicadellidae 2 ORTHOPTERA
Coccidae 3 Eumasticidae 1
Flatidae 1 Phasmatidae 1
Lygaeidae 1 Tettigoniidae 2
Membracidae 1 THYSANOPTERA
Pseudococcidae A) Thripidae 3

70 AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

The following list gives the insect species, some of their host plants, damage,
and details of the localities.

COLEOPTERA
Anobiidae.
Ernobius mollis (L.)

Host: P. radiata.

Damage: Under bark on timber scantlings, and in wood of logs and dead trees
or branches when bark is retained.

Localities: Moss Vale (highlands) and Somersby (coastal).

Anthribidae
Araecerus bicristatus Blkb.

Hosts: P. pinaster, P. radiata.

Damage: Severe damage to male inflorescence, or under bark and in centre of
shoot stems.

Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Cerambycidae
Arhopalus syriacus (Reitt.) (introduced sp.)
Host: P. radiata.

Damage: Under bark and in wood of logs.
Localities: Somersby and Sydney (coastal).

Athemistus aborigine Carter
Host: P. ponderosa.
Damage: Under bark and in wood of logs.
Locality: Hanging Rock State Forest (highlands).

Athemistus harrisoni Carter
Host: P. ponderosa.
Damage: Under bark and in wood of logs.
Locality: Hanging Rock State Forest (highlands).

Athemistus ? luciae Carter
Host: P. ponderosa.
Damage: Under bark and in wood of logs.
Locality: Hanging Rock State Forest (highlands).

Disterna lugubris Pascoe
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Under bark and in wood of fire-killed trees.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Disterna plumifera Pascoe

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Under bark and in wood of fire-killed trees.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Curculionidae
Aesiotes leucurus Pascoe
Hosts: P. pinaster, P. radiata.

Damage: In stumps and logs.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Aoplocnemis ? guttiger Pascoe
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Moderate to heavy damage to foliage, by adults only.
Locality: Blackheath (highlands).

MOORE 71

Aoplocnemis rufipes Boheman

Hosts: P. patula, P. ponderosa, P. pseudostrobis and P. radiata.
Damage: Damage as for A. guttiger.
Localities: Hanging Rock State Forest, Mt. Mitchell State Forest (highlands).

Chrysolophus spectabilis F.

Hosts: Acacia spp., P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to needle sheaths and foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Euthyrrhinus meditabundus F.

Hosts: P. halepensis, P. radiata and numerous indigenous and exotic tree species.
Damage: Under bark and in wood of unthrifty trees.
Localities: Mittagong, Goulburn (highlands), Somersby (coastal).

Perperus languidus Er.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage as for Aoplocnemis spp.
Locality: Mt. Mitchell State Forest (highlands).

Perperus lateralis (Boisd.)

Hosts: P. elliottii, P. radiata.

Damage: Damage as for Aoplocnemis spp., but also to stems of young shoots
where a clear, resinous exudation appears at the point of attack.

Localities: Kulnura (highlands) and Somersby (coastal).

Perperus melancholicus Boisd.

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage as for P. lJateralis.
Localities: Blackheath (highlands), Ourimbah State Forest (coastal).

Eumolpidae

Geloptera porosa Lea

Hosts: P. radiata, Hakea gibbosa, H. teretifolia.
Damage: Adults cut through bases of needles.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Scolytidae

Hylastes ater Payk.

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Severe damage under bark on logs, and damage to stems of seedlings.
Locality: Widespread throughout southern highlands.

COLLEMBOLA
Hypogastruridae
Xenylla occidentalis Womersley

Host: P. radiata.

Damage: In large populations on young shoots, smaller twigs and branches;
damage to trees not apparent.

Locality: Somersby (coastal).

HEMIPTERA
Adelgidae
Pineus near orientalis

Hosts: P. durangensis, P. elliottii, P. montezumae, P. pinaster, P. pseudostrobis,
P. radiata, P. taeda.

Damage: Large populations on small branches, shoots and boles; mainly on
small trees, but also on large, old trees; often associated with stunted
growth probably caused by virus; apparently transported on nursery stock.

72 AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

Localities: Widely distributed on coast, highlands and western slopes where Pinus
spp. are grown.
Aphididae
Eulachnus sp.
Host: P. taeda.
Damage: Damage not evident.
Locality: Whiporee State Forest (highlands).

? Eulachnus sp.
Host: Pinus sp.
Damage: Damage not evident.
Locality: Bullahdelah (coastal).

Cicadellidae
Orosius argentatus (Evans)
Host: P. radiata.

Damage: Associated with “die-back” of young nursery stock.
Locality: Moss Vale (highlands).

(Typhlocybinae) Gen. et sp. nov.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage not apparent; on foliage.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Coccidae
Coccus hesperidum L.

Hosts: P. pinaster, P. radiata.

Damage: Severe damage to foliage, accompanied by thick deposits of sooty
mould.

Localities: Mt. Topper State Forest (western slopes) and Ourimbah State Forest
(coastal).
Lindingaspis rossi (Maskell)
Host: P. pinaster.
Damage: Heavy attack accompanied by yellowing of foliage.
Localities: Mt. Mitchell State Forest (highlands) and Somersby (coastal).

Phenacaspis eugeniae (Maskell)

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Flatidae

Siphanta acuta Walk.

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage not apparent; on foliage.
Locality: Lisarow (coastal).

Lygaeidae
Nysius vinitor Bergr.
Host: P. radiata.

Damage: Associated with “die-back” of young nursery stock.
Locality: Moss Vale (highlands).

Membracidae
Acanthucus sp.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage not apparent; on foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

MOORE 73

Pseudococcidae
Pseudococcus adonidum (L.)
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage not apparent; on stem of small plants.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Pseudococcus gahani Green
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage not apparent; on stem.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).
ISOPTERA
Rhinotermitidae
Coptotermes acinaciformis (Froggatt)
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Severe attack in old stump.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).
Coptotermes lacteus (Froggatt)

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Dead tree, killed by lightning strike.
Locality: Mt. Mitchell State Forest (highlands).

Calotermitidae
Porotermes adamsoni Froggatt
Host: Pinus sp.
Damage: To growing trees on poor site quality.
Locality: Banyabba State Forest (coastal).

LEPIDOPTERA
Anthelidae
Anthela excellens (Walk.)
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Anthela nicothoe (Boisd.)
Hosts: Acacia spp. and P. radiata.

Damage: Damage to foliage severe.
Localities: Widespread throughout highlands of N.S.W.

Anthela ocellata Walk.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage usually slight.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Anthela near varia

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Usually slight damage to foliage.
Localities: Somersby and Sydney (coastal).

Chelepteryx felderi Turner
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Usually slight damage to foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Chenuala heliaspis (Meyr.)
Hosts: P. engelmanii, P. patula, P. radiata and Eucalyptus sp.
Damage: Slight to moderate damage to foliage.
Localities: Hanging Rock State Forest, Blayney (highlands).

Arctiidae
Asura cervicalis Walk.
Hosts: Ficus rubiginosa, P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage, even though large numbers of larvae may
occur, but defoliation of former species may occur.

Localities: Mt. Topper State Forest (highlands), Somersby and Sydney (coastal).

74 AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

Palaeosia bicosta Walk.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage as for A. cervicalis.
Localities: Armidale State Forest (highlands), Somersby (coastal).

Palaeosia sp.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage to foliage not evident.
Localities: Widespread throughout highlands, also on coast.

Eupterotidae
Panacela lewinae (Lewin)

Hosts: Most Angophora and Eucalyptus spp.; Acacia spp.; Exocarpus cupressi-
formis; P. patula, P. radiata; Syncarpia glomulifera and numerous indigenous
tree and plant species.

Damage: Damage often severe on indigenous spp., but light on large trees or
heavy on small trees of Pinus spp. :

Localities: Widespread throughout western slopes, coast and highlands.

Geometridae
Lophodes sinistraria Guen.
Hosts: Cratageus sp., Lagerstroemia sp., P. elliottii, P. radiata.
Damage: Damage to foliage slight.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Lymantriidae
Axiologa pura Lucas
Hosts: Citrus sp., Eucalyptus saligna, P. radiata.

Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Oligeria hemicalla (Lower)
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).
Orgyia anartoides Walk.
Hosts: P. radiata and numerous indigenous tree spp. and cultivated plants.
Damage: Damage to foliage slight on larger trees, severe on small trees of

P. radiata.
Localities: Widely distributed throughout coast and highlands.

Porthesia paradoxa Bh.
Hosts: Cotoneaster sp., Lagerstroemia sp., P. radiata.

Damage: Usually slight damage to foliage.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Noctuidae
Agrotis infusa (Boisd.)
Hosts: P. radiata and numerous cultivated plants.
Damage: Damage to foliage and to roots and bark of nursery stock: sometimes
vere.
Tocalitiess Blackheath, Sunny Corner State Forest (highlands).
Agrotis munda Walk.

Hosts: P. radiata, Pseudotsuga menziesii.
Damage: Severe damage to nursery stock.
Localities: Wingello State Forest (highlands), Glenfield (coastal).

Androdes hypochalcis Turner
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage of young plants.
Locality: Lisarow (coastal).

MOORE 75

Euxoa radians (Guen.)

Hosts: P. radiata and numerous cultivated plants.
Damage: Damage to roots and lower stems of nursery stock, sometimes severe.
Locality: Vulcan State Forest (highlands).

Heliothis punctigera Wallengr.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage to young nursery stock, severe.
Locality: Sydney (coastal).
Notodontidae
Teara variegata Walk.

Hosts: Acacia spp., P. radiata, Hakea sericea.
Damage: Slight to moderate damage to foliage.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Oecophoridae
Arachnographa micrastrella (Meyr.)
Hosts: P. elliottii, P. pinaster, P. radiata.

Damage: Damage to male inflorescence, and light to moderate damage to foliage.
Localities: Mangrove Mountain (highlands), Somersby and Sydney (coastal).

Barea consignatella Walk.

Hosts: P. radiata and numerous indigenous and exotic trees and shrubs.
Damage: Beneath bark of stumps and in damaged areas on trees and shrubs.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby and Sydney (coastal).

Coesyra sp.
Host: P. radiata. :
Damage: Attacks rotting foliage and grasses in crotches of larger trees.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Elaeonoma sp.

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Beneath bark of stumps.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

Tortricopsis semijunctella Walk.

Hosts: P. radiata, Juniperus sp.
Damage: As for A. micrastrella but larvae also bore in stems of young shoots.
Locality: Somersby, Sydney (coastal).

Psychidae
Clania tenuis Rosen.

Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Defoliation of small trees, moderate damage on larger trees.
Localities: Sydney and Newcastle (coastal).

Hyalarcta hubneri Westw.

Hosts: P. ayacahuite, P. elliottii, P. radiata, flowers of Leptospermum minuti-
folium, and numerous indigenous and exotic trees and shrubs.

Damage: Defoliation of small trees, moderate damage on larger trees.

Localities: Widely distributed throughout western slopes, coast and highlands.

Lepidoscia ? punctiferella (Walk.)
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Localities: Armidale State Forest (highlands), Somersby (coastal).

76 AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

Narycia sp.
Hosts: P. pinaster, P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Localities: Mt. Topper State Forest (western slopes), Mt. Mitchell State Forest
Armidale State Forest (highlands), Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Oiketicus elongatus Saund.

Hosts: P. radiata, and several indigenous and exotic trees and shrubs.
Damage: Moderate damage to foliage.
Localities: Lisarow, Newcastle and Sydney (coastal).

Trigonocyttara clandestina Turner

Hosts: P. radiata, most Eucalyptus spp. and numerous indigenous and exotic
trees and shrubs.
Damage: Damage to foliage severe on small trees, moderate on larger trees.
Localities: Mt. Topper State Forest (western slopes), Mt. Mitchell State Forest
and Armidale State Forest (highlands), Lisarow, Somersby and Sydney
(coastal).
Tortricidae

Acropolitis rudisana (Walk.)
Hosts: Pinus spp.
Damage: Severe to nursery stock.
Localities: Mt. Mitchell State Forest (highlands), Sydney (coastal).

Cryptoptila immersana (Walk.)
Host: Pinus spp.
Damage: Severe damage to nursery stock.
Locality: Sydney (coastal).

Epiphyas postvittana (Walk.)
Hosts: P. radiata, cultivated apple and rose, and numerous indigenous and exotic
shrubs.

Damage: Damage to foliage slight on young tips of P. radiata.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

Epiphyas xylodes (Meyr.)
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Damage similar to that of E. postvittana.
Locality: Blackheath (highlands).

Isotenes miserana (Walk.)

Hosts: P. radiata, P. elliottii and Cedrela australis.
Damage: Damage similar to two previous species.
Localities: Lisarow, Ourimbah State Forest, Pennant Hills (coastal).

Xyloryctidae
Plectophila discalis Walk.
Host: P. radiata.

Damage: Damage similar to that of A. micrastrella.
Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

ORTHOPTERA
Eumasticidae

Moraba amiculi Sjost.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).
Phasmatidae
Ctenomorpha sp.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Slight damage to foliage.
Locality: Somersby (coastal).

MOORE 7/7]

Tettigoniidae

Caedicia sp.
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: Destroys unopened tips of foliage on young plants.
Locality: Mt. Mitchell State Forest (highlands).

Phaneropterinae gen. et sp. indet.

Host: P. radiata.

Damage: Bases of needles damaged.

Locality: Somersby (coastal).

THYSANOPTERA
Thripidae
Heliothrips haemorrhoidalis Bouche

Host: P. radiata.

Damage: Damage sometimes severe, causing yellowing and silvering of foliage,
with mortalities of lower branches on unpruned trees and of small plants.
Occurs in large numbers in open situations during cooler weather, or in
shaded situations during summer.

Localities: Lisarow, Somersby (coastal).

(two unidentified spp.)
Host: P. radiata.
Damage: In small numbers on young shoots. Damage not evident.
Locality: Lisarow (coastal).

CONCLUSION

From observations, collections and biological studies of these insects attacking
Pinus spp. it appears that:—

(a) P. radiata is much more consistently and heavily attacked than any
other Pinus sp. in New South Wales, even when the much greater area planted
to this species is considered.

(b) Most of the insect species attacking Pinus spp. have the common
characteristic of feeding on a wide range of host-species in the field. This appears
to enable them to feed on exotic plant spp. quite readily. Conversely, when an
indigenous insect is host-specific, or almost so, this characteristic is apparently
absent.

(c) Pinus spp. growing on prime quality sites show little or no attack, while
heaviest attack appears to occur on the lower quality sites and/or untreated stands.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The writer is grateful to the following for identifications of the insect species
dealt with in this paper: —

Australian Museum: Dr. J. W. Evans, Messrs. D. K. McAlpine and C. N.
Smithers.

British Museum: Drs. V. F. Eastop, M. S. K. Ghauri, P. M. Newman,
B. J. Selman; Messrs. E. A. J. Duffy and R. D. Pope.

C.S.1.R.O. (Canberra): Dr. K. H. L. Key; Messrs. I. F. B. Common and
E. Reed.

Department of Argiculture, N.S.W.: Messrs. M. Casimir and P. C. Hely.

Department of Agriculture & Stock, Queensland: Dr. A. R. Brimblecombe.

Forestry Commission of N.S.W.: Mr. P. Hadlington.

South Australian Museum: Mr. A. Womersley.

Waite Agricultural Research Institute (Sth. Aust.): Miss H. M. Brookes.

CORRIGENDUM.

In the last Proceedings of the Society for 1958-9 (28 February 1961), under
“Observations on Some Australian Forest Insects. No. 6,’ on page 88, the
sentence “Spherical, red and yellow galls are formed on leaves by another species
of psyllid,” should have been deleted.

78

Obituary

LUDWIG GLAUERT, M.B.E., B.A., F.G.S., F.R.Z.S.

The death in Perth, Western Australia, of Mr. Ludwig Glauert early this
year (February Ist, 1963) removed an eminent and well-loved figure from the
Western Australian scientific world, a fine old naturalist of a type impossible
to replace in the modern age of scientific specialists. Mr. Glauert has been a
member of the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales since 1944, was
elected a Fellow and made an Honorary Life Associate Member

Mr. Glauert was born in Sheffield, England, on Sth May 1879. He
came to Western Australia in 1908, engaged in geological field work there, and
became a scientific assistant at the Museum in Perth in 1910. He served overseas
in the Australian Imperial Forces in the First World War, lectured in A.I.F.
depots in the United Kingdom after the Armistice, and studied at the British
Museum and the Royal College of Surgeons, returning to Western Australia in
1920. His early interests were in the field of geology and petrology but he had
an extraordinarily wide knowledge of practically all groups of animals and plants
and was the centre of appeal for biological information from the length and
breadth of Western Australia. The name of Mr. Glauert was.as familiar in outback
stations as it was in the towns of that huge State and so specimens arrived in
a steady stream in the Western Australian Museum of which Glauert became
Curator in 1927. He attended to practically all museum details personally,
preserving, registering, cataloguing and acknowledging thousands of miscellaneous
donations and although busy, would spare time for any caller who showed genuine
interest in natural history. He spoke fluent German and was widely read in
several languages. He was a staunch conservationist and an engaging lecturer
and broadcaster. The University of Western Australia conferred on him the
degree of Bachelor of Arts in 1928.

In 1945, Glauert was awarded the Kelvin Medal by the Royal Society of
Western Australia, of which he was twice President. He retired from directing
the Western Australian Museum in 1956 and the Western Australian Naturalist
paid him the deserved tribute of a special valedictory issue of its publication.
He received the honour of Membership of the British Empire from H.M. Queen
Elizabeth II in the New Year’s Honours for 1960.

Genera of Amphibia, Siphonaptera and Pisces were named after Glauert
and many species of various animal groups. Glauert found time to write papers
and books on geology, palaeontology, insects, arachnida (especially scorpions),
crustacea, amphibia, reptiles, whales and other matters. He was correcting the
typescript of a check-list of scorpions in hospital not long before he died.

Biographical notices of Glauert have appeared in the Daily News (Perth,
W.A.) 10 Dec. 1928; The Naturalist October, 1933: 239; J. Roy. Soc. W. Austr.
31, 1948, p. vi & portrait; Austr. J. Sci. 19 (3), 1956: 112 and, with a bibliography
and portraits, in the Western Australian Naturalist 5 (7), 1957, valedictory
number in honour of Ludwig Glauert: 146-165. Dr. D. L. Serventy supplies
further information in the Western Australian Naturalist 8 (8), 1963: 189-193.
with portraits, and in the Emu 63, 1963: 74-75.

—G. P. WHITLEY.

79

Recommendations for Authors

These recommendations have been drawn up for the guidance of authors
wishing to submit papers for publication in the “Australian Zoologist”; adherence
to these recommendations will facilitate the consideration of papers and their
passage through the Press.

GENERAL RULES.

Manuscripts should be typewritten, in double spacing, on foolscap paper,
on one side of the page only, and with a margin of at least one inch on the
leading side, top and bottom of each page. The original should be submitted
and a copy retained by the author at least until the paper has been published.
Manuscripts should be complete in all details and accompanied by necessary
drawings and/or photographs, numbered and arranged for block-making. Text,
references and illustrations should be thoroughly checked before submission.
Only generic, specific and subspecific names, and other words to be printed in
italics should be underlined. Higher categories (e.g. Families, Orders) are not
printed in italics and should not be underlined but should start with a capital
letter. Papers should be as concise as possible consistent with adequate presenta-
tion; the inclusion of irrelevant matter which does not add to the informative
content of the paper should be avoided. Pages should be numbered consecutively
throughout the paper.

PREPARATION OF MANUSCRIPT.

All zoological papers must conform with the “International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature.” Titles of papers should be as brief as possible, but
should indicate clearly the nature of the communication to enable the reader
to determine immediately the special group and/or subject being dealt with in
the text. The title should be typed on the first page of the manuscript. When
a title refers to a group in the animal kingdom, this information should include
at least two names, usually those of the order and family, e.g. “A Taxonomic
Revision of American Leafhoppers (Homoptera, Cicadellidae).” The author's
name should appear immediately after the title, centred, and be followed below
by a concise but usable form of address. Headings for all taxonomic categories
from subspecies upwards should be centred. In general, main headings should
be centred, lesser headings being placed either at the left margin or run on. A
full stop should be used only after unbracketed numerals in the headings.
Spelling and punctuation should be those used in “The Concise Oxford
Dictionary.” Uniformity should be observed in capitalization, hyphenation and
punctuation. As far as possible, commonly adopted abbreviations should be used.
Dates, when used in the text, should be written—for example—as 2 January,
1903, but in tables and lists of specimens as 2. i. 1903. (Authors should consult
the C.S.I.R.O. “Guide to Authors,” Appendix I, Melbourne, 1953, for a list of
abbreviations and symbols.) All measurements should, normally, be given in
the metric system. When numbers are included in the text, they should be written
out. Footnotes should not be used unless absolutely necessary. They should be
inserted in the text following the line containing the word or sentence to which
the footnote refers, and ruled off above and below. They should be numbered
consecutively. Tables should be typed on separate sheets, numbered consecutively,
and provided with distinctive titles. Approximate positions for insertion of tables
should be indicated in the manuscript by leaving a blank space, typing in number
and title of the table and leaving another blank space. References should be

80 AUTHOR’S RECOMMENDATIONS

collected in a list at the end of the paper under the heading “References.” They
should be arranged in alphabetical order, each giving: Name(s) followed by
initial(s) of author(s); year of publication; title of paper; journal’s title abbre-
viated in accordance with the “World List of Periodicals” and underlined (Note
that abbreviation for Journal is J.); volume number in arabic numerals, without
the prefix “vol.”; the numbers of the pages, without the prefix “P.”; indication
of figures and Plates; references will appear in the following form: Beadle, L. C.,
1931. The effect of salinity changes in the water contents and respiration
of marine invertebrates. J. exp. Biol. 8: 211-227, 4 figs. If several papers by
the same author in one year are cited, a, b, c are placed after the years of
publication, thus: Pearman, J. V., 1932a. Notes on the genus Psocus with special
reference to the British species. Ent. mon. Mag. 68: 193-204. Pearman, J. V.,
1932b. Some coccophagous Psocids (Psocoptera) from East Africa. Stylops 1:
90-96. In citing papers in the text from the list of references, the name of the
author and the year of publication are placed in brackets, or the page and
figure numbers may be included, thus: “(Brown, 1954) or (Brown 1954: 25,
fig. 4) or Brown (1954: 25) stated ...” It is desirable that a summary
should be presented at the beginning of the text, headed as such. This summary
should convey briefly the contents of the paper and draw attention to new
information and to the main conclusions. It should be written concisely,
preferably in the third person and, in general, should not exceed 250-300 words.
It should be intelligible in itself without reference to the paper. In taxonomic
papers reference should be made to new genera and species described unless
there are excessively large numbers of such involved.

ILLUSTRATION.

Only illustrations essential to its elucidation should be included in a paper.
Illustrations should preferably be in the form of line-drawings wherever possible.
Each figure or plate should be clearly marked on the back with the author’s name
and the title of the paper to which it belongs. Plates: The normal size when
reduced (if intended for reduction) should not exceed that of the type area of
a page in “The Australian Zoologist.” When several illustrations are to be
included on one plate they should be of such size and shape to admit of
reduction without loss of detail and legibility. They should be numbered or
lettered for reference. Numbers or symbols which are to appear as part of a plate
must be neatly executed, proportionately, in India ink, or, on a very dark
background, Chinese white. A number of small photographs (rectangular rather
than circular) should be assembled to form one plate, mounted on stiff white
paper or cardboard. The photographs should show good contrast and be printed
on glossy paper. Line drawings: These will include diagrams, graphs, maps etc.
They should be drawn in India ink on smooth white paper, Bristol board or
tracing linen. When it is not desired to reproduce the squares of the paper on
which graphs have been drawn, paper ruled in light blue lines should be used.
When text figures are to appear as a full page illustration allowance must be
made for the caption which will appear underneath; figures and caption must
fit into page size. Where possible line drawings should be grouped to fill a page.
Approximate positions for the insertion of the line drawings in the text should
be indicated as for tables. Maps should be drawn so as to economize space as
far as possible and, in general, the title should not be included in the map but
written underneath for type-setting. If plates or text-figures have been prepared
for reduction the amount of reduction should be clearly indicated. Suggestions
are: to draw a line AB on the margin of the illustration, indicating the amount
of reduction by cutting off a segment AC, the appropriate fraction of AB, and
adding a note “reduce AB to AC”; or, to indicate on the drawings the required
width of the block, e.g. thus: <— 4” —. Illustrations for inclusion
in the text should be drawn approximately twice the width at which they are to
be reduced in the text. Each separate figure should be clearly numbered, and
lettering, etc., should be plain and large enough to be clearly readable when

AUTHOR’S RECOMMENDATIONS 81

reduced. Text-figures and plates should be numbered consecutively and referred
to in the text by number. Legends to all figures and plates should be included
on a separate sheet or sheets with the manuscript.

Illustrations and manuscript should be mailed or delivered flat to: The
Honorary Secretary, Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales, Bull’s
Chambers, Martin Place, Sydney. They should never be bound or rolled.
Originals of illustrations should be submitted. .

REPRINTS.

Individual authors receive 25 copies of each paper free of charge (joint
authors share this number). Additional copies may be ordered provided that the
number of such copies is indicated when the proofs are returned.

ACCEPTANCE OF PAPERS.

Papers will be considered by the Editorial Committee and may be submitted
to referees for comment before acceptance. Papers for publication should not
be offered to other journals and should not have been previously published.
Manuscripts which are not assembled and presented in conformity with these
recommendations may be returned to the author for alteration; adherence to
these recommendations will, therefore, facilitate publication. Authors must accept
responsibility for the accuracy of their facts, the opinions they express and for
adherence to the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature. Every care
will be taken of manuscripts and drawings but the Society cannot take respon-
sibility for loss or damage.

CORRECTION OF PROOFS.

The address to which proofs are to be sent for correction should be indicated
when the manuscript is submitted. Proofs should be corrected and returned
promptly to the Editor. As manuscripts submitted for publication should be in
a form ready for despatch to the printer, proofs are sent to authors for the
correction of printer’s errors only. Where an author makes any other alteration
to proofs it may be necessary to charge for same.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII PLATE I.

. Defoliation of Angophora floribunda by Panacela lewinae.
Photo. Ross Moore.

Early stage of bag-shelter and damage by P. lewinae.
Photo. K. G. Campbell.

. Bag shelter of last instar larvae of P. lewinae.

Photo. Ross Moore.

Adult males (right) and females (left) of P. lewinae.
Photo: P. Hadlington.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII PLATE II.

Brown Honey-eater, Gliciphila indistincta, at nest. Photo: N. Chaffer.

PLATE III.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII

Golden-headed Fantail Warbler, Cisticola exilis, at nest. Photo: K. A. Hindwood.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII PLATE IV.

=o 4

Little Grassbird. Megalurus gramineus, at nest. Photo: N. Chaffer.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII PEADESV.

Views of Canada Bay Swamp. Photos: K. A. Hindwood.

Aisin : ‘Ae
DP gis 4 PL

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII PLATE VI.

Above: View of Canada Bay Swamp.

Below: Haunt of the Golden-headed Fantail Warbler, Cisticola exilis. Photos:
K. Hindwood.

PLATE VIL.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII

Photo: R. Cooper.

Reed Warbler, Acrocephalis australis at nest.

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

MEMBERSHIP.
(The Society’s year commences on Ist July)

Fees commencing Ist July 1952 as follows:

Class Amount of Subscription
Associate Member eles Lt) LOepenrannam:
Ordinary Member POOL! Ohta 3

(Members joining after Ist January in any year pay
one-half subscription. )

Life Associate Member sm .. £10 10 O in one sum
Life Member rf ef Shs ays eeree dl: JORNO MES yk >
| Elected for services
Honorary Member ; : a, to Australian Zoology
Honorary Associate Member .. | or to the Society
Junior Members (aged 16 or under) uy 5 0 per annum
ULREES:

(Conferred by the Council)
{ For valuable services

Fellow ; a Le oe } to the Society or to
Australian Zoology
Associate Benefactor ... For contribution of £100 to the Society’s Funds
Benefactor .. AAS . LS OO hess cs Hf a
Endowment RERIbeR OS 4 f LTOOO as. Pe es
PRIVILEGES.

Members of all classes may attend all meetings of the Society and its various
Sections. Every member (other than an Associate or Life Associate Member)
receives a free pass to Taronga Zoological Park and Aquarium, and twelve
tickets each year, admitting 12 adults or 24 children to the Park only.

APPLICATION FOR MEMBERSHIP

should be addressed to the Honorary Secretary, Royal Zoological Society of
New South Wales, 28 Martin Place, Sydney.

PUBLICATIONS

“The Australian Zoologist,’ published at irregular intervals since 1914. Twelve
volumes to date.
“Proceedings,” published annually since 1933-34.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOOGICAL HANDBOOKS AND
SPECIAL REPRINTS.

“Bibliography of Australian Entomology, 1775-1930,” by A. Musgrave, 1932.
“Australian Insects.” by K. C. McKeown, 1947.
“A Check List of the Birds of Paradise and Bower Birds,” by T, Iredale, 1948.
“Revision of the New South Wales Turridae,” by C. F. Laseron, 1954.
“The Published Writings of Tom Iredale, with an Index of his new Scientific
Names,” by D. F. McMichael & G. P. Whitley, 1956.
“A Reclassification of the Order Odonata,” by F. C. Fraser, 1957.
“Dragonflies of Australia,” by F. C. Fraser, 1960.
Orders and enquiries should be sent to the Honorary Secretary, Royal
Zoological Society of New South Wales, 28 Martin Place, Sydney.

CONTENTS OF THIS PART

Notes on the Hawk moths and Butterflies of Bandon Grove, N.S.W., a
Miss M. J. Dowling and L. Courtney Haines

Australian Runcinacea (Mollusca: Gastropoda), by R. Burn

The Larvae of Gynacantha mocsaryi Forster and bia a ian
(Brauer) (Odonata), by F. C. Fraser ;

The Rediscovery of Sia weyersi (Odonata: eee or I a Ce
Fraser ce bi Ae !

New locality records of butterflies, by E. O. Edwards
A new locality for Zizeeria lysimon karsandra Moore 1865, by J. V. Peters

Life History of Pseudalmenus chlorinda chloris (Lepidoptera: Lycaenidae),
by E. Edwards and E. O. Edwards 2 f iy bi 2

Life history of the butterfly Hesperilla mastersi, by E. O. Edwards
The Birds of Canada Bay, N.S.W., by L. Courtney Haines ....

- Observations on some Australian Forest Insects. 10. An indigenous insect,
Panacela lewinae (Lewin) (Lepidoptera: Eupterotidae) attacking exotic
Pinus spp. in New South Wales, by K. M. Moore ; a fay

Observations on some Australian Forest Insects. 11. Two species of
lepidopterous leaf-miners attacking anes ee) pilularis Smith, by
K. M. Moore a : et 3 oe ve i:

The Butterflies of the Mallacoota District, by D. F. Crosby

Some notes on the Moths and Butterflies found occurring in the Haberfield
and Fivedock Districts, Sydney, N.S.W., by L. Courtney Haines

Observations on some Australian Forest Insects. 14. A preliminary list of
insects attacking Pinus spp. in New South Wales, by K. M. Moore

Obituary — Ludwig Glauert, by G P. Whitley

Recommendations for Authors
Plates I-VII.

Wholly set up and Bunted in Australie for the Royal Zoulosioae Raney of N.S.W.,

. J. Miller & Co., 11 Fotheringham Lane, Marrickville

Page

1
9

23

26
29
29

30
31
33

40
46
54
57
69
78
79

by

RWS AGS ROS SS SRE SEE EEE.
SIO, 574 Y N
os
\ iN

Y THE eR

% AvsTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST %

ys
é A Issued by the AS

y “N
WY ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES PS

\ y, fj) N
NY “IN
‘ ‘ ~)
WZ bs
WJ aN)

y mn
W Volume XIII — Part 2 K

vy GX
Ny August 10, 1965. EX
y ugust E erm AN
iy : * Bye a). ry . a! Gi NY

: 7 4 a tS

| rahe AN
arf ; 40
Price £1 12 190 is

Two Dollars)» .@ \
_ Paha OE REPOS N
Soran A

All communications to be addressed to the Hon. Secretary,
Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,
28 Martin Place, Sydney.

Registered at the G.P.O., Sydney, for transmission by post as a periodical.

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES
Established 1879

REGISTERED UNDER THE COMPANIES ACT 1899 (1917)

Patron:
His Excellency Lieutenant-General Sir Eric Woodward, K.C.M.G., C.B.,
C.B.E., D.S.O., Governor of New South Wales.
Vice-Patrons:

Sir Edward Hallstrom, K.B., F.R.Z.S.
Aubrey Halloran, O.B.E., B.A., LI.B., LID., F:R.ZS.

COUNCIL, 1964-65

President:
John Cameron Yaldwyn, M.Sc., Ph.D.

Vice-Presidents:

Henry John de Suffren Disney, M.A.
Ernest Jeffrey Gadsden, F.R.Z.S.
Lawrence Courtney-Haines, A.Mus.A., L.T.C.L.
Gilbert Percy Whitley, F.R.Z.S., R.A.O.U.

Honorary Secretary: Mrs. Leone Harford.
Honorary Editor: Gilbert Percy Whitley, F.R.Z.S., R.A.O.U.
Honorary Treasurer: John Leonard Fry.

Members of Council:

John Miles Campbell Basil Joseph Guy Marlow, B.Sc.

Henry John de Suffren Disney (Hons. Lond.), F.Z.S.

John Leonard Fry Anthony Irwin Ormsby, LIB.

Ernest Jeffrey Gadsden Peter Edward Roberts

Maxwell Hall Gregg Frank Hamilton Talbot, M.Sc., Ph.D.

Lawrence Courtney-Haines Ellis le Geyt Troughton, F.R.ZS.,

John Hallstrom C.M.ZS.

Claude Hardy Gilbert Percy Whitley

Mrs. Leone Harford Mrs. Olive Wills

Frank McCamley John Cameron Yaldwyn
OFFICERS:

Honorary Solicitor: Aubrey Halloran, O.B.E., B.A., LI.B., LI.D., F.R.Z.S.
Honorary Auditors: Messrs. Peat, Marwich, Mitchell and Company.
Honorary Librarian: Mrs. Leone Harford.

Assistant Honorary Secretary: Mrs. Olive Wills.

Assistant Honorary Treasurer: (Vacant).

OFFICERS OF SECTIONS.

Entomological Section: Junior Group:
Chairman: Mr, M. Gregg. Chairman: Mrs. L. Harford.
Hon. Secretary: Mrs. V. Gregg.
Conchological Section: Ornithological Section:
Chairman: Mr, F. McCamley. Chairman: Mr. L. C. Haines.

Hon. Secretary: Mrs. O. Wills. Hon. Secretary: Mr. H. Battam.

THE AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST

VOLUME XIill PART 2

THE “SYDNEY” BIRD PAINTINGS

By K. A. HINDWwoop

(Plates viii-ix)

The visit of Captain Cook, and the naturalists Banks and Solander, to
eastern Australia in the Endeavour in 1770 revealed a new and fascinating
world in the domain of the natural sciences. The observations of these eminent
men, and the collections they gathered, not only in Australia but in various
parts of the Pacific, aroused widespread interest in England and Europe. Thus,
when Sydney Cove was settled some 18 years later numerous specimens of birds
and other animals, insects, shells, shrubs and native implements were sent
“Home” to scientists and dilettanti alike by the pioneers of “Botany Bay.”

Books, such as those of Phillip (1789), White (1790) and Hunter (1793),
gave prominence to the natural history of Sydney and its surroundings: but
apart from published works, there is, in the form of diaries, letters, and
especially drawings, much that is of great interest to naturalists.

Most of this material is known to historians and has been discussed over
the years: nevertheless, there is still a lot to be done in the way of assessing
its historical worth. This is especially so in the case of the many natural
history paintings which, for the most part, now repose in libraries and
museums in various parts of the world.

Some of the better-known drawings are the “Watling” series, named after
the convict-artist Thomas Watling; the “Lambert” series, once in the possession
of A. B. Lambert, a prominent botanist of his day, and the “Raper” paintings
which have recently (Hindwood, 1964) been discussed in detail.

Another collection worthy of attention is that of 100 (originally 101)
watercolour drawings of birds purchased by the Trustees of the Public Library
of New South Wales in 1887 from a London bookseller and now housed in the
Mitchell Library, Sydney. These drawings are on separate sheets tipped in to
a bound volume and are, in the main, skilfully executed by several unknown
artists. The sheets vary in size from quarto to folio.

Generally the artists have given brief details such as the scale of the
figure, the colour of the iris of the bird, and the month in which the painting
was done, but only in two instances has the year been stated. In addition,
brief notes on habits or plumage are given on a number of the drawings,
and the pencilled handwriting, in some cases, appears to be that of Captain
Arthur Phillip, the first Governor of the Colony, a supposition I discussed in
1933 (Hindwood, 1933).

It is known that Phillip sent natural history drawings to Sir Joseph
Banks and doubtless also to other naturalists in England: thus it is possible
that the present series was assembled by Phillip for a friend in England, or
even for his own pleasure. A few months before his death, in August 1814,
Phillip prepared a will wherein he specifically mentions drawings made in

84 “SYDNEY” BIRD PAINTINGS

New South Wales and which he ordered to be sold immediately after his
death (Mackaness, 1937). There is a strong inference in the above circum-
stances that the 100 drawings now in the Mitchell Library were at one time in
the possession of Phillip.

The earliest mention, in Australian literature, of this historically
important collection appears to be a note by A. J. Campbell. In discussing
(Campbell, 1912) Edward Augustus Petherick’s manuscript bibliography of
Australiana based largely on material presented by Petherick to the Common-
weath Parliamentary Library, Campbell states:

1791-2. The Bibliographer notes there are in the Sydney Public Library

101 beautifully coloured drawings of birds, chiefly from Norfolk Island,

Of ethis) dates).

Certainly some Norfolk Island species are represented in the series, but
most of the drawings are of birds found near Sydney.

The bound volume containing the paintings is titled on the spine in gold,
“Drawings of Birds Chiefly from Australia”, and a cutting from a bookseller’s
catalogue, pasted on the verso of the fiy-leaf, reads:

Drawings of birds chiefly from Australia. A collection of 101 beautifully
coloured drawings, with descriptions in pencil. El. fol. N.P. 1791-2.

The drawings were transferred to the Mitchell Library (a specialised
section of the Public Library) in August 1929. Earlier in that year I happened
to come upon a reference to the drawings in the old printed catalogue of the
Public Library. A brief scrutiny of the collection indicated that their historical
worth was considerable, and therefore Tom Iredale (at the time on the
staff of the Australian Museum), who had worked over the “Watling”, “Lambert”
and other drawings in England with Gregory Mathews during the preparation of
the Birds of Australia (1910-27), was asked to examine the series. He realised
at once that they were a contemporary set and that, in many instances, the
styles of painting closely resembled, or perhaps were the same as, some of the
drawings in the “Watling” collection in the British Museum (Natural History).

Subseqeuently (Hindwood, 1931) these drawings were called the “Sydney”
set, a fitting name because most of them were done at Port Jackson during the
first years of settlement and then, after an absence of almost 100 years, were
returned to Sydney in 1887. In the interim they had obviously passed through
several hands because as many as five different writings are on some of the
sheets.

The birds depicted are largely species still frequenting the Sydney district.
However, certain kinds—the Red-backed Wren (33), Glossy Black Cockatoo
(48), Ground Parrot (50), Pied Oyster-catcher (87) and Pied Goose (98)—
no longer occur in the area, and others—the Grey Currawong (15), Blue-faced
Honeyeater (56) and Diamond Dove (80)—may be classed as rare vagrants
or stragglers. One of the paintings (32) is a well-drawn figure of a flycatcher-
like bird that does not resemble any known species.

Eleven sheets (24, 26, 29, 30, 31, 84, 96, 97, 99, 100, 101). representing
seven species, are of birds from Norfolk Island, one of which (84) is of the
extinct Norfolk Island Pigeon; another (96) is of a dove-petrel and was until
recently only known evidence of such a species.

The colours of the paintings, even after the lapse of more than 170 years,
still appear fresh and true. Slight changes have taken place in some instances,
as where a white body-colour has been laid over a dark ground: through
absorption the white has changed to a bluish shade. Otherwise, however, the
colours are, with few exceptions, remarkably accurate.

Two sheets (46, 71) each have three figures on them: five sheets (4, 17,
26, 34, 72) each depict two birds, sometimes the male and female of a species,
or else two distinct species: the rest of the drawings are of single birds. Where

Nm

18.

HINDWOOD 85

same species is present more than once in the series the additional paintings.

by different artists.

The numbers preceding the identifications refer to the order in which

paintings appear in the bound volume.

Black-shouldered Kite, Elanus notatus.
“August. Natural Size.”

The figure agrees best with the above species, which is not uncommon
near Sydney, whereas the closely-related Letter-winged Kite, E. scriptus,
is exceedingly rare in coastal New South Wales.

Missing from volume.

A faint imprint on the reverse of the first folio shows that the bird
depicted had a distinct facial-disc, a dark back and light underparts,
indicating either the Barn Owl, Tyto alba, or the Masked Owl, 7. novae-
hollandiae.

Ground Thrush, Zoothera lunulata.
“August — Natural size.”

Spotted Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma punctatum, male and female. “Drawn
the natural size being the only two of the kind (as yet) seen on the
Colony June 1792.”

The last four words and the year have been repeated. The Spotted
Quail-Thrush was first described and figured in Shaw’s Zoology of New
Holland (1794).

Olive-backed Oriole, Oriolus sagittatus.
“Natural size, July — Iris doubtful.”
Black-backed Magpie, Gymnorhina tibicen.
“May. Natural size.”

. Black-backed Magpie, G. tibicen.

“April. 4 the Natural size — This bird has a very uncommon and not
unpleasant note.”

Dollar-bird, Eurystomus orientalis.

“October. Reduced to half the size of the Bird the Drawing was taken
from.”

Grey Butcher-bird, Cracticus torquatus, female plumage.
“July — Natural size.”

Grey Butcher-bird, C. torquatus, male plumage.
“Natural size — Iris doubtful.”

Eastern Shrike-tit, Falcunculus frontatus, male.
“October, Natural size.”

. Dusky Wood-Swallow, Artamus cyanopterus.

“April — Natural size.”

White-browed Wood-Swallow, A. superciliosus, male.
“December — Natural size.”

Little Cuckoo-Shrike, Coracina robusta, immature.
“August — Natural size.”

Grey Currawong, Strepera versicolor.
“4 the Natural size.”

Grey Shrike-Thrush, Colluricincla harmonica.
“The same size as the bird the drawing was taken from. April.”

Eastern Striated Pardalote, Pardalotus ornatus.

Spotted Pardalote, P. punctatus, female.

“August. Both drawn Natural size and supposed to be of a different
kind. Natural size.”

Golden Whistler, Pachycephala pectoralis, male.
“Natural size.”

86

193

20.

2.

22.

P28),

24.

715

26.

Dike

28.

29%

30.
shale
BYE,

33:

“SYDNEY” BIRD PAINTINGS

Golden Whistler, P. pectoralis, male.

“April — Natural size.”
Golden Whistler, P. pectoralis, male.
“April — Natural size.”

The above three drawings are by different artists who seem to have
used the same specimen as a model.

Restless Flycatcher, Seisura inquieta.
“June — Natural size.”

White-shouldered Caterpillar-eater, Lalage sueurii, male.
“November — Natural size.”

Brown Tree-creeper, Climacterus_picumnus.
“May, Natural size — Iris and Tongue doubtful.”

Scarlet Robin, Petroica multicolor, male.
“Natural size.”

The figure represents the form of the Scarlet Robin living on Norfolk
Island, which place is the type locality of the species. Drawings Nos. 29.
30 and 31, all of Norfolk Island birds, are also by the same artist, whose
wens is lacking in finish when compared with most of the other paintings
in the series.

Scarlet Robin, P. multicolor, male.
“Car-ral, gan, yei, sar. Natural size.” ‘
A painting of the form, i.e. boodang, occurring in New South Wales.

Scarlet Robin, P. multicolor, female.
Scarlet Robin, P. multicolor, male.
“Two Birds of Norfolk Island (Natural size).”

Hooded Robin. Melanodryas cucullata, female.
“May, Natural size.”

Willie Wagtail, Rhipidura leucophrys.
“July — Natural Size.”

Norfolk Island Blackbird, Aplonis fuscus, male.
“Blackbird.”

Norfolk Island Blackbird, A. fuscus, female.
Slender-billed White-eye, Nesozosterops tenuirostris.

Indeterminable.
“July — Natural size.”

The bird figured is the same as that in “Lambert” drawing No. 12,
(vol. 2) and “Watling” drawing No. 180 which Bowdler Sharpe states
(1906) is the Black-cheeked Flycatcher, Muscicapa barbata of Latham
(1801), and which he says is the Yellow-throated Scrub-Wren, Sericornis
lathami. However, the three drawings, all similar in posture and colouring,
but by different artists, are not of that species and do not represent any
known Australian bird.

The bill is dark brown and slender; the forehead white, spotted black;
the entire under-surface is white with a lemon wash on the breast;
the crown and sides of the face are blackish, with a broad yellow stripe
extending through and behind the eye; the back and wing-coverts are
brown, the primaries being darker; the wing shows a pale yellow centrai
bar; the upper tail-coverts are reddish, the tail itself being long and brown,
paler near the tip. Total length of the figure is 130 mm., culmen 8 mm.,
tarsus 17 mm., wing 45 mm., tail 55 mm.

Red-backed Wren, Malurus melanocephalus, Male.
“Natural size.”

This species is figured in several collections of drawings made during
the early years of settlement. It has not since been observed in the
Sydney district. The present southern limit of distribution in New South
Wales appears to be the Taree area, some 150 miles north of Sydney (see
Hindwood, 1964, p. 44).

34.

35.

47.

48.

49.

50.

51.

52.

53.

HINDWOOD 87

Superb Blue Wren, M. cyaneus, female.
Superb Blue Wren, M. cyaneus, male.
“Mo-ro, dru, ing — Male and Female — Natural size.”

Emu-Wren, Stipiturus malachurus, male.
“Natural size.”

Little Thornbill, Acanthiza nana.
“September — Natural size.”

Little Thornbill, A. nana.
“October — Natural size.”

Pipit, Anthus australis.
“July — Natural size.”

Speckled Warbler, Chthonicola sagittata.
“July — Natural size the notes of this bird are equal if not superior
to the English Linnet.”

Red-browed Finch, Aegintha temporalis.
“Natural size.”

Diamond Firetail, Zonaeginthus guttatus, immature.
“June — Natural size Iris doubtful.’

Beautiful Firetail, Z. bellus.
“Natural size.”

Diamond Firetail, Z. gultatus.
“February, Natural size.’

Fan-tailed Cuckoo, Cacomantis pyrrhophanus, male.
“B. Goes with A. Natural size.”

Fan-tailed Cuckoo, C. pyrrhophanus, ? female.
“A. Goes with B. Natural size.”

Golden Bronze Cuckoo, Lamprococcocyx plagosus, top figure.
Golden Bronze Cuckoo, L. plagosus, middle figure.

Rufous Whistler, Pachycephala rufiventris, immature male.
“These Birds drawn Natural size.”

The figure of the immature male Rufous Whistler on the above
sheet agrees with both “Watling” drawing No. 141 and “Lambert”
drawing No. 34 (Vol. 2), either one or the other of which is the
basis of Turdus prasinus of Latham (1801), which name has page
priority over rufiventris. However, no change is necessary because the
combination is pre-occupied by Turdus prasinus of Sparrman (1789).

Pheasant Coucal, Centropus phasianinus.
“This Bird is about the size of the English Pheasant. Drawn one-third of
the Natural size.”

The bird figured is in breeding plumage. A single feather is shown
in detail, illustrating the conspicuous glossy-black extended shafts of
the neck and breast feathers.

Glossy Black Cockatoo, Calyptorhynchus lathami, female.
“Reduced by scale to one-third the Natural size — Black Cockatoo.”

Turquoise Parrot, Neophema pulchella, male.
“War, ran. Natural size.”

Ground Parrot, Pezoporus wallicus.
“This is a Ground Parrot and never goes to a Tree or very seldom.
Natural size.”

Little Lorikeet, Glossopsitta pusilla.
“Natural size.”

Musk Lorikeet, G. concinna.
“Natural size.”

Eastern Rosella, Platycercus eximius.
“Corella, Natural size (Natural Size).”

54.

5)3)5

56.

Sif

58.

59.

le

72.

Us

74.

“SYDNEY” BIRD PAINTINGS

Scarlet Honeyeater, Myzomela sanguincolenta, male.

“September — Natural size. These birds are supposed to be birds of
passage and appear in flocks, the red does not show the beauty of
the bird.”

Noisy Friarbird, Philemon corniculatus.
“Wer, gan or the Friar. Natural size.”

Blue-faced Honeyeater, Entomyzon cyanotis.
“Natural size — the outer and middle toe are connected to the first
joint. No feathers grow upon the part of the head which is blue (and
of the finest ultramarine).”

The last five words, which are in brackets, replace the words that
have been incompletely erased; also the partly erased words “of this bird”
follow the word ultramarine.

Noisy Friarbird, Philemon corniculatus, immature.

“January — Natural size — supposed to be a young Bird.”
Brush Wattle-bird, Anthochaera chrysoptera.
“October — Natural size — the feathers of the neck, head, breast

and Back are all pointed.”

Brush Wattle-bird, A. chrysoptera.
“Natural size — the feathers of the head, neck and breast are pointed.”

Red Wattle-bird, A. carunculata. ;
“July — Reduced by scale to half the Natural size.”

Yellow-winged Honeyeater, Meliornis novae-hollandiae.
January — Natural size.”

Noisy Miner, Myzantha melanocephala.
“June — Natural size.”

Tawny-crowned Honeyeater, Gliciphila melanops.
“May — Natural size.”

Brown Tree-creeper, Climacteris picummnus.
“Natural size Iris doubtful. Iris supposed to be a straw colour.”

Yellow-winged Honeyeater, Meliornis novae-hollandiae.
“May — Natural size.”

Grey-backed Silvereye, Zosterops lateralis.
“August — Natural size.”

White-cheeked Honeyeater, Meliornis niger.
“June — Natural size.”

Lewin Honeyeater, Meliphaga lewini.
“August — Natural size.”

Yellow-tufted Honeyeater, M. melanops.
“Natural size. Iris doubtful.”

Fuscous Honeyeater, M. fusca.
“August — Natural size.”

White-naped Honeyeater, Melithreptus lunatus.
Yellow-Robin Eopsaltria australis.

Eastern Spinebill, Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris.
“Natural size.”

Bell Miner, Manorina melanophrys.
Rufous Fantail, Rhipidura rufifrons.
“Natural size. Iris of both doubtful.”

Rainbow-bird, Merops ornatus.
“November — Natural size.”

Azure Kingfisher, Alcyone azurea.
“Ter, re, a, mar or King Fisher. Natural size.”

wie

76.

Vile

78.

79.

80.

81.

i

92.

HINDWOOD 89

Laughing Jackass, Dacelo gigas.
“Natural size. The outer and middle toe are connected to the second
joint, the middle and inner to the first.”

Welcome Swallow, Hirundo neoxéna, immature.
“January — Natural size.”

Welcome Swallow, H. neoxena.
“March — Natural size — The Swallow or Martin of New South Wales.”

Tawny Frogmouth, Podargus strigoides.
“Half the Natural size.”

Owlet Nightjar, Aegotheles cristatus, adult.

“A young Mosquito Hawk — Natural size.”
Diamond Dove, Geopelia cuneata.
“May — Natural size.”

Wonga Pigeon, Leucosarcia melanoleuca. :
“Drawn by scale 4 the natural size. Two of these Pidgeons were
now seen for the first time December 1791. Wunga — Wungee Pigeon.”

Six indistinct words follow the above remarks and this partly inde-
cipherable notation reads: “White (?) simil (?) to (?) Game?” “Watling”
drawing No. 225 appears to be a copy of the above painting though
by a different artist (not Watling). Bowdler Sharpe states (1906, p. 145)
that it bears the date “Dec., 1792”, but, according to N. B. Kinnear,
“The date is a little difficult to be quite certain about. I should have
read it myself as Dec., 1791, but on looking closer with a glass the
last cipher is so made that there is a distinct tail on it which is absent
in the first cipher. It looks as if the “1” has been made carelessly and
it could be read either way” (in /itt. 27-8-1930). The final cipher in the
date on the Sydney drawing is also not very distinct though it is
apparently intended for 1.

Common Bronzewing Pigeon, Phaps chalcoptera.

“Natural size — Bronze Wing.”
Brush Bronzewing Pigeon, P. elegans.
“Natural size — Bronze Winged Pigeon.”

Norfolk Island Pigeon, Hemiphaga spadicea. Extinct.
“Pidgeon of Norfolk Island, drawn by scale 4 the natural size —
Iris doubtful.”

Southern Stone-Curlew, Burhinus magnirostris.
“Half the Natural size.”

Southern Stone-Curlew, B. magnirostris, immature.
“A Night Bird. This Bird measured from the tip of the Bill to the
Extr’y of the mid’e toe 30 inches.”

Pied Oyster-catcher, Haematopus ostralegus.

“September — The male and female are always seen together on the
rocks and the bare points but have entirely left the Harbour from being
frequently disturbed, the iris is very bright. Natural size of the toe.”

Red-capped Dotterel, Charadrius alexandrinus, female plumage.
“This bird runs on the ground like the sand Lark and is very common
on the sands in the different parts of the harbour. Natural size.”

Nankeen Night-Heron, Nycticorax caledonicus.

Little Bittern, Ixobrychus minutus.
“The size of the bird the drawing was taken from, who could extend
its neck four inches in leng(th).”

White-necked Heron, Notophoyx pacifica.
“December — Iris doubtful.”

Japanese Snipe, Gallinago hardwicki.
“December. Natural size — Iris doubtful.”

90

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

100.

101.

“SYDNEY” BIRD PAINTINGS

Marsh Crake, Porzana_ pusilla.
“August — Natural size.”

Eastern Swamp-hen, Porphyrio melanotus.
“Reduced to half the bird the drawing was taken from. August.”

Little Grebe, Podiceps ruficollis.

“September. Natural size of the bird, the feathers are of a very fine
texture, particularly those of the breast which have a shining silky
appearance, seldom flies more than 50 or 60 yards — the wing has
three joints, like most tropical birds.”

Norfolk Island Dove-Petrel, Pterodroma hindwoodi.

“Bird of Norfolk Island (natural size).”

A reproduction of this drawing, together with a description oF the bird,
was published by Gregory Mathews (1936). The species has also been
discussed and illustrated by Hindwood and Serventy (1943) and by
Whitley (1938) who bestowed the specific name hindwoodi on this
previously un-named petrel.

Apart from the above drawing no such bird, as depicted, had been
recorded from Norfolk Island until recently. It was assumed that the
species was exterminated soon after settlement in 1788, just as the
Brown-headed Petrel, or Bird-of-Providence, Pterodroma melanopus, was by
the inhabitants of the Island. Whitley has given (1934) details of the
slaughter of that species in 1790: in a period of some four months, during
a time of near famine, more than 170,000 birds were taken for food.

However, in January 1965, after a lapse of more than 170 years, the
supposedly extinct Norfolk Island Dove-Petrel has been re-discovered. A
specimen, collected by J. Hyett, from among numbers seen on the Island,
agrees in essential details with the original drawing. It is anticipated that
a full account of the “re-discovery” of this species will be published at
some future date, probably in the pages of the Emu, journal of the Royal
Australasian Ornithologists’ Union.

Wedge-tailed Shearwater, Puffinus pacificus.
“Bird of Norfolk Island, commonly called the mutton-bird — drawn
the natural size.”

Pied Goose, Anseranas semipalmata.
“This bird is about the size of a Goose — an outline of the foot
drawn the natural size.”

Red-tailed Tropic-bird, Phaethon rubricaudus, immature.
“A young Tropic Bird, half the natural size.’

Red-tailed Tropic-bird, P. rubricaudus, adult.
“Tropic-bird. Natural size.”

Red-tailed Tropic-bird, P. rubricaudus, adult.

“The Tropic Bird or Alma do Comtra-Mastre. From the tip of the bill
to the rump 18 inches, from the rump to the end of the tail 18
inches — from the extremity of the wings 4 feet 2 inches — the whole
bird is covered with a bloom w’ch is not shown in the Drawing—by the
rays of the Sun.”

The last five words in the above remarks were the end of a sentence the

first part of which has | been erased and replaced with the statement beginning
“bird is covered...

HINDWOOD Of
PUBLISHED “SYDNEY” PAINTINGS

In addition to the eight illustrations in this paper the following “Sydney”
drawings have appeared in print.

No. 35. Emu-Wren in the Emu, vol. 31, 1931, pl. 24.

46. Golden-bronze Cuckoo (centre figure of three on the sheet),
in the Australian Museum Magazine, vol. 4, No. 3, July-Septem-
ber, 1930, p. 84.

47. Pheasant Coucal, in the Australian Museum Magazine, vol. 4,
No. 1, July-March, 1930, p. 20.

50. Ground Parrot, in the Emu, vol. 32, 1933, pl. 33: also in
Australian Parrots (N. W. Cayley), 1938, opp. p. 304.

96. Norfolk Island Dove-Petrel, in a Supplement to the Birds of
Norfolk and Lord Howe Islands (Gregory M. Mathews), 1936,
opp. p. 94 (lower figure); also in the Australian Museum
Magazine, vol. 6, No. 9, January-March, 1938, p. 297, and in
the Emu, vol. 42, 1943, pl. 16.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I first became interested in the “Sydney” paintings in 1929, in which
year the basic work of identification was undertaken, where necessary by
comparison with Museum specimens. My thanks are extended to both past and
present members of the staffs of both the Public Library of New South Wales
and the Mitchell Library, Sydney, for assistance; also to A. H. Chisholm, Tom
Iredale and Gilbert P. Whitley for co-operation and advice.

The Trustees of the Mitchell Library are thanked for permission to
reproduce drawings from the “Sydney” collection from photographs by the
author.

REFERENCES

Campbell, A. J., 1912—A History of Australian Ornithological Research. Emu
11:154

Hindwood, K. A., 1931—Historical Associations and Early Records of the
Emu-Wren. Emu 31:100.

Hindwood, K. A., 1933—The Ground Parrot. Emu 32:246.

Hindwood, K. A. and Serventy, D. L., 1943—Further Notes on Pterodroma
leucoptera. Emu 42: pl. 16.

Hindwood, K. A., 1964—George Raper, an Artist of the First Fleet. Journal
and Proceedings, Royal Australian Historical Society. 50:32-57.

Hunter, John, 1793—An Historical Journal of the Transactions at Port Jackson
and Norfolk Island, London.

Latham, John, 1801—IJndex Ornithologicus Supplementum. 51.

Mackaness, George, 1937—Admiral Arthur Phillip, Sydney. 458.

Mathews, Gregory M., 1936—Supplement to the Birds of Norfolk and Lord
Howe Islands. pl. opp. 94.

Phillip, Arthur, 1789—The Voyage of Governor Phillip to Botany Bay, London.

92 “SYDNEY” BIRD PAINTINGS

Sharpe, R. Bowdler, 1906—History of the Collections, British Museum (Natural
History), Birds. ;

Shaw, George, 1794—Zoology and Botany of New Holland, London. pl. 9.

Sparrman, Anders, 1789—Museum Carlsonianum. Stockholm.

White, John, 1790—Journal of a Voyage to New South Wales. London.

Whitley Gua area as Doom of the Bird of Providence. Australian Zool.,

242-49, pl. 1.

Whitley, G. P., 1938.—Naturalists of the First Fleet. Austr. Mus. Magazine.

6(9):297-301 illustr.

SOUTH PACIFIC COMMISSION

Banded and Marked Birds

Although it is known that some kinds of birds perform remarkable annual
migrations of 10,000 miles or more over the North and South Pacific Oceans,
the regular travels of most species are unknown or poorly understood. In an
endeavour to learn more about the migrants of seabirds, ornithologists from
the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C., have captured, marked, and
released in the Central Pacific Over 300,000 birds of 28 different kinds, with
aluminium legbands. Of these, over 60,000 have been marked with plastic
leg-streamers.

Anyone coming into the possession of a banded dead bird in the Pacific
Ocean area is asked to co-operate by returning the band, together with time
and place of recovery, as instructed on the band. For live birds, only the band
number, together with time and place of capture, need be sent. The bird should
then be liberated so thal its further travel may be traced. Anyone sighting
a bird with a coloured leg-streamer anywhere in the Pacific Ocean area is
asked to co-operate by recording the name or description of the kind of
bird wearing the streamer, the streamer colour, the date seen, and the latitude
and longitude or approximate location of sighting. All information on these
birds should be sent as soon as possible to Division of Birds, Smithsonian Insti-
tution, Washington, D.C. 20560.

93

FRANCOIS LAPORTE
Count Castelnau (1810-1880).
By G. P. WHITLEY
(Plate x.)

More and more, modern zoologists are finding that it is necessary to
study closely the work of naturalists of the past. Biographies and bibliographies
of our predecessors are laborious to compile but it is hoped that this account
of a much-travelled nineteenth century French zoologist may be useful to
those seeking information as to his activities and his type-localities and
may be a minor contribution to the history of Australian zoology.

The naturalist and traveller, Francois Laporte, Comte de Castelnau,
was born on Christmas Day, 1810, in London, England, and died at his
residence, Apsley Place, East Melbourne, Victoria, on February 4th, 1880.
He is sometimes called Laporte or Delaporte in literature, but usually signed
his papers F. L. de Castelnau or, on occasion, “M. de los Llanos Montanos.”

The histories of Captain Cook and de Levaillant were the fairy tales of
Castelnau’s infancy. As a young man in Paris he studied natural science
under Cuvier, Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire, Brougniart, Elie de Beaumont, de
Jussieu, de Blainville, Desfontaines, A. Duméril, Latreille, and other famous
zoologists at the Jardin des Plantes.

Between 1824 and 1840 Castelnau produced many entomological papers
(mostly on Coleoptera and Hemiptera) which were published in French
Journals. He commenced his work on Jewel Beetles, Buprestidae, with Gory in
1827.

For five years he travelled through the United States, Texas, and Canada*
and on his return issued Vues et souvenirs de L’Amerique du Nord and other
accounts. After returning to France he received the Royal Commission to
explore South America, for which voyage he left Paris on 22nd April, 1843.
The trip from Le Havre to New York took 36 days. Castelnau saw some
of the d’Urville collection in Washington and later made the acquaintance of
the eccentric naturalist Rafinesque.

In 1839, Castelnau published an account of the Wakulla River, Florida,
in the Bulletin of the Soc. Geogr. Paris 11, pp. 242-247, much of his work
having been done in the territories “de la Floride, du Ouisconsin et au Canada”.
He must have been interested in fishes from an early age as Cuvier and
Valenciennes described an anchovy from his New York collection in 1848
(Hise Nats boiss:) 2i5 ed. 259 p>) oil):

In 1847 Cuvier and Valenciennes described in the same work fishes sent
to Paris from Brazil by Castelnau in his “riches et belles collections.” Castelnau
spent three years (1843-47) in going overland on mules and horses from
Rio de Janeiro to Lima but lost many of his specimens. He considered the
Llamas in Peru with the idea of acclimatizing them in France. At a later
date, perhaps, he may have influenced the persons such as Ledger who wished
to introduce Llamas and Alpacas into Australia.

Baron von Muller used to wear an old muffler made of angora wool with
the ends hanging down. This angora scarf was historical, and was one of
several which had been made from wool that Count de Castelnau, French
Consul-General at Melbourne in the sixties, gave him (Maiden, Proc. Roy.
Soc. N.S.W. XLVI, 1912, p. 10).

* See Voyages autour du monde... mis en ordre par William Smith, wherein
Castelnau’s travels, particularly those in Florida, Wisconsin and Canada were
ranked with those of the most famous voyageurs. Smith’s volume, which I have
consulted in the Mitchell Library, Sydney, was undated.

94 FRANCOIS LAPORTE

After the revolution of 1848, Castelnau was appointed French Consul
at Bahia, Brazil. He was director of the scientific expedition sent by King
Louis Phillipe of France to South America and secured many fishes from the
River Amazon.

A map of his travels has been provided by Eigenmann (1917, Mem. Mus.
Comp. Zool. Harvard 43, plate 1.)

Castelnau’s South American fishes were deposited in the Jardin des Plantes,
where, assisted by Guichenot and other zoologists, he compared them with
Cuvier and Valenciennes’ types. Pellona castelnaueana Cuv. and Val. was a
new fish from this expedition, the full report on which was published by
Bertrand of Paris in 1859 with coloured plates.

For three years, Castelnau was at the Cape of Good Hope, where he
wrote his Memoire sur les Poissons de l'Afrique australe, published in Paris
early in 1861, an abridgement of a book he had spent two years (1856-58) in
preparing with coloured figures made from as many living species as he could
observe. He virtually dedicated this Memoire to Mons. A. Duméril, one of
his teachers of zoology in Paris.

Castelnau travelled over Caffraria in South Africa. Then he was appointed
French Consul at Siam where he was the first European to study the fishes.
of Thailand* and also visited India, Malacca, Sumatra, Java, Ceylon and
Singapore (1859). His Siamese fish collection was reported upon by the Dutch
ichthyologist, Pieter Bleeker (1859, Nat Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. 20, pp. 101-102),
who also dealt with his fishes from Singapore (ibid., pp. 216-217 and 236-239).

When in about 1860 Castelnau returned to Europe and began to put
his voluminous notes and drawings in order he found that, while he had
been temporarily indisposed or disabled, his valet had been for more than
a month in the habit of using the sheets of his manuscript for lighting
fires and other purposes of the most menial nature. Castelnau disposed of
the remainder of his notes to Professor Lacordaire, of Liége University.

Castelnau’s industry must have been amazing. He wrote on geography,
palaeontology and anthropology, on mammals, birds and reptiles as well as on
fishes and insects, his favourite subjects in zoology. His method of mounting
his specimens has been described by E. R. Waite (1921, Rec. S. Austr. Mus.
2, p. 2, fig.) and Anderson (1930, Museums Journal 29, p. 253 and 30, p. 32);
the Australian Museum still has a few samples of his taxidermy.

Castelnau came to rest in Australia after his exhaustive travels in so many
countries, arriving in Melbourne from Europe in 1862. Here as Consul General
of France, Castelnau interested himself in ichthyology, visiting the Fish Markets.
frequently and describing many species. He was an active member of the
Zoological and Acclimatization Society of Victoria and joined the Entomologicai
Society of New South Wales in October, 1863. To his friend M. Paul Gervais,
Paris Museum, he sent several notes of interest which were occasionally
published, notably in his Journal de Zoologie. A Mons. Adet of Melbourne
collected fishes at Noumea during his few months sojourn there. These were
later described by Castelnau in Proceedings Zool. Acclim. Soc. Vict. I.

In June 1876, Castelnau was in Brisbane.

Castelnau also employed among others, a collector named Girardin to
obtain beetles from Port Denison, Queensland, and he wrote a series of
articles on Australian coleoptera in Trans. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. VIL, 1868.
Castelnau came to Sydney from Melbourne in about 1876. The Report of the
Australian Museum for 1877 acknowledges a large collection from “Le
Comte de Castelnau.” A new fish (Kurtus gulliveri) and many birds were
included. Castelnau seems to have persuaded Gervais to exchange specimens

* H. M. Smith, 1945, U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 188, p. 5

WHITLEY 95

with the Australian Museum in 1879. He visited the fish markets in Sydney
almost daily and his Essay on the Ichthyology of Port Jackson was published
by the Linnean Society of New South Wales in 1878.

The Australian Museum had specimens from Castelnau, such as Brazilian
birds (nos. A.321 onwards), a Bat, received in September 1876, and some
‘skins of fishes, some still extant, registered nos. A.7126 et seq. in 1878 or
1879.

In the National Museum, Melbourne, through the courtesy of the then
Director (Mr. C. Brazenor) I saw the Castelnau collection of beetles. Some
of Castelnau’s original cabinets (probably made in Africa) were in that
Museum but all the specimens had been transferred into more modern
drawers. There are numerous Coleoptera from various parts of the world
each pinned on a square or shield of cork. The generic names were also
on cork whilst the specific names and authors or localities were on labels
pasted on to the cork support of each beetle. Where a species was not
represented by a specimen, a coloured figure was included, also on a cork
shield, so that a continuous series of genera and species was presented. Perhaps
there are no types here, since the original key collection was probably left by
Castelnau in France or Belgium. There are, however, types of Castelnau’s
Carabidae in the Howitt Collection in the National Museum, Melbourne, on
loan from the University of Melbourne.

It may not be out of place to refer to notes on some of Castelnau’s
type specimen of fishes, since the Count’s original descriptions of fishes are
often, unfortunately, inaccurate or not sufficiently complete for modern
purposes. Most of his types appear to be in the Paris Museum*, but there
are a few in Australian museums. The type of the Swordfish (Histiophorus
granulifer Castelnau) is noted by Jordan and Evermann (Occas. Pap. Calif.
Acad. Sci. XII, 1926, p. 39, footnote).

The types of Aploactisoma schomburgkii are noted by McCulloch (1915,
Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, 40, p. 273). When preparing his revision
of the Galaxiidae, Regan (Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1905. pp. 363-384) had
from Paris all of Castelnau’s types that could be found. That of Galaxias
amaenus was unfortunately missing.

About October 1877, the laboratory of Ichthyology of the Paris Museum
received many types of Castelnau’s species, labelled by their author (Vaillant,
1903, Bull. Mus. d’Hist. Nat. 9 (3), 1903, p. 118, foot-note).

The disappearance of many of Castelnau’s types is unfortunate. In this
category, we must place Jorresia australis (vide Ogilby, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond.
1889, p. 158) and some African freshwater ones (Trewaves, 1964).

Castelnau’s types of Pomacentridae have been figured by Rivas (1960,
Quart. J. Florida Acad. Sci. 23, pp. 130 and 138, figs. 1, 4, 5 & 8). Bleeker’s
Apogon snp. from Castelnau’s material are discussed by Weber and Beaufort
(1929, Fish. Indo-Austr. Archip. 5, p. 349).

Many species and some genera of insects as well as fishes have been
named in honour of Castelnau and the stinging plant, Laportea, of tropical
Australia also commemorates him.

Some of Castelnau’s manuscript names for fishes have undoubtedly
been used by later writers, for example, Stenarchus bonaparti in Kaup (1856,
Archiv. Naturges. 22(1), p. 79).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CASTELNAU’S WRITINGS

1824. (By Mons. de Laporte = ? Francois Laporte)
Extrait d’une lettre relative 4 quelques eclaircissements sur le Sylphium.
Soc. Geogr. Bull. 2, pp. 234-235.

* The Plectognathi have been listed by Le Danois, 1960, Bull Mus. Nat.
Hist. Nat. Paris (2) 32, 513.

96

1824.

1826.

1828.

FRANCOIS LAPORTE

(By Castelnau, jun. = ? Francois Laporte)

Extrait d’une lettre concernant la découverté d’os fossiles d'un
Mastodonte.

Bull. Sci. Nat. (Ferussac) 3, p. 75.

(By F. L. de Laporte, Comte de Castelnau)

Description d’une nouvelle espéce de reptile du genre Marbré (Polychrus).
Ann. Sci. Nat. 9, pp. 110-111.

(By Laporte and Auguste Brullé).

Notice sur un nouveau genre de la famille des charancons
(Gasterocerius) de la division des Cryptorhynchides.

Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris 4, pp. 197-203;

Bull. Sci. Nat. (Ferussac) 17, 1829, pp. 314-316; and Annal. des Sc.
d’observation par Raspail 1, 1829, p. 152.

Observations pour servir a histoire de quelques

Insectes (Coléopt, Lepidopt.).

Act. Soc. Linn. Bordeaux 4, p. 16, pl. 1.

Description du Enicotarsus viridipennis.

Mag. de Zool. (Guérin) (1) 1 (2), pp. 35-35 bis, Insecta, plate 35.
(By Laporte and Brullé).

Monographie du genre Diaperis.

Ann. Sci. Hist. Nat. 23, pp. 325-410; Isis 3, 1835, p. 288.

Description de V Eurydera armata.

Mag. de Zool. (Guérin), 1 (2), pp. 36 to 36, bis, pl. 36.

Notice sur le Macrotoma, nouveau genre de Diptére de la famille
des Muscides.

Ann. Sci. Nat. 25, pp. 457-460, pl. X, A; Isis 4, 1835, p. 471.
Description du Calicnemis Latreilli, Lap. (Pachypus truncatifrons,
Dej. Catal.).

Mag. de Zool. (Guérin) 2, 7, Cl. ix, pl. 7.

Description de la Stenocheila Lacordaerei.

Mag. de Zool. (Guérin) 2, Cl. ix, pl. 12.

Description de /’Oplopus atriplicus.

Mag. de Zool. (Guérin) 2(20), Cl.-ix, pl. 20.

Pachyderma_ nigricans.

Mag:- dey Zool: (Guérin)) 2.4Cl) ix, pl.737-

Description du Trachalus rotundatus.

Mag. de Zool. (Guérin) 2, Cl. ix, pl. 44.

Essai d’une classification systematique de Vlordre des Hémiptéres.
Mag. de Zool; (Guérin) 2, Cl. ix; pp. 1-88, pls. 51-55. (PI. 55
missing in Publ. Library, Melbourne, copy). Supplement in pages
76-88. Review in Isis 2, 1842, pp. 52-56.

Reprinted, 8vo, pp. 88, 5 pls., 1832.

Notice sur un nouveau genre de l’ordre des Homoptéres (Heteronotus).
Ann. Soc. Entom. (Paris) 1, pp. 95-98, coloured fig.

Mémoire sur quelques nouveaux genres de l’ordre des Homoptéres
(Poiocira, Germaria, Schizia, Atypa, Pterygia, Acanthieus).

Ann. Soc. Entom. 1, pp. 221-231.

Mémoire sur cinquante espéces nouvelles ou peu connues d’ insectes.
Ann. Soc. Entom. 1, pp. 386-415, 448.

(Corrections to) Audinet-Serville, Nouvelle Classification des longicornes.
Ann. Soc. Ent. 1, pp. 443-444.

Mémoire sur les divisions du genre Colaspis.

Revue Entom. (Silbermann) 1, pp. 18-25; Ann. Sci. Nat. (2) iii,
1855; (p: 187:

(Pedaria nigra) etc.

Ann. Soc. Ent. 1 (4), p. 403.

Ctenidia mordelloides.

LS DIStliut len DS elie

Coleoptéres et Hemiptéres nouveaux.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 1, pp. 32-36; L’Institut 1 (20), p. 173
(fide Hagen).

1835-4

1835.

1836.

1836.

1836.

WHITLEY Tr

Essai d'une revision du genre lampyre.

Ann. Soc. Ent. France 2(1), pp. 122-153; Isis 7, 1846, p. 490.
Note monographique sur le genre Oxyciieila.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 1, pp. 126-130.

Note monographique sur le genre Zuphium.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 1, pp. 251-257.

Note sur un nouveau genre et un nouvel insecte homopteére.
Ann. Soc. Entom. 2, pp. 251-253. 2

Monographie du groupe des Rhipicérites (Coléopttres Pentaméres)
Ann. Soc. Ent. 3, pp. 225-270, pl. ii; Isis 7, 1846, p. 507.
Observations sur le genre Prostemma et sur le memoire de Ms
L. Dufour.

Aan. Soc. Ent. 3, Bull. pp. vii-viii.

Observations sur la tribu des Cicindélétes.

Rev. Entom. (Siibermann) 2, pp. 27-39.

Extrait du premier numéro de lEntom. Magas.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 2, pp. 40-44.

Extrait de son essai et classification des Hemipteres.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 2, pp. 44-47.

. Etudes entomologiques ou description d’Insectes nouveaux et observa-

tions sur leur synonymie Pt. i. Carnassiers. 8vo, 159 pp., 4 coloured
plates (Paris: Méquignon — Marvis, 1834.) Continued in Rev. Entom.
(Silbermann) 3, 1835, pp. 157-181 and 4, 1836, pp. 5-60.
Description d’une nouvelle espéce de Mégacephales.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 2, pp. 83-84.

(By Laporte and Auguste Chevrelat).

Description de deux nouvelles Mégacephales.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 2, pp. 83-85.

(Ptiocerus brunneus) etc.

Ann. Soc. Ent. France 3 (2), post June 1834, p. 265.

Sur. une classification des Héminptéres (Heteropt.).

L’Institut 3 (90), p. 30.

1 (By Delaporte and H. Gory).

Histoire naturelle et iconographie des Coléoptéres.

52 livr. of 5 plates, gr. in octavo, Paris.

Vols. i, ti. Histoire naturelle des animaux articulés:-

Histoire naturelle des Insectes Coléoptéres, avec une introduction par
M. Brullié. 2 vols., with figs.

1835-40.

Vol. iii. Histoire naturelle des Insectes Orthoptéres, Neuroptéres,
Hémiptéres, etc., par Emile Blanchard, avec une introduction par M.
Brullé. 3 vols., 1840-41. Final parts by Gory as Castelnau had gone
to South America. For dates of publication, see Sherborn’s Index
Animalium. Hagen quotes an edition de luxe, vol. iv: “Monographie
des Psilocera, Eurydera, Nycteis, Eunostus, Buprestides’ — supplement
to Buprestides is by Gory (see Rev. Zool., 1840, p. 340 and 1841, p.
392). Published in separate monographs.

(By Delaporte)

Monographie du genre Clytus. 124 pp.

8vo. (Paris: J. B. Bailliére). Separate from Hist. Nat. Coleopt. Also
in Comptes Rendus, Paris, 2, 1836, pp. 10-12.

Rectification des Homoptés de la 29 livr. des “Illustrations de
Zoologie” de M. Lesson.

Ann. Soc. Ent. 5, Bull., pp. vii-x.

Notice sur le systeme nerveux des Insectes (Silpha carinata vivant
avec le corps presque dévoré).

Ann. Soc. Ent. 5, Bull., pp. xxxii-xxxiv.

Etudes entomologiques ou descriptions d’insectes nouveaux et observa-
tions sur la synonymie.

Rev. Entom. (Silbermann) 4, pp. 5-60.

98

1837.
1839.

1839.

1840,

1842.

1842-3.

1842.

1842.
1842.

1842.

FRANCOIS LAPORTE

Essai pour servir 4 l’Histoire des Sociétiés Entomologiques.

Ann. Soc. Ent. 6, pp. 5-13; Isis 6, 1848, p. 431.

Note sur la source de la riviére de Wakulla dans la Floride.

Bull. Soc. Geogr. Paris. 11, pp. 242-247.

Traité élémentaire d’entomologie.

(Paris: Terzulolo), 12 mo. pp. ..., 1 plate.

onwards.

Histoire naturelle des animaux articulés, Annel., Crust., Arach.,
Myr. et Insect.

Vols. i-ii, Coleoptera by Laporte (Castelnau).

For details see Schenkling, 1939, J. Soc. Bibliogr. Nat. Hist. 1(7),
pp. 213 et seq.

Volume IV reissued 1850, annelides by Laporte — fide Sherborn,
Index Animalium 2 (2), 1923, p. cxxxy.

(Observations sur les moeurs des Reptiles)

Rev. Zool. 1842, p. 93.

Communiqué a l’Academie des Sciences de Paris la découverte des
pieds des Trilobites qu'il aurait vus dans J’interieur d’un exemplaire
enroulé de l’Amerique du Nord.

L’Institut 1842, p. 74; Comptes Rendus 14, p. 344-345; Neues Jahrbuch
fiir Mineral., 1843, p. 504.

See Vogdes, Occas. Pap. Calif. Acad. Sci. 4, 1893, p. 34, Bibliogr.
Palaeoz. Crust.

Sur les moeurs de certains Ophidiens.

Comptes Rendus 14, pp. 492-495;

L'Institut 10, p. 114.

Essai sur les Séminoles de Ja Floride.

Bull. Soc. Geogr. Paris 17, pp. 392-403.

Note sur deux itineraires de Charleston a Tallahasée.

Bull. Soc. Geogr. Paris 18, pp. 241-259.

Observations entomologiques sur les insectes de l’Amerique du Nord.
Ann. Soc. Ent. 11, Bull., pp. xii-xiii.

(date?) Voyage dans l’Amérique septentrionale et particuligrement dans les

1846.

territoires de la Floride, du Ouisconsin et au Canada, 1837-41. In
Duponchel, A. Nouv. bibl. des Voyages, v. 12. (Public Library
Melbourne).

Vues et souvenirs de l’Amérique du Nord.

(Paris: A. Bertrand), pp. i-vili, 1-165, 35 plates.

Sur les révolutions geologiques des parties centrales de lAmerique
du Nord.

Comptes Rendus 14, pp. 610-613; Froriep, Notizen 23, cols. 99-101.
Note sur une seconde espece du genre Stenidia et sur un Ctenodactyla
nouveau.

Mag. Zool. (Guérin) 13, p. 1943, pl. 119.

Essai sur le systéme Silurien de l’Amérique septentrionale.

Paris and Strasburg, 40, pp. 56, 27 plates.

Preceded by Rapport sur un Memoire de F. de Castelnau
Reprinted from Comptes Rendus, 1843.

See Ehlers & Wright, Contrib. Mus. Palaeont. Univ. Michigan 13,
1957, pp. 175-180.

Observations relatives a quelques animaux domestiques de l’Amérique
méridionale (le Lama, la Vigogne; fécondité d’une mule; le Couguar).
Rey. Zool. Soc. Cuvier 1846, p. 231; Comptes Rendus 22, pp. 1002-1004;
Froriep, Notizen 39, cols. 213-215, as Ueber einige Hausthiere Suda-
merica’s.

Rapport sur l’esclavage a Surinam... .

Ann. Marit. et Colon. (Paris: Bajot & Poirre) 8vo. pp. 41 (Public
Library, Melbourne).

1847.

1847-8.

1848.

1850-9.

1851.
1851.

1859.
1860.
1861.
1861.

1862.

1863.
1867.
1867-8.

1869.

1872.

1872.

1873.

WHITLEY 99

Note sur le Lama, lAlpaca, et la Vigogne, et sur lutilité de leur
importation en France et en Algerie.

Comptes Rendus 25, pp. 907-909; also in I. G. Saint-Hilaire, Rev.
Zool. Soc. Cuvier, 1847, p. 403.

Considérations sur la distribution des Reptiles et en particulier, des
Ophidiens, dans Amérique du Sud.

Liinstitut 16, pp. 19 and 72; Comptes Rendus 26, 1848, pp. 101-102.
Considérations generales sur lornithologie de° l’Amérique_ tropicale.
Rey. Zool. Soc. Cuvier. pp. 89-90; Comptes Rendus 26, pp. 306-307;
Arch. Sci: Phys. Nat. 8, pi 72:

Expedition dans les parties centrales de l’Amérique du Sud :
pendant . . . 1843 a 1847. Fourteen volumes or Seven parts in 21
volumes, some octavo, others folio. The first four volumes (Histoire
du Voyage, 2 vols, Geology, etc.) and the Fishes are by Castelnau.
For details, see Cat. Books Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.) 1, 1903, p. 325.
For dates of publication see Sherborn & Woodward, Ann. Mag. Nat.
ELISE AGI) XG LON ap: loa.

The Botany by Weddell reprinted at Leipzig, 1922.

Sur les Niam-Niams ou hommes a queue.

Bull. Soc. Geogr. Paris. 2, pp. 25-27.

Renseignements sur l'Afrique centrale et sur une nation d’hommes a
queue qui s’y trouverait, d’aprés le rapport des négres du Soudan,
esclaves a Bahia. (Paris: Bertrand) 8vo. 63 pp., 4 plates. (Publ. Lib.,
Melbourne).

Abondance des Tigres dans Vile de Singapore.

Rey. Mag. Zool. (2) 11, pp. 401-402; Comptes Rendus 49, pp. 413-414.
Note sur les poissons de lAfrique australe.

Comptes Rendus 50, pp. 788-789.

Mémoire sur les Poissons de l’Afrique australe.

(Paris: J. B. Bailliere), pp. vii +

Pluie de Poissons; tremblement de terre a Singapore.

Comptes Rendus 52, pp. 880-882; Zoologist 19, p. 7, 649; Science
pour tous 6, p. 191.

Note sur un Scaritide gigantesque du Laos.

Rev. Mag. Zool. (2) 14, pp. 305-306. See also H. Mouhot, Trav. Cent.
Indo-China ii, Appendix.

Note sur le genre Manticora.

Rev. Mag. Zool. (2) 15, pp. 64-73.

Note sur un nouveau genre de Dynastide (Alcidosoma) Rev. Mag.
Zoos (2) 19s ppy isis.

Notes on Australian Coleoptera.

Trans. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 8, pp. 30-38 (part i); part ii in ibid
pp. 95-225, with which it was issued in one 8vo. vol., Melbourne, 1868.
Description du nouveau genre Nepharis, Coléoptére de la famille
des Colydiens, tribu des Dynchitites.

Rev. Mag. Zool. (2) 21, pp. 356-357, pl. xviii, figs. 4-5.
Contribution to the Ichthyology of Australia.

No. i. — The Melbourne Fish Market.

Proc. Zool. Acclim. Soc. Vict. 1, pp. 29-242, plate.

Contribution to the Ichthyology of Australia.

No. ii. — Note on some south Australian Fishes.

Proc. Zool. Acclim. Soc. Vict. i, pp. 243-248 (including errata and
observations). And published separately. Reviewed anonymously in
the Australian Mechanic and Journal of Science and Art 1 (12), 1872,
pp- 148-149 and in the Journal Zool. 2, 1873, pp. 47-48 and 3
1874, pp. 85-88. 4
Notes on the Edible Fishes of Victoria.

Intercolonial Exhibition Essays, Victorian Exhibition 1872-73, no. 5,
pp. 1-17; Journal de Zoologie (Gervais) 3, 1874, pp. 144-157 (Résumé
in French).

100 FRANCOIS LAPORTE

1873. Description d’un nouveau genre de Goliathide.
Westwoodia.
Rev. Mag. Zool. (3), 1, pp. 397-399, reprinted, pp. 1-2, pl. 17,
fig. 2. (Publ. Library, Melbourne).

1873. Contribution to the Ichthyology of Australia.

No. ili. — Supplement to the Fishes of Victoria.

iv. — Fishes of South Australia.

v. — Notes on Fishes from North Australia.

vi. — Notes on Fishes from Knob Island.

vli. — Fishes of New Caledonia.

vill. — Fishes of Western Australia.

ix. — New Sorts for the Victorian Fauna, and List of Australian

Fishes.

Proc. Zool. Acclim. Soc. Vict. 2, pp. 37-158.

1875. Fishes. Philad. Centen. Exhib., 1876 (Melbourne, 1875) Official Record,
pp. 105-108.

1875. Researches on the Fishes of Australia.
Official Record Philadelphia Exhibition.
Intercolonial Exhibition Essays. no. 2, pp. 1-52.
See Gill, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 14, 1891, pp. 401-402.

1876. Mémoire sur les poissons appelés barramundi par les Aborigénes du
nord-est de lAustralie.
Journ. Zool. (Gervais). 5, pp. 129-136.

1876. Remarques au sujet du genre Neoceratodus.
Journ. Zool. (Gervais) 5, pp. 342-343.
Compare also Comptes Rendus, May 1, 1876, p. 1034; Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (4) 17, 1876, p. 486.

1877. (By Castelnau and E. P. Ramsay).
Notes of a collection of birds from the Norman River, Gulf of
Carpentaria, with descriptions of some new species.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 1, pp. 379-386.

1878. Australian Fishes. New or little known species.

1878. Notes on the Fishes of the Norman River.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 3, pp. 41-51.
1878. On some new Australian (chiefly) Freshwater Fishes.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 3, pp. 140-144.
1878. On a new Ganoid Fish from Queensland.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 3, p. 164, pl. xix, A.
See Whitley, American Naturalist 67, 1933, pp. 1-4, figs. A-C.
1879. Essay on the Ichthyology of Port Jackson.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 3, pp. 347-402.
1880. The Freshwater Aquarium of the Trocadero Palace at Paris.
Victorian Review 1, pp. 769-786.

WORKS CONSULTED

Abeille 24, 1886-7, pp. 145-147, fide Roy. Soc. Cat. Sci. Papers.

American Naturalist 1880, 14, pp. 548-549.

Argus (newspaper), Melbourne, 5 February 1880 (obituary).

Augé, Nouv. Larousse.

Australasian Sketcher (newspaper), Melbourne, all 1880, especially 14 February,

Australian Museum, Reports of the Trustees of the.

Australian Museum (MS. library catalogue).

Berland, 1932, Soc. Entom. France, Livr. Centen., p. 163.

Blackwelder, 1957, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. 185, pp 1162-1163.

Bleeker, 1859-1860, Nat. Tijdschr. Ned Ind. 20, pp. 101-102, 216-217 and pp.
236-239.

British Museum, Catalogue of the Library of the.

Carpenter, 1945, Amer. Midland Nat. 33, p. 16.

Carus & Engelmann, Bibl.

Dean, Bashford, 1923, Bibliography of Fishes.

WHITLEY 102

Eigenmann, 1917, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 43, plate 1.

Engelmann, 1846, Bibl. Zool.

Engelmann, 1894, Bibl. Zool. 2(4), 1861-1880, p. 3374.

Entomological Soc. N.S.Wales, Transactions.

Ferguson, J. A., 1941-63, Bibliography of Australia, i-v.

Illustration (Paris), 1847, p. 60, portrait.

Jordan, D. S., 1919, Genera of Fishes.

Library e Congress, Catalog of Books represented by Printed Cards, 26, 1958,

92-93.

Linnean Peas N.S.Wales, Proceedings, Sydney, 1-3, 1877-9.

McCulloch, A. R., manuscript cards.

Magasin de Zoologie (all available Volumes in Australian Museum and Linnean
Society, Sydney.

Masters, G., 1871-87, Cat. Coleopt. and Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales.

Mitchell Library, Sydney, Manuscripts and books.

Museum Journal 1930, vols. 29, p. 253 and 30, p. 32.

Musgrave, A., 1932, Bibl. Austr. Entom.

Nachtrichtsblatt der Deutschen Malakozoologischen Gesel. Jahr. 13, 1881, p. 14.

Natural History (New York) 1930, 30, p. 668.

Naturaliste 1880, 26, pp. 207-208.

Nature 1880, aie p. 500.

Nomenclator Animalium 1926, 1 (5), Litt., p. exc.

Philosophical Institute of Victoria, Transactions.

Public Library, Melbourne, 1906, Cat. exhib. old. rare, curious books etc. Also:
manuscripts.

Revue et Magazin de Zoologie, Paris.

Rivas, 1960, QO. J. Florida Acad. Sci. 23, pp. 130 & 138.

Royal Society’s Catalogue of Scientific Papers, London, 1867-1925, vols. 1-9.

Royal Society of New South Wales, Proceedings.

Royal Society of Victoria, Transactions and Proceedings, vol. 8, etc.

Schenkling, 1939, “Uber Castelnau, Histoire naturelle des Animaux articulés
. Soc. Bibliogr. Nat. Hist. 1 (7), p. 213.

Sherborn, C. D., 1922-33, Index Animalium, 1801-1850.

Smith, William. (no date), Voyages autour du Monde (Société bibliophile 2
Paris). Copy in Mitchell Library, Sydney.

Trewavas, 1964, Kon. Mus. Midden-Afrika Ann., Zool. Wetensch. 125, p. 11.

Vaillant, 1903, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. 9 (3), p. 118, footnote.

Victorian Review, 1, 1880.

Waite, E. R., 1921, Rec. S. Austr. Mus. 2, p. 2, fig.

Whitley, 1948, Aust. Mus. Mag. 9, p. 244.

Whittell, 1954, Literature of Australian Birds.

Zimmer, 1926, Field Museum Zool. Series 16, p. 125.

Zoological Society of London, Proceedings, 1855-1881.

Zoologische Anzeiger, 1880, 3, p. 168.

Many other works were consulted with negative results where Castelnau
was concerned.

7”

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The preparation of this paper has been spread over more than 30 years;
it has been written (in moments spared from other work) in libraries and
Museums in Australia, England and Europe. I am indebted to the librarians
of the British Museum (Natural History), Bibliotheque National (Paris), Public
Library and National Museum (Melbourne), the Mitchell Library and the
Australian Museum (Sydney) for valued assistance. Later workers may find still
more information in American, French or Belgian libraries to which my visits
were all too brief. My late friend, Anthony Musgrave, gave his usual generous
hel

” am particularly grateful to M. Roger Loubére who, when he was Vice-
Consul for France in Melbourne in 1948, made enquiries on my behalf con-
cerning Castelnau, and discovered the portrait of him in the Parisian review
“Tilustration” in 1847, reproduced here. Amongst residents of the French
colony in Melbourne was Madame Crivelli, who came to Australia in 1865.

102 GAMBUSIA

She remembered Castelnau well and told M. Loubére that the Count had a
passion for stuffing birds, and that his Consulate looked like a taxidermist’s
shop, with dozens of stuffed birds hanging on the walls. She did not, however,

mention fishes.
GAMBUSIA, THE FISH DESTROYER

By GeorGE S. MYERS

About the turn of the century, not long after it was discovered that mos-
quitoes transmit both malaria and the deadly yellow fever, public health officers
and doctors in many parts of the world began to take an interest in reducing
or eradicating those diseases by introducing into local waters certain small
fishes known to feed on the aquatic larvae of mosquitoes.

American research on mosquito-destroying fishes was concentrated mostly
on the mosquitofish, Gambusia affinis (and its subspecies, holbrooki), and
Gambusia gradually became known throughout the world as THE fish to intro-
duce in the fight against mosquito-transmitted diseases. Unfortunately, this
earlier American research was not as well conceived as it might have been,
and it missed several important points. It was pointed out that because Gambusia
does not normally penetrate thickly matted aquatic plants, such plants must be
periodically removed if Gambusia is to control mosquito larvae effectively.
This is quite true, but it entirely missed the point that other available small
fishes penetrate such aquatic plant growths and assist Gambusia in controlling
mosquito larvae which cannot be reached by Gambusia. It was also pointed
out that Gambusia and similar fishes cannot exist long in temporary ponds
which dry up in the dry season, and must be re-introduced when the ponds
again fill up with rainwater. And the destructiveness of Gambusia to other
fishes was simply not recognised.

However, relatively few physicians and health officers were aware of even
such research as had been done, and Gambusia, because of its success in a
few widely scattered countries, gained world renown and was uncritically accepted
as a sort of panacea for mosquito troubles. Introductions were made in many
new places throughout the world, and they are still being made, despite what
we know now about Gambusia.

The fact is that Gambusia is a very dangerous fish to introduce into a
place where it does not occur naturally, and is little or no better as a mosquito
destroyer than many other species.

The staff of the California State Fish and Game Department's black-bass
hatchery at Friant had to discontinue using Gambusia as a “forage fish” with
which to feed the bass. Gambusia was destroying a large proportion of the
young bass! Through the years, such information has slowly accumulated.
Almost everywhere that Gambusia has been introduced, it has gradually wiped
out most or all of the smaller native mosquito-destroying species. It has also
almost certainly taken a heavy toll of the young of important larger food or
game fishes. And so it goes. No one has yet assessed the damage.

Why should Gambusia do this? Why does it not wipe out other small species
and affect bass and other larger fishes in its native haunts? The answer lies
in what ecologists call, somewhat roughly, “the balance of nature.” In our
[American] southeastern states, a balance has been evolved through the ages.
Gambusia is keot from too much destruction by its naturally evolved enemies,
and smaller fishes have learned to hide from it. But when placed in a new
situation, where natural checks do not occur and native species have evolved
no defenses, many introduced svecies of animals will take over and become
pests which crowd ont the natural fauna. The introduced house sparrow (English
sparrow) in North America is one example. The pest of introduced rabbits in
Australia is another. Thus does man’s ignorance often destroy what nature has
taken millions of vears to produce.

(Revrinted. with vermission, from part of an article in the Tropical
Fish Hobbyist, Jersey City, U.S.A.)

[Gambusia was introduced to Sydney in 1925 and to Brisbane in 1929,
and a year later to New Zealand. Further introductions were made in parts
of New South Wales from 1935 onwards. In 1940. Gambusia was flown to
Darwin and during World War II was spread through military camps in many
parts of Australia —Ed.]

103

ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

By GILBERT P. WHITLEY
(Figures 1-13)

Miscellaneous fishes (mostly of little known, marine, tropical Indo-Pacific
species) are described, recorded or figured here, sometimes with remarks on
synonymy. The types and other specimens are in the Australian Museum,
Sydney, except the blind eel which was kindly lent by the Director of the
Western Australian Museum, Perth, to whom my grateful thanks are expressed.
Thanks are also tendered to Miss Helen Ashton, my former assistant at the
Australian Museum, for drawing most of the illustrations.

4

t

Family SYNBRANCHIDAE
Genus ANOMMATOPHASMA Mees, 1962.
ANOMMATOPHASMA CANDIDUM Mees.
(Figure 1.)

Anommatophasma candidum Mees, 1962, J. Roy. Soc. W. Austr. 45:27. Id.
Cawthorn, 1963, W. Austr. Nat. 8:129.
Id. Whitley, 1964, Freshw. Fish Austr., ed. 2:39, fig.
Here figured from the paratype of the species (W. Austr. Mus. regd. no.
P. 4918), kindly lent by the Director of the Western Australian Museum,
Perth. A label with the specimen reads, in part, “Water in well 70°. Collected
Eel at approx. 4.00 a.m... . Solitary specimen. As with previous specimen
a went back under rock at sight ? of light and did not emerge until 14+ hours
ater.”
This genus and species is known only from subterranean fresh waters of
North-west Cape, Western Australia.

Family MURAENIDAE.
Genus LYCODONTIS McClelland, 1844.

Lycodontis McClelland, 1844, Calcutta J. Nat. Hist. 5 (18):173. Type-species,
L. literata McClelland, selected by Jordan & Evermann, 1896, Fish.
N. & Middle America 1: ;

LYCODONTIS SCRIPTUS (Bloch & Schneider).
(Figure 2.)

Gymunothorax scriptus Bloch & Schneider, 1801, Syst. Ichth: 529. Jd. Richardson,
1843, Rept. 12th meeting Brit. Assn. Adv. Sci. 1842: 28. Id. McCulloch,
1929, Austr. Mus. Mem. 5: 72.

This species of reef eel was described in Latin from “Nova Hollandia”
more than 160 years ago but has not hitherto been illustrated. Probably because
of the vagueness of the type-locality, the species has been omitted from works
on New South Wales fishes and even from Munro’s Handbook of Australian
Fishes, 1957. It is a rare eel, only a few isolated examples of which have
been hooked in New South Wales, first in the eighteenth century (the 2ft. long
type which probably came from Sydney or Botany Bay), thence as follows:-

ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

104

UIO]SO AA

oly adAjvirg

‘wunpIpubs piuspydojpunuoup

“vIPeAsNy
‘PA Pulld—]

INST

105

WHITLEY

‘UONNUIP =JOSUT “SITBAA YINOG MON “sNId1498 sYUOpOIKT ‘uULVAR—Z INSTI

>>>

‘O104Y ~poindy st uowiseds powru-jsey oy y.

“SUIM “IIA “IOATY
ose OST LI 8 £961 ‘uve Ainqsoymeyy 6hE9' AI
*yea0lp
SLE ZBI 61 cs ‘YOBIDAT “A ‘Vv e[pueD 8289 AI
*6961/8/21 pus [Bop
“IOATY
PIP GLI aa £5 “LoySTUUIS “H AINQeOyMETT TeLs° al
“6961/$/86 jo ynow

SSS EEE Eee

UBLU}IIUM “£ V

08h O8T 02 €S PS6T suns BIMOIOG ose aI

eee —————————eeEEESSFSFSFSSSSFFSSSSSSS
(ww) Cul) (uu) (uur) 1ojdep ‘ON “Say
yyduer [ej}0L yun, yydeq peor pue aed Aypeoo'T umosny
uBl[eajsny

SS LL CE CES

106 ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

_ The diagnostic characters of the species, which is most easily recognise@
by its characteristic colour-pattern, are as follows:-

Head 7.2 to 9.2 and depth 18.8 to 21.5 in total length. Head 3.2 to 3.9
in trunk. Anterior nostrils tubular, posterior ones orifices over front of eye-
Lips not fimbriate. Teeth compressed, erect canines on jaws, about 12 or 13
on each side of each jaw. No mesial intermaxillary teeth. A row of small
blunt molars on vomer posteriorly. Vent in anterior half of fish (preanal length
41.5 to 48% of total).

General ground-colour pale yellow or cream to dirty white below, densely
mottled with greyish brown except along middle of belly. A series of seventeen
to twenty-one large bruise-like brown marks along lower sides of head and
body, becoming bands posteriorly on tail. Anteriorly, these marks are not
bilaterally symmetrical and on the chin and sometimes on the belly they break
up into smaller blotches. About seventeen to twenty-three blackish areas along
the dorsal fin and eleven to fourteen on the anal fin continue from the body
bands. Caudal partly cream and partly black. Throat-folds greyish-brown; eye
pale blue. Gill-openings and corner of mouth pale. Nostrils yellow. Teeth white,
with carmine axial streak.

Grows to 2 feet, according to Bloch & Schneider, who remarked that
the aboriginal name for this eel was Haan.

Family ANTHIIDAE.
Genus HYPOPLECTRODES Gill, 1863.

Hypoplectrodes Gill, 1863, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1862: 236, footnote-
Orthotype, Plectropoma nigrorubrum Cuvier & Valenciennes.
Id. Poey, 1871, Ann. N. York Lyc. Nat. Hist. 10: 45.
Id. Gill, 1896, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 18:568.
Id. Ogilby, 1899, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 24:170.

This genus, which appears to have no synonyms, is distinguished from
Ellerkeldia (Gilbertia, preocc.), its nearest ally, by having the lateral line
formed of intercalated scales, each of which bears several tubules and has a
convoluted edge.

HYPOPLECTRODES NIGRORUBER MACULATUS, subsp. nov.
(Figure 3.)

Plectropoma_ nigrorubrum Cuvier & Valenciennes, 1828, Hist. Nat. Poiss-
2:402. King George’s Sound, Western Australia.
Id. Quoy & Gaimard, 1835, Voy. Astrolabe Zool. 3:659, pl. 4. fig. 1-
Id. Richardson, 1843, Rept. Brit. Assn. Adv. Sci. 1842: 17.
Id. Gunther, 1859, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus. 1: 158.
Id. Castelnau, 1875, Res. Fish. Australia: 8 and Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S.Wales 3, 1879: 349.
Id. Klunzinger, 1879, Sitzungsb. Akad. Wiss. Wien 80:335.
Id. Macleay, 1881, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 5:322 and Descr. Cat.
Fish. Aust. 1, 1881:22.
Id. Ogilby, 1885, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 10: 119 and Cat. Fish-
N.S.Wales, 1886: 9, also Edib. Fish. N.S.Wales 1893:11 and Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 24, 1899: 170.
Id. Woodward, 1902, W. Austr. Year Book 1900-01: 270.

Gilbertia nigrorubra Boulenger, 1895, Cat. Acanth. Fish. Brit. Mus. (2) 1:307
& 308.

Hypoplectrodes nigroruber Gill, 1896, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 18: 568.
Id. Waite, 1921, Rec. S. Austr. Mus. 2:93, fig. 140 and 1923, Fish.
S. Austr. : 116 & fig.

WHITLEY 107

Hypoplectrodes nigrorubrum Waite, 1904, Mem. Nat. Club N.S.Wales: 28-
Id. Stead, 1906, Fish. Austr. 15 & 262.
Id. Stead, 1908, Edib. Fish. N.S.Wales : 59.
Id. McCulloch, 1921, Austr. Zool. 2(2) : 46, pl. 18, fig. 165a.
Id. McCulloch, 1929, Austr. Mus. Mem. 5: 154.
Id. “E. Scott, 1962, Fish: Si Austr): 2275) fig:
Gilbertia nigrorubrum Zietz, 1909, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 33: 269.
Hypoplectrodes nigrorubrum var. maculatus D. G. Stead, MS. label in Australian
Museum.

Ogilby (1885) suggested the eastern Australian form of nigrorubrum might
have to be raised to the rank of a local race or subspecies and D. G. Stead
years later invented the manuscript name Hypoplectrodes nigrorubrum var.
maculatus for a specimen from New South Wales. This, the holotype of the
new subspecies, agrees with Ogilby’s 1893 description in general but has the
following special characteristics.

D.ix, 17; A.iii, 8; P.14. Lat. 54. Tr. 4/1/22 to 4/1/6 on caudal peduncle..

Head (100 mm.) 2.75, length of caudal fin (43) 6.3, height of body
(74) 3.7 in total length (275). Eye (18) 5.5 in head and 1.1 in snout (20).
Interorbital (7) 2.5 in eye. Longest (third) dorsal spine (29) 3.7, second anal
spine (20) 5, ventrals (48) 2, pectorals (67) 1.5 in head. Depth of caudal
peduncle (26) 2.8 in that of body.

General characters as described by Ogilby (1893). Gill rakers 2 + 6,
short, spatulate. Tongue acute, free.

Colour after long preservation, uniform yellowish-brown. Eye blue. A
dark brown blotch, subequal to eye, on each side of body below arch of
lateral line.

Described and figured from the holotype of the subspecies, a specimer
225 mm. in standard length or 275 mm. in total length (nearly 11 inches)-

Loc.—Tuggerah, New South Wales, 1903, Mr. Gordon per D. G. Stead.
Austr. Mus. regd. no. IB.886.

A smaller paratype (no. I. 9953) from off Bondi, New South Wales,
and an unregistered specimen with no data have similar coloration to the
holotype.

Differs from the nominate species by having a dark blotch velow the
lateral line instead of five blackish sloping cross-bars on the body.

Family CHAETODONTIDAE
Genus CHAETODON Linne, 1758,
CHAETODON GUNTHERI Ahl.

(Figure 4)

Chactodon guntheri Ahl., 1923, Archiv Naturges. 89 (A), 5:99.
Manado. Jd. Weber & Beaufort, 1936, Fish. Indo-Austr.
Archip. 7:79, fig. 24.
Id. Smith, 1950, SSA Fishes S. Afr. : 239, fig. 604 and 1953, Mem.
Mus. Castros, 2: 9-10.
Id. Whitley, 1954, Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. New South Wales 1952/53:23.

The specimen from a fish trap from 20 fathoms, 8 miles off Byron Bay,
N.S.W. which I recorded from Australia (Austr. Mus. regd. no. IB.2473) is here
illustrated. The species is evidently rare. In alcohol, yellow with dark brown
spots, ocular band and inframarginal borders to fins as figured.

108

ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

LSS
LEA PEE
eh ogi oes

Sea Perch, Hypoplectrodes nigroruber maculatus. Holotype of sub-
species, New South Wales.

3

Figure

WHITLEY 109

A A. AWAS GEE ele J “ Srp:
bE RRR a ie.
KLEINE y
P= NESS ROSS

BERR SESN

RAGS RRSSAany
WANES
\ ORE

cy)

LLL a
ig cc,
AD 577;
~~ oD
=e
—-A

Ss
SS:
BA

yin

g i TA as

WWW)

ES es

Ry

Figure 4—Butterfly Fish, Chaetodon guntheri. New South Wales.

Family POMACENTRIDAE
Genus POMACENTRUS Lacépéde, 1802.
POMACENTRUS OBREPTUS Whitley.
(Figure 5)

Pomacentrus obreptus Whitley, 1948, Austr. Zool. 11:275.
Here figured from the holotype (Austr. Mus. regd. no. IB.1571) from the
Monte Bello Islands, Western Australia.

Family CORIDAE.
Genus OCTOCYNODON Fowler, 1904.
OCTOCYNODON MINIATUS (Cuvier & Valenciennes).
(Figure 6)

Julis miniatus Cuvier & Valenciennes, 1838, Hist. Nat. Poiss. 13, “1839":460,
ex Kuhl & van Hasselt, MS. Java.

Pseudojulis maculifer Castelnau, 1875, Res. Fish. Austr. (Vict. Offic. Rec.
Philad. Exhib.): 35. Queensland.

A specimen, 52 mm. overall, identified as Pseudojulis maculifer many
years ago in the Australian Museum (regd. no. 1.449) from Cape York,
Queensland, agrees with Castelnau’s description except that the head goes 3
in standard length and the scales are fewer. It has D.ix, 11; A.iii, 11: L.lat. 28.
Canines directed forwards. Thoracic scales not enlarged. Fins without scaly
sheaths. Here illustrated.

_ At is evident that Pseudojulis maculifer is a new synonym of Octocynodon
miniatus.

110 ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

f
\

cy
c

/ iC | ie

e 6 ae ,
\

i

>

<i Saath TSS
ri

= 54769 ok

NOUR CCC CC OO NG
= SO GNA OS
LEED ~

Figure 6—Wrasse, “Pseudojulis maculifer” = Octocynodon miniatus. Queens-

WHITLEY 111

Genus HALICHOERES Ruppell, 1835.
HALICHOERES NIGRESCENS (Bloch & Schneider).
(Figure 7)

Labrus nigrescens Bloch & Schneider, 1801, Syst. Ichth. : 263. No. locality
(Indonesia. )

Halichoeres nigrescens Fowler & Bean, 1928, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. 100 (7):280
(q.v. for refs. & synon.) Jd. Fowler, 1946, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philad. 98:166, fig. 33 and 1956, Quart. J. Taiwan Mus. 9:230, fig.
19 (young).

Dax 2A Lo we tem os lelaien oialin oy. lal Om mPreds SC.elio:

Head (25 mm.) equals depth (25) 3.2 in standard length (79). Head
naked. Two slightly enlarged non-flaring canines in each jaw anteriorly followed
by about seven uniserial teeth. A strong posterior canine each side of upper
jaw. Preopercle entire. Body compressed, scaly, scales of thorax not enlarged,
those of predorsal areas smallest. Lateral line complete.

Dorsal spines slender, not divergent, regularly increasing in length to the
fourth (8 mm.); membranes penicillate. Ventral spine long (8.5 mm.) and
slender.

S . eNO

- we
SS 2 oe a
=n Ne

HN

Figure 7—Wrasse, Halichoeres nigrescens. Queensland.

Colour after long preservation in alcohol, yellowish-brown with about
seven indistinct broad darker brown cross-bars from back to middle of sides
where each one is broken up by the intrusion of light centres to scales. A
brown oblique bar from eye to before dorsal fin. A milky crescent around hinder
and lower orbital rim. Eye greenish-yellow. Teeth whitish. A brown spot at
pectoral axil. Fins all yellowish, a dusky brown wash near dorsal base
anteriorly, followed by a blackish area on the fifth to seventh dorsal spines
and thence continued as a dusky wash along outer half of soft dorsal fin.
Anal similar to second dorsal. Other fins yellowish. No ocelli on soft dorsal
fin or on caudal base.

Described and figured from a specimen 79 mm. in standard length or
33 inches overall. Austr. Mus. regd. no. 1A.620.

Loc.—Holbourne Island, off Port Denison, Queensland. Mr. E. H. Rainford,
1921. New record for Australia.

112 ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES
Family URANOSCOPIDAE.
Genus URANOSCOPUS Linne, 1758.
URANOSCOPUS TERRAE—REGINAE Ogilby

(Figure 8)

Uranoscopus terrae-reginae Ogilby, 1910, New Fish. Qld. Coast:131. Trawled
off south Queensland coastline. Jd. McCulloch & Whitley, 1925, Mem.
Qld. Mus. 8: 174. Id. Whitley, 1959, Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. N. S. Wales
1957-58 : 23. Id. Mees, 1960, J. Roy. Soc. W. Austr. 43: 56-57.

SS

Figure 8—Stargazer, Uranoscopus terraereginac. Dorsal and lateral views of
lectotype. Queensland.

Here illustrated from the lectotype, largest of a number of specimens
trawled off the Queensland Coast. It is registered no. E.2764 and was trawled
by F.I.V. “Endeavour”, 4 to 20 miles N.E. of Gloucester Head, Queensland in
19 to 35 fathoms on 2nd August, 1910. Total length 74 inches (180 mm.) or
148 mm. in standard length.

WHITLEY 113

Family SCORPAENIDAE
Genus SCORPAENOPSIS Heckel, 1837.
SCORPAENOPSIS PALMERI FURNEAUXI Whitley.
(Figure 9)

Scorpaenopsis palmeri furneauxi Whitley, 1959, Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. N. S. Wales,
1957-58: 24. Off Pine Peak and Hayman Island, Queensland.

Figured from the holotype of the subspecies, the larger of two specimens
(E.2896) trawled off Pine Peak, Queensland.

Genus IRACUNDUS Jordan & Evermann, 1903.

Iracundus Jordan & Evermann, 1903, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. 22, 1902:
210 et ibid., 23, 1903 (1905): 470, fig. 207. Orthotype, J. signifer
Jordan & Evermann from Honolulu. Jd. Fowler, 1928, Mem. Bishop
Mus. 10: 292 (references). 7d. Gosline & Brock, 1960, Handbook
Hawaiian Fishes: 286 & 341.

A little-known genus with only one species of which a few Hawaiian
specimens are known; most authors copy Jordan & Evermann’s account. I
collected an example in the Cook Islands which differs in having one more
pectoral ray, fewer scales, the maxillary reaching below posterior portion
of eye, fewer dermal flaps, no large pores on lower jaw, and longest dorsal ray
less than half head. In the type the pectoral rays are described as all simple
but Jordan & Evermann’s figure shows four divided rays as in my specimen
which is described below as a new subspecies.

IRACUNDUS SIGNIFER RAROTONGAE, subsp. nov.

Be 6m DD xis 1,103 Avil, eo see LonGan--e an branched) e/a12)) Vai, 53 C. 11
branched rays. Sc. 39 above 1. lat. Tr.9/1/21. Predorsal sc.8. L.lat. with
about 28 spine-bearing scales. Gill-rakers 6/4 + 6 rudiments on first branchial
arch.

Head (37 mm.) 2.4, depth (26) 3.4 in standard length (90). Snout,
10 mm.; eye, 9; interorbital, 4; postorbital part of head, 19; first dorsal spine,
8; fourth (longest) dorsal spine, 22; longest (Sth) dorsal ray, 15; second
anal spine, 14; length of pectoral, 25, equal to that of caudal, 25; pectoral
base, 11; maxillary, 20; depth of its distal extremity, 6.

No deep notch in profiles. No pit below eye. Most of head naked. Scales only
on postorbital regions and opercles; including lower part of operculum.
Maxillary reaching below posterior part of eye, truncate, smooth. A few small
lappets over eye but no supraocular tentacle. Interorbital concave. Coronal
ridges weak. Acute teeth in bands on jaws and vomer; none on palatines. They
are largest on the posterior row near the symphyses and at each side of the
vomer. One strong, sloping nasal spine each side. Preocular, supraocular and
postocular spines present. No coronal or postfrontal spines. Tympanic, sphenotic,
parietal, nuchal, pterotic, posttemporal, humeral, and postorbital spines present,
all simple. Humeral spine without other spiny projections along its length.
Suborbital ridge with three spines, the first two recumbent and only the
third with salient tip. Two preorbital spines, the second not retrorse but
pointing downward. Four, short preopercular spines and two long opercular
ones diverging in a curved V. No barbels. Bones of head not cavernous, or
with large muciferous cavities. Several large pores below suborbital stay. Pores
below head very small. Gill-rakers low, spiny, clavate knobs.

Form rather slender, little compressed, back not humped. Cleithrum naked.
Prepectoral region, breast and rest of body scaly. Scales imbricate, adherent,
ctenoid, not extending over fins. Some small skinny flaps along 1. lat. and
sparsely scattered over head and body elsewhere. Lateral line complete, not
modified posteriorly, its tubes simple and its course encroached upon by
the body-scales.

ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

114

*‘purysusong)
‘sgisadsqns jo odAjojoH{ “xNpauin{ tatujnd sisdouavds09g pod YOU—G NS

mrenonen
Se

ae ; —
— weavareg Da

\) Nga Vai

WHITLEY 115

First dorsal fin beginning over opercular flap, with twelve spines, the
fourth produced, membranes not deeply incised. A deep notch between the
two dorsal fins. Second anal spine very strong, slightly longer than third. Anal
origin below anterior dorsal rays. Third to sixth pectoral rays bifid; ninth
ray longest; lowermost ray not detached as a feeler. A slight flap on inner base
of pectoral. Ventrals rounded, not nearly reaching vent, which is inconspicuous,
before anal fin. Caudal rounded. :

Colour now faded to brownish-yellow without any conspicuous markings.
Some small white spots on lower parts of head, front of back, and in pectoral
axil. Eye beetroot red. A small black mark at base of first dorsal spine
and a black blotch between second and third spines. Fins plain.

Described from the unique holotype of the subspecies, 90 mm. in standard
length or 44 inches overall. Australian Museum regd. no. IA.5226.

Loc.—Rarotonga, Cook Islands, Pacific Ocean; collected on coral reef,
October or November 1931, by Gilbert P. Whitley.

Figure 10—Threefin Blenny, Vauclusella annulata. Female, New South Wales.

Figure 11—Threefin Blenny, Vauclusella annulata. Male, New South Wales.

116 ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

Family CLINIDAE.
Genus VAUCLUSELLA Whitley, 1931.
VAUCLUSELLA ANNULATA (Ramsay and Ogilby).
(Figures 10-11)

?Tripterygium atrigulare Gunther, 1873, J. Mus. Godef. 1 (4):91. Bowen,
Queensland.

Tripterygium sp. Gunther, 1880, Rept. Zool. Challenger 1 (6): 28. 7d. Ogilby,.
1886, Fish. N. S. Wales: 39.

Tripterygium annulatum Ramsay & Ogilby, 1888, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales.
(2) 2 (4) : 1021 & 1078. Vaucluse, Port Jackson, N. S. Wales.

Tripterygion rufopileum Waite, 1904, Rec. Austr. Mus. 5: 182, pl. 24, fig. 4.
Lord Howe Island.

Tripterygion annulatum Waite, 1904, Mem. Nat. Club. N. S. Wales : 52.
Id. McCulloch, 1922, Austr. Zool. 2 (3) : 114, and of later authors,
and lists. Jd. Ogilby, 1915, Mem. Qld. Mus. 3 : 136. Jd. Fowler,
1957, Ichth. Notes 1 (3): 70. 7d. Schultz and others, 1960, Bull.
U.S. Nat. Mus. 202:293.

Vauclusella annulata Whitley, 1931, Austr. Zool. 6: 324 and 1935, Austr.
Mus. Mag. 5: 292.

This opportunity is taken of presenting illustrations of a male (Austr. Mus.
regd. no. IB.6862; total length, 46 mm.; standard length, 37.5 mm.) and a
female (IB.6863; t.l. 41: s.l. 34) which I collected at Minnie Waters,
northern New South Wales on 3rd November, 1963. The male has a black
head, the body mostly crimson and with some black on the dorsal fins and as
a band down the caudal base. The female is pink with irregular chequers of
dark grey; the head is finelv dotted, not black.

The types and many other specimens of the species show the following
characters:

D. ii-iii/xii-xiii/10-11: last dorsal rays, whether 10th or 11th, always divided.

A. 19-20, last two often close together. Third or fourth last anal ray longest.

P. 15. C. 13. Sc. 32-34. Tr. 3-5/1/5. L.lat. 16-17 tubes and about 18 pierced

scales. A few, low. poorly develored gill-rakers; very fine teeth on jaws.

Maxillary reaches nearer middle of eve in young than in adults; snout
straight in young and concave in adults. Breast naked. Total length up to 2
inches.

Besides New South Wales, annulata is known from Southern Queensland
and Lord Howe Island whence it has been named Tripterygion rufopileum
Waite, a new synonym of V. annulata. It may eventually prove to be synonymous
with the tropical Queensland atrigulare (atrogularis of authors), but the latter
typically has fewer anal rays (14), and the posterior portion of the body is
sometimes blackish.

Other species have still to be recorded from the Gulf of Carpentaria
and Western Australia.

VAUCLUSELLA ACANTHOPS Whitley.
(Figure 12)

Vaucluselia acanthops Whitley, 1964, Austr. Nat. 12 (4): 15. Heron Island,
Queensland.
D. iii/xvii/8; A. ii, 19; P. 2+7 branched + 7 = 16; V.2; C.10 branched.
L.lat. 16 tubes and about 21 notched scales. Sc. 36. Tr. 2 to 3/1/5 or 6.
Head (10 mm.) 3.4, depth (7) nearly 5 in standard length (34). Eye,.
3 mm.; snout, 2; longest (tenth) pectoral ray, 13: depth of caudal peduncle,
3; predorsal length, 8; first dorsal spine, nearly 5; length of caudal fin, 9 mm.
Facies are figured: a slender fish with longer caudal fin than usual in
the genus.

WHITLEY Wily

Figure 12—Threefin Blenny, Vauclusella acanthops. Holotype, Queensland.

Head naked except on nape, Snout steep and conic.
Maxilla reaching below middle of eye. Teeth small, conic.

Three conical spines over front of each eye. A supraorbital and a
nasal tentacle. Interorbital narrow and concave between the raised, minutely
denticulate orbital rims.

No predorsal scales.

Body, including breast, nape and pectoral base, with deciduous, imbricate,.
ctenoid scales.

Three dorsal fins, the second higher with 17 spines. Anal origin below
seventh spine of second dorsal fin, its base ending well behind that of third
dorsal. Two slender anal spines, close together, shorter than the rays, the last
of which is divided to its base. Pectoral reaching below third dorsal fin.
Membrane of ventral fin not evident. Caudal long, convex, subequal to head’
without snout.

Colour in preservative, plain greyish brown; no dark blotches. Spinous.
dorsal fins infuscated.

Described and figured from the holotype of the species, a specimen:
42 mm. or 1% inches overall. Australian Museum registered no. IB.4016.

Five paratypes (Nos. IB.4023 and 4028) show no important variation.
The ocular spines are just evident in a 34 mm. fish, the smallest specimen.
The spines of the second dorsal fin vary from 16 to 17. A.ii, 19-20; P. 15-16;
Sc. 34-37; L.lat. with 16 to 18 tubes. Tr. 2-3/1/5-7.

Loc.—Heron Island, Queensland; 1957. Presented by Mr. R. Slack-Smith
who gave the holotype his field number 40/9/4. The paratypes, with same
data, have field nos. 46/26/3 and H.98 Spec. C.

Readily distinguished from its congeners by its scaleless head, orbital
spines, scaly breast, long caudal and pectoral fins, and 16 or 17 spines im
the second dorsal fin.

118 ILLUSTRATIONS AND RECORDS OF FISHES

Family SALARIIDAE.
Genus SALARIAS Cuvier, 1816.
SALARIAS RAROTONGENSIS, sp. nov.
(Figure 13)

D.xii/15; A. 17; P. 14; V. 3. C. with 7 branched rays.

Head (10 mm.) 4.2, depth (7) 6 in standard length (42). Snout (4)
2.5 in head. Eye (3) 1.3 in snout and 3 times interorbital. Width of mouth
(4.5) 2.2 in head.

Head much longer than wide. No nuchal crest. Eyes with a simple
tentacle. A very small, simple nuchal tentacle, and a broader, fringed nasal
one. Interorbital slightly concave. Maxillary reaches to below posterior part of
eye. Both lips entire. Teeth very fine and numerous, flexible. A large canine

Figure 13—Blenny, Salarias rarotongensis. Holotype from the Cook Islands.

on each side behind lower jaw. Gill-membrane with free fold across broad
isthmus. Lateral line arched above pectoral, obsolete posteriorly. Depth of
caudal peduncle equals eye.

Height of first dorsal fin less than that of second which is higher than
-anal. Dorsals notched to base. Last anal ray and last dorsal ray free from
-caudal peduncle.

Colour in alcohol pale grey to silvery grey. Vertex of head brown.
A series of four paired bands along back, below and slightly behind which
-are paired brown chevrons along the sides. Scattered brown spots on shoulders
and a few on sides of head. Chin slightly fuscous medially and with two
‘indistinct oblique bands on each side of whitish median area. Fins yellowish.
‘Dorsals with reddish-brown spotting. Pectoral not black-spotted, but infuscated
‘towards tip. Caudal with brown marks, mostly on the rays, tending to form
sloping cross-bars. Anal border dusky. Eye blue with silvery iris. Upper lip
with five transverse dusky bars.

Described and figured from the unique holotype, 50 mm. or nearly 2
inches long. Austr. Mus. regd. no. IA.5358.

Loc.—Rarotonga, Cook Islands; G. P. Whitley, October or November
(931, on coral reef.

Distinguished by its coloration, minute teeth, entire lips, simple ocular
:and nuchal tentacles.

WHITLEY 119

Family OSTRACIONTIDAE.
Genus ACANTHOSTRACION Bleeker, 1865.

Acanthostracion Bleeker, 1865, Atlas Ichth. 5: 28. Type-species, Ostracion
quadricornis Linne, by original designation. Jd. Bleeker, 1865, Ned.
Tijdschr. Dierk. 2:301 et ibid., 1866, 3: 5. Id. Breder & Clark, 1947,
Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 88 (5): 299, pl. 14, text-fig. 4. 7d. Smith,
1950, Sea Fishes S. Africa: 411, pl. 92, fig. 1173.

ACANTHOSTRACION BUCEPHALUS, sp. nov.

Dat Asis Palities (C85 Sch cir.9:

Head (18mm.) 3.8, depth (37) 1.8 in standard length (69). Eye (9 mm.)
1.5 in snout (14). Pectoral fin at least 13 mm. long. Caudal peduncle long
(15 mm. from end of carapace at sides to root of tail). Gill-opening (7 mm.),
below posterior half of eye. Anterior profile very steep; cheeks deep. Interorbital
very concave. Teeth brown, spaced, peg-like, few in each jaw. Nostrils near
eyes.

A forwardly and outwardly directed spine just before each eye. Carapace
closed behind the dorsal and anal fins and ending in a strong spine above and
below. Caudal peduncle without bony plates except for a small round one
below the spine behind the dorsal fin.

Dorsal ridge begins on interorbital and extends as a high, very convex
crest to the dorsal fin. Lateral ridges obsolete; lateral line faint. Pelvic ridges
well developed, extending from below cheeks to a spine behind the closure of
the carapace behind the anal fin; they are armed with one strong, backwardly
directed spine below the front of the dorsal fin. No median ventral ridge.
Dorsal and anal fins higher than horizontal eye-diameter. Some pectoral and
caudal rays branched.

Colour pale yellow to yellowish-brown. Ventral surface plain yellow
except for few, faint, peripheral grey smudges. Lips, eyes, cheeks, sides and
back of body, and caudal peduncle with large, spaced bluish-grey blotches, oval
or of irregular shape. Fins mostly yellowish.

Described from the holotype, a dry specimen 69 mm. in standard length
or 34 inches overall.

Loc.—Cooktown district, Queensland. Presented by Mr. S. Kellner, 1963.
Australian Museum regd. no. IB.6355.

Comes down to Acanthostracion in the key of Fraser-Brunner (1935,
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10) 16: 317 and 320, fig. iv) and differs from the
type-species of that genus in its remarkable curved and elevated dorsal ridge,
without a prominent spine in the middle of the back, combined with the
two ocular spines and the median spine at end of carapace above and below.
This genus and its type-species appear to be very little known and one must delve
in the earliest systematic works on ichthyology to elucidate relationships.

Ostracion tricornis and quadricornis Linne (1758, Syst. Nat., ed. 10:
331 and ed. 12, 1766: 408) are both based on Artedi’s gen. 56, syn. 85, a
boxfish from “India”, tricornis having line-priority. Some of Artedi’s species
were based on boxfishes which he had seen in London taverns (“Vidi Londini
in the White Bear” or “Vidi apud Sir Hans Sloane & in Naggshead” and
“Vidi Londini in the green Dragon in Stepney,’ for example) so the types,
which may have been from the West Indies rather than “India”, probably
no longer exist. There is no similar species in Day’s “Fishes of India.”

The “Piscis triangularis cornibus carens Clusy” of Willughby (1686,
Historia Piscium 4: 149 and appendix: 20, pl.I,13, fig.2) is similar but lacks
the ocular spines. Willughby’s “Piscis triangularis cornutus, cuj media cauda
cutacea aculeus perlongus erigitur’ (1686, loc.cit. (mot in text), pl. I. 15)
differs in Tacking the long median posterior spines at the ends of the carapace;
its erect flap of skin on the caudal peduncle may have been artificial or due
to injury.

120

Genus OSTRACION Linne, 1758.
OSTRACION TUBERCULATUS Linne, 1758.

A young example, 1} inches long (Austr. Mus. regd. no. IB. 893) from
Jibbon Beach, Port Hacking, 4 July 1907 (Mr. F. Aldrich) had been given a
new specific name by D. G. Stead in manuscript. There is no need to publish
this name because the fish is evidently tuberculatus Linne, a tropical species
which occasionally wanders into New South Wales although this is the first
record of it from this State. It has the following characters:—

Snout not projecting. Sides flaring outwards below. Carapace four-angled,
closed behind dorsal and anal fins. Back and belly convex. No dorsal ridge but
one scale protrudes slightly before dorsal fin. Lateral ridge rounded, extends from
eye to upper end of carapace. Pelvic ridge similar from below head to near
lower end of carapace and extending well behind level of vent. No ventral or
medio-lateral ridges. No preopercular or pelvic spines.

New record for New South Wales.

121

THE SYSTEMATIC STATUS OF CERTAIN AUSTRALIAN LIZARDS
OF THE FAMILY GEKKONIDAE

By ARNOLD G. KLUGE

As a result of detailed systematic studies on many of the Australian genera
of gekkos (1962a, 1962b, 1963a, 1963b, 1963c, 1963d, 1965, Dixon and Kluge,
1964) which | started as a Fulbright Scholar at the University of Western
Australia, Perth, in 1961-2, | have begun to prepare an annotated check-list
-and key to the species of the Gekkonidae from that continent. I have attempted
to examine all of the type series of gekkos supposedly endemic to Australia
with the hope that the list will be more useful and accurate systematically
-when published. As a result of studying many of the type series, systematic
problems have arisen which require a taxonomic change and a lengthy discussion
which would not be advisable to include in a brief annotated list. The following
discussion is an attempt to point out some of these taxonomic problems and
when possible to make the necessary systematic changes, as I have done
previously (1963c).

I wish to thank Dr. James R. Dixon for bringing to my attention the
problem associated with Phyllodactylus barbouri, and Mr. Jean Guibé of the
Museé National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris (P.M.) who permitted me to
examine the holotype and only known specimen of that species. I am indebted
to Miss Alice G. C. Grandison of the British Museum of Natural History
(B.M.) for her many courtesies during my stay in London in 1964 and for
the opportunity to examine type material under her supervision. I am also
greatly indebted to Mr. W. D. Haacke and Dr. Vivien F. FitzSimons of the
Transvaal Museum (T.M.) for information on Peropus pusillus, and Dr.
James E. Bohlke of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia (A.N.S.P.)
for allowing me to examine the holotype of Pentadactylus brunneus. Mr. Harold
G. Cogger of the Australian Museum, Sydney (A.M.) and Dr. Ernest E.
Williams of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, at Harvard University
(M.C.Z.) have been very helpful in supplying me with information for this
study. I also wish to thank them for the many opportunities to examine
‘specimens in their collections.

Phyllodactylus barbouri Angel = Diplodactylus vittatus Gray.

Diplodactylus vittatus Gray, 1832, Proc. Zool Soc. London, p. 40.
Phyllodactylus barbouri Angel, 1936, Bull. Soc. Zool. France, vol. 61, p. 508.

During the summer of 1964 I examined the holotypes of Diplodactylus
vittatus (B.M. 1946.9.7.43) and Phyllodactylus barbouri (P.M. 5600). The two
‘specimens are identical in all important external morphological diagnostic
characters (Kluge, 1965). A stereoscopic low voltage X-ray of the holotype of
P. barbouri was taken and compared with a large series of cleared and stained
D. vittatus; the skeletal similarities also indicate that the two species are
conspecific. Angel’s unique specimen of P. barbouri is without original locality
data and he presumed that it was collected in Madagascar. The incorrect
locality information probably explains why Angel did not compare the specimen
-of P. barbouri with material of the common, wide-spread, Australian endemic
D. vittatus.

Phyria punctulata Gray, nomen dubium.

In 1842 Gray described Phyria punctulata as a new genus and species
-of gekkonid lizard from Port Essington (early settlement on Cobourg Peninsula),

Phyria puncitulata Gray, 1842, Zool. Misc., p. 53.

122 AUSTRALIAN LIZARDS

Northern Territory, Australia. Gray’s original description of the species was
very brief and he failed to mention either the genus or species in his compre-
hensive lizard catalogue of 1845, and in a survey of the Australian reptile
fauna (1867). Boulenger (1885, p. 228) stated that he was unable to locate
the type specimen in the British Museum of Natural History collection where
it was most likely deposited and he treated P. punctulata as a species incertae
sedis. During the summer of 1964 I was also unsuccessful in locating Gray’s
original material in the British Museum’s collections. There does not appear
to be any record of the holotype in the museum’s specimen registers and it
seems likely that the specimen has been lost.

Gray (1842) suggested that Phyria was closely related to Ptyodactylus
(south-western Asia through northern Africa), but this seems unlikely in view
of the differences in the digital characters which he described, and the locality
of the specimen (Port Essington, Australia). Chrapliwy, Smith and Grant
(1961), with hesitation, referred P. punctulata to the synonymy of the Australian
endemic Gehyra australis. Some of the characters which Gray used in the
description of Phyria (i.e. two series of diverging subdigital lamellae and ventral
surfaces yellow) cast some doubt on his species being synonymous with G.
australis, and I believe that P. punctulata is better treated as a nomen dubium.

Goniodactylus australis Gray = Phyllodactylus marmoratus (Gray).

Diplodactylus marmoratus Gray, 1845, Cat. lizards British Mus., p. 149.
Goniodactylus australis Gray, 1845, Cat. lizards British Mus., p. 172.

Gray noted only a single discoloured specimen in his original description
of Goniodactylus australis (1845) which he indicated was from Mr. W. (Walter)
Buchanan’s collection and which was collected in “Australia.” Boulenger (1885,
p. 72) noted that two specimens formed the type series and that he was only
able tentatively to refer Gray’s species to the genus Gonatodes because “they
(the types) are in too bad a state to be determinable.” I have examined the
holotype of Goniodactylus australis (B.M. xxi.86a) and an additional juvenile
specimen with it in the same _ bottle (apparently explaining Boulenger’s
reference to two specimens) which are indicated on the label as having been
purchased from Mr. Buchanan and collected in W. Australia (= Western
Australia). Although these specimens are poorly preserved, they clearly exhibit
all of the diagnostic characters of Phyllodactylus marmoratus (i.e. long slender
digits; single row of enlarged sub-digital lamellae; large subapical plates on
digits; dorsal body scalation homogeneous; subcaudal scales undifferentiated;
preanal pores absent; dorsal surfaces light brown with darker marbling). The
holotype of G. australis was compared directly with the type series of P.
marmoratus (B.M. xxi. 9a-d from Houtman Abrolhos, Western Australia,
collected by Mr. John Gilbert and B.M. 58.10.16.94 from “Australia”, no
collector given) and with more recently collected material of that species. There
are no characters, as indicated in the original descriptions of the two species or as
taken directly from the type series, which contradict the conclusion that
G. australis and P. marmoratus are conspecific. It is difficult to understand
how Gray could have overlooked the Phyllodactylus-type of digits of G.
australis, unless the desiccated nature of the specimens obscured the terminal
enlarged lamellae, as is somewhat the case today.

Oedura verrillii Cope, nomen dubium.

Oedura verrillii Cope, 1868, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 20, p. 318.

In 1957, Cogger published an excellent review of the endemic Australian
genus Oedura; however, he failed to mention the nominal form O. verrillii. This
species was described by Cope (1868) from a single tail-less specimen from
“Australia”, and in general it has been overlooked. The holotype was listed
by Cope as no. 724 Museum of Comparative Zodlogy. No. 724 also included
a specimen of the Australian endemic Diplodactylus (= Phyllodactylus)
marmoratus. An exhaustive search of the M.C.Z. herpetological collections by

KLUGE 123

both Dr. Ernest E. Williams, the curator, and myself has failed to reveal such
a numbered specimen which agrees with Cope’s description; presumably the
holotype was not returned to the M.C.Z. and has been lost. The specimens
loaned to Cope for study do not appear to have had authentic M.C.Z. numbers
in most cases (Dr. Ernest E. Williams, personal communication), but instead
were those of the collector or of another museum. These numbers are often
entered alongside those of the M.C.Z. in the present catalogues of the museum.
Barbour and Loveridge (1929) in their checklist of the type material in
the Museum of Comparative Zoology allude to these numbers as being from
an early M.C.Z. specimen catalogue; however, this does not appear to be
the case.

Although Cope’s description of O. verrillii is quite brief it seems likely
that the species was correctly referred to the genus Oedura (viz. the presence
of an arched series of femoral pores and the type of subdigital lamellae). The
brevity of the description and the inclusion of some confusing statements such
as “two rows of infralabials across chin” and “thoracic and ventral flat, larger
than the flat dorsals’ does not permit a more specific identification in the
absence of the holotype. Cope’s species must therefore be considered a nomen
dubium.

Peropus pusillus Cope, nomen dubium.

Peropus pusillus Cope, 1868, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 20, p. 319.

Cope (1868) described the species Peropus pusillus from a single specimen
(no. 407 Mus. Peabody Acad.) which was stated as having been collected
in “S.W. Australia.” Boulenger (1885) later referred Cope’s species to the
genus Lepidodactylus. Loveridge (1934, p. 303) noted that M.C.Z. 5735
(not 5725 as stated by Loveridge, which apparently was a typographical error;
M.C.Z. 5725 is listed as Hemidactylus platycephalus from Zanzibar) was supposed
to be the holotype of P. pusillus. M.C.Z. 5735 was originally listed in the
catalogue as a Diplodactylus bearing an apparently unpublished manuscript
name of Cope’s and the redetermination as Peropus pusillus was made by Dr.
Thomas Barbour, an earlier curator and director of the museum, as indicated
by his handwriting. There is no suggestion as to why Barbour regarded the
specimen as the Cope type except that it is from the Peabody Museum,
Salem and from S.W. Australia. The Peabody Museum number is entered as
“402”. Perhaps Barbour thought that either Cope or the cataloguer misinterpreted
the Peabody number 407. Barbour and Loveridge (1929) considered M.C.Z.
5735 as the holotype of P. pusillus. Loveridge (1934) noted that Cope’s
description of P. pusillus had little in common with M.C.Z. 5735 which was
said to be a specimen of Diplodactylus spinigerus (see Barbour and Loveridge,
1929). To complicate the problem further, M.C.Z. 5735 was exchanged to
the Transvaal Museum (T.M. 21148) by Loveridge. Mr. W. D. Haacke and
Dr. Vivien FitzSimons of the Transvaal Museum have been kind enough to
reconfirm Loveridge’s earlier conclusion that M.C.Z. 5735 is a typical specimen
of D. spinigerus and has little in common with Cope’s original description of
P. pusillus.

Because of Cope’s brief description, which lacks important diagnostic
characters, and because the holotype is no longer extant, I consider Peropus
pusillus to be a nomen dubium.

Pentadactylus brunneus Cope = Hoplodactylus pacificus (Gray).

Naultinus pacificus Gray, 1842, Zool. Misc., p. 53.
Pentadactylus brunneus Cope, 1868, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol.
20, p. 320.

In 1868, Cope described Pentadactylus brunneus from a single specimen
which he stated was obtained in an exchange from the Musée Jardin des
Plantes, Paris, and was considered at that time as having been collected
in “Australia” (no specific locality was given). Boulenger (1885) referred

124 AUSTRALIAN LIZARDS

‘Cope’s species to the genus Aelurosaurus with some hesitation apparently
because of the limited original description, which he quoted in full. It appears
that since Boulenger’s initial reference to P. brunneus, the species has been
mentioned in the literature on only three separate occasions. Woodward
(1900-1) included P. brunneus in his list of reptiles from Western Australia
as did Zietz (1920); it seems that both authors followed Boulenger’s action
(1885) and did not actually have new material which was referable to P.
brunneus. Barbour and Loveridge (1929) stated that the holotype of P.
brunneus might have been deposited in the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
at Harvard University. It was generally agreed at that time that the unique
specimen had been lost.

A.N.S.P. 7385 is listed as the holotype of P. brunneus. The label associated
with the specimen indicates New Holland (= western and central Australia)
as its place of collection; the fact that it was acquired from the Jardin des
Plantes in exchange during the year 1868 is also noted on the label. The
specimen is well preserved but the color and color pattern have faded to
a nearly uniform light brown; there is a slight indication of darker brown
blotches. A.N.S.P. 7385 agrees with Cope’s original description in all characters
except the following: (1) the rostral slightly touches the margin of the
nostril on both sides — not excluded from the nostril as stated by Cope,
(2) the “infralabials’ (= postmentals) are scattered irregularly — not in
rows as stated by Cope, and (3) one or two supraciliary spines stand out
slightly from the rest — Cope noted that they were absent. In spite of these
few minor differences, I believe it is reasonable to assume that A.N.S.P. 7385
is the specimen used by Cope for the original description of P. brunneus.

The holotype of P. brunneus compares favourably with the description
of Hoplodactylus pacificus (Gray) given by McCann in his recent revision of
the genus (1955) and is nearly identical with specimens listed as that species
in the collections of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, the American
Museum of Natural History, and the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia.
On the basis of their similarity I believe it is reasonable to consider P.
brunneus as consnecific with H. pacificus and that the locality information for the
former species (Australia) is incorrect; H. pacificus is known only from New

Zealand.

Heteronota walshi Kinghorn = Phyllurus sphyrurus (Ogilby).

Gymnodactylus sphyrurus Ogilby, 1892, Rec. Australian Mus., vol. 2, p. 6.
Heteronota walshi Kinghorn, 1931, Rec. Australian Mus., vol. 18, p. 268.

Kinghorn’s type series of Heteronota walshi (A.M. R10266, holotype —
Boggabri, New South Wales; A.M. R6772-3, paratypes — no locality data)
has been examined and compared with the holotype (A.M. R3800) of Phyllurus
sphyrurus from the “interior of New South Wales (Tumut?)”. The two are
identical in morphology and are almost certainly conspecific. Heteronota and
Phyllurus are not closely related genera (Kluge, 1965). It appears likely that it
was only the superficial similarity of their digits that led Kinghorn to place
his material wrongly in the former genus and consider it representative of an

undescribed species.

LITERATURE CITED

Barbour, T. and A. Loveridge, 1929. — Typical reptiles and amphibians.
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 69:205-360.
Boulenger, G. A., 1885. — Catalogue of the lizards in the British Museum

(Natural History). 2nd ed., London: Taylor and Francis 1: 1-436.

Chrapliwy, P. S., H. M. Smith and C. Grant, 1961. — Svstematic status of the
geckonid lizard genera Gehyra, Peropus, Hoplodactylus and Naultinus.
Herpetologica 17:5-12.

KLUGE 125

Cogger, H. G., 1957. — Investigations in the gekkonid genus Oedura Gray.
Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 82:167-79.
Cope, E. D., 1868. — Observations on reptiles of the Old World.

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 20:316-23.

Dixon, J. R. and A. G. Kluge, 1964. — A new gekkonid lizard genus from
Australia. Copeia 1:174-80.

Gray, J. E., 1842. — Zoological Miscellany. London, 2-5:41-80.

1845. — Catalogue of the specimens of lizards in the collection
of the British Museum. London: Edward Newman, 289 p.
1867. — The lizards of Australia and New Zealand in the

collection of the British Museum. London: Bernard Quaritch, 7 p.
Kluge, A. G., 1962a. — A new species of gekkonid lizard, genus Diplodactylus,

from the Carnarvon Region, Western Australia. Western Australian

Nat. 8:73-5.
1962b. — A new species of gekkonid lizard, genus Diplodactylus
Gray, from the southern interior of Western Australia. Western
Australian Nat. 8:97-101.

1963a. — A review of the gekkonid lizard genus Heteronota

Gray, with a description of a new species from Western Australia.
Journ. Roy. Soc. Western Australia 46:63-7.

1963b. — Three new species of the gekkonid lizard genus
Diplodactylus Gray from Australia. Rec. South Australian Mus.
14:545-53.

1963c. — The systematic status of certain Australian and New
Guinean gekkonid lizards. Mem. Queensland Mus. 14:77-86.

1963d. — A new species of gekkonid lizard, genus Diplodactylus
aiey, sito Eastern Australia. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales
88 :230-4.

1965. — The Australian gekkonid lizard genus Diplodactylus

Gray: an evolutionary and zoogeographical study. Doctoral Disserta-
tion, University of Southern California xvi + 472 p.

Loveridge. A., 1934. — Australian reptiles in the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Cambridge, Massachusetts Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl.
77:243-383.

McCann, C., 1955. — The lizards of New Zealand, Gekkonidae and Scincidae.
Dominion Mus. Bull. 17:127 p.

Woodward, B. H., 1900-1. — Natural History of Western Australia. In
Western Australian Yearbook, 1900-01.
Zietz, F. R., 1920. — Catalogue of Australian lizards. Rec. South Australian

Mus. 1:181-228.

126 PIGMY POSSUM, CERCARTETUS NANUS

NOTES ON A PIGMY POSSUM, CERCARTETUS NANUS
DESMAREST

By CHRISTINE PERRERS
(COMMUNICATED BY MELBOURNE WARD)

(The following notes by Miss Perrers relate to a marsupial kept as 2
pet in the Blue Mountains, New South Wales, for eight years, a record life-span
for the species, which normally feeds extensively on insects in captivity.)

“He was found (in Woodford) on October 17, 1957 and was one inch in
length at the time. His ears were flat against his head but eyes were prominent
as they have always been. He died on January 28, 1965 and had for the last
i2 months looked more aged. The fur on his tail apeared to be rubbing off.
His tail curled around any object it came in contact with.

Diet—The possum’s diet consisted of rolled oats, cereals, tea leaves, arrow-
root biscuit, bread, dates, nuts, pumpkin seeds, cake (not fruit cake), jam,
honey, fresh fruit in season, cod-liver oil, charcoal, water, honeysuckle and gum
blossoms, honey flower. In early years he had a fondness for sweet food such as.
cake or jams, but in later years changed to bread and biscuit. The biscuit he
would hold between his front paws, standing on his back legs, while eating. He
also grew fonder of fruit. He liked white grapes better than black. He did not
like any kind of meat, would not eat moths, flies (dead or alive) and was
terrified of ants. For the first few weeks after he was found, he was fed on
milk, cod-liver oil and malt from an eye dropper. He became quite accustomed’
to this and would hold the eye dropper between his front paws, while his.
tongue darted in and out.

Habitat—He was kept in a meat safe, 16” x 16” x 16”, inside which was.
a carrying box (9” x 5” x 6”), for white mice and inside that was a woollen
egg cosy and a warm cloth. The safe and box were both lined on the bottom
with clean newspaper every day. There was also a small log in this safe.
He either slept in the white mice box or the log. In the box he curled around
in the egg cosy. Fresh branches of gum leaves and wild flowers were put in
the safe. He would sometimes sleep in amongst the leaves. The safe was
kept in the bathroom, so that it would be away from our cats. When the
weather was hot, we would hang the white mice box on a hook on the verandah
during the daytime as he slept. After such an airing he would always be much
livelier. He used to tear up the newspaper in the safe to make a nest.

Hibernation—For the first few winters he hibernated for a month or two.
This was not a continuous hibernation for this time. The later years he
hibernated at odd times in winter for a few days. Before he hibernated we
noticed a large swelling at the base of his tail and believed this was his food

supply.

Habits—He had a very good temperament but if awakened during the day
time would make peculiar grunting noises and screw up his nose in a disgusted
look. If shown to strangers, he would get very nervous and tremble. He was
sometimes very friendly to us and would run up and down our arms, but at
other times would seem to “hide” from us. He was very clean. Sometimes
the water would be splashed over the paper as though he had had a bath,
but at po; tine did we find his fur wet. He sometimes drank quite a lot from his
water dish.”

MARINE ECOLOGY OF LINDEMAN ISLAND 127

Notes on Marine Ecology of Lindeman Island, Queensland,
with Special Reference to the Brachyuran Crabs

By MELBOURNE WARD

The essay here presented represents observations on the marine life of
Lindeman Island in the Whitsunday Passage, Queensland, made during my
residence on that island during the years from 1933 to 1935. The material
of the species mentioned, with exceptions of the Ovula ovum and the many
species of alcyonarian corals which were too large for preservation, are
housed in the’ collection at the Gallery of Natural History and Native Art
at Medlow Bath, New South Wales. For the identifications of the echinoderms
mentioned I am indebted to the late Hubert Lyman Clark who kindly undertook
their examination and returned the material identified when I first brought
the collection south. I regret the somewhat fragmentary condition of the
notes but I left the locality before they could be properly concluded. Some
of the ecological zones which I was able to study have not been reported
on in these notes, and I would like to remark that during the stay at the
island I had built up a representative library on marine invertebrates with the
hope that a permanent research laboratory and library might be established.

The eastern coast of Queensland supports two distinct faunal areas, one
confined to the mainland and adjacent islands, the second to the coral reefs
of the great barrier chain. Where conditions favour madreporarian reefs, an
associated fauna of crabs is to be found; McCulloch first observed this at
Rat Island, Port Curtis. My own observations at North West Island and
Lindeman Island have proven this distinction of faunas, the latter on account
of its close approximation to the mainland and its sharply contrasted zones has
a much richer and more varied series.

Lindeman Island lies at the southern end of the Whitsunday Passage
and is about eight miles from the mainland. It is approximately five square
miles in size and is a high mainland island. The southern shores face
Kennedy Sound and are boulder strewn except for two sandy beaches, one
at the western and the other toward the eastern end of the island. These
sandy beaches impinge upon dead reef flats which in turn are fringed by
vigorous madreporarian reefs.

On the northwestern side of the island deeply curved bays are formed
and are floored with sand and patches of fine mud, at low water these
bays dry out beyond the headlands where the flats slope gently to deep
water and are covered with Thalassia and other marine plants on the areas
exposed at low tide. This Thalassia region is bounded on the seaward side by
a ridge of corals which differ from those found on the southern side of
the island in being mainland types such as Turbinaria, massive sarcophytons
and meandrines, with only a few madrepores.

Lying close to the north western end of Lindeman is a small island
known as Little Lindeman and the two are connected by a narrow isthmus
which dries at low water springs and forms the richest collecting ground in
the region. The northern side of the island from the isthmus along to the
eastern extremity presents a series of rugged headlands at the base of which
points of rock jut out into the sea, these have sheer seaward faces. The beaches
on the northern side of the island are composed of shingles, dead coral reefs
occur at the western end of the island, but at the eastern end the shingle
beaches slope steeply to deep water. The sheer rocky points have become covered
by extensive clusters of oysters and barnacles.

Most of the bays on the western and north western side of the island
have mangroves though they are not extensively developed.

128 MARINE ECOLOGY OF LINDEMAN ISLAND

The notes which follow have been placed under separate headings:

Madreporarian Reefs (outer Barrier type of reef).
Alcyonarian Reefs (Mainland type of reef).
(a) Rocky shores, southern side of the island.
(b) Rocky shores, northern side of the island.
(c) Rocky shores, western side of the island.
. (a) Sand flats, southern side of the island.
(b) Sand beaches, northern side of the island.

WNe

1. MADREPORARIAN REEFS

On the south western or weather side of the island a vigorously growing
madreporarian reef forms a huge horse-shoe of coral, lying in an east-westerly
direction the opening to the shallow enclosed lagoon being at the western end;
on the shoreward side the reef impinges upon the dead exposed reef flat. The
floor of the lagoon is composed of fine mud inhabited by what appear to be
burrowing worms which form craters on the surface of the mud. In some
areas there is a sparse growth of Thalassia and occasionally one sees commercial
beche-der-mer, Curry and Tiger fish.

The landward side of the coral horse-shoe is composed of extensive
masses of Seriatopora, Stylophora, Acropora and occasional Fungia. The
upper surface of the reef has been killed and covered with algae and the
alcyonarian coral Xenia. The Seriatopora is particularly well developed and
acts as host for the crabs Trapezia cymodoce (Herbst), Tetralia glaberrima
(Herbst) and Galathea sp., as well as several species of Alpheus, Gonodactylus
chiragra, Ophiuroids and worms.

Large cup sponges occur amongst the corals below low water. The outer
horn of the horse-shoe is composed of Acropora, especially staghorn forms and
a few meandrines. The whole upper surface is exposed at low springs and
is covered with algae and soft coral, Xenia, with a few massive alcyonaria
such as Sarcophyton. Black Sea Urchins, Diadema setosum, occur in large
numbers though the tests are hidden amongst the corals, only the dangerously
sharp spines being allowed to protrude. The ocean side of the reef is composed
almost entirely of Acropora hebes. A few specimens of the boring clam
Tridacna crocea inhabit the dead surfaces of the reef.

2. ALCYONARIAN REEFS

The rampart or ridge which extends in an irregular line parallel to the
foreshore on the north western side of the island and about 100 yards from
high tide, rises about two or three feet above the level of the surrounding
sandy area; the sea floor on the seaward side of the ridge slopes gradually so
that one can wade along on the mud. The substratum upon which the corals
grow appears to be dead coralla of previously thriving madrepores. Several
breaks or channels occur in the line of reefs giving ready access to intertidal
Thalassia and sand flat zones. Not only do the massive sarcophytons inhabit this
area but also dome-shaped meandrines belonging to the following genera .. .
Euphyllia, Lobophyllia, Tridacophyllia, Symphyllia with occasional masses of
Porites, small growths of Stylophora, Seriatopora and one or two Acropora also
occur. For some months during 1934 I kept a small crab-trap set on the
outer edge of this reef and captured many specimens of two species of Swimming
Crabs, Thalamita, which otherwise always managed to elude me. The mollusca
of this reef were not especially numerous, small specimens of black-lipped
pearl shell being the commonest. The only specimen of the Sacred Cowrie,
Ovula ovum was obtained from this reef before my arrival at the Island. The
small white cowrie, Calpurnus verrucosus, occurs as a commensal on the
outside of Sarcophyton sp. The crabs found under the ridge were mostly
swimming forms though occasional Oxyrhyncha were taken.

WARD 129

3. (a) ROCKY SHORES ON THE SOUTHERN SIDE OF THE ISLAND.

The rocky shores on the southern side of the island slope gradually
from the steep hillside to the narrow mud-flat region and cover the upper
tidal area from high water to about neap low. In some regions the stones
are small and smooth, tending to form shingle beaches, in other parts there
is an admixture of coarse sand and the stones are irregular in shape. The
first crab we observe as we work from high tide level is Epixanthus frontalis
H. M. Edward hiding under stones on sand at high water. A few feet further down
the brightly coloured and swift moving Grapsoid, Metopograpsus frontalis Miers
(formerly known as M. messor), occurs. Half way down the region one finds
Leptodius exaratus hidden under stones and this crab reaches its greatest numbers
in the lower half of the region. At the extreme edge of the region Leptodius
australis Ward, and Etisodes australis Ward, take the place of Leptodius
exaratus H. M. Edwards.

3 (b) ROCKY SHORES ON THE NORTHERN SIDE OF THE ISLAND.

The point of rocks wherein the coral pools are found slope precipitously
into the sea and the intertidal region on this natural sea wall is in many parts.
vertical. A belt of barnacles and oysters extends from high water mark down
to within a foot or two of low tide level where it is met by a thick growth
of Sargassum weed. Only one species of oyster appears to be present, Ostrea
mordax, and one associated barnacle is Tetraclita squamosa. About half way
down the area the encrustation of oysters is about six or eight inches thick,
intricate passages are formed under the oysters and with the aid of a crowbar
masses of the oysters may be removed, they form ideal hiding places for a most

extraordinary fauna.

Next to the oysters in importance is a large species of barnacle, Tetraclita
squamosa, which does not always extend to the upper limits of the area. The
small flat barnacle, Chthamalus sp. extends from the spray region just above
high tide to approximately half down the area. High upon the rocks it
occurs in the open but lower down it is on the under side of the oyster
crannies. Two other species of barnacle occur at the lower extremity of the
area, Balanus imperator and Tetraclita vitiata. There is also a species of [bla.

The free living mollusca include Nodilittorina above high water mark.
Planaxis are common at the top of the oyster zone. A species of Nerita with
very strong ribs is found throughout the upper part of the zone, both in
the open and in the crannies amongst the oysters. Morula marginalba, the
oyster borer, occurs in the open and in the crannies amongst the oysters.
Montfortula, the semi-slit limpet, hides under the masses of oysters in company
with the common cowrie, Erronea errones and Cronia pseudamygdala. The
largest loricates inhabit an area of exposed rock at the top of the region.

One of the interesting molluscan finds made in this area was Synaptocochlea
ornata (Brazier) in crevices amongst the oysters and Mr. Tom Iredale kindly
informs me that this is the first record of its habitat, proving its relationship
with Fossarina and distinction from Stomatella.

Of the clinging mollusca, apart from the oysters themselves, young
pearl oysters are not uncommon and a white malformed shell, Jsognomon,
in the crannies a little above the middle of the zone. These are soon joined
by small Ark shells and a very hirsute small mussel, Trichomya_ hirsuta;
towards the lower end of the zone these mussels become much larger, about
one inch long.

The boring mollusca include two very distinct date mussels, one large
and black the other small and white. These are found in the solid mass
of lime deposited on the rock by the oysters. The date mussels are assisted
in their destructive work by numerous Gephyrean worms. Polychaete worms are
fairly numerous though they do not achieve any considerable size.

130 MARINE ECOLOGY OF LINDEMAN ISLAND

The Crabs associated with the oysters.

Metopograpsus frontalis moves freely about over the whole region and
is very fleet. Towards the lower extremity of the zone Actaea scabra (Fabr.)
occurs quite commonly in the labyrinthine passages under the oysters. It is 2
slow moving crab, creamy white in colour when young, dark reddish brown when
adult; intermediate specimens show that the dark coloration appears as spots
which become larger as growth proceeds until the final colour is achieved.
Oue specimen was secured in the act of feeding upon the girdle of a large
oricate.

Eurupellia granulosa A. M. Edw. This is perhaps the most important
discovery in this region. Like Actaea scabra this species was previously known
from few specimens and, in my experience on the Australian coast and
elsewhere in the Pacific, both species had not been observed in our area.
However, a native in Papua obtained a specimen of Eurupellia granulosa and a
visitor at Lindeman Island sent me an Actaea scabra from a nearby island. Both
species occur commonly in the oyster region where JI obtained thirty-six
specimens of Eurupellia granulosa and thirty-one of Actaea scabra in one day.
The localization of species to a circumscribed area explains their scarcity in
collections. Two other species occur in this region but owing to their being
new to science I omit them from these notes.

3 (c). ROCKY SHORES ON THE WESTERN SIDE OF THE ISLAND.

Oysters do not develop to the extent that they do on the northern rocks.
The outstanding region on the western shore is a narrow belt of large rocks
uncovered at extremely low tides. The substratum is coarse sand and the
crabs inhabiting this area are few in number and all are typical mainland
species. Charybdis spinifera Miers, Leptodius crassimanus A. M. Edw., Etisodes
australis Ward and the gonopiacid Cryptoleutea lindemanensis Ward. The
latter is found in burrows it excavates under stones lying on muddy gravel.
‘Near high tide level small colonies of Uca tetragona (Herbst) occur. The crabs
ig burrows amongst the stones. This is a most unusual habitat for a Uca
‘as most species are denizens of mangroves and mud flats.

4 (a). SAND FLATS ON THE SOUTHERN SIDE OF THE ISLAND.

This region is a narrow patch of sand which extends parallel to the
shore between the intertidal rocky region and the dead coral reef. Occasional
blocks of dead coral with large anemones, Stoicactis sp. and various alcyonarian
corals attached occur throughout the area.

During the two years that I resided on the island I had ample opportunity
to study the life of this region at night as well as in the daylight. I found that,
unlike in the dead coral region, daylight made little difference to the species
which habitually lived below the surface of the sand. They came to the
surface in search of water rather than remained hidden from the possible
attacks of sea birds. As the sand became bare and dry the small carnivorous
snails, Natica and Nassa (Nassarius sp.) came out and commenced their
search for food. The Naticoids pursued their prey, small bivales, which they
disturbed as they moved swiftly over the surface of the sand. The little
bivalve would pop out of the sand and fling itself along with the aid of its
Jong narrow foot and the naticoid followed it smoothly, relentlessly. The
anterior part of the Naticoid’s body is capable of being suddenly cast forward
with an action reminiscent of the Torres Strait islander casting his net and
whenever it touched the foot of the prey it would raise the flap and cast it
in an endeavour to cover the desired shell. As soon as it successfully engulfed
the shell the Naticoid drew its whole foot up into a lump beneath its own
shell entirely covering that of its victim. After pausing for several seconds
the Naticoid would start off again in its travels over the sand and as it
passed over its victim it attached the apparently paralysed bivalve to the dorsal
surface of its tail and thus carried it along. I often observed this capture and

WARD 131

usually found that the Naticoid travelled only a short distance from the
spot where the capture took place when it would commence to bury both
itself and its prey beneath the sand. The Nassas have a different method of
obtaining their food which consists of disabled marine animals or carrion.
Usually the Nassa has to dispute the feast with a small white hermit crab,
Diogenes sp. and several times 1 found disabled bailer shells covered with
feeding Nassas and hermit crabs. The actual feeding process can be best
observed when the Nassa directs its long siphon back over its shell, presses
its mouth parts against the body of its prey and gradually everts a thick
siphon-like tube (the proboscis) the aperture of which opens and closes with
a rhythmic action as it absorbs the soft, jelly-like substance of the bailer.
As the feeding progresses the tube elongates and is thrust in different directions
within the body of its prey.

The crabs of the zone have to be sought by digging, though at times
individuals are found on the dried surface, especially during the mid-winter
springs which occur at mid-day exposing the sand to the sun for a long time
causing not only crabs to rise to the surface but also heart and biscuit urchins,
mollusca and a slender fish. I used a small seive through which I passed the
surface layers of the sand, selecting areas where depressions had caught and
held an inch or two of water. I used to work over the same areas each
succeeding tide and invariably obtained specimens of the interesting crabs.
Most of these species belong to the Leucosiidae or Pebble Crabs and are
highly specialised for long periods of burial beneath the surface of the sand.
As there was such a rich fauna of these crabs I became interested in studying
the possibility of crossing the closely associated genera. All crabs breed by
internal fertilization of the ova. Copulation is performed with the aid of paired
organs called pleopods in the male, which are inserted into complemental
apertures in the under surface of the female. In both sexes these sexual organs
are covered by the closely adpressed abdomen or tail. It is to be observed
in the Leucosiidae that immature individuals of both sexes have the abdomen
rigidly adpressed against the body so that copulation is impossible until mature
size is achieved. I have found that where two genera occur together in the
same zone the mature individuals are so different in size that copulation, except
with the members of their own genus, is impossible. This fact combined with
extraordinary shapes assumed by the masculine pleopods, which in the
Leucosiidae reach their highest development, forms the best criteria for the
classification of the group.

Another family of crabs, Parthenopidae, is represented in this sand
area, these also bury themselves in the sand and have developed two distinct
methods of overcoming the difficulty of respiration while buried. Both species
have extremely long nippers which can be applied against the respiratory
apertures on the carapace. Aulacolambrus sp. inhabits areas of fine silt and its
nippers form two minute tubes lined with bristles which sieve out the fine
grains. Rhinolambrus sp. inhabits areas of coarse sand and consequently does
not apply its nippers as closely as Aulacolambrus.

Five species of heart and biscuit urchins inhabit this area; the commonest
are Lovenia elongata and Maretia ovata. Both are armed with two series of long
slender spines, the longer of which are banded with yellow and red on Lovenia
elongata and are very dangerous in both species. Just before the turn of the tide
‘these urchins make their appearance on the exposed sand and display considerable
speed as they endeavour to reach the water. Metalia spatagus and Breynia
australasiae are rare inhabitants of the area. The two biscuit urchins,
Leganum depressum and Peronella lesueuri occur at the edge of the spring
lows, both bury themselves just below the surface of the sand, not as deeply
as the heart urchins, nor are they harmful.

During the time I studied on the island I collected specimens of sand-
dwelling sea-stars, Astropecten granulatus, A. polyacanthus and A. vappa

on the southern side of the island but found them more numerous on thé
northern side.

132 MARINE ECOLOGY OF LINDEMAN ISLAND

4 (b). SAND BEACHES ON THE NORTHERN SIDE OF THE ISLAND..

The beach at the Boat Port is the most densely populated of all the beaches
on the island. It is formed between two low headlands the bases of which are,
lined with oyster covered rocks. The high tide beach is steep and formed
of coarse sand. At the western end a small mangrove creek extends back
into the hills. The intertidal beach is formed of sandy mud, its surface generally
undulating and with occasional deep craters dug by stingarees. At a level with
the headlands the beach takes a sudden, almost imperceptible downward slope
to the Thalassia zone.

Ocypoda ceratophthalma occupies its usual station at the high tide mark.
The Sand Bubbler Crab Scopimera inflata is rare, only one or two specimens.
were observed at the base of the steep high tide beach. On the inshore
surface of the intertidal beach there are small groups of Soldier crabs, Mycteris
longicarpus. The most numerous crabs of the sand flat belong to the hermit
crab family, a lively little Diogenes, white in colour and scuttling over the
floors of shallow pools, frequently burying themselves entirely in the sand.
The love life of these little crustaceans appears tempestuous for the male seizes.
the nipper of a female and drags her along the sand. Several large hermit crabs,
Clibanarius, also patrol the pools. Where patches of Eel Grass, Zostera, occur the:
telescope-eyed crabs, Macrophthalmus, form colonies; each crab excavates a
sloping burrow and lies out in front of the entrance in a specially formed
trench. These little crabs feed upon the microscopic life left stranded by the
falling tide. The most interesting crabs of this region belonged to the species
Myra australis Haswell. Normally these crabs are collected in dredgings betwee
the islands and the specimens taken between tides were all in varied stages:
of ecdysis, or shedding the body armour, and apparently had come up from
their usual habitat for this purpose.

Coelenterates. The stinging anemone, Actinodendron plumosum, inhabits the
beach from about half way across the intertidal beach. Each anemone is in a
shallow crater which retains water during the low tide. I found that each
was attached to the sunken piece of dead coral, usually about eighteen inches
below the surface of the sand. Only once did I find any other organism in
the water with the anemone; my attention was drawn to a biscuit urchin,
Peronella lesueuri, lying against the anemone. When I seized it and commenced
to pull I found that it was being held in place by a masked crab, Dorippe sp.
This crab has the habit of carrying a foreign object over its back with its
specially modified walking legs and I subsequently found several specimens
on the beaches usually in shallow pools; each crab carried a piece of rotten:
wood.

In some areas of the beach Cerianthus, a worm-like anemone which
encases its body in a thick silky tube, occurred: the expanded tentacles are
long, cylindrical and tapering. During the low tide the anemone retires down
its tube which stands a few inches above the surface of the sand. I did not
observe any specimens of Phoronis associated with Cerianthus on the Lindeman
beaches.

From time to time I collected sea pens, Pennatulacea, at the edge of the
exposed flats. None, however, was used as hosts by the interesting Porcellanid
crab, Porcellanella, that I found so common on similar sea pens at Cape
York. The rarest sea pen on Lindeman Island is a large brown Cavernularia
which stands about six inches above the level of the sand, the exposed portion
looks like a brown sausage covered with pores from which the anemone-like
polyps expand.

Notes on reefs in Kennedy Sound not on Lindeman Island.

SEAFORTH ISLAND.

At the north eastern end of Seaforth Island a vigorous fringing coral reef
is developed. The intertidal flat is strewn with dead coral blocks on sand with
dense growth of large algae such as Sargassum. The outer edge of the reef
supports large series of Madreporaria as well as Alcyonaria and the steeply

WARD 133

sloping bank of talus outside the reef comes to within two fathoms of the
surface at low tide. It was on this reef that many specimens of corals were
collected. The interesting crab from this region is Manella brevimana Ward,
which occurs commonly on the under surface of dead corals at the outer edge
of the reef. During the winter months many specimens of the gastropod
Turbo petholatus are collected but the species disappears during the summer
months, cowries also abound. :

Interesting Echinoderms were collected during my stay in the region.
I found several specimens of the beautiful yellow sea star, Iconaster longimanus,
commonly taken in the dredge in deep water, creeping up from the sloping
talus bank onto the top of the reef. The large sea star, Pentaceraster australis,
was observed feeding upon a soft coral, Sarcophyton.

Three specimens of the curious soft sea urchin, Asthenosoma sp., were
collected in shallow pools. In life these urchins are very flattened, the aboral
surface rises to a low rounded dome, two series of spines occur which can
be moved at an extraordinary speed, the finer spines are very sharp and
inflict very painful wounds, so much so that after the first experience specimens.
were collected with the aid of sticks or the crowbar. The Port Jackson Slate-
pencil Urchin, two specimens of Phyllacanthus parvispinus, were collected
characteristically wedged into crannies amongst dead corals, the species appears:
to be rare in the Lindeman region.

SEA STAR REEF, Shaw Island.

This extensive fringing reef extends almost from Burning Point to Echo
Bay, it is very wide and two large sand banks are formed upon it. The
greater part of the intertidal surface is covered in sand and fine mud with
masses of dead and living corals becoming more and more numerous towards.
the outer edge.

The outstanding animal is the big and brightly coloured sea_ star,.
Protoreaster nodosus; individuals lie without attempt at concealment, often
in large numbers and during the midwinter spring lows they are exposed
to the air. Occasional specimens of Pentaceraster australis occur also. The small
plum-coloured Echinaster luzonicus lies exposed amongst the algae-covered
dead corals and a small Polynoid worm, coloured like the star, is found
creeping over the under surface of its arms.

The fauna of the sand-banks is intensively interesting and may be studied
towards the end of the period of exposure for it will then be found that the
inhabitants come to the surface in search of moisture. A minute olive shell
occurs and is detected by the slit it cuts through the surface of the sand.
Several large strombs and occasional spider shells, Pteroceras, occur. A small
Xanthid crab, Mertonia sp., comes to the surface and several pebble crabs,
Leucosiidae, make their appearance. The interesting crab of this reef is.
Charybdis natator which occurs in shallow water where it excavates a compart-
ment under a mass of living or dead coral. The crab is large and dark red
in colour and has a wide range of distribution, individuals are frequently
seen swimming at the surface of the sea south of Shaw Island as though
migrating from one locality to another. Another crab collected at Sea Star Reef
is a small sand-dwelling species Kraussia sp. which I had only collected
previously on the Australian coast at the Capricorn Group, Queensland.

The interesting solitary coral, Cycloseris cycloites, occurs upon the sand
between tides, I had not seen this species on any other reefs in the Lindeman
region. A single specimen of Acrozoanthus australiae was collected at the
northern end of the reef where it was found standing in the sand in shallow
water; dead fragments of this Zoantharian were previously collected in the
dredge in deep water. Saville Kent noted the occurrence of this strange
creature in Queensland waters and gave notes upon the association of the
polychete worm which lives in the tube upon which individual Acrozoanthus
take up their abode.

134 MARINE ECOLOGY OF LINDEMAN ISLAND

A COMPARISON OF THE CAPRICORN GROUP AND LINDEMAN ISLAND

In previous papers (Ward, 1928, Austr. Zool., 5 (3): 241-246, pls. 27-29
and 1932, ibid., 7 (3): 237-255) I described the ecological zones of a coral
cay in the Capricorn Group which lies at the southern end of the Barrier
Reefs. The outstanding difference between the two localities lies in the fact
that in the Capricorn Group the islands stand upon great pedestals of coral,
the edges of which fall away sheer to the sea floor forming precipitous walls so
that bottom-living organisms such as crabs, shells and echinoderms cannot
creep up into the intertidal regions. Thus we find two well defined faunas,
one dwelling upon the top of the reefs, the second on the sea floor
surrounding the reefs.

At Lindeman Island the shores slope gradually to the deep water and
even where madreporarian reefs are formed these tend to slope down gradually
rather than end abruptly. Another important factor is the amount of fresh
water which is caught by the high rocky island during the rainy season. The
inshore waters at Lindeman become brown with detritus carried down from
the hills. This does not occur at the Capricorn Group.

As I have shown in this paper the foreshores of Lindeman Island offer
greater variety of habitat for the development of specialised faunulae than the
islands and reefs of the Capricorn Group. It is interesting to observe that I
have collected two hundred and fifty species of crabs at Lindeman Island
and one hundred and thirty at the Capricorn Group and of these less than
forty were found in both localities. The forms confined to the intertidal zones
in both localities were the most unlike, while those inhabiting the deeper
waters outside the reefs were more similar. Even in the depths where
exploration was only possible with the dredge and otter trawl, considerable
difference was found in the types of zones in the two localities.

Around Lindeman the depths range down to 30 fathoms. The sea floor
varies from rock to mud and we found a different fauna in each zone.
In the narrow channels between Lindeman and Shaw Island the tides sweep
very strongly, making the use of the dredge very difficult, but during the
slack of the tide we managed quite a few hauls in depths up to thirty
fathoms. The alcyonarian corals grow thickly in this depth and they are
attended by many crabs, sea-stars, and holothurians. The mud zones down
to ten fathoms support a remarkable fauna which changes its character at
night; during the day the trawl brought up fish with few specimens of
holothuria and crabs, but at night the crabs became the predominant forms.

Unfortunately dredging was not indulged in to any great extent at the
Capricorn Group, but even the little that was done, showed that the sea
floor fauna was not as varied as that at Lindeman Island.

OVERWINTERING IN DANAUS PLEXIPPUS 135

A Note on Overwintering in Danaus Plexippus (Linnaeus)
(Lepidoptera, Nymphalidae) in Australia

By C. N. SMITHERS
The Australian Museum, College St., Sydney.

The occurrence of overwintering clusters of Danaus plexippus (L.) (the
Wanderer or Monarch butterfly) has recently been reported from New Zealand
(Ramsay, 1964).

Observations have been made in Australia on this species and a marking
and release programme has been in operation since the latter part of 1962.
So far, overwinter clustering sites (the first recorded in Australia) are known
in the Razorback area and near Theresa Park in New South Wales. The
Razorback site was discovered by Mr. D. Aitkin in 1962 and reported to the
author in 1963. At Theresa Park, in 1962, Mr. G. Seymour found large numbers
of wings on the ground under trees in a narrow gulley although clustering
butterflies were not present at the time. Subsequently, in April, 1963, a uni-
directional flight of D. plexippus was observed at Menangle Park and an
extension of the line of flight on a map passed through the site at which the
wings had been found. On investigation, clusters were found to be present there-
A third site is known to exist near Otford but the “entomologist” to whom
it is known has refused to disclose its exact location.

In addition to the above sites, clusters have been reported from Dungog,
Menangle Park, Casula, Muswellbrook and the upper Wollondilly River valley
(the last dating from the 1930’s) .Whether these are overwintering sites or
areas in which temporary clusters are formed is not known. Also, there are
several districts in and near the Sydney area in which D. plexippus occurs
throughout the winter but in which the clustering habit has not, as yet, been
observed.

In April, 1962, both the Razorback and Theresa Park sites appear to
have carried heavy populations although neither counts nor estimates of
numbers were made.

In 1963, the Theresa Park site contained an estimated 40,000 specimens
on 3rd May; by the 10th May the population had dropped to about 19,000.
By the end of June the clusters had completely disappeared. The Razorback
site had an estimated 15,000 specimens on 30th June (when the site was first
visited) but the numbers fell rapidly during July and by the 27th July the
butterflies had dispersed (obs. M. Upton). At both sites mortality was high
as evidenced by the numbers of wings to be found on the ground. These,
however, appear to have been less than in 1962 suggesting that the 1962 clusters
were made up of a greater number of individuals.

In 1964, clusters did not form at all at Theresa Park; at Razorback
clustering had started by 2nd April with about 100 specimens, numbers rose
to about 500 during April and all had left the site by the end of May.

In 1965, up to the time of writing (9th July, 1965) there has not been
any sign of clusters at either site. It seems, therefore, that numbers at the
overwintering clustering sites have fallen steadily over the last three winters.

The full data and results of the present studies will be published in due
course but it can be said now that some aspects of the pattern of behaviour
of this species do not correspond with that of the same species in North
America, as indicated by Urquhart (1960), at least in the areas of Australia
in which most of the investigations have been made. The pattern may, perhaps,
correspond more closely in other parts of Australia, e.g. Victoria or southern
New South Wales. Strong tendencies to migrate have not yet been detected;
only one confirmed report of obvious unidirectional flight is available; all known
clustering sites, whether overwintering or not, are adjacent to areas with good
summer growth of the host plant (Asclepias sp.); breeding can continue well

136

into winter in protected situations (e.g. Spencer, Bay View, Booker Bay area)
even though it may have ceased several weeks earlier in colder areas only a
few miles distant.

Further work will confirm or contradict these preliminary notes and it is
hoped that more intensive marking and release work over a wider area will
give more information on movement. The author will gladly provide labels
and marking instructions to anyone interested in marking and releasing this
and other migratory species.

REFERENCES

Ramsay, G. W. 1964—Overwintering swarms of the Monarch Butterfly (Danaus
plexippus (Llin New Zealand. N.Z. Entomologist 3 (3): 10-16,
1 fi

g.
Urquhart, F. A. 1960—The Monarch Butterfly. Toronto, xxiv, 361 pp.

Caecilius soehardjani, a new name for Caecilius ferrugineus
Soehardjan and Hamann. (Psocoptera: Caeciliidae)

By C. N. SMITHERS,
Australian Museum, Sydney.

During work on the preparation of a list of described species of Psocoptera
it has become evident that the name Caecilius ferrugineus has been used twice.
Badonnel (1945, p. 36, figs. 9-14) used this name for a species of psocid from
Morocco and the same name was used by Soehardjan and Hamann (1959,
p. 7, figs. 25, 26) when describing a species from Bogor. The latter species
requires renaming and for Caecilius ferrugineus Soehardjan and Hamann
(not Caecilius ferrugineus Badonnel) 1 propose the name Caecilius soehardjani
nom. nov.

References

Badonnel, A. 1945. Contribution a Jlétude des Psocoptéres du Maroc.
Voyage de L. Berland et M. Vachon. Rev. franc. Ent. 12:
31-50, 48 figs.

Soehardjan, M. and Hamann, H.H.F., 1959. Second contribution to the
Indonesian Psocidfauna; notes on some recent collectings.
Idea 12: 1-13, 35 figs.

137

A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA (INSECTA)

By C. N. SMITHERS

Australian Museum, Sydney.

The insect order PSOCOPTERA has, in general, been’ somewhat neglected.
Many factors have contributed to this neglect. It is usually referred to as a
small” or “minor” order; the insects themselves are small and frequently
at least some dissection is necessary before they can be adequately studied;
they have seldom been reported as being of economic significance and so have
not received the attention given to groups which include pest species; the order
has not been monographed in recent years and there are few modern works
dealing with the faunas of particular regions; finally, the literature on the order
is very scattered, relevant papers sometimes appearing in infrequently encountered
journals. It is thus not an easy task for a student to obtain the background
information necessary in order to make a contribution to knowledge of the
group.

This bibliography is an attempt to assist psocidologists to find the significant
papers without having to make extensive search. It is too much to hope that
the list of references which follows is complete or that it is free from errors;
no bibliography could be so. This work is not an attempt to attain perfection
where this is impossible; it is an attempt to provide a working tool which
will relieve students of the Psocoptera of the drudgery of compiling their own
bibliographies. It is, however, believed that no major paper has been omitted
and every attempt has been made to reduce errors to a minimum. The author
will be happy to hear of errors and omissions.

The need for a bibliography was stressed by Dr. K. Sommerman in 1960.
By this time a substantial card index to Psocid literature had been compiled
for my own use and it was decided to use this as a basis for a full bibliography.
In order to achieve this, lists of references were prepared and circulated to as
many psocidologists as could be found who were willing to peruse them.
Corrections and additions were sent by these co-operators for inclusion in the
master card index. In this way it was possible to obtain access to the literature
records of most active psocidologists. When the circulating lists were returned
as many of the references as possible were checked against originals, reprints,
photostats etc. in private and institutional libraries in Australia, America and
Great Britain. At the same time every effort was made to seek out additional
references which had been overlooked. The results of this work and co-operation
are presented below as a_ bibliography.

The entries in the bibliography are arranged alphabetically under authors’
surnames and in chronological order of years for each author. In most cases
the abbreviations given are those of the “World List.” In many cases where
the title of the paper does not give any indication of its contents a brief note
is given to indicate this.

Works coming to notice until September 30th, 1964 have been included.
It is hoped that it will be possible to keep this bibliography up to date and
to publish supplementary information from time to time. To this end authors
of papers in which reference is made to the Psocoptera are asked to send
a copy of their paper to the author and to ensure that their paper receives
enon in the Zoological Record by sending a copy to the editor of that
journal.

Two entries are of special value from the bibliographical point of view.
Sala, I. (1928) contains a list of papers published by L. Navas up to 1927;
Carpenter, F. M. and Darlington, P. J. (1954) contains a bibliography of
papers by N. Banks.

138 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

It has been pointed out that this bibliography is the result cf co-operation:
amongst present-day psocidologists. Mere acknowledgment wof this co-operation
hardly gives an indication of its extent nor does justice to the generous way
in which it was given. I would like to record my sincere thanks to “the following
for their assistance in providing additions and correcting errors. Dr. A. Badonnel,
Dr. E. Becker-Migdisova, Dr. E. Broadhead, Dr. F. M. Carpenter, Dr. P. .
Chapman, Dr. M. Clarke, Dr. L. Danks, Dr. A. Gurney, Mr. D. Kimmins,
Dr. O. Martynova, Dr. L. Mockford, Dr. E. Mumford, Mr. A. M. Nadler,
Dr. S. Obr, Mr. J. V. Pearman, Dr. K. M. Sommerman, Dr. S. Tada, Dr. I.
Thornton, Dr. C. Tsutsumi, Dr. V. Vishniakova, Dr. A. Wapshere and Dr. J.
Wlodarezyk. Dr. Gurney also kindly provided notes on the contents of some
of the papers. I would also like to thank the librarians of the Australian Museum,
the General, Zoology and Entomology libraries of the British Museum of Natural
History and the librarian of the Royal Entomological Society of London for
assistance in seeking out some of the more difficult-to-find references. Much of the
final checking was carried out in institutional libraries during a world trip, under-
taken primarily for other purposes, and I would like to thank the Science
and Industry Endowment Fund, Rockefeller Foundation, Society of the Sigma-Xi
and the British Council for financial assistance covering various parts of the
trip.

Without the assistance of all these individuals and institutions this
bibliography could not have been prepared.

Aaron, S. F.

1883. Description of new Psocidae in the collection of the American
Entomological Society. Trans. Amer. ent. Soc. 11: 37-40, pl. ix.

1884. Collecting on the Gulf Coast of Southern Texas. Papilio 4: 159-161.

1886. On some new Psocidae. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad. 38: 13-18,
pl. 1. American spp.

1933. (Untitled notes in popular style). Nature Mag. 22: 34, 1 fig. .

Acloque, A
1897. Faune de France. Orthoptéres, Neuroptéres, Hyménoptéres, Lepido-
ytéres, Hemiptéres, Dipteres, Aphanipféres, | Thysanoptéres,
Rhipiptéres. Paris. i-viii, 516 pp., 219 figs. (Psocidae: pp. 17-19,
rite 7)

Albarda, H
1889a. Catalogue raisonné et synonymique des Nevroptéres, observés dans
les Pays-Bas et les Pays limitrophes. Tijdschr. Ent. 32: 211-376.
(Psocoptera: pp. 227-241). Lists 39 spp. with synonyms and
remarks.
1889b. Notes on Psocus obscurus Rambur. Ent. mon. Mag. 25: 210. Com-
pares Peripsocus phaeopterus Steph. with P. obscurus Ramb.

Alkan, B

1961. Troctes entomophilus End. a species of insect new to Turkey
found in grain silos at Trebizond. Koreima 2 (8): 4-5.

Allen, B.
1698. An account of a Gall-Bee and the Scarabacus galeatus pulsator
or the Death Watch. Phil. Trans. 20 (245): 375-378.

Allen, R. W.

1959. Preliminary note on the larval develop: ment of the Fringed Tapeworm
of sheep, Zhysanosoma actinioides Diesing 1834, in Psocids
(Psocoptera, Corrodentia). J. Parasit. 45: 537-538, 1 fig. Liposcelis
bostrychophilus and Rhyopsocus sp. as_ hosts.

1960. Method of culturing psocids for use in parasitological investigations.
J. Parasit. 46: 20. Species cultured not mentioned.

SMITHERS 139

Altherr, E.

1939. Le fauna des mines de Box, avec étude speciale des Nématodes.
Rev. suisse zool. 45 (21): 567-720.

Anonymous
1886. Catalogue of the Trichoptera, Neuroptera, Ephemeridae and Psocidae-
described as new in 1884. Ent. Nachr. 12: 188-191.
1937. Book-lice or Psocids (Psocidae). Insect Pest Leafl. N.S.W. 53, 2
pp., 1 fig. Control measures.
1940. Psocids, Book Lice, Dust Lice etc. Brit. Mus. Nat. Hist. Econ.
Leaflet 4: 1-3, 1 fig.

Argarwai, R. A.
1956. Some mycophagous insects and their parasites associated with
sugarcane. Curr. Sci. 25 (10): 332. Troctes bostrychophilus.

Arkhangel ‘Skii, N. N.
1926. Some observations on various methods of controlling pests of stored
products in Russia. Bull. N. Caucas. Pt. Prot. Sta. 1:100-119.
Mentions L. divinatorius —cf. Blair, C.R., 1940.

Arndt, W.
1928. Liposcelis corrodens (Heym.) als Schadling an Griesmehlvorraten.
Mitt. Ges. Vorratsschutz 4: 11-12.
1931. Die Copeognathen der arktischen Gebietes. Fauna arct., Jena 6: 59-60.

Ashmead, W. H.
1879. On a new Psocus. Canad. Ent. 11: 228-229.
1894. Notes on cotton insects found in Mississippi. Insect Life 7: 25-29,
240-247. (Psocidae: pp. 28-29). Caecilius mobilis mentioned,
Psocus gossypii described.

Ausserer, C.
1869a. Neuroptera tirolensia. Z. Ferdinand. (3) 14: 219-288, pls. I, IL
(Psocidae: esp. pp. 229, 232, 284, 288).
1869b. Neurotteri Tirolesi, cella diagnosi di tutti genera’ europei. 1.
Pseudoneurotteri. Annu. Soc. nat. Modena 4: 71-156, tab. 8-9.
(Psocids: pp. 96-97, 102, 146-149, 155).

Back, E. A.

1920. Book-lice or Psocids, annoying household pests. Fmrs’. Bull. U.S-
Dep. Agric. 1104, 4 pp. Mention of infestations, control.

1939a. Psocids in dwellings. J. econ. Ent. 32: 419-423. Records of occur-
rences in houses, control measures.

1939b. Psocids, annoying house pests. Leafl. U.S. Dep. Agric. 189, 4 pp.
General remarks on infestation, control measures.

1939c. House insulation and insect infestations. Proc. ent. Soc. Wash-
41: 129-136.

1940. Book worms. Smithsonian Report 1939: 365-374, pls. 1-18. Psocid
mentioned p. 371.

Back, E. A. and Cotton, R. T.
1922. Stored grain insects. Fmrs’ Bull. U.S. Dep. Agric. 1260, 4 pp.

Badonnel, A.
1931a. Contribution a létude de la faune du Mozambique. Voyage de
M.P. Lesne (1928-1929). 4e note. Copéognathes. Ann. Sci. nat.
Zool. ser. 10, 14: 229-260, 37 figs. (This should be numbered
“Se note’ (see footnote in Badonnel 1932a.) ).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

} Copéognathes de France (IIle note). Liste de quelques espéces

trouvées dans les Pyrénées-Orientales, et description d’un nouveau
genre des environs de Banyuls-sur-Mer: Nymphotroctes Denisi
sp.n. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 56: 341-347, 5 figs.

Premiére note sur les Copéognathes de France. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr.
56: 98-112, 13 figs.

. Copéognathes de France (Ile note). Sur les piéces buccales de

Scoliopsyllopsis latreillei Enderlein. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 56:
250-257. 5 figs. Family Scoliopsyllopsidae raised.

. Contribution a l'étude de la faune du Mozambique — Voyage de

M.P. Lesne (1928-1929). 7e note. Supplement aux Copéognathes.
Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 57: 105-117, 14 figs.

Sur les genitalia des Psoques (note préliminaire). Bull. Soc. zool.
Fr. 57: 476-481.

Copéognathes de France (IVe note). I. Sur un nouveau genre de
famille des Caeciliidae. IJ. Sur Vexistence des gonapophyses
chez les femelles du genre Liposcelis Motsch. 1852 (= Troctes
Burm. 1839). Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 37: 77-79, 5 figs.

Description de la ponte de Psocus bipunctatus L. Bull. Soc. zool.
Fr. 58: 69-71.

Sur Vanatomie de Stenopsocus stigmaticus Imh. et Labr. (Note
préliminaire). Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 38: 39-44.

Recherches sur l’anatomie des Psoques. Bull. biol., Paris, Suppl.
18, 241 pp., 80 figs. General account of internal and external
anatomy.

Psocoptéres de France. Se note. Liste d’espéces nouvelles ou peu
connues avec indication du quelques synonymies. Bull. Soc. ent.
Fr. 40: 199-203

Psocoptéres de France. Vie note. Description | d’un espéce nouvelle
du genre Neopsocus Kolbe, suivie 4 une révision des espéces de
ce genre. Rev. franc. Ent. 2: 47-51, 8 figs.

. Observations sur la biologie de Lachesilla pedicularia L. var. brevipennis

Enderlein (L. limbatus Enderlein 1924). Bull. Soc. zool. Fr.
60: 105-115, 5 figs.

Psocoptéres nouveaux d’Afrique et d’Arabie. Rev. franc. Ent. 2:
76-82, 15 figs.

Mission scientifique de l’Omo — Psocoptéres. Mém. Mus. Hist.
nat. Paris 4: 155. One sp. mentioned.

Contribution a l’étude des Psocoptéres a Madagascar. Bull Acad.
Malgache N.S. 18: 97-120, 4 pls. Includes list of spp. known
from Madagascar.

Notes sur les Psocoptéres de la Cote d’Or. Bull. Sci. Bourgogne
5: 75-78. Lists species from the area.

Sur les gonapophyses des femelles du genre Ectopsocus (Psocopt.).
Livre jubil. Bouvier. Paris. (Psocoptera: pp. 101-104, 3 figs.).

Psocoptéres de France (VIIIe note). Neopsocopsis, nouveau genre
de Psocidae 4 adulte ornés de poils glanduleux. Bull. Soc. zool.
Fr. 60: 418-423, 8 figs.

Psocoptéres de France (7e note). Espéces nouvelles ou peu connues
et description de deux espéces inédites. Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 41:
24-29, 6 figs.

Nouvelle espéce de Psocoptére d’Algérie. Rev. fran¢. Ent. 3: 96-100,

figs.

Les Caeciliides européens a ailes ocracées. Rev. frang. Ent. 3: 177-
189, 20 figs.

Sur l’hypopharynx des Psoques. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 61: 14-18.

Psocoptéres de France (9e note). Diagnoses préliminaires_ et
nouvelles captures. Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 43: 17-22.

Sur la biologie de Psyllipsocus ramburi Selys-Longchamps (Psocoptera).
Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 43: 153-158.

1938c.
1938d.
1943a.
1943b.
1943c.

1944.

194Sa.
1945b.
1946a.
1946b.

1947.

1948a.
1948b.
1948c.
1949a.
1949b.

1949c.

1951.
1952.

1955.
1956.

1959a.
1959b.

1959c.

1962a.

SMITHERS 141

Sur la biologie de Neopsocus rhenanus Kolbe (Psocoptéres). Bull.
Soc. zool. Fr. 63: 106-110.

Sur Je Psocus hirticornis Reuter 1893. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 63:
237-239.

Psocoptéres du Cameroun (Mission P. Lepesme, R. Paulian et
A. Villiers 1939). Rev. Zool. Bot. afr. 37: 134-156, 51 figs.
Psocoptéres cavernicoles du Macédonie et Herzégovine. (Voyage de
P. Remy, R. Hussen et A. Schweitzer). Bull Soc. ent. Fr. 48: 8-9.
Psocoptéres. Faune Fr. 42: 1-164, 375 figs. External anatomy,
biology, study methods, keys, descriptions, illustrations to spp. in

France.

Contribution a l'étude des Psocoptéres de lAtlantide.

I. Un genre nouveau atlantidien.
II. Psocoptéres de Canaries.

III. Psocoptéres de Madére.

IV. Psocoptéres de Acores.

Rev. france. Ent. 11: 47-60, 22 figs.

Dimorphisme alaire des femelles de Neopsocus rhenanus Kolbe.
Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 70: 131-135.

Contribution a l’étude des Psocoptéres du Maroc. Voyage de L.
Berland et M. Vachon. Rev. frang. Ent. 12: 31-50, 48 figs.

Les psoques des Iles atlantides. Mém. Soc. Biogeogr. 81: 239-243.
Similar in content to Badonnel 1944.

Psocoperes du Congo Belge. Rev. Zool. Bot. afr. 39 (2): 137-196,
126 figs.

Croisiére du Bougainville aux iles australes frangaises XIV.
Psocopteres. Mém. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris, N.S. 20: 25-30, 15 figs.

Psocoptéres de la Guinée francaise (Mission Lamotte 1942). Rev.
frang. Ent. 15: 80-88, 14 figs.

Psocoptéres du Congo Belge (2e note). Rev. Zool. Bot. afr. 40
(4): 266-322, 126 figs.

Leffet de groupe chez Psyllipsocus ramburi Selys Longchamps
(Psocoptéres) — note préliminaire. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 73: 80-83.

Psocopteres de la Cote d'Ivoire. Mission Paulian-Delamere (1945).
Rev. frang. Ent. 16: 20-40, 61 figs.

Sur le déterminisme de l’effet de groupe chez Psyllipsocus ramburi
Selys Longchamps (Psocoptera). C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris 228: 1517-
1519.

Psocoptéres du Congo Belge (3e note). Bull. Inst. Sci. nat. Belg.
25 (11): 1-64, 83 figs.

In Grassé, P. “Traité de Zoologie.” Paris. 17 vols. (Psocoptera: Vol.
10, fasc. 2, pp. 1301-1340, figs. 1135-1170).

Psocoptéres, in Delamere-Deboutteville, C. et Paulian, R. Faune
des Nids et des Terriers en Basse Cote d'Ivoire. Encycl. Biogeogr.
et Ecol. 8: 3-116, illustr. (Psocoptera: pp. 78-80).

Psocoptéres de l’Angola. Publ. cult. Cia. Diamant Angola 26: 1-267,
625 figs.

In Tuxen, S.L. Taxonomist’s Glossary of genitalia in Insects. Copen-
hagen. 284 pp. 215 figs. (Psocoptera: Chapter 25, pp. 143-148,
figs. 173-178). General account of genitalia.

Développement des ailes de Psyllipsocus ramburi Sel. — Long.: essai
dinterpretation. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 84 (1): 91-98, 2 figs.

Un psoque cavernicole du Moyen-Congo. Rev. suisse Zool. 66 (33):
761-764, 8 figs.

Psocopteres. Explor. Parc. nat. Albert, Mission G.F. de Witte
(1933-1935). Fasc. 95: 3-26, 39 figs. New genus and spp., new
records, from Albert National Park.

Psocoptéres. Biologie de l’Amérique australe. Paris. (Psocoptéres
Vol. 1, pp. 185-229, 104 figs).

142 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1962b. Contribution 4 l'étude de la faune d’Afghanistan. 36. Psocoptéres.
K. fysiogr. Sdllsk. Lund Férh. 32: 1-6, 6 figs. 3 spp. including a
new Prionoglaris.

1963a. Psocoptéres terricoles, lapidicoles et corticoles du Chili. Biologie
de l’Amérique australe. Paris. (Psocoptera: Vol. 2, pp. 291-338,
88 figs.).

1963b. Sur les Psocoptéres des Acgores et de Madére. Report No. 31 from
the Lund University Expedition in 1957 to the Azores and Madeira.
Bol. Mus. Funchal 17 (63): 66-78, 19 figs.

1963c. Sur le genre Lesneia Badonnel (Psocoptera) avec description d’une
nouvelle espéce. Arch. Zool. exp. gén. 102: 41-48, 15 figs.

Badonnel, A. and Hamard, G.
1959. Une espéce de Psocoptére nouvelle pour la France. Cahiers nat.
(rs) ISE2Te

Baeta Neves, C. M.
1952. Os Psocoptera da entomofauna florestal portuguesas. Boll Soc.
portug. Cienc. nat. (2) 4: 9-11.

Bagnall, R. S.
1915. Pterodela livida Enderlein, a psocid new to the British fauna.
Ent. Rec. 27: 228.
1926. Further records of Hyperetes brittanicus Harrison. Ent. mon. Mag.
62: 22. British records.

Bakker, H. A.
1943. Mierenleeuwen en een nieuwe Psocide. Tijdschr. Ent. 86: LXV-LXVI.
(Psocid: p. LXVI). Bertkauia lucifuga mentioned.

Ball, A.

1920. (Report in minutes of meeting of 6th November, 1920). Ann. Soc.
ent. Belg. 60: 178. 2 spp. recorded as new for Belgium.

1926a. Quelques notes concernant les Psoques belges. Bull. (Ann.) Soc.
ent. Belg. 66: 256-264.

1926b. Les Psocidae de Belgique. Bull. (Ann.) Soc. ent. Belg. 66: 331-349,
3 pls.

1931. Note descriptive concernant un Ectopsocus des Etats-Unis (Psocoptera-
Peripsocidae). Mém. Soc. ent. Belg. 23: 188-196, pl. vi, figs. 1-6.

1936. Un psoque qui perd une partie de ses piéces buccales en devenant
adulte. Mém. Mus. Hist. nat. Belg. 2 ser., 3: 395-399, 9 figs.

1937. Contribution a l’étude des Psocoptéres. I. Description de trois espéces
nouvelles de Mesopsocus du Maroc. Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. Belg.
13 (42): 1-11, figs. a-d, 5 pls.

1940. Contribution a l’étude des Psocoptéres. II. Description d’une espéce
nouvelle de Liposcelis de Vile de Chypre et du Liban. Bull. Mus.
Hist. nat. Belg. 16 (20): 1-3, 2 figs., 1 pl.

1943. Contribution a l’étude des Psocoptéres. Il. Ectopsocus du Congo:
belge, avec une remarque sur le rapport IO/D. Bull. Mus. Hist.
nat. Belg. 19 (38): 1-28, 22 figs.

Banks, N.
1892. North American Neuroptera. Trans. Amer. ent. Soc. 19: 327-373
(Psocids: pp. 327-331, 343-345, 372).

1893. Two uncommon insects. Ent. News 4: 268. Records Amphientomunr
hageni Pack. from Long Is., New York.

1897. In Call, R. E. Some notes on the flora and fauna of Mammoth
Cave, Ky. Amer. Nat. 31: 377-392. (Psocidae: p. 382, pl. x,.
fig. 4). Dorypteryx (?) hageni.

1899. The Psocidae of an old snake-fence. Ent. News 10: 260-261.

1900a.

1900b.
1900c.

1900d.

1901.

1903a.
1903b.

1903c.

1904a.

1904b.
1905a.
1905b.
1907a.
1907b.

1907c.

1908.

1913a.

1913b.

1913c.

1914.

1915.

1916.

1918.

SMITHERS 143

A new genus of Atropidae (Psocinella n.g.) Ent. News 11 (4):
431-432, figs. (unnumbered) on page 431. Psocinella slossonae
from Florida.

Two new species of Troctes. Ent. News 11: 559-560.

Psocids at light. Ent. News 11: 601. Psocus virginianus, purus,
sparsus, pedicularia mentioned. No localities given, merely noted
as taken at light. :

New genera and species of Nearctic Neuropteroid Insects. Trans.
Amer. ent. Soc. 26: 239-259.

A list of Neuropteroid insects from Mexico. Trans. Amer. ent. Soe.
D3 362:

Some new Neuropteroid Insects. J.N.Y. ent. Soc. 11: 236-243.

(Untitled note under heading “Notes and News”). Ent. News 14:
241. Troctes needhami End. = T. niger Banks; T. bicolor End.
= T. bicolor Banks. All from Virginia.

Neuropteroid insects from Arizona. Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 5: 237-245,
pl. 1V. (Psocidae: p. 237, pl. iv, fig. 1). 2 spp. mentioned,
Psocus conspersus described.

A list of Neuropteroid insects, exclusive of Odonata, from the
vicinity of Washington. Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 6: 201-217, pl. U.
(Psocidae: pp. 202-204, pl. ii, figs. 3, 10, 18). 31 spp. listed,
2 described as new.

Neuropteroid insects from New Mexico. Trans. Amer. ent. Soe.
30: 97-110, pl. i.

List of Neuropteroids. Invert. Pacifica 1: 85-91. (Psocids: pp.

ESR

Descriptions of new Nearctic Neuropteroid insects. Trans. Amer.

ent. Soc. 32: 1-20, pls. i, ii. (Psocids: pp. 1-3).

New Trichoptera and Psocidae. J.N.Y. ent. Soc. 15: 162-166, figs.

A list of Neuropteroid insects from North Carolina. Proc. ent. Soe.
Wash. 9 (1-4): 149-156. (Psocids: pp. 149-150). 9 spp. listed.

Catalogue of the neuropteroid insects (except Odonata) of the
United States. Amer. Ent. Soc., Philadelphia (separate publication).
53 pp. (Psocids: pp. 6-10).

Neuropteroid Insects — notes and descriptions. Trans. Amer. ent.
Soc. 34: 255-267, pls. XVIJI-XIX. (Psocidae: pp. 257-258).

Synopses and descriptions of exotic Neuroptera. Trans. Amer. ent.
Soc. 39: 201-242, pls. xxiii-xxvi. (Psocid: p. 205).

The Stanford Expedition to Brazil, 1911. Neuropteroid Insects
from Brazil. Psyche, Camb. Mass. 20: 83-89, pl. 4. (Psocidae:
pp. 83-84, pl. 4, figs. 2, 14.)

On a collection of neuropteroid insects from the Philippine Islands.
Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 15: 170-180, pls. viii-ix. (Psocids: p. 171,
no figs.). 4 spp. mentioned, 2 spp. described as new.

Zoological Results of the Abor Expedition, 1911-1912. XXVI.
Neuropteroid Insects. Rec. Indian Mus. 8: 351-356, pl. XXV.
(Psocidae: pp. 351-353, pl. XXV, figs. 1, 3, 5, 7).

New neuropteroid insects, native and exotic. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci.
Philad. 66 (3): 608-632, pl. 28. (Psocidae: pp. 611-612, pl. 28, figs.
15, 16). North American spp. only.

Neuropteroid insects of the Philippine Is. Philipp. J. Sci. (D)
11: 195-217, 2 pls. (Psocids: pp. 197-203, pl. 1, figs. 1-10; pl. 2,
figs. 11-15).

New Neuropteroid Insects. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 62 (1):
1-22. 2 pls. (Psocids: pp. 3-5, pl. 1, fig. 1; pl. 2, figs. 19, 23, 24).
North American and Australian spp.

144 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1920. New Neuropteroid Insects. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 64 (3):
299-362, 7 pls. (Psocids: pp. 299-314, pl. 1, figs. 1, 2, 4, 6-8,
LOE Spl 2,5) fies) 145 05,1 17-19;) 24-ipliesy fies 25, 28.meos
Sooo) 4 epee denations 79)» Species from Singapore, Borneo,
Philippines, Peru, Colombia, Brazil, North America.

1924. Descriptions of New Neuropteroid Insects. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool.
Hary. 65 (12): 421-455, 4 pls. (Psocidae: pp. 422, 423, pl. 1,
figs. 8, 9). Species from Jamaica, Peru, Porto Rico.

1929. A Classification of the Psocidae. Psyche, Camb. Mass. 36: 321-325.
Proposed classification, keys to families, subfamilies and tribes.

1930a. Some new neotropical Neuropteroid insects. Psyche, Camb. Mass.
37 (2): 183-191, pl. 9. (Psocids: pp. 183-185, pl. 9, figs. 1, 3-5)-
Species from Panama, Cuba, Florida, Honduras.

1930b. New Neuropteroid Insects from the United States. Psyche, Camb-
Mass. 37: 223-233, pl. 12.

193la. On some Psocidae from the Hawaiian Is. Proc. Hawaii. ent. Soc.
7 (3): 437-441, pls. VII-IX.

1931b. Some oriental Neuropteroid Insects. Psyche, Camb. Mass. 38 (1):
56-70, pl. 5S. (Psocidae: pp. 56-58, pl. 5, fig. 3). Ectopsocus
aethiops var. bakeri from Philippines.

1934. Supplementary Neuropteroid insects from the Malay peninsula and
from Mt. Kinabalu, Borneo. J.F.M.S. Mus. 17: 567-578, 23 figs.
Paper deals mainly with Neuroptera and Trichoptera, some psocid
spp. recorded.

1937a. Philippine Neuropteroid Insects. Philipp. J. Sci. 63 (2): 125-174,
6 pls. (Psocids: pp. 125-134, pl. 1, figs. 2-10; pl. 2, figs. 17-19)-

1937b. Neuropteroid Insects from Formosa. Philipp. J. Sci. 62 (3): 255-291,
3 pls. (Psocids: pp. 255-268, pl. 2, figs. 12, 14-16, 18; pl. 3, figs.
2223 25-285113 0)

1938a. New native Neuropteroid Insects. Psyche, Camb. Mass. 45: 72-79,
pl. XI. (Psocids: p. 72).

1938b. Further Neuropteroid insects from Malaya. J.F.M.S. Mus. 18: 220-235,
17 figs. (Psocids: pp. 220-221).

1938c. New West Indian Neuropteroid Insects. Rev. Ent. Rio de J. 9:
285-304, 29 figs. (Psocids: pp. 285-289, figs. 1-3, 19).

1939a. Neuropteroid Insects from the Philippines. Philipp. J. Sci. 69 (2):
133-145, 1 pl. (Psocidae: pp. 133-136, pl. 1. figs. 1, 2, 9)

1939b. New genera and species of Neuropteroid Insects. Bull. Mus. comp.
Zool. Harv. 85 (7): 439-504, 9 pls. (Psocidae: pp. 439-441,
pl. 1, figs. 1, 12; pl. 2, fig. 21). Australian spp.

1941. New Neuropteroid insects from the Antilles. Mem. Soc. cubana
Hist. nat. 15 (4): 385-402, pls. 43-45. (Psocidae: pp. 385-394,
pl. 43, figs. 1, 2, 5, 6, 8-10; pl. 44, figs. 11, 15-17, 20, 21, 22, 24).

1942. Insects of Guam. I. Neuropteroid Insects of Guam. Bull. Bishop Mus.
Honolulu 172: 25-30, 1 fig. (Psocidae: pp. 25-29, figs. la, Ic-le,
Ig, lh).

1947. Some Neuropterous Insects from Szechwan, China. Fieldiana, Zool.
31: 97-107, 13 figs. (Psocidae: p. 100). Psocus gibbosus recorded.

Bastmann, H.
1913. Bidrag till kannedomen om Nylands copeognather. Medd. Soc.
Fauna Fl. fenn. 39: 73.
1914. (Minutes of meeting). Medd. Soc. Fauna Fl. fenn. 40: 243.
Caecilius atricornis recorded.

Beaumont, J. de
1952. Psocoptéres de Suisse romande. Bull. Soc. vaud. Sci. nat. 65 (281):
293-300.

Becker-Migdisova, E. E.
1953a. First discovery of the Psocoptera of the Kuznetsk Basin. Dokl. obsch.
Sobr. Ak. Nauk. S.S.S.R. 90 (2): 279-282, 1 fig. (In Russian).

SMITHERS 145

1953b. Obzar faun ravnokrylykh i senoidou erunakovska i kuznetskai svit
kuzbassa. (Review of the Homoptera and Copegnatha of the
Erunakoy and Kuznetsk formations of the Kuznetsk Basin). Dokl.
obsch. Sobr. Ak. Nauk. S.S.S.R. 90 (1): 97-100.

1960. Palaeozoic Isoptera of the U.S.S.R. and phylogeny problems of the
order. Paleont. J. 3: 28-42, 10 figs.

1961. In: Rodenorf, B.B., Martynova, O.M. and Becker-Migdisova, E. E.
Palaeozoic Insects of Kuznetsk Basin. Moscow. 674 pp., 40 pls.,
541 figs. (Psocoptera: pp. 271-286, figs. 203-214).

1962. Some New Heteroptera and Homoptera. Paleont. J. 1: ®&yY-104,
17 figs. (Psocoptera: pp. 101-103, figs. 16, 17).

Becker-Migdisova, E. E. and Vishnyakova, V. N.

1962. “Principles of Palaeontology.” Moscow. (Psocoptera: pp. 226-235,
figs. 678-707).

Belche, G
1866. Notice sur Vhistoire naturelle du district de Radomysl. Bull. Soc.
Nat. Moscou 39 (1): 491-526. (Psocids: p. 511)

Belton, C. H.
1950. Note on some insect pests in stored products. N.Z.J. Sci. Tech.
(A) 32 (1): 44.
Berendt, G.
1856. See Hagen, H. A., 1856.

Bergemann, H.
1929. Houtluizen (Psocidae). Meded. Proefst. Malang. 71: 15.

Berland, L.

1935. Premiers resultats de mes recherches en avion sur la faune et la
flore atmosphériques. Ann. Soc. ent. Fr. 104: 73-96.

Bernard, F.

1934. Observations sur les proies de quelques Hyménoptéres. Bull. Soc.
ent. Fr. 39: 247-250. (Psocids: p. 250).

Bertkau, P.

1883a. Ueber den Geschlechtsdimorphismus und die Speicheldrtisen der
Psociden und ein Verzeichniss der bisher bei Bonn Beobachten
Arten. Ver. naturh. ver. preuss. Rheinl. 39: 127-133.

1883b. Ober einen auffallenden Geschlechtsdimorphismus bei Psociden nebst
Beschreibung einiger neuer Gattungen und Arten. Arch. Naturgesch.
49: 97-101, pl. 1.

1886. Uber die geographische Verbreitung einiger Psociden. §.B. niederrhein.
Ges. Nat. -u Heilk. 43: 68.

1890. Uber einen Psociden der die Aachen als Hausplage aufgetreten war.
Verh. natur. Ver. preuss. Rheinl. 47: 63-66.

Betts, M. M.

1956. A list of insects taken by titmice in the forest of Dean (Gloucester-
shire). Ent. mon. Mag. 92: 68-71. (Psocoptera: p. 68). 5 spp. of
Psocoptera mentioned.

Beuthin, H.

1875. Verzeichnis der Pseudoneuropteren und Neuropteren der Ungegend
von Hamburg. Verh. Ver. naturw. Unterh. (Heimatforsch.) Hamb.
1: 122-126. (Psocids: p. 124). 5 spp. listed.

146 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Bey-Bienko, G. Y.

1961. On some regularities in changes of the virgin steppe invertebrate
fauna under cultivation. Ent. Obozr. 40 (4): 763-775. (Psocid:
p. 768). Caecilius gynapterus.

1964. See Vishnyakova, V. N. 1964.

Bhasin, G. D.
1953. See Roonwal, M. L. et al. 1953.

Bianchi, W. L.
1904. See Jacobson, G. G. and Bianchi, W. L. 1904.

Bignell, G. C.

1903. Psocus quadrimaculatus Latr. near Saltash. Ent. mon. Mag. 39: 42.
Record for Cornwall, England.

Biilberg, G. J.

1820. Enumeratio insectorum in Museo Billberg. Holmiae. (Psocid: Part 4:
94). Psylla pulsatoria (L.).

Biro, L.
1901. Pokhalo — Sovo Psocidag (Spinnende Psocide). Rovart. Lapok
8: 204-205. (Schroder, C. 1902, Allg. Z. Ent. 7 (6): 123 is a
review of this).

Blackwall, J.

1867. On the asserted connection of Atropos with the “death watch.”
Ent. mon. Mag. 4: 19-20. This paper is followed by a note
by R. McLachlan (see McLachlan 1867a).

1891. (Exhibit of specimen of Atropos pulsatoria). Proc. ent. Soc. Lond.
1891. xxxii-xxxiii. In connection with sound production.

Blagoveshchensky, D. I.

1959. On the problem of Mallophaga evolution. Zool. J. 38 (3): 432-442.
(In Russian with English summary).

Blair, C. R.
1941. Studies in the biology of the booklouse Liposcelis divinatorius (Mull.).
Bull, La. Univ. (N.S.) 33:. 98.

Blair, K. G.
1928. Lepidilla kelloggi Rib. (Pteroxanium squamosum End.) Ent. mon. Mag.
64: 269. Found in Westmorland and Yorkshire, England.
1932. Collecting notes from mid Perthshire. Ent. mon. Mag. 68: 209-213.
(Psocids: p. 212). 6 spp. mentioned.
1950. Neuroptera of the Isle of Wight. Proc. Is. Wight nat. Hist. Soc.
4 (5): 157-162. (Psocoptera: p. 158). List.

Blanchard, E.

1851. In Gay, C., Historia fisica y politica de Chile segun documentos
adquiridos en esta republica durante doze anos de residencia en
ella y publicado bajo los auspicios del suprema gobierno. With
Atlas in Folio. Paris and Santiago. (Psocids: 6: 92-96, pl. 2, fig. 1).
5 spp. treated, all placed in Psocus.

Blankaart, S.
1688. Schou-Burg der Ruspen, Wormen, Ma’den, en Vliegende Dierkens
daar uit voorkomende. Amsterdam. 342 pp., 22 pls. (Psocid: p.
167, pl..14, .F).

SMITHERS 147

Blomquist, V. H.
1958. See Daly, A. W., Blomquist, V. H. and Hodges, F. A. 1958.

Boffa, G. D.
1949. Gli insetti diannosi allagricolturi e i moderni metodi e mezzi di
lotta. Milan. 978 pp. illustr. (Corrodentia: p. 96). Troctes
divinatorius.

Borgmeier, T.
1928a. Ein interessantes Copeognathen-Gespinst aus Brasilien. Ent. Mitt.
17: 155-161, 1 fig. Footnote on p. 155 by Editor that web was
probably that of Hymenopteron resembling that of Braconid
Meteorus.
1928b. Sobre um casulo curiosa de um Copeognato brasiliero. Bol. Mus.
nac. Rio de J. 4 (3): 59-65, 2 pls.

Boring, A. M.

1913. The odd chromosome in Cerastipsocus venosus. Biol. Bull. Woods
Hole 24: 125-172, pls. i, ii.

Borner, C.
1904. Zur Systematik der Hexapoden. Zool. Anz. 27 (16/17): 511-533,

4 figs. Borner’s classification.
1929. Mandibeln und Maxillen bei Psociden, Thysanopteren und Rhynchoten.
Z. wiss. Insekt-Biol. 24: 108-116, 3 figs.

Borror, D. J. and DeLong, D. M.

1954. An introduction to the study of insects. New York. i-xi, 1030 pp.,
illustr. (Psocoptera: pp. 169-179, figs. 14-1—14-7).

Box, H. E.

1953. List of sugar-cane insects. A synonymic catalogue of the sugar-cane
insects and mites of the world, and of their insect parasites and
predators, arranged systematically. London. 101 pp. (Corrodentia:
p. 56). Cyptophania hirsuta.

Bradley, RB.

1721. A philosophical account of the works of nature, in the mineral,
vegetable and animal parts of the creation. London. (Psocid: p.
154).

1739. A _ philosophical account of the works of nature, in the mineral,
vegetable and animal parts of the creation. London. (Psocid: p. 216,
[oh i PA Site Sh)

Brauer, F.

1857. Neuroptera austriaca; die im Erzhergothum Oesterreich bis jetzt
aufgefunden Neuropteren etc. Wien. i-xxiii, 80 pp. 5 pls. (Psocids:

Ppp. 32-34).
1865. Vierter Bericht tiber die auf der Weltfahrt der kais. Fregatte Novara
gesammelten Neuropteren. Verh. zool. — bot. Ges. Wien 15:

903-908. (Psocids: p. 908).
1868a. Reise der Osterreichischen Fregatte Novara um die Erde in den
Jahren 1857, 1858, 1859. Zool. Theil. Band Il, Abt. 1A (4)
Neuropteren. 105 pp. 2 pls. Vienna. (Psocids: pp. 50-51).
1868b. Verzeichniss der bis jetzt bekannten Neuropteren im Sinne Linnes.
Erster Abschnitt. Verh. zool. — hot. Ges Wien 18: 359-416.
(Psocids: pp. 391-392).

148 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1876. Die Neuropteren Europas, und insbesondere Oéesterreichs, mit
Riicksicht auf ihre geographische Verbreitung. Festschr. zool. -bot-
Ges. Wien 4: 265-600. (Psocids: pp. 293-294, 271). (Review in Ent.
mon. Mag. 14: 44).

1878. Verzeichniss der Neuropteren Deutschlands und Osterreichs II.
Auszug die Neuropteren Europa’s von Prof. Dr. Brauer, mit
Zusatzen und Verbesserungen von ebendems. Ent. Nachr. 4 (7):
69-74, 85-90. (Psocids: pp. 86-87).

1885. Systematische-zoologische Studien. §.B. Akad. Wiss. Wien 91: 237-
413, 1 pl.

1900. Uber die von Prof. O. Simony auf den Canaren gefundenen Neuroptera
und Pseudoneuroptera (Odonata, Corrodentia et Ephemeriidae)-
S.B. Akad. Wiss. Wien 109: 464-477. (Corrodentia: p. 467) 6 spp-
listed.

Brethes, J.

1923. Un Dorypteryx nouveau de Buenos Aires. (Copeognatha) Bull. Soc-
ent. Fr. 1923: 117-119, 2° figs:

Briggs, C. A.
1898. Psocus major Loens, in Surrey. Ent. mon. Mag. 34: 665.

Brimley, C. S.
1938. The Insects of North Carolina. Dep. Agric. North Carolina. (Psocids:
pp. 44-46).

Brindle, A.
1963. The insects of the Malham Tarn area. Orthoptera, Psocoptera,
Neuroptera and Mecoptera. Proc. Leeds Phil. Lit. Soc. 9 (2): 20-21.
List.

Bristowe, W. S.
1941. The Comity of Spiders. London. Vol. 2. pp. i-xiv, 229-560, figs.
16-96, pls. XX-XXII. (Psocoptera and predators: p. 296). Spiders
preying on psocids.

Britten, H. .
1926. Psocidae on the wing. Ent. mon. Mag. 52: 43. Species in flight
at Oxford, England.

Britton, W. E.

1918. Seventeenth Report of the State Entomologist of Connecticut for
the year 1917. Bull. Conn. agric. Expt. Sta. 203: 231-370, 4 figs.,
pls. I-XXXII. (Psocid: p. 339). Troctes divinatorius damaging
corn.

Broadhead, E.

1946. The booklouse and other library pests. British Book News 1946:
77-81.

1947a. The characters of the genus Liposcelis (Corrodentia, Liposcelidae )
and a further description of Liposcelis formicarius (Hagen) with
notes on its affinities. Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (B) 16 (3/4): 35-38,

fig.

1947b. A further description of Liposcelis entomophilus (Enderlein)
(Corrodentia) (Liposcelidae), with a note on its synonymy. Proc.
R. ent. Soc. Lond. (B) 16 (9/10): 109-113, 1 fig.

1947c. New species of Liposcelis Motschulsky (Corrodentia, Liposcelidae)
in England. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond. 98 (3): 41-58, 1 pl., 9 figs-

1947d. The life history of Embidopsocus enderleini (Rib.) (Corrodentia)
(Liposcelidae). Exit. mon. Mag. 83: 200-203.

SMITHERS 149

1949. On the identity of the psocid Cuixa canaria Navas. Ent. mon. Mag.
85: 80

1950a. Collecting Psocoptera. Leafl. Amat. Ent. Soc. 21, 4 pp., 4 figs.

1950b. A revision of the genus Liposcelis Motschulsky with notes on the
position of this genus in the order Corrodentia and on the
variability of ten Liposcelis species. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond.
101 (10): 335-388, 3 pls., 28 figs.

1952a. A comparative study of the mating behaviour of eight Liposcelis
species. Trans. 9th. int. Congr. Ent. Amsterdam 1951: 380-382, 1 fig.

1952b. The nomenclature of some British Psocoptera. Ent. mon. Mag.
88: 83. Use of “Liposcelis’ and “Troctes’ discussed; identity of
Atropos kidderi.

1954a. A new parthenogenetic psocid from stored products, with observations
on parthenogenesis in other psocids. Ent. mon. Mag. 90: 10-16.
Liposcelis obscurus.

1954b. See Thornton, I. W. B. and Broadhead, E. 1954.

1954c. The infestation of warehouses and ships’ holds by Psocids in
Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 90: 103-105.

1955. Two new psocid species from stored products in Britain. Proc. R.
ent. Soc. Lond. (B) 24 (1/2): 7-12, 13 figs. Liposcelis albothoracicus,
Lepolepis bicolor.

1956. A heavy infestation of Lachesilla pedicularia (L.) (Corrodentia,
Pseudocaeciliidae). Ent. mon. Mag. 92: 38.

1957. An ecological study of mixed species populations exploiting a common
resource. J. anim. Ecol. 26 (2): 519. Species of Psocoptera on
larch trees in England. (cf. Broadhead, E. 1958a).

1958a. The psocid fauna of Larch trees in Northern England—an ecological
study of mixed spvecies populations exploiting a common resource.
J. anim. Ecol. 27 (2): 217-263, 5 figs. (cf. Broadhead, E. 1957).

1958b. Some records of animals preying upon Psocids. Ent. mon. Mag. 94:
68-69

1961. The biology of Psoquilla marginepunctata (Hagen) (Corrodentia,
Trogiidae). Trans. Soc. Brit. Ent. 14: 223-236, 4 figs.

Broadhead, E. and Datta, B.
1960. The taxonomy and ecology of British species of Peripsocus Hagen
(Corrodentia, Pseudocaeciliidae). Trans. Soc. Brit. Ent. 14 (5):
131-146, 15 figs.

Broadhead, F. and Hobby, B. M.

1944a. Studies on a species of Liposcelis (Corrodentia, Liposcelidae) occurring
in stored products in Britain. Pt. I. Ent. mon. Mag. 80: 45-59,
figs. 1-20. L. granicola.

1944b. Studies on a species of Liposcelis (Corrodentia, Liposcelidae) occurring
in stored products in Britain. Pt. II. Ent. mon. Mag. 80: 163-173,
figs. 21-22. L. granicola.

1945. The booklouse. Discovery 6 (5): 142-147, figs. 1-10.

Broadhead, E. and Thornton, I. W. B.
1955. An ecological study of three closely related nsocid species. Oikos
(1): 1-50, 19 figs. Elipsocus meclachlani, E. westwoodi and

E. hyalinus in England.

Broadhead, E. and Wapshere, A. J.
1960. Notes on the eggs and nymphal instars of some psocid species.
Ent. mon. Mag. 96: 162-166, 14 figs. Several species in England.

Brohmer, P.
1920. See Enderlein, G. 1920a.
1927. See Enderlein, G. 1927.

150 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Brown, A. W. A.
1934. A contribution to the insect fauna of Timagami. Canad. Ent. 46:
206-211, 220-231, 242-252, 261-267. (Corrodentia: p. 222). Two
spp. listed from Lake Timagami area, Canada.

Brown, C. D.
1942. Temperature and humidity in the ecology of Liposcelis divinatorius
(Miller) (Corrodentia, Atropidae). Jowa St. Coll. J. Sci. 26:

175-176.

Brown, J. M.
1928. Psocoptera from Merionethshire. Ent. mon. Mag. 64: 15, 91. 13
spp. listed.
1932. Psocoptera etc., in Norfolk. Ent. mon. Mag. 68: 53. 14 spp. listed.
1936. Yorkshire Psocoptera. Naturalist Lond. 953: 135-139. 31 spp. listed.

Brues, C. T.
1927. Observations on wood-boring insects, their parasites and other associated
insects. Psyche, Camb., Mass. 34: 73-90. (Psocids: p. 78). 4 spp.
mentioned. :

Brues, C. T., Melander, A. L. and Carpenter, F. M.
1954. Classification of Insects. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 108: 1i-v,
1-917, 1219 figs. (Corrodentia: pp. 125-129, 810-812, figs. 155-166,
1173-1178). Keys to families (existing, pp. 125-129, extinct,
pp. 810-812).

rf

Bryan, E. H.
1929. See Swezey, O. H. and Bryan, E. H. 1929.

Burgess, E.
1877. On the structure of the head of Atropos. Psyche, Camb., Mass. 2: 87-
89. (See Scudder, S. H. 1877).
1878. The anatomy of the head and the structure of the maxilla in the
Psocidae. Proc. Boston. Soc. nat. Hist. 19: 291-296, pl. 8.

‘Burmeister, H.
1839. Handbuch der Entomologie. Berlin. 1832-1855, 5 vols. (Psocoptera:
Vol. 25 Abt; 25 Heft 2

Busvine, J. R.
1951. Insects and Hygiene. London. pp. i-xiv, 482 pp., 1 frontis., 57 figs.
(Psocoptera: pp. 411-415).

Butler, G. D.

1961. Insects and other arthropods from Laysan Island. Proc. Hawaii. ent.
Soc. 17 (3): 379-387. (Corrodentia: p. 381). 3 spp. listed.

Butler, G. D. and Usinger, R. L.

1963. Insects and other Arthropods from Kure Island. Proc. Hawaii. ent.
Soc. 18 (2): 237-244. (Corrodentia: p. 240). Ectopsocus perkinsi
Banks listed.

Call Rese:
1897. See Banks, N. 1897.

‘Campbell, J. W.
1928. Notes on egg-laying and mating habits of Myopsocus novae-zelandiae
Kolbe. Bull. Brooklyn ent. Soc. 23: 124-128, 2 figs.

SMITHERS 151

Candura, G. S.
1932. Contributi alla conoscenza biologica del Troctes divinatorius Miller.
Boll. Zool. Napoli 3: 177-184, 1 fig.
1933. Studi e ricerche sugl’insetti viventi nelle paste alimentari. Contributi
1-14. Boll. Soc. Nat. Napoli 44: 159-203. (Corrodenti: Contr.
XII. pp. 194-195). Troctes divinatorius.

Carpenter, F. M. 4

1926. Fossil Insects from the Lower Permian of Kansas. Bull. Mus. comp.
Zool. Harv. 67: 437-444, 3 pls. (Copeognatha: pp. 440-441, pl. 2,
fp le ple Se tien 2)

1932. The Lower Permian insects of Kansas. 5: Psocoptera and additions.
to the Homoptera. Amer. J. Sci. 24: 1-22, 11 figs.

1933. The lower Permian insects of Kansas. 6: Delopteridae, Protelytroptera,
Plecoptera and a new collection of Protodonata, Megasecoptera,
Homoptera and Psocoptera. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts Sci. 68 (11):
411-503, 29 figs. 1 pl. (Psocoptera: pp. 443-461, figs. 13-16).

1938. Structure of Permian Homoptera and Psocoptera. Nature, Lond.
141: 164-165.

1939. The lower Permian insects of Kansas. 8: Additional Megasecoptera,
Protodonata, Odonata, Homoptera, Psocoptera, Protelytroptera,
Plecoptera and Protoperlaria. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts Sci. 73
(3): 29-70, 27 figs. 2 pls. (Psocoptera: pp. 54-57, figs. 19-22).

1954. See Brues, C. T., Melander, A. L. and Carpenter, F. M. 1954.

Carpenter, F. M. and Darlington, P. J.

1954. Nathan Banks, a biographic sketch and list of publications. Psyche,
Camb., Mass. 61 (3): 81-110, 1 pl.

Carpenter, W. B.
1843. The popular cyclopaedia of natural science. London. (Psocids: p. 677).

Carr, J. W.

1914. The Psocidae of Nottinghamshire. Entomologist 47: 95-96. List of
spp. taken in Nottinghamshire.

Carruthers, R. H.

1936. See Weiss, H. B. and Carruthers, R. H. 1936.
1937. See Weiss, H. B. and Carruthers, R. H. 1937.

Cazal, P.
1948. Les glandes endocrines rétrocérébrales des Insectes. (Etude morpho-
logique). Bull. biol., Paris, Suppl. 32: 1-227, 186 figs. (Psocids:
especially pp. 64-69, figs. 52-55).

Cederjhelm, J.

* 1798. Fauna Ingricae Prodromus exhibens methodicam descriptionem
Insectorum agri Petropolensis praemissa Mammalium, Avium,
Amphibiorum et Piscium enumeratioe. Lipsiae. (Hemerobius:
pp. 141-142).

Chaine, J.

1902. See Kunstler, J. and Chaine, J. 1902.

1903a. See Kunstler, J. and Chaine, J. 1903a.
1903b. See Kunstler, J. and Chaine, J. 1903b.

Chandra, A.
1953. See Roonwal, M. L. et al. 1953.

Chaney, W.
1867. The Death Watch. Hardwicke’s Science Gossip. 1867: 29-30. Ticking
sound.

152 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Chapman, P. J.

1930. Corrodentia of the United States of America I. Suborder Isotecnomera.
J.N.Y. ent. Soc. 38: 219-290, 319-402, pls. XII-XXI.

Chapman, P. J. and Nadler, A. M.
1928. Jn Leonard, M. D. A list of the Insects of New York. Mem. Cornell
agric. Exp. Sta. 101, 1121 pp. (Corrodentia: pp. 60-63).

Chapman, T. A.
1916. Ectopsocus briggsi (McLach.) Psocoptera. Entomologist 49: 62-63.

Chopard, L.
1948. Atlas des libellules de France, Belgique, Suisse. Nouv. Atlas Ent.
Paris 3, 137 pp., 47 figs., 12 pls. (Psocoptera: pp. 95-108).

Chou, M., Chung, C. and Wei, H.
1953. Compendium of agricultural pests in North China. Shanghai. 274 pp.
illustr. (in Chinese) (Corrodentia: p. 21).

Chung, C.
1953. See Chou, M., Chung, C. and Wei, H. 1953.

Cockerell, T. D. A.

1916. Insects in Burmese Amber. Amer. J. Sci. 42: 135-138, 4 figs.
(Psocids: pp. 136-138, figs. 2, 3).

1917. The Fauna of Boulder County, Colorado. IV. Bull. Univ. Colo.
17: 21-25. (Psocid: p. 22). Myopsocus coloradensis Banks recorded.

1919. Insects in Burmese Amber. Entomologist 52: 241-243, 3 figs.

1921. Fossil Arthropods in the British Museum. VI. Oligocene Insects from
Gurnet Bay, Isle of Wight. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 7: 453-480, 50 figs.
(Corrodentia: p. 480, fig. 50). Psocus acourti.

1929. The psocid family Caeciliidae. Entomologist 62: 19. Name of family
discussed; Peripsocidae suggested as alternative.

Collart, A.

1950. Un Psocoptére nouveau pour la faune de Belgique: Dorypteryx
pallida Aaron. Bull. (Ann.) Soc. ent. Belg. 86: 169-170.

Conci, C. and Franceschi, T.
1953. Un curioso caso di dermatite umana provocata forse da Psocotteri.
Boll. Soc. ent. Ital. 83: 17-20. Lepinotus reticulatus, Liposcelis
mendax.

Cooley, R. A.
1914. Eleventh Annual Report of State Entomologist of Montana. Bull.
Mont. agric. Exp. Sta. 98: 123-136. Mention of Liposcelis
divinatorius.

Cope, O. B.

1940a. The Morphology of Psocus confraternus Banks (Psocoptera: Psocidae).
Microentomology 5 (4): 91-115, figs. 38-53.

1940b. The morphology of Esthiopterum diomedeae (Fabricius) (Mallo-
phaga). Microentomology 5 (5): 117-142, figs. 54-66.

1942. The Morphology of the Psocoptera and Mallophaga. Abstr. Diss.
Stanf. Univ. 17 (49): 3-6. Most of contents of this paper is to
be found in Cope, O. B. 1940a.

Coquebert, A. J.

1799. Illustrata Inconographica Insectorum, quae in Musaeis parisinis
observavit et in lucem edidit Joh. Christ. Fabricius, praemissis
eiusdem descriptionibus. Accedunt species plurimae, vel minus
vel nondum cognitae. Paris. (Psocids: pt. 1, pp. 8-14).

SMITHERS 153

Corbett, G. H.

1933. Annual Report, Division of Entomology, for year 1932. Gen. Ser.
Dep. Agric. S.S. & F.M.S. 14: 39-52.

Corbett, G. H. and Hargreaves, E.
1915. Vulturops floridensis, a new member of the psocid sub-family
Vulturopinae from the United States. Psyche, Camb., Mass. 22
(4): 142-143, pl. xi. :

Corporaal, J. B.
1926. (Minutes of meeting). Tijdschr. Ent. 69: XCVII-CI. (Psocid: p. C).
1 sp. recorded as new to Holland.

Costa, A.
1885. Diagnosi di nuovi Artropodi della Sardegna. Boll. Soc. ent. Ital.
17: 240-255. (Psocids: p. 243). L :
1888. Notizie ed osservationi sulli Geo-Fauna Sarda. Memoria Quarta. Atti
Accad. Sci. fis. nat. Napoli (2) 1(13): 1-31. (Psocids: pp. 5, 15-17).

Costa Leite, I. da
1952. See Costa Lima, A. da, and Costa Leite, I. da, 1952.

Costa Lima, A. da,

1939. Insectos do Brazil. 1° Tomo. Rio de Janiero, i-x, 470 pp., 218 figs.
(Psocoptera: pp. 335-349).

Costa Lima, A. da, and Costa Leite, I. da

1952. Um Psocidea da familia Amphientomidae na America do Sol.
Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz 50: 271, 2 pls.

Cragg, J. B.

1962. Zoological Notes. J. Anim. Ecol. 31: 420. Lists species from larch
and birch at Craig Cerrig Gleisiad Nature Reserve, Wales.

Craighead, F. C.

1950. Insect enemies of eastern forests. Washington. 657 pp. illustr.
(Corrodentia: p. 81).

Crampton, G. C.

1916. The lines of descent of the lower pterygotan insects, with notes
on the relationships of the other forms. Ent. News 27: 244-258,
297-307. (Psocids: p. 299).

1918. The genitalia and terminal abdominal structures of male Neuroptera
and Mecoptera with notes on the Psocidae, Diptera and Trichoptera.
Psyche, Camb., Mass. 25: 47-59, pls. I, II.

1919. Notes on the ancestry of the Diptera, Hemiptera and other insects
related to the Neuroptera. Trans. ent. Soc. Lond. 1919 (1/2):
93-118, 2 figs.

1920a. Soe te Crampton, G. C. 1919. Trans. ent. Soc. Lond. 1920:

: g.

1920b. Some anatomical details of the remarkable winged zorapteron,
Zorotypus hubbardi Caudell, with notes on its relationships.
Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 22: 98-106, 1 pl.

1920c. Notes on the lines of descent of lower winged insects. Psyche, Camb.,
Mass. 27: 116-127.

1921a. A phylogenetic study of the venation of the fore wings of the
Homoptera, Thysanoptera, Psocida, Zoraptera, Neuroptera, Embiidae,
Plecoptera and Hadentomoidea, with notes on the Hymenoptera
and Coleoptera. Ent. News 32: 97-105, 135-140, 1 pl.

154 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1921b. The sclerites of the head and the mouthparts of certain immature
and adult insects. Ann. ent. Soc. Amer. 14 (2): 65-103, pls. II-VI.
(Psocids: p. 94).

1921c. A further comparison of the wings of Zoraptera, Psocids and Aphids
from the standpoint of phylogeny. Canad. Ent. 53 (5): 110-117,
ple Ui

1922. Notes on the relationships indicated by the venation of the wings
of insects. Canad. Ent. 54: 206-216, 222-235, pls. 5-9. (Psocids:
especially on p. 222-225).

1923. A phylogenetic comparison of the maxillae throughout the orders
of insects. J.N.Y. ent. Soc. 21: 91-92, fig. 73, pl. 17:

1924. The Phylogeny and Classification of Insects. J. Ent. Zool. 16: 33-46.

1926. A comparison of the neck and pro-thoracic sclerites throughout
the orders of insects from the stand-point of phylogeny. Trans.
Amer. ent. Soc. 52: 199-248, 8 pls.

1927. Eugeron and the ancestry of the Hemiptera, Psocids and Hymenoptera.
Bull. Brooklyn ent. Soc. 22: 1-15.

1928a. The grouping of the insect orders and their lines of descent.
Entomologist 61: 82-85, pl. VI.

1928b. The interrelationships and lines of descent of living insects. Psyche,
Camb., Mass. 45: 165-181, 1 pl. (Psocids: p. 173).

1929. The terminal abdominal structures of female insects, from the
standpoint of phylogeny. J.N.Y. ent. Soc. 37: 453-496, 8 pls.
(Psocids: especially p. 472).

1932. A phylogenetic study of the head capsule in certain orthopteroid,
psocoid, hemipteroid and holometabolous insects. Bull. Brooklyn
ent. Soc. 27: 19-49, pls. IV-VIII.

Crowson, R. A.
1961. Lepidilla kelloggi Ribaga (Psocoptera) and Centrotus cornutus L.
(Homoptera) in Scotland. Ent. mon. Mag. 97: 232. Mentions
occurrence.

Cumber, R. A.
1959. The insect complex of sown pastures in the North Island. VI. The
Psocoptera and Neuroptera as revealed by summer sweep-sampling.
N.Z.J. Agric. 2 (5): 898-902, 2 figs. (Psocoptera: pp. 898-900,
fig. 1). Lists 7 spp.

Curran, C. H.

1925. Descriptions of two insects found in imported foodstuffs. Canad. Ent.
57 (12): 292-293, figs. A, B. (Psocids: p. 292, fig. B).

Curtis, J.

1837. British Entomology. London. 1823-1840. (Psocids: Pt. 14: 648-651).
Dale, C. W.

1890. Insects in the Scilly Is. Ent. mon. Mag. 26: 328. Caecilius dalii

mentioned.
1907. Catalogue of British Orthoptera, Neuroptera and_ Trichoptera.
Colchester. 15° pp. (Psocids: p. 9).

Dale, P. S.

1954. A list of pests of plants recorded from Western Samoa. W. Samoa
Dep. Agr. Forests and Fisheries Information C. 4 (8-9): 12-14.
(Corrodentia: p. 14). Liposcelis in stored products.

Dalman, J. W.
1823. Analecta Entomologica. Holmiae. (Psocids: p. 98).

SMITHERS 155

Daltry, H. W.
1929. A list of Staffordshire Psocoptera. Trans. N. Staffs. Fld. Cl. (1928-
1929) 63: 89. Lists 11 species.

Daly, A. W. Blomquist, V.H. and Hodges, F. A.

1958. Identification of miscellaneous insects by the micromorphology of
the exoskeleton. J. Assoc. Official Agr. Chem. 41 (1): 206-220,
pls. I-VII. (Psocids: pp. 217-218, pl. Ill).

Dammerman, K. W.
1926. See Harny, H. H. 1926b.

Damph, A.
1924. See Enderlein, G. 1924b.
Danks, L.

1950a. Novyi vid senoeda. Psocopteres-Philotarsus badonneli Danks sp.n. °.
Goz. Muzei Prirody Riga LSSR 1. 2pp., 6 figs.

1950b. Senojedy Suchumskoja botaniczeskoja sada. Goz. Muzei Prirody
Riga LSSR. 2. 3pp. 4 figs.

1950c. Materially k faune senojedow (Psocoptera) Latwijskoj SSR. Goz.
Muzei Prirody Riga LSSR. 3, 4 pp.

1955. Psocoptera of the Batum and Sochi Botanical Gardens. Ent. Obozr.
34: 180-184, 6 figs. (In Russian). 12 spp. listed, one new.

1956. Kerpu utu sparnu dzislojuma mainiba un izmiruso sugu uzstadisona.
Laty. PSR Zinat. Akad. Vestis 5 (106): 69-74, 16 figs.

1957. Psocoptera of Georgia. Theses of addresses of the 3rd Congress
of the All-Union Entomological Society. Izdatelstwo Akad. Nauk.
SSSR. Leningrad. (Psocoptera: pp. 7-8).

1958. Issledovaniya Po Faune Senoyedov Latviiskoy SSR. (Studies cn the
Psocopteran fauna of Latvia). Trans. Inst. Biol. Acad. Sci. Latyia
SSR. 5: 111-118, 6 figs.

1959. Zur Kenntnis der Staublausefaune (Psocoptera) der Estnischen SSR.
Entomol. Sbornik I. In-t zool. i bot. A.N. Estonskoj SSR. 1: 147-155.
(In Russian with German summary).

1960a. Die Psocopteren gesammelt in Karkato-Ukraine im Jahre 1959.
Latv. Ent. 2: 18-20.

1960b. Neue Angaben tiber die Psocopterenfauna der Sowjetunion. Latyv. Ent.
1: 29-33, 2 figs. (Summaries in Russian and German).

1961. Stenopsocus stigmaticus — a new Psocoptera species in the fauna
of Latvia. Latv. Ent. 3: 62-63. (In Russian with English summary).

1962. Uber die Psocopteren aus dem. Tlmen-Reservat. Latv. 5: 57-58.
(In Russian with German summary).

1964. O senoedah Voronezskogo Gosudarstwennogo zapowednika. (On
Bark-lices at the Voronezh State Reserve). Latv. Ent. 8: 42-46.
23 spp. listed from Voronezh State reserve.

Darlington, P. J.
1954. See Carpenter, F. M. and Darlington, P. J. 1954.

Datta, B.
1960. See Broadhead, E. and Datta, B. 1960.
Davey, K. G.

1960. The evolution of spermatophores in insects. Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond.
(A) 35 (7/9): 107-113. (Psocoptera: p. 109). Bos to spermato-
phores in psocids, as from Finlayson, L. H. 1949.

Davies, R. G.
1957. See Imms, A. D. 1957.

156 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Davis, C.
1942. Hemiptera and Copeognatha from the Upper Permian of New
South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 67: 111-122, 24 figs.

Davis, C. J.
1952. New host and insect records from the Island of Hawaii. Proc. Hawaii.
ent. Soc. 15 (1): 85-86. 3 spp. listed on Acacia koaia.

Delamere-Deboutteviile, C.
1945. Notes biologique sur un Psocoptére (Lepidilla kelloggi Rib.) non
encore signalé en Europe continentale. Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 50:
52-54. Lists 10 spp. found in Finistére.
1952. See Badonnel, A. 1952.

Delong, D. M.
1954. See Borror, D. J. and DeLong, D. M. 1954.

Derham, W.
1701. A letter to the Publisher concerning an insect that is commonly
called the death-watch. Phil. Trans. 22: 832-834.
1704. A supplement to the account of Pediculus pulsatorius or Death
Watch in Phil. Trans. No. 271 serving the more perfect natural
history of that insect. Phil. Trans..24: 1586-1594, pl. 291, figs.
a:

’

Dispons, P.
1963. La biologie de genre Empicoris Wolff. Hemiptera, Heteroptera, Reduvii-
dae (Emesinae, Stenolaemini). Proc. XVI int. Congr. Zool.
Washington, 1: 4. Under webs of Archipsocus ghesquierei.

Donisthorpe, H.
1917. Attitudes of Wasps and Psocids in copulation. Ent. Rec. 29: 231-232.

Doubleday, H.
1866a. Ticking of the Death Watch. Entomologist 3: 65-66.
1866b. (Untitled). Proc. ent. Soc. Lond. 1866: iv.

Drenski, P.
1953. Uber die Verbreitung der Copeognathen in Bulgarien. Bull. Inst. zool.
Acad. bulg. Sci. Sophia 2: 377-382. (In Bulgarian with German
summary). 6 spp. listed.

Dudich, E., Pongracz, Ss. Fabian, G. and tharos, A.

1943. Bars varmegye Neuropteroidea-faunajanak alapvetése. (Outline of
the fauna of the Neuropteroids of Bard Department). Math.
term. Kozl. 39 (6): 1-46, 1 pl. (Copeognatha: pp. 15-16). Lists
12 spp.

Durham, J. W.
1962: ‘See’ Hurd} PS Ds set als 1962:

Dziedzielewicz, J.

1867. Wykaz owad6w siatkoskrzydlych (Neuroptera). Spraw. Kom. fisjogr.
Krakow 1: 158-165.

1883. Sieciddwki (Neuroptera) zebrane w okolicach Kolomyi i nad Dniestrem
w.r. 1882. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr. Krakow 17 (II): 244-252. (Psocidae:
p. 250). Psocus longicornis and Ps. nebulosus listed.

1891. Przeglad fauny krajowej owaddw_ siatkoskrzydtych (Neuroptera,
Pseudoneuroptera). Spraw. Kom. fizjogr. Krakow 26 (II): 26-151.
(Psocidae: pp. 109-112). 12 spp. listed.

SMITHERS 157

1895. Zestawiemie zapiskOw o owadach siatkoskrzydlych w Tatrach, Podezas
pobytu w latach 1891-1892. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr. Krakow 30
(Il): 1-40. (Psocidae: p. 33). 3 spp. listed.

1905. Siaciarki (Neuroptera genuina) i Prasiatnice (Archiptera) zebrane w
ciagu lat 1902 i 1903. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr. Krakow 38: 104-125.

1908. Sieciarki (Neuroptera genuina) i Prasiatnice (Archiptera) zebrane
w ciagu lat 1904 i 1905. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr. Krakow 42: 13-25.

1911. Owady siatkoskrzydle (Neuropteroidea) zebrane w Zachodnich Kar-
patach w roku 1909. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr. Krakow 45: 39-44.

1920. Owady siatkoskrzydlowate ziem Polski. (Insecta neuropteroidea
Poloniae terrarum Czecc II.) Rozpr. Mus. Dzied. 4: 1-72, pls.
LI.

Eaton, A. E.

1879. An account of the Petrological, Botanical and Zoological collections
made in Kerguelen’s Land and Rodriguez during the Transit of
Venus Expeditions in the year 1874-75. Phil. Trans. 168: i-vi,
1-579, pls. I-LV. (Psocidae: p. 248). Rhyopsocus eclipticus Hag.

Edmonds, R

1834. The Death-Watch, the ticking of Anobium. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 7:
468-469. Atropos lignarius, Termes pulsatorius.

Edwards, B. A. B.

1950. A study of Tasmanian Psocoptera with Descriptions of New Species.
Pap. roy. Soc. Tasm. 1949: 93-134, 117 figs.

Ehrmann, P.
1927. See Enderlein, G. 1927.

Eichler, W.

1938. Thylacopsis madagascariensis, Brachymyrmex heeri und Ptidodactyla
luteipes in einem Dahlemer Gewachhaus. (Studien zur deutschen
pore naustaupe Il). Zool. Anz. 122: 330-333. (Psocoptera: pp.
330-331).

1952. Die Tierwalt der Gewéachshauser. Leipzig. i-iv, 93 pp., 11 figs.
(Psocoptera: p. 34).

Enderlein, G.

1900a. Epipsocus citiatus Hagen, eine Psocide des Bernsteins und die
recente peruanische Epipsocus nepos nov. sp. Berl. ent. Z. 45: 108-
112, 3 figs.

1900b. Die Psociden fauna Perus. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 14: 133-160, 4 figs.,
I ty EL

1901. Neue deutsche und exotische Psociden sowie Bemerkungen zur
Systematik. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 14: 537-548, pl. 35.

1902a. Neuroptera-Psociden (Einleitung). Dr. O. Kranchers Entomologischem
Jahrbuch 1902. Leipzig.

1902b. Zur Kenntnis der Insekten Deutsch-Ostafrikas. Ergebnisse der
Nyassassee- und Kingagebirge-Expedition der Heckmann-
Wentzelstiftung. 2. Psociden aus Deutsch Ostafrikas. Mitt. zool.
Mus. Berl. 2 (2): 7-16, fig. 3, pl. 5.

1903a. Die Copeognathen des indo- australischen Faunengebietes. Ann. hist.
-nat. Mus. hung. 1: 179-344, 12 figs., pls. iii-xiv. Morphology,
geographical distribution, keys, descriptions, list of spp.

1903b. Zur Kenntniss amerikanischer Psociden. JI. Neue Gattungen und
Arten stidamerikanischer Psociden. IT. Zwei neue nordamerikanischer
Troctes-Arten. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 18: 351-364, pls. 17 and 18.

158

1903c.

1903d.
1903e.

1903f.

1903s.

1903h.

1903i.

1903).

1904a.

1904b.

1905a.

1905b.
190Sc.

1906a.

1906b.
1906c.

1906d.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Zur Kenntnis europiischer Psociden. I. Tichobia Kolbe — Cerobasis
Kolbe — Hyperetes Kolbe, eine Entwicklungsreihe von Hyperetes
guestfalicus Kolbe 1880. If. Zur Psocidenfauna Rugens. III. Zur
Psocidenfauna von Dianemark und Schweden. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst.
18: 365-382, figs. A-H, pl. 19.

Neue Copeognathen aus Kamerun. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 19: 1-8, pl. 1.

Uber die Morphologie, Gruppierung und systematische Stellung der
Corrodentien. Zool. Anz. 26: 423-437, 4 figs.

Ein neuer Copeognathentypus, zugleich ein neuer deutscher Wohnungs-
schadling. Zool. Anz. 27: 76. Nymphopsocus destructor. (Same
gen. et sp. as in Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 19: 727-732, of same date
but this apparently is the first reference as suggested by footnote
in Zool. Jb. reference [Enderlein 1903i] ).

Uber die Stellung von Leptella Reut. und Reuterella nov. gen., die
Vertreter zweier neuer europdischer Copeognathensubfamilien. Zool.
Anz. 27: 131-134.

Micropsocus musae (Kunstler and Chaine) eine vermeintliche Gall-
mucke (Kiefferia musae n.g., n.sp. Kunstler and Chaine 1902).
Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 19: 288-292, 1 fig.

Nymplhopsocus destructor Enderl. 1903, ein neuer Copeognathen-Typus,
zugleich ein neuer deutscher Wohnungs-Schadling. Zool. Jb. Abt.
Syst. 192 727-132; fies. sA-C; pls 437 4

Die Landarthropoden dervon der _ Tiefsee-Expedition besuchten
antarktischen Inseln. I. Die Insekten und Arachnoideen der
Kerguelen. II. Die Landarthropoden der antarktischen Inseln St.
Paul und Neu-Amsterdam. In Wissenschajftliche Ergebnisse der
Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem Dampfer “Valdivia” 1898-
1899. 3: 199-269, 6 figs., pls. XXXI-XL. (I. pp. 199-248, 1 fig.,
pls. XXI-XXXVII; II. pp. 249-269, 5 figs. Pls. XXXVIII-XL).
(Copeognatha: I. pp. 205 (list) 230-236, IJ. pp. 250 (list),
263-264). Psocids on pp. 230-236 consisting of re-descriptions and
notes on Rhyopsocus eclipticus Hagen and Troctes divinatorius
Mull. var. kidderi Hagen with fig. 1 of Rhyopsocus fore wing.

(Untitled note). Zool. Zbl. 11 (3): 84-89. Review of five 1903 and
1904 papers with an extended listing of the families and assigned
genera of his classification mainly from 1903 paper on Indoaustralian
Copeognatha (Ann. hist. -nat. Mus. hung. 1: 179-344, 12 figs.,
Pls. 1ii-xiv).

Die von Herrn Prof. Dr. Friedr. Dahl im Bismark-Archipel
gesammelten Copeognathen nebst Bemerkungen uber die physiolo-
gische Bedeuting des Stigmasackes. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 20 (2):
105-112, pl. vii.

Eine neue Copeognathe von den Falklands-Inseln. 11. Beitrage zur
Kenntnis antarktischer Landarthropoden. Zool. Anz. 29: 126-127.
Philotarsus falklandicus.

Zwei neue beschuppte Copeognathen aus dem Bernstein. Zool. Anz.
29: 576-580, 6 figs. Amphientomum spp.

Results of the Swedish Zoological Expedition to Egypt and_ the
White Nile, 1901. No. 18. Morphologie, Systematik und Biologie
der Atropiden und Troctiden sowie zusammenstellung aller bisher
bekannten recenten und fossilen Formen. 58 pp., 11 figs., 4 pls.

Die Copeognathen-Fauna Japans. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 23: 243-256,
pis!) Os. 10

Die australische Copeognathen. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 23: 401-412, pl.
23

Zehn neue aussereuropdische Copeognathen. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 67:
306-316, 1 fig. Species from Japan, Central America, Java, Tangan-
yika, Argentina, Peru, Canary Islands.

Einige Notizen zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen Nordamerikas.
Stettin. ent. Ztg. 67: 317-320.

1906e.

1906f.
1907a.

1907b.

1907c.
1907d.
1907e.
1907f.
1907¢.
1907h.

1908a.

1908b.

1908c.

1908d.

1908e.
1908f.

1909a.
1909b.
1909c.

1909d.
1909e.

SMITHERS 159

The scaly-winged Copeognatha (Monograph of the Amphientomidae,
Lepidopsocidae and Lepidillidae in relation to their morphology
and taxonomy). Spolia zeylan. 4: 39-122, 6 figs., pls. A-G.
(Translated from German by A. Willey).

Zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen-Fauna Westpreussens. Ber. westpreuss.
bot. -zool. Ver. 28: 71-88, 6 figs.

Die Copeognathen Javas. Notes Leyden Mus. 29: 107-126, 6 figs.
Includes list of spp. from Java.

Copeognatha. Jn Michaelsen, W. und Hartmeyer, R. Die Fauna
Stidwest-Australiens. Ergebnisse der Hamburger Stidwest-Australischen
Forschungsreise 1905. Jena. (Copeognatha: 1: 233-240, 6 figs).
Includes list of spp. known from Australia.

Aussereuropidische Copeognathen aus dem Stettiner Museum. Zool.
Jb. Abt. Syst. 24: 81-90, pl. 6.

Actenotarsus, eine neue Copeognathengattung aus Spanien. Zool.
Jb. Abt. Syst. 25: 503-506, pl. 19.

Troctes entomophilus, ein neuer Insekten-liebhaber aus Columbien.
Stettin ent. Ztg. 68: 34-36, 1 fig.

Neue Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen Japans. Stettin. ent.
Zte. 68: 90-106, 2 figs. Lists spp. from Japan.

Eine neue Copeognathe aus Stid-Tunis. Ann. hist. — nat. Mus. hung.
5 (2): 428-429, pl. ix.

Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Schwedischen Zoologischen Expedi-
tion nach dem Kilimandjaro, dem Meru und dem Ungebenden
Massaisteppen Deutsch-Ostafrikas, 1905-1906, unter leitung von
Prof. Dr. Yneve Sjdstedt. L. Copeognatha. (Copeognatha: 15 (2):
29-30, figs. A-F, pl. 5).

Die Copeognathenfauna der Insel Formosa. Zool. Anz. 33: 759-779,
3 figs. Includes list of spp. from Formosa.

Copeognatha. Jn Schulze, L., Forschungsreise im westlichen und
zentralen Stidafrika. 3 Copeognatha: Hexacyrtoma, eine neue Copeo-
gnathengattung von Kapland. Denkschr. med. -naturw. Ges. Jena
13s B49=3505" 2 efigs>, spl. OMEXG \ fie. 1:

Reise in Ostafrika in den Jahre 1903-1905 von Prof. Dr. Alfred
Voeltzkow. 1. Die von Voeltzkow in Ostafrika und Madagascar
gesammelten Copeognathen. WW. Ueber die systematische Stellung
von Thylax Hag. und zur Klassification der Lepidopsocinen.
Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse. Band 2, Systematische Arbeiten.
Stuttgart. (Copeognatha: pp. 245-252, 252-257, 3 figs., pl. 11).

Uber die biogeographische Stellung der Crozet-Inseln. 14. Beitrag
zur Kenntnis der antarktischen Fauna. Zool. Anz. 33: 751-753.
(Corrodentia: p. 752). Troctes divinatorius listed and mentioned
from Kerguelen and Crozet Is.

Uber die Variabilitat des Fltigelgeiders der Copeognathen. Zoo).
Anz., 33: 779-782, 12 figs. Especially Psoquilla spp.

Biologisch-faunistische Moor- und Dtinen-Studien. Ein Beitrag zur
Kenntnis biosynozischer Regionen in Westpreussen. 30. Ber. Westpr.
bot. -zool. Ver. 30: 54-240, 6 figs., 1 map.

Neue Gattungen und Arten nordamerikanischer Copeognathen. Boll.
Lab. zool. Portici 3: 329-339, 4 figs.

Diplacanthoda Bouvieri, nouveau genre de Copeognathes (Psocinae)
de Madagascar. Bull. Mus. Hist. nat., Paris 15: 448-449, 1 fig.

Neue Gattungen und Arten von Copeognathen aus Transvaal sowie
aus der Ohaus’schen Ausbeute aus Ecuador. Stettin. ent. Ztg.
70: 266-273, 3 figs. Monocladellus (from Ecuador), Harpezoneura
(from Transvaal).

Copeognathen (Erste Reihe). (Biospeliogica XI). Arch. Zool. exp.
gen. (5) 1: 533-539, pl. 18.

Zur Kenntnis fruhjurassischer Copeognathen und Coniopterygiden und
uber das Schicksal der Archipsylliden. Zool. Anz. 34: 770-776,
3 figs. (Copeognatha: pp. 771-773, fig. 1).

160

1909f.

1909¢.

1910a.

1923a.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Die Insekten der Antarktischen Gebiets. Dtsch. Stidpol. Exped. 10
(II) 4: 361-528, 42 figs. (A-QQ), pls. XL-LXIII. (Copeognatha:
pp. 406-407, 442, 467, 485, fig. CC). Species from Crozet,
Kerguelen and St. Paul Is.

Die Klassification der Embiidinen nebst morphologischen und
physiologischen Bemerkungen, besonders tiber das Spinen derselben.
Zool. Anz. 35: 166-191. Grouping of Corrodentia discussed, pp.
171-172.

Eine Dekade neuer Copeognathengattungen. S.B. Ges. naturf. Fr.
Berl. 1910 (2): 63-77, 10 figs. Pelmatocoria, Steleops, Lichenomima,.
Phlotodes, Rhaptoneura, Euplocania, Labocoria, Colposeopsis, Tri-
gonosceliscus.

. Neue aussereuropdische Copeognathen. Zool. Anz. 36: 161-169, 4

figs. South America and Canary Islands.

. Die Copeognathen Norwegens. Nyt. Mag. Natury. 48: 318-323. List.
. Archipsocus dextor spec. nov. eine Gespinste anfertigende Copeognathe

aus Ostafrika. Zool. Anz. 37: 142-144, 2 figs. Title reads “dextor’,
text reads “textor.”

Die fossilen Copeognathen und ihre Phylogenie. Palaeontographica
58: 279-360, figs. A-S, pls. XXI-XXVII (figs. 1-103). Phylogeny
and classification of the order; key to fossil genera, systematic
account of fossil species.

Uber einige hervorragende neue Copeognathen-Gattungen. Zool. Anz.
39: 298-306, 2 figs. Anopistoscenea, Pentathyrsus, Udamolepis,
Thylacomorpha, Scoliopsyllopsis, Empheriella.

Uber die Gespinnste von Archipsocus recens Enderl. 1903 (mit
biologischen Beobachtungen von Edward Jacobson). Notes Leyden
Mus. 34: 157-160, pls. 4, 5.

Uber einige orientalische Copeognathen des Leidener Museums. Notes
Leyden Mus. 34: 161-162. 9 spp. and varieties listed.

Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. I, II. I. Zur Kenntnis
der Copeognathen Hawaii. II. Uber einige Copeognathen an
Zitronenbatimen in Ostafrika. Zool. Anz. 41: 354-360. (I. pp. 354-
358; II. pp. 358-360).

Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. III. Ueber einige von
Professor Silvestri in Westafrika gesammelte Copeognatha. Boll.
Lab. Zool. Portici 8: 240-241, 2 figs. 4 spp. dealt with.

Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognatha. IV. Zur Kenntnis der
Copeognathen des Kongogebietes. Zool. Anz. 49: 254-256, 3 figs.

Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. Psocus bastmannianus n.
sp. aus Finnland. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 41: 487-488, pl. 8, 1 fig.

Copeognatha. Collections Zoologique du Baron Edm. de_ Selys-
Longchamps 3 (2): 1-55, 10 figs., 5 pls.

a. In Brohmer, P. Fauna von Deutschland. Heidelberg. (Copeognatha:

pp. 135-139, 11 figs.)

Die Copeognathen der Hawaii-Inseln. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 43: 449-
460, pls. V, VI.

A scaly-winged Psocid, new to science, discovered in Britain. Ent.
mon. Mag. 58: 101-104. Pteroxanium squamosum. (A footnote in
Enderlein 1923a. reads: “Beitrage VI findet sich in Entomologist’s
Monthly Magazine, 3 ser. Vol. 8, 1922, page 101”).

Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. VII. Uber die Typen
Blanchards chilenisches Copeognathen. Zool. Anz. 55: 245-248,
1 fig. (A footnote to Enderlein, G. 1926a., p. 191, mentions this
paper as “Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen VIIa”).

Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. VII. Zwei neue Copeognathen
aus dem Museum Paris. Konowia 2: 32-33. One sp. from Ecuador
and one from Tunis. (A footnote to Enderlein, G. 1926a., p.
191, mentions this paper as “Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen
VIib”).

SMITHERS 161

1924a. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. VIII. Uber die Driisenhaare
der Larven und Nymphen einiger Gattungen der Copeognathen.
Tijdschr. Ent. 67: 72-74.

1924b. Copeognathen. Jn Damph, A., Zur Kenntnis der estlandischen Moor-
fauna (II). S.B. Ges. naturf. Fr. Berl. 31: 34-37.

1925. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. IX. Konowia 4: 97-108,
1 fig. Genera erected: Gigantopsocus, Colpostigma, Euclismia,
Ptycta, Brachinodiscus, Mecampsis, Coryphosmila, Palaeoseopsis,
Mepachycera. New spp. and records from South America, Africa,
Albania. (A footnote on p. 97 reads: “Es findet sich: VII. Uber
die Typen Blanchards chilenischer Copeognathen. Zoolog. Anz.
Bd. 55, 1923, pg. 245-248. VIII. (irrtimlich als VII. bezeichnet).
Zwei neue Copeognathen aus dem Museum Paris. Konowia II.
1923, pg. 32-33.”)

1926a. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen. X. Zwei neue chilenische
Copeognathen. Zool. Anz. 46: 191-192.

1926b. Die Copeognathen fauna Javas. Zool. Meded. 9: 50-70. New spp.
and list of 60 known spp. from Java.

1927. Copeognatha. Jn Brohmer, P., Ehrmann, P. and Ulmer, G. Die
Tierwelt Mitteleuropas. Leipzig. (Psocoptera: 4 Lief, 2, vii, 16 pp.
38 figs.) Classification, keys, illustrations to European spp.

1929a. Ueber die Drusenhaare der Larve der Fossilen Trichadenotecnum
trigonoscenea (Endl. 1911). Zool. Anz. 83: 177-180, 3 figs.

1929b. Entomologica Canaria ii. Zool. Anz. 84: 221-234, 15 figs. (Copeog-
natha: pp. 223-225, fig. 2).

1931. The Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the Indian Ocean in 1905
under the leadership of Mr. Stanley Gardiner, M. A. VIII. Die
Copeognathenfauna der Seychellen. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.)
(2) 19: 207-240, 52 figs., pls. 14-16. List of spp. known from
Seychelles, new spp. and records for area.

1932. Uber die systematische Stellung der Copeognathengattung Pseudopso-
cus Kolbe 1882. Zool. Anz. 98:224-226, 1 fig.

1936. Schwedisch-chinesische wissenschaftliche Expedition nach den nord-
westlichen Provincen Chinas. 30. Copeognatha. Ark. Zool. 27 (A)
(16): 1-7, 5 figs. (separate dated 1934).

Enock, F.
1897. (Report of minutes of meeting of Sth May, 1897). Proc. ent. Soc-
Lond. 1897: xviii. Alaptus fusculus Hal. in Stenopsocus cruciatus
eggs exhibited.

Esaki, T.
1932. Japan Insects Illustrations. 2240 pp., 24 Pls., over 4000 unnumbered
illustrations. Tokyo. (Psocids: pp. 1992-2001, with 20 figs., text
in Japanese except for names and an index).

Esaki, T. Hori, H. and Yosumatsu, K.
1938. Insectorum Japonicorum Illustratio Iconographica Coloribus ad’
pea Depicta. Tokyo. 426 pp. illustr. (Psocoptera: pp. 33-34,
pl. 14).

Esben-Petersen, P.

1910. Tllustrerede Haandbgger over den Danske Dyreverden. 8. Guldsmede,
Dognfluer, Slorvinger og Copeognather. Copenhagen. 163 pp., 133
figs. (Copeognatha: pp. 134-163, figs. 120-133). Characters, keys,
descriptions of Danish spp.

1933. Bidrag til en Fortegnelse over Pornholms Insektfauna. Orthoptera,
Plecoptera, Ephemeroptera, Odonata, Copeognatha, Neuroptera,
Mecoptera, Trichoptera. Ent. Medd. 18: 215-238. (Copeognatha:
pp. 225-226).

162 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Escherich, K.

1934. Zur bionomie der Copeognathen (Staublause). Z. angew. Ent. 2 (4):

636-638. Notes on habits of Ectopsocus parvulus Kolbe.
Essig, E.

1926. Insects of Western North America. New York. i-ix, 1035, 766 figs.
(Corrodentia: pp. 123-125).

1940. A seed-infesting Psocid new to North America. J. econ. Ent. 33:946.
Lepinotus patruelis.

1951. College Entomology. New York. (Corrodentia: pp. 184-192).

1958. Insects and Mites of Western North America. New York. i-xiv, 1050,
pp. 766, figs.

Everts, J. G.

1925. Wetenschappelijke mededeelingen. Tijdsch. Ent. 68: I-IV. (Psocid p.
1V). Clothilla inquilina in Coriander seed.

Fabian, S.
1943. See Dudich, E. et al, 1943.

Fabricius, J. C.

1775. Systema Entomologiae, sistens Insectorum classes, ordines, genera,
species, adiectis synonymis, locis, descriptionibus, observationibus.
Flensbergi et Lipsiae. 8, 16 and 832 pp.

1777. Genera Insectorum eorumque characteres naturales secundum nunc)
um, figuram, situm et proportionem omnium partium oris adjecta
mantissa specierum mnuper detectarum. Chilonii, Bartsch. 310 pp.

1779. Reise nach Norwegen mit Bermerkungen aus der Naturhistorie und
Oekonomie. Hamburg. 388 pp.

1781. Species Insectorum exhibentes eorum differentias, specificas, synonyma
auctorum, loca natalis, metamorphosin adiectis observationibus,
descriptionibus. Hamburgi et Kilonii. 2 vols. Vol. I, i-viii, 552 pp.;
Vol. Ul, 494 pp.

1787. Mantissa insectorum sistens eorum species nuper detectas adiectis
characteribus, geiericis, differentiis specificis, | emendationibus,
observationibus. Hafniae. 2 Vols. Vol. I. i-xx, 348 pp.; Vol. II,
382 pp.

1793. © Entomologia systematica emendata et aucta, secundum classes, ordines,
genera, species, adiectis, synonymis, locis, observationibus, descrip-
tionibus. Hafniae. 4 vols. (Psocids: Part II: 81-87).

1798. Supplementum Entomologiae systematicae. Hafniae.

Fabricius, O.
1780. Fauna Groenlandica. Hafniae et Lipsiae. 452 pp.

Farquharson, C. O.

1921. Five years’ Observations (1914-1918) on the Bionomics of Southern
Nigerian Insects, chiefly directed to the investigation of Lycaenid
Life-histories and to the Relation of Lycaenidae, Diptera and
other Insects to Ants. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond. 1921: 319-448.
(Psocidae: pp. 418-420).

Fernald, R. T. and Shepard, H. H.
1955. Applied entomology; an introductory textbook of insects in their

relations to man. New York. 5th. ed. 385 pp., illustr. (Corrodentia:
py 3102):

Fernando, W.

1934. The early embryology of a viviparous Psocid. Quart. J. micr. Sci.
77 (1): 99-119, 19 figs. Archipsocus feriandi.

SMITHERS 163

Ferriere, C.

1926. Notes sur les Chalcidiens de la Suisse. 2. Un setae des oeufs de
Psocides. Schweiz. ent. Anz. 5 (9): 1-3,

1930. On some egg parasites from Africa. Bull. ent. a 21 (1): 33-44,
6 figs. (Parasites of psocids: pp. 41, 42).

Finlayson, L. H.
1949. The life-history and anatomy of Lepinotus patruelis Pearman
(Psocoptera-Atropidae). Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 119 (2): 301-323,
12 figs.
Finlayson, L. R.
1933a. Some notes on the biology and Life-history of Psocids. Sci. Agric.
13: 404. Liposcelis (Troctes) divinatorius feeding on Sitotroga eggs.
1933b. Some notes on the biology and life-history of Psocids. Rep. ent. Soc.
Ont. 63: 56-58. Liposcelis divinatorius.
Fischer, L. H.
1850. Beitrage zur Insecten-Fauna um Freiburg im Breisgau. (Zweite Fort-
setz.). 17. Jahresb. des Mannheim Ver. ftir Naturk. 8: 60-70.
Fitch, ©. A.
1880. Insects bred from Cynips kollari galls. Entomologist 13: 252-263.
(Psocid: p. 263).
Fletcher, J. E.
1880. Occurrence of Stenopsocus stigmaticus Imhoff, near Worcester. Ent.

mon. Mag. 16: 211

Fourcroy, A. F.
1785. Entomologia parisiensis. Paris. 2 vols.

Franceschi, T.
1955. see *Conci, «1953.

Franciscola, M. E.
1955. Fauna cavernicola del Savonese. Ann. Mus. civico Stor. nat. Genoa
67: 1-223, 6 figs.
Fravenfeld, G. von
1867. Zoologische Miscellen XI. Ver. zool. -bot. Ges. Wien 17: 445.

Freeman, J. A.

1945. Studies on the distribution of insects by aerial currents. The insect
population of the air from ground level to 300 feet. J. Anim. Ecol.
14: 128-154, 3 graphs.

Freeman, P.

1938. Notes on the nesting habits of five species of solitary wasps
(Hymenoptera, Sphecoidea). Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (A) 13 (1/3):
1-6. (Psocoptera: pp. 1-2). Lists psocid prey of Rhopalum clavipes.

Frickhinger, H. W.
1929. Massenauftreten von Holzlausen. Z. angew. 15: 640.

Frisch, J. L.

1734. Beschreibung von allerley Insecten in Teutschland, nebst niitzlichen
Anmerkungen und nothigen Abbildungen von diesem kriechenden
und fliegenden inlandischen Gewiirme etc. Berlin. 13 vols. (Psocids:
Vol. 11, pp. 1-3, pl. 10, figs. 1-4).

164 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Fristrup, B.

1942. The Zoology of Iceland. Copenhagen. (Copeognatha: in Vol. 3,
part 41, 4 pp.) Lists 4 spp.

Frost, S. W.

1963. Winter insect light trapping at the Archbold Biological Station, Florida.
Flor. Ent. 46 (1): 23-43. (Psocid: p. 30). Psocus leidyi.

Gadeau, H. de Kerrville

1932. Mélanges Entomologiques. 5e Memoire. II. Catalogue embryonnaire
des Neuroptéres, Megaloptéres, Rhaphidioptéres, Mecoptéres,
Psocoptéres, Plecoptéres, Ephemeroptéres et Trichoptéres de la
Normandie. Bull. Soc. Amis Sci. nat. Rouen. 66-67: 263-492, 2 pls.
(Psocoptera: pp. 367-374).

Gahan, A. B.

1927. Description of a new species of Mymaridae parasitic in psocid eggs
(Hymen.). Pan-Pacific Ent. 3: 180-181. Host not given.

Gahan, C. J.

1891. (Exhibit of Atropos pulsatoria at meeting of December 2nd, 1891).
Proc. ent. Soc. Lond. 1891: xxxii-xxxill. Reported being convinced
that pulsatoria makes a ticking noise.

Gambles, R. M.
1932. The Psocoptera of Wicken Fen. Nat. hist. Wicken Fen. 6: 567-579,
4 figs.
1933. Mesopsocus laticeps (Kolbe) a psocid new to Britain. Ent. mon.
Mag. 69: 224-226, 2 figs.
1935. Scottish Psocoptera. Scot. Nat. 231: 83-88.

Garcia del Cid, F.

1940. Insectos biblidfagos y sus enemigos en las bibliotecas de Catalufia.
Vi, Congr. int. Ent. Madrid. 1935, 1: 399-404, 2 figs., pl. xii.

(See also 1940, Rev. appl. Ent. (A) 28: 555). Liposcelis divinator-
ius.

Gay, C.
1851. See Blanchard, E. 1851.
Geer, C. de

1778. Mémoires pour servir a lhistoire des Insectes. Stockholm. 7 vols.
(Psocids: Vol. 7, pp. 41-48, 868, 869, pl. 4, figs. 1-4).

Geoffrey, E. L.
1799. Histoire abrégée des insectes qui se trouvent aux environs de Paris,
dans laquelle ces animaux sont rangés suivant un ordre methodique.
Paris. 2 vols. (Pou de bois: Vol. 2, p. 596).
George, V. P.
1952. On some arthropod microfossils from India. Agra Univ. J. Res.
1 (Sci.): 83-108, 79 figs. (Corrodentia: p. 85).
Ghani, M. A. and Sweetman, H. L.
1951. Ecological studies of the book-louse, Liposcelis divinatorius (Mull.)
Ecology 32: 230-244, 6 figs.
Ghesquiere, J.

1947. Ectopsocus palmicoles du Congo belge. Bull. Cerc. zool. Congolais
18 (2): 40-41. Notes on habits and_ habitats.

SMITHERS 165

Giard, A.
1895. Sur un exemplaire chilien de Pterodela pedicularia L. a nervation
doublement anormale. Act. Soc. sci. Chili 5: 18-21. A translation
of this is Giard, A. 1896.
1896. On a chilean example of Pterodela pedicularia L. with a doubly
abnormal nervation. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (6) 17: 111-112, 4 figs.
This is a translation of Giard, A. 1895.

Giese, B.
1964. Ergebnisse der Albanien — Expedition 1961 des Deutschen Entomo-
logischen Institutes. 20 Beitrag. Psocoptera. Beitr. zur Ent. 14
(3/4): 245-249. (In German with summaries in Russian and
English). List, distributions.

Girard, M.

1876. Traité élémentaire d’Entomologie. Paris. (Neuroptera: Vol. 2, pp.
260-570).

Girault, A. A.

1908. A monographic Catalogue of the Mymarid genus Alaptus Haliday,
with descriptions of three new North American forms and of
Alaptus iceryae Riley from type material. Ann. ent. Soc. Amer.
1: 179-195, 5 figs. (Psocid parasites: pp. 187-190, fig. 3).

1910. Synonymic and descriptive notes on the Chalcidoid family Mymaridae.
J.N.Y. ent Soc. 18:233-259. (Psocid parasite p. 244).

1914. Hosts of Insect egg-parasites in Europe, Asia, Africa and Australasia,
with a supplementary American list. Z. wiss. Insektbiol. 10: 87-91,
135-139, 175-178, 238-240. (Platyptera: p. 91). 2 spp. of Alaptus
from Stenopsocus cruciatus (L.).

Glick, P. A.

1939. The distribution of insects, spiders and mites in the air. Tech. Bull.
U.S. Dep. Agric. 673: 1-150, 13 figs, 5 pls.

Goss, R. J.

1952. The early embryology of the book-louse, Liposcelis divergens
Badonnel (Psocoptera) (Liposcelidae). J. Morph. 91 (1): 135-167,
2 pis.
1953. The advanced embryology of the book louse Liposcelis divergens
Badonnel (Psocoptera) (Liposcelidae). J. Morph. 92 (1): 157-205,
Is.
1954. Ovarian development and odgenesis in the book-louse, Liposcelis
divergens Badonnel (Psocoptera, Liposcelidae). Ann. ent. Soc. Amer.
47 (1): 190-207, 2 pls.

Graff, M.
1840. Untrigliches Mittel gegen Bucherlatise (Termes pulsatorius). Stettin.
ent Zits. Ws (62.
Grasse, P.

1949. See Jeannel, R. 1949.
1951. See Badonnel, A. 1951.

Green, E. E.
1906. Supplementary note on the Scaly-winged Copeognatha. Spolia zeylan.
4: 123-125. Supplementary to Enderlein, G. 1906e.
1912. Note on a web-spinning Psocid. Spolia zeylan. 8: 71-72, 1 fig. 1 pl.
Webbing of A rchipsocus sp. and its being preyed upon by Ploiariola
polita and “orange-red larvae of a series of Thrips.”

166 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Gregorio, A. de
1915. Sul Troctes divinatorius Mull. Nat. sicil. 22: 198-199, pl. 26.

Gressitt, J. L. and Weber, N. A.
1959. Bibliographic Introduction to Antarctic-Subantarctic Entomology.
Pacific Insects 1 (4): 441-480, 1 fig. Previous records of psocids
from area quoted.

Griffini, A.
1897. Imenotteri, Neurotteri, Pseudoneurotteri, Orthotteri e Rincoti Italiani.
Manuali Hoepli Entomologia. 1V, Milan. 687 pp., 243 figs. (Psocids:
pp. 312-315, figs. 102-103).

Guermonprez, H. L. F.
1902. Ectopsocus briggsi McL., abundant at Bognor. Ent. mon. Mag. 38:
88

1906. Reuterella helvimacula End., a new genus and species to the list
of British Psocidae and the discovery of its hitherto unknown male.
Ent. mon. Mag. 42: 57-59, pl. I

Gurney, A. B.

1939. Nomenclatural notes on Corrodentia, with descriptions of two new
species of Archipsocus. J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 29 (11): 501-515,
15 figs. Use of Trogium, Atropos, Troctes, Lachesilla, Clothilla,
Liposcelis and ordinal names discussed.

1943. A synopsis of the Psocids of the tribe Psyllipsocini, including the
description of an unusual new genus from Arizona. (Corrodentia,
Empheriidae, Empheriinae). Ann. ent. Soc. Amer. 36 (2): 195-220,
6 pls.

1949. Distributional and synonymic notes on Psocids common to Europe
and North America, with remarks on the distribution of Holarctic
insects (Corrodentia). J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 39 (2): 56-65.

1950. Psocids likely to be encountered by Pest Control Operators. Pest
Control Technology, Entomological Section (National Pest Control
Association). (Corrodentia: pp. 131-163, figs. 61-63).

1962. Psocoptera. Encycl. Brit. 18: 667.

Hagen, H.

1849. Uebersicht der neueren Literatur betreffend die Neuropteren Linn.
Stettin. ent. Ztg. 10: 55-61. (Psocidae: pp. 56-58).

1851. Henman ilonische Notizen. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 12: 164-166. (Lepinotus:
p. )

1854. Ueber die Neuropteren der Bernsteinfauna. Verh. zool. -bot. Ges.
Wien 4: 221-232. (Psocids: pp. 225-226).

1856. Die im Bernstein befindlichen Neuropteren der Vorwelt. Jn Berendt,
G. Die im Bernstein befindlichen organischen Reste der Vorwelt
etc. Berlin. (Psociden: pp. 57-64, Taf. V, figs. 9-11; Taf. VII, fig.
21; Taf VIII, figs. 6-10).

1858a. Russlands Neuropteren. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 19: 110-134. (Psocoptera:
p. 134).

1858b. Synopsis Neuroptera Ceylons. I Theil. Verh. zool. -bot. Ges. Wien
8: 471-489. (Psocidae: pp. 473-475).

1859. Synopsis der Neuroptera Ceylons. II Theil. Verh. zool. -bot. Ges.
Wien 9: 199-212. (Psocina: pp. 199-205).

1861a. Synopsis of the British Psocidae. Entomologist’s Annual 1861: 17-32.

1861b. Synopsis of the Neuroptera of North America; with a list of South
American species. Smithson. misc. Coll. 4 (1): xx, 358 pp. (Psocids:
pp. 7-14, 302).

1863. Observations on certain North American Neuroptera. Proc. ent.
Soc. Philad. 2: 167-182. (Psocids: pp. 167-168). Translated and
with notes by B. D. Walsh. See also Walsh, B. D. 1863.

SMITHERS 167

1865a. The Neuroptera of Madeira. Ent. mon. Mag. 2: 8-11, 25-28, 59-62,
75-81. (Psocids: pp. 9-11).

1865b. Synopsis of the Psocina without ocelli. Ent. mon. Mag. 2: 121-124.

1865c. On some aberrant genera of Psocina. Ent. mon. Mag. 2: 148-152.
Continued as Hagen, H. 1866a.

1865d. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Phryganiden. V. Neuropteren um Zurich
nach Bremi’s Mitteilungen. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 26: 228-232. (Psocids:
pp. 229-231). 10 spp. listed.

1866a. On some aberrant genera of Psocina. Ent. mon. Mag. 2: 170-172.
Continuation of Hagen, H. 1865c.

1866b. Psocinorum et Embidinorum Synopsis synonymica. Verh. zool. -bot.
Ges. Wien 16: 201-222.

1866c. Beitrage zur Kenntnis und Synonymie der Psociden. Stettin. ent Ztg.
27: 188-196, 233-244.

1873. Report on the Pseudoneuroptera and Neuroptera of North America
in the collection of the late T. H. Harris. Proc. Boston. Soc. nat.
Hist. 15: 263-301. (Corrodentia: pp. 277-281). 9 spp. listed.

1876. Pseudoneuroptera. Jn Kidder. J. H. Contributions to the Natural History
of Kerguelen Island made in connection with the United States
transit of Venus Expedition, 1874-75. II. Bull. U.S. nat. Mus.
1 (3): 1-122. (Psocoptera: pp. 52-57).

1881-2. Some Psocina of the United States. Psyche, Camb. Mass. 3: 195-196,
207-210, 219-223, (1881); 402 (1882).

1882. Beitrage zur Monographie der Psociden. Ueber Psociden im Bern-
stein. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 43: 265-276, 217-237, 276-300, 524-526,
pls. I, II. The pagination given is the sequence intended; an
editorial note on p. 265 explains how the error in sequence
occurred. The section commencing on p. 217 is headed “Ueber
Psociden im Bernstein.” This paper is continued as Hagen, H.
1883b.

1883a. The Tarsal and antennal Characters of Psocidae. Ent. mon. Mag. 19:
12-13. (Psyche, Camb., Mass. 4: 52).

1883b. Beitrige zur Monographie der Psociden. Familie Atropina. Stettin.
ent. Ztg. 44: 285-332. A continuation of Hagen, H. 1882. “Fortset-
zung des Artikels von Jahrgang 1882 Seite 300.”

1886. Kurze Bemerktingen ueber das Fltigelgedder der Insekten. Wien.
ent. Ztg. 5: 311-312.

Haller, G.
1874. Ueber einige bis jetzt weniger bekannte Tonapparate der Insekten.
Zool. Gart., Lpz. 15: 106-110, 223-226. (Psocid: pp. 108, 226).
Troctes pulsatorius.

Hamard, G.
1959a. See Badonnel, A. and Hamard, G. 1959.
1959b. Contribution a létude des Psocoptéres (II). Apercu systematique
sur la faune de Psocoptera de la région de Rennes (Bretagne,
France) comprenant notamment deux especes nouvelles pour
la faune frangaise, Elipsocus nuptialis Roesler, Elipsocus pallidus
Jentsch. Vie et Milieu. Paris 10: 412-416, fig.

Hamard-Rose, G.
1962. Sur le polymorphisme alaire chez le Psoque Psyllipsocus ramburi
S.L. (Insecte, Psocoptéere) et ses relations avec l’effet de groupe.
C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris 254 (7): 1329-1330.

Handlirsch, A.
1904. Zur Systematik der Hexapoden. Zool. Anz. 27 (23/24): 733-759.
1905. Phylogenetisches ber Insekten. Zool. Anz. 28: 664-670, 4 figs.
1906-8. Die Fossilen Insekten und die Phylogenie der rezenten Formen.
Leipzig. i-ix, 1430 pp., pls. I-LI. (Copeognatha: pp. 27, 702-704,
1098, 1182, 1220, 1221, 1238, 1290).

168 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1910. Zur Kenntnis ‘“fruhjurassischer Copeognathen und Coniopterygiden”
und Uber das Schicksal der Archipsylliden. Zool. Anz. 35: 233-240,
6 figs.

1925. Corrodentia. 7n Schroder, C. Handbuch der Entomologie. Jena. (Cor-
rodentia: Vol. 3, pp. 507-515).

1930. Ordnung Corrodentia, Jn Kiikenthal, W. and Krumbach, T. Handbuch
der Zoologie. Berlin and Leipzig. Vol. 4, i-xiv, 892 pp. 945 figs.
(Corrodentia: Vol. 4, pp. 863-876, figs. 909-927).

Handschin, E.

1961. Insekten in eingelagertem Holz. Verh. naturf. Ges. Basel. 72 (1):
88-99. (Psocoptera: pp. 89-99). 27 spp. listed.

Hanow, M. C.
1737. Erlatierte Merkwirdigkeiten der Natur. Danzig. i-vi, 426 pp.
1753. Seltenheiten der Natur und Oekonomie, nebst deren Kurzen Beschrie-
bung u. Erorterung etc. Leipzig. 3 vols.

Hardy, J.

1848. On the manner in which the Female of Psocus quadripunctatus con-
structs a web to protect her eggs. Newman’s Zoologist 6: 2221-
2222»

Hargreaves, E.
19155) See? (Corbett, Gy He and) Harereaves;) 5 LOTS:

Harper-Gray, R. A.

1917. Notes on a plague of psocids in a factory. Ann. appl. Biol. 4: 47-49.
Caecilius pedicularius.

Harris, T. W.

1869. Entomological Correspondence of Thaddeus William Harris, M. D.
Edited by S. H. Scudder Occ. Pap. Boston Soc. nat. Hist. 1:
i-xlvii, 375 pp., 46 figs., 4 pls. Psocids on pp. 327-333 in “Descriptions
of insects selected from the manuscripts of Dr. Harris” pp. 325-
336; 8 psocids are described most or all of which are now known
to be synonymous with described species, several so indicated by
S. H. Scudder.

Harrison, J. W. H.

1916a. A November week at Grange-over-Sands. V. Psocoptera collected
by Richard S. Bagnall, F.L.S. Lancs. Nat. 9: 107-109.

1916b. Notes on Psocoptera. Entomologist 49: 134-135. A few British
spp. mentioned.

1923a. Leptella fusciceps and how to rear it and other minute Psocidae.
Vasculum 10: 15-16.

1923b. Notes and Records. Vasculum 9: 61-63. (Psocoptera: p. 62). Records
for Leptella fusciceps and Reuterella helvimacula.

Hart, T. H.

1880. Extreme abundance of Caecilius pedicularius. Ent. mon. Mag. 17:
141-142. In cornfields in Kent, England. A query by Hart as to
identification is answered by R. McLachlan.

Hartmann, F.
1951. Die Psociden (Copeognathen) der Umgebung von Basel. Verh. naturf.
Ges. Basel 62: 91-180, 19 figs.
Hartmeyer, R.
1907. See Enderlein, G. 1907b.

SMITHERS 169

Haskell, P. T.
1961. Insect Sounds. London: 1-190, figs. 1-95. (Psocoptera, pp. 29, 50,
59, 109 & 153).
Hawkins, J.
1939. Corrodentia as pests of ground feed. J. econ. Ent. 32: 467. Troctes
divinatorius in America. :
Heller, W.

1928. En for faunan ny psocid, Lepinotus formicarius Hag. Medd. Soc.
; Fauna Fl. fenn. 4: 30.

Henriksen, K. L.

1929. Copeognatha. Zoology of the Faroes. Copenhagen. (Copeognatha:
Vol. 2, Part 1, xxxvi, 1 page). Atropos pulsatoria.

1939. A revised index of the insects of Grgnland containing a supplement
to the insect list of Kai L. Henriksen and Will. Lundbeck. Medd.

Gronland 119 (10): 1-112.
Henriksen, K. L. and Lundbeck, W.
1917. Landarthropoder (Insects et Arachnidae). Medd. Groénland 22: 481-821.
(Psocids: p. 707).
Herford, G. V. B.
1930. See Richards, O. W. and Herford, G. V. B. 1930.

Heyden, G. H.
1850. Zwei neue deutsche Neuropteren-Gattungen. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 11:
83-85. (Psocina: pp. 84-85).
Heymons, R.
1909. Ein neuer Troctes als Schadling in Buchweizengrutze. Dtsch. ent. Z.
1909: 452-455, 3 figs.
Hickin, N. E. and Robins, E. L. D.
1945. Psocids infesting puppies. Ent. mon. Mag. 81: 214. Trogium pulsator-
ium.
Hickman, V. V.
1934. A contribution to the study of Tasmanian Copeognatha. Pap. roy.
Soc. Tasm. 1933: 77-89, 6 figs.
Hicks, E. A.

1959. Check list and Bibliography of the occurrence of insects in birds’
nests. Ames. 681 pp. (Corrodentia: pp. 158-164). Bibliographical

references and named bird hosts.
Hilton, W. A.
1937. Nervous system and sense organs. LXVIII. Corrodentia. J. Ent. Zool.
29 (4): 97-98, 1 fig.
Hincks, W. D.
1960. A new British species of the genus Alaptus Haliday (Hym., Mymari-
dae). Entomologist 93: 170-172, 3 figs. Reared from Psocid eggs.
Hobby, B. M.

1944. See Broadhead, E. and Hobby, B. M. 1944.
1945. See Broadhead, E. and Hobby, B. M. 1945.

170 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Hodges, F. A.
1958. See Daly, A. W., Blomquist, V. H. and Hodges, F. A. 1958.

Hodson, A. C.
1960. Rearing of book lice for biological studies. Proc. ent. Soc. Amer.
15-166;

Holzapfel, M.
1932. Die Gewachshausfauna des Berner Botanischen Gartens. Rev. suisse
Zool. 39: 325-374. (Psocids: pp. 342-343). Trichopsocus hirtellus
(McL.) and Ectopsocus briggsi (McL.) listed as found in greenhouse.
1936. Zur Kenntnis der schweizerischen Copeognathen-fauna. Rev. suisse
Zool. 43: 335-357.

Hoppe, T. C.
1745. Anmerkungen tber die sogenannten Todtenuhr-Insecten (Psocus).
Gera. 16 pp.
Hori, H.
1938. See Esaki, T., Hori, H. and Yosumatsu, K. 1938.
Houlbert, C.
1903. Les insectes ennemis des livres. Leurs moeurs, moyen de les détruire.
Paris.

Houltuin, M.
1768. Natuurlijke historie of wuitvoerige beschrijving der Dieren. Planten
en Mineraalen, volgens het samenstel van den Heer Linnaeus.
Amsterdam. 3 vols. (Neuroptera: Vol. 1, pp. 1-104).

Howard, O.

1902. Minutes of meeting of May 8th, 1904. Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 5: 103.
Notes Peyerimhoff, P. de, 1901 and says the swallowing of air
by moulting psocids was described in Hubbard, H. G. 1885,
p. 195 in case of Psocus citricola.

Hubbard, H. G.

1880. Two days collecting in the Mammoth Cave, with contributions to a
study of its fauna. Amer. Ent. 3: 34-40, 79-84.

1885. Insects affecting the orange. Washington. i-x, 220 pp., 14 pls.
(Psocoptera: pp. 193-196).

Huber, P.
1843. Mémoire pour servir a histoire des Psoques. Mém. Soc. Phys.
Geneve 10: 35.

Hudson, G. V.

1892. An elementary Manual of New Zealand Entomology. London. 122
pp., frontis., 20 Pls. (Psocidae p. 107, pl. xvi, figs., 2, 2a). Psocus
zelandicus figured, pl. XVI, figs., 2, 2a.

Huie, L. H.
1916. Observations on the hatching of Stenopsocus cruciatus. Scot. Nat.
1916: 61-65, fig. 5, pl. I.
Hurd, P. D., Smith, R. F. and Durham, J. W.

1962. The fossiliferous amber of Chiapas, Mexico. Cienca (Mex.) 21:
107-118, 1 pl. Mentions Amphientomidae, Liposcelidae and
Myopsocidae as occurring.

SMiTHERS 172

Husson, R. !
1936. Contribution 4 l’étude de la Faune des cavités souterraines artificielles-

Ann. Sci. nat. 19: 5-30. (Psocids: p. 13).

Hutton, F. W.
1899. The Neuroptera of New Zealand. Trans. Proc. N.Z. Inst. 31: 208-249-

(Psocids: p. 211).

Iharos, A.
1943. See Dudich, E. et al. 1943.

Iliger, J. C. W.
1798. Kugelann Verzeichniss der Kafer Preussens, ausgearbeitet von Illiger,
mit einer vorrede von Hellwig und angehangten Versuch einer
natirlichen ordnung und Gattungsfolge der Insecten. Halle. i-xli,

510 pp.

Imhoff, L. and Labram, J. D.
1846. IJInsecten der Schweiz. Basel.

Imms, A. D.
1957. A General Textbook of Entomology. (9th Ed. revised by Richards,
O. W. and Davies, R. G.) London. i-x, 886 pp., 609 figs. (Psocoptera:
pp. 252, 399-405, figs. 318-321).

Iwata, k.
1939. Habits of Rhinonitela domestica Williams, a minute booklouse-hunter
in Formosa. Mushi 12 (1): 13-16.

Jacobson, E.
1912. See Enderlein, G. 1912b.
1924. Zur Kenntnis der Biologie javanischer Copeognathen. Tijdschr. Ent-
67: suppl. 65-71. Spinning; Psocus flavistigma, Lichenomima suma-
trana.

Jacobson, G. G. and Bianchi, W. L.
1904. Die Orthopteren und Pseudoneuropteren des Russischen Reiches und
der angrenzenden Lander (Russisch). Petersburg. (Psocoptera: pp-
482-496, 48 figs).

Jeannel, R.
1926. Faune cavernicole de la France, avec une étude des conditions
d’existence dans la domaine souterraine. Encycl. ent. (A) 7: 1-334,
74 figs. (Psocids: pp. 207-208). Prionoglaris stygia End. and
Nymphopsocus troglodytes End. recorded.
1949. In Grassé, P. Traité de Zoologie. Paris. 17 vols. (Fossil Psocoptera:
Vol. 9, pp. 78-79, fig. 84).

Jentsch, S.

1936. Ovoviviparie bei einer einheimischen Copeognathenart (Hyperetes
guestfalicus). Zool. Anz. 116: 287-289, 2 figs.

1938a. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Uberordnung Psocoidea. 3. Die Gattung
Amphigerontia (Copeognatha). Zool. Anz. 122: 87-94, 5 figs.

1938b. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Uberordnung Psocoidea. Zur Copeognathen-
fauna Nordwesfalens. Abh. westfal. Prov. Mus. naturk. 9 (4):
3-42, 55 figs.

1939a. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Uberordnung Psocoidea. 7. Vergleichend
entwicklungbiologische und Okologische Untersuchungen an ein-
heimischen Psocopteren unter besonderer Bertcksichtigung der
Art Hyperetes guestfalicus Kolbe 1880. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 73: 1-46,
9 figs.

172 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1939b. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Oberordnung Psocoidea. 8. Die Gattung
Ectopsocus (Psocoptera). Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 73: 111-128, 18 figs.

1939c. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Uberordnung Psocoidea. 9. Zur Kenntnis
der Psocopterenfauna in Nordwest deutschland. Verh. Ver. naturw.
Unterh. (Heimatforsch) Hamb. 27: 114-121. 40 spp. listed.

1940. Beitraége zur Kenntnis der UOberordnung Psocoidea. 10. Zur Morphologie
des Gehirns und Lichtsinnesorgane der Psocopteren. Zool. Jb. Abi.
Anat. 66: 403-436, 28 figs. Morphology of brain and sense organs
for perceiving light studied in Hyperetes guestfalicus, Liposcelis
divinatorius, Psyllipsocus ramburii (and its var. destructor), Ecto-

psocus meridionalis, Mesopsocus immunis and Amphigerontia
contaminata.

Karl, O.

1937. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Insektenfauna Ostpommerns. Netzflugler,
Geradfligler und Holzlatise. Dohrniana 16: 56-60

Karlshoven, L. G. E.

1950. De plagen van de cultuurgewassen in Indonesie. Deel. 1. The Hague.
512 pp., illustr. (Psocoptera: p. 145).
Karny, H. H.

1921. Zur Systematik der Orthopteroiden Insekten. Treubia 1: 207-210.
1924. On a new Empheriid from Uganda (Copeognatha). Ann. Mag. nat.
Hist. (9) 14 (25): 245-246, 4 figs. Psylloneura ugandana.

1925. On the Copeognatha from Mt. Murud and Mt. Dulit, Sarawak.

Sarawak Mus. J. 3 (8): 63-74, 1 pl.

1926a. On some tropical Copeognatha, especially from Fiji Islands. Bull.
ent. Res. 16: 285-290, 5 figs. Fiji, Nigeria, Tahiti.

1926b. In Dammerman, K. W. The fauna of Durian and the Rhio-Luigga
Archipelago. Treubia 8: 281-326, 1 pl. (Copeognatha: p. 314). 4

. spp. mentioned, generic identification only.

1930. Zur Systematik der Orthopteroiden Insekten. Il. Treubia 12: 431-461.
Keys to tribes, recent and fossil; index to genera; higher classi-
fication.

1932. Psocoptera. Insects of Samoa 7 (4): 117-129, 8 figs.

Karny, R.
1926. Uma nova especie de Epipsocus do Brasil. Publ. Mus. nae. Rio de J.
8:

‘Katiyar, K.
1953. See Roonwal, M. L. et al. 1953.

Kawall, J. H.

1864. Verzeichnis der Orthopteren und Neuropteren Kurlands. Korr. Blatt.
naturf. Ver. Riga 14: 155-168.

Keler, S. von

1953. Staublaiise. Leipzig, Neue Brehm-Bucherei. Heft 110., 48 pp.,
20 figs.

Kellogg, V. L.

1896. New Mallophaga. II. From land birds together with an account of
the mallophagous mouthparts. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. (2) 4: 431-
548, pls. 60-73. (Psocidae: pp. 463-468, pl. 64, figs. 5-11).
(Summary in J.R. micr. Soc. 1897: 122).

1902. Are the Mallophaga degenerate Psocids? Psyche, Camb., Mass.
9: 339-343.

SMITHERS 173

Kemner, N. A.
1933. Om insekter och insektador i herbarier. Bot. Notiser 1-3: 439-455,
7 figs. (Psocid: pp. 447-448). Troctes divinatorius. See also
Rev. appl. Ent. (A) 22: 243.

Kemp, S. V. 3
1903. Psocidia at Missenden, Bucks. Entomologist 36:49. 7 spp. listed
from Missenden, England.

Kemper, H.
1935. Die Pelz- und Textilschadlinge und ihre Bekampfung. Kleintier uw.
Pelzt. 11 (4/5): 123-187.
1950. Die Haus- und Gesundheitschadlinge und ihre Bekampfung. Ein
Lehr- und Nachschlaagebuch fiir den Schadlings bekamfer. Berlin.
344 pp., 242 figs.

Kidder, J. H.
1876. See Hagen, H. 1876.

Kimmins, D. E.

1929. Notes on British Psocoptera in 1928. Entomologist 62: 100.

1940. Peripsocus subfasciatus (Ramb.) (Psocopt.) under stones. Ent. mon.
Mag. 76

1941a. The Types of some genera of Plecoptera and Psocoptera. Entomologist
74: 87. Type species designated for: Cerastipsocus Kolbe, Holoneura
Tetens, Myopsocus Hagen, Peripsocus Hagen, Ptilopsocus Enderlein.

1941b. Notes on British Psocoptera. I. Elipsocus hyalinus (Steph.) and _ its
allies. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (11) 7: 520-530, 5 figs. E. mclachlani
sp.n. (E. hyalinus McL. not Stephens) additional description, distri-
bution and discussion of identity and synonymy of E. hyalinus
and E. westwoodi.

1941c. Lepidilla kelloggi Rib. (Psocoptera) in Westmorland. J. Soc. Brit.
Ent. 2 (3): 98.

1941d. Lepidilla kelloggi and Caecilius piceus Rib. var. brevipennis End. in
Surrey (Psocoptera). J. Soc. Brit. Ent. 2 (3): 98-99.

194le. A list of the Psocoptera of Kent, Surrey and Sussex, with a revised
list of the British species. J. Soc. Brit. Ent. 2 (3): 93-98. Lists
68 spp. for Britain.

1943. Some records of Lake District Psocoptera. J. Soc. Brit. Ent. 2 (4):
157-158.

King, J. J. F. X.

1882. Notes on the Neuroptera of Strathglass, Invernesshire. Ent. mon.
Mag. 19: 8-12. (Psocidae: p. 11). 12 spp. listed.

1883. Occurrence of Caecilius piceus Kolbe in Britain. Ent. mon. Mag.
20: 142. A note by R. McLachlan is attached on identity of
specimens and distribution of species.

1885a. Elipsocus cyanops Rost. in Scotland and Caecilius piceus Kolbe
in England. Proc. nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow (2) 1: 1

1885b. Notes on the Neuroptera of Argyllshire. Trans. nat. Hist. Soe.
Glasgow (2) 1: 163-169

1886a. Notes on the Neuroptera of Rothiemurchus and Kingussie. Trans.
nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow 1: 354-365. (Psocoptera: pp. 356-357).

1886b. Caecilius piceus Kolbe and C. burmeisteri Brauer in Scotland. Ent.
mon. Mag. 23: 39. Records two spp. in Scotland.

1888. A contribution towards a catalogue of the Neuropterous fauna of
Ireland. Trans. nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow 2: 259-292.

1889. (Reprint of King, J. J. F. X. 1888). Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow.
1-38. (Psocoptera: pp. 7-10).

174 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1899. Pseudo-Neuroptera, Planipennia and Trichoptera collected at Rannock
in June, 1898. Ent. mon. Mag. 35: 80-83. (Psocidae: p. 81)-
2 spp. listed.

1900. Neuroptera collected in the upper portion of Strathglass in 1899.
Ent. mon. Mag. 36: 181-185. (Psocidae: pp. 181-182). 12 spp.
listed.

1910. List of the Clyde Copeognatha or Psocidae. Glasg. Nat. 2: 34-36.

King, J. J. F. X. and Halbert, J. N.
1910. A list of the Neuroptera of Ireland. Min. Proc. R. Irish Acad. 28
(B2): 29-112. (Psocoptera: pp. 64-71).

Kirkpatrick, T. W.
1927. Biological control of insect pests with particular reference to the
control of the common coffee mealybug in Kenya Colony.
Proc. S. and E. Afr. Agric. Conf. 1926: 174-196. 9 spp. of
Psocoptera, commonest is Ectopsocus briggsi McL. reported as
predaceous on the coffee mealybug.

Klapalek, F.

1898. Zprava o Neuropterach a Pseudoneuropterach sbiranych v Bosné
a Hercegovine Véstn. Ces. Akad. 2: 1-22.

1900a. Prispevek ke znalosti fauny Neuropteroid Ceskomoravské krabatiny.
Vestn. Ces. Akad. 10: 1-6.

1900b. Prisprévek ke znalosti Neuropteroid z Krajiny a Korutan. Rozpr.
ces. Akad. 9: 1-12.

1903a. Zprava o vyzkumu Cceskych Neuropteroid v.r. 1902. Véstn. Ces. Akad.
12: 257-264.

1903b. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis die Neuropteroiden von Ober-Steiermark.
S.B. bohn. Ges. Wiss. 1903 (IX): 1-5. (Corrodentia: p. 4). 8 spp.
listed.

1904. Zprava o vysledcich cesty do Transylvanskych Alp a Vysokych
Tater. Vestn. Ces. Akad. 13: 1-12.

1906. See Strobl, G. and Klapaiek, F. 1906.

Klier, E.

1956. Zur Konstruktionsmorphologie des mannlichen Geschlechtsapparates
der Psocopteren. Zool. Jb. Abt. Anat. 75: 207-286, 75 figs.
Description of male reproductive system of several spp.; comparison,
copulation.

Klippel, R.
1957. Okologische Untersuchungen an Arthropoden in Kellern Hamburger
Wohnhauser. Ent. Mitt. 9: 15-16. 4 spp. listed.

Kloet, G. S. and Hincks, W. D.
1945. A check list of the British Insects. Stockport lix, 483 pp.

Knowlton, G. F. and Stains, G. S.
1941. Psocids infesting chinchillas in Utah. J. econ. Ent. 34: 118-119,
1 fig. Liposcelis sp.

Kolbe, H. J.

1880a. Das Fligelgeider der Psociden und seine systematische Bedeutung.
Stettin. ent. Ztg. 41: 179-186, 1 pl.

1880b. Monographie der deutschen Psociden mit besonderer Berucksichtigung
der Fauna West-falens. Jber. westf. ProvVer. Wiss. Kunst 8: 73-
142, pls. i-iv.

1880c. Bemerkungen zu Dr. Jacob Spangberg’s Psocina Sueciae et Fenniae.
Stettin. ent. Ztg. 41: 176-178. (Ref. Spangberg, J. 1878).

1880d.
1881a.
1881b.
1881c.
1882a.

1882b.
1883a.

1883b.

1883c.

1883d.
1883e.
1884a.
1884b.

1884c.

1884d.

1884e.
1884f.
1885a.
1885b.

1885c.
1885d.

1888a.
1888b.

1893.

SMITHERS 175

Ueber die Genera Atropos Leach und Troctes Burm. Ent. Nachr.
6: 84

Ueber eine introducirte Psociden species. (Caecilius hirtellus McLach.)
Stettin. ent. Ztg. 42: 77-79.

Psocidologische Berichtigungen. Ent. Nachr. 7: 254-256. (Refers
especially to Rostock, M. 1881).

Differenzen in dem Vorkommen einiger Psociden-species. Stettin.
ent. Ztg. 42: 236-237.

Das phylogenetische Alter der europaischen Psocidengruppen. Jber.
westf. ProvVer. Wiss. Kunst 10: 18-27.

Neue Psociden der palaarktischen Region. Ent. Nachr. 8: 207-212.

Ueber ry Genus Myopsocus und dessen species. Ent. Nachr. 9:
141-146.

Ueber die Racen des Psocus taprobanes Hagen, in Ostindien. Ent.
Nachr. 9: 152-154.

Ueber Mesopsocus aphidioides Schrank und Elipsocus laticeps Kolbe.
Berl. ent. Z. 27: 235-238. Mesopsocus and Elipsocus characterized.

Neue Psociden des Konigl. zoologischen Museums zu Berlin. Stettin.
ent. Ztg. 44: 65-87. Cerastis, Syngonosoma and Blaste.

Neue Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Psociden der Bernstein-Fauna.
Stettin. ent. Ztg. 44: 186-191.

Der Entwicklungsgang der Psociden im Individuum und in der Zeit.
Berl. ent. Z. 28:. 35-38.

Zur Frage Uber die Quintessenz des Characters im habitus einer
zoologischen Species. Berl. ent. Z. 28: 39-42. Stenopsocus spp.

Das Tracheensystem des Kopfes der Bucherlaus (Atropos pulsatorius).
Berl. ent. Z. 28: 177-178, 1 fig.

Ueber Hyperetes in biologischer und systematische Beziehung, nebst
einer Studie uber die phylogenetische Stellung dieser Gattung.
Ent. Nachr. 10: 84-87.

Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Psocidenfauna der Berliner Umgegend.
Ent. Nachr. 10: 287-290.

Ueber die von Herrn Ludy in Ober-Bayern, K&arnthen und im
Littorale gesammelten Psociden. Berl. ent. Z. 28: 380-382.
Zur kenntniss der Psociden-Fauna Madagaskars. Berl. ent. Z. 29:

183-192, pl. IVB.
Ein, Wort zur systematische Stellung der Pscociden. Berl. ent. Z.

Die Borneo-Rasse des Psocus taprobanes Hg. Ent. Nachr. 11: 328-330.

Zwei merkwirdige und unbekannte Nymphen von Psociden. Jher.
westf. ProvVer. Wiss. Kunst 14: 59-61, pl. III, figs. 4, 5.

Troctes silvarum sp.n. eine im Freien lebende Verwandte der Staublaus.
Ent. Nachr. 14: 234-236.

Psocidae. In Rostock, M. Neuroptera germanica. Die Netzfitigler
Deutschlands, mit Berticksichtigung auch einiger ausserdeutschen
Arten nach der analytischen Methode unter Mitwirkung von H.
Kolbe bearbeitit. Jher. Ver. Naturk. Zwickau 1887: 1-198, pls. i-x.

Einfuhrung in die Kenntnis der Insekten. Berlin, i-xii, 709 pp.,
324 figs. Completed in 1893, but had been appearing in parts
for some time, according to Zoological Record for 1893.

Konigsmann, E.

1960.

Zur Phylogenie der Parametabola. Beitr. zur. Ent. 10 (7/8): 705-744.

Koppen, F. T.

1879.

Die Schadlichen Insekten Russlands. Beitr. Kennt. russ. Reichs (2)
3: i-vi, 526 pp. 1 pl. (Psocids: pp. 43, 89).

Krombein, K. V.

1951.

See Muesebeck, C. F. W., Krombein, K. V. and Townes, H. K. 1951.

Krumbach, T.

1930.

See Handlirsch, A. 1930.

176 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Kruseman, G.

1943a. Nieuwe Psociden voor Nederland. Tijdschr. Ent. 86: XXIV-XXYV.-

1943b. 3e Mededeeling over Nederlandsche Psocoptera. Tijdschr. Ent. 86:
LII-LIII. 8 spp. listed, a total of 45 spp. known from Holland.

1944. Voorlopige Naamlijst van Nederlandsche Psocoptera, benevens van
die, welke in het aangrenzende gebied gevonder zijn. (4e Mededeeling
over Psocoptera). Tijdschr. Ent. 86: 94-97. Lists 52 spp. from
Holland and lists spp. occurring in adjacent areas.

1948. 4de Korte Faunistische Mededeeling. Overgedruck mit het Verslag
van de Honderdeerste Zomervergardering der Nederlandsche Ento-
mologische Vereeniging, 22 June, 1946. Tijdschr. Ent. 89:XLY-
XLVI. (Psocoptera: p. XLV). List, alterations to list in Kruseman,
G. 1944.

Kukenthal, W.
1930. See Handlirsch, A. 1930.

Kunstler, J.and Chaine, J.
1902. Kiefferia musae (nov. gen., nov. spec.) Cecidomide nouvelle. Trav.
Lab. Arachon 6: 113-118.
1903a. Du dimorphisme chez les Cecidomyes. P.V. Soc. sci. phys. nat.
Bordeaux 1903: 13-14.
1903b. Kiefferia musae (n.g. n.sp.) Cecidomyide nouvelle. Bull. Soc. sci-
Arcachon 1902: 1-6, 3 figs.

Kuwayama, S.
1924. See Okamoto, H. and Kuwayama, S. 1924.
1961. Corrodentia of Thailand. Nature and Life in S.E. Asia 1: 203-205,
1 fig.

Labram, J. D.
1846. See Imhoff, L., and Labram, J. D. 1846.

Lacroix, J.

1913. Quelques anomalies chez les Psoques. Insecta 3 (29): 162-167,
7 figs. Wing venation anomalies.

1915a. Description dun Psocide nouveau. Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 1915: 179-182
2 figs. Psocus lapidetectus.

1915b. Psocides nouveaux (Nevr.) Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 1915: 192-195, 4 figs.
Psocus allaudi, Fabrella convexa.

1919. Description dun Psocide nouveau, de France. Bull. Soc. ent. Fr.
1919: 80-81, 1 fig.

,

Laing, F.

1924. A psocid new to the British list. Entomologist 57: 238. Nymphopsocus
destructor.

1925. On_a new genus and species of Psocoptera from British Guiana.
Entomologist 58: 289-290, figs. A-L. Semnopsocus globifer.

1932. A note on our British domestic Psocids. Ent. mon. Mag. 68: 68-69.
Seyetal., SEP. mentioned with some description and life history
included.

Lameere, A.

1900. Manuel de la Faune de Belgique. Tome II, Insectes inféri
BEielles B58 on Tot fee nsectes inférieurs.

1935. Précis de Zoologie. Rec. Inst. zool. Torley-Rousseau 4: 1-260
(1934); 261-468 (1935), 480 figs. (Insects: pp. 57-468, Psocoptera:
pp. 352-359).

Landt, J.
1800. Beskrivelse over Faergerne. Kjgbenhavn. Psocid mentioned.

SMITHERS 177

Latreille, P. A.

1794. Découverte de nids de Termes, et Psocus décrits. Bull. Soc. philom.
Paris 1: 84-85.

1796. Précis des Charactéres génériques des Insectes disposés dans un
Ordre naturel. Paris. (Psocoptera: p. 99).

1799. Le genre Psocus. In Coquebert, A. J. 1799.

1805. Histoire naturelle des Crustaces et Insectes. Paris, 1802-1805, 14 vols.
(Psocoptera: Vol. 13, p. 71).

1810. Considérations générales sur Ordre naturel des Animaux composant
les Classes des Crustaces, des Arachnides et des Insectes. Paris.
(Psocoptera: pp. 277, 435).

Laurence, B. R.

1951. The prey of some tree trunk frequenting Empididae and Dolichopodi-
dae (Dipt.). Ent. mon. Mag. 87: 166-169. Empididae and Dolicho-
podidae feeding on Cerobasis guestfalicus.

1952. The prey of some Empididae and Dolichopodidae (Dipt.). Ent. mon.
Mag. 88: 156-157. Empis livida carrying Loensia fasciata.

Leach, W.
1815. The Edinburgh Encyclopaedia. Edinburgh. (Psocoptera: Vol. 9,
i; WSR))e

Leonard, M. D.
1928. See Chapman, P. J. and Nadler, A. M. 1928.

LeRuth, R.

1939. La biologie du domaine souterrain et la faune cavernicole de la
Belgique. Mem. Mus. Hist. nat. Belg. 87: 1-506, illustr. (Copeo-
gnatha: pp. 202-204). 3 spp. dealt with.

Lestage, J. H.

1935. Note sur un Psoque. Hote multiple des dunes coxydoises (Lachesilla
pedicularia L.). Bull. (Ann.) Soc. ent. Belg. 75: 344-345.

Lindroth, C. H.

1931. Die Insektenfauna Islands (Iceland) und ihre probleme. Zool. Bidrag.
Upsala 13: 105-589, 50 figs. (Psocids: pp. 140-142). 3 spp. listed
from Iceland, with notes and references.

Linne, C. von

1746. Fauna Suecica sistens animalia Sueciae regni etc. Stockholm.

1758. Systema Naturae per regna tria naturae secundum classes, ordines,
genera, species, cum characteribus, differentiis, synonymis, locis,
Ed. decima reformata. Holmiae. 2 vols.

1761. Fauna Suecica sistens animalia Sueciae regni etc. Stockholm.

1775. Systema naturae. Xil Edition. (P.L.S. Miiller). Nurnberg. Band 2,
Theil 5.

Linsley, E. G.

1942. Insect fool caches as reservoirs and original sources of some
stored products pests. J. econ. Ent. 35: 434-439. (Psocids: p. 437).
Troctes divinatorius in bees’ nests.

1944. Natural sources, habitats and reservoirs of insects associated with
stored products. Hilgardia 16 (4): 187-224.

Lintner, J. A.

1885. New York State Entomologist Second Annual Report. Second Report
of Injurious and other insects in the State of New York. New
York i-xiv, 221 pp. (cf. Wien. ent. Ztg. 5: 204).

178 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Loding, H. P.
1935. A _ psocid, Psoquilla slossonae (Banks). Bull. Brooklyn ent. Soc.
30: 112. P. slossonae found in great numbers on walls of bungalow
in Alabama.

Loens, H.
1889a. Zur Kenntniss der Psocidenfauna Pommerns. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 50:
329-333. List.
1889b. Psocidologisches. Jber. westf. ProvVer. Wiss. Kunst 17: 75-78.
34 spp. listed.
1890a. Gefligelte Pyrrhocoris apterus und Ahnliche Erscheinungen bei
Psociden. Ent. Nachr. 16: 10-12.
1890b. Albinismus bei Psocus sexpunctatus L. Ent. Nachr. 16: 49-50.
1890c. Zur Psocidenfauna Westfalens. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 51: 5-8. -
1905. Zwei unbeschriebene deutsche Psociden. Jber. westf. ProvVer. Wiss.
Kunst. 33: 45.

Ludwig, F.
1908. Zur biologie des Stenopsocus stigmaticus des _ blattlausahnlichen
Spinnfluglers. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 69: 195-198, 1 fig.

Lundblad, O.
1925. Uber das Vorkommen von Trichobothrien bei Neuropteren und
Corrodentien. Ent. Tidskr. 46: 96-101, 7 figs.

Majewski, E.
1882. Insecta Neuroptera Polonia. Warsaw. 42 pp. (in Polish).
1885. Neuroptera Polonia. Warsaw. viii, 40 pp. (in Polish).

Marcu, O.
1938. Die Flechtlinge (Copeognatha) der Bukowina. C.R. Acad. Sci. Roum.
2 (5): 496-498. List.

Mardzhanyan, K. S.
1963. See Svadzhyan, P. K., Vishnyakova, V. N. and Mardzhanyan, K. S.
1963.

Marikovskii, P. I.
1957. Mesopsocus hiemalis sp.n. (Psocoptera) and some peculiarities of its
biology. Zool. Zh. 36 (7): 1026-1030, 4 figs. (In Russian with
English summary).

Martin, R.
1892. Les Psocides du department de l’Indre. Rev. Ent., Caen 11: 285-288.
1931. Histoire naturelle de la France. Paris.

Martorell, L. F.
1945. A survey of the forest insects of Puerto Rico. Pts. I, IL. J. Agric.
Univ. P.R. 29 (3): 69-354; 29 (4): 355-608. illustr. (Corrodentia:
scattered refs in Pt. I; Pt. II, p. 367).

Martynov, A.
1926. Jurassic fossil insects from Turkestan. 6. Homoptera and Psocoptera.
Bull. Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S. 1926: 1349-1366, 9 figs.
1928. Permian fossil insects of North-East Europe. Trav. Mus. géol.
U.R.S.S. 4: 1-118, pls. I-XIX.

Martynova, O. M.
1961. See Becker-Migdisova, E. E. 1961.

SMITHERS 179

Maschke, K.
1935. See Pax, F. and Maschke, K. 1935.

Mather, R. N.
1953. See Roonwal, M. L. et al. 1953.

Mathur, R. K.
1953. See Roonwal, M. L. et al. 1953.

Matsumoto, K.
1941. A list of Japanese Psocoptera. Kontyi 15 (3): 127-131.

‘Matsumura, S.

1911. Erster Beitrag zur Insekten-Fauna Sachalin. J. Coll. Agric. Sapporo
(1): 1-145, 2 pls. Records Caecilius oyamae from South
Saghalien, first psocopteran from the island.

McClure, H. E.
1936. Psocid habits. Ent. News 47: 113-118, 143-146.

McCook, H. C.

1884. On a web-spinning Neuropterous Insect. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad.
1883: 278-279.

McDaniel, E. 1.

1934. Cockroaches, silver-fish and booklice. Bull. Mich. agric. Exp. Sta.
101:10-11. Mention of Liposcelis divinatorius.

McKeown, K. C.

1922. Booklice on citrus trees. Aust. nat. 5 (4): 57-58. General remarks
on an unnamed sp.

1942a. Australian Insects XV. Booklice, Lice and Thrips. Aust. Mus. Mag.
7: 382-387, illustr. (Psocids: pp. 382-383, 1 illustr.). General
remarks.

1942b. Australian Insects. Sydney: 1-304, illustr. (Copeognatha, p. 74 & fig.)

McLachlan, R.

1866a. Untitled note. Proc. ent. Soc. Lond. 5: XLV. Venational variation
discussed.

1866b. (Notice in minutes). Proc. ent. Soc. Lond. 5: \xxiv. Ticking noise.

1866c. New genera and species of Psocidae. Trans. ent. Soc. Lond. (3) 5:
345-352. Species from South America, New Guinea, Australia,
Assam, China, Malacca, East Indies, Mauritius. A postscript on p.
352 reassigns several species described in Psocus to genera erected
by Hagen, 1866b.

1867a. Untitled note. Ent. mon. Mag. 4: 20. A remark following paper by
Blackwall doubting that ticking sounds are made by Atropos.
See Blackwall, J. 1867.

1867b. A monograph of the British Psocidae. Ent. mon. Mag. 3: 177-181,
194-197, 226-231, 241-245, 270-276, pl. II.

1867c. Atropos. Hardwicke’s Science Gossip. 1867: 51-52. Nomenclature;
sound production.

1869. Description of a new species of Psocidae (Caecilius atricornis)
inhabiting Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 53:

1870. <A catalogue of British Neuroptera. London.

1872a. An addition to the list of British Psocidae (Stenopsocus stigmaticus Im.
and Lab.). Ent. mon. Mag. 9: 63-64. Also Caecilius dalii.

1872b. Description of a new genus and five new species of exotic Psocidae.
Ent. mon. Mag. 9: 74-78, 1 fig. Ceylon, Sula, Northern India.

180

1872c.

1877.
1879.

1880a.
1880b.
1880c.

1880d.
1880e.

188 1a.

188 1b.
1883a.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Instructions for the collection and preservation of mneuropterous
insects. Ent. mon. Mag. 9: 90-104, 168-176, 225-232. (Psocidae:
pp. 173-174).

Description d’un Psocide nouveau de la Belgique, C.R. Seances Soc. ent.
Belgique 20: liv-lv.

A second British locality for Stenopsocus stigmaticus. Ent. mon. Mag.
16: 94-95. Distribution records.

Elipsocus cyanops Rostock a species new to Britain. Ent. mon. Mag.
7/2 PA

Elipsocus cyanops Rostock. Ent. mon. Mag. 17: 71. Further British
specimens.

Notes on entomology of Portugal II. Pseudoneuroptera (in part)
and Neuroptera-Planipennia. Ent. mon. Mag. 17: 103-108. (Psocidae:
pp. 103-104). 3 spp. listed, Myopsocus eatoni described.

Untitled note. Ent. mon. Mag. 17: 141-142. An editorial note to
Hart, T. H. 1880. Psocids feed on mildew, dust and debris.

Trichoptera and Neuroptera of the Upper Engadine in August.
Ent. mon. Mag. 17: 217-222. (Psocidae: p. 221). Elipsocus
unipunctatus mentioned.

(Editorial comment, under Spangberg, J. i880 paper). Zool. Rec.
1880: 211. Says Stenopsocus nervosus St. is var. of cruciatus L.
Abundance of Clothilla picea Motsch. Ent. mon. Mag. 17: 185-186.
Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands. Part I. Pseudo-Neuropfera.
Ann. mag. Nat. Hist. (5) 12: 226-240. (Psocidae: p. 228).

2 spp. listed.

1883b. Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands. Part II. Planipennia, with

1883c.

1883d.

1884a.
1884b.

1886a.
1886b.

1887.

1890a.
1890b.

1894a.

1894b.

1898a.

1898b.
1899a.

1899b.
1899c.

1899d.

General Summary. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (5) 12: 298-303.
(Psocidae: in summary, p. 302). 2 spp. listed.

The Neuroptera of Madeira and the Canary Islands. J. Linn. Soc.
(Zool.) 16: 149-183. (Psocids: pp. 155, 174-175). 6 spp. listed.

Remarks on certain Psocidae, chiefly British. Ent. mon. Mag. 19:
181-185, 3 figs.

Recherches Neuropterologiques dans les Vosges. Rev. Ent., Caen 3: 9.

Caecilius atricornis McLacn. near Chertsey. Ent. mon. Mag. 21:
113-114. Mentions also Stenopsocus stigmaticus.

Kolbia quisquiliarum Bertkau, a genus and species of Psocidae new
to Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 23: 38-39.

Un excursion Neuropterologique dans la Foret-Noire. Rev. Ent., Caen
5: 126-136. (Psocids: pp. 132-134).

Caecilius dalii abundant in Somersetshire.. Ent. mon. Mag. 24: 136.

Two species of Psocidae new to Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 26: 269-270.

Notes concerning Psocus quadrimaculatus Latr. of which Ps. subnebulo-
sus Steph., is a synonym. Ent. mon. Mag. 26: 287-289.

Some additions to the Neuropterous fauna of New Zealand, with
notes on certain described species. Ent. mon. Mag. 30: 238-243,
270-272. (Psocidae: p. 270). Type location of Myospsocus
novae-zealandiae Kolbe.

Two species of Psocidae new to Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 30: 243-244.

A few Psocidae from the Eastern Pyrenees. Ent. mon. Mag. 34:
153-154. 6 spp. listed.

Hyperetes guestfalicus Kolbe, a genus and species of apterous
Psocidae new to Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 34: 247-248.

Trichoptera, Planipennia and Pseudoneuroptera collected in the
district of the Lac de Joux (Swiss Jura) in 1898. Ent. mon. Mag.
35: 60-65. (Psocidae: p. 64). 5 spp. listed.

Psocus major Loens at Merton (Norfoik). Ent. mon. Mag. 35: 210.

Psocus anion (Kolbe) Loens in Co. Wexford. Ent. mon. Mag.
35: 234

Ectopsocus briggsi, a new genus and species of Psocidae found in
England. Ent. mon. Mag. 35: 277-278, illustr.

SMITHERS 181

1900a. Concerning Teratopsocus maculipennis Reuter with note on the
brachypterous condition in females of Psocidae. Ent. mon. Mag.
36: 6-7.

1900b. A striking instance of neural variation in a Psocid. Ent. mon. Mag.
36: 14. Caecilius obsoletus.

1900c. Psocidae on the wing: a query. Ent. mon. Mag. 36: 43.

1900d. Hyperetes guestfalicus Kolbe at Dover. Ent. mon. Mag. 36: 88.

1900e. Bertkauia prisca Kolbe, a genus and species of Psocidae new to
Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 36: 220-221.

1900f. Two species of Psocus allied to Ps. bifasciatus Latr. likely to occur
in Britain. Ent. mon Mag. 36: 242. Psocus intermedius Tetens;
Ps. contrarius Reuter.

1902. Psocidae from the district of the Lac de Joux (Swiss Jura). Ent.
mon. Mag. 38: 176-177. 10 spp. mentioned.

1903a. a ae at Margate in 1903. Ent. mon. Mag. 39: 285-286. 9 spp.
isted.

1903b. What is the native country of Ectopsocus brigesi McLach? Ent. mon.
Mag. 39: 296-297. May have come to England from Australia or

Rhodesia.

Medem, F.
1951. Biologische Beobachtungen an Psocopteren. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst.
79: 591-613, 2 figs.

Melander, A. L.
1954. See Brues, C. T., Melander, A. L. and Carpenter, F. M. 1954.

Menon, R.
1938a. Coxal interlocking in the Lepidopsocidae and its probable taxonomic
value. Curr. Sci. 7: 66-67, 1 fig.
1938b. Two new species of Pachytroctidae (Copeognatha) with a note
on the family. Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. 8 (4): 280-287, figs. A, B,

152:
1941. Studies on Indian Copeognatha (Psocoptera) I. Introduction, general
morphology and classification. Indian. J. Ent. 3: 13-23, 10 figs.
1942. Studies on Indian Copeognatha (Psocoptera) II. Nanopsocetae and
Psocatropetae. Indian J. Ent. 4: 23-42, 38 figs.

Menzel, R.
1922. Spinneweb-achtige nesten van hautluizen op thee boomen. Thee
(2): 54-55, pl. 9.

Meunier, F.
1906. Perientomum mortuum Hagen (Meun.). Archiptére Psocidae du
Copal fossile de Zanzibar. Naturaliste 28: 58-60.

Meyer-Dur, R.
1874. Die Neuropterenfauna der Schweiz bis auf heutige Erfahrung. Mitt.
schweiz. ent. Ges. 4: 281-352 (1874), 344-364 (1875). (Psocidae:
pp. 284 et seq.).

Michaelsen, W.
1907. See Enderlein, G. 1907b.

Mockford, E. L.
1950. The Psocoptera of Indiana. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 60: 192-204. List.
1951. On two North American Philotarsids (Psocoptera). Psyche Camb.,
Mass. 58 (3): 102-107, 2 pls.
1953a. Baca notes on Indiana Psocoptera. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 62:
-199.

£82 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1953b. Three new species of Archipsocus from Florida (Psocoptera: Archi-
psocidae). Florida Ent. 36 (3): 113-124, 30 figs.

1955a. Studies on the Reuterelline Psocids (Psocoptera). Proc. ent. Soc. Wash.
57: 97-108, 17 figs.

1955b. Notes on some Eastern North American Psocids with descriptions
of two new species. Amer. Midl. Nat. 53 (2): 436-441, 2 pls.

1957a. A new species of Archipsocus from Florida (Psocoptera: Archi-
psocidae). Florida Ent. 40 (1): 33-34, 6 figs.

1957b. Some Psocoptera from Tikal, Guatemala. Ent. News 68 (8): 197-205,
21 figs.

1957c. Life history studies on some Florida insects of the genus Archipsocus
(Psocoptera). Bull. Florida Mus. 1 (5): 253-274, 1 fig.

1959. The Ectopsocus briggsi complex in the Americas (Psocoptera, Peri-
psocidae). Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 61: 260:266, 8 figs. 1 map.

196la. An annotated list of the Psocoptera of the Flint-Chattahoochee-
Apalachicola Region of Georgia, Florida and Alabama. Florida
Ent. 44: 129-140. 38 spp. listed.

1961b. The rediscovery and probable phylogenetic position of Psilopsocus
(Psocoptera). Psyche Camb., Mass. 68: 38-44, 1 fig. pl. 5. A n.
sp. from the Philippines.

1962. Notes on the distribution and life history of Archipsocus frater
Mockford (Psocoptera: Archipsocidae). Florida Ent. 45 (3):
149-151, 2 figs.

1963. The species of Embidopsocinae of the United States (Psocoptera:
Liposcelidae). Ann. ent. Soc. Amer. 56 (1): 25-37, 68 figs.

Mockford, E. L. and Gurney, A. B.

1956. A review of the Psocids, or book-lice and bark-lice, of Texas
(Psocoptera). J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 46: 353-368, 53 figs, 1 map.

Monterosso, B.

1952a. Liposcelis divinatorius (Muller) Il. Partenogenesi constante e com-
pleta. Boll. Accad. gioenia, ser. IV, 2 (2): 151-167. (In Italian
with French, German and English summaries).

1952b. Liposcelis divinatorius (Miller) II. Identificazione sistematica di una
forma che vive in Sicilia (ZL. bostrychophilus Bad.) Boll. Accad.
gioenia, ser. IV, 2 (3): 168-179. (In Italian with French, German
and English summaries).

1953. Liposcelis (=Troctes) divinatorius (Mull.) I. Osservazioni morfolo-
giche e biologiche. Atti Accad. gioenia (6) 8: 191-218. (In Italian
with English, French and German summaries).

Morley, C.
1899. Caecilius atricornis McLach. near Ipswich. Ent. mon. Mag. 35: 272-

Morstatt, H.
1912. Ueber das Vorkommen von Gespinsten bei Psociden. Z. wiss.
InsektBiol. 8 (4): 142-147. Archipsocus textor, predators.

Morton, K. J.

1902. Trichoptera, Planipennia and Pseudoneuroptera collected in North
Wales in July, 1901. Ent. mon. Mag. 38: 34-36. (Psocids: p. 36).
5 spp. recorded.

Motschulsky, V. von
1851. Enumérations des nouvelles espéces des Coléoptéres rapportés par
M. Victor Motschulsky de son dernier voyage. Bull. Soc. imp.
Nat. Moscou 24 (2): 479-511, 1 fig. (Psocoptera: pp. 510-511).
Paradoxides psocoides.

SMITHERS 183

1852. Etudes entomologiques. Helsingfors. (Psocids: in Etudes entomo-
logiques 1852, 1 Juillet. pp. 19, 20). Liposcelis museorum, L-
brunneus and Paradoxenus.

Muesebeck, C. F. W.
1956. A braconid parasite of a psocid. Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 58: 148-149,
1 fig. Host: Anomopsocus amabilis.

Muesebeck, C. F. W., Krombein, K. V. and Townes, H. K.

1951. Hymenoptera of North America north of Mexico, Synoptic catalog.
Dep. Mon. U.S. Dep. Agric. 2, 1420 pp., 1 map. (cf. Peck, O.
1951).

Muhlen, M. von zur

1882. Die Psociden Liv- Est- und Kurlands. §.B. gelelrt. estn. Ges. 6:
328-334. 25 spp. listed.

Muller, O. F.
1764. Fauna insectorum Friedrichsdalina sive methodica descriptio insectorum
agri Fridrichdalensis, cum characteribus etc. . . . Hafniae. i-xxiv,

96

1776. Zoologiae Danicae prodromus seu animalium Daniae et Norvegiae
indigenarum charateres, nomina, et synonyma imprimis popularium.
Hafniae. 8vo. 32 and 282 pp.

Mumford, E. P.

1942. Records of Corrodentia from the Marquesas Is. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist-
(11) 9: 831-838.

Nadler, A. M.
1928. See Chapman, P. J. and Nadler, A. M. 1928.

Navas, L.

1906a. Catalogo descriptivo de los Insectos Neurdpteros de las Islas.
Canarias. Rev. Acad. Madr. 4 (1): 687-708. (Psocids: pp. 703-
704). 5 spp. listed.

1906b. Notas zooldgicas. X11. Novedades zoologicas de Aragon. Bol. Soc.
aragon. Cienc. nat. 12 (9): 199-213, pls. 3, 4, 1 fig. (Psocid: p-
205). Psocus quadrimaculatus mentioned.

1907a. Notas Zooldgicas XIII. Imsectos nuevos 6 recientemente descriptos
de la peninsula ibérica. Bol. Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 6: 194-200,
3 figs. (Psocids: pp. 195-196, fig. 2). Actenotarsus hispanicus.

1907b. Neurdptero nuevos de Montserrat. Rev. Montser. 1907: 1-2, 1 fig.

1908. Neurdpteros nuevos. Mem. R. Acad. Barcelona ser. 3, 6 (25): 401-
423, 29 figs. (Psocids: pp. 410-411, figs. 12, 13). Canary Is.

1909a. Entomologie. Rev. Quest Sci. 1909: 1-12. (Psocoptera: p. 5). Mentions
that 85 spp. are known from United States of America.

1909b. Neurdpteros nuevos de la fauna ibérica. Act. Mem. Prim. Congr.
Natur. Espan. ser. 5, 1: 143-158, pl. 13, figs. 1-10. (Psocids: pp.
155-158, pl. 13).

1909c. Nouvelles chasses de Neuropteres en Belgique. R. mens. Soc. ent.
Namur 3: 55-56. (Psocid: p. 55).

1910a. Mis excursiones entomologicas durante el verano de 1909. Bull.
Inst. Catalana 2: 1-27. (Psocids: pp. 15, 23).

1910b. Notas entomoldgicas, 2e serie. 2. Excursiones por Catalufia y Mallorca.
Boll. Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 10: 240-248. (Psocids: pp. 244-245).
10 spp. listed.

1911. Notas entomoldgicas. 3. Excursiones por los alrededores de Granada.
Bol. Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 10 (12): 204-211, pl. 4. (Psocoptera:
pp. 210-211, pl. 4).

184

1912a.

1912b.
1913a.
1913b.
1913c.

1913d.

1914a.

1914b.
1914c.
1914d.

1914e.

1914f.

1914g.
1915a.

1915b.

1915c.

1916a.

1916b.
1916c.
1917a.

1917b.

1917c.

1917d.
1917e.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Insectos Neurdépteros nuevos o poco conocidos. Mem. R. Acad.
Barcelona ser. 3, 10 (9): 135-202, 29 figs. (Psocids: p. 202).
2 spp. mentioned, neither new.

Neur6pteros nuevos de America. Broteria ser zool. 10: 194-202,
figs. 1-7. (Psocids: pp. 196-198, figs. 5, 6).

Notas entomoldégicas. Bol. Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 12: 75-91, pl. v.
(Bsocid:) p= 87; pla v):

Socidos (Ins. Neur.) de Espafia, nuevos. Rev. Acad. Madr. 12:
329-335, 5 figs. 5 new spp., 2 new genera.

Notas entomologicas. 5. Cuatro pequefias coleciones de Neuropteros.
Bol. Soc. aragon Cienc. nat. 12 (5): 77-89, 2 figs. (Psocidae:
pp. 87-88, fig. 2). List and description of Mesopsocus poecilopterus.

Mis excursiones por el extranjero en el Verano de 1912. Mem. R.
Acad. Barcelona 10 (24): 479-514, 17 figs. (Psocids: pp. 480, 488,
510). Records only, no new spp. described.

Supplement aux Nevroptéres de Belgique. Quelques Nevroptéres
recuellis en aout (19-31) de 1923. Rev. Soc. ent. Namur. 4 and
5: 1-7. (Psocidae: p. 6-7). List.

Notas entomoldgicas. 11. Neuropteros del Monacayo (Zaragoza).
Bol. Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 13: 207-218. (Psocid: pp. 215-216).

Insectos neurdpteros fodsiles nuevos. As. Esp. Progr. Cienc. Congr.
de Madrid 5: 35-38, 2 figs. 2 spp. described.

Notas entomoldgicas 7. Excursi6n anual de la Sociedad Aragonesa
de Ciencias Naturales a Ortigosa y Valvanera (Logrono). Bol.
Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 13: 22-37. (Psocids: p. 35). List.

Notas entomologicas. 10. Neurépteros de Mallorca. Bol. Soc. aragon.
Cienc. nat. 13: 185-192. (Psocids: p. 190).

Notas entomoldgicas. 8. Neurdpteros de los alrededores de Madrid.
Bol. Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 13: 38-41. (Psocids: p. 41).
Notas entomoldogicas. 9. Algunos Neurdépteros de Manresa. Bol.

Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 13: 174-176. (Psocid: p. 176).

Notas entomolégicas. 2a serie, 11. Excursiones por Catalufia. Julio
de 1914. Bol. Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 14: 27-81, 7 figs., pls. ii,
fig. 3. @Psocoptera: pp. 29; 30; 35, 39,- 43-45, 48, 52, 57; 69;
70, 74, 76, 80).

Some Neuroptera from the United States. Bull. Brooklyn ent. Soc.
10 (3): 50-54, 2 figs. (Psocidae: p. 54). 5 spp. listed.

Neurodpteros nuevos 0 poco conocidos (quinta serie). Mem. R. Acad.
Barcelona 11 (27): 455-480, figs. 1-10, pl. 11. (Psocids: pp. 479-
480, fig. 10).

Neuroptera nova africana. Ser. WII. Mem. Accad. Nuovi Lincei
ser 2, 2: 51-58, figs. 29-34. (Psocoptera: pp. 57-58, figs. 33, 34).
Canary Is., 2 spp.

Neurdpteros nuevos de Espana (Segunda serie). Rev. Acad. Madr.
14: 593-601, figs. 3-5. (Psocids: pp. 598-600, figs. 3, 4).

Excursiones al Valle de Aran (Lérida), 17-28 Julio 1915. Bol. Soc.
aragon. Cienc. nat. 15: 179-194. (Psocoptera: pp. 190-191). List.

Neur6épteros nuevos 0 poco conocidos (Octavo serie). Mem. R. Acad.
Barcelona 13 (7): 155-178, 14 figs. (Psocids: pp. 172-173, fig. 11).

Neuroépteros nuevos 0 poco conocidos (Novena serie). Mem. R. Acad.
Barcelona 13 (26): 393-406, 6 figs. (Psocids: pp. 402-403).
Caecilius burmeisteri.

Comunicaciones entomoldgicas. 2. Excursiones entomolégicas por
Aragon y Navaria. Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza 2: 81-91. (Psoco-
ptera: p. 88)s) List:

Insecta nova. Mem. Accad. Nuovi Lincei ser. 2, 3: 1-22, 9 figs.
(Psocoptera: p. 20, fig. 9). 1 sp., Canary Is.

Notas entomologicas. 2e serie. 14. Neurépteros de Andorra. Bol.
Soc. aragon. Cienc. nat. 16: 36-46. (Psocoptera: p. 43). List.

19178.

1918a.
1918b.
1918c.
1918d.

1918e.

1919a.
1919b.

1920a.

1920b.

1920c.

1920d.

1921.

1922a.
1922b.
1922c.

1922d.
1923a.
1923b.

1923¢c.

1924a.

1924b.

1924c.

1924d.

1924e.

SMITHERS 185

Excursiones entomoldgicas por el Norte de la Provincia de Lérida.
8-24 Julio, 1917. Bull. Inst. Cataluna 1917: 36-49. (Psocoptera:
pp. 43-44). List.

Excursiones entomoldgicas al nort de la provincia de Lleida. Bull.
Inst. Catalana Hist. nat. 1918: 150-158. (Psocids: pp. 156, 158).

Algunos insectos Neurdpteros de la Argentina. Physis, B. Aires
3: 186-196, 4 figs. (Psocid: p. 196).

Algunos insectos Neurdépteros de la Argentina. Serie 2a. Physis,
B. Aires 4: 80-89, figs. 5-10. (Psocids: pp. 88-89, figs. 9, 10).
Neurdpteros nuevos o poco conocidos. 10 ser. Mem. R. Acad.
Barcelona 14: 339-366, 20 figs. (Psocids: p. 361, fig. 16).
Excursiones entomologicas por Catalufa durante el verano de 1918.
Mem. R. Acad. Barcelona 15: 181-214, 9 figs. (Psocids: p. 204).

List.

Mis excursiones cientificas del verano de 1919. Mem. R. Acad.
Barcelona 17: 143-169, 4 figs. (Psocids: pp. 159-160). List.
Estudios sobre Neurdpteros (Insectes). Arx. Inst. Cienc. Barcelona
7: 179-203, 5 figs. (Psocids: pp. 197-198). Includes Psocus arenosus
from Tonkin and says that Amphigerontia nemianus is a Psocus.
Insectos sud-americanos (la, 2a y 3a series). An. Soc. cient. argent.

90: 33-72, figs. 1-11. (Psocids: pp. 51, 63-64, fig. 6)

Insecta nova. 5, 6 y 7 series. Mem. Accad. Nuovi Lincei ser. II,
5: 21-29, figs. 21-30. (Psocids: pp. 27-28, fig. 29).

Socépteros nuevos. Bol. Soc. ent. Esp. 4: 90-94, 3 figs. Tonkin,
Bolivia, Canary Is.

Notas entomoldgicas. ser. 2a. lb. Excursion anual de la Sociedad
Aragosa de Ciencias Naturales al Valle de Ordesa (Huesca) 22-29
Julio de 1918. Bull. Soc. ibér Cienc. nat, 1920: 37-44. (Psocids:
eh 4EN5 bee

Excursiones cientificas realizadas el verano de 1920. Congr. Oporto
Assoc. Progr. Cienc. 4: 59-74. (Psocids: pp. 68-69). List.

Insectos de la Argentina y Chile. Estudios 22: 358-368, 4 figs.
(Psocoptera: pp. 364-367, figs. 2-4).

Algunos insectos de Chile. Rev. chil. Hist. nat. 21: 443-445, fig. 39.
(Psocidae: pp. 444-445, fig. 39).

Algunos insectos del Museo de Paris. Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza.
7: 15-51, 16 figs. (Psocid: p. 19). Psocus fuscipennis mentioned
from Brazil.

Insectos exoticos. Broteria ser. zool. 20: 49-63, 7 figs. (Psocids: pp.
56-61, figs. 4, 5).

Excursions entomologiques de I’Istiu de 1922. Arx. Inst. Cienc.
Barcelona 8: 1-34, 13 figs. (Psocoptera: pp. 11-12, fig. 1).
Insecta nova. VIII series y Series IX y X. Mem. Accad. Nuovi

Lincei 6: 1-27, figs. 34-36). (Psocids: pp. 22-23).

Travaux scientifiques de l’Amée d’Orient (1916-1918). Neuroptéres.
Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. 29: 84-90. (Psocid: p. 87). Amphigerontia
fasciata mentioned.

Excursié Entomologica al Cabrerés (Girona-Barcelona). Trab. Mus.
Jta. nat. Barcelona 4 (10): 1-59, 6 figs., 1 map. (Psocids: pp.
20-22, fig. 1). Description of Valenzuela marianus and list.

Mis excursiones entomoldgicas del verano de 1924. Broteria ser.
zool. 21: 115-150, 14 figs. (Psocids: pp. 137-141, figs. 7-9).
Insectos de la America Central. Broteria, ser. zool. 21: 55-86, 22 figs.

(Psocids: pp. 64-66, figs. 5-7).

Insectes de l’excursid de d. Ascensi Cardina a Castella i Andalusia,
al Juny de 1923. Publ. Jta. Cien. nat. Barcelona 4 (11): 1-10,
2 figs. (Psocids: p. 8). 2 spp. listed.

Faune entomologique de Il’Indochine francaise. Neuroptéres de
l'Indochine. Opusc. Inst. sci. Indoch. 8 (3): 125-161. (Psocoptera:
pp. 160-161). Amphigerontia namiana.

186

1924f.
1924¢.

1925a.

1925b.
1925c.

1926a.
1926b.
1926c.
1927a.
1927b.
1927c.
19274.

1928a.
1928b.

1929a.

1929b.

1929c.
1929d.

1929e.

1930a.

1930b.
1930c.
193 1a.

193 1b.

193 1c.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Entomologie. Rev. Quest. sci. 1924: 1-11. (Psocoptera: p. 9). Mentions.
Tillyard, R. J. 1923. Gok

Insecta orientalia. I] Serie. Mem. Pont. Accad. Sci. Nuovi Lincet.
7: 211-216, fig. 3. (Psocoptera: pp. 215, 216, fig. 3). Taeniostigma
tibiale.

Insectos exoticos nuevos a poco conocidos. Mem. R. Acad. Barcelona.
19 (5): 181-200, 24 figs. (Psocids: pp. 197-198, fig. 23).
Nescus flavatus.

Neuropteren aus Brazilien. Mitt. miinch, ent. Ges. 15 (1/5): 64-68,
3 figs. (Psocids: p. 68, fig. 3). Psocus kotzbaueri. ;

Quelques insectes des environs de Grenoble et des collections de
l'Institut d’Hydrobiologie et le Pisciculture. Assoc. frang. P. avanc.
Sci. 1925: 417-419. (Psocoptera: p. 418). List.

Algunos Insectos del Museo de Paris. 3a serie. Broteria, ser. zool..
23 (3): 95-115, figs. 10-21. (Psocoptera: pp. 98-99, fig. 11).

Insectos de la Argentina y Chile. Segunda serie. Estudios 26: 103-110,
figs. 4-8. (Psocoptera: p. 109).

Algunos insectos del Brasil. 3e ser. Broteria, ser. zool. 23 (1)25=15;
5 figs. (Psocoptera: p. 15). 2 spp. listed.

Insetti raccolti nel Porto di Genova sulle Banane delle Canarie..
Boll. Soc. ent. Ital. 59: 150-152, 2 figs.

Comunicaciones Entomolégicas. 8. Socdpteros del Museo de Hamburg.
Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza. 11: 37-52, 9 figs.

Insecta orientalia. Series 5. Mem. Accad. Nuovi Lincei 10: 11-26,
15 figs. (Psocids: pp. 25-26, figs. 7-15). Mindaus.

Insectos de la Argentina y Chile. Tercera serie. Estudios 27: 22-28,.
figs. 9-10. (Psocoptera: pp. 27, 28, fig. 10).

Insectos de la Argentina. Cuarta serie. Estudios 28: 139-146, figs.
11-15. (Psocoptera: pp. 142-146, figs. 12-15).

Insectes nevroptéres et voisins de Barbarie. Sixiéme serie. Bull. Soc.
nat. Hist. l'Afrique du Nord. 19: 183-191, 5 figs. (Psocoptera:
p. 189). Myopsocus eatoni listed.

Insectes Neuroptéres et voisins de Normandie. Assoc. frang. Avance.
des Ciences 1929: 446-448, fig. 3. (Psocids: p. 447). Psocus
nebulosus mentioned.

Insectos Neuropteros i afines. Bol. Soc. ent. Esp. 12: 38-42, 1 fig..
(Psocids: p. 40). Amphigerontia bifasciata and Graphopsocus
cruciatus from Palma.

Insectos del Brazil. 3a serie. Rev. Mus. paul. 16: 857-864, figs. 5-9.
(Psocid: p. 864). Psocus furcatus Navas mentioned.

Excursiones por la provincia de Gerona en Julio y Augosto de 1928.
Bull. Inst. Catalana Hist. nat., ser. 2, 9: 27-48, 1 fig. (Psocids:
p. 34). 5 spp. listed.

Insetti Neurotteri ed affini di Oropa (Biella). Bol. Soc. ent. Ital.
61: 44-67, 2 figs. (Psocoptera: p. 45). Psocus nebulosus listed.

Excursio entomologica a la vall de Noguera de Cardos (Lleida).
Bull. Inst. Catalana Hist. nat., ser. 2, 10 (9): 156-169, 6 figs.
(Psocoptera: p. 156). Graphopsocus cruciatus.

Insectos neotropicos (Sexta serie). Rev. chil. Hist. nat. 34: 299-307,
figs. 58-64. (Psocids: pp. 303-307, figs. 61-64). 5 spp. n. mentioned.

Excursion a Ribera de Cardds, Pallaris (Lérida). Bull. Inst.
Catalana Hist. nat. (2) 10 (3): 48-57, 5 figs. 3 spp. listed.

Nevroptéres et insectes voisins ——- Chine et pays environnants.
Notes Ent. chin. 7: 1-10, figs. 10-17. (Abstract in Lignan Sci. J.
Canton 10: 530) (LI93TIYS “(esocidss: “p: 95) fie. 718). WPsocus
taprobanes var. orientalis.

Insectos de la Argentina. Septima serie. Rev. Soc. ent. argent. 3:
317-324, 7 figs. (Psocids: pp. 320-321). 1 sp.n.

Insectos Neurdépteros y afines de la Lorena (Francia). Broteria,
ser. zoo]. 27: 136-144, 1 fig. (Psocids: p. 140).

SMITHERS 187

1931d. De mis ultimas excursiones entomoldgicas. (1930-1931). Boll. Soc.
ent. Esp. 14: 116-130, 4 figs. (Psocids: pp. 121-122).

193le. Insectes du Congo Belge (Ser. VI). Nevroptéres. Rev. Zool. Bot.
afr. 21: 123-144, figs. 64-79. (Psocoptera: pp. 131-133, figs. 68, 69).

1932a. Imsectos de la Argentina. Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza 16: 87-120, 22
figs. (Psocoptera: pp. 97-111, figs. 4-15).

1932b. Alcuni Insetti del Museo di Zoologia della R. Universita di Torina.
Boll. Mus. zool. Anat. comp. Torina (3) 42 (26): 1-38, 32 figs.
(Psocids: p. 28). 2 spp. listed. ’

1932c. Faunula de la Sobradiel (Zaragoza). Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza
16: 11-28, 9 figs. (Psocoptera: p. 16). 5 spp. listed.

1932d. Insectos de la Argentina y Chile. Rev. Soc. ent. argent. 5: 77-86,
figs. 9-15. (Psocids: pp. 81-82, fig. 11).

1932e. Insectes du Congo Belge. Serie VII. Rev. Zool. Bot. afr. 22: 269-290,
figs. 70-87. (Psocoptera: pp. 281-283, figs. 80, 81).

1933a. Nevroptéres et insectes voisins. Chine et pays environnants. Notes
Ent. chin. 9: 1-22, figs. 22-36. (Psocoptera: p. 14, fig. 30).

1933b. Nevroptéres et insectes voisins. Chine et pays environnants. Cinquiéme
serie. Notes Ent. chin. 13: 1-10, figs. 37-42. (Psocids: pp. 6-7,
fig. 40). Amphigerontia diffusa.

1933c. Insetti Neurotteri e affini del Piemonte. Mem. Soc. Ent. Ital. 12:
150-162, 9 figs. (Psocoptera: p. 152). List.

1933d. Décadas de insectos nuevos. Decada 24. Broteria, ser. zool. 2 (3):
101-110, figs. 96-102. (Psocids: pp. 108-109, fig. 101). Elipsocus
nevermanni.

1933e. Recoltes entomologiques en Holland. Rev. Mens. Belg. d’Ent. 33:
20-25. (Psocids: p. 24). 10 spp. listed.

1933f. Neuroptéres et insectes voisins. Chine et pays environnants. Notes
Ent. chin. 1: 1-22, 3 figs. (Psocids: pp. 14-15).

1934a. Imsectes de la India. Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza 17: 29-48, figs.
35-48. (Psocids: pp. 34-38 ,figs. 37-39).

1934b. Neuroptéres et insectes voisins. Chine et pays environnants. Septiéme
serie. Notes Ent. chin. 2: 1-16, figs. 46-53. (Psocids: pp. 7-9, fig.
49).

1934c. Insectos suramericanos. Novena serie. Rev. Acad. cienc. Madr. 31:
155-184, figs. 33-55. (Psocids: pp. 158-159, fig. 34).

1934d. Insects del Museo de Hamburgo. 2a Serie. Mem. R. Acad. Barcelona
23: 497-508, 9 figs. (Psocids: p. 508). 1 sp. mentioned.

1934e. Insectos suramericanos. Octavo serie. Rev. Acad. cienc. Madrid
31: 9-28, figs. 25-39. (Psocoptera: pp. 20-22, figs. 32, 33).

1936. Insectes du Congo Belge. Serie IX. Rev. Zool. Bot. afr. 28: 333-368,
48 figs. (Psocoptera: pp. 361-363, figs. 117-118).

Needham, J. G.

1909. Notes on the Neuroptera in the collection of the Indian Museum.
Rec. Indian Mus. 3 (3): 185-210, 4 figs., pls. XIX-XXI. (Psocids:
pp. 192-193).

Newman, E.

1866a. Ticking of the Death-Watch. Entomologist 3: 65-66.

1866b. Psocus bred from Atropos pulsatorius. Entomologist 3: 66. Describes
the emergence of a minute psocid (P. pulicarius) from specimens
of Atropos pulsatorius.

Newstead, R.
1921. Corrodentia: Psocidae. On a new Southern Nigerian Psocid. Trans.
ent. Soc. Lond. 1921 (3/4): 452-454, 1 fig., pl. XI.
Nitsch, C. L.

1821. Ueber die Eingeweide der Buticherlaus (Psocus pulsatorius) und
uber das Verfahren bei der Zergliederung sehr kleiner Insekten.
Germar’s Magaz. Entom. 4: 276-290, pl. 2.

188 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Noland, R. C.
1924. The anatomy of Troctes divinatorius Muell. Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci.
Arts Lett. 21: 195-211, pls. 1V-VI.

Nordberg, S.
1936. Biologischoekologische Palereuchungrn Uber die Vogelnidicolen. Act.
Zool. Fenn. 21: 1-168, 4 figs.

Nordman, A.

1935. Enumeratio Insectorum Fenniae. Helsingfors. (Copeognatha: Vol. 4,
pp. 9-10). List.

Nowicki, M
1865. Insecta Haliciae Musei Dzieduszyckiani Krakow. 87 pp.

Nyholm, T.

1950. Till kannedomen om den svenska copeognatfaunan. I. Tva for var
fauna nya arter av slaktet Peripsocus Hagen. Ent. Tidskr. 71:
194-198, 2 figs. Swedish records and key to Peripsocus spp. in
Sweden.

1953a. Zur Kenntnis der Copeognathenfauna Schwedens. 2. Die Schwedischen
Arten der Gattungen Trichadenotecnum End. sensu Roesler. Ark.
Zool. (N.S.) 4: 297-302, 5 pls.

1953b. Zur Kenntnis der Copeognathenfauna Schwedens. 3. Verzeichnis der
bisher in Schweden gefundenen Copeognathen. Ent. Tidskr. 74:
108-115. Records and list of 53 spp. from Sweden.

Obernberger, J.
1955. Entomology. 4 vols. Prague. Vol. Ul, 726 pp., 801 figs., 9 pls.
(Psocoptera: II (65): pp. 638-675, figs. 747-795).

Obr, S.

1948a. Contribution a la connaissance d’espéce de Peripsocus didymus
Roes. (Psocopt.). Sborn. KI. prir. Brné 28: 54-56, 2 figs. (In
Czech with French summary).

1948b. A la connaissance des Psocoptéres de Moravie (Tchécoslovaquie).
Publ. Fac. Sci. Univ. Masaryk 360, 108 pp., 196 figs. (In Czech
with French summary). External anatomy, biology, study methods,
keys, descriptions, illustrations to spp. in Moravia. New forms
described in French summary.

1949. Psocoptera from the Silesian Jeseniky and Krdalicky Snéznik (Czecho-
slovakia). Sborn prir. Spolec. Mor. Ostravé. 10 (3): 1-16, 7 figs.
(In Czech with English summary).

195la. Psocoptéres de Slovaquie (Tchécoslovaquie). 1. La Haut Tatra.
Publ. Fac. Sci. Univ. Masaryk 330: 209-219. (In Czech with
French summary).

1951b. Psocoptéres de Slovaquie (Tchécoslovaquie). 2. L’environ de Cilistov
prés de Bratislava. Publ. Fac. Sci. Univ. Masaryk 330: 221-229, 15
figs. (In Czech with French summary).

1951c. Deuxiéme contribution a la connaisance des Psocoptéres de Moravie.
Sborn Kl. pyir. Brné. 29: 105-119, 7 figs. (In Czech with French
summary).

1951d. Trichadenotecnum incognitum Roes., une nouvelle espéce des Psoco-
ptéres pour la Tchécoslovaquie. Sborn. Kl. prir. Brné 29: 255-258,
5 figs.

1952. Psocoptera from the Silesian Beskydy (Czechoslovakia) Sborn p/ir.
Spolec. Mor. Ostravé 13: 216-231, 6 figs. (In Czech with English
summary).

1954. Contribution a la connaissance des Psocoptéres de la Silésie. Sborn.
prir. Spolec. Mor. Ostravé 15: 269-283, 7 figs. (In Czech with
French summary).

SMITHERS 189

1957. Contribution to the study of Psocoptera on the Kotouc Hill near
Stramberk and its near neighborhood (CSR). Sborn prir. Spolecé.
Mor. Ostravé 18 (4): 514-519. (In Czech with English and
Russian summaries). f

1958. Troisiéme contribution 4 la connaissance des Psocoptéres de Moravie.
(Tséchoslovaquie). Sborn. Kl. prir. Brné 30: 53-61. (In Czech
with French summary).

Ogilvie, L.
1928. The insects of Bermuda. Bermuda. 52 pp. (Corrodentia: p. 11).

2 spp. listed.
Okamoto, H.
1906. On the Psocidae of Japan. Trans. Sapporo nat. Hist. Soc. 1: 197-199.
(In Japanese).

1907. Die Psociden Japans. Trans. Sapporo nat. Hist. Soe. 2: 113-147,
pl. Il. (Reference given wrongly in Zoological Record as J. Tohoku
Imperial University).

1910. Die Caeciliiden Japans. Ann. hist. — nat. Mus. hung. 8: 185-212,
pls. II-V. Caeciliidae sens. lat.

Okamoto, H. and Kuwayama, S.
1924. A contribution to our knowledge of the Corrodentia fauna of South
Saghalien. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9) 14: 486-489, 1 pl.

Olfers, E. von
1905. Flugellose Arthropoden des Bernstein in ihrer Beziehung zur Decen-
denztheorie. Schr. Ges. Kongisb. 46: 100-104.

Orosi-Pal, Z.
1938. Copeognathen (Flechtlinge) in der Bienenwohnung. Z. angew. Ent.
24: 644-646, 1 fig. Trogium pulsatorium, Liposcelis divinatorius
and Lepinotus inquilinus in experimental apiary.

Packard, A. S.

1869. Guide to the study of Insects and a treatise on those injurious and
beneficial to crops. For the use of Colleges, Farm-Schools and
Agriculturalists. Salem.

1870. New or rare American Neuroptera, Thysanoptera and Myriapoda.
Proc. Boston Soc. nat. Hist. 13: 405-409.

1885. Bennet views on the classification of Insects. Amer. Nat. 19:

-1001.

1889a. Notes on the epipharynx and the epipharyngeal organs of taste in
mandibulate insects. Psyche, Camb., Mass. 5: 193-199, 222-228.
(Psocids: p. 222). Psocus novascotiae and Psocus sp.

1889b. The Cave Fauna of North America, with remarks on the anatomy
of the Brain and Origin of the Blind species. Mem. nat. Acad. Sci.
4: 3-156, pls. 1-27. (Psocids: pp. 72-73, 83, pls. 17, figs. 4, 4a
and 4b).

Pant, G. D.
1953. See Roonwal, M. L. et al. 1953.

Panzer, G. W.
1805. Faunae insectorum Germaniae initia oder Deutschlands insecten.
Nurnberg. 1790-1813. 109 pts.
Parfitt, E.

1879. The fauna of Devon, Neuroptera. Rep. Devon Ass. Adv. Sci. 11:
386-421. Local hist.

190 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Patton, W. S.
1930. Insects, Ticks, Mites and Venomous animals of Medical and Veterinary
Importance. London. (Psocoptera: Part Il, pp. 412-423).

Paulian, R.
4952. See Badonnel, A. 1952.

Pax, F. and Maschke, K.
1935. Die Hohlenfauna des Glatzer Schneeberges. i. Die rezente Metazoen-.
fauna. Beit. Biol. Glatzer Schneeberges 1: 4-72, 22 figs. Trogium
pulsatorium in cellar.

Pearman, J. V.

1923. Ptleroxanium squamosum near Bristol. Ent. mon. Mag. 59: 162.

1924a. A new species of Caecilius (Psocoptera). Ent. mon. Mag. 60: 58-61,
3 figs. C. corticis, England.

1924b. Two Psocids new to Britain. Ent. mon. Mag. 60: 121-124, 6 figs.
Psyllipsocus ramburi and Pseudopsocus rostocki.

1924c. Cece corticis Pearm.: synonymical note. Ent. mon. Mag. 60:
iNS)p

1925a. sedation to the British Psocid Fauna, Ent. mon. Mag. 61: 124-129,

figs.

1925b. Caecilius corticis Pearman: synonymy and notes. Ent. mon. Mag.
61: 203-206, 4 figs.

1926. A short account of British Psocids. Ann. Rept. Bristol Nat. Soc..
6 (3): 222-228, 1 pil.

1927. Notes on Pteroxanium squamosum Endl. and on the eggs of the
Atropidae (Psocoptera). Ent. mon. Mag. 63: 107-111, 8 figs.

1928a. Some Psocoptera from the New Hebrides. Ent. mon. Mag. 64:
133-137, figs. 1-9.

1928b. On sound production in the Psocoptera and on a presumed stridulatory
organ. Ent. mon. Mag. 64: 179-186, 1 fig.

1928c. Biological observations on _ British Psocoptera. Ent. mon. Mag.
61: 209-218, 239-243, 263-268.

1928d. Life-history of Psocus sexpunctatus (Linn). Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc.
(4) 6 (5): 384-387.

1928e. Pseudopsocus rostocki Kolbe. a further record. Ent. mon. Mag. 64:
261. Occurrence in England.

1928f. Lepidilla kelloggi Rib. (Pteroxanium squamosum End.): a new
locality. Ent. mon. Mag. 64: 261. Range in England and beyond.

1929a. Additional notes on Psocid biology (oviposition). Ent. mon. Mag.
65: 89-90.

1929b. Specimens illustrating the methods of oviposition in the Psocoptera.
Proc. ent. Soc. Lond. 3: 66-67. Relates to an exhibit at the
meeting of October 17th, 1928, illustrating the egg deposition
described in Pearman, J. V. 1928c.

1929c. Lives of the Psocidae. Ann. Rept. Bristol Nat. Soc. 12: 20-21. Feeding,
mating.

1929d. New species of Psocoptera from warehouses. Ent. mon. Mag. 65:
104-109, 10 figs. England.

193la. A new species of Lepinotus (Psocoptera). Ent. mon. Mag. 67:
47-50, 4 figs. L. patruelis, England.

1931b. Lepinotus patruelis: further note. Ent. mon. Mag. 67: 50.

1931c. More Psocoptera from warehouses. Ent. mon. Mag. 67: 95-98, 2 figs.

1932a. Notes on the genus Psocus, with special reference to the British
species. Ent. mon. Mag. 68: 193-204, 37 figs. Characters given for
Psococerastis, Metylophorus, Psocus, Trichadenotecnum, Loensia,
Amphigerontia, Euclismia, Clematostigma.

1932b. Some coccophagous Psocids (Psocoptera) from East Africa. Stylops
1 (4): 90-96, 8 figs.

1932c.
1933a.
1933b.
1933c.
1934a.
1934b.
1935a.
1935b.
1936a.
1936b.

1942.
1946.
1951.
1952.

1953:

1955a.
1955b.

1958a.
1958b.

1960.

Pearse,
1938.

SMITHERS 19}

A new species of Tapinella (Psocoptera). Stylops 1 (11): 240-242,

1 fig.

A Psocid allied to Eremopsocus infumatus McLachlan (Psocoptera).
Stylops 2 (7): 159-161, 11 figs. Venezuela.

Further Notes on Lepidilla kelloggi Ribaga. Ent. mon. Mag. 69: 22.
Distribution, seasonal cycle.

A new species of Terracaecilius (Psocoptera). Ent. mon. Mag. 69:
81-83, 2 figs. England. :

A new species of Archipsocus (Psocoptera). Stylops 3 (5): 112-113,
7 figs. Ceylon.

New and little known African Psocoptera. Stylops 3 (6): 121-132,
12 figs.

Notes on some dimorphic Psocids. Ent. mon. Mag. 71: 82-85, 1 fig.
Embidotroctes, Psoquilla, Psyllipsocus, Bertkauia.

Two remarkable Amphientomids (Psocoptera). Stylops 4 (6): 134-
137, figs. A, B. 2 spp. Nephax, South Africa, Palestine.

The Taxonomy of the Psocoptera: Preliminary Sketch. Proc. R. ent.
Soc. Lond. (B) 5: 58-62. Conspectus of reclassification of the order.

Two new Psocids from Ceylon. Spolia zeylan. 20: 1-7, 1 pl.

Third note on Psocoptera from warehouses. Ent. mon. Mag. 78:
289-292, 3 figs.

A specific characterization of Liposcelis divinatorius (Mueller) and
L. mendax sp.n. (Psocoptera). Entomologist 79: 235-244, 18 figs.

Additional species of British Psocoptera. Ent. mon. Mag. 87: 84-89,
7 figs. Troctes spp., Peripsocus spp.

Nomenclature of some British Psocoptera. Ent. mon. Mag. 88: 150.
Troctes Burmeister and identity of Atropos kidderi Hagen discussed.
cf. Broadhead, E. 1952.

A new generic form allied to Sphaeropsocus Hagen (Psocoptera,
Pachytroctidae). Ent. mon. Mag. 89: 262. Badonnelia titei.

See Sommerman, K. M. and Pearman, J. V. 1955.

The eggs of Mesopsocus unipunctatus (Muell.) (Psocopt. Mesopsoci-
dae). Ent. mon. Mag. 91: 206

Psocoptera. Res. Norv. sci. Exp. Tristan da Cunha 1937-1938, 45: 2-3.

Augmented description of Badonnelia titei Pearman (Psoc. Sphaero-
psocidae) with notes on the genus Sphaeropsocus. Ent. mon. Mag.
94: 49-52, 13 figs. Includes key to families of Nanopsocetae.

Some an Psocoptera found on rats. Entomologist 93: 246-250,
6 figs.

ASS:

Fauna of the caves of Yucatan. XVIII. Insects from Yucatan Caves.
Publ. Carneg. Instn. 491: 237-249. (Corrodentia: p. 238). Psylli-
psocus ramburi.

Peck, O.

1951.

Superfamily Chalcidoidea. In Muesebeck, C. F. W., Krombein, K. V.
and Townes, H. K. Hymenoptera of North America north of
Mexico, Synoptic catalog. Dep. Mon. U.S. Dep. Agric. 2, 1429
pp., 1 map. :

Pemberton, C. E.

1942.

Liposcelis divinatorius Mull. Proc. Hawaii. ent. Soc. 11 (2): 145.

Perkins, R. C. L.

1899.

Perrier,
1934.

Fauna Hawaiiensis. Cambridge. (Psocidae: Vol. 2 (2): pp. 77-87).

R.

Faune de la France en tableaux synoptiques illustré. Paris. 2e edition.
(Psocoptera: Vol. 3, pp. 72-76, 8 figs.).

192 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Peus, F.
1933. Flechtlinge als Wohnungs- und Materialschd4dlinge besonders in Neu-
bauten. Z. GesundhTech. Stadtehyg. 25: 483-490, 1 fig. Spp.
occurring in houses in Germany, control. cf. Rev. appl. Ent. (A)
21: 532-533, 1933 (Review in English).

Peyerimhoff, P. de

1901. Le méchanisme de l’éclosion chez les Psoques. Ann. Soc. ent. Fr.
70: 149-152, 1 fig. Stenopsocus cruciatus (L.).

Pictet, A. E.
1865. Synopsis des Neuroptéres d’Espagne. Geneva. 123 pp.

Pictet, F. J.

1854. Traité de Paléontlologie ou Histoire naturelle des Animaux fossiles
considérés dans leur Rapports zoologiques et geologiques. Paris.
2e edition. (Psocoptera: Vol. 2, p. 376, pl. XL, fig.

Pliginsky, V. G.
1915. Pests of collections and their control. Bull. Charkov. Soc. of Friends
of Nature 3: 73-76.

Pongracz, A.
1913. Ujabb adatok Magyarorsz4g Neuroptera-fauna-jahoz. Rovart. Lapok.
20: 175-186.
1914. Die Neuropteroiden Ungarns. Rovart. Lapok. 21: 109-155. (In
Hungarian with German summary). (Psocoptera: pp. 116-118).
1919. Beitrage zur Pseudoneuropteren-und Neuropteren-fauna Polens. Ann.
Hist. -nat. Mus. Nat. 17: 161-177.

Pongracz, S.
1943. See Dudich, E. et al. 1943.

Porter, C. E.

1939. Entomologica chilena. Localidades neuvas de algunas especies. Rev.
chil. Hist. nat. 42: 166-169, illustr. Ectopsocus briggst wing
illustrated.

Pravdin, T.
1932. Beitrage zur Kenntnis des Baues des Kopfes der Insekten — Zum
Bau des Kopfes des Copeognathen. Zool. J. Moscow 11: 159-172,
14 figs. (In Russian with German summary).

Priesner, H.

1926. Holz- und Bucherlatise (Copeognatha) aus Oberdsterreich und
Steiermark. Jber. oberdst. Musealver 81: 369-376.

Provancher, L.

1876. Petite Faune entomologique du Canada. Les Neuroptéres. Nat.
canad. 8: 177-187 (Psocids: pp. 181-187).

Puschnig, R.
1923. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Psociden-fauna Karntens. Carinthia II.

136: 112.
Quezel, P., Rioux, J. A. and Verdier, P. H.

1949. Les Psocoptéres dans la biocénose hivernale des écorces de platane
(Région de Montpellier). Feuille Nat. (N.S.) 4: 87-88.

SMITHERS 193

Rabeler, W.
193la. Die Fauna des Goldenitzer Hockmoores in Mecklenberg. Z. Morph.
Okol. Tiere 21:173-315, 7 figs. (Psocids: p. 222).
1931b. Bemerkungen zur Psocidenfauna Mecklenbergs. Arch. Ver. Naturg.
Mecklenb. N.F. 5: 45-50.

Rambur, J. P. -
1842. Histoire naturelle des Insectes. Neuroptéres. Nouvelles suites a
Buffon, Paris. xvii, 534 pp. 12 pls.

Rapp, W. F.
1961. Corrodentia in cliff swallows nests. Ent. News 72 (7): 195. Liposcelis
bostrychophilus.
Ray, J.

1710. Historia insectorum; opus posthumum. London. (Psocid: p. 8).

Redienbacher, J.
1886. Vergleichende Studien Uber das Fligelgedder der Insekten. Ann.
naturh. (Mus.) Hofmus. Wien 1: 153-232, pls. IX-XX. (Corrodentia:
pp. 183-184, pl. XII, figs. 35-38).

Reichmuth, W.
1938. Die Schadwirkungen der Flechtlinge (Copeognatha) unter Bertck-
sichtigung der Entwicklung und ihrer abhangigkeit von Feuchtigkeit
und Temperatur. Mitt. Ges. Vorratsschutz 14 (5): 57-63.

Reuter, O. M.

1894. Corrodentia Fennica. I. Psocidae. Forteckning och beskrifning
Ofver Finlands Psocider. Act. Soc. Fauna Flora fenn. 9 (4):
1-49, 1 pl. Lists 41 spp., keys, descriptions, distribution.

1899. Antechningar om Finska Psocider. Act. Soc. Fauna Flora fenn.
17 (3): 1-7. Lists 7 spp.

1904. Neue Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathen Finnlands. Act. Soc.
Fauna Flora fenn. 26 (9): 1-28, 3 pls. Deals with 17 spp.

1909. Mitteilungen Uber einige finlandische Copeognathen. Medd. Soc.
Fauna Fl. fenn. 35: 204-210. Lists 10 spp.

Ribaga, C.

1899a. Descrizione di nuovo genere e di una nuovo specie di Psocidi
trovato in Italia. Riv. Pat. veg., Padova 8: 156-159, pl. 7.

1899b. Osservazioni sull’ anatomia del Trichopsocus dahli MacL. Nota
preventiva. Riv. Pat. veg., Padova 8: 370-374.

1900a. Una specie nuova di Psocide trovata in Italia. Riv. Pat. veg., Padova
8 (2): 364-366, 1 fig.

1960b. Pentute alla conoscenza Psocidi italiani. Riv. Pat. veg., Padove
: 375-386.

1901. Osservazioni circa l’anatomia de Trichopsocus dalii McLachl. Riv.
Pat. veg., Padova 9: 129-176, 6 pls.

1904. Sul genere Ectopsocus McLach. e descrizione di una nuova varieta
dell’ Ectopsocus briggsi MacLach. Redia 1: 294-298.

1905a. La partenogenesi nei Copeognati. Redia 2:, 33-36. Ectopsocus briggsi
var. meridionalis.

1905b. Descrizione di nuovi Copeognati. Redia 2: 99-110, pls. IX, X.
California; Italy.

1907. Copeognati nuovi. Redia 4: 1-9, pl. IV. 2 spp., Italy.

1908a. Un nuovo Copeognato dell’Isola di Giava. Redia 5: 20-26, pl. II.

1908b. Copeognati Estraeuropi del Museo Civico di Storia Naturale di
Genova. Redia, 5: 98-109, pl. VI. Argentine, East Indies, Uraguay,
Paraguay, Bolivia, New Guinea.

194 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1910. “Anisopsocus lichenophilus’, nuovo Copeognato, trovato in Italia.
Redia 6: 272-281, 8 figs.

1911. Nuovi Copeognati Sudafricani. Redia 7: 156-171, 12 figs.

Richards, O. W.

1943. The habitat of species of Ploiariola (Heteroptera-Reduviidae). Proc.

R. ent. Soc. Lond. (C) 8 (7): 22. Ploiariola vagabunda eating
Liposcelis sp. and probably other psocids.
19572) Seer mms; AL Ds 19578

Richards, O. W. and Herford, G. V. B.

1930. Insects found associated with cacao, spices and dried fruits in London

warehouses. Ann. appl. Biol. 17: 367-395.

Richards, O. W. and Waloff, N.
1958. Psocoptera captured on broom at the Imperial College Field Station,

Silwood Park, Berks. Ent. mon. Mag. 94: 150. List and remarks
on abundance.

Rimsky-Korsakov, M.

1922. Ueber einiger flugellose Copeognathen. Rev. russe Ent. 18: 20-21.
(In Russian with German summary). 5 spp. listed from St.
Petersburg.

1948.

In Tarbinskii, S. P. Identification of the Insects of the European

part of the U.S.S.R. Moscow. 1127 pp., illustr. (Corrodentia: pp.
151-154).

Ringuelet, R. A.

1955. Ubicacion zoogeografica de las Islas Malvinas. Rev. Mus. La Plata
(N.S.) 6: 419-464, 8 figs.

Rioux, J. A.

1949. See Quezel, P. et al. 1949.
1953. Invasion de psoques dans une collection de champignons levuriformes.

Ann. parasit. humaine et comp. 28 (3): 239-240. Liposcelis
bostrychophilus.

Ritsema, C.

1872. (Notes an instance recorded in Arch. path. Anat. 1871, p. 238 of

immense numbers of Clothilla inquilina appearing in an old house
in August). Album. der Nat. 1872: 255.
Robins, E. L. D.
1945. See Hickin, N. E. and Robins, E. L. D. 1945.
Rodendorf, B. B.
1961. See Becker-Migdisova, E. E. 1961.

Roemer, J. J.

1789. Genera insectorum Linnaei et Fabricii Iconibus illustrata. Vitoduri.
i-viiil, 86 pp., 37 pls. (Psocids: pp. 32, 55, 56, pl. xxiv, figs.
12, 13; pl. xxix, figs. 3, 3b.) The plates of this book are the
same as those in Sulzer, J. H. 1776.
Roepke, W.
1926. Vorratsschadlinge auf Java. Mitt. Ges. Vorratsschutz 2 (5): 50-53.

Psocids occurring everywhere.

SMITHERS 195

Roesler, R

1935a. Reuterella neglecta nov. spec., eine neue rindenbewohnende Copeog-
nathen-Art. Zool. Anz. 111 (3/4): 93-95, 8 figs.

1935b. Zur Kenntnis der Mecklenbergischen fauna VII. 22. Die Copeognathen
Mecklenbergs. Arch. mecklenberg. Naturf. 9: 18-30. Reuterella
neglecta n. sp. Brief description, full description to follow in
Zool. Anz. Notes on life history of other spp.

1937a. Zur Copeognathenfauna Pommerns. Dohrniana 16: 61-74.

1937b. Zur Kenntnis der mecklenbergischen Fauna IX. 31. Ein Nachtrag zur
Capeoene nen: auna Mecklenbergs. Arch. mecklenberg. Naturf.
11: 65-69.

1939a. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Copeognathenfauna Deutschlands. Zool.
Anz. 125 (7/8): 157-176, 16 figs.

1939b. Trichadenotecnum incognitum nov. spec. eine neue deutsche Psocide.
Zool. Anz. 127 (3/4): 109-112, 6 figs.

1940a. Neue und wenig bekannte Copeognathengattungen I. Zool. Anz.
129 (9/10): 225-243, 39 figs. Mainly South American spp.
mentioned. T richempheria, Psoquilla, TYapinellinae, Psyllotroctes,
Pachytroctinae, Electrentominae, Amphientominae, Plaumannidae,
Ptiloneuridae.

1940b. Neue und wenig bekannte Copeognathengattungen II. Zool. Anz.
130 (1/2): 1-25, figs. 40-101. Spp. from South America, Formosa.
Gojinae, Neurostigminae, Epipsocinae, Thyrsophorinae, Pseudo-
caeciliidae, Polypsocidae (sens. Roesler).

1940c. Neue Copeognathen. Arb. morph. taxon. Ent. Berl. 7 (3): 236-244,
2 figs. Ptiloneuridae; family divisions of Psocetae; subfamilies
and tribes of Psocidae; Mesopsocidae; divisions of Pseudocaeciliidae
(sens. Roesler).

1943. Uber einige Copeognathengenera. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 104: 1-14, 13
figs. Psocidae: Amphigerontiini, Psocini, Metylophorini; Pseudo-
caeciliidae: Peripsocinae. Division of some Amphigerontia spp.
and several name changes in genera and spp.

1944. Die Gattungen der Copeognathen. Stettin. ent. Ztg. 105: 117-166.
Discussion on classification and key to genera of world.

1952. In Eichler, W. 1952 Die Tierwalt der Gewachshauser. Leipzig, i-iv,
93 pp., 11 figs. (Psocoptera: p. 34).

1953. Zwei neue Lachesilla-Arten (Psocoptera). Ent. Ber., Amst. 14: 295-
300, 15 figs. South Russian spp.

1954a. Uber Parthenogenese und Voltinismus bei Psocopteren. Bericht 7.
Wanderversammlung Deutscher Entomologers. 8 bis 10 September
1954 in Berlin: 165-167.

1954b. Neue Gattungen und Arten der deutschen Psocopteren-fauna (Psoco-
ptera). Beit. Ent. 4 (4/5): 559-574, 24 figs.

Rolander, D.
1754. Beskrifung pa Wagg-Smeden (Atropos). Vetensk. Acad. Handl.
15: 152- 156. Rolander, D. 1786 is a translation into German.
1786. Beskrifung pa Vagg-Smeden (Atropos). Abstr. Fuessly Neu. Mag.
3: 38-40. (In German). This is a translation of Rolander, D.

1754.

Roonwal, M.L., Mather, R. N., Bhasin, G. D., Singh, B.,
Pant, G. D. Chandra, A., Katiyar, K. and Mathur, R. K.

1953. A systematic account of the main identified entomological collection
at the Forest Research Institute, Dehra Dun, Pts. 9-21. Orders
Isoptera, Embioptera, Psocoptera, Anoplura, Ephemeroptera,
Odonata, Thysanoptera and Hemiptera. Forest Res. Inst. Indian
Forest Lflt. 121 (3): (Ent.): 39-187.

196 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Rosen, K. von.
1910. Beitrag zur Copeognathen-Fauna Ostpreussens. Konigsberg Schr.
physik. Ges. 51 (3): 330-338. List.
1911. Mitteilungen tiber stideurovaische Copeognathen. Munchen Mitt. ent.
Ges. 1911 (1/2): 8-11, 6 figs.

Rosewall, O. W.
1930. The Biology of the booklouse Troctes divinatoria Mull. Ann. ent-
Soc. Amer. 23: 192-194, 1 fig.

Rostock, M.

1868. Verzeichniss sachsischer Neuropteren. Berl. ent. Z. 12: 224-226.
(Psocidae: p. 226). 10 spp. listed.

1876. Psocidenjagd im Hause. Ent. Nachr. 2: 190-192.

1878. Die Ephemeriden und Psociden Sashsens mit Bertcksichtigung des-
meisten tbrigen deutschen Arten. Jber. Ver. Naturk. Zwickauw
1877-1878: 76-100. (Review in S.B. Ges. Isis 1878: 178).

1879a. Die Netzflugler Sachsens. S.B. Isis Dresden 1879: 70-91. 26 spp.

1879b. Ueber eine besondere nordrussische Psocus-Art. Ent. Nachr. 5:
129-130.

1881. Verzeichniss der Neuropteren Deutschlands, Oesterreichs und der
Schweiz. Ent. Nachr. 7: 217-228. (Psocids: pp. 227-228). (See
also Kolbe, H. 1881b.) List of Neuroptera of Germany.

1888. See Kolbe, H. 1888b.

Sala, I.
1928. Reflexiones sobre la labor cientifica del R.P. Longinos Navas, S. J.
Rev. Acad. Cienc. Zaragoza 12: 123-175. (Biblio. Naturalistica:
pp. 133-162). Bibliography of papers by Navas, L. until 1927.

Saunders, E.
1905. Psocidae at Woking. Ent. mon. Mag. 41: 213. 22 spp. listed.

Schaeffer, J. C.
1766. Elementa Entomologica; 135 tabulae aere excusae floridique coloribus.
distinctae. Ratisbon.
1779. Icones Insectorum circa Ratisbonam indigenorum coloribus naturam
Ila expressae. Regensburg. 3 vols. (Psocoptera: vol. 3,
g.).

Schille, F.

1902. Materyaly do fauny owadow siatkoskrzydtych i szaranczakéw doliny
Popradu. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr., Krakéw 36: 77-95.

1904. Eine neue Psociden-Varietat. Zool. Anz. 27: 475-476.

1905. Materyalty do fauny owadow siatkoskrzydtych i szaranczakéw doliny
Popradu. Czes¢ HI. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr., Krakéw 38: 36-39.

1907. Materyaly do fauny owad6w siatkoskrzydtych i szaranczakéw doliny
Popradu. Czes¢ IV. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr., Krakow 40: 43-45.

1911. Materyaly do fauny owadow krajowych. Spraw. Kom fizjogr..,.
Krakéw 45: 11-38, 1 pl.

1912. Materyaty do fauny owad6w krajowych. II. Spraw. Kom. fizjogr.,
Krakow 46: 123-131.

Schneider, H.
1954. Vergleichende Untersuchungen tiber Parthenogenese und Entwick-
lungsrhythmen bei Psocopteren. Zool. Anz. 151 (5/6): 105-110.
European spp.
1955. Vergleichende Untersuchungen Uber Parthenogenese und Entwick-
lungsrhythmen bei einheimischen Psocopteren. Biol. Zbl. 74:
273-310, 4 figs.

SMITHERS 197

Schneider, W. G.
1885. Verzeichniss der Neuropteren Schlesiens. Ent. Bresl. (2) 10: 17-32.

Schouteden, H.
1918. Psocides tisseurs au Congo. Rev. zool. afr. 5 (3): 169-171.

Schrank, F.

1776. Abbildung einiger Insecten, von denen meines wiecens noch keine,
oder keine gute Zeichnung gemacht worden ist. (Diptera, Hemiptera,
Atropos). Schrank Beitrage 1776: 42-59, fig. ;

1781. Enumeratio insectorum Austriae indigenorum. Stee Vindelicor.,
Klett. ix, 548 pp. 4 pls.

1786. Bayersche Reise. Munich. 276 pp., 2 pls.

1802. Fauna Boica. Nurnberg. Vol. 2, 274 and 412 pp. (Psocids: Vol. 2,
pp. 191-192).

Schroder, C

1902. See Bird, L. 1901.
1925. See Handlirsch, A. 1925.

Schubert, K.
1933. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Thierwelt des Moosebruches im Altvatege-
birge (Ostsudeten). (Spinnentiere [teilweise], Insekten, Wirbel-
tiere). Z. Morph. Okol. Tiere 26: 325-383. (Insects: pp. 334-354).

Schulze, L.
1908. See Enderlein, G. 1908b.

Schulze, P.
1936. See Weber, H. 1936.

Schumacher, F

1917. Ueber Psociden-Feinde aus der Ordnung der Hemipteren. Z. wiss.
Insekt.Biol. 13: 217-218.

Scopoli, J. A.

1763. Entomologia Carniolica exhibens Insecta carnioliae indigena et
distributa in ordines, genera, species, varietates, methodo Linneana.
Vindobonae. 28 and 421 pp., 43 pls.

Scott, H.

1916. Note on the swarming of chloropid flies, Psocidae, etc. in houses.
Ent. mon. Mag. 52: 18-21. (Psocids pp. 20, 21). Pterodela
pedicularus and Ectopsocus briggsi.

Scott, J.

1907. Insect agencies as a cause of larch canker. J. Board. Agric. 14:
551-554, 4 figs. Caecilius flavidus.

Scudder, S. H.

1869. See Harris, T. W. 1869.
1877. On the structure of the head of Atropos. Psyche, Camb., Mass.
: 49-51. (See Burgess, E. 1877).

1890. The Fossil Insects of North America, with notes on some European
species. 2 vols. New York. (Vol. I. The Pre- Tertiary Insects, 455
pp., 35 pls.; Vol. Il. The Tertiary Insects, 663 pp., 28 pls.)
(Psocids: Vol. II pp. 117-118, pl. 5, fig. 51). Parapsocus disjunctus.

Sellards, E. H.

1909. Types of Permian Insects. Part III. Megasecoptera, Oryctoblattinidae
and Protorthoptera. Amer. J. Sci. 27: 151-173, 28 figs.

198 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Selys-Longchamps, E. de

1872. Notes on two new genera of Psocidae. Ent. mon. Mag. 9: 145-146, 2
figs. Psyllipsocus, Hemipsocus.

1873. Révision des Psocides décrites par Rambur, suivie de la liste des
espéces de cette famille observées jusqu’ici en Belgique. Ann. Soc.
ent. Belg. 16: 1-5.

1879. La sous-famille des Psocines en Angleterre en Belgique et en
Scandinavie. C.R. ent. Belge. 22: 164-167.

1888. Catalogue raisonné Orthoptéres et des Neuroptéres de Belgique.
Ann. Soc. ent. Belg. 32: 103-203. (Psocids: pp. 125-131). Belgian

spp.

Seshadri, A. R.
1953. Observations on Trichinothrips brevipes (Bagnall) a little known
predatory thrips from South India. Indian J. agric. Sci. 23: 27-
39) »3) pls:

Sharp, D.
1901. In Cambridge Natural History. London. (Psocidae: Vol. 5, 390-398,
figs. 241-249). Psocids are dealt with as Psocidae within Neuroptera,
in Chap. 17.

Shepard, H. H.
1939a. Insects infesting stored foods. Bull. Minn. agric. Exp. Sta. 340:20.
1939b. Insects infesting stored foods. Bull. Minn. agric. Exp. Sta. 341:27.
1955. See Fernald, R. T. and Shepard, H. H. 1955.

Sherborn, C. D.

1902. Index animalium, sive Index nominum que ab. AD MDCCLVIII
generibus et specibus animalium imposita sunt. Sectio prima, a
Kalendis Janueris MDCCLVIII usque ad finem Decembris MDCCC.
Cambridge. i-lix, 1195 pp.

1922-33. Index Animalium .. . sectio secunda a kalendis lanuariis, MDCCCI
usque ad finem Decembris, MDCCCI. London, 9 vols.

Shimer, H.

1870. Book worms. Amer. Ent. 2: 322-324, 2 figs. (Psocids: p. 324, in
editorial note). Damage to books, Atropos or Clothilla.

Shipley, A. E.
1904. The Orders of Insects. Zool. Anz. 27: 259-262.

Shiraki, T.

1952. Catalogue of injurious insects in Japan (exclusive of animal parasites).
Tokyo. Econ. Sci. Sect. nat. Res. Div. Prelim. Study No. 71. 7 vols.
(Corrodentia: Vol. 2, p. 16).

Siebold, C. T.

1851. Beitrage zur Fauna der wirbellosen Thiere der Provinz Preussen.
Neue preussische Prov. Blatt. Konigsberg 11: 351-358. (Corrodentia:
hy ebyANe

Silvestri, F.

1934. Compendio di entomologia applicata (Agraria-Forestale-Medica-
Veterinaria). Portici. Parte speciale 1: 1-448, 414 figs. (Corrodentia:
pp. 162-171).

Singh, B.
1953. See Roonwal, M. L. et al. 1953.

SMITHERS 199

Sinha, R. N.
1961. Insects and mites associated with hot spots in farm stored grain.
Canad. Ent. 93 (8): 609-621. Liposcelis bostrychophilus.

Smith, F.
1866. (Notice in minutes). Proc. ent. Soc. Lond. 5: \xxiv. Ticking sound.
1867. Notes on Anobium tessellatum. Ent. mon. Mag. 3: 279. Mention
of Atropos pulsatorium. ;

Smith, M. R.
1928. The biology of Tapinoma sessile Say, an important house-infesting
ant. Ann. ent. Soc, Amer. 21: 307-329, 5 figs., pl. XVIII. (Psocid:
p. 323). Psocid in nests in laboratory thought to be TFroctes
divinatorius (Miller)

Smith, R. F.
1962. See Hurd, P. D. et al. 1962.

Smithers, C. N.

1956a. The male of Ectopsocopsis mozambicus (Bacon) (Psocoptera,
Peripsocidae). Ent. mon. Mag. 92: 306-307, 2 figs.

1956b. A new species of Jsophanes (Caeciliidae, Psocoptera ) from Natal.
dis Tite Mares, Sa Zhi PD (OS POS. Chie

1957a. Some new species of Mesopsocus (Psocoptera: Mesopsocidae) from
Southern Africa. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond. 109 (7): 245-258,
15 figs.

1957b. Notes et descriptions sur les Psocoptéres de Madagascar. Nat.
malgache 9 (2): 273-280, 6 figs.

1957c. Three new species of Myopsocidae (Psocoptera) from Natal. Proc.
R. ent. Soc. London (B) 26: 11-16, 11 figs.

1958a. A new genus and species of domestic Psocid (Psocoptera) from
Southern Rhodesia. J. ent. Soc. S. Afr. 21 (1): 113-116, 6 figs.
Dolopteryx domestica.

1958b. Records and descipHons of Psocoptera from Nigeria. Ent. mon.
Mag. 94: 55-56, 4 figs.

1959. Nomenclatural note on three species of African Psocoptera. Ent.
mon. Mag. 94: 274.

1960a. Mission zoologique de l’I.R.S.A.C. en Afrique orientale (P. Basilewsky
et N. Leleup, 1957). LV. Psocoptera. Ann. Mus. Congo belge 8vo.
88: 365-376, 16 figs.

1960b. A collection of Psocoptera from Australian chestnut trees in Natal,
South Africa. J. ent. Soc. S. Afr. 23 (1): 218-222. 3 figs.

1962a. New species and records of Elipsocidae from Africa (Psocoptera).
Je ent. (SOG 1S. “Agra 250(2) = 255-202.) 19) figs:

1962b. Insects of Macquarie Island. Psocoptera: Philotarsidae. Pacific Ins.
4 (4): 929-932, 6 figs.

1963a. The generic position of two species of Philotarsidae (Psocoptera).
Penta SoGOds 2; 60

1963b. Two new genera of Elipsocidae (Psocoptera) from Australia.
Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (B) 32: 32-37, 12 figs.

1963c. New records of Myopsocidae (Psocoptera) from Africa with a des-
cription of the female of Phlotodes angolensis Bad. J. ent. Soc.
S. Afr. 26 (1): 187-189, 2 figs.

1963d. The Elipsocidae of Australia. Pacific Ins. 5 (4): 885-898, 25 figs.

1963e. Psilopsocus mimulus sp.n. (Psocoptera: Psilopsocidae) representing
a family new to Australia. J. ent. Soc. Od. 2: 56-59, 10 figs.

1964a. New Records of Cave and Mine-dwelling Psocoptera in Australia.
ements Soc. Olas 385:

1964b. The Archipsocidae (Psocoptera) of Australia. J. ent. Soc. Qd.
SO -O 25 lull LES:

1964c. re of camer Island. Psocoptera. Pacific Ins. Monogr. 7: 226-
2293 7 “figs.

200 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Snodgrass, R. E.

1905. A revision of the mouthparts of the Corrodentia and the Mallophaga.
Trans. Amer. ent. Soc. 31: 297-307, pl. Viii.

1935. Principles of Insect Morphology. New York and London. i-x, 667 pp.

1944. The feeding apparatus of biting and sucking insects affecting man
and animals. Smithson. misc. Coll. 104 (7): 1-113, 39 figs. (The
Biting lice and Booklice. Orders Mallophaga and Corrodentia:
pp. 21-30, figs. 9-11).

1957. A revised interpretation of the external reproductive organs of male
insects. Smithson. misc. Coll. 135 (6): 1-60, illustr. (Psocoptera:
p: -19)):

Snyder, T. E.
1915. Biology of Termites of Eastern United States. U.S. Bur. ent. Bull.
94 (2): 13-83. (Psocids: p. 71).
1926. Preventing damage by Lyctus powder-post beetles. Fmrs’. Bull. U.S.
Dep. Agric. 1477: 1-12. Psocids mentioned as scavengers.

Soehardjan, M.
1958. First contribution to a study of Copeognatha (Corrodentia) of the
Indonesian archipelago. Idea: 11 (1): 25-33.

Soehardjan, M. and Hamann, H. H. F.

1959. Second contribution to the Indonesian Psocidfauna; notes on some
recent collectings. Jdea 12 (1): 1-13, 35 figs.

Sofner, L.

1941. Zur Entwicklungsbiologie und Okologie der einheimischer Psocopteren
Arten Ectopsocus meridionalis Rib. und Ectopsocus briggsi McL.
Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 74: 323-360, 14 figs.

Solowiow, P.

1924a. Biologische Beobachtungen ‘iber Holzlaus (Atropos pulsatoria L.)
Zool. Anz. 59: 238-240.

1924b. Biologische Beobachtungen tuber die Holzlaus (Atropos pulsatoria L.).
Z. wiss. Insekt.Biol. 19: 46-48.

1924c. Neue Arten Blassenfusse. Ent. Z. 38: 21-25, 1 fig.

1925. Biologische Beobachtungen Uber Holzlause (Atropos pulsatoria L.).
Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst. 50: 270-272.

Sommerman, K. M.

1942. Rearing Technique for Corrodentia. Ent. News 53: 259-261, 1 fig.

1943a. Bionomics of Lachesilla nubilis (Aaron) (Corrodentia Caeciliidae).
Canad. Ent. 75: 99-105.

1943b. Description and bionomics of Caecilius manteri n.sp. (Corrodentia).
Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 45 (2): 29-39, 15 figs.

1943c. Bionomics of Ectopsocus pumilis (Banks) (Corrodentia, Caeciliidae).
Psyche, Camb., Mass. 50 (3/4): 53-64, 2 pls.

1944. Bionomics of Amapsocus amabilis (Walsh) (Corrodentia, Psocidae).
Ann. ent. Soc. Amer. 37 (3): 359-364, 1 pl.

1946. A revision of the genus Lachesilla north of Mexico (Corrodentia
Caeciliidae). Ann. ent. Soc. Amer. 39 (4): 627-661, 4 pls.

1948. Two new Nearctic Psocids of the Genus Trichadenotecnum with a
nomenclatural note on a third species (Corrodentia). Proc. ent.
Soc. Wash. 50 (7): 165-173, 1 pil.

1956a. Two new species of Rhyopsocus (Psocoptera) from the U.S.A., with
notes on the bionomics of one household species. J. Wash. Acad.
Sci. 46 (5): 145-149, 17 figs.

1956b. Parasitization of nymphal and adult psocids (Psocoptera). Proc.
ent. Soc. Wash. 58 (3): 149-152. North American spp.

SMITHERS 201

1957. Three new species of Liposcelis (=Troctes) (Psocoptera) from
Texas. Proc. ent. Soc. Wash. 59 (3): 125-129, 7 figs.

Sommerman, K. M. and Pearman, J. V.

1955. In: A Century of Progress in the Natural Sciences, 1853-1953.
California Academy of Sciences. (Psocoptera [Corrodentia, Copeo-
gnatha]: pp. 523-525).

Southcott, R. V.
1941. See Womersley, H. and Southcott, R. V. 1941.

Spangberg, J.
1878. Psocina Sueciae et Fenniae. Ofversigt af Sveriges och Finlands
Psociner. Oefv. Ak. Forh. 2: 5-29, pls. I, Il. 18 spp. listed. (Ref.
Kolbe, H. 1880c).
1880. Sur quelques espéces européens de la sousfamille des Psocines.
Ent. Tidskr. 1 (2): 94-98, pl. 1, figs. 4-6. Stenopsocus striatulus
(Fabr.), Psocus morio Latr., Psocus subnebulosus Steph.

Spruyt, F. J.
1927. Notes on Alaptus psocidivorus Gahan, a new species of Mymaridae
(Hymenoptera). Pan-Pacif. Ent. 3 (4): 182-184, 12 figs.

Stackhouse, H.

1724. An account of the Scarabeus galeatus pulsator or the Death-Watch.
Phil. Trans. 33 (385): 159-162.

Stager, R.

1917. Stenopsocus stigmaticus (Imh. & Labr.) und sein Erbfeind. Z. wiss.
Insket.Biol. 13 (3/4): 59-63, 2 figs.

Stains, G. S.
1941. See Knowlton, G. F. and Stains, G. S. 1941.

Stephens, F.

1829. <A systematic catalogue of British Insects: being an attempt to arrange
all the hitherto discovered indigenous insects in accordance with
their natural affinities. London. i-xx, 388 pp. (Psocidae: pp. 312-

1836. Mlustrations of British Entomology, or Synopsis of indigenous Insects
etc. London. 1827-1846. (Psocids: Pt. 6, pp. 115-129).

Strand, E.
1916. Psociden-Gespinste aus Paraguay. Arch. Naturgesch. 81 (12): 135-136,
1 pl.

Strobl, G. and Klapalek, F.

1906. Neuropteroiden (Netzfliigler) Steiermarks (und Niederosterreichs).
Graz. Mitt. Natw. Ver. Steierm. 42: 225-266. (Psocids: pp. 255-258).

Strouhal, H.
1939. Die in den hohlen von Warmbad Villach, Karnten, festgestellten
tiere. Folia zool. hydrobiol. Riga 9: 247-290. (Psocid: pp. 266-267).
Bertkauia lucifuga Rambur recerded as new for Karnten.

Sulzer, J. H.
1761. Die Kennzeichen der Insekten nach Anleitung des Konigl. Schwed.
Ritters und Leibarzts Karl Linnaeus durche XXIV. Kupfertafeln

erlautert und mit derselben nattrlichen Geschichte erlautert etc.
Zurich. (Psocid: pp. 177, 179, fig. 144d).

262 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1776. Abgekirzte Geschichte der Insekten nach dem Linneischen System.
Wintethur. 2 vols. Vol. 1. i-xxviii, 274 pp.; Vol. 2 72 pp., 37
pls. (Psocids: Vol. 1. pp. 173, 240; Vol. 2. pp. 48, 58, pl.
XXIV, figs. 12, 13; pl. XXIX, fig. 3, 3b). The plates of
this book are the same as those in Roemer, J. J. 1789.

Svadzhyan, P. K., Vishnyakova, V. N. and Mardzhanyan. K. S.
1963. On the Copeognatha of the Armenian S.S.R. and the methods of their
preservation in the laboratory. Acad. Sci. Armenian S.S.R. 16 (9):
89-94, 2 figs.

Sweetman, H. L.
1951. See Ghani, M. A. and Sweetman, H. L. 1951.

Swezey, O. H.
1929. Notes on the Egg parasites of Insects in Hawaii. Proc. Hawaii. ent.
Soc. 7 (2): 282-292. Mymarid parasites of Psocids p. 289.
1954. Forest Entomology in Hawaii. An annotated checklist of the
insect faunas of the various components of the Hawaiian forests.
Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Spec. Pub. 44: 1-266, illustr.

Swezey, O. H. and Bryan, E. H.
1929. Further notes on forest insects of Molokai. Proc. Hawaii. ent. Soc.
7 (2): 293-314. (Corrodentia: p. 305). 2 determined spp. listed;
3 or 4 reported.

Swezey, O. H. and Williams, F. X.
1932. Some observations on forest insects at the Nauhi nursery and
vicinity on Hawaii. Proc. Hawaii. ent. Soc. 8 (1): 179-190.
(Corrodentia: p. 190). 7 spp. listed.

Symmons, S.

1952. Comparative anatomy of the Mallophagan head. Trans. zool. Soc.
Lond. 27 (4): 349-436, 60 figs.

Szilady, Z.

1912. Magyarorszagi rovargylijtésem jegyzéke. Il. Neuroptera et Pseudo-
neuroptera. Rovart. Lapok. 19: 53-58.

Szulezeski, J. W.

1939. Verzeichniss der in der Wojewodschaft Poznan festgestellten Corro-
dentien. Polsk. Pismo ent. Lwow 16-17 (1937-1938): 90-93.
(In Polish with German summary).

Tada, S.

1956. Studies on the Japanese psocid insects as stored products pest I.
Jap: SJ. (San. Zoolh 7)" (3/4) Ee 1952202) 12 figs. (In Japanese
with English summary).

1959. Studies on the Japanese psocid insects as stored products pest II.
Jap. J. San. Zool. 10 (1): 35-40, 11 figs. (In Japanese with
English summary).

1962. Studies on the Japanese psocid species as stored products pest,
WI. Jap. J. San. Zool. 13: 99-104, 12 figs. (in Japanese with
English summary).

Takahashi, R.

1921. On the oecology of the Corrodentia. Dobuts. Z., Tokyo 33: 173-180,
2 figs. (In Japanese). An abstract of this paper appeared in
Jap. J. Zool. 1 (22): 8 (1922) by Kaburaki, T.

SMITHERS 203

1938. Notes on some Psocoptera of Formosa. Mushi 11 (1): #1-15, 2 figs.
Stenopsocus makii sp.n. from Hori, Formosa, allied to formosanus-
Banks; 8 spp. mentioned.

Tarbinskii, S. P.
1948. See Rimsky-Korsakov, M. 1948.

Taylor, L. R.
1960. The distribution of insects at low levels in the air. J. Anim. Ecol.
29: 45-63.
Tetens, H.

1891. Zur Kenntnis der deutschen Psociden. Ent. Nachr. 17: 369-384.

Thornton, I. W. B.

1955. See Broadhead, E. and Thornton, I. W. B. 1955.

1957. Faunal succession in umbels of Cyperus papyrus L. on the Upper
White Nile. Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (A). 32 (7-9): 119-131, 3 figs.

1959a. A new genus of Philotarsidae (Corrodentia) and new species of
this and related families from Hong Kong. Trans. R. ent. Soc.
Lond. 111 (11):. 331-349, 20 figs.

1959b. New species of Peripsocus Hagen 1866 (Corrodentia: Peripsocidae)
from Hong Kong Island, with further descriptions of Peripsocus
similis Enderlein 1903 and Peripsocus quercicola Enderlein 1906.
Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (B) 28 (3/4): 37-48, 18 figs.

1960. New Psocidae and an aberrant new Myopsocid (Psocoptera) from
Hong Kong. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond. 112 (10): 239-261, 47 figs.

196l1a. Comments on the geographical distribution of Pseudocaecilius elutus
Enderlein (Psocoptera) and descriptions of related new species from
Hong Kong. Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (B) 30 (11/12): 141-152,
19 figs.

1961b. The Trichadenotecnum group (Psocoptera: Psocidae) in Hong Kong
with descriptions of new species. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond. 113
(1): 1-24, 40 figs.

1962a. Psocids (Psocoptera) from the Batu Caves, Malaya. Pacific Ins.
4 (2): 441-455, 30 figs. Psyllipsocidae, Lepidopsocidae, Peripsocidae.

1962b. The Peripsocidae (Psocoptera) of Hong Kong. Trans. R. ent. Soc-
Lond. 114 (9): 285-315, 48 figs.

1962c. Note on the genitalia of two New Zealand Philotarsids (Insecta:
Psocoptera). N.Z.J. Sci. 5 (2): 241-245, 8 figs.

Thornton, I. W. B. and Broadhead, E.
1954. The British species of Elipsocus Hagen (Corrodentia, Mesopsocidae )
J. Soc. Brit. Ent. 5 (2): 47-64, 16 figs.

Tillyard, R. J.

1918. On the affinities of two interesting fossil insects from the upper
Carboniferous of Commentry, France. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W-
43 (1): 123-134, 3 figs.

1921. Two fossil insect wings in the collection of Mr. John Mitchell
from the Upper Permian of Newcastle, N.S.W. belonging to the
order Hemiptera. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 46 (4): 413-422,
S figs, pl. XXXYV.

1923. A Monograph of the Psocoptera, or Copeognatha, of New Zealand.
Trans. N.Z. Inst. 54: 170-196, 20 figs., pl. 18.

1926a. The insects of Australia and New Zealand. Sydney. pp. i-xiv, 560,
figs. Al-ZB4, Pls. 1-44. (Copeognatha pp. 126-130, figs. N1-N2,
De 2 es 6-7 pln tls hie. 16).

1926b. Kansas Permian Insects. 8: The Order Copeognatha. Amer. J. Sci-
11: 315-349, 19 figs.

204 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1928. Kansas Permian Insects. 12. The family Delopteridae, with a
discussion of its ordinal position. Amer. J. Sci. 16: 469-484.

1935. Upper Permian insects of New South Wales III. The Order Copeo-
enatha. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 60: 265-279, 13 figs. Lophioneuridae
removed from Homoptera and put into Copeognatha; Carpenter’s
family Cyphoneuridae merged with Lophioneuridae; keys to
families, genera, species; new genera and species.

1937. Kansas Permian Insects. Amer. J. Sci. 33: 81-110.

Titschack, E.
1930. Die Copeognatha, Megaloptera, Neuroptera, und Mecoptera der
nahteren und weiteren Umgebung Hamburgs. Verh. Ver. naturw.
Unterh. (Heimatforsch) Hamb. 21: 104-127. (Copeognatha pp.
108-113).

Torne, H. von

1940. Staublause als Getreideschadlinge und ihre Bekampfung durch die
Delicia-Kornkaferbegasung. Z. hyg. Zool. 32: 207-218, 4 figs.

Townes, H. K.
1951. See Muesebeck, C. F. W., Krombein, K. V. and Townes, H. K. 1951.

Townsend, Ch. H. T.
1912. Vulturopinae, a new Subfamily of the Psocidae; type Vulturops gen.
nov. (Platyp., Corrod.). Ent. News 23: 266-269, 3 figs.

Toxopeus, L. J.

1939. Entomologische notities uit Nieuw-Guinea. Ent. Med. Ned. Ind.
5: 11-17, 24-37, 59-71, 5 pls. (Psocoptera: pp. 28, 33). Mentions
collections of Psocids from New Guinea, but specimens now
lost. See Soehardjan, M. 1958.

Tragardh, I.
1909. Orthoptéres, Pseudonevroptéres. In Bey, I. Résumé de travaux relatifs
en partie a la faune entomologique de lEgypte. Bull. Soc. ent.
Egypte 1 (1909 [11): 10-23. (Orthoptéres, Pseudo-Nevropteéres:
p. 17). Mentions 2 spp. as having been already described by
Enderlein, G. (cf. Enderlein, G. 1905).

Tsutsumi, Chisato.

1961. Notes on the Psocoptera of Japan. 1. On the familial character
of a psocid species, Matsumuraiella radiopicta Enderlein (Psocidae).
Kontyii 29: 56-61, 2 figs. (In Japanese with English summary).

1962. Studies on the domiciliary psocids of Japan. (1). Jap. J. San. Zool.
13 (3): 190-196, 16 figs. (In Japanese with English summary).
Characters and life histories of Trogium pulsatorium, Lepinotus
reticulatus, Tapinella africana in Japan.

1964. New species and records of Psocoptera from the Amani Islands,
Japan. Kontyi 32 (1): 117-212, 2 figs.

Tullgren, A.
1909. Bidrag till kannedom om Sveriges Copeognather. Ark. Zool. 5 (8):
1-15, 2 figs.
1922. Lepinotus inquilinus Heyd. funnen i Sverige. Ent. Tidskr. 43: 71.

Tumpel, R.
1922. Die Geradfliger Mitteleuropas. 2. Aufl. Gotha. 325 pp., 94 figs.,
23 pls. (Pseudoneuroptera Corrodentia: pp. 142-157, figs. 50-58,
pl. XXIII.).

SMITHERS 205

Tuxen, S. L.
1956. See Badonnel, A. 1956.

Ulyanin, V.
1896. List of the Neuropterous and Orthopterous insects of the Province
of the Moscow district of Studies. Report of the Society of
Amateurs of Natural Science, Anthropology and Ethnography. 6
(2): 20-22.

Ulmer, G.
1927. See Enderlein, G. 1927.

Usinger, R. L.
1963. See Butler, G. D. and Usinger, R. L. 1963.

Vachon, M.
1932. Recherches sur Ja biologie des Pseudoscorpionides. le note. La
nutrition chez Chelifer cancroides L. Bull. sci. Bourgoyne 2:
21-26, 7 figs. Psocids as prey.

Vandel, A.
1964. Biospeologie. La biologie des Animaux cavernicole. Paris. i-xviii, 619
pp., 11 pls. (Psocoptera: p. 220).

Verdier, P. H.
1949. See Quezel, P. et al. 1949.

Verrill, A. E.
1902. The Bermuda Islands, their scenery, climate, production, physiography,
natural history and geology. Trans. Conn. Acad. Arts Sci. 11:
413-957, figs. 1-246, pls. Ixv-civ. (Psocids: pp. 817-819, figs.
192, 192a, 192b.)

Villers, C. J. de
1789. Caroli Linnaei entomologica, faunae suecicae descriptionibus aucta.
Lugduni. 4 vols. (Psocids: vol. 3, pp. 49-54).

Vishnyakova, V. N.
1959a. Towards the morphology of the sex system of Psocids (Psocoptera).
Acad. Sci. USSR All-Union Ent. Soc. 4th Congress. Theses of
papers I. General, Med. and Vet. Ent. pp. 33-35. (In Russian).
1959b. On the fauna and ecology of Psocoptera of Moscow and Ryazan
regions of the U.S.S.R. Rev. Ent. U.R.S.S. 38 (2): 435-442. (In
Russian with English summary). (An English summary of this
paper appeared in Ent. Review 38: 388-394, 1960).
1962. See Becker-Migdisova, E. E. and Vishnyakova, V. N. 1962.
1963. See Svadzhyan, P. K., Vishnyakova, V. N. and Mardzhanyan, K. S.
1963.
1964. In: Bey-Bienko, G. Ya (Ed.). Keys to the insects of the European
part of the U.S.S.R. I. Keys to the Fauna of U.S.S.R., Moscow
54: 1-935, 344 figs. (Psocoptera: pp. 291-308, figs. 149-154).
(In Russian).
Vollenhoven, S. C. von
1861. De dieren von Nederland — Gelede dieren. Harlem.

Wachter, S.
1925. The hatching of the eggs of Peripsocus californicus Banks. Pan-Pacif.
Ent. 2 (2): 87-89.

206 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

Walkenaer, C. A. de

1802. Faune Parisienne. Histoire abrégée des insectes des environs de
Paris, etc. Paris. 2 vols.

Walker, F.
1853. Catalogue of the specimens of Neuropterous insects in the collection
of the British Museum. London. (Psocids: Part 3, pp. 477-501).
1860. Characters of undescribed Neuroptera in collection of W. W.
Saunders, Esq., F.R.S. etc. Trans. ent. Soc. Lond. ser. 2, 5: 176-
199. (Psocids: p. 198). Psocus reponens.

Walloff, N.
1958. See Richards, O. W. and Walloff, N. 1958.

Walsh, B. D.

1862. List of the Pseudoneuroptera of IHinois contained ia the cabinet of
the writer. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad. 14: 361-402. (Psocids:
pp. 361-362).

1863. Notes. Proc. ent. Soc. Philad. 2: 182-186. (Notes on Hagen, H.
1863, see p. 186). Notes by B. D. Walsh to paper by Hagen, H.
1863.

1867. On the insects, Coleopterous, Hymenopterous and Dipterous, inhabit-
ing the galls of certain species of willow. Part 2 and fast. Proc.
ent. Soc. Philad. 6: 223-288. (Psocid: p. 270). Psocus rufus bred
from Cecidomyid gail.

Wapshere, A. J.
1960. See Broadhead, E. and Wapshere, A. J. 1960.

Waterton, J.

1904. Trichoptera and Neuroptera from Arran. Ana. Scot. nat. Hist. 1904:
194. Elipsocus westwoodi and E. abietis listed.

Weber, H.

1931. Die Lebensgeschichte von Ectopsocus parvulus (Kolbe 1882). Ein
Beitrag zur Kenntnis der einheimischen Copeognathea. Z. wiss. Zool.
138: 457-486, 18 figs.

1933, Lehrbuch der Entomologie. Jena. xii, 726 pp., 555 figs.

1936. Copeognatha. In Schulze, P. Biologie der Tiere Deutschlands. Berlin.
(Copeognatha: Lief 39, Teil 27, pp. 27. 1-27. 50, 27 figs.).

1938. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Ueberordnung Psocoidea. 1. Die Labiald-
risen der Copeognathen. Zool. Jb. Abt. Anat. 64: 243-286, 16 figs.
Anatomy and function of labial glands.

Weber, N. A.
1959. See Gressitt, J. L. and Weber, N. A. 1959.

Weber, S. E.
1906. The Possible Dissemination of Tubercle Bacilli by Insects. N.Y. med. J.
84: 884-888, 4 figs.
1907. A new Genus of Atropidae. Ent. News. 18: 189-194, 5 figs.
Ocellataria, North America.

Websdale, G. R.

1884. The death watch and its sound. Entomologist 17: 236-237. Atropos
puisatorius making ticking sound.

SMITHERS 207

Weele, H. W. van der

1906. Lijst van Neuropteroidea, gevonden bij Oldenzaal en Denekamp, ter
gelegenheid van de Peieterealoting der Ned. Ent. Ver. Juli
1906. Ent. Ber., Amst. 2: 146-147. (Corrodentia: p. 146). 8 spp.
listed.

1907. Eerste supplement op den Catalogus der Nederlandsche Neuropteroiden.
Tijdschr. Ent. 50: 121-128. (Corrodentia: pp. 122-123). 14 spp.
listed.

Wei, H.
1953. See Chou, M., Chung, C. and Wei, H. 1953.

Weidner, H.
1949. Psocoidea. Handb. Pflkranh. 4 (1): 373-374, figs. 198-199.
1952. Die Insekten der “Kulturwiiste” (Vorarbeiten zu eine Okologie der
Grossstadt). Mitt. hamburg. zool. Mus. 51: 89-173. 8 spp. listed.

Weiss, H. B. and Carruthers, R. H.
1936. The more important insect enemies of books and a_ bibliography
of the literature. Bull. N.Y. Publ. Libr. 40 (9-12): 739-752,
827-841, 985-995, 1049-1064, figs. (Psocids: pp. 742-743).
1937. Insect enemies of books. New York 63 pp., 4 pls.

Weiss, V.
1959. Die Copeognathen-Sammlung von Herrn Eduard Feldtmann. Bombus
2 (16/17): 62-64. List.

Werner, F.
1928. See Zerny, H. 1928.

Westwood, J. O.

1840a. Synopsis of the genera of British Insects. London. 158 pp. Bound
with Vol. II of Westwood, J. O. 1840b. and often referred to as an
appendix to that work. Date often given as 1839 but as the
genus Lachesilla, established on p. 47, is referred to in Vol. II:
20 of Westwood, J. O. 1840, it shows that it was not then printed
which would preclude the date 1839. (Psocidae: pp. 46-47, 158).

1840b. An introduction to the modern classification of Insects founded on
the natural habits and corresponding organisation of the different
families. London. 2 vols. Vol. I (1839), i-xiii, 462 pp., figs.
1-56, 1 pl. Vol. Il (1840), i-xi, 587 pp., figs. 57-133. (Psocidae:
Vol. Il: 17-20, fig. 59).

1841 Observations on the Structural Characters of the Deathwatch, with
the Description of a new British Genus belonging to the family
Psocidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 6: 480. Clothilla.

1845. Observations upon the structural character of the Death Watch
(Atropos pulsatoria) with Description of a new British Genus in
the family to which it belongs. Trans. ent. Soc. Lond. 4: 71-72.
Clothilla_ studiosa.

Whitehead, W. E.
1933. Parasites from a Bird’s nest. J. econ. Ent. 26: 292-293.

Wierzejski, A
1883. Dodatek do fauny siecidwek (Neuroptera). Spraw. Kom. fizjogr.,
Krakéw 17: 235-255.

Williams, F. X.
1931a. Hawaiian Psocidae. Proc. Hawaii. ent. Soc. 7 (3): 371-372. 6 spp.
mentioned as new, described in Banks, N. 1931a.

208 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PSOCOPTERA

1931b. Handbook of the insects and other invertebrates of Hawaiian sugar
cane fields. Honolulu.

1932a. See Swezey, O. H. and Williams, F. X. 1932.

1932b. Two immigrant Psocidae in Hawaii. Proc. Hawaii. ent. Soc. 8: 8.
Psocus lachlani Rib., Psoquilla marginepunctata Hag.

Williner, G. J.
1943a. Los Psocépteros de Mar del Plata. Rev. Soc. ent. argent 11: 471-480,
XXII.

1943b. Psocdpteros de misiones generos y especies nuevos. Rev. Soc. ent-
argent. 12: 109-121, pl.

1944a. Un Psocoptero critico. Rev. Soc. ent. argent 12 (4): 41-44, 3 figs.

1944b. Un Lichenomima argentino (Corrodentia, Myopsocidae). An. Soc.
cient. argent. 138: 158-161, 1 fig.

1944c. Caecilidos nuevos (Corrodentia: Caecilidae). Acta zool. lilloana
2: 293-299, 3 figs.

1944d. Dos nuevos Corrodéntidos de Cérdoba. Notas Mus. la Plata (Zool.)
9: 445-451, 3 figs.

1945. Cinco especies nuevas misioneras del genéro Psocus (Corrod. Psoc.).
Rev. Soc. ent. argent. 12: 235-243, pl. XVIII.

1946. Corrodéntidos del Brasil (Corrodentia: Psocidae et Caeciliidae)-
Acta zool. lilloana 3: 231-234, 1 pl.

1949. Corrodentios de Bolivia. Rev. Inst. Invest. Mus. argent. Cienc. nat.
1: 95-126, 15 figs.

Wlodarezyk, J.

1960. Psocoptera in the parks of Lodz. Fragm. faun. Warsaw 8: 469-483,.
5 figs. (In Polish with English and Russian summaries). 5 spp.
not previously recorded from Poland, 26 spp. listed.

1963. Psocoptera of some bird nests. Fragm. faun. Warsaw 10: 361-366,
3 figs. (In Polish with Russian and English summaries). 8 spp.
listed; 5 spp. new to Poland.

Wolcott, G. N.

1923. Insectae Portoricensis, a preliminary list of the insects of Puerto
Rico, with descriptions of some new species. J. Dep. agric. P.R.
ODE OIESDD muisted:

1936. Insectae Borinquensis, a revised list of the insects of Porto Rico.
J. Agric. Univ. P.R. 20: 51-52. 13 spp. listed.

1950. The Insects of Puerto Rico. J. Agric. Univ. P.R. 32: 1-224.
(Corrodentia: pp. 74-76).

Wolf, B.
1934. Animalium Cavernarum Catalogus. Berlin. (Patt 3: 145-224).

Wolter, H
1927. En for faunan ny psocid, Lepinotus formicarius Hag. Mem. Soc.
Fauna Flor. fenn. 4: 30.

Womersley, H
1937. Miscellaneous Insecta — Psocoptera. B.A.N.Z.A.R.E. Rep. Ser. B,
4 (3): 81. Mentions Clothilla pulsatoria from American Bay,
Possession Is., Crozets, and one on ship at Kerguelen.

Womersley, H. and Southcott, R. V.
1941. Notes on the Smarididae (Acarina) of Australia and New Zealand.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 65: 61-78, 8 figs. Smaris prominens om
Liposcelis divinatorius.

SMITHERS 209

Woodroffe, G. E.
1953. An ecological study of the Insects and Mites in the nests of
certain birds in Britain. Bull. ent. Res. 44: 739-772, 2 figs. 3 pls.

Wundrig, G
1936. Die Sehorgane der Mallophagen, nebst vergleichenden Untersuchungen
an Liposceliden und Anopluren. Zool. Jb. Abt. Anat. 62: 45-110,
64 figs.

Yosumatsu, K.
1938. See Esaki, T., Hori, H. and Yosumatsu, K. 1938.

Zalessky, G. M.

1937a. Sur un representant d’un nouvel ordre d’insectes permiens. Ann. Soc.
géol. Nord. 61: 50-71, 6 figs. Includes fossil Hemipsocoptera;
discussion on Permopsocidae.

1937b. Ancestors of some groups of the present day Insects. Nature, Lond.
140: 847-848, 3 figs. (Psocid: p. 847, fig. 2). Maueria and
Parapsocidium.

1939. Etudes des insectes permiens du basin de la Sylva et problémes
de lévolution dans la classe des insectes. III. Probi. Paleont.
Moscow 5: 33-91, 3 pls., 45 figs. (In Russian with French
summary). (Psocids: pp. 45-49, figs. 19, 24, pl. 1, fig. 4).

Zalessky, M. D.

1929. Sur les nouveaux Insectes du Permien des bassins des fleuves la
Kama, la Viatka et la Belaia. Trans. Natur. Soc. Univ.
Kazan. 70 (1): 1-30, figs. (Psocids: p. 17, fig. 6). Deals with
fossil psocids including Jdelopsocus.

1932. Observations sur les nouveaux Insectes permiens de 1l’Europe
Orientale. Bull. Soc. géol. Fr. (5) 2: 183-210, 12 figs., 3 pls.
(Psocids: pp. 190-192, fig. 5, pl. 12, fig. 1).

Zavarzin, A.
1906. Beitrage zur Copeognathen-Fauna der Provinz Novgorod (Nord
ee); Ber. Susswasserst. Naturf. Ges. St. Petersburg 2:
271-276.

Zerny, H.
1928. Neuroptera. Jn Werner, F. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Fauna Griechen-
lands, namentlich der agaischen Inseln. §.B. Akad. Wiss., Wien
(I) 137: 283-295, 9 figs.

Zetterstedt, J. W.
1840. Insecta Lapponica descripta. Lipsiae. 1839-1840. (Psocids: Sectio
5: 1053-1056).

Zimmerman, E. C.
1948. Insects of Hawaii. Honolulu. (Corrodentia: Vol. 2, pp. 217-255, figs.
121-137). General account of the order in Hawaii.
1957. Insects of Hawaii. Honolulu. (Corrodentia: Vol. 6, p. 179).

BOOK REVIEW

AUSTRALIAN SPIDERS—John Child—Periwinkle Press, Gladesville, New
South Wales—i-vi, 87 pp., 35 figs., pl. I-XVII (VIII, XV col.), 1965. 7/6.

This small introductory book is an addition to the semi-popular literature
on Australian spiders.

Chapter 1 contains a very brief explanation of the use of scientific names,
with particular reference to Arachnids. It is unfortunate that the wording
infers that Araneus is of family rank, although subsequently the group is
correctly referred to as a genus. Chapter II is a brief description of the
anatomy of the spider with explanation of terms which are used subsequently
in the book; there are simple but effective illustrations to aid in understanding
these. An additional help to those not familiar with technical terms are
indications of pronunciation of some of the words (e.g. “chelicerae (kee-LISS-
er-ee)”). Chapter III deals even more briefly, in a similar manner, with
internal structures and such matters as courtship, eggs and mating receive
mention. Chapters 1V-XIII deal with the main families of spiders in Australia;
the common genera are mentioned, each under a bold type heading; in most
cases one or two species are singled out for mention. Chapter XIV _ briefiy
mentions other Arachnid groups. A short appendix, mainly of “Further Reading,”
and indices complete the work.

Covering such a wide range of topics relating to a large group of organisms
in such a small space leads to rigid selection and extreme condensation of
material. One of the dangers in this process is loss of accuracy but this has
been admirably avoided. The line illustrations are useful and although many
lack the detail which could have been included they do provide an accurate
impression of the spider’s appearance; this is, in fact, often of more value
to the beginner than more complex illustration. A few of the black and
white plates have been a little too obviously retouched.

This contribution forms an excellent first introduction to the spiders for
the young naturalist and generally interested layman. Bush walkers will also
find in it some useful background information although they are more likely
to encounter species belonging to groups not mentioned than is the suburban
reader. It is technical enough to be clear in meaning but easy to understand.
The “Further Reading” list will guide those interested in going a little deeper
into matters.

The book is well produced, the printing is clear and on good paper,
the illustrations are appropriate and well placed in relation to text; the use
of clear headings and bold type makes reference easy. The size, 7” x 5”, is
convenient; the cover is attractive, as is the price.

C. N. SMITHERS

AN UNUSUAL ABERRATION OF DELIAS AGANIPPE

(Lepidoptera: Pieridae)

By? J Vo SRETERS

I have in my collection a male specimen of Delias aganippe Donovan,
1805, which has the areas of yellow scales on the underside replaced by bright
red scales. The upperside is light brown instead of the normal grey to black

The specimen was collected at Northmead, N.S.W., during February,

1961 by M. Gregg.

Reference

Waterhouse, G. A., 1932, “What Butterfly is That?” Sydney.

BOOK REVIEW

SPIDERS OF AUSTRALIA—Barbara York Main—Jacaranda Press.
124 pp., illustrated, 1964—Price 14/6

This little book is a welcome addition to the well established Jacaranda
Pocket Guide series. The 124 pages are well packed with information and the
available space has been very economically used as a result of which the
acknowledgments and references appear at the front of the book.

After a brief introduction and useful glossary an outline guide to identi-
fication is provided using habitat, webs and habits as characters.

The remainder of the book is arranged systematically with the family
as the unit of identification and keys to the families are provided, using
morphological features. Under each family selected genera and species are
described and illustrated; biological information is also provided. An index
to common names is to be found inside the back cover. An index to scientific
names would have been a useful inclusion.

This book will undoubtedly be the means of introducing many people to
the spiders and of popularising a group which is generally not popular with
laymen. There are, as the author herself points out, differences of opinion
amongst specialists; these serve only to shew the gaps in our knowledge and it
is to be hoped that some of those who are “introduced” to the spiders by this
book will be sufficiently encourgad by her help to make some contribution
towards filling the gaps. The illustrations are clear and appropriate and the
fact that they are not referred to in the text is no disadvantage as they are
well placed.

The necessary general introduction to and explanation of terms has been
very skilfully presented in a small space by means of illustration and the

glossary.

Bibliographers and taxonomists may not be pleased with name changes
in an undated work (published 15th September, 1964) of a semi-popular nature.

This book fills a real gap in the literature on Australian spiders and will
be of use to all naturalists.

The work is well set out within the space available, the size and cover
make it suitable for carrying in the field and the binding is adequate, allowing
the book to be opened flat without risk of damage.

C. N. SMITHERS

213

ON AN AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE EARTHWORM GENUS
MEGASCOLEX TEMPLETON, 1844

By G. E. GATES

Two small Australian collections contained earthworms that appeared
externally to be referable to Pheretima. On dissection, the specimens were
found to belong to another genus. As opportunity for further study of
Megascolex is unlikely, the following account is submitted primarily to call
attention to a species that may have a regenerative capacity of more than
ordinary interest.

Miss Elisabeth Pope very kindly secured and forwarded the collections
in response to a request for material of Australian lumbricids.

Megascolex newcombei

I887. Perichaeta newcombei Beddard, Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 14;
170. (Type locality, Queensland. Types, none).

1895. Megascolex newcombei, Beddard, A Monogr. of the Order of
Oligochaeta, Oxford, p. 378.

1900. Meegascolex newcombei, Michaelsen, Das Tierreich, Berlin, 10, p.
226.

1903. Megascolex laingii Benham, Trans. New Zealand Inst. 35; 273.
(Tyre locality, Norfolk I. Types, none).

1959. Megascolex laingii, Lee, New Zealand Dept. Sci. Indust. Res. Bull.
1303 ps 283;

New South Wales
Northbridge, Sydney, suburban garden, November 26, 1961, 1-4-11. E. Pope.
Mt. Keira, Wollongong, private garden surrounded by bush, March 11,
1962, 4-1-3. J. Walsh per E. Pope.

External characteristics. Length, to 80 mm. (some specimens softened).
Diameter, 3-34 mm. Segments, 83 (posterior amputee?), 92, 93, 96 (3 specimens),
97 (2), 98, 103, 105. Body shape, transversely and shortly elliptical in
cross section behind the clitellum. Colour, reddish, in dorsum only, in the
prostomium present only in the tongue portion. Prostomium, epilobous, tongue
open (all). Setae, in circles from ii, with or without an obvious gap at mV
and mD, 32/xii, 32/xx, ca. 30 posteriorly, viii/4, xviii/0 (one specimen), the
maximum counted in preclitellar segments 40, in postclitellar segments 35.
First dorsal pore, at 4/5 (2), ?5/6 (3), 5/6 (10), 6/7 (1). Nephropores,
microscopic, unrecognizable externally, in rather unsatisfactory preparations
of the cuticle seemingly in the setal circle. Clitellum, annular, yellowish,
setae retained at least in part in each segment, dorsal pores occluded only
at maximal tumescence, intersegmental furrows still distinguishable at maximal
tumescence, xiv-xvi. Slight yellowing sometimes is recognizable in a post-setal
portion of Xiii.

Spermathecal pores, very small but somewhat larger than the female pores,
transversely slit-like, margins sometimes slightly tumescent, less than 1/3 C
apart, about in BC, at 7/8-8/9. Female pore, median, very slightly in front of
eq/xiv. Male pores, transversely slit-like depressions at eq/xviiil. The depression,
as indicated by a cuticular preparation, is shallow. From the depression the
cuticle is continued internally as a tube about as long as the depth of the
slit and with a thickness about one third the lateromesial width of the slit.
The inner end of the tube was not jagged.

Genital markings, paired almost circular areas of epidermal thickening.
centred at or near B, presetal, in xix (6), im xix-xx (1), in xx (1), postsetal
in xviii and there slightly lateral to the male pore levels (1).

214 AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE EARTHWORM

_ Internal anatomy. Septa, present from 4/5 at least, none thickly muscular.
Pigment, red, in circular muscle layer and in special longitudinal muscle band
at mD.

Gizzard, rudimentary, in v. Pharyngeal glands, extending back to 7/8
Calciferous glands, lacking. Esophagus, narrow and with low. longitudinal
ridges that are not lamelliform in vi-xii, wider and moniliform in xiii-xiv
where irregular, non-lamelliform ridges are gorged with blood, valvular in xv.
Intestinal origin, in xvi (14). Typhlosole, lacking, or if present very rudimentary
and represented (one specimen) by a slight ridge recognizable only through
several segments behind xxix. Caeca and supra-intestinal glands, none found
and probably lacking.

Dorsal blood vessel, single throughout, complete, bifurcating under the
brain, the branches uniting over the subpharyngeal ganglion to become the ventral
trunk which is also complete. Supra-esophageal trunk, present in vili-xiii.
Extra-esophageal trunks, median to the hearts, recognizable only back through
xi. Hearts, last pair in xii (14), those in x-xii_ possibly latero-esophageal
though connectives to the dorsal trunk were not certainly identified, hearts
of ix and anteriorly lateral. Subneural trunk, none found and _ presumably
lacking.

Excretory system, meroic, the microic tubules seemingly astomate and
avesiculate. Nephridia of the clusters in iv-vi certainly are longer than the
parietal nephridial of posterior segments. Nephridia behind the clitellum
are in transverse rows nearly reaching mD and mV. One row apparently is
present behind each septum. Another row may be present in front of the
septum (peritoneum of some specimens fragmented!).

Holandric, coelomic cavities of x-xi filled with a sticky coagulum (alli
clitellate dissected specimens)—annular testis sacs with membranous walls
if present could have been unrecognised. Seminal vesicles, with several lobes
of varying sizes, in ix and xii. Prostrates, small, lobed, flattened against the
parietles and rather band-like, in xvii, Xvili-xix. Prostatic ducts, short, rather
slender, ca. 1 mm. long. Sperm ducts, passing into ental ends of prostatic
ducts or into the glands anterior to point of emergence of the prostatic ducts.
(Penial and copulatory setae, none found).

Spermathecae, fairly large relatively, reaching at most up to level of
dorsal face of gut. Duct almost confined to parietes and rather narrow.
Diverticulum, from anterior face of duct at parietes, sometimes shorter than the
main axis, reaching to or beyond ental end of ampulla. A slightly widened
terminal portion may be marked off as a spheroidal to ellipsoidal! seminal
chamber or an ental widening may be more gradual so that the diverticulum is
slenderly club-shaped. Ovaries, fan-shaped, with numerous egg strings that
have as many as ten ova in a String, at largest reaching up to dorsal blood
vessel. Ovisacs, present in Xiv.

Reproduction. Spermatozoal iridescence was recognizable in spermathecae
of several specimens and in fewer individuals also on male funnels. As sperm
are exchanged during copulation, reproduction is assumed to be biparental

Regeneration. Normal head regenerate, as yet with but litthe pigment, of
3 segments at 3/4. An early regenerate, without pigment. metameric differentiation
or terminal sculpturing, at 4/5.

Tail regenerates. (1) Of 7 segments at 81/82. (2) At 67/68, with dorso-
terminal anus and four segments already demarcated proximally. (3) At 60/61,
of ten segments. (4) At 75/76, with ten segments already demarcated but meta-
meric differentiation incomplete, anus terminal. Appearance suggest a previous
regeneration by the same worm at 62/63. Possible tail regenerates; last 19
of 73 segments, last 13 of 86 segments, last 13 of 87 segments.

Capacity for head regeneration may be much greater than is indicated
above (cf. Abnormality).

GATES 215

Variation and abnormality. No. 1) An extra spermatheca, in vii on left
side, with pore at 6/7. No. 2) An extra spermathecae, in vii on the right
side. No. 3) An extra pair of spermathecae, with pores at 6/7. A gizzard
was not distinguishable in this specimen with 105 segments, a condition that
can be expected if a head had been regenerated at 5/6 or 6/7. Extra
spermathecae, in these three specimens may have been developed during head
regeneration. No. 4) Spermathecal pores, at 6/7-9/10. Female pores, in xv-xvi.
Male pores, in xix. Clitellum, in Xv-xvii. Genital markings, presetal in xx.
Testes, in xi-xiii. Spermatozoal iridescence, on male funnels of xi and left
funnel of xiii. Ccelomic cavities of xi-xiii filled with the same sort of
coagulum that is present in x-xi of normal individuals. Seminal vesicles, in
x, xiii (small) and xiv. Ovaries, in xiv-xv. Ovisacs, in xv-xvi. Spermathecae,
in vii-xX, normal except in the right side of vii and the left side of x
where each spermatheca has two diverticula arising from the anterior portion
of the duct at the parietes.

Doubling of testis, ovary and spermathecal segments can result from
halving of mesoblastic somites (cf. Gates, 1958). Several specimens do have
in unregenerate intestinal regions metameric abnormalities that could have
arisen from halving of mesoblastic somites. However, location of male pores
in xix (of No. [4] shows that the only embryonic halving that could have taken
place would be of the somite at the thirteenth level. Other doublings must
have arisen in some other way. Regeneration, in the genus Perionyx (cf.
Gates, 1943) does result in increasing number of gonadal as well as of
spermathecal segments. If then, regenerative capacity of the present species
approximates that of Perionyx, all abnormalities mentioned above could have
arisen during head regeneration rather than during embryonic development.

Ingesta. Mainly vegetable matter, but with some sand grains and an
occasional pebble of quartz. Three species of Perionyx, known to have a
high regenerative capacity, also are selective feeders, swallowing little but
Organic matter.

Systematics. The present specimens differ from newcombei as characterized
by Beddard in two ways: paucity of genital markings, location of the gizzard
in v instead of in vi. The first difference can have little systematic importance,
because of possibility of considerable individual variation, until very much
more information is available. In view of other similarities, the second
difference scarcely seems to warrant specific separation at present.

Megascolex laingii is known only from the original description of two
aclitellate, anterior fragments. The gizzard was in v as in the New South
Wales worms. Absence of genital markings in Benham’s worms may be of no
systematic significance because of immaturity. Moreover, inornate individuals
are now known in many species that usually do have genital markings. Some
support for the identification is provided by four macerated specimens from
Hamilton, New Zealand. If prostrates were racemose, as does seem probable,
the specimens were not distinguishable from the New South Wales newcombei
by any recognizable character.

Remarks. Species of Pheretima, Plionogaster, and Megascolex may have so
much similarity in macroscopically _Tecognizable external characters that dis-
sections are necessary for generic identification.

References

Gates, G. E.

1943. Some further notes on regeneration in Perionyx excavatus E. Perrier.
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. India, 13: 168-179.

1958. On homoeosis, as well as other aberrations, and their origin
in an earthworm species, Eisenia foetida (Savigny, 1826), along with
some deductions as to morphogenesis in the Lumbricidae. American
Midland Nat., 59: 452-464.

OBITUARY

SIR’ VICTOR ‘COPPILESON,, Kt. M:B) GhiM:, E:R'GS. E:RAGs, EAIGS:

The death on May 12th 1965 of Sir Victor Coppleson deprived Australia
of a most distinguished citizen whose loss will be felt in the many circles
in which he was active.

Victor Marcus Coppleson was born in 1893 at Wee Waa, New South
Wales. He was educated at Sydney Grammar School and in 1915 graduated
in medicine from the University of Sydney. He became not only an eminent
surgeon but the pioneer and director of Australian post-graduate medical
education. He was a member of the Royal Zoological Society of New South
Wales and of the Australian Marine Sciences Association.

As a young man, Coppleson was a footballer and swimmer, keen on the
then infant sport of surfing. As a doctor, he was asked by the Surf Life Saving
Association of Australia to write an article on “Shark Bite” for its Handbook.
Little was on record in medical literature at the time, so Coppleson collected
all available accounts of shark tragedies and incidents. The results of this
study were published in the Medical Journal of Australia in 1933, revised and
reviewed in later years, and incorporated in his book Shark Attack, 1958
(second ed., 1962). He studied shark attacks statistically, analysing and relating
times of occurrence, localities, water temperatures and other factors. Hence he
developed the hypothesis of the “rogue” shark which lurked in given areas
for long periods, also his theory which he called “the shark’s time-table” to
account for the restricted times when attacks occurred in various latitudes. He
had other original ideas on the ways wounds were inflicted on human beings
by sharks and on methods for treating victims. The chapter on “Patterns of
Shark Attack for the World” which Coppleson contributed to Sharks and
Survival epitomized some of his ideas.

Coppleson in 1955 delivered the Post Graduate Oration in the Great
Hall of the University of Sydney, choosing as his subject “The Life and Times
of Dr. George Bennett,” a great surgeon-naturalist in Sydney in the nineteenth
century. George Bennett’s correspondence with Richard Owen (preserved in ihe
Royal College of Surgeons of England) was also therein dealt with by
Coppleson, who obtained microfilm copies of many of these documents for
the Australian Museum. Still of interest to biologists are Bennett’s observations
on the living Pearly Nautilus in the New Hebrides, on whales, invertebrates
and other natural history subjects.

In addition to sharks, Coppleson’s interests broadened to include other
hazardous or noxious marine animals and he organised groups of scientific
and other specialists to discuss sea-snakes, poisonous and venomous fishes and
invertebrates at the First International Convention on Life Saving Techniques,
held in Sydney in 1960. The scientific results were published three yeors later
as a sunvlement to the Bulletin of the Post-Graduate Committee in Medicine
of the University of Sydney.

The Medical Directory of Australia outlined Coppleson’s remarkable career
as a surgeon and a soldier (he served overseas as an officer in both World Wars).
A list of Coppleson’s zoological papers appeared in the Proceedings of the
Linnean Society of New South Wales (vol. 89. 1964, v. 69). It was gratifying
to all that his achievements were recognised in the New Year's Honours of
1964, when he was knighted by Her Majesty, Queen Elizabeth IT.

G. P. WHITEBY

OBITUARY

THEO ATHOL EVERITT
(Plate xi)

The death occurred at Sydney on December 6, 1964, of Theo Athol Everitt.
“Sam”, as he was known to his friends and associates, was born on March 10,
1910. The early part of his life was spent in the bush surroundings of Oatley,
an outlying suburb of Sydney, where he developed a keen interest in natural
history, with particular emphasis on the field study of birds. He was a keen
walker and spent much of his leisure wandering over the rugged terrain of
what is now known as the Royal National Park, south of Sydney, using as his
base the zoologists’ cabin, then pleasantly situated near the junction of
Hacking River and Waterfall Creek.

Another interest was the Naval Reserve, from which he was called up to
serve in the Royal Australian Navy as a lieutenant for the duration of the
Second World War. He held various appointments, both on shore and at sea,
being in Darwin during the Japanese air raids. The illness from which he
suffered in the latter part of. his life was attributed to a tropical infection
contracted while serving in areas north of Australia.

Theo Everitt was Honorary Secretary of the Royal Zoological Society of
N.S.W. from April, 1947 to April, 1951 and Secretary of its Ornithological
Section during 1939-1940; also, at the same time, State Secretary of the
N.S.W. Branch of the Royal Australasian Ornithologists’ Union. In_ recent
years he was a warden and member of the Parochial Council of St. John’s
Church, Darlinghurst, and, later, a member of the Council and Treasurer
of St. Peter's Church, Walgett. In the latter town he was manager of the
Rural Bank of N.S.W., subsequently transferring to Gundagai.

The very useful index of contents to volumes 1-37 of The Emu, journal of
the Royal Australian Ornithologists’ Union, published in 1939, was compiled
by Mr. Everitt, who had joined the R.A.O.U. in 1933.

Mr. Everitt is survived by his wife, Eleanore, and daughter, Rosalie, to
whom the sympathy of members is extended.
K. A. Hindwood.

BOOK REVIEW
Jacaranda Pocket Guides.

Marine Fishes of Australia Vol. 1 (1962)
Marine Fishes of Australia Vol. 2 (1962)
Freshwater Fishes of Australia. Revised Ed. (1964)

These three little volumes by G. P. Whitley, so handy that all three
could be put into one pocket, are a far greater contribution than their size
suggests. As an introduction to the rich variety of Australian fishes they are
excellent. With together over 300 illustrations, a large proportion of them
drawn by Mr. Whitley, any fish can be recognised at least to the family to
which it belongs. Unfortunately none of the illustrations is in colour, but they
the clear, and quite adequate for their purpose.

Until Australia is given a comprehensive book on all its wonderful
fishes (perhaps by Mr. Whitley?) and even after that happy day, these books
will do sterling service, and should be the well used possession of every
angler and naturalist.

Bo HS Balbot:

sen, tye
. Being

# ey ‘é on He. BY ta bes ne

LM abaiets an ajtatetiiitibeat i
; di AY fe Sela planar) he
4 Pe ope | ‘Kio duboheled uns Anekd titae br

cee. UG pened ire’ kn gatpeiran tye wine +

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII PLATE VIII.

—~i ‘4
~

Me Sa

4g ar nn ee
“Sydney” Painting No. 4 “Sydney” Painting No. 5
Spotted Quail-Thrush, Olive-backed Oriole.
male and female.
“Sydney” Painting No. 32 “Sydney” Painting No. 33.
Indeterminable. Red-backed Wren, male.

Reproduced by courtesy of the Mitchell Library, Sydney.
Photo: K. A. Hindwood

AUSTRALIAN ZOOGLOGIST VOL. XIII PLATE IX.

“Sydney” Painting No. 71. “Sydney” Painting No. 84.
Top figure: White-naped Honeyeater. Norfolk Island Pigeon
Bottom left: Yellow Robin. (Extinct) ri
Bottom right: Eastern Spinebill. :

“Sydney” Painting No. 90. “Sydney” Painting No. 98.

Little Bittern. Pied Goose.

Reproduced by courtesy of the Mitchell Library, Sydney.
Photo: K. A. Hindwood

PE ATER

XH.

AUSTRALIAN ZO OLOGIST VOL.

Francois Laporte, Comte de Castelnau.

Illustration, 1847.

From

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST VOL. XIII. ILZNIDE OE

The late Theo Athol Everitt with some ornithological friends.

Left to right: G. P. Whitley, T. A. Everitt, A. J. Moran, T. Iredale and
A. H. Chisholm.

An informal street photograph, Sydney, 1950.

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

MEMBERSHIP.
(The Society’s year commences on Ist July)

Fees commencing Ist July, 1965 as follows:

Class Amount of Subscription
MERHCHITC 2 WIEDER. oar fay Vie ie ceaect tee Mii. oh deere © Onpef- annum
Ordinary Member .... SSeS erie Ri We) VO yr gs bs

(Members joining after ist January in ‘any “year pay
one-half subscription.)

item Associate Member. ..:. 522.0500. 0c. aay en £10°> 04. 0/in one sum

SCTE Lhe erie Mone ei Lad Myer scd cers tae ee Oy Oey ae,
Elected for services

Honorary Member .... rae

Honorary Associate Member .... he ae or to the Society.

Junior Members (aged 16 or under) . a pitt 5 0 per annum

In 1966 the above amounts will be cpimertble into dollars and cents.

to Australian Zoology

TITLES.
(Conferred by the Council)
For valuable services

TSEC Ce ine i a TF oa SST te Sta A ah to the Society or to
Australian Zoology
Associate Benefactor ... For contribution of £100 to the Society’s Funds
Benefactor ate sec, 3 » £500 2 9 ” ”
Endowment Member ....__ ,, 7 £1,000 ,, ,, » %
PRIVILEGES

Members of all classes may attend all meetings of the Society and its various
Sections. Every member (other than an Associate or Life Associate Member)
receives a free pass to Taronga Zoological Park and Aquarium, and twelve
tickets each year, admitting 12 adults or 24 children to the Park only.

APPLICATION FOR MEMBERSHIP

should be addressed to the Honorary Secretary, Royal Zoological Society of
New South Wales, 28 Martin Place, Sydney.

PUBLICATIONS

“The Australian Zoologist,’ published at irregular intervals since 1914 .
“Proceedings,” published annually since 1933-34.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGICAL HANDBOOKS AND
SPECIAL REPRINTS.

“Bibliography of Australian Entomology, 1775-1930,” by A. Musgrave, 1932.

“Australian Insects,’ by K. C. McKeown, 1947.

“A Check List of the Birds of Paradise and Bower Birds,” by T. Iredale, 1948.

“Revision of the New South Wales Turridae,’ by C. F. Laseron, 1954.

“The Published Writings of Tom Iredale, with an Index of his new Scientific
Names,” by D. F. McMichael & G. P. Whitley, 1956.

“A Reclassification of the Order Odonata,” by F. C. Fraser, 1957.

“Dragonflies of Australia,’ by F. C. Fraser, 1960.

Orders and enquiries should be sent to the Honorary Secretary, Royal
Zoological Society of New South Wales, 28 Martin Place, Sydney.
Telephone No.: 55-1397

CONTENTS OF THIS PART

HINDWOOD: The “Sydney” Bird Paintings ....
BANDED AND MARKED BIRDS ....

WHITLEY: Francois Laporte

MYERS: Gambusia, The Fish Destroyer .... 3
WHITLEY: Illustrations and Records of Fishes ...

KLUGE: The Systematic Status of Certain Australian Lizards ee te
Family Gekkonidae . ....

PERRERS: Notes on a Pigmy Possum .... etd
WARD: Notes on Marine Ecology of Lindeman Island, - Quecmnaas
SMITHERS: A Note on Overwintering in Danaus ...

SMITHERS: Caecilius soehardjani, a new name for Caecilius ferrugineus
Soehardjan and Hamann. (Psocoptera: Caecillidae) _. 2

SMITHERS: A Bibliography of the Psocoptera (Insecta) ....

PETERS: An unusual aberration of Delias Resscesiaet eee
Pieridae) .

GATES: On an Australian species of the Earthworm Genus Megascoex
Templeton, 1844 eae :

OBITUARY of Sir Victor Coppleson, by G. P. eines

OBITUARY of Theo Athol Everitt, by K. A. Hindwood .... a
BOOK) “REVIEWS: a Oe ey Se ER oe ee ee
PLATES VIII-XI.

Wholly set up and printed in Australia for the Royal Zoological Society of
New South Wales by

Surrey Beatty & Sons, Rickard Road, Chipping Norton, N.S.W. — 602-7404,

'

THE

Issued by the

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

enti SON, TN
sep - ¢ 1966

iy

“4 Ly -t {ae

VOLUME XII — PART 3
JULY 6, 1966

Price: One Dollar 50 ($1.50)

All communications to be addressed to the Hon. Secretary,
Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,
c/o The Australian Museum,
P.O. Box A.285, Sydney South, N.S.W.

Registered at the G.P.O., Sydney, for transmission by post
as a periodical.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST

aN
Oy ITA

>

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

Established 1879.
Registered under the Companies Act, 1899 (1917).

Patron:
His Excellency the Governor of New South Wales,
Sir Arthur Roden Cutler, V.C., K.C.M.G., C.B.E., Kt. St. J.
Vice-Patrons:

Sir Edward Hallstrom, K.B., F.R.Z.S.
Aubrey Halloran, O.B.E., B.A., LI.B., LI.D., F.R.Z.S.

COUNCIL, 1965-66

President:
John Cameron Yaldwyn, M.Sc., Ph.D.
Vice-Presidents:

Henry John de Suffren Disney, M.A.
Lawrence Courtney-Haines, A.Mus.A., L.T.C.L.
Frank Hamilton Talbot, M.Sc., Ph.D.
Gilbert Percy Whitley, F.R.Z.S., R.A.O.U.

Hon. Secretary: Mrs. Leone Harford.
Honorary Editor: Gilbert Percy Whitley, F.R.Z.S., R.A.O.U.
Honorary Treasurer: John Miles Campbell, J.P.

Members of Council:

John Miles Campbell, J.P. Anthony Irwin Ormsby, LI.B.
Henry John de Suffren Disney Peter Edward Roberts
John Leonard Fry F F
Emmestiefixey »Gadaden Courtenay Neville Smithers
Maxwell Hall Gregg Frank Hamilton Talbot, M.Sc., Ph.D.
Lawrence Courtney-Haines Ellis le Geyt Troughton, F.R.ZS.,
John Hallstrom C.M.Z.S.
Mrs. Leone Harford Gilbert Percy Whitley
Frank McCamley : :
Basil Joseph Guy Marlow, B.Sc. Mrs. Olive Wills

(Hons. Lond.), F.Z.S. John Cameron Yaldwyn

OFFICERS:

Honorary Solicitor: Aubrey Halloran, O.B.E., B.A., LI.B., LI.D., F.R.Z.S.
Honorary Auditors: Messrs. Peat, Marwich, Mitchell and Company.
Honorary Librarian: Mrs. Leone Harford.

Assistant Honorary Secretary: Mrs. Olive Wills.

Assistant Honorary Treasurer: (Vacant)

OFFICERS OF SECTIONS:
Entomological Section: Junior Group:
Chairman: Mr. M. Gregg Chairman: Mrs. L. Harford
Hon. Secretary: Mrs. V. Gregg Ornithological Section:
Conchological Section: : : -
Chairman: Mr, F. McCamley Chairman: Mrs. L. C. Haines

Hon. Secretary: Mrs. O. Wills Hon. Secretary: Mr. H. Battam

219

THE AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST

VOLUME XII PART 3

THE SOCIETY'S PATRON

His Excellency the Governor of New South Wales, Sir Arthur Roden
Cutler, V.C., K.C.M.G., C.B.E., Kt. St. J., has honoured the Royal Zoological
Society of New South Wales by becoming its Patron.

220

A NEW HYLID FROG FROM AUSTRALIA

by HaroL_p G. CoGGER

(Plate XII & Text-figure 1.)

In the early part of 1965 the author received a fine series of living
frogs from Mrs. N. Morris of Cairns, Queensland. All specimens were
collected in the Cairns district or immediate hinterland. Included in this
collection were several specimens of an undescribed frog possessing an arciferal
pectoral girdle, broadly expanded sacral diapophyses and intercalary cartilages—
a combination of characters found only in the family Hylidae. It is a member
of the genus Hyla as defined by Goin (1961) and is the smallest species of
this genus so far recorded from Australia. Upon comparing these specimens
with all of the species of hylid frogs currently recognised from Australia
and New Guinea there seemed little doubt that they represented an undescribed
species. The only species showing any potential affinity with these Cairns
specimens was Hyla dorsalis (Macleay), a diminutive species described in
1878 from Papua. However, the type of Hyla dorsalis was lost more than
50 years ago and the original description is brief and undiagnostic. Up to the
present time the recognition of Hyla dorsalis has rested on a single specimen
collected in 1955 and identified as this species by Loveridge (1956). Although
the specimens from Cairns differed significantly from Macleay’s description
of Litoria dorsalis and from Loveridge’s description of his specimen, the
latter has been examined and found to be closely allied to the Cairns material.

In the following section the status of Hyla dorsalis (Macleay) is briefly
discussed. As a result of this discussion the species is redescribed and recorded
from Australia for the first time. A new Australian subspecies is described.
In the following descriptions the standard measurements for tibia length (TL),
eye-naris distance (E-N), internarial distance (IN) and diameter of tympanum
follow the methods established by Zweifel (1962).

THE STATUS OF HYLA DORSALIS (MACLEAY)

Macleay (1878) described Litoria dorsalis from a single specimen from
Katow, on the southern coast of New Guinea. Katow was located on what
is now known as the Binaturi River, a small river on the mainland almost
opposite the island of Daru on the south-western coast of the Territory of
Papua. Macleay’s brief description reads as follows: “Elongate. Snout pointed.
Mouth opening beneath. Nostrils in a lateral depression, close to the snout.
Fingers and toes with a well-defined roundish disk, the toes webbed only at
the base. Tongue not notched behind. Vomerine teeth in two very oblique short
series, with the internal nostril on each side large and oval. Skin of back
smooth, of belly granular. Colour, above, dark with a broad central whitish
band from the snout to the anus, beneath yellowish, much clouded with brown
on the throat and chest. Length of body, 9; width, 24; length of legs, 16
lines. One specimen from Katow, probably immature.”

Fry (1913), in a review of Macleay’s New Guinea frog types, stated
that he was unable to locate the type of Litoria dorsalis and he presumed
that the specimen was lost. A further search in the Macleay Museum and
the Australian Museum by the author has confirmed, beyond reasonable doubt,
the loss of the type. Fry then went on to state that ‘ Macleay’s description
is unintelligible. From the fact that the toes are webbed only at the base it
is obviously not a Hyla. The “mouth opening beneath” and the presence of
discs to the fingers suggests that it belongs to some disked Engystomatid genus,

COGGER 221

while the latter character, coupled with a basal web to the toes, points to
Cornufer affinities. I can find no description which could reasonably be said
to tally with Macleay’s generalised characters. Taking these facts into account,
the most satisfactory procedure will be to totally ignore the name Litoria
dorsalis, Macleay, and to exclude it from future literature.”

Although one sympathises with Fry in his frustrating attempts to clarify
the status of Macleay’s frog types, his total rejection of Litoria dorsalis,
simply on the basis of its failure to correspond to any other known hylid
species, was unwarranted. Subsequently van Kampen (1923) doubtfully
included Hyla dorsalis in his list of Indo-Australian hylid frogs.

The status of the species thus remained unchanged until Loveridge (1956)
obtained a single specimen of a small hylid frog from the Aramia River,
Papua. This specimen, which was collected by K. R. Slater in 1955, proved
to be a gravid female although only 20 mm. in length. On the basis of its
small size at maturity and its close correspondence with Macleay’s description
of Litoria dorsalis Loveridge considered that his specimen represented the
rediscovery of Macleay’s species.

The specimens from Cairns, Queensland, with which this paper is largely
concerned, represent a new addition to the frog fauna of Australia. In morphology
they closely resemble Loveridge’s Aramia River specimen and another specimen
of a small hylid frog collected by the author at Lake Murray, Papua, in
1963. Although differences between the Papuan and Australian specimens are
of such an order as to possibly justify the erection of a new species to
accommodate the Australian material, as specimens from the two areas show
a close affinity which is not shared with any other species from either region,
the author believes that such affinity (and its zoogeographic implications)
would be obscured by making the Australian specimens a distinct species.
Until such time as additional material from both Papua and Australia will permit
a more accurate analysis of relationships, the author believes that the most
satisfactory means of indicating presumed affinities is to establish a subspecific
relationship between the Australian and Papuan populations. However this
decision raises a taxonomic problem and necessitates a reassessment of the
status of the Papuan species represented by Loveridge’s Aramia River specimen.

In the interest of nomenclatural stability it was initially proposed to
designate this specimen as neotype of Litoria dorsalis Macleay. While aware of
the requirements and recommendations, including the “exceptional circumstances”
clause, of Article 75 of the 1961 International Code of Zoological Nomen-
clature, it was felt that the present situation would justify such an action.
However in accordance with Recommendation 75A the author contacted Mr.
M. J. Tyler of the South Australian Museum for his views on such a
procedure. Mr. Tyler, who is currently revising the hylid frogs of New Guinea,
disagreed with this neotype proposal and expressed the view that inconsistencies
between Loveridge’s specimen and Macleay’s description of Litoria dorsalis
preclude the possibility that the two are conspecific.

In the light of these views it would be wrong to formally associate
the name dorsalis with Loveridge’s specimen by making the latter a neotype.
Nevertheless as the author considers that there is no valid reason for rejecting
Loveridge’s action, a brief redescription of Hyla dorsalis (Macleay) based on the
specimens from the Aramia River and Lake Murray is given in the following
section. The reasons for supporting Loveridge’s action are as follows:—
An examination of Loveridge’s Aramia River specimen reveals no features
inconsistent with Macleay’s description of Litoria dorsalis. In all specimens
examined there is a broad, light coloured vertebral band which, contrary
to the contention of Loveridge (loc. cit.) is not inconsistent with Macleay’s
description of “a broad, central whitish band” in the Katow holotype. Although
Loveridge does not mention the condition of the vomerine teeth, his specimen
has two small, but prominent, round 'vomerine elevations between the
relatively large choanae.

222 A NEW HYLID FROG FROM AUSTRALIA

Macleay stated that the type of Litoria dorsalis, which was 9 lines (19 mm.)
long, was “probably immature,’ whereas Loveridge’s 20 mm. specimen is a
gravid female. In view of the fact that the present material represents the
smallest hylid frog known from the Australian region, any opinion not
based on dissection (which would have established whether the type was or
was not sexually mature) would surely have tended to be that such a small
animal was “probably immature.”

Only in the extent of the webbing between the toes does there appear
to be any lack of agreement between the specimens available and Macleay’s
description, but even in this the difference is more apparent than real. In all
specimens the webbing between the toes scarcely reaches beyond the distal
subarticular tubercle of any digit. The difficulties inherent in attempting to
define, quantitatively, the extent of webbing between the toes of frogs are
stressed by Peters (1964). The term “basal webbing” is ill-defined even
today, yet one must consider it within the context of the uncritical work and
brief descriptions of Macleay. In the living specimen illustrated in Plate xii, fig. a,
the webbing does not extend distally as far as the visible parts of the hind
foot. In life, and in some of the preserved specimens here discussed, the
webbing could reasonably be defined as basal.

As the type of Litoria dorsalis has been lost then the literal accuracy
of Macleay’s description must be accepted; one should not be concerned
with his omissions. But as the type is lost and the original description is brief
and not diagnostic, there must always remain some uncertainty as to the true
identity of dorsalis. Nevertheless if the original description, though incomplete,
fits a known but otherwise undescribed taxon then it is felt that the best
interests of taxonomy are served by associating the two. To erect yet another
name for the material on hand is not only unnecessary in these circumstances
but would simply perpetuate a nomen dubium in future literature. Therefore
on the weight of evidence available to the author there appears to be no
sound reason for rejecting at this time the conspecificity of Litoria dorsalis
and Loveridge’s Aramia River specimen. Whether this view will be upheld
in subsequent discussions and investigations by other workers remains to be
seen. However it is believed that future settlement of the status of Litoria
dorsalis can only be assisted, and in no way complicated or hindered, by the
actions taken in this paper.

REDESCRIPTION OF HYLA DORSALIS MACLEAY

The following description is based on specimen No. 28389, a female,
in the collection of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard University,
from the Aramia River, Papua and on specimen No. R24248, a female, in the
Australian Museum, Sydney, from Lake Murray, Papua. Dimensions of these
specimens are given in Table 1.

Diagnosis: Hyla dorsalis may be distinguished from all other members
of its genus in the Australasian region by the following combination of
characters: small size at maturity (17 mm. for males, 20 mm. for females);
fingers free of webbing; toes half webbed or less; one to several low, rounded
tubercles over each eye. An additional regional diagnosis for Australian
specimens is provided in a following section.

Description: Habitus slender. Snout rather acutely pointed, projecting well
in front of lower jaw. Pupil horizontal. Tympanum, though distinct, is pigmented,
suggesting that shrinkage in preservative might account for the prominence
of the rim of the tympanic aperture. A slight supra-tympanic fold.

Skin smooth on the back of the adult Aramia River female, but the
juvenile from Lake Murray has a series of very low, discontinuous dorso-
lateral folds. Several low, rounded tubercles over each eye. Skin of throat smooth,
that of belly coafsely granular. No pectoral fold. Limbs with smooth skin.

COGGER 223

Finger discs well-developed, wider than long. Fingers without a trace
of webbing. Fingers in order of length 3, 4, 2, 1. Subarticular tubercles
moderately developed.

Hindlimb relatively long and slender. Toe discs well-developed, about
same size as those on fingers. Heel of adpressed hind limb reaches to between
the eye and tip of snout. Toes with well-developed webbing, the latter scarcely
reaching beyond the distal subarticular tubercle of any digit. Toes with distinct
fringes to discs. Subarticular tubercles moderately developed. A prominent
inner metatarsal tubercle. Outer metatarsals united, the proximal of a series
of small metatarsal tubercles under the fourth metatarsal constituting what
might be considered as a small outer metatarsal tubercle.

Vomerine teeth present in the adult female from the Aramia River as
two small but prominent round projections between the large, oval choanae;
vomerine elevations are not visible in the juvenile from Lake Murray. Tongue
oval, about one-third free behind.

Colour of adult female rich brown above except for a broad band of
darker brown on each side extending from above each eye, dorso- ey:
to about half-way along the flanks. This results in the impression of a broad,
lighter-coloured vertebral band. The chromatophores of the dorsal surface
are not uniformly distributed, resulting in a slightly mottled appearance. A
dark brown stripe commences above the tympanum and follows the supra-
tympanic fold over the base of the forelimb. Anterior lateral surfaces dark
brown, posterior lateral surfaces and groin whitish with a few scattered brown
flecks. Upper jaw mottled with light and dark brown, an oblique dark bar or
patch extending forward from beneath the eye to the mouth. An indistinct
dark brown bar along the anterior edge of the basal part of the forelimb.
A dark band along the hind edge of the forelimb below which, on the
forearm, is a series of three or four white spots. Hind edge of thighs light
brown flecked with white. Remaining dorsal surfaces of limbs mottled with
light and dark brown. Ventral surfaces white, strongly peppered with brown
on the throat, chest, anterior abdominal region and limbs. Rim of lower jaw
rich brown.

The juvenile female is lighter in colour than the adult, being light grey
above with irregular dark mottling. A slightly darker region between the
eyes results in a light triangular patch bounded by the canthus on either
side and a line between the anterior corners of the eyes. The dark, dorso-lateral
patches of the adult are absent, but the dark bar from above the tympanum to
the flank is conspicuous, as is the dark patch between the eye and the
mouth. Each of the low, discontinuous dorso-lateral folds is bordered below
by a dark brown patch. The upper surfaces of the limbs are light grey
uniformly peppered with brown. The ventral surfaces are white, lightly but
fairly uniformly peppered with brown.

A new subspecies from Australia is described below.

HYLA DORSALIS MICROBELOS, SUBSP. NOV.
(Plate XII and text-fig. 1)

Holotype: A male, R25836 in the Australian Museum, Sydney. From Cairns,
Queensland, collected by Mrs. N. Morris in February, 1965.

Paratypes: Two males, R25837 and R25839 (the latter prepared as an alizarin
skeletal transparency), and a female, R25838, in the Australian Museum. All
with the same data as holotype.

224 A NEW HYLID FROG FROM AUSTRALIA

Diagnosis: Hyla dorsalis microbelos may be distinguished from the nominate
race by the absence of vomerine teeth in adult specimens and by its reduced
ventral pigmentation. In dorsalis dorsalis the brown of the ventral surface is
distributed more or less uniformly over the throat and chest. In dorsalis
microbelos the ventral pigmentation is concentrated around the lower jaw,
the centre of the chest and on the hind limbs.

Hyla dorsalis microbelos may be distinguished from Hyla bicolor, the
only other Australian Hyla lacking vomerine teeth (Copland, 1957) by the
following features: (a) an E-N/IN ratio exceeding 1.15 (an average of 0.92,
range 0.81-1.07 in a series of twenty-seven bicolor from Australia and New
Guinea), (b) the absence of a pectoral fold in life (at least one strong
pectoral fold in bicolor), (c) the variegated brown dorsal colour (typically
green in bicolor, though occasionally uniform brown), (d) the tubercles on
the dorsum (smooth dorsum in bicolor) and (e) the webbing between the
toes (fig. 1) never reaching beyond the distal subarticular tubercle of any
digit (the webbing in bicolor reaches the level of the intercalary cartilage of
the first, second, third and fifth toes).

Fig. 1: Lower surface of foot of holotype of Hyla dorsalis microbelos.

Of the Australian species of Hyla with vomerine teeth, H. dorsalis
microbelos (in which vomerine teeth are lacking) most closely resembles the
so-called “ground hylas”’ of Moore (1961), all of which are at least two
and a half times as long as dorsalis microbelos when mature and all of which
possess a small outer metatarsal tubercle. The latter is absent in dorsalis
microbelos.

Description of Holotype: Habitus very slender. Snout-vent length 17.2 mm.
Snout rather acutely pointed, projecting well in front of lower jaw. Diameter
of eye (maximum, horizontal) 2.00 mm. Pupil horizontal. Distance from
anterior corner of eye to centre of naris (E-N) 1.85 mm. Internarial distance
(IN) 1.54 mm. Tympanum covered with skin but rim of tympanic aperture
clearly distinguishable, its diameter 1.00 mm. No supratympanic fold. Distance
from posterior edge of tympanum to tip of snout 4.81 mm.

A discontinuous dorso-lateral fold made up of a series of low tubercles or
short folds; a few low, rounded tubercles along the sides (below the dorso-
lateral folds) and above each eye. Skin of remaining dorsal surfaces smooth.
Skin of throat smooth, that of belly coarsely granular. No pectoral fold.
Limbs with smootk skin.

COGGER 225

Finger discs well-developed, wider than long; width of disc of third
finger 0.58 mm. (58% of diameter of tympanum). Fingers with hardly a
trace of webbing. Fingers in order of length 3, 4, 2, 1. Subarticular tubercles
moderately developed.

Hindlimb relatively long and slender; tibia length 8.66 mm. Toe discs
well-developed, slightly larger than those on fingers; width of disc of fourth
toe 0.65 mm. (65% of diameter of tympanum). Heel of adpressed hind limb
teaches to about the centre of the eye. Toes with well developed webbing,
roughly 50%; webbing does not reach beyond the distal subarticular tubercle
of any digit. Toes with hardly discernible fringes to discs. Subarticular tubercles
moderately developed. A prominent inner metatarsal tubercle; no outer tubercle.

Vomerine elevations absent. Tongue sub-circular, about one-third free
behind. A prominent external vocal sac; its openings in the floor of the mouth
are longitudinal slits, one on each side lying below the lateral edge of the
tongue.

Cream-coloured above with numerous dark brown chromatophores which
sometimes coalesce to give a peppered appearance. Larger groups of chromato-
phores give a mottled appearance on the snout, head and nape. A definite,
though poorly-defined, dark brown stripe runs from the nostril along the canthus
to the eye. A broader dark brown band from the eye, through the tympanum
(although the tympanum itself is lighter) and over the base of the forelimb
to about half-way along the flank. A distinctive short, dark brown bar along
the anterior edge of the basal part of the forelimb, just extending on to the
elbow, and discontinuous with a similar bar on the hind edge of the distal
part of the forelimb. An indefinite darker brown band along the anterior
edge of the hindlimb. Upper (exposed) surfaces of limbs strongly peppered
with brown, the latter sometimes coalescing to form faint mottling, especially
on the fore and hind sides of the thighs. Ventral surface and concealed
(resting) surfaces of limbs immaculate white, except for very fine peppering
on the infralabial region, the lower surfaces of the hindlimbs and the chest,
and heavy brown spotting on the lower surfaces of the hands and feet.

Variation: The paratypes differ from the holotype only in size. The female
which, of course, lacks a gular sac, is significantly larger. The dimensions in
mm. of the paratypes are given in Table 1 below.

The female paratype died in captivity and was preserved some hours
after death. Although some decomposition had occurred, the ovaries were
enlarged and mature, containing large numbers of small, darkly pigmented
eggs. The testes of the male paratype are small, but those of the holotype
are large (2.0 mm. in length) and apparently mature. Hence it is assumed
nat the snout-vent lengths of the four specimens obtained approximate average
adult size.

Distribution: Known only from the type locality, Cairns, Queensland.

Habitat: Mrs. Morris states that with the exception of the female which
entered a house during rain, all specimens were collected “ ... in a thicket
of reeds about four feet high . . . in a gutter opposite the playing fields
in Cairns.” They were found only during rainy weather and were located
by their calls. The males, according to Mrs. Morris, “. . . have a large
transparent vocal sac and make an incredible amount of noise for such a
small animal.” The call of the male in breeding chorus “. . . is like that
made by those grasshoppers which have leaf-shaped wings (presumably members
of the orthopteran family Tettigoniidae—H.G.C.) and is every bit as pene-
trating.”
The subspecific name alludes to the acute, javelin-like appearance of this
diminutive frog.
Acknowledgements: The author is especially grateful to Mrs. Noreen Morris,
not only for the material described in this paper and its associated field notes, but
also for her enthusiastic collecting on behalf of the Australian Museum. He
is also indebted to Mr. M. J. Tyler for his views on the taxonomic problems
outlined in this paper and to Dr. Ernest Williams for the loan of Loveridge’s
eras River specimen. Mr. H. Hughes prepared two of the photographs used in
plate xii.

A NEW HYLID FROG FROM AUSTRALIA

226

89°0

90

Ort

0s'0 £90 ss'0
0s'0 850 0s'0
POL ell v8'0
91'S SOL £9'V
00°C COC SLI
00°C SI? OST
sol col LIT
£6 80°01 8°9
6LI ST0¢ Ll
Lessca 8E8scd 8Pcred

6e8Sc7u

sojaqosouu sypsiop vj

jo sodAjeied pue syjpsuop sypsiop vik jO “ww Ul

SUOISUSUTIC]

20} YWINOJ JO OSIP JO YIPIAA

Josuy Ply} JO 9SIP JO WIPIMA

wnuedwA} jo 19}0WvIG

wunuedwaA}
JO ospo 10110}sod 0} jnouS

aA9 JO sJajoWILIG
20uv\sIp Slivu-sAq

QOURISIP [LIIVUIOJUT

yysuey vIqLy

Yysus] JUSA-]NOUS

‘T ede

COGGER 227

Literature Cited

Copland, S. J., 1957.—Australian Tree Frogs of the Genus Hyla. Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S.W., 82(1):9-108.

Fry, D. B., 1913.—A re-examination of Macleay’s New suis and Queensland
frog types. Mem. Qd. Mus., 2:49-50.

Goin, C. Me 1961.—Synopsis of the genera of hylid frogs. Ann. Carneg. Mus.,

36(2): 5-18.

Kampen, P. N. van, 1923.—The Amphibia of the Indo-Australian Archipelago.
E. J. Brill, Leiden. p. 65.

Loveridge, A., 1956.—Rediscovery of Hyla dorsalis and Lechriodus papuanus
in New Guinea. Breviora, 55:1.

Macleay, W., 1878.—The Batrachians of the Chevert Expedition. Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S.W., 2(2):138.

Moore, J. A., 1961.—The Frogs of Eastern New South Wales. Bull. Amer.
Mus. Nat. Hist., 121(3):151-385.

Peters, J. A., 1964.—Dictionary of Herpetology. Hafner, New York. p. 386.

Zweifel, R. G., 1962.—Results of the Archbold Expeditions. No. 83 Frogs of
the Microhylid Genus Cophixalus from the Mountains of New
Guinea. Amer. Mus. Nov., 2087:1-26.

Explanation of Plate XII

Hyla dorsalis microbelos subsp. nov.
A. Photograph of living male. Photo: Author.
B. Dorsal view of holotype.

C. Ventral view of holotype.
Photo: H. Hughes

BUDGERIGAR SURVEY

In connection with a research project investigating adaption of birds to the
desert environment, I am making a survey of nomadic behaviour of the
Budgerigar.

I would like to ask the help of any member who has personal records
or knows of literature records of either (a) breeding congresses of these birds,
i.e., more or less high density breeding associations surrounded mainly by
areas of little or no breeding, or (b) large non-breeding flocks as occasionally
seen at waterholes, in flight, etc.

I am aware of the time and effort required to search through personal
records, but please do not hesitate to write, no matter how insignificant your
information may seem. Each item is important in itself, as the sum total
of many records may give clearer understanding of the pattern of movement
as a whole in this species.

Eric Lindgren, Dept. of Zoology, University of W.A., Nedlands, W.A.

228

SOME EARLY REFERENCES TO THE EXTINCT MARSUPIAL,
ZYGOMATURUS

By G. P. WHITLEY
(Plates XVIII-XIX)

The palaeontologist is thrilled by the fossils he finds embedded between
the ancient strata of the earth; the bibliographer finds his enjoyments pressed
between pages of old books and papers. Sometimes the two have something of
satisfaction to show one another.

In the course of some research into the history of the Australian Museum,
Sydney, I came across several references to a new genus of fossil marsupial
called Zygomaturus which were considerably earlier than the dates of publication
indicated by Neave’s Nomenclator Zoologicus and by standard authors. It was
not clear where or when the genus had first been named, though T. S. Palmer’s
Index Generum Mammalium (1904, pp. 717 & 880) was nearest the mark.
I found that Zygomaturus (a genus caelebs, without a named species) was
introduced in an anonymous article in the Sydney Morning Herald newspaper
of the 9th September, 1857. It was later revealed by Owen that the author
of this article was William Sharp Macleay. Owen thought Zygomaturus was a
synonym of Noftotherium (one of several points upon which Krefft clashed with
him), but it is regarded as distinct by modern palaeontologists. In Australia
in the 1850’s there were few or no local scientific publications, so discoveries
were often announced in the daily or weekly press before being posted to
England or Europe to take their chances of publication there.

Old files of newspapers have been consulted by me in the Public Library
of New South Wales, Sydney, to the Trustees of which I express my thanks
for facilities. I also thank Professor R. A. Stirton of the University of
California, Mr. H. O. Fletcher of the Australian Museum, Sydney, Mr. John
Calaby of C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, and Mr. E. O. G. Scott of Launceston, who
have kindly given me helpful advice in the matter of Zygomaturus.

Here, then, is a copy of the first printed account of:

ZYGOMATURUS

(Anonymous), Sydney Morning Herald (newspaper),
September 9, 1857, page 2.

“Donations to the Australian Museum during August, 1857” (Includes):

“FOSSIL SKULL of a new marsupial animal, which bears a nearer approach
to Diprotodon than to any other known genus. The size was apparently that
of a large ox; and the skull agrees with that of the Megatherium, and others
of the American tardigrade edentata (living and extinct) in having a long
apophysis descending from the zygomatic arch, as well as in other particulars.
However, this process of the zygoma exists in the Diprotodon, and may be
detected even in the kangaroo. Another characteristic of this new quadruped,
which may be called Zygomaturus, is the great distance of the zygomatic
arch from the temporal bone. The breadth of the skull at the widest part,
namely, about the centre of the zygoma is fifteen inches; the extreme length
of the skull is about eighteen inches. In the Diprotodon the skull is on the
other hand about three feet long by one foot eight inches broad; so that
while the Diprotodon must have had a facies somewhat like that of a
kangaroo, the facies of the Zygomaturus must have been about as broad and
short in proportion as that of a wombat. The lower jaw of the specimen in
the Museum is wanting, but the formula of dentition in the upper jaw is as
follows:— 6 incisors, 0 canines, 10 molars. The two front incisors are very long
and strong, as in the kangaroo and Diprotodon. The above dental formula agrees
with that of Diprotodon, except that the latter animal had only eight molars
in the upper jaw. The Zygomaturus had many points of structure approaching
those of the rhinoceros and tapir family. For instance, the molars resembled
in form those of the tapirs, while the nasal septum may remind us of the
Rhinoceros tichorhinus, a fossil species that formerly inhabited England and
other parts of Europe. The strong and very prominent trefoil-shaped arch
formed by the extremity of the nasal bones, shews that if the Zygomaturus

WHITLEY 229

did not possess a snout, like that of a tapir, it must, at least, uke a rhinoceros,
have had a horn (perhaps a double one) on the nose. Without doubt this horn
was used for grubbing up the roots of aquatic plants, since, like the pachyderms,
to which it bears so close an affinity, in all probability the Zygomaturus passed
its life in marshy places. The extraordinary width of the temporal fossoe denotes
that the animal possessed enormous powers of biting and mastication. This skull
belonged to an adult animal, as the molars are considerably ground down.
Also the upper jaw of a young Zygomaturus, as appears by the tips of the
molars being perfect. Another portion of an upper jaw, and a humerus, probably
of a Zygomaturus; base of left ramus of the lower jaw of Diprotodon; and
front incisors of ditto. All the above fossil remains are from King’s Creek,
Darling Downs, being the same locality whence the entire skull of the
Diprotodon was obtained some years ago. [Donated by] Frederick Isaacs, Esq.,
Gowrie, Darling Downs.” [Queensland].

Other early references to Zygomaturus, with notes, are as follows:

(1) Sir William Denison wrote a letter, dated Sydney, 6th November, 1857,
in which he mentions that Dr. Macdonald of H.M.S. “Herald” has described
Zygomaturus better than he (Denison) had done in his last nee to Sir
Roderick Murchison (Denison, Varieties of Vice-Regal Life I, 1870, p. 427).

(2) Richard Owen, Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond. XIV, March 10, 1858, pp.
541-543. Abstract of a memoir. Here the specific name Z. trilobus, ‘from
W. S. Macleay’s MS., appears to be published for the first time.

(3) An anonymous article, “The Ancient Giants of Australia,” in Sydney
Morning Herald newspaper, April 15, 1858, p. 4 and a letter written on 30th
December, 1858 about “The native ‘ion’ of Australia” by W. S. Macleay in
the Sydney Morning Herald of ist January, 1859, p. S.

(4) Dr. John Shaw (A Gallop to the Antipodes . . . 1858, p. 233)
describes his visit to the Australian Museum and says, “Among the newly
discovered fossils were the Zygomaturus trilobus, and the Diprotodon from
Darling Downs.” He gave no further details and the specific name trilobus
he may have copied from a museum label.

(5) When the Austrian frigate “Novara” visited Sydney in 1858, its
scientists were provided with “casts of the fossil skull and bones of the
Diprotodon and other extinct Australian mammals.” (Australian Museum Annual
Rept., 1858, p. 1). Perhaps a cast of Zygomaturus was included?

(6) Owen, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., XV, Feb. 1859, pp. 168 & 174. Owen
remarks that Zygomaturus was the name given by Macleay and so was
Z. trilobus, but this species-name, as we have seen, did not appear in the
original newspaper account. Owen considered Z. trilobus to be a synonym of
Nototherium mitchellii (see Owen, 1877, Researchs on the fossil remains of the
extinct mammals of Australia (London: Erxleben), 2 vols., especially i, p. 250

et seq.). Owen had written to Macleay “. . . and I received a friendly and
favourable reply in a letter dated 9th March, 1858, in which Mr. W. S.
Macleay writes:— ‘Every month a list of donations received is published in

our local newspapers, and it is true that in one of such monthly lists I lately
wrote of this “Zygomaturus’ a few words which you appear to have seen.
They are, however, principally intended to please the donor, and to induce
him to send us more specimens. The name, from the “tail” or process of the
zygoma, was given on the principle we adopted of cataloguing every thing, were
it only for the purposes of correspondence and exchange. You ask for a cast
of the skull of the Zygomaturus, and I am glad to think that, long ere you
receive this letter, you will have had in your hands a cast that Mr. Want, a
Trustee for our Museum, took home for the British Museum.. .”

(7) Krefft, 1870, Guide to the Australian fossil remains.

(8) Parliamentary report of 1870, correspondence relating to the Wellington
Canes contains letters and lists by Krefft and Z. macleayi. sp. nov., p. 5, pl. iv

g. 4.

(9) Krefft, 1871, Austr. Vertebrata, p. 19.

(10) Sydney Mail, 13th May, 1871, p. 313. Unfortunately, files of
Sydney newspapers for 1870 and 1871 are lacking in some parts so that
some historic notes on fossils and on the discovery of the Queensland
Lungfish, etc. may have vanished.

230 REFERENCES TO THE EXTINCT MARSUPIAL, ZYGOMATURUS

(11) Holograph letter from Owen to Krefft dated Sth April, 1872
(Original in Mitchell Library, Sydney, Krefft MSS., Vol. A. 261). Krefft’s articles
in Sydney Mail, April 20, 1872, p. 488 (Z. creedii, nom. nud.) and June 8,
1872, p. 713, figs. (restoration and skull of Z. trilobus), reproduced here, plate
XIX

(12) R. Etheridge, 1878, A Catalogue of Australian Fossils, p: 195.
Zygomaturus is ascribed to “Macleay, 1857? (Cat. Donations . . .)” Later, and
independently of myself, Etheridge had discovered the type-description, for, in
his interleaved copy of the Catalogue, in the Australian Museum, Etheridge
had added in ink: “The reference ‘Cat. Donations’ &c. should read Donations
to the Australian Museum during August, 1857, and was only the usual
monthly statement of gifts at that time always published in the ‘Press.’ The
list was by W. S. Macleay and is the first announcement of his genus
Zygomaturus (Syd. M. Herald xxxviii, no. 6009, 1857 [9th Sept.] p. 2).”

(13) G. Krefft, “Mammals of Australia and their Classification. Part I.
Ornithodelphia and Didelphia. ” Sydney Mail, 8th Nov. 1873, pp. 594-595 and
plates i-ii as a supplement. Plate I shows Diprotodon Bennettii (Krefft) and
D. australis (Owen); Plate IL shows Zygomaturus Creedii (Krefft) and
Nototherium Mitchelli (Owen).

New genera and species of fossils were named by Krefft in the Sydney
newspapers. They would have been formally published in a fine, illustrated
scientific report, but Krefft was having serious troubles during the 1870's,
and so palaeontology still suffers. But that is another story.

De Vis (1907, Ann. Qld. Mus. 7:4) took exception to Zygomaturus because
it was not announced in a publication addressed to the scientific world. He
therefore renamed it Simoprosopus . .. “and for an emphatically flat-faced,
snub-nosed creature, the one [name] above written seems appropriate.”

To recapitulate, it appears that the names of the genus and oldest species
should be ascribed as follows:

Genus Zygomaturus Anon. [= W. S. Macleay], 1857, Sydney Morning
Herald, 9th Sept. 1857, p. 2.

Species: Z. trilobus Owen ex Macleay ae 1858, Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond.
xiv, March 10, 1858, p. 541.

(be macleayi Krefft, 1870, Wellington Caves correspondence (Govt.
Printer, Sydney), p. 5}, plaiv, fies 4:

Z. creedii Krefft, 1873, Sydney Mail, Nov. 8, 1873, p. 595, pl. ii,
figs. 7, 7a, 7b and 7c. Earlier referred to in the vernacular
by Krefft, Sydney Mail, May 13, 1871, p. 345, but not
latinized until pl. ii was published in 1873.

Explanation of Plate XIII.

Cartoon of Gerard Krefft as a conjuror, restoring the skull of a fossil
marsupial, Diprotodon, for a simulacrum of Richard Owen. From Sydney Punch,
26 June 1874, from the original in the Mitchell Library, Sydney.

Inserted here as a palaeontological curiosity and because of the excellent
likeness of Krefft, an early student of Australian fossils and discoverer of the
Queensland Lungfish. The caption of the joke has long lost its point, but

read as follows:
DIPROTODON !!

“PROFESSOR KREFFT — THE GREAT WIZARD OF THE NORTH:—
‘Now, this is the most remarkable trick, ladies and gentlemen, ever performed. in
the Australian Colonies. In this present enlightened age I don’t intend to try
to make you believe there is any witchcraft in it. The thing is perfectly easy
when you once know how to do it. You see me CRUSH TO POWDER the
jawbones of the great Australian Diprotodon, which I placed in this box;
hey, presto!! and here, Ladies and Gentlemen, you see them on the table,
perfect as Professor Owen acknowledges that he received them! (LOUD
APPLAUSE).”

The Wizard of the North was Professor Anderson, a conjuror who amazed
Sydney audiences with his “clever acts of diablerie”’ in 1859.

Explanation of Plate XIX
Skull and restoration of Zygomaturus trilobus.
After Krefft, 1872.

231

GENERA PISCIUM: Work in Progress

By GILBERT P. WHITLEY

David Starr Jordan, in his Genera of Fishes and Classification of Fishes,
tried to place each genus and subgenus of fishes, living and fossil, named between
the years 1758 and 1923, in its proper family, without necessarily distinguishing
between valid names, preoccupied names and synenyms. His tremendous work
was published by Leland Stanford University, Palo Alto, California, between
1917 and 1923 and was out of print for some time before being reprinted in
1963 with a new foreword by George S. Myers and a comprehensive index.
In the course of its preparation, Jordan had specially mentioned my _ late
mentor in ichthyology, Allan R. McCulloch of the Australian Museum, Sydney,
to whom Jordan wrote (in lit., 16 May, 1922), “I have been more indebted
to you than to anyone else of the men whose help I have called for,” a
striking tribute to Australia, for one would have expected that most assistance
would have been forthcoming from older countries with their greater library
resources. Yet McCulloch had managed to compile his data, by great personal
diligence, far removed from all the classic centres of learning and at a time
when one had to wait at least six months for a reply to a letter to the other
side of the world. Since 1925, when McCulloch died, the increase in new names
for genera and species of fishes has been phenomenal and the task of keeping
up-to-date his manuscript lists and his card-index has grown accordingly.

Since there was no one else to do it, the present writer, McCulloch’s
successor as Curator of Fishes at the Australian Museum until 1964, decided to
try to keep apace with the growing spate of genera (and incidentally with a
selection of the even greater flow of new species, though these do not
concern us here). This involved analysing the relevant literature, adding new
or overlooked generic names to the families listed in McCulloch’s now ageing
exercise books, and writing so many card-index slips that the supplement to
McCulloch’s catalogue has exceeded its parent in size. Fools rush in where
angels fear to tread, it is said, and one is only too conscious that what has
been attempted in Sydney may or should have been done better in some
other city. However, no sign of any similar undertaking appears to have
emerged elsewhere. Indeed, it has been stated that no one in the United States
at least has been found with both the ability and the time to carry through
such an extensive revision. My own labours fall far short of the target aimed
at and (to mix metaphors) have failed through trying to put new wine into
old bottles. The whole task is really a continually changing process, which will
have to be finished by other hands; the reader is asked to excuse the overuse
of the personal pronoun in the sketch which follows of what this writer has
attempted.

In March 1929, I commenced a handwritten alphabetical list of the names
of fish genera by copying out all those in Jordan’s indexes and amalgamating
all additional ones. When I started this “Genera Piscium,” as I called it, the
whole of Sherborn’s great Index Animalium had not been published, but
Mr. C. D. Sherborn was mailing duplicate printers’ proofs of it to his friend,
Mr. Tom Iredale, then conchologist at the Australian Museum, who shared
this treasure with me and also, over the years, helped me from his own
taxonomic and bibliographical experience, for which I cannot adequately
express my thanks. In July 1929, I sent to Professor D. S. Jordan a list
of about 675 generic names omitted from, or published subsequently to, his
Genera of Fishes. Others were furnished to Mr. S. A. Neave for his Nomenclator
Zoologicus when I was in London in 1937. Some were variant or amended
spellings, rather than entirely new generic names.

232 GENERA PISCIUM: Work in Progress

As a result of personally reading line by line through Sherborn’s Index
Animalium (in proof as well as in print), McCulloch’s manuscripts, Agassiz’s
Nomenclator Zoologicus, certain old French Dictionaries of natural history,
the Index Zoologicus, the Prussian Academy’s Nomenclator, Weber & de
Beaufort’s Fishes of the Indo-Australian Archipelago and muck general literature,
including the essential portions of the Zoological Record, 1 had listed by
March 1951 about three thousand names additional to those in Jordan’s works.
To these I have added all the new generic names for Recent and fossil fishes
proposed in later years until now there are many more additions than there are
generic names for fishes dating from 1758 to 1923.

Scudder’s Nomenclator and Bleeker’s Atlas Ichthyologique may still yield
a few more names to closer scrutiny, but not many, I think.

In May 1950, I estimated that about ten thousand different names had
been proposed for fish genera between 1758 and 1950. It had taken me
eleven years to check my manuscript list with Neave’s Nomenclator Zoologicus
which, like Sherborn’s Index Animalium, was amazingly complete. I sent a
supplementary list of some 400 names to Neave in September, 1952—I had
missed some which he had included, and vice versa.

The number of generic names proposed for fishes is estimated as follows:
Treated in Jordan,

Genera of Fishes, Part 1, for 1758 to 1833 ee OR all 1271 7/

Genera of Fishes, PRarte2 for 1833 to 1858 . 3!) SEL ORs) eg)

GeneratofiFishess Parts ton d859storlSS Ole -ueecn co -t-a ee OS

Genera of Fishes, Part -45for188iltorl920%. 2 2: Vad Sa eee ee Gt
Classification of Fishes,

Names overlooked, or published from 1920 to 1923 . stalin )s}\ 0)

(Whitley, MS). Overlooked names, emendations, etc., 1758 to 1930 0) Siar

New names proposed, 193 (ueto) 4198 9am. an ere 1100

New names proposed, 1940 to 1958* ..... 0. = 44

TOTAL, 1758 to 1958 . ee oy Ri | Oe 13,556

All of the names ublistied Heures 1758 yet 1958 (ata some of later
date) have been checked to ascertain which ones were preoccupied. Many
genera fell in this process, some to rise again under fresh names. One is
impressed by a sad wastage: probably about 36% of the thousands of names
are superfluous (being nomina nuda, nomina vana, homonyms or preoccupied
names, variant spellings, primary or secondary synonyms) out of a possible
number of about five thousand valid genera of fishes (fossil and Recent) in
the world.

The initials E. and O.E. are always appropriate to a compilation of this
kind: “errors and omissions excepted.”

In a subsequent paper, or series of papers, I hope to furnish an alphabeticai
list of the genera of fishes additional to Jordan, 1963. Mere variant spellings,
misprints or superfluous emendations will be excluded and references to literature
will be found in Sherborn, Neave (whose sixth volume is eagerly awaited)
or the Zoological Record.

In work of this kind, accuracy, patience and fairness to one’s antecedents
should prevail over arbitrary treatments which may bring temporary advantages
only. Experience has suggested to this writer that quite rigid adherence to
priority is preferable to a continuing changing or partial modification of the
rules of nomenclature perhaps only to suit the conveniences of a few
specialised students during a brief period of time.

* The final year 1958 was selected as being the bicentenary of Linne’s
Systema Naturae, ed. 10 (1758). In 1758, Linne had established only 61
genera. From 1940 to 1950, 720 new genera of fishes were named and
from 1951 to 1958, 624. Since 1958 several hundred new names have been
proposed so that compilation never ceases.

WHITLEY 233

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I acknowledge, with thanks, the helpful services of the library staffs of
various institutions, but particularly of the Australian Museum, Sydney, the
Public Library and Mitchell Library, Sydney, the Linnean Society of New South
Wales, the Public Library and National Museum, Melbourne, and the National
Library, Kingston, Canberra. A small but distinguished band of friends gave
helpful advice and criticism from time to time: my thanks go to Carl Hubbs,
Tom Iredale, the late David Starr Jordan, the late Anthony Musgrave, George
S. Myers, S. A. Neave, the late C. D. Sherborn and Dr. E. Trewavas. Any views
expressed in this paper are, however, my responsibility. Constructive criticism of
this scheme would be welcome.

PRELIMINARY SAMPLE OF THE PROJECTED LIST OF GENERIC
NAMES OF FISHES, ADDITIONAL TO THOSE IN JORDAN, 1963, IN
ALPHABETICAL ORDER

To conserve space, citations show, at the most: (1) the generic name;
(2) its author(s); (3) date (year) of publication; (4) reference, if not in
standard nomenclators, with (5) type-species in parentheses (); (6) family
name with the suffix-(i)idae omitted, or simply “foss.” if the genus is fossil
and of uncertain family; and (7) in ‘the case of synonyms, the name regarded
as a valid replacement, in square brackets, thus [= ]; only primary synonyms
are so noticed, since any others may be matters of opinion and liable to
modification.

Lack of some rare books has prevented me from verifying or completing
certain references.

There is considerable doubt whether the fossil Conodonts should be
considered to have been fishes (it is not even certain whether they were
vertebrates or invertebrates), so I have omitted them. A list of the genera of
Conodonts has been supplied by Robert O. Fay, 1952, University of Kansas
Paleont. Contrib., Vertebrata, Art 3: 60-206.

Nomina nuda, variant spellings, misprints, etc. are not listed. For example:

Ababes Gray, 1842, because it is a nomen nudum; Abacion Rafinesque, 1820,
Annals of Nature 9, which is an insect, not a fish as indicated in Sherborn,
1932, Index. Anim. (2) 29, additions: 1; “Abu” and other names of Forskal,
which may be in the Prussian Nomenclator Anim., 1926, but are not in Neave;
and so on, down to Zyrichthys Swainson, 1839, a mere variant of Xirichthys.

Abantennarius Schultz, 1957. Antennar.

Abantis Jordan, 1925, foss. Carist. [Preocc. = Absalomichthys.]

Abcichthys Whitley, 1927. Scorpaen.

Abeichthys Parin, 1961. Exocoet.

Ablabys Kaup, 1873, Arch. Naturg., 39(1):80 (taenionotus*) Scorpaen.

Abranches Smith, 1947. Gob.

Absalom Whitley, 1937. Carang.

Absalomichthys Whitley, 1933, foss. Carist.

Acahara Jordan & Hubbs, 1925. Cyprin.

Acanthalepis McCoy, 1846, foss.

Acanthapogon Fowler, 1938. Apogon.

Acanthocirrhitus Fowler, 1938. Cirrhit.

Acanthodes Fourmanoir & Crosnier, 1964, Cahiers Orstrom, 6: 23 (fragilis).
Scorpaen. [Preocc. by Agassiz, 1846, in fossil sharks, and wants new
name].

* Type-species, by present selection, Apistus taenionotus Cuvier & Valenciennes,
1829. Ablabys replaces Amblyapistus Bleeker, 1875. The only Australian
species is Ablabys (Parocosia) slacksmithi (Whitley, 1958), comb. nov.

234 GENERA PISCIUM: Work in Progress

And so on, for perhaps five thousand names or more, down to. .

Zonophichthus Whitley, 1930. Ophichthy.

Zoropsetta Jordan & Gilbert, 1920, Foss. Fish Lompoc :3, foss. Pleuronect.
[= Zororhombus].

Zostericola lyin, 1927. Gob. [Preocc. = Zosterisessor].

Zostericola Berg, 1933. Gob. [Preocc. = Zosterisessor, pace Neave].
Zosterisessor Whitley, 1935. Gob.

Za Walters & Fitch, 1960. Trachipter.

References.

Agassiz, L., 1846—Nomenclator Zoologicus, 1846, Index Universalis.

Berg, L. S., 1940—Classification of Fishes, both Recent and fossil. Trav. Inst.
Zool. Acad. Sci. URSS., 5 (2): 86-517, figs. 1-190.

Bleeker, P., 1862-1878—Atlas Ichthyologique, 9 vols.

Follett, W. I and L. J. Dempster, 1965.—Ichthyological . . . Names and Works
on which the International Commission on Zoological Nomenclature
has ruled . . . Copeia, 1965 (4): 518-523.

Fowler, H. W., 1964—A Catalog of World Fishes. Q. J. Taiwan Mus., 17:1-62;
later parts being issued.

Greenwood, P. H., 1964—Jordan’s Fish Genera. Nature, 204, Oct. 3, 1964: 7.

Index Zoologicus, 1902-1912—Vol. 1, 1902 and 2, 1912.

Jordan, D. S., 1917-1920—The Genera of Fishes, 4 parts: 1-576.

———————,, 1923. A Classification of Fishes: 1-244.

, 1963. The Genera of Fishes and A Classification of Fishes.
Reprinted: 1-800.

Marschall, A. de, 1873—Nomenclator Zoologicus, Pisces: 61-98.

Munro, I. S. R., 1952—An application of visible indexing to Systematic Zoology.
Austr. J. Mar. freshw. Res., 3 (1): 92-100, figs. 1-4.

Neave, S. A., 1939-50—Nomenclator Zoologicus, vols. 1-5 and supplements
Wek 6 was said to be in the press at the time of writing [1965]—

.P.W.).

Preussichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1926-1938—-Nomenclator Animalium
(Berlin), vols. 1-5, the last one never completed. Authors were the
late F. E. Schultze, W. Kiikenthal and K. Heider.

Rogers, J. S., 1953—Report of the Director. Mus. Zool. Univ. Michigan, 1951-
1952: 25, fig. (Reproduction of card-form used in compilation of
genera of fishes).

Scudder, S. H., 1882—Nomenclator Zoologicus, 1: 1-376 and 2: 1-340.

Sherborn, C. D., 1902—Index Animalium, 1758-1800.

—_———., 1922-1932—-Index Animalium, 1801-1850, vols. 1-9, including
addenda.

Weber, M. and L. F. de Beaufort, 1911—Fishes of the Indo-Australian
Archipelago, 1. (Index of names in all Bleeker’s works, except his
Atlas Ichthyologique).

Zoological Record, 1864 to early 1960’s. (Especially lists of genera at the end
of each volume. Before 1870, there were no separate lists of new
genera in the Zoological Record and no distinction was drawn between
those of fishes and other animals until 1876. Emendations and substitute
names began to be proposed in the 1872 volume and some of these
were overlooked by other nomenclators. About the 1880's, examination
of new names by the Recorders for possible preoccupation became
superficial and, like their classical emendations, subsequently lapsed).

235

NOTES ON SOME QUEENSLAND FISHES
by G. P. WHITLEY
(Plates XIII-XIV, figures 1-5).

In May 1964, I spent some recreation leave at Karumba, on the Gulf
of Carpentaria, Queensland, where, thanks to facilities afforded by Mr. Ian
S. R. Munro, Project Leader of the Gulf Prawn Survey, I was able to see
many interesting fishes which had been caught besides the prawns. Notes on a
few of them are recorded here, also some on other Queensland fishes.
Thanks are also due to Miss Helen Ashton for some of the illustrations.

Family GALEIDAE.
Genus GALEOLAMNA Owen, 1853.
Subgenus LAMNARIUS Whitley, 1943.
GALEOLAMNA (LAMNARIUS) SPENCERI (Ogilby).
(Figure 1.)
Carcharias spenceri Ogilby, 1911, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 23(1):3. Brisbane
River, Qld.
Galeolamna (Lamnarius) spenceri Whitley, 1943, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales,
Noe CULO tess) (give (tor irefs:)).
Carcharhinus spenceri Garrick & Schultz, 1963, Sharks and Survival: 35.
Eulamia spenceri Stead, 1963, Sharks and Rays Austr. Seas: 86 & 200.
Galeolamna spenceri Whitley, 1964, Rec. Austr. Mus., 26: 159.

This is a whaler shark with dental formula 12.1.12, no interdorsal ridge,
eri
a bluntly rounded snout, no conspicuous colour-markings and general facies
as figured here. The biometrics of the Karumba specimen described below
agree well with example E in my 1943 table but the width of the mouth is
only 66 mm. and the labial folds are minute. Head broadly rounded, 4.2 in
total length, its profile rising convexly to the long-based first dorsal fin. Teeth
in upper jaw typically as long as broad, not notched, hardly deflected, each
with about 17 coarse serrae along each edge. Symphysial tooth minute, serrated
in upper and entire in lower jaw. Teeth of lower jaw more erect and shouldered,
serrated on shoulder and cusp. No conspicuous row of pores behind eye.
Nostrils crescentic, witk slight flap. Interorbital convex.

Body fairly robust, depth 6.5 in total length. Denticles crossed by 3 or 4
carinae. Preanal length less than postanal length. Caudal pit above and below.
Interdorsal space greater than distance from eye to first dorsal origin. No
interdorsal ridge. No umbilical scar. Snout to upper caudal pit, 505 mm.; upper
caudal lobe, 221.

Pectoral angle reaches below anterior fifth of first dorsal base; no bite-marks.
Origin and end of anal fin behind levels of those of second dorsal. 185
vertebrae, the 25th opposite origin of first dorsal fin; Sist opp. that of
ventral fin; 65th opp. that of second dorsal fin; 69th opp. that of anal fin,
and there are 88 to base of caudal.

Colour after death pale grey, slightly darker edges to fins; no dusky
lateral streak. Eye silver with blue ring and pupil. Edge of dark dorsal colour
passing over eye.

Described and figured from an immature female, 726mm. or 29 inches
overall length. Stomach contained the pectoral girdle of a fish (Polydactylus)
and the head of a prawn (Metapenaeus, probably M. eboracensis). Australian
Museum regd. no. IB.7139.

Loc.—Karumba, Gulf of Carpentaria, Queensland; handline from beach,
May 1964.

NOTES ON SOME QUEENSLAND FISHES

236

‘PP uoysy “H F AMMYM ‘d ‘OD
‘pesy JO MIIA [VI]JUA pu ‘ajoIJUSp ‘YJOO] Jamo] pue sdddn

:JOsuy “puerjsusongd

SoM

‘Maquads (SNMDUUDT) DUUDOaIDH ‘yxIeYS IayeEYA—] 21N3LF

WHITLEY 237

Family PLOTOSIDAE
Genus NEOSILURUS Steindachner, 1867.
NEOSILURUS BREVIDORSALIS (Gunther).
(Figure 2).
Copidoglanis brevidorsalis Gunther, 1867, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3)20: 66.
Cape York, Queensland and Nicol Bay, W. Australia.
Id. Macleay, 1881, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales 6:207; Cat. Austr.
Fish. 2, 1882:143.
Id. Weber, 1913, Nova Guinea 9: 526, 527, 530, 532, 604 and 607
(Lorentz River. New Guinea).
Id. Weber and Beaufort, 1913, Fish. Indo-Austr. Archip. 2:241.
Neosilurus brevidorsalis Steindachner, 1867, Sitzungsb. Akad. Wiss. Wien
56(1): 319 (Cape York. Described). Id. Troschel, 1870, Archiv
Naturges. (Weigmann) 36 (4): 276 Cape York. Sex-dimorphism.
A female without ventral fins. But see Gunther, 1873, Zool. Rec.
1871, Pisces: 104, for discussion. 7d. Ogilby, 1908, Ann. Q’ld. Mus.
9:14. Id. Weber, 1911, Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 34:21 (Aru
Islands). Zd. Whitley, 1938, Rec. Austr. Mus. 20:223 (Upper Fly
River, New Guinea). Jd. Whitley, 1947, W.A. Nat. 1:53. Id. Whitley,
1957, Australasian Aqua Life 2(6):10. 7d. Munro, 1957, Fisheries
Newsletter, Avril 1957:16, Hbk. Austr. Fish. 10:42, no. 301.
Copidoglanis (Neosilurus) brevidorsalis Rendahl, 1922, Medd. Zool. Mus.
Kristiania 5:172.
Tandanus (Neosilurus) brevidorsalis McCulloch and Whitley, 1925, Mem. Q’ld.
Mus. 8(2):134. Id. McCulloch, 1929, Austr. Mus. Mem. SBSH /s
The bibliography of this species is here assembled and it is figured for the
first time from a Papuan specimen, from the Upper Fly River, 225 mm.
(nearly 9 inches) long (Austr. Mus. regd. no. IA.7224).

ey =

i Soop ated Pe sores
WE Ss egg para ee eet
ae ee

Figure 2—Catfish, Neosilurus brevidorsalis. Papuan specimen.
G. P. Whitley del.

Family SOLEIDAE.
Genus ASERAGGODES Kaup, 1858.
ASERAGGODES GUTTULATUS Kaup.

Aseraggodes guttulatus Kaup, 1858, Arch. Naturges., 24 (1): 103. No locality.
Id. Chabanaud, 1927, Bull. Inst. Oceanogr. Monaco, 500: 14. Id.
Chabanaud, 1930, Zool. Meded., 13: 185 & 190. Id. Chabanaud, 1931,
Bull. Soc. Zool. France, 56: 302 & map. Id. Chabanaud, 1939,
Bull. Inst. Oceanogr. Monaco, 763:20.

Solea guttulata Gunther, 1862, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 4: 477.

Solea kaiana Gunther, 1880, Rept. Voy. Challenger, Zool., 1 (6): 49, pl. 21,
fig. c. Kai Islands, 129 fathoms. 7d. Gunther, 1887, Rept. Voy.
Challenger, Zool., 22: 167. Id. Kamohara, 1934, Zool. Mag., 46: 462.

238 NOTES ON SOME QUEENSLAND FISHES

Aseraggodes kaianus Weber & Beaufort, 1929, Fish. Indo-Austr. Archip.,
5: 152, 155 & 429. Id. Kamohara, 1939, Bottom-fishes Prov. Tosa
:61-62. Id. Kamohara, 1952, Rept. Kochi Univ. Nat. Sci. (3): 84.
Id. Ochiai, 1964, Faun. Japon., Soleina: 9, 20 & 32, pl. 10, text-figs.
10, 15-16.
Several examples from the Gulf of Carpentaria, netted by the Gulf Prawn
Survey. One (regd. no. IB.7212) in Australian Museum.
New record for Australia.

Genus STRABOZEBRIAS Chabanaud, 1943.
Strabozebrias Chabanaud, 1943, Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris, (2) 15: 293.
Type-species, Synaptura canceliata McCulloch. Also includes S.
craticula McCulloch.

STRABOZEBRIAS MUNROI, sp. nov.
(Plate xiii)
D.68; A.58; P. (left) 8, (right) 5; V.3; C.15. L.lat. 93 on eyed and 100 on
blind side. L.tr. 30/1/35 on eyed side, 40/1/40 on blind side.

Head (19 mm.) 4.7, depth of body (40) 2.27 in standard length (91).
Eye (3) 6.3, snout (5) nearly 4, length of pectoral (1) 19 and length
of caudal (16) 1.18 in head.

Snout not hooked, snub-nosed, chin prominent. Mouth shorter and more
curved on blind side; lips entire, somewhat contorted. Eyes small, dextral,
contiguous, without any scaly interspace but with a common translucent palpebral
epidermis, the upper eye partly in advance of the lower. Nostril tubes simple,
short. Gill-openings restricted.

Body covered with imbricate, strongly ctenoid scales on both sides,
without cutaneous flaps. Scales of head same size as body-scales. Nine grooves
in l.lat. scale. Dorsolateral line absent.

Origin of dorsal fin on front of head before eyes, its first ray not produced.
Dorsal and anal rays simple, the last completely confluent with the caudal.
Pectorals vestigial on both sides, that on the blind side longer than the other.
Left ventral fin reduced, near vent. Right ventral connected with first anal ray.

Ground-colour cream or very pale yellow becoming white on the
fins. Head and body (on eyed side) partly or entirely crossed by nine to
twelve very irregularly shaped fawny-brown bars, the interior areas of which
are lighter in tone, more like the ground-colour. These bars extend over the
unpaired fins and become darkest brown above and below the tail-fin which is
mostly white. Blind side pale yellow with the dark areas of the dorsal and anal
fins showing through. Pectoral fins white. Eyes blue.

Described from the holotype, a specimen 91 mm. in standard length
or 44 inches overall. Australian Museum regd. no. IB.7210. Three paratypes,
up to 5.3 inches in length, in the Gulf of Carpentaria Prawn Survey collection
(Cat. no. 304) show no noteworthy variation apart from the colour-bars which
are of different configuration in each.

Loc.— “Rama” trawl station no. 398, south-eastern corner of the Gulf
of Carpentaria, Queensland: Lat. 17°32’20” S. by Long. 140°33’35” E., in
24 fathoms. 26 November 1963.

The striking colour-markings and the largely white caudal fin are diagnostic.
Can be added to the bottom of Norman’s key* to “Brachirus’ by appending:
C. Head less than 5 in length. Nine to twelve irregular cross-bars. Tail mostly
WIEN Min eee tee Ua Ip Rene een oc AME nt SANER ERE 9 URN Aad Strabozebrias munroi.

Named in appreciation of Mr. Ian S. R. Munro, Project Leader of the
Gulf of Carpentaria Prawn Survey, most of whose collections are now housed in
the Australian Museum, Sydney.

*Norman, 1926, Biol. Res. Endeavour, 5(5):292.

WHITLEY 239

Family CALLYODONTIDAE.
Genus CALLYODON Scopoli, 1777.
CALLYODON TOSHI (Whitley).
(Figure 3).

Heteroscarus sp. Tosh, 1903, Parl. Rept. Mar. Dept. Qld. 1902-03: 20 & 23
(misprinted Pecudoscarus), pl. vi, fig. 3. Southport, Moreton Bay,
Queensland, 12 inches long.

Callyodon cyanotaenia Ogilby, 1915, Mem. Qld. Mus. 3: 135. Not Scarus
cyanotaenia Bleeker, 1854, Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. 6: 197, from
Batavia which is a Xanothon.

Scarus sp. and S. cyanotaenia McCulloch and Whitley, 1925, Mem. Qld.
Mus. 8: 169.

Scarus toshi Whitley, 1933, Rec. Austr. Mus. 19: 61. Southport, Queensland.
Id. Schultz, 1958, U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 214: 12.

Callyodon toshi Whitley, 1964, Rec. Austr. Mus., 26 (5): 150.

Figure 3—Parrot Fish, Callyodon toshi. Queensland.
Helen Ashton del.

Here illustrated from a specimen, 148 mm. in standard length and 7
inches overall, from Gillett Cay, Swain Reefs, Queensland. (Aust. Mus.
Expedition, October, 1962). Austr. Mus. regd. no. IB.6086.

Family CHAMPSODONTIDAE.
Genus CHAMPSODON Gunther, 1867.
CHAMPSODON NUDIVITTIS (Ogilby).

Centropercis nudivittis Ogilby, 1895, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, (2) 10:
320. Maroubra, New South Wales.
- Two examples of this species were trawled by Mr. T. Nielsen from
100 fathoms, off Cape Moreton (Austr. Mus. regd. nos. IB.7062-3).
New record for Queensland.

Family OPISTOGNATHIDAE.
MEROGYMNOIDES, gen. nov.

Type-species, Merogymnoides carpentariae, sp. nov.
Diagnosis: A genus of Jawfishes with large scales which extend forward on
the body to leave only small areas of the breast naked. The head is scaleless.
Gill-rakers on first branchial arch 31. Maxillary shorter than head, its distal
end truncate.

The dorsal spines are weak and flexible, not split. There is one anal
spine and twelve rays and thirteen dorsal rays. Body without conspicuous
markings.

240 NOTES ON SOME QUEENSLAND FISHES

Key to Genera of Opistognathidae.
A. Dorsal spines pungent, cheeks and opercles with scales.
B. Scales about 30 to 40 in longitudinal series.
C. Gill rakers 38 on first gill-arch. Anal fin with 2 spines.
Dorsal and anal with about 12 rays each .... Lonchistium Myers, 1935.
CC. Gill rakers 28. Anal fin with 3 spines. Dosal and anal
rays) 140... oe. | Upsilonognathus, Fowler, 1946:
BB. Scales over 55. Géill-rakers 64. Anal with 3 spines.
Dorsal and anal with 16 to 18 soft rays ..... Lonchopisthus Gill, 1862.
AA. Dorsal spines flexible, cheeks and opercles naked.
D. Dorsal spines distally split into two lateral segments
Stalix Jordan & Snyder, 1902.
DD. Dorsal spines distally entire.
E. Trunk naked anteriorly.
F. Scales small and very numerous, not extending

forward to pectoral base .... ..... Merogymnus Ogilby, 1908.
FF. Scales in about 50 rows or less, extending much
farther forward .... .... ..... ..... Merogymnoides, gen. nov.

EE. Trunk fully scaled.
G. Maxillary shorter than head, its distal end
truncate or notched.
H. Eight dorsal spines .... . ... Gnathypops Gill, 1862.
HH. More than eight dorsal spines .... Tandya Whitley, 1930.
GG. Maxillary greatly produced backward in a
flexible lamella, about as long as head
Opistognathus Cuvier, 1816.

MEROGYMNOIDES CARPENTARIAE, sp. nov.
(Figure 4)
Brei6; DS xe8s VAL i 12 Pi Oo Vee 4 Coal Gmemainienrayss le. slater
Sc. c. 50. Tr. 3/1/20 to 10 on caudal peduncle. Predorsal scales 4.

Gill-rakers 11 + 20 on first branchial arch.

Head (25 mm.) 2.7, depth (20) 3.4 in standard length (68). Eye (7)
3.5. Maxillary (14) 1.7 in head. Interorbital (2) 3.5 in eye and half depth of
distal end of maxillary (4). Length of pectoral fin, 13 mm; length of ventral
fin, 15. Width of body, 11. Least depth of caudal peduncle, 9.

Head about as wide as deep, profile humped over eyes. Snout much
less than eye. Interorbital narrow, apparently without pores. Pores across
vertex of head. Preoperculum without spine. Two opercular spines. Nostrils
without tube. Gill-membranes united across narrow isthmus. Head naked.

Figure 4—Jawfish, Merogymnoides carpentariae. Holotype. Queensland.
Helen Ashton del.

WHITLEY 241

Maxillary shorter than head, truncate, extending a short distance behind eye.

A single row of spaced teeth around each jaw. A hooked canine on each side

of symphysis of upper jaw, with several smaller teeth, behind the uniserial outer

teeth. Dental formula scat teeth not villiform. Vomer and palatines with
C5)

only vestiges of teeth. /

Trunk mostly naked in advance of a line joining pectoral base to
origin of ventral fin. Body scales imbricate, cycloid. Lateral line near the back,
reaching to beyond middle of dorsal fin-base, with about 25 tubes, terminating
below first to fourth dorsal rays.

Dorsal spines weak, flexible, lower than rays, not split distally. Fins
all rounded except for ventrals which are pointed and do not reach vent.

General colour, after preservation, pale yellowish-brown, becoming darker
brown on top of head and over gill-openings and branchiostegal region.
Eyes blue. Orbit almost surrounded by brown ring. No conspicuous dark
“moustache’—mark at maxillary. A dusky symphysial blotch. Paired fins
light brown. Unpaired fins mostly blackish, the dorsal with a median cream
band, the anal with a basal one.

Described and figured from the holotype specimen, 83 mm. or 34 inches
long, one of two examples obtained in 1964 by the C.S.1.R.O. Gulf Prawn
Survey. Australian Museum registered no. IB.7145. Paratype in C.S.I.R.O.
collection.

Locality—Gulf of Carpentaria, Queensland.

Apparently nearest Merogymnus eximius Ogilby, 1908, but differing in the
following salient characters:—

A. Scales extend forward on the trunk to below the middle
of the adpressed pectorals; they are small and very numerous.
L.lat. with about 80 tubes. Body with large golden spots. Gill-
rakers 26 on lower portion of first branchial arch .. Merogymnus eximius.
AA. Scales extend much farther forward, leaving only a small
portion of breast naked. L.lat. with less than 30 tubes; scales
on body larger and fewer, in about 50 transverse rows. Body
without large golden spots. Gill-rakers 20 on lower portion
of first branchial arch .... Merogymnoides carpentariae, gen. et sp. nov.

“Opisthognathus” versluysi Weber, 1913, from Indonesia, differs in formulae,
proportions and coloration, and so does Gnathypops evermanni Jordan &
Snyder, 1902, from Japan, which is superficially similar; the latter species
has recently been figured from Vietnam by Fourmanoir (1965, Cahiers
O.R.S.T.O.M., spec. no., p. 75, fig. 48). Opisthognathus macrolepis Peters,
1866, from Bangkok, has more fin-rays and scales and slenderer build.

Family CONGROGADIDAE.
Genus CONGROGADOIDES Borodin, 1933.
CONGROGADOIDES SPINIFER Borodin.
(Figure 5)
Congrogadus spinifer Borodin, 1933, Ann. Rept. Direct. Mus. Comp. Zool.,
1932-33: 45. Australia. Nomen nudum.
Congrogadoides spinifer Borodin, 1933, Copeia, 1933 (3): 141. Broome,
W. Austr. Id. Whitley, 1964, Austr. Nat. 12 (4): 8 (Darwin, N. T.).
Id. Smith, 1952, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12) 5:85.

Ee ge

oe. fot Rg us Gig
Hs Toro Tent ’. {ip =
BS Hi AD .>- — ——————

Heath

‘
ila he
‘ ; i
Ds ly M2
abbey aetptind eS
RAK
Ne CAAA .

Figure 5—Dagger Fish, Congrogadoides spinifer. Queensland.
Helen Ashton del.

242 NOTES ON SOME QUEENSLAND FISHES

Here figured for the first time from a specimen (Austr. Mus. regd. no.
1B.6931), taken from a large sponge, trawled about 18 miles N.E. of the
mouth of the Albert River, Gulf of Carpentaria, Queensland; 7th Dec. 1963:
collected by Drs. J. Yaldwyn and D. F. McMichael. Total length 145 mm. or
5.7 inches.

The species is known from north-western Australia, across the Northern
Territory to Queensland.

Family GOBIOMORIDAE.
Genus PRIONOBUTIS Bleeker, 1874.
PRIONOBUTIS MICROPS (Weber).
Pogoneleotris microps Weber, 1908, Nova Guinea, 5: 258, pl. 12, figs. 4a and 4b.
Tawarin & Merauke Rivers, New Guinea.
Two specimens (Austr. Mus. regd. nos. 6883 & 7148) from the
Gulf of Carpentaria.
New record for Queensland.

Family BATHYAPLOACTIDAE.
Bathyaploactinae Whitley, 1933, Rec. Austr. Mus. 19: 102. Bathyaploactidae
Beaufort, 1962, Fish. Indo-Austr. Archip. 11: 91.

KARUMBA, gen. nov.
Type-species—Bathyaploactis curtisensis ornatissimus Whitley, 1933, but not
the nominate species, B. c. curtisensis.

Differs from all other genera of the family (Bathyaploactis Whitley, 1933,
Acanthosphex Fowler, 1938, and Kleiwegia Beaufort, 1952) in having four,
pungent anal spines, instead of fewer, weak ones. The gill-opening extends to
below the preopercular margin. Other characters are as defined for the family
by the above authors, and as described for the species below. Very few fishes
have four anal spines: the South African Scorpaenid, Sebastosemus, sometimes
has four, but the insertion of its dorsal fin and many other characters are
quite different from this novelty.

KARUMBA ORNATISSIMA (Whitley).
(Plate xiv)
Bathyaploactis curtisensis ornatissimus Whitley, 1933, Rec. Austr. Mus. 19:
03, pl. xiii, fig. 2. North-western Australia.

DE XIVA GA IVs ,Osnbe ili ise 2 Cro l 2a ie lat. about.s tubes:

Head (18 mm.) 2.6, depth (17) 2.8 in standard length (48). .

Head compressed, with no deep pits or grooves. An inconspicuous
barbel each side of chin and a row of papillae. Lower jaw terminal. Maxilla
truncate, reaching below front of eye. Teeth in fairly broad villiform bands
on both jaws and vomer, but not on palatines. Mouth oblique. Tongue bluntly
rounded, free. One bony, blunt-tipped upper and a short lower preorbital
spine. Suborbital stay smooth. Eye lateral, united with skin of head. Interorbital
narrow, three-crested. Preoperculum with four prominent blunt spines. Head
ending in two lobes, each with a weak opercular spine. No spines on top of
head or shoulders. Gill-opening extending forward to below preopercular
margin; isthmus broad. Seven, round, pad-like gill-rakers on first branchial
arch.

Deep and compressed, width about 4+ depth. Body smooth with rudimentary
scales apparent below epidermis. Lateral line with about eight tubes, the
posterior ones with small skinny flaps. No papillae or tentacles. Lateral line
gently curved anteriorly, highest below Sth or 6th dorsal spines, thence
running along side of tail, consisting of 8 tubes without spines. Caudal peduncle
longer below than above.

Dorsal fin originating over eye, with 14 strong spines, 2nd to 3rd longest,
membranes incised. Rays longer, simple, articulated. Last dorsal ray joined
to caudal peduncle immediately before caudal fin. Last anal ray before this.
Anal with four spines and six soft rays, its origin below 12th dorsal spine,
its fourth spine longest, shorter than rays, of which 3rd is longest. Pectoral
with subvertical base. 11 simple rays, fifth from top longest and almost reaching

WHITLEY 243

soft dorsal and anal fins; margin of fin rounded, membranes incised, no detached
lower ray. Ventral below opercular flap, with a strong spine whose length
is nearly half that of head, and two simple rays, the first longer. Caudal
rounded, with 12 simple rays, longest subequal to head.

Colour in formalin, white, densely mottled with irregular light brown
markings which tend to form crossbars on interorbital and below spinous
dorsal fin. Lower surface of head and belly white. The darkest markings
are almost blackish and occur on the fins: notably the middle of the first
dorsal, the second dorsal and anal and the edges of the pectorals, ventrals
and caudal. Eye blue. Pectoral axil plain.

Described and figured from a specimen 24 inches overall in the collection
of the Gulf Prawn Survey, Karumba, Queensland. A smaller one (no. IB.7143)
in Australian Museum with same data.

Locality—Gulf of Carpentaria, Queensland; Haul 452 = S.E. of Bentinck
Island, 4 way to Nicholson R., Q. 34 fathoms. (C.S.I.R.O. Gulf Prawn
Survey).

New record for Queensiand.

Explanation of Plates

Plate xiii—Sole, Strabozebrias munroi. Holotype. Queensland.
Photo:— C. V. Turner,
Australian Museum.

Plate xiv—Wasp Fish, Karumba ornatissima. Queensland.
G. P. Whitley del.

244

THE GENERA OF THE GALAXIIDAE

by E. O. G. Scorr

INTRODUCTION

In a paper (1965, unpublished) presented at the 38th Congress of the
Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science, at
Hobart, a general survey of the current position in Galaxiid systematics
was made in four sections: I. Relationships of the family; II]. Family and
sub-family characters; III. Genera and subgenera; IV. Species and subspecies.
The present contribution represents the gist of III; detailed biometric evidence
in support of some of the conclusions here advanced that differ from accepted
concepts will, it is hoped, appear elsewhere; some remarks on convergent and
divergent evolution that follow the itemised treatment of the published genera
extend on to some of the ground covered in II.

PART I. — REVIEW OF THE GENERA

Fishes now placed in the Galaxiidae that have at some time been referred
to other families include Galaxias argenteus (Gmelin, 1789), the apparently
conspecific G. alepidotus (Bloch & Schneider, 1801), G. truttaceus (Cuvier,
[1816]), all originally placed in Esox Linné, 1758 (Esocidae, Clupeiformes);
G. variegatus (Lesson, 1830), described under Stomias Schinz, 1822 (Stomiatidae,
Clupeiformes); Agalaxis zebratus (Castelnau, 1861), A. punctifer (Castelnau,
1861), both relegated by their describer to Cobitis Linné, 1758 (Cobitidae,
Cypriniformes). Galaxias indicus Day, 1888, from near Bengal and Madras,
is stated not to be a Galaxiid.

Genera and subgenera proposed within the Galaxiidae are as follows:

I. Galaxias Cuvier, (1816), Régne Anim., ed. 1, ii:183. Haplotype Esox
truttaceus Cuvier, (1816). (The relevant volume, dated 1817, appears to have
been published in December 1816).

I (a) Subgenus Galaxias Scott, 1936, Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. (1935):
88. Orthotype Esox truttaceus Cuvier, (1816).

I (b) Subgenus Agalaxis Scott, 1936, ibid., :105. Orthotype Cobitis zebratus
Castelnau, 1861. (See genus XII).

Hl. Mesites Jenyns, 1842, Zool. Voy. Beagle, Fish., iv: 118. Logotype
Mesites attenuatus Jenyns, 1842. Preoccupied by Mesites Schonherr, 1838
(Coleoptera).

Ul. Neochanna Ginther, 1867, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), XX:305.
Haplotype Neochanna apoda Giinther, 1867.

IV, Austrocobitis Ogilby, 1899, Proc. Linn. ‘Soc. N.S.W., xxiv:158.
Substitute for Mesites Jenyns, 1842, preoccupied. Logotype Mesites attenuatus
Jenyns, 1842.

V. Brachygalaxias Eigenmann, 1928, Mem. Nat. Acad. Sci. Washington,
xx1i:49. Haplotype Galaxias bullocki Regan, 1908.

VI. Paragalaxias Scott, 1935, Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. (1934):41.
Orthotype Paragalaxias shannonensis Scott, 1935.

VII. Nesogalaxias Whitley, 1935, Vict. Nat., lii, 3:42. Logotype Galaxias
neo-caledonicus Weber & De Beaufort, 1913. (Trivial name rendered there,
as by most authors, neocaledonicus).

VII. Lyragalaxias Whitley, 1935, ibid.; pl. iii, fig. 5. Logotype Galaxias
o’connori Ogilby, 1912. (Trivial name rendered there, as by most authors,
ocennori).

IX. Querigalaxias Whitley, 1935, ibid.; pl. iii, fig. 9. Logotype Galaxias
dissimilis Regan, 1906.

X. Saxilaga Scott, 1936, Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. (1935):105. Ortho-
type Galaxias cleaveri Scott, 1934.

X. (a) Subgenus Saxilaga Scott, 1936, ibid. :106. Orthotype Galaxias
cleaveri Scott, 1934

SCOTT 245

X. (a). Subgenus Saxilaga Scott, 1936, ibid. :106. Orthotype Galaxias
cleaveri Scott, 1934.
(b). Subgenus Lixagasa Scott, 1936, ibid. :110. Orthotype, Galaxias

burrowsius Phillipps, 1926.

XI. Lepidogalaxias Mees, 1961, Journ. Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 44, 2: 33,
fet ple

XII. Agalaxis. This subgenus of Galaxias (I[a]) ‘is here given full
generic status.

GENUS I — GALAXIAS CUVIER, (1816)

Galaxias stands as the foundation genus of the family; and calls for

no special comment here.
SUBGENERA I (a) GALAXIAS, I (b) AGALAXIS

In his revision of the Galaxiidae, for which he had available nearly two
hundred specimens, Regan (1906) noted 23 species as having the pelvic
7-rayed, 3 (the 2 South African species and his Galaxias dissimilis, described
in this paper) as having it 6-rayed; no intraspecific variation being recorded.
In a paper containing a synoptic survey of established and new taxons Scott
(1936), making free use of reported ray counts, suggested, inter alia, two
subgenera, Agalaxis (for South African forms: G. dissimilis referred to sub-
family Paragalaxiinae) differing from the typical subgenus in having 6, instead
of 7, pelvic rays. However, it has since been demonstrated by Stokell (1940,
1945) that the pelvic count (a specific, even generic, constant in most teleosts)
is subject in the present family to considerable individual variation, even to the
extent of disparity in fins of the same fish (a condition not unusual in many
fishes in the other paired fin). The original diagnoses of the subgenera, based
solely on the criteria of 7 or 6 pelvic rays, are hence clearly invalid. Nevertheless,
it remains true that the forms concerned are separable into two groups, co-
extensive with the proposed subgenera, one group having a modal pelvic ray
number of 7 (a mode of 6 has been reported for the type material of
Galaxias divergens Stokell, 1959), the other a modal pelvic ray number of 6.
(it may be observed, in passing, that counts of 5 and 8, reported by Stokell,
would formally exclude fish exhibiting them, not only from the proposed
subgenera, but also from the family as defined by Regan). Moreover, the
South African forms that constituted the subgenus Agalaxis are now known
(Barnard, 1943) to differ in features other than pelvic formula from typical
Galaxias. They have been referred by Stokell (1950) to Paragalaxias. Reasons
are adduced below for regarding this action as unwarranted, and it is here
proposed they should remain in (and continue to constitute) Agalaxis, which
is now to be elevated to a genus. The subgenus Galaxias thus comes to be
abandoned.

GENUS II. MESITES JENYNS, 1842.

Mesites—comprising M. attenuatus (the one widely ranging Galaxiid);
M. maculatus, M. alpinus, both from Tierra del Fuego; all three newly
described from Beagle material—was established without formal distinction from,
and apparently in ignorance of Cuvier’s Galaxias. Mesites falls, preoccupied: for
the status of some species referred to it see Austrocobitis, below.

GENUS III. NEOCHANNA GUNTHER, 1867

Of the characters by which Neochanna was originally distinguished from
Galaxias—(a) no pelvics, (b) teeth in jaws compressed, (c) palate toothless
[Berg (1940)—-American-issued edition in Russian and English, 1947 seen; Berg’s
1955 paper in Russian is not available to the writer—who cites Regan (1913:289)
is in error in specifying for his order Galaxiiformes “entopterygoid toothed”],
(d) pyloric appendage single, (e) gill-rakers widely set—only (a) and possibly
(c) remain valid, (c) falling if Saxilaga possesses an edentulous palate and is
subsumed in Galaxias. [The “palatine bone” of Giinther (1866), dentigerous in
most Galaxiids, is commonly spoken of as the entopterygoid: by Regan (1913;
not 1906), Chapman (1944), Gosline (1960) and some others it is identified
as the mesopterygoid]. Neither (b) nor (e) holds for N. diversus Stokell, 1949;
while as for (d) 2 caeca have been found (Stokell, 1945:138) in N. apoda and
0, 1, 2, 3 (with intraspecific variation) occur in Galaxias.

246 THE GENERA OF THE GALAXITIDAE

A distinction that has not hitherto received notice is provided by the main
caudal rays, which in Neochanna (at any rate in N. apoda) are variable in
number, with a tendency to be fewer than in Galaxias. In species of Galaxias
examined there regularly occur, in addition to a variable number of short
and procurrent rays, 14 branched rays, flanked above and below by one large
unbranched ray (as an occasional individual variation, a normally simple ray
may exhibit incipient division, other minor variations possibly occur.) A count
of branched rays in British Museum specimens of Neochanna apoda gave 12
(Dr. P. H. Greenwood, in litt.); 7 examples in the Dominion Museum, Wellington
were found (Mr. J. Moreland, in litt.) to possess 12 (2 individuals), 13 (3),
14 (2). Gosline (1960) has shown the caudal skeleton, including the quota
of branched rays, is of considerable diagnostic importance in the isospondylous
fishes studied by him, and it may well be that in Galaxiid genera the ray
pattern is of taxonomic value. The arrangement exhibited by Galaxias is
presumably the primitive one, divergences from it (all so far observed reductions)
representing specialisations.

GENUS IV. AUSTROCOBITIS Ogilby, 1899

In concluding his description of Galaxias occidentalis from Western
Australia Ogilby (1899:158) observed it “belongs to the group of which
Mesites attenuatus is the type, and which differs from the typical Galaxias
(type alepidotus) in its slender subterete or slightly compressed body, small head
which is as wide or a little wider than deep, small mouth, fewer (six or seven)
branchiostegals, small fins and emarginate caudal’; and he suggests Austrocobitis
(substitute for Mesites Jenyns, preoccupied) for this group. While Ogilby’s
species certainly departs noticeably in general facies from G. alepidotus
(probably = G. argenteus), the latter is itself neither morphologically central
in, nor formally typical of, Galaxias; and an analysis of the features of the
Western Australian fish yields no good reason for regarding it as other than
congeneric with the general corpus of Australian species referred to that
genus.

Austrocobitis has been rejected by Regan (1906), Stokell (1945)—the
latter’s discussion being weakened by comparative citation of two species not
belonging to Galaxias s. str——and by most Australian authors, e.g., Waite (1921),
Lord & Scott (1924), McCulloch (1929), Mack (1936), Munro (1957), Scott
(1960); but is retained by Whitley, though in a form other than that accepted
by Ogilby (G. occidentalis being excluded), and in a more restricted sense than
the original connotation of Mesites (including only the type species, M. attentu-
atus). Austrocobitis “differs from Galaxias in having 12 to 15 branched rays in
the anal fin intsead of a less number, and more than 60 vertebrae” (Whitley,
1960:28). The large complement of branched rays is indeed not fully matched
elsewhere, though Jenyn’s other two species have 11-14, 12-13 (Regan, 1906),
while counts of 12 have been reported for various species (e.g., G. truttaceus,
G. fasciatus, G. argenteus): among Australian species of Galaxias s. str. G.
findlayi possesses 60-61 vertebrae, while extralimital forms with high counts
include G. fasciatus 61, G. brevipinnis 64 (Regan, 1906) or 59-62 (Stokell,
1954), G. campbelli 59-64.

The Australian representative is now listed by Whitley (1964:35) as
Austrocobitis attenuatus scriba (Cuvier & Valenciennes, 1846).

GENUS V. BRACHYGALAXIAS Eigenmann, 1928

Eigenmann’s genus, established for G. bullocki Regan, 1908 from Chile,
the only Galaxiid then known with anal origin regularly cephalad of dorsal
origin, was expressly rejected by Mack (1936:101) and Stokell (1945:134)
and was not accepted by Shipway (1953:176): it was held in suspense by
Scott (1936:88). However, examination of a paratype of Mack’s Galaxias
pusillus led the last-named (1942:55) to refer it to Brachygalaxias, and to call
attention to seven points of agreement between the Victorian and Chilean fishes:
(a) pelvic with fewer than 7 rays, (b) anal situated partly in front of dorsal,
(c) vent located about at beginning of last third of standard length, (d) small
size, (e) large eye, (f) longitudinal colour pattern, (g) small number of myomeres
(B. bullocki ca 39, B. pusillus ca 38: earliest notice of this feature). Later,
apparently independently, Stokell (1954:411) arrived at the same conclusion

SCOTT 247

of congenericity, adding as points of agreement (h) presence of keel between
pelvic base and vent, (i) low egg number, and substituting for myomere count
the more satisfactory feature number of vertebrae. Brachygalaxias would appear
to be securely established: most recent Australian authors accept it (e.g., Munro,
1957, Whitley, 1964), though Mees (1961) preferred not to give an opinion
as to its validity.

The function of the characteristic keel—reminiscent of, though less
pronounced than, the keel in the Retropinnidae (a family associated with
Galaxiidae and MHaplochitonidae to form Gosline’s “southern group” of
Osmeroidae)—remains unknown. The structure varies considerably in develop-
ment, extending through almost the full pelvic-anal interval in B. pusillus
(Mack, 1936) and in an undescribed Tasmanian form, but exhibiting significant
elevation only in the hinder half of that interval in B. nigrostriatus (Shipway,
1953) and in another (undescribed) Western Australian species: in the genotype
the ridge attains its full, quite moderate height in the last one-fourth or one-
third of the short space between fin origins, lying behind tips of pelvics. It does
not seem tc have been remarked upon that some individuals of Galaxias
attenuatus possess quite a pronounced keel running forward from just in advance
of the vent and at times extending one-fourth of the distance towards pelvic
base.

Of the 9 lettered items above (b) and (h) are constant within Brachygalaxias,
and occur elsewhere only as an individual variation (as regards (b) this
arrangement is noted (Stokell, 1949:495) for some examples of Neochanna
diversus, and in a series of 20 South African Galaxiids, labelled as 10 of each
species, received by the Queen Victoria Museum, Launceston from the South
African Museum, Cape Town, there are 2 individuals with anal slightly earlier
than dorsal; as regards (h), see preceding paragraph); (f) is paralleled (in so
far as some markings are longitudinal; the patterns differing) only in Lepido-
galaxias (which, however, may not belong to the Galaxiidae; see below);
(a) is shared (as a norm) with all genera with pelvics except Galaxias (a mode
of 6 is reported in the type material of G. divergens Stokell, 1959), (d), (e),
(g), (i) with Paragalaxias and Agalaxis (Lepidogalaxias: (d), not (e), no data
for (g), (i) ), and (c) with Agalaxis, Lepidogalaxias.

Caudal ray patterns are unstable (see Part II), the number of branched rays
in four species being as follows: in 10 British Museum examples of B. bullocki
11(2), 12(3), 13(3), 14(2) (Dr. P. H. Greenwood, in litt); in figure of holotype
of B. pusillus 9, in material examined by the writer 8-10; in 8 specimens of an
undescribed Western Australian species 10(7), 11(1):; in 63 individuals of an
undescribed Tasmanian form 5(1), 6(2), 7(3), 8(12), 9(30), 10(14), 11(0),
12(1), the series providing 14 numerically, 28 spatially, different combinations
of simple, once-branched, twice-branched, partly twice-branched rays.

GENUS VI. PARAGALAXIAS Scott, 1935

To facilitate the discussion it is expedient to reproduce here the original
diagnosis: “Differs from Galaxias and Neochanna in having the teeth in the jaws
biserial; also differs from the members of both genera except Galaxias dissimilis
Regan (see Remarks), in having the dorsal fin inserted well forward, at about
level of ventrals. Vertebrae fewer than in other members of the family.
Ventrals six-rayed. Size apparently small.” The type material of the orthotype,
P. shannonensis, was collected in the fast-running stretch of the Shannon River,
about half a mile long, between Great Lake and Shannon Lagoon, Westmoreland/
Cumberland, Tasmania (for ecological features of habitat see Tillyard (1933) ):
species known to occur also in Shannon Lagoon, Great Lake, Arthur’s Lakes
(unpublished data).

The genus has had a chequered history; to which the present communi-
cation adds a chapter: noteworthy events include the following. 1906 Regan
described from a unique holotype (origin unknown; Regan gave New South
Wales?, possibly because the specimen was received from the Australian
Museum, Sydney; Queensland, Tasmania since suggested) Galaxias dissimilis,
trenchantly separated from Galaxiids then known by having dorsal origin
above the (6-rayed) pelvic. 1921 McCulloch (p. 28) remarked Regan’s fish

248 THE GENERA OF THE GALAXIIDAE

“is perhaps merely an abnormal specimen.” 1933 Whitley made available
(pl. xii, fig. 2) a sketch by Regan. 1935 Paragalaxias established. 1935 Whitley
proposed Querigalaxias for G. dissimilis, without diagnosis, but with reproduction
(pl. iii, fig. 9) of Regan’s sketch, 1936 Scott proposed subfamily Paragalaxiinae
for P. shannonensis and Regan’s species, the generic status of the latter remaining
in doubt, an examination of the holotype, made by J. R. Norman at Scott’s
request, having found teeth in the jaws to be in a single series (leaving, at this
stage, Querigalaxias, when formally completed, available for G. dissimilis). 1940
Phillipps (p. 39), apparently by a lapsus calami, referred to Paragalaxias his
Galaxias burrowsius (trivial name emended (1927: 11) to burrowsii: species
made type (Scott, 1936) of subgenus Lixagasa of genus Saxilaga). 1942
attention was drawn to Phillipps’ action (Scott :55). 1943 Barnard rendered
non-significant two important points in the original diagnoses of Paragalaxias and
the Paragalaxiinae, first, by reporting the existence in the Southern African
Galaxiids referred in Scott’s key (1936:87) to Galaxias (Agalaxis), Galaxiinae,
of a low vertebral count (his figures (39) 40 (41) ); secondly, by showing
that in the fish examined by him (and, as Stokell subsequently reported
(1950:1) in Neochanna apoda and five New Zealand species of Galaxias
investigated by Barnard at his request) an additional row of teeth (decumbent;
interpreted as a replacer row) occurs in the jaws (there are also extra lingual
and pterygoidal rows), their presence being rendered apparent by the use
of a clearing agent (one was employed in the original examination of P.
shannonensis; unpublished item), thus making it evident that the traditional
specification of teeth in the jaws of Galaxias as uniserial is to be taken as referring
to erect functional teeth only, and that the description of a biserial dentition in
Paragalaxias mistakenly directed attention to the normal second, decumbent
row as a novel feature. 1945 Stokell observed of Regan’s species “the single
specimen on which it is based appears to be a deformed one” (p. 128), and in a
schedule of genera and subgenera (p. 134) listed Paragalaxias under a
heading “Genus Excluded from the Galaxiidae.” 1950 in a revision of Paragalaxias
the same author (a) reinstated this genus in the Galaxiidae; (b) relegated to
Paragalaxias the South African Galaxiids Cobitis zebratus Castelnau, 1861 and
C. punctifer Castelnau, 1861 (treating the second as a synonym of the first);
(c) synonymised P. shannonensis with Galaxias dissimilis, thus making the latter
the genotype. In catalogues of Australian fishes the synonymisation of Regan’s
and Scott’s species has been rejected by Munro (1957:33, figs 228, 229), but
accepted by Whitley (1964:35): the latter author, however. has continued (1956
a:34) to regard the South African and Tasmanian fish as non-congeneric,
listing Cobitis zebratus under Agalaxis, C. punctifer under Galaxias. Reasons
are advanced below for regarding both of Stokell’s propositions (b) (main
clause) and (c) as invalid.

Possible zoogeographic implications of the posited occurrence in, and
restriction to, the Tasmanian highlands and the South West Cape region of
South Africa of an apparently highly specialised Galaxiid genus are clearly
of considerable moment: maintaining his assumption of congenericity, Stokell
(1953) has discussed the distributional problem thus presented. In a recent review
of the Tasmanian fauna Guilér (1965), presumably accepting Stokell’s
taxonomic conclusions, states Tasmania has no endemic genus of freshwater
fishes (the observation being correct of course if Regan’s specimen had an
extra-Tasmanian origin).

STATUS OF PARAGALAXIAS AND AGALAXIS

(i) Location of dorsal fin. Of the two specifications given in the entry in
the diagnosis of Paragalaxias “the dorsal fin well forward, at about level of
ventrals,” the first may conveniently be spoken of as quantitative, the second as
qualitative. By directing attention to, and casting new light on, the quantitative
clause Stokell (1950) arrived at two species of Paragalaxias: P. dissimilis
(Regan) (incorporating P. shannonensis), with dorsal inserted at 0.54-0.59 of
standard length, P. zebratus (Castelnau) (incorporating Cobitis punctifer) at
0.55-0.63.

SCOTT 249

The qualitative aspect is wholly ignored in Stokell’s paper. With dorsal
originating at 1-2% of standard length behind pelvic origin (P. shannonensis)
and at 9% in advance of pelvic origin (Regan’s specimen) the specification of
dorsal origin “at about level of ventrals” surely carries a significant connotation
not reasonably applicable to any other known Galaxiids.

It is pointed out in Section II, below, that the similarity of an early
dorsal insertion observable in Paragalaxias and Agalaxis is the outcome of
different morphological trends, involving in the former a relative forward
translocation of the dorsal unaccompanied by a like movement of the anal,
in the latter a relative forward migration of both fins. The situation in Agalaxis,
but not in Paragalaxias, is thus formally capable of being accounted for by a
simple relative decrease in precaudal length; a development that the relative
forward displacement also of the pelvic (Table II) suggests has indeed occurred.

(ii) Reduction in number of vertebrae, pelvic rays, ova. Reductions (very
marked for vertebrae and ova) below the Galaxias norms for these features are
adduced in Stokell’s 1950 paper as further evidence of the congenericity of the
Tasmanian species (plus G. dissimilis) and the South African fish. These three
characters (at the same levels of magnitude) are shared with the other small-
species genus Brachygalaxias: see Section II.

(iii) Dorsal base relative to anal base. The Central Tasmanian fish and
G. dissimilis are unique in the Galaxiidae in having dorsal base regularly and
significantly longer than anal base. In the type material of P. shannonensis
the ratio of dorsal base to anal base is 1.6-2.1, mean 1.93 + 0.08, in the
holotype of G. dissimilis 2.4; whereas in our 20 examples of Agalaxis it is 0.7-1.0,
mean 0.89 + 0.03.

(iv). Number of dorsal and anal rays. The South African fish follow
the usual Galaxiid pattern in having dorsal rays fewer than, or as many as,
anal rays. Thus Barnard (1943) records “D. 3-4, 8-9; A. 3-4, 8-10 (total in
both cases 11-13)”: in our 20 specimens dorsal rays number 10(4), 11(9),
12(7), mean 11.15, anal 10(2), 11(7), 12(), 14(2); mean 11.65 (mo
individual with dorsal count exceeding anal). Fish here referred to Paragalaxias
are unique in having dorsal rays consistently and noticeably more numerous
than anal rays; the types of P. shannonensis having dorsal 14(4), 15(3), mean
14.3, anal 9(6), 11(1), mean 9.3, and Regan’s type 13 dorsal (Stokell (1950)
counts 14) 9 anal.

(v). Cephalic pores. The cephalic pores of the Galaxiidae have not been
systematically investigated; but available evidence suggests certain patterns
(rather similar) are characteristic of, or strongly modal in, the genera. The South
African fish differ from the Tasmanian thus: 2 pores beneath lower lip in
latter (presence noted by Stokell (1950:2) ) are missing in the former (absence
correctly indicated in figure by Barnard (1943: fig. 25) ); pore internal to
posterior nostril is confluent with nostril only in Paragalaxias (both species);
an inconstant (when present usually small) pore lying in Agalaxis below and in
advance of a single constant suborbital pore has not been detected in Tasmanian
Paragalaxias; in Paragalaxias the upper two pores bordering the preoperculum
occasionally from a single slot. See also Section II.

STATUS OF P. SHANNONENSIS AND P. DISSIMILIS

As noted above, the two species have been synonymised by Stokell (Regan’s
species thus becoming the genotype);_but they are clearly distinct. P. dissimilis
is the sole known Galaxiid with dorsal originating in advance of pelvic
(in the unique holotype, of standard length 65 mm., dorsal precedes pelvic
by 6 mm., equal to length of snout, or anal base). In P. shannonensis dorsal
begins 1-2% of standard length behind pelvic. This feature alone clearly calls
for specific distinction. Other differences, of varying significance, found in
P. dissimilis include: pelvic insertion relatively more caudad (at 0.66 of
standard length; cf Stokell’s diagnostic 0.52-0.54: hence fish nominated by
Stokell as holotype cannot, in respect of this feature, enter the species (or
genus) as defined by him), anal rather more caudad; dorsal base longer
relative to anal base, head larger, snout longer, eye smaller, mouth larger,
caudal peduncle shorter and deeper. Some of these features are known to be

250 THE GENERA OF THE GALAXIIDAE

correlated with overall size, and Regan’s specimen is larger than the largest
recorded Tasmanian fish: however, extrapolations of significant regression
equations for the first two items listed above yield predicted values well below
those found in P. dissimilis.

The genus Paragalaxias thus includes no South African representatives. It
comprises two species, P. shannonensis Scott, 1935, the genotype, recorded only
from Tasmania, and P. dissimilis (Regan, 1906), of unknown origin. Agalaxis
is considered further under a separate heading.

GENUS VII. NESOGALAXIAS Whitley, 1935.

This name was proposed, without diagnosis, for Galaxias neo-caledonicus
Weber & De Beaufort, 1913, from New Caledonia (trivial name now usually
rendered without hyphen). With only the figure by Whitley (1935, pl. iii, fig. 4)
before him, Stokell (1945:130) called attention to the large head (about 3 in
standard length) and suggested the possibility of deformity. No feature in the
original description would seem to preclude attribution to Galaxias. However,
no useful opinion on the status of the species can be expressed without a study
of specimens. If further examination establishes generic distinctness, Nesogalaxias
is available when formally completed.

GENUS VIII. LYRAGALAXIAS Whitley, 1935

This name, appearing only in the legend to the figure (pl. iii, fig. 5), was
proposed in the same paper as the last genus for Galaxias o’connori Ogilby, 1912
(trivial name generally rendered oconnori), from Lyra, South Queensland.
The species has since been reported (Whitley, 1955:154, fig. 2) also from
New South Wales. The status of G. oconnori has been discussed by Stokell
(1945:130). The author of the genus has since abandoned it (1955:154):(the
species does not appear in his 1964 list, having been synonymised with Galaxias
kayi Ramsay & Ogilby, 1886 by Whitley, 1957: 57, fig. 2).

GENUS IX. QUERIGALAXIAS Whitley, 1935

Querigalaxias was proposed, in the legend to the plate (pl. ili, fig. 9),
in the same paper as Nesogalaxias and Lyragalaxias, for Galaxias dissimilis
Regan, 1906. A supposed difference in dentition between Regan’s species and
Paragalaxias shannonensis led Scott (1936:111) to observe Querigalaxias would
be available for the former on formal completion. However, with Barnard’s
demonstration, noted above, that the extra row of teeth reported in Paragalaxias
is merely a replacer row, occurring in all Galaxiids in which it has been
looked for, it became evident Regan’s fish is to be referred, as indicated
above, to that genus.

GENUS X. SAXILAGA Scott, 1936

Since the establishment of Saxilaga (with subgenera Saxilaga, Tasmania;
Lixagasa, New Zealand) further investigations have shown that certain diagnostic
features originally described as absolute probably are not so. Descriptions of all
three species specify the palate as edentulous. However, in specimens ascribed,
with some dubiety, to S. burrowsius (Phillipps, 1926) (of which no additional
strictly topotypical material appears to be available) Stokell has found
entopterygoidal teeth “usually present, but weak and inconstant, 0-3 on each
bone.” Again, the “3 to 4 rows of large teeth on the tongue” of the original
account of that species was employed (“lingual teeth in more than two series”) in
the diagnosis of Lixagasa, of which subgenus it was made the type. However,
Stokell reported that in his material just mentioned the lingual teeth “may
be disposed in two rows, four rows or any intermediate arrangement’— the
minimum being the number usual in Galaxias. A pelvic ray count of 5
reported by Phillipps was made a criterion of the subgenus: but in 10
individuals of his material Stokell (1945:125) found 5 with 5 rays, 2 with 5-6,
2 with 6-6*, 1 with 6*6* (the asterisk indicating inclusion of one rudimentary
ray). If Saxilaga is to be maintained, therefore, modal and not absolute criteria
are to be accepted for these three features (a course in line with the contemporary
population concept, which replaces the older typological concept, of a species).

SCOTT 251

The three species at present ascribed to Saxilaga—Stokell, who earlier
(1945:134) listed the genus as “not recognised”, has mooted the possibility
(1959:268) that the South American Galaxias globiceps Eigenmann, 1928,
may belong here—exhibit these common features: elongate body; small eye;
small head; reduced number of pelvic rays (modally 5 or 6); paired fins short;
vertical fins low, squarish, their rays compressed, with or without reduction
in branching (this last clause applicable also to pectoral); anal continuous
or subcontinuous with caudal ridge, which is well developed, high; caudal
rounded or subtruncate; fish heavily pigmented. Taken singly, most, if not
all, of these features can be matched in various species of Galaxias: taken
collectively, they appear to constitute a significant constellation, and a
competent systematist handling aduJt material would probably relegate it,
without undue difficulty, either to Galaxias or to Saxilaga.

On our present knowledge, the genus is thus probably worthy of retention.
The abolition of an absolute distinction in dentition from Galaxias might suggest
Saxilaga would better be regarded as a subgenus of Galaxias. On the other
hand, the occurrence, within Saxilaga as constituted, of two groups, at present
accorded subgeneric status, that differ at least modally in pelvic ray number
and in lingual dentition, as well as in distribution, would point towards the
present treatment as more convenient. The genus is rejected by Stokell, but
accepted by Munro and Whitley: the last-named treats Lixagasa as a genus
(1956 a). An erroneous ascription of Saxilaga (Lixagasa) burrowsius to Para-
galaxias has been noticed in the discussion on that genus.

Tasmanian material published on is confined to the holotype (now lost)
of S. (S.) cleaveri (Scott), 1934, and the holotype and one paratype of
S. (S.) anguilliformis Scott, 1936. Additional Saxilaga material, however, has
now become available; detailed examination of this should throw fresh light on
the problems of the genus. Mr. B. C. Mollison, the collector of nearly all the
specimens, informs me he has observed ecological and behaviouristic differences
between these fish and typical Galaxias.

A statement in the description of S. (S.) anguilliformis on the number of
pores and myomeres has been incorrectly interpreted by Barnard (1943:231)
as a count of 73 myomeres. Examination of the holotype shows that the
myomeres (which are unusually difficult to count) number about 63.

GENUS XI. LEPIDOGALAXIAS Mees, 1961

A satisfactory determination of the status of the remarkable scaled
Lepidogalaxias salamandroides Mees, 1961 from the south-west of Western
Australia calls for further investigation, in particular a full osteological
examination. The present provisional remarks are based on the published data—
the describer’s account and illustrations and a sketch provided by Whitley
(1960:27)—and an examination of the external features of a single topotypical
individual. The writer’s present inclination is to regard the fish as lying outside
the Galaxiidae: though if it is to be indeed excluded from this family, he
can at present suggest no established group to which it could be referred; a
new family is perhaps called for.

Points suggestive (at varying levels of significance) of non-Galaxiid affinities
include the following [the normal Galaxiid specification being noted, where it
seems expedient, in square brackets]: (a) presence of scales; (b) relatively
high implantation of pelvic, such that when fins are casually adpressed they
lie along flank [along ventral surface]; (c) small number (4) of pelvic rays
[usually 5-7] and their simple character; (d) disposition of nostrils (this
differs in the specimen from the figured condition (Mees, 1961: fig. 1 a),
the anterior nostril lying in our example near level of middle of eye, the
posterior slightly above level of pupil, bringing the general arrangement
closer to, though not identical with, the normal Galaxiid pattern than that
shown in the illustration); (e) anterior nostril a simple opening [tubular]; (f)
position and general form of mouth, in particular, first, the subhorizontal gape
(backwards and slightly upwards in Mees’ figure, backwards and _ slightly
downwards in Whitley’s figure and specimen) [more oblique], and, secondly,
the structure and relations of the upper lip, the superior margin of which is

232 THE GENERA OF THE GALAXTIDAE

seen in both figures to continue forward right to profile of snout (fish in lateral
view) and is found in the specimen to be continuous across tip of snout, in
traversing which the shallow sulcus delimiting it curves boldly caudad, making
median depth of lip much greater than lateral depth, and lending the whole
mouth, seen from in front, quite a turtle-like appearance [hind border of
lip ceases on each side just internad of anterior nostril]; (g) reported presence
of vomerine teeth; (h) reported absence of lingual teeth; (i) absence, as
reported, and as found in specimen, of cephalic pores [one of the original
specifications (Cuvier, 1816) of “Les Galaxies” is “Les cétés de leur téte
offrent des pores”; pores also regularly occur on the top of the head]; (j) presence
of accessory structures near vent—in one type specimen (female) in the form
of a “rodlike tubular organ” (ovipositor?) protruding from vent (fig. 1 a; also
indicated in Whitley’s figure), and in several other type specimens, at least
one of which is a male, in the form of two pairs of “dermal flaps” partly encasing
anal fin (figs. 1 b, 1 c); (k) relationships, on ventral surface, of the opercles, the
borders of which, in advance of the branchiostegal membranes, converge in
the specimen, more or less evenly, to meet, or virtually to meet, at a point [in
Galaxiids examined the borders run forward widely separated by the tongue-
like anterior portion of the isthmus (usually somewhat inflated, its median
bulge below level of lower lip), which, in advancing, broadens somewhat, so
that the inferior margins of the subopercula come at their anterior terminations,
where they overlie the chin, to lie well apart, being separated modally by about
one-third of width of head here]; (/) slight development of ridges along
caudal peduncle].

Some of these features could well represent specialisations of a Galaxiid
norm—and the writer would not necessarily exclude from this category item
(a); both naked and scaled forms within a family occurring in a number of
cases—and some entries may be based on imperfect observation or incorrect
interpretation. However, it would seem difficult to harmonize, in particular,
items (e)-(k) with our present concept of the Galaxiidae.

A colour transparency of a living Lepidogalaxias (conspecific?) kindly
made available by Mr. B. Shipway, the discoverer of Brachygalaxias in Western
Australia, presents some striking features. The fish is balancing, just above and
subparallel with the substratum, on the pelvic, the detectable portion of which
consists of short, stoutish, seemingly rigid, widely spaced rays or ray segments;
dorsal is fanned out, width exceeding twice base, with 4 of the 6 rays directed
forwards, proximal part of first at an angle of about 45° to dorsal profile of
fish; no longitudinal colour band, but about a dozen dark brown saddles and
some other dark brown markings on a lighter brown background; some
whitish spots on anterior part of flank; conspicuous dark spot, partly encircled
by lighter, on operculum.

GENUS XII. AGALAXIS Scott, 1936

The affinities of this genus—established as a subgenus of Galaxias solely on
the ground of its 6-rayed pelvic and its distribution; formally “not recognised”
by Stokell (1945); later incorporated by the same writer (1950) in Paragalaxias
—have been discused above under Paragalaxias. In 1943 Barnard observed
(p. 231), “If the anatomy of the South African species had been better known,
it is probable that Scott would have suggested full generic rank for Agalaxis.”
Generic rank is here proposed for it, a formal rediagnosis being given below.

Diagnosis: No scales. Teeth in jaws and on entopterygoids uniserial (with
decumbent inner* row), conical; lingual teeth biserial with two outer decumbent
TOWS).
Vertebrae 38-41. Anal base longer than, or equal to, dorsal base; the fins
with an equal, or subequal, number of rays (ii-iv, 8-10, total 10-14). Dorsal
largely over anal, originating at about (0.55) 0.59-0.67 of standard length.
Pelvic rays modally 6. Branched caudal rays modally 12. Pores on each lateral

*Outer, reported by Barnard (1943:232) is a slip; corrected, at Barnard’s
request, in Stokell (1950:1).

SCOTT 253

half of head 14, sometimes 15; disposed as figured by Barnard (1943, fig. 25);
pore near posterior nasal opening not confluent with it; no inframandibular
pores. Branchiostegals 6-7. Gillrakers on anterior arch about 2-3 + 9-10. Size
small (greatest recorded total length 75 mm.); sexually mature at about
40 mm.

Orthotype: Cobitis zebratus Castelnau, 1861 = Agalaxis zebratus (Castel-
nau, 1861).

Scope: Comprises Cobitis zebratus Castelnau, 1861, C. punctifer Castelnau,
1861, Galaxias capensis Steindachner, 1894, G. dubius Gilchrist & Thompson,
1917—of which the third and fourth are almost certainly synonyms of the
second, which is treated by some authors, e.g., Stokell (1950) as synonymous
with the first, but regarded by others, e.g., Regan (1906), Boulenger (1915),
Barnard (1947), Jubb (1963, 1964) as distinct.

Distribution: As far as is known, endemic to South Africa, where it is
the sole Galaxiid genus.

Affinities: Agalaxis differs trenchantly from Galaxias, Neochanna and
Saxilaga in its small number of vertebrae. From genera with a comparable
vertebral complement it is distinguished thus: from Lepidogalaxias by absence
of scales, and of accessory organs near vent, different dentition, tubular anterior
nostril; from Brachygalaxias by having dorsal origin modally ‘cephalad, instead
of regularly caudad, of anal origin, absence of pelvic-anal keel; from
Paragalaxias by having dorsal base largely over anal base (contrast chiefly
over pelvic-anal interval), dorsal (length of base, number of rays) less than
or equal to (contrast notably exceeding) anal, absence of inframandibular
pores (2 present), posterior nostril and adjoining pore separate (confluent).

PART II. — CONVERGENCE AND DIVERGENCE IN CERTAIN GENERA

Of the three chief features employed, in the course of an early attempt
(Scott, 1936:7) at sorting out generic (and subgeneric) relations to distinguish
a proposed subfamily Paragalaxiinae (comprising Paragalaxias shannonensis and
Galaxias dissimilis) from typical Galaxiinae—dorsal inserted about over pelvic,
teeth in jaws biserial or uniserial, vertebrae fewer than 50—the first alone
remains valid, the second being based, as noted above, on a misapprehension,
the third being rendered nugatory by subsequent publication of low vertebral
totals for Brachygalaxias (Scott, 1942; Stokell, 1954) and for Agalaxis (Barnard,
1943). Thus though Paragalaxias still holds a special position as regards the
location (and great development) of the dorsal fin, it is less isolated than was
formerly thought. Indeed, on present knowledge a more natural division
of the family, if one is to be made, would appear to involve the association,
on one hand, of forms with more than 50 vertebrae (Galaxias, Saxilaga,
Neochanna) and, on the other hand, of forms with fewer than 50 vertebrae
(Brachygalaxias, Paragalaxias, Agalaxis): Lepidogalaxias (with—unpublished
datum—about 40 myomeres), if included in Galaxiidae, stands apart on other
grounds.

The genera, other than Lepidogalaxias, with few vertebrae appear to present
a case of convergent evolution following on radiation. Paragalaxias is recorded
only from Tasmania (locality of P. dissimilis unknown), Agalaxis is endemic
to South Africa, Brachygalaxias occurs in South America and Australia (Victoria,
Western Australia, Tasmania). Among recent forms Galaxias presumably
remains closest to the primitive stock; the only known fossil Galaxiid, G. +
kaikorai Whitley, 1956, from deposits near Dunedin regarded as late Pliocene
exhibiting (Stokell, 1945:135, pl. 11, 12) no more than specific differences
from existing species. (Berg, 1940 states the Galaxiidae show some relation
to the Eocene Thaumaturidae). Divergences from a Galaxias norm presented
by all three genera are set out in Table 1.

254 THE GENERA OF THE GALAXIIDAE

TABLE 1

CONVERGENT EVOLUTION IN THE GENERA BRACHYGALAXIAS,
PARAGALAXIAS, AGALAXIS: FEATURES IN WHICH THEY DEPART
FROM GALAXIAS

Reduction in size.

Reduction in number of vertebrae.

Reduction in number of ova.

Migration along anteroposterior axis of one or more of dorsal, anal,
pelvic fins.

Reduction in number of pelvic rays.

Reduction, usually accompanied by instability, in number of branched
caudal rays.

Reduction, with some instability, in cephalic pores.

(Typically) large eye.

oe OS Nes

Some comments on these features: 1, standard length usually less than
75 mm.; 2, 34-44; Galaxias 51-63:3, highest reported 88; one count (unpublished)
in G. attenuatus 11, 856:4, these three genera are convergent in respect of the
occurrence of such migration; they are divergent (Table 2) in respect of its
character: 5, modally 5 or 6; Galaxias modally 7 (a mode of 6 reported for
type material of G. divergens Stokell, 1959) :6, Brachygalaxias 5-14 (see under
that genus), Paragalaxias 11-14, commonly 14, Agalaxis 12; Galaxias 14:7, series
in Galaxias typically includes (a) one suborbital, (b) 2 inframandibular, (c) a
pore between (a) and hind pore of (c); reduction usually occurs in Paragalaxias
by loss of (c), in Agalaxis and Brachygalaxias by loss of both elements of
(b), with (c) inconstant: 8, this feature is not constant.

It will be observed that most of the features in Table 1 represent reductions
on the condition found in Galaxias. At least some of them could well be directly
consequent upon entry 1 or entry 2 (whichever may be considered formally
prior). Thus, for example, with egg not readily efficiently reducible, in view
of physiological and ecological limiting factors, beyond a certain minimum
size, decrease in coelom-volume would entail decrease in egg-number; again,
diminution in absolute size might, in fishes as small as these, tend mechanically
to lead to reduction in caudal ray number.

A concept of Saxilaga as an annectant form between Galaxias and Neochanna
suggested by the writer (1936:106), Phillipps (1940, 39), and others has been
criticized by Stokell (1945:132). Morphologically Saxilaga is demonstrabiy
intermediate between the two other genera: whether or no Galaxias—Saxilaga—
Neochanna is a lineal genetic series is indeed another question.

In the comments on Table 1 attention is called to the fact that dorsal,
anal and pelvic migration takes different forms in the three genera there
considered; translocation occurs also in the other genera. Such “migration”
can of course result from alteration in proportional length of one or more body
tegions (head, trunk, tail), as well as from actual local shifting about a
conventionally fixed morphological landmark, such as the vent. Table 2
summarizes generic trends in regard to dorsal, anal and pelvic location and
records also variation in length of base of vertical fins.

SCOTT 255

TABLE 2

DIVERGENT EVOLUTION IN GALAXIID GENERA: LOCATION AND
SIZE OF FINS

With lengths to dorsal, anal, pelvic fins, and with lengths of dorsal, anal
bases, all expressed as fractions of standard length, as found in Galaxias taken
as norms, the table shows these features for all genera: 0, +, — indicate, for fin
origin, null, caudad, cephalad displacement, respectively, and, for length of
base, equality, increase, decrease, respectively; cases in which species means
lie wholly outside range of species means of Galaxias are marked with an
asterisk.

Length to Origin Length of Base

Pelvic Dorsal Anal
Galaxias
Brachygalaxias

Saxilaga

Paragalaxias

Agalaxis

Neochanna

Lepidogalaxias

With Lepidogalaxias excluded from the discussion, except where expressly
mentioned, it is seen that, in the case of the dorsal-anal complex, six of the
nine formal possibilities have been reified, both dorsal and anal having moved
twice, anal alone twice, dorsal alone once, neither fin once (by definition).
(Lepidogalaxias presents the same pattern as Agalaxis; though the translation
has been, for each fin, only about two-thirds as much). The forward movement
in anal in Brachygalaxias is of the same order of magnitude as its forward
movement in Agalaxis (i.e., Brachygalaxias is, in respect of vertical fin location,
formally Agalaxis devoid of dorsal migration) and its backward movement
in Saxilaga. For the complex dorsal-anal-pelvic there are of course again as
many combinations as there are genera (Lepidogalaxias providing a seventh).
Paragalaxias alone shows caudad movement of the pelvic, though the fin
has moved forward in two genera (and Lepidogalaxias). The triple negative entry
for Agalaxis has already been commented on.

Table 2 exhibits also trends in the relative lengths of the bases of the
vertical fins, with Galaxias as standard. Here only five combinations (with
Lepidogalaxias, six) are represented, the same pattern occurring in Saxilaga
and A etlanit. The anal is seen to have proved more stable in size than the
orsal.

In this table, based on the best data available, generic means only are
taken account of: except for the four variates mentioned in the next sentence,
together with Neochanna anal, species means overlap (though in several
instances only slightly) the wide range of species means of Galaxias. Extreme
variations of generic means on Galaxias mean are much less for lengths to fin

256 THE GENERA OF THE GALAXIIDAE

origins (up to one-fifth greater for dorsal of Paragalaxias, and about the same
less for pelvic of Lepidogalaxias) than for lengths of fin bases (Paragalaxias
dorsal more than double, Lepidogalaxias dorsal little more than one-third of,
Galaxias values).

The complete run of negative values for Lepidogalaxias is of interest as
being at least compatible with the suggestion here put forward that this genus
may lie outside the Galaxiidae. Differences shown in the table between, on the
one hand, Galaxias and Saxilaga, and on the other hand Paragalaxias and
Agalaxis in part restate, in part provide additional grounds for accepting, the
distinctness of the members of each of these pairs of genera recognised earlier
in the paper.

Investigations now in progress should throw light on some of the problems
here left unresolved.

REFERENCES

Barnard, K. H., 1943.—Revision of the indigenous freshwater fishes of the
S.W. Cape region. An. S. Afr. Mus., XXXVI, ii: 101-262, 33 text-figs.

, 1947.—A pictorial guide to the South African fishes marine and
freshwater. Capetown.

Berg, L. S., 1940.—The classification of fishes both recent and fossil. Trav. Inst.
zool. Acad. Sci. U.R.S.S., 5:87-517, 90 figs. (in Russian: not seen).
Edition in Russian and English, 1947, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

, 1955.—Id., 2nd ed. Ibid, 20:1-286, 263 figs. (in Russian: not seen).

Boulenger, G. A., 1915.—Catalogue of the freshwater fishes of Africa in the
British Museum (Natural History), II. London.

Castelnau, F. L., 1861—Mémoire sur les poissons de l'Afrique Australe. Paris.
Chapman, W. M., 1944——On the osteology and relationships of the South
American fish, Aplochiton zebra. J. Morph., 75:149-165, figs. 1-10.

Cuvier, G., 1816.—Le régne animal distribué d’aprés son organisation, ed 1
vol. 2, Paris.

Eigenmann, C. H., 1928.—The freshwater fishes of Chile. Mem. nat. Acad.
Sci. Wash., XXII, 1 (second memoir): 1-81, pls. I-XVI.

Gosline, W. A., 1960.—Contributions towards a classification of modern
isospondylous fishes. Bull. Br. Mus. (nat. Hist.) Zool., 6, 6:327-365,
figs 1-15, diagrs. 1-3.

Guiler, E. R., 1965.—Animals: 36-37, fig. 30, in Atlas of Tasmania (J. L. Davies
editor). Hobart.

Gunther, A., 1866.—Catalogue of the fishes in the collection of the British
Museum, VI. London.

, 1867.—On a new form of mudfish from New Zealand. Ann. Mag. nat.
Hist. (3), XX:305-309, pl. VII.

Jenyns, L., 1842—The zoology of the voyage of H.M.S. Beagle during 1832-36,
IV. London.

Jubb, R. A., 1963.—A revised list of the freshwater fishes of southern Africa.
Ann. Cape Provincial Mus., Wl: 5-39.

, 1964.—Freshwater fishes and drainage basins in southern Africa.
Se Agr ae SCrmOO Salis a2 le

Lord, C. E. & Scott, H. H., 1924.—A synopsis of the vertebrate animals of
Tasmania. Hobart.

McCulloch, A. R., 1921.—List of the fishes and fish-like animals of New South
Wales. Aust. Zool., Il, 2:24-68, pls. IV-XXIV.

, 1929-—A checklist of the fishes recorded from Australia. Mem.
Aust. Mus., V, (IV, index, 1930). Sydney.

SCOTT 257

Mack, G., 1936.—Victorian species of the genus Galaxias with descriptions of
new species. Mem. nat. Mus. Melb., 9: 98-101, figs. 1-2.

Mees, G. F., 1961.—Description of a new fish of the family Galaxiidae from
Western Australia. J. roy. Soc. W. Aust., 44, 2: 33-38, fig. 1, pls. I-II.

Munro, I. S. R., 1957.—Handbook of Australian Fishes—currently (1956+)
appearing serially in Australian Fisheries Newsletter (formerly Fisheries
Newsletter); Galaxiidae: 32-35 (vol. 16, 1-2). Canberra.

Ogilby, J. D., 1899.—Contribution to Australian ichthyology. Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S.W., XXIV, 1: 154-186

Phillipps, W. J., 1926.—New or rare fishes of New Zealand. Trans. Proc. N.Z.
Inst., 56: 529-537, pls. 87-92.

, 1927.—A bibliography of New Zealand fishes, N.Z. Mar. Dept. Fish.
Bull. 1: 1-68.
, 1940.—The fishes of New Zealand, vol. 1. New Plymouth.

Regan, C. T., 1906.—A revision of the fishes of the family Galaxiidae. Proc.
zool. Soc. Lond. (1905), Il: 363-384, pl. X-XIII.

, 1913.—The antarctic fishes of the Scottish national Antarctic expedition.
Trans. roy. Soc. Edinb., 49, 2:229-292, 11 pls., 6 text-figs.

Scott, E. O. G., 1934——Observations on some Tasmanian fishes, with descriptions
of new species. Pap.. Proc. roy. Soc. Tasm. (1933): 31-53, pls. 6-7,
text-figs. 1-2.

, 1935.—On a new genus of fishes of the family Galaxiidae. Pap. Proc.

roy. Soc. Tasm. (1934):41-46, pl. III, text figs. 1-2.
1936.—Observations on fishes of the family Galaxiidae: Part 1.

Pap. Proc. roy. Soc. Tasm. (1935): 85-112, text-figs. 1-4.

, 1942.—Description of Tasmanian mud trout, Galaxias (Galaxias)

upcheri sp. nov.: with a note on the genus Brachygalaxias Eigenmann,

1928. Rec. Queen Vict. Mus., I, 1:51-57, pl. X.

, 1965.—Observations on Galaxiid systematics. Paper (unpublished)

presented at 38th Congress of Aust. and N.Z. Assoc. for Adv. Sci.,

Hobart.

Scott, T. D., 1962—The marine and freshwater fishes of South Australia.
Adelaide.

Shipway, B., 1953.—Additional records of fishes occurring in the freshwaters
of Western Australia. West Aust. Nat., 3, 8:173-177, 1 fig.

Stokell, a aeons new species of Galaxias. Trans. roy. Soc. N.Z., 69:422-424,
ri Sis
, 1945.—The systematic arrangement of the New Zealand Galaxiidae:
Part I, Generic and sub-generic classification. Trans. roy. soc. N.Z.
75, 2:124-135, pls. 8-12.

, 1949.—The systematic arrangement of the New Zealand Galaxiidae:
Part II, specific classification. Trans. roy. soc. N.Z., 77, 4:472-496,
pls. 52-57, text-fig. 1.

, 1950.—A revision of the genus Paragalaxias. Rec. Queen Vict. Mus.,
1-35 ple, Ae

, 1953.—The distribution of the family Galaxiidae. Proc. 7th Pac. Sci.
Congr., 4:48-52.

, 1954.—Contributions to galaxiid taxonomy. Trans. roy. Soc. N.Z.,
82, 2:411-418, pl. 22.

, 1955.—Freshwater Fishes of New Zealand. Christchurch.

, 1959.—Notes on galaxiids and eleotrids with descriptions of new
species. Trans. roy. Soc. N.Z. 87, 3-4:265-269, pls. 21-22.

Tillyard, R. J., 1933.—Report on the problem of trout-food on the lakes
and rivers of Tasmania; Appendix A of salmon and freshwater
fisheries commissioners’ report for year ending 30th June, 1933.
Tasm. parl. Pap., no. 11.

Waite, E. R., 1921.—Hliustrated catalogue of the fishes of South Australia. Rec.
S. Aust. Mus., Wl, 1:1-208, pl. i, text-figs. 1-293.

Weber, M. & De Beaufort L. F., 1913.—Uber neue fische von Neu-Kaledonien.
Zool. Anz. 42: 172-174.

258 THE GENERA OF THE GALAXTIDAE

Whitley, G. P., 1933.—Studies in ichthyology; No. 7. Rec. Aust. Mus. XIX,
1:60-112, pls. 11-15, figs. 1-4.
. Wen Renee Vict. Nat., LI, 3 (169):41-51, pl. I, text figs.
1-2.
, 1955a.—Taxonomic notes on fishes. Proc. roy. zool. Soc. N.S.W. (1953-
4): 44-57, text-figs. 1-8.
————., 1955b.—Opus ccc. Aust. Zool., 12, 2:154-159, text-figs. 1-7.
———, 1956a.—The story of Galaxias. Aust. Mus. Mag., XII, i:30-34, 3 figs.
, 1956b.—List of the native freshwater fishes of Australia. Proc. roy.
zool. Soc. N.S.W. (1954-55): 39-47, figs. 1-16.
, 1957a.—Ichthyological illustrations. Proc. roy. zool. Soc. N.S.W.
(1955-56): 56-71, text-figs. 1-12.
, 1957b.—The Freshwater Fishes of Australia. 7, 8. Australasian AquaLife
2(4):7-10, 3 figs. and 2(5):6-8, 7 figs.
pl ADO. Waring Freshwater Fishes of Australia, Brisbane. And revised
ed., :

, 1964. Presidential address: A survey of Australian ichthyology.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., LXXXIX, 1:11-127.

259

A REVIEW OF THE AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS
(CRUSTACEA, BRACHYURA)

By D. J. G. GRIFFIN

(Zoology Department, University of Tasmania, Hobart)
(Plates XV-XVII & Text-figures 1-3)

SUMMARY

An historical account is given of taxonomic studies of spider or masking
crabs in Australia and overseas. The basis of the review is a key to all but
two of the species known to occur in Australia. The key includes information
on synonymies, geographic and bathymetric distribution and teferences to
descriptions and illustrations of the species. Characters which are important in
the classification are briefly reviewed. Zoogeographical relationships of the
fauna are discussed.

The family Majidae is currently divided into seven subfamilies mainly
on the basis of orbital configuration, form of the rostrum, abdomen and first
pleopod of the male. All but one of the subfamilies are represented in the
Australian fauna which is considered to comprise 95 species in 45 genera.
This is about twice the number of species and genera listed by Haswell (1882c)
in his “Catalogue.” About one-third of the species have been recorded from
Australia on only a single occasion. Numerous genera and species are in need
of detailed reinvestigation.

The fauna is rather clearly partitioned into a tropical group with widespread
Indo-West Pacific relationships and a temperate group related to tropical
Australia and/or the Indo-West Pacific rather than to temperate regions outside
Australia. There are no clear boundaries between these two faunas but rather
quite broad transition areas. Thirty-seven species and five genera, most of
which are temperate, are restricted to Australia.

1. INTRODUCTION

One of the most characteristic features of spider crabs of the family Majidae
is the presence on the carapace and legs of special curled or “hooked” hairs
which aid in the attachment of various kinds of epifauna and flora, especially
seaweeds (for example see McNeill 1923). These organisms are placed in
position by the crab with the aid of the chelipeds which are able to reach up on
to the dorsal surface of the carapace. For this reason majid crabs are sometimes
called “masking crabs” or “seaweed crabs.” Of special interest in these crabs
are the orbits which may be expanded in various ways and surrounded by
a seemingly complex array of spines. The legs are often long and slender and
the carapace usually triangular or pyriform. Spider crabs range in size from a
few millimetres to more than a metre in carapace length and are found in
almost all seas and oceans. They form a relatively important part of the benthos
and may be locally very abundant on the shelf although some species extend
ponsderable distances down the continental slope to depths as great as 1000
athoms.

Substantial revisions of the family Majidae have been undertaken on a
world-wide scale by Dana (1851), Miers (1879c), Alcock (1895) and Balss
(1929). Sakai (1938), Stephensen (1945) and Garth (1958) have adapted
Balss’s scheme to the faunas of Japan, the Iranian Gulf and America respectively.
In the course of these revisions the Majidae have been arranged in several very
different fashions (see historical reviews by Miers 1879c, and Garth 1958).
Early workers such as Dana and Miers grouped the species in several families
and a large number of subfamilies—Dana’s arrangement comprised five families
and no less than 27 subfamilies. Alcock’s was the first of these major revisions
to contain the species in a single family. This was divided into four sub-families
and seven “alliances.” Whereas revisors before Balss had proceeded by
rearrangement of previous schemes, Alcock’s groups of genera were left almost
untouched by Balss, his alliances in some cases being elevated to subfamilial
rank much as they were conceived. The number of subfamilies currently
recognised stands at seven following the work of Garth.

260 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Many morphological characters have been used in these different classi-
fications and some have been shown to be unreliable guides to phylogenetic
relationships (see Section III). Characters concerned with the form of the orbit
still dominate the classification but Garth has found, in the Pacific American
fauna, groups of genera showing vast agreements in the form of the male first
pleopod. This appendage is now realised to be of great value in the taxonomy
of nearly all families of crabs.

The first Australian spider crabs to be described were made known by the
European naturalists Herbst, Latreille and H. Milne Edwards in the early
nineteenth century. In the second half of that century the work of Dana,
Stimpson, Miers and Haswell resulted in substantial additions to knowledge
of the Australian spider crab fauna. Dana in 1852 dealt with the Crustacea
of the U.S. Exploring Expedition of 1838-1842, Stimpson with the Crustacea
of the North Pacific Exploring Expedition led by Ringgold and Rodgers
(Stimpson 1857—full report not published until 1907). Haswell published
six papers between 1879 and 1882 and in that year (Haswell 1882c) provided the
first list of all species known from Australia. But Miers’s important reports
on the material collected by the “Alert” in 1881-2 (Miers 1884) and by the
“Challenger” in 1873-76 (Miers 1886) outdated Haswell’s list to some extent.
So too did the reports of W. T. Calman (1900) and A. Ortmann (1894) on
collections of Brachyura from Torres Strait.

Haswell’s work at the Australian Museum was followed by that of
Thomas Whitelegge whose report on the Crustacea collected off eastern
Australia by the “Thetis” (Whitelegge 1900) may be particularly mentioned.
W. H. Baker (1905, 1906) dealt with South Australian Brachyura and S. W.
Fulton, F. E. Grant and Allan R. McCulloch all paid some attention to south-
eastern Australian species in the first and second decades of the present century.
In the 1920’s, Herbert M. Hale (1924, 1927, 1929) reported on southern and
western species. The numerous reports, from the 1890’s to the 1920's, by
Mary J. Rathbun of the Smithsonian Institution at the same time added several
species to the Australian lists and extended the known ranges of many others;
two reports (Rathbun 1914, 1924) dealt with collections from Western Australia.
S. K. Montgomery’s report on the Brachyura of the Percy Sladen Trust
Expedition to the Abrolhos (Montgomery 1931) and Dr. Heinrich Balss’s paper
(1935) on the material collected by the Hamburg Museum’s Expedition to south-
western Australia in 1905 are the latest sources of information on western
spider crabs. The contemporary and later work of Frank A. McNeill and
Melbourne Ward dealt mainly with north-eastern species.

The present situation with regard to the Australian majid spider crab fauna
is thus as follows. No revisionary treatment has ever been attempted and no
comprehensive guide has appeared since the time of Haswell. Until Tecently
only McCulloch (1908, 1913) had completed revisions at the generic level.
Nearly all reports dealing with majids have merely added species or extended
known geographic ranges. The most important recent references to Australian
species are those primarily treating overseas faunas (e.g. Sakai 1938, 1965;
Buitendijk 1939; Barnard 1950; and Forest & Guinot 1961). The number of
known valid genera and species has doubled since the time of Haswell and
collections have continued to accumulate at various museums, particularly
the Australian Museum, Sydney, and the Western Australian Museum, Perth.
Several areas of the Australian coastline remain uninvestigated, particularly
that west of Torres Strait south to Broome and most of the Great Australian
Bight. The Australian Museum possesses a fine catalogue of all described genera
and species. Not the least important of the many problems which therefore
remain unanswered is the question of whether the Australian genera can be
grouped, on the basis of the male first pleopods (unknown in the vast majority
of local species), in an arrangement which parallels that found by Garth.

The present paper attempts to bring together available information on
the Australian Brachyura of the family Majidae. This information is presented
in the form of a key to genera and species with distributional and other
information included. The following discussions centre around this key. Current
problems are pointed out but there is no intention here of giving a general
revision. Adequate treatments of the morphology of members of this family are

GRIFFIN 261

given by Rathbun (1925), Garth (1958) and Griffin (in press, b). Terminology,
unless otherwise indicated, follows that used by Rathbun and Garth and by
Griffin in previous papers. Although most information used in the key is taken
from the literature, a considerable amount of material comprising most of the
species represented in Australia, has been examined at the Australian Museum

over the past three years.

Il. THE FAMILY

The Majidae belong, with the Hymenosomidae (flat-back crabs) and the
Parthenopidae (caltrop crabs), to the superfamily Oxyrhyncha. All three
families possess an anteriorly narrowed and produced carapace with prominently
expanded branchial regions, large epistome, quadrate buccal cavity and
longitudinally folded antennules. The characters which chiefly distinguish majid
crabs from other families of the Brachyura are: (1) the possession of specially
mobile chelipeds; (2) fusion of the well-developed second article of the antenna
(usually called the basal antennal article) to the epistome and often also to
the front; (3) the comparatively incomplete orbits; (4) articulation of the palp
of the external maxillipeds at the anteromedial angle of the merus; and
(5) the much greater length of the first pleopods of the male relative to the
second pair. The family has usually been considered in the past to share with
other Oxyrhyncha nine pairs of gills on each side but Hartnoll (1964) has
recently shown that this number is sometimes reduced in the Majidae to seven
or eight.

It should be mentioned that the term Maioidea used by Dana and Miers is
partially synonymous with Oxyrhyncha (as now understood) and not with
the term Majidae (until recently frequently spelt Maiidae). In Dana’s and
Miers’s time the Maioidea included only the Majidae and the Parthenopidae;
de Haan’s (1839) addition of the Hymenosomidae did not gain general
acceptance until after Rathbun (1925).

As to the evolution and relationships of the Oxyrhyncha, Glaessner (1960:
46) states, “The Oxyrhyncha, or spider crabs, are . . . unrepresented before
the Tertiary except by unidentifiable fragments. The pointed rostrum .. . and
the prominent mesogastral-cardiac ridge, together with the elongate cephalothorax,
place this group much closer to the Oxystomata than to the Brachyrhyncha,
but it is more advanced in the organisation of its mouthparts.”

lil. THE SUBFAMILIES

The subfamilial arrangement adopted here is that proposed by Garth (1958)
which is a modification of the schemes of Alcock (1895) and Balss (1929). In
the delimitation of subfamilies and in the arrangement of genera within them,
particular attention has been paid to the structure of the orbit, i.e., the degree
of expansion of the anterolateral part of the carapace above the origin of the
eyestalk (the “supraorbital eave”), the presence or absence, and form of,
a spine behind the eave (the “postorbital spine”) and the degree of expansion
of the basal antennal article. These are characters used before Alcock by Miers
(1879c) and to some extent by Dana (1851). H. Milme Edwards (1834)
considered the length of the ambulatory legs to be important and the classification
proposed by de Haan (1839) was based on the shape of the merus of the
third maxillipeds. Use of these latter characters was criticised by Miers. In
1861 Claus proposed a classification based on the form of the basal antennal
article. Use of this character was criticised by Stimpson in 1871. Balss laid
particular stress on a further feature associated with the structure of the
orbit: the presence or absence of a spine (the “intercalated spine”) between the
eave and the postorbital lobe. However, later workers on the group
(Sakai 1938 and Garth 1958) have considered that Balss laid too much stress
on this feature (see below). The relative size of this spine is sometimes
variable with either growth or geographical locality (Garth 1958; Griffin,
unpublished). Balss also introduced three other characters: the number of
free segments of the abdomen (basically seven but sometimes reduced by

262 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

coalescence or fusion involving segments four to six inclusive), the degree
of development of the interantennular spine (the true rostrum of the zoea)
and the degree of fusion of the (pseudo) rostral spines.

In the key presented here genera within each subfamily are arranged
in a series which begins with forms with a double rostrum and seven free
abdominal segments in both sexes and ends with those in which the rostral
spines are partly or wholly fused and the number of free segments in the
abdomen is reduced. In this respect the key resembles those provided by
Garth (1958). Implicit in such a presentation is the concept that parallel
evolution has proceeded independently within each subfamily. The genera at the
beginning of the series are considered to be primitive and those at the end
advanced. This is in accordance with the ideas of Balss who considered
that a well developed interantennular spine and the presence of an intercalated
spine were also primitive features.

Some aspects of orbital structure require further clarification. The term
“commencing orbit,” used in respect of some of the Ophthalmiinae, Acanthony-
chinae and Pisinae, is intended to contrast with the unformed orbits of the
Inachinae and some members of the Acanthonychinae on the one hand and
with the complete or almost complete orbits of the Majinae and Mithracinae
on the other. The commencing orbit is thus intermediate between two extremes.
It involves partial enlargement of the supraorbital eave, most commonly by
the development of a prominent spine either anteriorly or, less often, posteriorly;
this spine scarely conceals the eyestalk from dorsal view.

In some inachines there is above the origin of the eyestalk a variously
developed spine, considered by Balss to represent the intercalated spine.
However, in the Inachinae, this spine is very seldom separated by distinct
fissures from the surrounding parts of the orbit as it is in the Majinae and
some Mithracinae. Further, in some inachine genera which appear to be
natural groups, some species possess a spine above the eyestalk and some do
not. It would seem better to call this spine merely a supraorbital spine and
to disregard, at least for the present, any possible homology between it in
the Inachinae and the intercalated spine of other majids.

A similar difficulty exists in many of the Pisinae. In some the postorbital
lobe is provided on the upper anterior edge close to the base with a prominent
accessory lobe and in a few species this lobe is quite distinct from the
postorbital lobe. In other pisines where the eave is virtually unexpanded a small
denticle is present on the supraorbital margin. There this lobe or denticle
appears to be the intercalated spine and is generally so treated here.

To sum up, emphasis on the intercalated spine led Balss to divide the
Inachinae and the Pisinae each into two further subfamilies. In at least the
Inachinae it is difficult to work out the homologies of a spine above the
orbit in those species in which it is present and in the Pisinae Garth has
found that such a division, in the Pacific American forms, is not supported
by the male first pleopods. The term supraorbital spine is used, especially
in the Inachinae, to denote a spine above the orbit where homologies are
mot clear. In other groups the term preorbital spine is restricted to mean an
anterior outgrowth of the supraorbital eave and the term antorbital spine is used
to denote a posterior outgrowth (see figure in Griffin in press, a).

Figure 1. Generalised morphology of the subfamilies Inachinae, Ophthal-
miinae and Acanthonychinae. Front of the carapace from above
at left and from below at right; whole carapace from above in
the middle. Abbreviations: a,, antennule; a,, antenna; a.o.,
antorbital spine; b.a., basal antennal article; e, eye; i, intercalated
spine; m, mouthfield; p.o., postorbital lobe; pr, preorbital spine;
r, rostrum; s.o., supraorbital eave.

GRIFFIN 263

INACHINAE

pr

So.

OPHTHALMIINAE

ACANTHONYCHINAE

264 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

The characters of the six subfamilies represented in Australia are now
given (the number of the couplet in the key at which genera of each subfamily
begin is indicated in brackets after the name):

INACHINAE (4): Orbits undeveloped, or eave weakly expanded only; a
supraorbital spine sometimes present. A postorbital spine sometimes present but
affording no concealment to the cornea of the retracted eyestalk. Basal antennal
article extremely slender and usually long. Eyestalk very long and _ visible
almost to its base in both dorsal and ventral view. Carapace subtriangular or
sometimes subpyriform or occasionally circular. Rostrum sometimes of a
single spine, and frequently short. Ambulatory legs frequently extremely
long and slender.

OPHTHALMIINAE (26): Orbits consisting of a well developed and laterally
expanded eave or of a greatly elongated spine. Postorbital spine short. An
intercalated spine never present. Basal antennal article moderately expanded only.
Eyestalk very long, often concealed in dorsal view but always largely visible
in ventral view. Carapace elongate and often truncate in front and provided
with a medial expansion or spine posteriorly. Rostral spines distinct and usually
short. Ambulatory legs seldom very long.

ACANTHONYCHINAE (29): Orbits undeveloped, eave rounded or forwardly
produced as a preorbital spine. Postorbital spine, if present, simple and
affording no concealment to eyestalk. Basal antennal article not very wide and
characteristically truncate triangular. Eyestalks extremely short and often sunk
in sides of rostrum. Carapace basically pyriform but characteristically twice
expanded laterally at hepatic and branchial margins. Rostrum consisting either
of two distinct spines or sometimes of a huge “beak.” Ambulatory legs short
or at most of moderate length.

PISINAE (36): Orbits with a weekly expanded eave either produced anteriorly
as a preorbital spine or acute or sometimes posteriorly acute, or else weakly
expanded midway along and almost confluent with the postorbital lobe. Inter-
calated spine present or absent, sometimes a small denticle or lobe close to
the postorbital lobe. Postorbital lobe always well developed and cupped but
not completely concealing the eyestalk from dorsal view. Basal antennal article
slightly to broadly expanded and usually produced into a spine anterolaterally.
Eyestalk typically short and bulbous with a large cornea. Carapace always
pyriform although sometimes very wide. Rostrum frequently bifid for distal half
only. Ambulatory legs often very long and slender.

MAJINAE (62): Orbit well developed, comprising above a laterally expanded
eave which is always acute posteriorly and sometimes produced into a spine,
an intercalated spine and a postorbital spine which is sometimes simple and
sometimes cupped and occasionally armed with an accessory spine on the upper
anterior edge near the base. Basal antennal article moderately broad and
rectangular and frequently armed with spines at both anteromedial and
anterolateral angles. Eyestalks of moderate length and generally slender; only
the distal half is visible in dorsal view. Carapace pyriform and sometimes
broad. Rostrum always of two distinct spines. Ambulatory legs generally of
moderate length.

MITHRACINAE (81): Orbits extremely well developed with the eave and
basal antennal article laterally expanded and usually tubular, completed behind
by the prominent postorbital lobe which is often cupped. An_ intercalated
spine is sometimes present. Eave sometimes forwardly produced into a preorbital
spine or lobe, and sometimes prolonged posteriorly into an antorbital spine.
Eyestalk moderately long but only the distal portion generally visible in either
dorsal or ventral view. Carapace basically pyriform but anteriorly broadened
due to expansion of orbits. Rostrum of two distinct spines which are often
contiguous and sometimes fused into a broad lamella. Ambulatory legs seldom
of great length.

Figure 2. Generalised morphology of the subfamilies Pisinae, Majinae and
Mithracinae. Arrangement and abbreviations as in text-fig. 1.

GRIFFIN 265

Poleorelt NOACE

MITHRACINAE

266 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

The seventh subfamily, the OREGONIINAE contains three genera which
are boreal in distribution and not represented in Australia. They resemble
the Inachinae in most features but are characterised by the terminally broadened
male abdomen, the seventh segment being quadrate and deeply inserted into
the sixth segment, and the longitudinally grooved male first pleopod, the groove
being margined by rows of filamentous setae. A detailed treatment is given
by Garth (1958).

IV. THE GENERA

The characters which are of value at the generic level are essentially
the same as those used at the subfamilial level and already discussed. It need
only be emphasised that the application of these characters at the generic level
is invariably more rigorous than at the higher levels. Thus congeneric species
are usually considered to share very similar orbital structure, form of the rostrum
and of the male first pleopods and to agree in the number of free segments
in the abdomen. They also generally resemble each other closely in carapace
shape and ornamentation, form of the third maxillipeds, shape of the male
abdomen (a character introduced by Shen in 1932) and often shape of the
male chela but seldom in actual size and in relative length of the ambulatory
legs.

The remaining part of this section and most of the succeeding one will be
devoted to a discussion of the several lower taxa of the Australian Majidae
which are considered to pose important problems at the present time.

Of the 24 majid genera listed by Haswell (1882c), ten now either have
quite different meanings or are known under different mames. These are as
follows:

1. Stenorhynchus Lamarck. Of the three species included here by Haswell, two
have been shifted to Achaeus and one, S. curvirostris, has not been collected
since its discovery (see next section). Lamarck’s genus is currently recognised
for two species confined to the Americas and north-west Africa (Garth 1958,
Garth & Holthuis 1963); since Haswell mentions the rostrum being formed of two
spines, not one, it is reasonable to assume that he intended to refer to
Stenorhynchus Latreille (now considered a synonym of Macropodia Leach, 1814).
2. Halimus Latreille. The species included here by Haswell are now known
as species of Naxia Latreille, Halimus being a junior synonym of that genus.
The composition of the abdomen (of both sexes) and several other
characters in these species require investigation to determine their relationships
to the New Zealand representative of the genus (Griffin, in press, b). The
comparatively well developed orbits and distally expanded ambulatory propodi
set this genus apart from other inachines. Haswell’s subgenus Microhalimus,
with its single species, M. deflexifrons, was included as a subgenus of Naxia
by McCulloch (1908). For the sake of convenience, Microhalimus is here
not given subgeneric status though it is true that M. deflexifrons appears to
differ in some important features of the orbit from other species of Naxia,
particularly in the number and arrangement of the spines above and behind
the orbit. Such disagreement is especially obvious when it is compared with
those species with which it agrees in the slight expansion of the ambulatory
propodi.

3. Naxia H. Milne Edwards. Haswell listed one species under this genus,
Pisa serpulifer Guérin. This was transferred to Naxioides A. Milne Edwards
(of which Naxia Miers is a synonym) by Rathbun (1914) and later (Rathbun
1924) set apart in a genus of its own, Paranaxia; H. Milne Edwards’s genus
is a synonym of the latter.

4-6. Gonatorhynchus Haswell, Paramithrax H. Milne Edwards and Chlorinoides
Haswell. Gonatorhynchus has recently (Griffin 1963b) been sunk in Paramithrax
which has been recognised as monotypic. There appear to be some important
similarities in orbital structure between P. barbicornis and Anacinetops stimpsoni
although the species are at present placed in different subfamilies. The meaning
attributed Paramithrax in Haswell’s time has also been changed through the
removal of several species to Chlorinoides (see Griffin in press, a). These latter
species are the ones often placed in Acanthophrys A. Milne Edwards, a genus
synonymous with Hyastenus White.

GRIFFIN 267

7-9. Egeria Latreille, Cyclomaia Stimpson and Parathoe Miers. These have been
replaced respectively by Phalangipus Latreille, Cyclax H. Milne Edwards and
Perinia Dana without change in meaning. In addition Eucinetops Stimpson no
longer appears in the Australian lists, Anacinetops Miers having been accepted
for E. stimpsoni Miers (see Balss 1935). One genus listed by Haswell among
the Oxyrhyncha, the monotypic Pleurophricus A. Milne Edwards, has recently
been included among the Cymopolidae (now known as the Palicidae—see
Holthuis 1962: 244, 249) by Balss (1957: 1662) and is not treated here.

10. Chorilibinia Lockington. This genus was listed by Haswell under the
name Chlorolibinia; it will be discussed in more detail at the end of this section.

A nomenclatural point which should be mentioned here concerns the genus
Camposcia. Balss (1957: 1620) lists this as Camposcia Desmarest, 1823.
Yaldwyn (pers. comm.) has kindly informed me that Desmarest’s reference
(Dict. Sci. nat. 28: 259, 262) is to an MS name of Leach, Camposia. Other
authors before Latreille (1829) (in Cuvier’s Reg. Anim. IV. (2): 60) also
used this spelling. However, it appears that Latreille who used the name
Camposcia, was the first to include a species in the genus. Camposia of Desmarest
and others would, therefore, appear to be “nomen nudum.” The species included
in Camposcia Latreille, 1829 was C. retuja which was listed without comment
by H. Milne Edwards (1834:283) as Camposcia retusa Latreille, 1829. All
subsequent workers used these spellings which are therefore followed here.

Among other genera which need re-examination in regard to their distinct-
ness and relationships are Xenocarcinus, Zewa, Phalangipus, Doclea, Antilibinia,
Hyastenus and Micippa.

1. Xenocarcinus White. Sakai (1938: 324) has placed this genus in the
subfamily currently known as the Mithracinae because he considers that at
least two of the Japanese species show traces of an intercalated spine. Although
this structure is unknown in the Acanthonychinae, Xenocarcinus is here placed
in that subfamily because of its numerous resemblances to other acanthonychinines.
2. Zewa McCulloch. This genus was introduced in 1913 for a (new) species
from north-eastern Australia. At the same time the earlier described Pseudo-
micippe varians Miers was included because, as McCulloch noted, previous
workers had expressed some doubt about the wisdom of considering this
latter species to be congeneric with P. tenuipes A. Milne Edwards. McCulloch
considered the presence of a large lobe above the orbit and of a spine on the
posterior border of the carapace important characters in this genus. Balss (1957),
however, lists Zewa as a synonym of Pseudomicippe Heller. Although compari-
sons of descriptions and figures of the three species (see Buitendijk 1939: 255, pl.
VIII figs. 3 and 4; and Sankarankutty 1962: 160, figs. 17-23 for P. tenuipes)
certainly inclines me towards Balss’s view, I retain McCulloch’s genus pending
a fuller investigation of the Australian species.

3. Phalangipus Latreille and Doclea Leach. These two genera are among
those pisines in which positive identification of an intercalated spine is difficult.
In both genera the eave is poorly expanded and separated by a more or less
wide hiatus from the postorbital lobe. Phalangipus is usually regarded as
possessing an intercalated spine and Doclea to be lacking it. Thus P. australiensis,
which possesses a small denticle in the hiatus, is widely separated in the key
from D. profunda, in which there is no denticle. But among species of Doclea,
the South African D. muricata (Herbst) (see Barnard 1950: 49, fig. 11a) does
possess such a denticle just forward of the postorbital lobe. Some re-arrangement
of species may be necessary. Rather striking differences in carapace shape
exist between the species of Doclea (see Sakai 1938: pl. XXXVII) just as
in Naxioides.

4. Antilibinia Macleay. Three species are at present included in this genus,
one each from South Africa, the Philippines and Australia. The last two were
both described by Rathbun from a few specimens and have not been since
discussed on the basis of additional material. Barnard (1950:37) doubted that the
Australian A. lappacea belongs in the same genus as the South African A. smithii
because of differences in carapace shape and length of the rostrum; he also
considered that the latter species might well be shifted to the American Taliepus
A. Milne Edwards, again because of similarities in carapace shape. Indeed both

268 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Antilibinia and Taliepus have in the past been considered subgenera of
Epialtus H. Milne Edwards (see Garth 1958:207). A new genus may
required for the Australian and Philippine species.

5. Hyastenus White. As the basis for Balss’s (1929) Hyasteniinae, this extremely
large genus (Balss in 1935 listed 38 species) is usually considered to be
characterised especially by an absence of an intercalated spine from the orbit
and by the distinctness of all seven abdominal segments. However, Laurie
(1906) has noted that in his H. irami there is a distinct lobe between the
eave and postorbital lobe. H. convexus Miers also appears to possess such a
structure and many species of Hyastenus have on the upper anterior edge of the
postorbital lobe a well developed accessory lobe. Sakai (1938:280) has pointed
out that the abdomen of the female of H. diacanthus (de Haan) consists of
only five segments. Such features are usually considered sufficient to warrant
generic separation.

6. Micippa Leach and Paramicippa H. Milne Edwards. When Paramicippa
was first set up in 1834, two species, Micippa platipes Ruppell and P. tuberculosa
Milne Edwards were included. The first was designated type species of
Paramicippa by Miers (1879c: 662) and a definition of that genus given at the
same time. The second species was alone included in Paramicippa in Miers’s
later revision of the two genera (Miers 1885). Such a procedure was quite
invalid. Since M. platipes is now generally accepted as belonging tu Micippa
(Sakai 1938, Buitendijk 1939), Paramicippa should fall to that genus. If a
separate genus is to be established for P. tuberculosa because of the pronounced
bifid nature of its rostrum or its comparatively long eyestalk or for any other
reason, a new name must be used. The situation awaits further investigation
and P. tuberculosa is here included amongst species of Micippa.

Finally, among the genera introduced to the Australian lists in this paper,
two require further mention; in one way they may be regarded as merely
replacing names already in use.

1. Scyramathia A. Milne Edwards. In 1918 Rathbun placed Hyastenus fultoni
Grant, 1905 in this genus which has recently been recognised as a synonym
of Rochinia A. Milne Edwards (Garth 1958: 282). Examination of material
of Grant’s species (11 specimens including relatively large males and females
from the Australian Museum’s collections: reg. no. P.4515, 20 miles east of
Babel I., Tasmania, 65-70 fms., “Endeavour” Expedition) reveals the male first
pleopod as being of the “pisoidiform” type (Garth 1958:249; see also his
pl. Q) with a truncate but poorly expanded apex and similar to that of Rochinia
occidentalis (Faxon) (see Garth 1958: pl. Q fig. 7). H. fultoni also resembles
this species in shape and type of ornamentation of the carapace, relative length
of the rostrum, form of the orbit and in several other features (see Rathbun
1925: pls. 228, 229 fig. 5). It seems to fit very satisfactorily into Rochinia
which genus is now added to the Australian fauna. In the Indo-West-Pacific,
species of Rochinia are known also from Japan, India and South Africa.

2. Chorilibinia Lockington. Garth (1958: 282) has recently orphaned the
Australian and New Guinean C. gracilipes Miers, 1879 and the Indian C.
andamanica Alcock, 1895 by the transference, to the mithracine Stenocionops
Desmarest, 1823, of Chorilibinia angusta Lockington, 1877, type species (by
monotypy) of Chorilibinia Lockington, 1877. The Indian and Australian species
are completely different from C. angusta and resemble species of Libinia Leach
and Libidoclea H. Milne Edwards & Lucas among the American Pisinae.
However, examination of C. gracilipes (numerous specimens including relatively
large males and females from the Australian Museum’s collections; reg. no. P.
14931, Albany Passage, N. Queensland, Melbourne Ward, August 1928)
shows that it differs from such American species in two important characters.
First, the female abdomen comprises only five free segments (fourth to sixth
inclusive fused) in contrast to the seven of Libinia and Libidoclea. Secondly,
the male first pleopod is of the pisoidiform type with a tapered, acute apex
and subterminal aperture in contrast to the scyriform type possessed by the
American species. C. andamanica and C. gracilipes resemble each other in
structure of the orbit, form of the rostrum, shape of the carapace and
comparative length of the ambulatories; C. andamanica also has a five-segmented
abdomen in the female (Alcock 1895). The form of the male first pleopod

GRIFFIN 269

is unfortunately unknown for the Indian species. A new genus thus seems
to be required for these two Indo-West-Pacific species. The name Chlorolibinia
published by Haswell (1882:17) is surely a mistake for Lockington’s genus
as the latters name follows the name of the genus. Being an _ incorrect
subsequent spelling, Chlorolibinia is unavailable for use under article 33 (b)
of the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature. The name Austrolibinia
is therefore proposed and the genus is diagnosed below.

AUSTROLIBINIA na. gen.
Chorilibinia Lockington; Miers 1879b: 7; (part: C. gracilipes Miers, 1879).
Alcock 1895: 221 (part: C. andamanica Alcock, 1895).
Chlorolibinia Haswell, 1882c: 17; incorrect subsequent spelling of Chorilibinia
Lockington, 1877.
Carapace pyriform, armed with a few slender spines and bearing posteriorly
a broad, medially acute lobe. Rostrum united in basal half, consisting distally
of two acute, divergent spines. Supraorbital eave well expanded, anterolaterally
and posterolaterally acute, separated from the large, cupped postorbital lobe
by a very narrow fissure; intercalated spine absent. Basal antennal article of
moderate width, provided with a prominent lobe laterally at its base. Ambulatory
legs long and slender, the first about twice carapace length. Chelipeds shorter
than the first ambulatory leg in both sexes, chelae moderately inflated in male.
Abdomen of seven segments in the male, of five in the female, fourth to
sixth fused. First pleopod of male slender, tapering, apically acute, aperture
subterminal (based on C. gracilipes only).
Type species: Chorilibinia gracilipes Miers, 1879.

V. THE SPECIES

The characters which are of value at the specific level are for the most
part different in each genus. For instance, in the genus Notomithrax, the form
of the crests on the carpus of the cheliped is of importance; in nearly all majines
the number and arrangement of the spines on the carapace are a reliable
guide but appear to be of little use in many pisines. Several characters which
are widely used at the specific level unfortunately differ with age and/or sex.
These include the shape of the chela and abdomen which change with growth,
often in a single moult, and also differ according to sex; relative proportions
of the carapace and length of the spines which change with growth, the
carapace becoming wider (particularly in pisines and majines) and the spines
shorter and blunter; and the number of free segments in the abdomen which
is often different in males and females of the one species. In Huenia species
the shape of the carapace is strikingly different in males and females. Cases
in which sexual dimorphism has resulted in the original description of two
species, one based on the male and one on the female, are, as in other groups
of animals, not infrequent. The shape of the merus of the third maxilliped and
of the basal antennal article are often used diagnostically but in some species
the degree of spinulation or tuberculation of these two structures may change
during growth.

Among the 45 species listed by Haswell (1882c), 16 have since suffered
specific name changes. Some of these have been mentioned in the preceding
section. Some species, particularly among the Acanthonychinae, are now
recognised as highly polymorphic so that numerous names are reduced to a
single valid one. This is true, for example, in the genera Oncinopus de Haan,
Menaethius Latreille and Huenia de Haan, although the number of Australian
species currently recognised is the same as that listed by Haswell. Specific name
changes have taken place, since Haswell’s time, particularly in the genera Naxia
Latreille, Chlorinoides Haswell, Micippa Leach and Tiarinia Dana (see references
in key). Special mention should be made of the relatively recent recognition
that Platymaia wyvillethomsoni Miers is a western Pacific species distinct
from the Indian Ocean P. alcocki Rathbun (P. wyvillethomsoni of Alcock and
later authors) (Rathbun 1918); Calman’s (1900) Torres Strait material of
Xenocarcinus tuberculatus is correctly referable to X. depressus Miers (Gordon
1934, Sakai 1965), whilst Xenocarcinus tuberculatus is a western Pacific species
distinct from the Indian Ocean X. alcocki Laurie (Sakai 1965): Paramicippa
hispida Baker (Eruma hispida of McCulloch) is synonymous with Anacinetops

270 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

stimpsoni Miers (Balss 1935); Schizophyrs dama (Herbst) is a western species
in Australia distinct from the widespread S. aspera (H. Milne Edwards) (Balss
1935, Yaldwyn 1964); Cyclax spinicinctus Heller (? = C. perryi Dana) is
distinct from C. suborbicularis (Stimpson) (Forest & Guinot 1961); Micippa
platipes Ruppell and M. philyra (Herbst), often considered synonymous, are
in fact distinct (Buitendijk 1939); Notomithrax ursus (Herbst) includes Para-
mithrax latreillei Miers (Bennett 1964, Griffin 1963a) and definitely occurs
in Australia (McNeill 1953); the Australian material of Paramithrax peronii
mentioned by Haswell (1882c) is correctly referable to Notomithrax minor
(Filhol) (Bennett 1964); Leptomithrax australiensis Miers and L. spinulosus
Haswell are both synonyms of L. gaimardii (H. Milne Edwards) (Griffin
1963b); Achaeus fissifrons (Haswell) includes A. tenuicollis Miers (Griffin and
Yaldwyn 1965); and that Sargassocarcinus foliatus Ward also occurs in Japan
where it has been known under the older but generically inaccurate name of
Mimulus cristatus Balss (Sakai 1965). In this paper advantage is taken of the
remarks of previous carcinologists to consider Cancer aragnoides Rumphius
(specific name misspelt arachnoides by later workers), Cancer longipes Linnaeus,
Egeria indica Leach and E. herbstii H. Milne Edwards a single species,
Phalangipus longipes (Miers 1884: 182, Alcock 1895: 224 and Grant &
McCulloch 1906: 27). Similarly, Naxia cerastes Ortmann is considered synony-
mous with Naxia taurus Pocock and included as Naxioides taurus (Alcock
1895: 220, Calman 1900: 37). Both these species need investigation.

It is brought out later in this paper that a large number of species
considered to be restricted to Australia have been recorded only once from
little material. Nothing is to be gained by listing these—material of all is to
be eagerly sought. Only two are mentioned here as they are not included
in the key.

i. Stenorhynchus curvirostris A. Milne Edwards, 1873. This was recorded from
Bass Strait and the original description was repeated by Haswell (1882c: 2). I am
unable to confidently place it in a genus but it should key out somewhere near
Achaeus or Achaeopsis; Miers (1886: 6, 18) tentatively placed it in Achaeopsis.
As already indicated (see preceding section) it may belong in Macropodia
which so far is unknown from Australia.

2. Inachus australis Gray, 1831. This was not listed by Haswell. Gray’s
description was very short and I am unable to comment on the relationships
of the species; Gray mentions that it is “somewhat allied” to Inachus arabicus
Ruppell (a synonym of Menaethius monoceros Latreille) whilst Miers (1886:19)
considered that it might belong in Chlorinoides.

Special difficulties in satisfactory delineating species appear to have been
concentrated in a few genera, most of which still await study. Three require
mention here:
1. Hyastenus. Many species appear to show rather wide geographic or age
variation in ornamentation of the carapace and relative length of the rostral
spines. Yet both these characters were heavily relied upon by Alcock (1895)
whose arrangement is largely followed here because it is these features which
have most often been mentioned in descriptions in the literature. Buitendijk
(1939) has illustrated the male first pleopods of several Australian species.
2. Micippa. Species of this genus also appear to show the kind of wide
variation exhibited in Hyastenus. Characters such as the presence of knobs
on the spines should be used with caution, as in Chlorinoides.
3. Tiarinia. Species of this genus are in at least as much confusion as those of
any other. Only T. angusta, which stands out because of its spinulous rostrum,
is easily recognised. The status of all other species is in doubt although
descriptions and illustrations provided by Sakai (1938, 1965) and by Buitendijk
(1939) are of assistance. The main requirement is definition of the species on
the basis of the male first pleopod (as in many other species groups), followed
by an analysis of the tuberculation and spinulation of the dorsal surface and
margins of the carapace and their changes during growth. Measurements given
by Buitendijk of three dimensions of the carapace in JT. cornigera (Latreille)
and T. gracilis Dana (of which the Australian and western Pacific T. depressa
Stimpson may be a synonym) reveal no relative growth differences.

Only four other species need be mentioned.

GRIFFIN 271

1. Entomonyx spinosus Miers. This quite widespread Indo-West Pacific species,
of which Macrocoeloma nummifer Alcock is a synonym, has been recorded
only once from Australia (as Acanthophrys spinosus by Balss 1929). Entomonyx
is resurrected as a monotypic genus to accommodate it (Griffin, in press, a).

2. Criocarcinus superciliosus (Herbst). This widespread Indo-West Pacific
ophthalmine is included in the key on the basis of material from the Great
Barrier Reef identified by F. A. McNeill (in prep.).

3. Achaeus sp. A single specimen in the Australian Museum’s collections
appears to constitute an unnamed species of Achaeus. Additional characters
of this species have been given elsewhere (Griffin & Yaldwyn 1965).

4. Chlorinoides goldsboroughi Rathbun. This species, previously known only
from Hawaii, is included in the key on the basis of two specimens in the
Australian Museum’s collections taken off New South Wales. Additional
characters for separating this species from the closely related Japanese
C. brevispinosa Yokoya have recently been given by Sakai (1965:88).

Vi. THE KEY

The following key to genera and species includes all species recorded
in the literature from Australian localities, with the exception of Stenorhynchus
curvirostris and Inachus australis (see above).

Apart from the characters given for each taxon, the following information is
also presented. In the case of genera, the name is followed by the world
geographic range; references to important accounts of the genus as a whole,
or merely of non-Australian species; and the approximate number of known
valid species. In the case of species the name is followed by specific synonyms
(as recorded in the Australian literature); size; distribution within Australia;
distribution outside Australia; bathymetric range (for details of last four see
below); further distinguishing characters or other information which may be of
assistance in more positively identifying the species; and finally (in brackets),
one or two references to descriptions and illustrations of the species. (Note: Six
species are figured in this paper—pls. xv-xvii—and a reference to these is
inserted in the appropriate part of the key. In the case of four species, viz., Huenia
bifurcata, Hyastenus auctus, Hyastenus sebae and Tiarinia elegans, these are
the first illustrations provided; that of Paranaxia serpulifera is the first illustration
of an adult specimen). Where a genus is monotypic or represented in Australia
by only a single species, the above information follows on immediately from
the remarks concerning the genus.

Size: Relative size (total carapace length including rostrum) is indicated as
follows: very small: less than 10 mm; small: 10-20 mm; medium: 20-40 mm;
large: 40-80 mm; very large: more than 80 mm.

Australian distribution: The Australian coastline is divided into six regions
for the purposes of this review. SE (south east): Tasmania, Victoria and New
South Wales, or, more correctly, Kangaroo Island to Brisbane; NE (north east):
remaining part of the eastern seabord; N (north): Torres Strait; NW (north
west): remaining part of northern coastline to Shark Bay; SW (south west): west
coast from Shark Bay and along south coast to Eucla; and S (south): rest of
the Great Australian Bight to Spencer’s Gulf. The divisions south and north
are used here to emphasise the fact that some species are recorded from South
Australia but not Victoria, or from Torres Strait but not the adjacent Barrier
Reef or Gulf of Carpetaria; they are thus convenient divisions only and may
have no real zoogeographic basis (see Section VII). It should be noted that this
review treats only species recorded from the Australian mainland, Tasmania,
the inshore islands off the western and eastern coastlines, New Guinea and
Lord Howe Island.

Overseas Distribution: The grouping and designation of overseas localities in
the main follows Ekman (1953). Thus the tropical to warm temperate area
of the Indian and western Pacific Oceans are considered to comprise the
following faunal subregions (outside Australia): Indian Ocean: Indo-Malaya
(including the Philippines); tropical and subtropical Japan (designated simply
as Japan); central Pacific (excluding Hawaii); and Hawaii. Taxa, the distribution
of which extends through the Indian Ocean and Japan and any other subregion,
are designated in the key as Indo-West Pacific.

272 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Bathymetric Distribution: The depth at which species occur is divided
into five categories: littoral: intertidal; sublittoral: down to 10 fms; shallow
offshore: 10-50 fms; lower shelf: 50-100 fms; and slope: over 100 fms. In the
case of species which extend down the slope, the deepest recorded occurrence
is given.

Finally, an attempt has been made in the key, at least at the generic level
and above, to use as far as possible characters which are considered important
from the phylogenetic point of view; in most cases ready separation is
achieved. The key is set out with contrasting couplets adjacent so as to permit
easier comparison of the divisions.

GRIFFIN

273

KEY TO SUBFAMILIES OF MAJID BRACHYURA AND AUSTRALIAN

ZCI)

3(2)

6(5)

7(5)

GENERA AND SPECIES

Eyes either without orbits, or with incomplete or commencing
orbits. Basal antennal article rather slender- PREP Bo
Eyes with nearly completes): or ecompletes orbits. Basal antennal
article very broad 4 % BR ae Se Ese ct

Male abdomen terminally broadened, seventh segment sub-quadrate
and inserted deeply into sixth segment. Male first pleopod
longitudinally grooved, with rows of filamentous setae on either
side of groove ... ... .... ..... Subfamily OREGONIINAE

Male abdomen not terminally broadened, seventh segment sub-
triangular and not inserted deeply into sixth segment. Male
first pleopod exceedingly varied but not as in Oregoniinae ....

Eyes without orbits; eyestalks generally long, either non-retractile,
or retractile against an acute postorbital spine affording no
concealment. Basal antennal article extremely slender and
usually long . ... Subfamily INACHINAE ee.

Eyes with incomplete or comanieneing orbits. Basal antennal article
not extremely slender 2 SAR As Oey YOWAIOEE Sole.

Seven free abdominal segments in male and usually in female ....
Abdomen of six or fewer segments in both sexes ....

Carapace circular or subcircular. Rostrum appearing trispinose,
interantennular spine forwardly projecting and visible from above.
Postorbital lobe a prominent spine. Basal antennal article
cylindrical. Ambulatory legs NOS pou, the epeest more than
3 times carapace length

Carapace pyriform or triangular, never circular intorinieanular
spine not visible from above. Postorbital lobe spinous or absent.
Basal antennal article flattened. Ambulatory legs variously
elongate, never more than 24 times carapace length... .... :

Interantennular spine projecting well beyond rostrum. Ambulatory
propodi flattened, oar-like. Chelipeds not very long, less than
one-third length of ambulatories in adult male, palm in male
inflated, widest about midway along. No long protogastric
spines . Platymaia Miers, 1886
Indo-West Pacific, 6: P. wyvillethomsoni Miers, 1886; medium;
in Australia known only from four localities near Eucla, Great
Australian Bight (SW); Indo-Malaya, C. Pacific, Japan: lower
shelf and slope to 400 fms; further distinguished by spine on
upper anterior margin of postorbital lobe (Rathbun, 1918: 7,
pls. I, IV, XIV).

Interantennular spine scarcely, if at all, exceeding rostrum.
Ambulatory propodi cylindrical. Chelipeds very long, as long as
ambulatories in adult male, palm in male widest distally.
Protogastric regions each with a very long, forwardly directed
spine. . Cyrtomaia Miers, 1886
Indo-West Pacific, 13: C. maccullochi Rathbun, 1918; medium
to large; known only from near Eucla, Great Australian Bight
(SW) in 190-450 fms; further distinguished by cylindrical
basal segments of antennal flagellum and long rostral spines
(Rathbun 1918: 4, figs. 1, 2, pls. 1, 2)

Rostrum very short, less than 1/8 postrostral carapace length,
of two rounded or blunt lobes. Carapace smooth ....

Rostrum long, at_least 1/5 postrostral carapace length, of two
acute spines. Carapace with scattered tubercles ee ele

61

24

15

10

274

8(7)

9(8)

10(7)

11(10)

12(11)

REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Eyestalks small, retractile beneath edge of carapace. Supraorbital
eave unexpanded, without lobes or spines. Ambulatory legs
slender and moderately long, propodi 1 & 2 dilated and com-
pressed, dactyli of all ambulatories subchelate .......

Oncinopus de Haan, 1839.
Widespread Indo-West Pacific; monotypic: O. aranea de Haan,
1839 (= O. subpellucidus Stimpson, 1857; O. angulatus Haswell,
1880); small; S, SE, NE, N; littoral to shallow offshore;
carapace weakly calcified (Hale 1927: 125, fig. 122; Sakai
1965: 66, pl. 27, fig. 1).

Eyestalks very long. Supraorbital eave variously Sag aa Ambula-
tory legs variously elongate, cylindrical

Ambulatory legs long, the first twice carapace length, slender.
Supraorbital eave unexpanded, lacking lobes or spines. Basal
antennal article very slender. Third maxillipeds with merus
narrower than ischium . . . . Camposcia Latreille, 1829
Widespread Indo-West Pacific, monotypic: C. retusa Latreille,
1829; medium; NE, N, NW; littoral and sublittoral; often masked
by seaweed and sponges (Barnard 1950: 12, fig. 1; Sakai 1965;
695 plas ON hea nly)

Ambulatory legs short, the first less than 4 carapace length, quite
stout. Supraorbital eave moderately expanded with a small
antorbital lobe; a prominent conical spine between eave and
postorbital lobe separated from both by wide fissures. Basal
antennal article moderately broad. Third maxillipeds with
merus as wide as ischium .. . . Anacinetops Miers, 1879
Australia, Timor; monotypic: A. stimpsoni (Miers, 1879)
(= Paramicippa hispida Baker, 1905); medium; S, NE, N;
littoral (McCulloch 1913: 336, figs. 47, 48).

Abdomen showing no coalescence of segments. Orbits with eave
unexpanded and unarmed except for a small, widely removed
postorbital spine. Ambulatory legs long, cylindrical, first pair
more than twice carapace length, stout . . Ephippias Rathbun, 1918
Restricted to Australia, monotypic: E. endeavouri Rathbun,
1918; very large; SE, S, SW, NW; shallow offshore (Rathbun
1918: 9, pl. 15).

Abdomen sometimes, especially in female, showing coalescence
of segments. Orbits with moderately expanded eave followed by
one or two spines. Ambulatory legs of only moderate length, less
than 14 carapace length, generally slender, propodi distally
expanded, compressed, dactyli subchelate . . Naxia Latreille, 1825
Australasia; see reviews by Baker (1905), McCulloch (1913),
Balss (1935), Griffin (in press, b); 6; all species (except
N. deflexifrons) figured by Hale (1927); all except N. spinosa
restricted to Australia.

Ambulatory propodi weakly ened asially: Sa eg eave
usually acute anterolaterally ....

Ambulatory propodi strongly abate distally. Sipser eave
rounded pnteroiatenally,.| armed with a small SPINE pose
laterally : pire baba j k

Supraorbital eave rounded anterolaterally and with a small spine
posterolaterally. Carpus of cheliped smooth .
N. deflexifrons (Haswell, 1880)
Medium; SE; shallow offshore (McCulloch 1913: 330, pl. X figs.
1-4).
Supraorbital eave acute both anterolterallyixe and ‘posterolalerally:
Carpus of cheliped ridged ob ‘

11

12

14

13(12)

14(11)

15(4)

16(15)

17(16)

18(16)

GRIFFIN

Rostral spines stout, almost straight. Carpus of cheliped with
lateral ridge rounded . . N. aurita (Latreille, 1825)
(= Halimus laevis Haswell, 1880); large; SW, S, SE; littoral
(Hale 1927: 129, fig. 127).

Rostral spines slender, strongly curved outwards distally. Carpus of
cheliped with lateral ridge proximally acute .....
N. aires (Guérin, 1825)
(= Halimus gracilis Baker, 1905); mediurns S, SE; littoral
(Hale 1927: 129, fig. 128).

Anterolateral spine of basal antennal article laterally denticulate.
Merus of cheliped weakly tuberculate dorsally .
N. tumida (Dana, 1851)
(= Halimus tumidus var. gracilis Baker, 1905); medium; S,
SE, NE; littoral (Hale 1927: 128, fig. 126).

Anterolateral spine of basal antennal article unarmed. Merus of
cheliped smooth .. . N. spinosa (Hess, 1865)
(= Halimus truncatipes ’ Miers, ” 1879): large; SW, S, SE;
Kermadecs; littoral (Hale 1927: 127, fig. 125).

Abdomen of six segments in both sexes. Carapace triangular ....

Abdomen of five segments in female, of five or six in male.
Carapace subpentagonal to subpyriform :
Paratymolus, Miers, 1879
Indo-West Pacific; See also Sakai (1938);

A prominent postorbital spine. Rostrum generally of moderate
length, about 1/3 postrostral carapace length, of two acute spines.
Carapace with a few prominent spines :

Achacopsis Stimpson, ASS iis.
Indo-West Pacific, Atlantic. Mediterranean; see Sakai (1938);
6; key to species in Griffin (in press, b).

No postorbital spine. Rostrum very short, less than 1/10 postrostral
carapace length, of two generally blunt lobes. Carapace with
a few tubercles but not spines . . . Achaeus Leach, 1817 ....
Indo-West Pacific, E. Atlantic, Mediterranean; review of Austra-
lasian species in Griffin & Yaldwyn (1965); 20.

Rostral spines unarmed. Branchial margins with two prominent
spines and a few spinules .. .

A. thomsoni (Wyville-Thomson, 1873)
Small, SE, SW: South Africa, E. & W. Atlantic, Mediterranean:
lower shelf and slope down to 1000 fms; further distinguished
by spinous merus and carpus of cheliped (Hale 1927: 124,
fig. 120).

Rostral spines with 2 or 3 spinules laterally. Branchial margins
with four prominent spines . . . A. ramusculus (Baker, oe
Small; in Australia known only from off Neptune I. (S),
104 fms; New Zealand (Hale 1927: 124, fig. 121; Griffin 3
press, b, fig.).

Rostrum of two short, acute spines. Supraorbital eave bearing
laterally a prominent spine and several minute spinules... .
A. fissifrons (Haswell, 1879)
(= A. tenuicollis Miers, 1886); small; SE; New Zealand, Indo-
West Pacific; shallow offshore and lower shelf (Griffin & Yaldwyn
1965: 38, figs. 1-8).
Rostrum of two generally rounded lobes. Supraorbital eave
sometimes with minute spinuies but never with a Brominent
spine 1a i des “jetta bd cng COIS WRN ei tae ale le aN

275

72) |

17

18

19

276

19(18)

20(19)

21(15)

22(21)

23(21)

24(3)

25 (24)

REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Carapace smooth, lacking prominent tubercles. Dactyli of ambula-
tories 3 and 4 almost semicircular, ventrally spinulated for
Gistalie2/3i eer A. lacertosus Stimpson, 1857
(= A. breviceps Haswell, 1880); small; SE, NE, NW; Indo-West
Pacific; sublittoral (Stimpson 1907: 20, ‘pl. iil fig. a)

Carapace with at least two prominent tubercles on cardiac
region. Dactyli of ambulatories 3 and 4 strongly falcate but
not semicircular, ventrally spinulated for entire length ....

Rostrum of two strong lobes separated by a narrow V or U
sinus, often weakly convergent distally. Intestinal region with
a small tubercle . . A. brevirostris (Haswell, 1879)
(= A. affinis Miers, 1884): ‘small; SE, NE, N, NW; Indian O.,
Indo-Malaya; sublittoral to shallow offshore (Haswell 1880a:
432) pls a xoxuV Lee ei )))-

Rostrum of two pointed lobes, each with a small, sharp, distal
projection. Intestinal region without a tubercle . . . Achaeus sp.
Known only from a single small female taken off Cairns (NE)
in 28 fms. (Griffin & Yaldwyn 1965:38).

Carapace with protogastric regions each bearing a stone. tubercle;
branchial margin also with a tubercle or spine ....

Carapace smooth dorsally and without spines posterolateraly
on branchial margin oe a)

Palm of chela dorsally prolonged into a terminal spine. Merus
of cheliped with four ventral spines . .
P.. bituberculatus ‘Haswell, 1880
(= P.. bituberculatus var. gracilis Miers, 1884); very small;
restricted to Australia, NE; sublittoral (Haswell 1880c: 303,
pl. XVI figs 1, 2).

Palm of chela not prolonged into a terminal spine. Merus of
cheliped unarmed . . . P. pubescens Miers, 1879
Very small; N; Indo- West Pacific: sublittoral to shallow offshore
(Miers ieee 45, pl. 2 figs 6, 6a, b; Sakai 1965: 66, pl. 26
HES Se)

Palm of chela smooth. Merus of cheliped smooth dorsally and
with two tubercles ventrally . . . P. sexspinosus Miers, 1884
Very small; NE, N; Indian O., Japan; sublittoral (Miers 1884:
2614) pleecxVillifics:s Bs 'bs) bi):

Palm of chela dorsally spinulous, outer surface with granulations
and spinules. Merus of cheliped with numerous spinules dorsally
and a few ventrally .. . P. latipes Haswell, 1880
(= P. latipes var. quadridentata Baker, 1906); small; restricted
to Australia, SE, S, SW; sublittoral (Hale 1927: 123, fig. 119).

Eyes without true orbits, lacking a Beal CUB: Byestaits
variously elongate Li

Eyes with commencing Eos fave in saditon® to ‘the supra-
orbital eave which is sometimes produced into a preorbital
spine, a large cupped postorbital process into which the eyestalk
retracts. Eyestalks short . . . . . Subfamily PISINAE

Eyestalks long, orbit partially protected by a hornlike supraorbital
spine or by a jagged postorbital tooth or by both . . :
Subfamily OPHTHALMIINAE

Eyestalks short, little moveable and either concealed by a pre-
orbital spine or sunk in sides of rostrum .....
Subfamily ACANTHONYCHINAE

20

22

23

25

36

26

26(25)

27(26)

28 (26)

29(25)

30(29)

GRIFFIN

Supraorbital eave hardly expanded and bearing only a small
antorbital spine. Rostrum of two weakly curved spines less
than 1/3 postrostral carapace length. Branchial margin with
small tubercles or unarmed . . . Zewa McCulloch, 1913 ....
Australia, Japan; see McCulloch (1913), Sakai (1938); 4;
Australian species, both of which are not known overseas,
lack prominent marginal branchial tubercles.

Supraorbital eave prominently expanded with a strongly developed

' antorbital spine and/or preorbital spine. Rostrum either of
two straight spines 2/3 postrostral carapace length or of two
exceedingly short and strongly curved spines. Branchial margins
with 2-3 long spines ....

Postorbital lobe with a strong tubercle. Posterior intestinal margin

rounded . . Z. varians (Miers, tg)
Medium; SE, NE, N, NW; sublittoral (Calman 1900: 39, pl. 2
figs. 25, 26).

Postorbital lobe without an anterior tubercle. Posterior intestinal
margin with a strong medial tubercle . .
Z. banfieldi “McCulloch, 1913
Medium; known only from near Cairns (NE); littoral (McCul-
loch 1913: 332, pl. X figs. 5, 6)).

Supraorbital eave rounded anteriorly, antorbital spine greatly
elongated. Rostral spines widely separated, straight, 2/3 eae
carapace length. Branchial margins with 3 spines .

Picroceros A. Milne Edwards 1865
N. Caledonia, Lord Howe, N. Hebrides, Japan; monotypic:
P. armatus A. Milne Edwards, 1865; very large; NE; sublittoral;
further distinguished by single gastric spine and single posterior
intestinal spine; carapace spines sometimes knobbed (Sakai 1938:
DATE fist 4-5 ple xO, fils e2))

Supraorbital eave with strongly developed, subequal preorbital
and antorbital spines. Rostral spines arising close together,
strongly curved outwards, less than 1/6 postrostral carapace
length. Branchial margins with two spines .

Criocarcinus H. Milne’ Edwards, 1834
Indo-West Pacific; monotypic: C. superciliosus (Herbst, 1803);
large; known in Australia only from Low Isles, Great Barrier
Reef (NE) (to be reported elsewhere by F. A. McNeill);
littoral (A. Milne Edwards, 1872: 242, pl. 12 fig. 3; Sakai
1938: 251, text-fig. 26).

Rostrum of two spines separate from base. A forwardly produced
preorbital spine and a postorbital spine both present. Abdomen
in female of 6 or 7 free segments
Rostrum single or only distally bifid. 'Preorbital spine present
or absent, postorbital sping absent. Abdomen in female of only
5 free segments 3

Rostrum short, less than 4 postrostral carapace iereth eran chial
margin with a prominent spine or lobe . . . Pugettia Dana, 1851
Indo-West Pacific and E. Pacific to California, 18: P. mosaica
Whitelegge, 1900; small; restricted to Australia, SE; shallow
offshore to lower shelf; further distinguished by strongly granu-
lated carapace and dorsally narrow postorbital lobe (Whitelegge
1900: 141, pl. XXXV figs. 5-7).

Rostrum moderately long, more than 1/3 postrostral carapace
length. Branchial margin lacking a lobe or spine .....

Antilibinia Macleay, 1838
South Africa, Philippines and Australia, 3: A. lappacea Rathbun,
1918; small; known only from Great Australian Bight (SW) near
Eucla in 200-300 fms; further distinguished by prominent
hepatic spine and length of rostral spines and preorbital spine
(Rathbun 1918: 12, fig. 3; pl. vii fig. 3).

277

27

28

30

31

278 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

31(29) Supraorbital eave with a strong, forwardly directed preorbital spine.
Branchial regions, at least, with prominent lateral expansions.
Rostrum slender, abdomen in male of 7 free segments ....

— Orbit with a weakly expanded eave lacking spines. Margins of
carapace weakly expanded. Rostrum a stout “beak.” Abdomen
in male of only 5 free segments .....
Xenocarcinus White, 1847 .... 35
Indo-West Pacific, 5; see Gordon (1934), Sakai (1938, 1965);
upper orbital margin may be weakly notched once or twice.

32(31) Rostrum distally acute or bifid, either downwardly deflexed and
depressed, or horizontal, compressed and vertically deep. Carapace
smooth or with only a few (1-5) tubercles dorsally. Hepatic
margin, at least in female, prominently expanded ... ... .... 33

—_ Rostrum distally acute, horizontal and depressed, vertically shallow.
Carapace with numerous scattered tubercles dorsally. Hepatic
margin not prominently expanded in either sex .
Menaethius H. Milne Edwards, 1834
Widespread Indo-West Pacific; monotypic: M. monoceros
(Latreille, 1825); small; NE, N, NW; littoral (Barnard 1950:
43, figs. 9 g, h; Sakai 1965: 74, pl. 33 fig. 4).

33(32) Hepatic expansions well developed in both sexes and separated
from branchial expansions by a shallow concavity or closed
fissure. Rostrum downwardly deflexed

Sargassocarcinus Ward, 1936
Australia, Philippines and Japan; see Sakai (1965); 2: S. cristatus
(Balss, 1924) (= S. foliatus Ward, 1936); small; in Australia
known only from Lindeman I., Whitsunday Passage (NE);
Japan; littoral; further distinguished by sharply carinate and
lobate ambulatory legs (Ward 1936: 9, pl. III figs. 4-6; Sakai
1965: 77,,, text-figs. “1la} .b, pl: 34- fig:, 3).

— Hepatic expansions well developed in female and clearly separated
by a wide fissure from branchial expansions, poorly developed
in male. Rostrum horizontal . . . . Huenia de Haan, 1839 ... 34
Widespread Indo-West Pacific, 3; species show extreme variation
in carapace shape, particularly between sexes.

34(33) Rostrum distally simple and acute. Branchial expansion rounded,
subacute, or sometimes bilobed . . . H. proteus de Haan, 1839
Medium; S, NW, N; widespread “Indo-West Pacific; littoral,
(Hale 1927: 133, fig. 132; Barnard 1950: 41, figs. 9 a-f:
Sakai (19657554 plao4) Lesa 1ee2)

—- Rostrum distally bifid. Branchial expansion bi- or trilobed.

H. bifurcata Streets, 1870

Medium; restricted to Australia, SE; littoral; distally bifid
rostrum appears most reliable character (Haswell 1882c: 8).
Figured here pl. XV, figs. d, e.

35(31) Carapace uneven, bearing several very ‘prominent tubercles.
Rostrum distally notched. Ambulatory legs smooth .....
X. tuberculatus White, 1847
Medium; NE; Hong Kong, Japan; littoral and shallow offshore
(Sakai 1965: 91, text-fig. 13, pl. 42 fig. 5).
— Carapace depressed, bearing a few indistinct granules. Rostrum
deeply bifid. Ambulatory legs tuberculate ais
X. depressus Miers, 1874
Small; SE, N; Indo-Malaya, N. Caledonia, Japan; littoral
(Gordon 1934: 70, fig. 36 a-d).

36(24)slntercalatedigspine; presentiatis” 2:..ieeds ee ieverieck eee ee eT
= Intercalated’ spine absent’ 08.0 480.08... Yeh bins ena

37(36)

38 (37)

39(38)

40(39)

41(38)

GRIFFIN

Abdomen of seven segments in both sexes. Carapace pyriform.
Supraorbital eave laterally expanded. Ambulatory legs generally
short, seldom more than twice carapace length, usually less ....

Abdomen of seven segments in male, of five in female. Carapace
subtriangular. Supraorbital eave almost unexpanded laterally.
Ambulatory legs extremely long and slender, the first three
times carapace length . . . . Phalangipus Latreille, 1825 ....
Indo-West Pacific; Rathbun (1916); 6.

Rostrum without an accessory spinule. Carapace variously smooth
or granular, tuberculate or epinens, ygembulatory legs little
longer than carapace . Lsehad Loky WO Peete ncde tae eee TEA)

Rostrum with an accessory spinule not far from tip. Carapace with
well defined granules, spinules and spines. First ambulatory legs
at least 14 times carapace length . .

Naxioides A. Milne Edwards, 1865 .
Indo-West Pacific, 9

Carapace, broad, smooth or granular. Basal antennal article broad,
bearing two strong spines distally, one medial and one lateral
Herbstia H. Milne Edwards, 1834
E. & W. central America, S.E. Atlantic, Mediterranean, Australia;
see Garth (1958), Rathbun (1918), 10: A. crassipes (A. Milne
Edwards, 1873); known only from Bass Strait (SE) in unknown
depth; further distinguished by absence of spines on lateral
margin of carapace (Haswell 1882: 12, no fig.).

Carapace narrow, dorsally bearing numerous rounded tubercules.
Basal antennal article slender, truncate distally or bearing
anterolaterally a lobe or spine AE MUS LS

Supraorbital eave rounded anterolaterally. Tubercles of carapace
arranged in distinct groups. Rostral spines widely separated
from base . . . . Eurynome Leach 1817
Indo-West Pacific, E. Atlantic, " Mediterranean; genus reviewed
in Griffin (1964), 8-9: E. granulosa Baker 1906; very small;
known only from “South Australian coast” in 100-104 fms.
(Griffin 1965:30, figs. 1-5).

Supraorbital eave produced into a strong, forwardly directed

spine. Tubercles of carapace scattered. Rostral spines fused basally

Tylocarcinus Miers, 1879

Widespread Indo-West Pacific; 2: T. styx (Herbst, 1803); small;

N, NE; Indo-West Pacific; littoral; further distinguished by spinous

ambulatory meri and denticulate dactyli (Sakai 1938: 271, pl.
XXXVI fig. 5).

Rostral spines about ? postrostral length of carapace, divergent
from base. Dorsal surface of carapace with numerous tubercles
sometimes enlarged into straight spines in mid-dorsal regions . . .

N. taurus (Pocock, 1890)
(? = N. cerastes Ortmann, 1894); small; N; Indian Ocean, shal-
low offshore (Alcock 1895: 219-20; Alcock & Anderson 1897: pl.
XXXIII figs. 2-2a, 5-Sa).

Rostral spines as long as postrostral length of carapace, subparallel
basally, weakly divergent distally only. Dorsal surface of carapace
with numerous large, curved spines . . . N. robillardi Miers, 1882
Very large; SE; Mauritius, China S.; shallow offshore (Miers
1882: 339, pl. 20).

279

38

42

39

41

40

280 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

42(37) Median suborbital tooth much deflexed and bounded by a broad
U sinus on both sides. Lobe on first abdominal segment in both
sexes arcuate and occupying nearly whole width of segment...

P. australiensis Rathbun, 1918
Small; restricted to Australia, known only from Platypus B.
(NE) in 7-9 fms; further distinguished by absence of accessory
spinule on rostral spines (Rathbun 1918: 15, pl. VI)

— Median suborbital tooth bounded by a V-sinus on both sides.
Lobe on first abdominal segment in both sexes small, almost
pointed, occupying much less than whole width of segment .

P. longipes (Linnaeus, 1767)
(= “Egeria Aragnoides” Rumphius, 1705; E. herbstii H. Milne
Edwards, 1834); small; NE, N; Indian Ocean; shallow offshore;
carapace generally prominently spinous (Haswell 1882:12—no
recent fig.).

43(36) Abdomen of seven segments in both sexes. Rostral spines generally
distinct from base. Carapace with slender spines or tubercles.
Ambulatory legs generally long, if. short then carapace weakly
tuberculate..))

= Abdomen in male of seven ‘segments, “of five segments in female.
Rostral spines basally coalescent. Carapace with stout spines,
ambulatory legs short or EANADICS with slender spines, anbulaioy
legs long oa oe Aten, Ber Sid) <a ge Sees Se UE a

44(43) Rostral spines slender, in feet at least 1/6 tidosteostied portion
of carapace and usually longer. Supraorbital eave not in close
contact with postorbital lobe ....

— Rostral spines stout, in length less ‘than 1/6 postrostral portion
of carapace. Supraorbital eave separated from postorbital lobe
by an extremely narrow fissure or completely coalesced with it ....

45(44) Supraorbital eave rounded anterolaterally and posterolaterally. Cara-
pace completely smooth. Micippoides A. Milne Edwards, 1873
Widespread Indo-West Pacific; monotypic: M. angustifrons A.
Milne Edwards, 1873 (= Hyastenus andrewsi Calman, 1909);
small; E. New Guinea; littoral; further distinguished by weakly
denticulate ambulatory dactyli, body and legs covered by very
long hair (Calman 1909: 711, pl. LXII figs. 6, 7).

— Supraorbital eave at least anterolaterally acute, sometimes produced
into a preorbital spine. Carapace with several prominent spines
and/or tubercles or else granular *

46(45) Supraorbital eave separated from postorbital fabe! iby a broad U
sinus, posterolaterally unarmed, anterolaterally armed with a
strong preorbital spine. Rostral spines fused for a short distance
basally. Basal antennal article distally truncate . .

Rochinia A. Milne Edwards, 1875
Indo-West Pacific and E. Pacific, Atlantic and Mediterranean;
see Garth (1958); 18: R. fultoni (Grant, 1905) n. comb.;
medium; restricted to SE Australia; lower shelf and slope to
300 fms.; further distinguished by 1 medial gastric, 1 medial
cardiac, 1 medial intestinal and 1 lateral branchial spine
(Rathbun 1918: 14, pl. V)

— Supraorbital eave posterolaterally acute, separated from postorbital
lobe by a wide V or sometimes U sinus, anterolaterally acute
but seldom produced. Rostral spines separated from base. Basal
antennal article with an anterolateral spine or lobe .. .

Hyastenus White, 1847
Tropical Indo-Pacific; list of species in Balss (1935): 38.

47(46) Denuded carapace with dorsal surface bearing numerous tubercles
or spines and erosions

— Denuded carapace with a few spines or tubercles, often smoothly
polished ee ie cpr ‘ NE Ce RSL

44

60

45

59

46

47

48
49

48 (47)

49(47)

50(49)

51(50)

52(49)

53(52)

54(53)

GRIFFIN

Rostral spines as long as postrostral portion of carapace. Surface
of carapace eroded but indistinctly tuberculate . .
H. sebae White, 1847
Small; N, NW; Indian O., Endo ialy a: geublittorel (Alcock
1895: 213). Figured here pl. XV, figs. b,
Rostral spines about 4 postrostral carapace Se tereti Surface of
carapace distinctly papers mc
H. oryx "A. Milne Edwards, 1872
Medium; NE, N, NW, SW; Indian O., Indo-Malaya; sublittoral
to shallow offshore (A. Milne Edwards 1872: 250, pl. XIV
fig. 1; Haswell 1882:20).

Rostral spines less than 1/5 postrostral portion of carapace ....
Rostral spines at least 1/3 pos osrat carapace euet and eenerally
longer

Gastric regions iti ees aeaten fiberciee: a eminent rectal
tubercle on cardiac region and on posterior intestinal margin;
dorsal surface otherwise with several tubercles laterally . .

H. verrucosipes (Adams & White, 1848)
Small; in Australia known only from Torres Strait in 15-20 fms;
Indo-Malaya (Calman 1900: 36, pl. 2 figs. 23, 24).

Gastric region with a single tubercle medially, dorsal surface

otherwise with some tubercles laterally but none mid-dorsally ....

Rostral spines outwardly curved distally . .
H. minimus "Rathbun, 1924
Very small; restricted to Australia, known only from (S
Jaubert (NW) in 5-7 fms. (Rathbun 1924: 4, fig. 1).
Rostral spines subparallel, weakly curved inwards distally.
H. planasius (Adams & White, 1848)
Medium; in Australia known only from Pt. Denison (NE); New
Guinea, Indian O., Indo-Malaya; shallow offshore (Adams &
White, 1848: 9, pl. ii figs. 4, 5; Alcock 1895: 212).

Branchial regions with a spine close to lateral margin, at widest
part of carapace, markedly longer than any other spine or
tubercle except rostral spines ....

Branchial regions with a small tubercle or spine ‘close to lateral
margin, at widest part of carapace, little longer than other
tubercles of carapace cin one Sale ms acm ee rule

Gastric regions with two medial tubercles or spines, cardiac
region with a central tubercle. Rostral spines sinuous . .
H. spinosus A. Milne Edwards, 1872
Large; in Australia known only from Torres Strait in 5- 7 fms;
South Africa, Fiji (Barnard 1950: 53, fig. 11f).
Gastric regions with a single medial tubercle; cardiac region without
a tubercle. Rostral spines straight . pan ae 4

Intestinal region without a tubercle. Lateral branchial spine Phone
a subdorsal tubercle in front of it.....
H. diacanthus (de Haan, 1839)
Large; SE, NE, N, NW, SW; widespread Indo-West Pacific
sublittoral to shallow offshore; rostrum in female often shorter
than in male, lateral branchial spine often greatly reduced,
abdomen of female of 5 segments (Alcock 1895: 210; Sakai
1965: 81, pl. 36 fig. 1).
Intestinal region with a strong tubercle. Lateral branchial spine
with a tubercle above and in front of it . .
H. auctus Rathbun, 1916
Small; in Australia known only from near C. Jaubert (NW) in
12- pe fms; Philippines (Rathbun 1916: 543). Figured here, pl.
xv, fig. a.

281

50
52

Sil

53

55

54

282

55(52)

56(55)

57(56)

58(57)

59(44)

REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Carapace strongly tuberculate. Rostral spines almost as long as
postrostral carapace length . . . . H. brockii de Man, 1888
Medium; in Australia known only from Torres Strait (N);
ee O., Indo-Malaya; sublittoral (de Man 1888: 221, pl. 7
g. :

Carapace weakly tuberculate or granular or sometimes smooth.
Rostral spines Weaae 3 Postrostral carapace fect sometimes
longer .. : : : ir eee ae" MP Meer S55)

Rostral spines 2/3 postrostral carapace length. A single medial
gastric tubercle and several granules laterally .....
borradailei (Rathbun, 1907)
Medium; in Australia known only from C. Jaubert (NW); Indo-
West Pacific; sublittoral to shallow offshore; further distinguished
by 5 gastric granules in a transverse row, body covered by a
thick tomentum (Rathbun 1911: 251, pl. 20 fig. 5).

Rostral spines 4 postrostral carapace length. paar with
gastric and intestinal tubercles medially or else smooth .

Carapace completely smooth except for lateral branchial tubercle.
Supraorbital eave produced as a blunt forwardly directed spine
H. irami (Laurie, 1906)

Very small; in Australia known only from C. Jaubert (NW);
Ceylon; sublittoral (Laurie 1906: 379, pl. 1 figs. 4, 4a).

Carapace with at least a trace of 1 or 2 medial tubercles in
gastric, cardiac and intestinal regions. Rare rae eave acute
anteriorly but not forwardly produced .. ot Be ge

Rostral spines curved slightly outwards distally. Branchial regions
with 2-3 smail tubercles laterally including that at widest part of
CATAPACE ema ele so Bieta whl COMVEXUSS INIICTS a SO
Small; NE, N, NW; Indian O., Indo-Malaya; sublittoral to
shallow offshore (Miers 1884: 196, pl. XVIII figs. B, b).

Rostral spines curved slightly inwards distally. Branchial regions
completely smooth laterally except for small spine at widest part
OP MCarapace Meine tens lane H. espinosus Borradaile, 1903
Small; in Australia known only from C. Jaubert (NW); Maldive
Archipelago; sublittoral (Borradaile 1903: 688, pl. XLVII
figs. 4a-d).

Carapace armed with several prominent tubercles and generally a
few spines. Supraorbital eave and postorbital lobe separated by
a narrow fissure. Ambulatory legs smooth . . Doclea Leach, 1814
Tropical Indo-Pacific, 13: D. profunda Rathbun, 1918; small;
known only from a single ovigerous female taken in Great
Australian Bight, south of Eucla “(SW), in 250-450 fms; further
distinguished by single cardiac and intestinal spine and single
hepatic and branchial marginal spines; narrowly pyriform carapace
unusual for this genus (Rathbun 1918: 16 pl. VII figs. 1, 2) .

Carapace unevenly and indistinctly tuberculate, lacking spines.
Supraorbital eave completely fused with postorbital lobe. Ambula-
tory legs armed with a few spines and tubercles... .

Perinia Dana, 1851
Widespread Indo-West Pacific, monotypic: P. tumida Dana,
1851 (= Parathoe rotundata Miers, 1879); very small; NE;
littoral; further distinguished by short, broad, apically inwardly
curved rostral spines and denticulate dactyli (Miers 1879b: 16,
pl. V fig. 2, 2a; Sakai 1938: 294, fig. 40).

56

57

58

60(43)

61(1)

62(61)

63(62)

64(63)

GRIFFIN

Supraorbital eave well expanded posterolaterally, separated from
postorbital lobe by an extremely narrow fissure. Rostrum bifid
for distal half only. Carapace armed with a few slender spines
Ambulatory legs long, the first at least twice carapace length,
slender, smooth. . . Austrolibinia, n. gen.
India, New Guinea, Australia, 2: vi gracilipes (Miers, 1879)
n. comb.; small; NE, N, NW; New Guinea; shallow offshore;
further distinguished by 2 medial gastric and 1 medial cardiac
spine, a broad, acute intestinal lobe and 2 dorsal branchial
spines (Miers 1879b: 7, pl. IV figs. 4, 4a).

Supraorbital eave weakly expanded posterolaterally, separated from
postorbital lobe by a wide U sinus. Rostrum less than 1/6
postrostral carapace length, bifid for at least distal 2/3. Carapace
armed with numerous, short, very coarse spines. Ambulatory
legs little longer than carapace, stout, spinous . .

Hoplophrys Henderson, 1893
Tropical Indo-West Pacific; see Alcock (1895), Sakai (1932),
Buitendijk (1939); 2: H. ogilbyi McCulloch, 1908; small; in
Australia known only from Moreton B. (NE); Indo- Malaya
(Moluccas, Ceram), ?Japan; sublittoral; further distinguished by
simple spine at lateral branchial angle (McCulloch 1908: 51,
lk ocN te, 2, PE).

Basal antennal article not specially expanded to form a floor
to the orbit, which is formed by a supraorbital eave, a postorbital
lobe and an intercalated spine between the two

Subfamily MAJINAE

Basal antennal article expanded to form a floor to the orbit which
is formed above by eave and postorbital lobe; intercalated spine
present or absent . .. . . Subfamily MITHRACINAE. ....

Postorbital lobe a simple acute spine more or less isolated from
orbit and affording no concealment to cornea of eyestalk ....

Postorbital lobe cupped, close to orbit and affording. some con-
cealment to cornea of retracted eyestalk .... : Sows

Rostral spines shorter than width at base, fused for basal 1/3.
Postorbital spine no longer than intercalated spine. Basal antennal
article slightly narrowed anteriorly, lateral margin notched
distally. Carapace very weakly tuberculate . .

Paramithrax H. Milne Edwards, 1834
Restricted to Australia, monotypic: P. barbicornis (Latreille,
1825) (= Gonatorhynchus tumidus Haswell, 1880); medium;
SW, S, SE; littoral to shallow offshore; further distinguished by
two small marginal branchial tubercles (Griffin 1963b: 137,
figs. 7-14).

Rostral spines longer than their width at base, distinct from base.
Postorbital spine distinctly longer than intercalated spine. Basal
antennal article of even width throughout, or produced into
a lobe anterolaterally, not notched laterally or narrowed cistally.
Carapace spinous or densely tuberculate .... Bhi ct Sea ie

Chelipeds in adult male robust, merus tuberculate or spinous,
carpus with a dorsal and lateral longitudinal ridge. Eyestalks
not especially slender and hardly reaching postorbital spine . . .

Notomithrax Griffin, 1963
South Pacific to Juan Fernandez; review of species in Griffin
(1963a); 5

283°

62

81

63

66

64

65

284

65 (64)

66(62)

67(66)

68 (67)

69(68 )

REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Chelipeds in both sexes slender and unarmed, carpus sub-cylindrical,
lacking ridges. Eyestalks long and slender, reaching postorbital
spine. ; 5 ; iy EN F . Maja Lamarck, 1801
Tropical Indo-West Pacific, E. Atlantic & Mediterranean, 15:
M. miersii Walker, 1890; large; in Australia known only from
C. Jaubert (NW); Singapore, Japan; sublittoral to shallow
offshore; further distinguished by 2 medial and 5 marginal spines
(Sakai 1938: 298, pl. XXXVIII fig. 2).

Carapace with both spines and tubercles dorsally. Hepatic margin

with two spines, branchial margin with seven spines... . .

: N. minor (Filhol, 1885)

(= Paramithrax peronii; Haswell, 1882); large; SE, NE; New

Zealand; sublittoral to lower shelf; further distinguished by spines

of branchial margin being alternately large and small; usually

thickly covered by algae, hydroids and sponges (Rathbun 1918:
18, pl. VID).

Carapace with numerous low tubercles dorsally. Hepatic and
branchial margins each with three spines .. .
N. ursus (Herbst, 1788)
(= Paramithrax latreillei Miers, 1876); large; SE; New Zealand;
littoral; hepatic and branchial marginal spines decrease in size
posteriorly, body thickly hirsute (Griffin in press, b, fig.).

Postorbital lobe sometimes with spines or tubercles on posterior
edge but mot om anterior upper edge .... .... 2... 2. 0 we we
Postorbital lobe with a prominent accessory spine on upper anterior
EGge NEAT DASE Henle Hee eA eRe iy ee it nr ier ae Uece ore Ameen eee

Supraorbital eave seldom with a preorbital spine. Rostral spines
straight but divergent, seldom more than 1/6 postrostral portion
of carapace in length. Carapace densely tuberculate, margins
spinous. Chelipeds with merus and carpus variously tuberculate . .

Leptomithrax Miers, 1876 ....
Australasia, Indo-Malaya, Japan; review of Australian and New
Zealand species in Griffin (in press, b); 16; all Australian species
except L. tuberculatus restricted to Australia.

Supraorbital eave with a prominent preorbital lobe directed out-
wards or upwards. Rostral spines straight and divergent, or,
more usually, outwardly curved distally, in length at least 4
postrostral portion of carapace. Carapace with a few scattered
long or short spines or lamellae, otherwise smooth. Chelipeds
with merus and carpus smooth or with well-developed longitudinal
crests . 2. 2. 2.2... © Chlorinoides Haswell, 1880
Indo-West Pacific; reviewed in detail in Griffin in press, a); 12.

Intercalated spine not nearly reaching tip of antorbital spine,
almost excluded from outer rim of supraorbital margin by distal
approximation of antorbital spine and postorbital lobe. Ambula-
tory legs hardly longer than carapace .... se Sptd REM A tee

Intercalated spine reaching to tip of antorbital spine, not excluded
from rim of supraorbital margin. Ambulatory legs at least 14
times!iccarapace} Mien sth jee: ame ete ea meee ee Cen ms ene

Sternum and abdomen smooth in adults and juveniles of both
sexes. Carapace weakly tuberculate. Two marginal branchial
Spinesitnyan we . . . . XL. parvispinosus (Ward, 1933)
Medium; SE, NE; littoral; orbit becomes slightly more open
in larger specimens (Ward 1933: 392, pl. XXIII fig. 4).

67

78

68

73

69

71

70(69)

71(68)

72(71)

73 (67)

74(73)

GRIFFIN

Sternum or abdomen, or both, excavated as rimmed pits in adult
males and juveniles. Carapace strongly tuberculate. Three or four
marginal branchial spines .

Postorbital lobe acuminate. Four marginal branchial spiness ot
L. tuberculatus (Whitelegge, 1900)
Medium to large; SE; New Zealand, Kermadecs; shallow off-
shore to lower shelf; Australian forms with short marginal and
long dorsal spines (Whitelegge 1900: 146, pl. XXXIV figs. 1, 2).
Postorbital lobe truncate distally. Three marginal branchial spines
L. sternocostulatus (H. Milne Edwards, 1851)
Medium to large; S, SE, NE, NW; shallow offshore; further
distinguished by sternal excavations being wholly segmental

(Hale? 19272 187, ne.) 137).

Carapace narrowly pyriform, width no more than } postrostral
length. Postorbital lobe distally slender with a single small
spinule close to tip and numerous small tubercles around base.
First ambulatory leg twice carapace length.....

L. globifer Rathbun, 1918
Large to very large; SW; lower shelf and slope to 120 fms.
(Rathbun 1918: 23, pls. X, XI).

Carapace broadly pyriform, at least in adult, width at least 2/3
postrostral length. Postorbital lobe subtriangular, distal portion
not especially slender, a prominent spine or tubercle close to
tip and another about halfway along posterior cane First
ambulatory leg no more than 14 times carapace length .

Mid-dorsal regions of carapace thickly covered by both spines
and tubercles. Ambulatory meri with a blunt terminal dorsal
lobe” «>. . L. gaimardii (H. Milne Edwards, 1834)
(SS fhe australiensis Miers, 1876; L. spinulosus Haswell, 1880);
very large; SW, S, SE; sublittoral to slope down to 450 fms;
postorbital lobe with sharp spinules in juvenile and blunt
tubercles in adult (Hale 1927: 135, fig. 135: Griffin 1963b:
133, figs. 1-6, pls. 6, 7)

Mid-dorsal regions of carapace smooth except for a few short,
prominent spines. Ambulatory meri with a prominent sharp
terminal dorsal spine . . L. waitei (Whitelegge, 1900).
Very large; SE; shallow offshore to lower shelf; postorbital
lobe with sharp accessory spines in juveniles and adults
(Whitelegge 1900: 143, pl. XXXIII).

Preorbital lobe vertically directed upwards from base. Carapace
with a few long spines but no lamellae. Rostral spines with a
small spinule on dorsal surface near tip .

C. tenuirostris Haswell, 1880
Medium; restricted to Australia; NE, N; shallow offshore (Griffin
in press, a, fig.).

Preorbital lobe outwardly directed, at least basally. Carapace with
a’ few spines and some lamellae, particularly around margins
and above orbit. Rostral spines without a spinule on dorsal
surface .. . Besa eens oR Al Rea a ee REP nS Poem

Rostral spines "straight, "divergent, distal width less than twice
basal width. Branchial margins with three spines and, anteriorly,
a small lamella. Ambulatory legs with numerous prominent
tubercles dorsally arranged in rows . . E

Cc: goldsboroughi “Rathbun, 1906
Medium; in Australia known from 2 specimens taken off N.S.W.
coast in 70-120 fms; Hawaii (Rathbun 1906: 881, pl. XIV fig. 7).

Rostral spines weakly or strongly outwardly curved, very divergent,
distal width at least 24 times basal width. Branchial margins
with two spines posteriorly. Se nUlatory legs smooth or CUTE
spinous... .. : EE De read Be bcc:

285

70

UW

74

75

286

75(74)

76(75)

77(75)

78 (66)

79(78)

80(78)

REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Antorbital lobe a narrow, flattened, distally rounded lamella,
preorbital lobe much wider and somewhat pees Rostral
spines weakly curved +

Antorbital and preorbital lobes subequal, ASTRAL. feescaie epincd
very strongly curved outwards distally . Rear nasa c

Preorbital lobe simple, acuminate. Rostral spines unarmed. Posterior
intestinal margin with a short, cylindrical spine . . ;
C. albanyensis (Ward, 1933)
Medium; restricted to Australia, NE; sublittoral to shallow
offshore (Ward 1933: 391, pl. XXIII fig. 3).

Preorbital lobe wide distally, truncate or bifid. Rostral spines
armed with several strong spines medially. Posterior intestinal
margin with a wide, flattened lamella . .

(Ci spatulifer (Haswell, 1882)
(= Acanthophrys aculeatus A. Milne Edwards, 1865); medium;
restricted to Australia, SW, S, SE; sublittoral to slope down to
250 fms (Hale 1927: 137, fig. 138).

Preorbital spine simple. A single cardiac spine. Intestinal region
with two medial spines . . C. aculeatus (H. Milne Edwards, 1834)
(= Acanthophrys aculeatus var. armatus Miers, 1884); large;
NE, N, NW; Indian O., Japan; sublittoral to lower shelf (Miers
1884: 193, pl. XVIII, fig. A).

Preorbital lobe divided into two distinct spines. Cardiac region
with a pair of widely divergent, outwardly curved spines.
Intestinal region with a single spine ......

C. longispinus (de Haan, ee
(= Paramithrax coppingeri Haswell, 1880); large; SE, NE,
widespread Indo-West Pacific; shallow offshore (Sakai 1965: ae
pl. 40 fig. 1).

Carapace suborbicular. Rostrum exceedingly short, 1/8-1/20
postrostral carapace length, unarmed . . . Cyclax Dana, 1851 ....
ee Indo-Pacific; detailed account in Forest & Guinot

1961);

Carapace pyriform. Rostrum of moderate length, more than 1/5
postrostral carapace length, bearing one or two spines or
tubercles laterally near base . . . Schizophrys White, 1847 ....
Widespread Indo-West Pacific; 2.

Intercalated spine distally with three subequal spinules. Basal
antennal article with a strong accessory spine between antero-
lateral and anteromedial spines. Marginal spines of carapace
granular almost to tip . . . C. suborbicularis (Stimpson, 1858)
(= Cyclomaia margaritata A. Milne Edwards, 1872); SW, NW;
Seychelles to Tahiti; littoral (Forest & Guinot 1961: 15, figs.
5105) LOSS ple Wali SSse ate)

Intercalated spine triangular, granulate basally only. Basal antennal
article lacking an accessory spine between main anterior spines.
Marginal spines of carapace granular only at their bases .. .

C. spinicinctus Heller, 1861
Medium; SW, N, NE; E. Africa to Samoa; littoral (Forest &
Guinot 1961: 15, figs. 7, 8, 11; pl. VI, fig. 3).

Rostrum with a single lateral spine. Surface of carapace bearing
a few groups of prominent tubercles, especially posteriorly and
several spines . . . S. aspera (H. Milne Edwards, 1834)
Large; S, NE, N, NW, SW; widespread Indo-West Pacific;
littoral (Hale 1927: 134, fig. 139). Figured here pl. xvi, figs. a, b

Rostrum with two lateral spines or tubercles. Surface of carapace
densely covered by low tubercles dorsally . .

S. dama (Herbst, 1804)
Large; SW, NW; Indo-Malaya; littoral (Yaldwyn, 1964, fig.).

76
Ui]

79

80

81(61)

82(81)

83(82)

84(83)

85(84)

86(84)

GRIFFIN

Intercalated spine present .... Lei a
Intercalated spine absent (possibly aretent’ in Opardnaie) Per

Rostrum vesly deflexed, of two slender spines distinct from
base & 4 ei oaks ; 7 . _Entomonyx Miers, 1884
Indian O., Japan; monotypic: E. spinosus Miers, 1884
(= Acanthophrys SLnOSESS Balss, 1929); small; in Australia
known only from Dampier I. (NW); shallow offshore and lower
shelf; further distinguished by two marginal branchial spines
and densely tuberculate chelipeds (Miers 1884:526, pl. XLVII
fig. B; Sakai 1965: 88, pl. 40 fig. 2).

Rostrum generally steeply deflexed, broad, lamellar, of two
spines fused for at least basal third .

Micippa Leach, Si yea
Tropical Indo-Pacific; see Miers (1885), Sakai (1938), Buitendijk
(1939);

Eyestalks projecting laterally well beyond postorbital lobe. Rostrum
of two distally distinct, truncate lobes .....
M. tuberculosa (H. Milne Edwards, 1834)
(= Micippa parvirostris Miers, 1879); small; restricted to Austra-
lia, S, SE; littoral; further distinguished by 4 large marginal
branchial spines and broad antennal flagellum (Hale 1927:
140, fig. 142).
Eyestalks reaching only to postr pital lobe. Rostrum of two
acute spines, or distally notched .... rhe EPs Ae ae

Rostrum terminating in two strong submedial lobes flanked by
a short, broad, recurved spine. Carapace soe tuberculate
and lacking spines dorsally ...._ .... n

Rostrum distally bifid or notched, out iateral spines. Oe twats
smooth or eranulate with a few tubercles or p strony tuberculate
and spinous .. ee ere : ' abo

Orbit open below, a wide hiatus between smooth basal antennal
article and postorbital lobe. Anterolateral borders of carapace
with 8-10 spines, anterior spines broad, posterior spines acuminate

M. platipes Ruppell, 1830
(= M. spatulifrons A. Milne Edwards, 1872); small to medium;
NE; widespread Indo-West Pacific; littoral and sublittoral (Sakai
1938: 316, fig. 46; pl. XXXII fig. 2, pl. xxxviii fig. 4; Buitendijk
1939: 254, text-fig. 22, pl. X figs. 2, 4).

Orbit closed below, strongly tuberculate basal antennal article
in broad contact with postorbital lobe. Anterolateral borders with

3-6 acuminate spines or spinules .....
M. philyra (Herbst, 1803)

(= M. superciliosa Haswell, 1880; Paramicippa asperimanus
Miers, 1884; M. mascarenica var. nodulifera Baker, 1905);
medium; SW, NW, N, S; widespread Indo-West Pacific; littoral
and sublittoral (Haswell 1880a: 446, pl. 26 figs. 2, 2a; Buitendijk
a hel text-fig. 21, pl. X figs. fig 3; Sakai 1965: 90, pl. 42
g. 2

Rostrum of two, outwardly curved, sharply pointed spines, distinct
for distal half see M. thalia (Herbst, 1803)
(= M. inermis Haswell, 1880); sw, N, NE; widespread Indo-
West Pacific; medium; ‘sublittoral to shallow offshore; further
distinguished by 2 medial gastric, 2 submedial cardiac, 1
dorsal branchial and 9 marginal branchial spines (Haswell
1880a; 445 pl. 26 figs. 3, 3a; Sakai 1965: 90, pl. 42 fig. 3).

Rostral spines fused throughout their length ....

287

82
88

83

84

85

87

288

87(86)

88(81)

89(88)

90(89)

91(90)

REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Carapace minutely granular dorsally with a few tubercles, antero-
lateral margins with about 3 small spinules. Merus of cheliped
dorsally carinate; ambulatory legs tuberculate . . FRE

M. curtispina Haswell, 1880
Small; NE, N; Singapore; sublittoral; further distinguished by
basally vertically deflexed and apically inflexed rostrum (Haswell
1880a: 446, pl. 25 figs. 1, 1a).

Carapace strongly tuberculate and spinous, anterolateral margins
with about 9 prominent spines of various sizes. Merus of chelipeds
smooth; ambulatory, meri smooth except for a terminal dorsal
spine. . M. spinosa (Stimpson, 1857)
(= Paramicippa’ affinis Miers, 1879); medium; restricted to
Australia, S, SE; sublittoral and shallow offshore (Hale 1927:
140, fig. 143).

Supraorbital eave separated from postorbital lobe by a wide fissure,
not expanded anteriorly into a preorbital spine or lobe. Rostral
spines’ short; broad’ - . 5... Tumulosternum McCulloch, 1913
Restricted to Australia; monotypic: JT. longimanus (Haswell,
1880); medium; SE; littoral (Haswell 1880a: 444, pl. XXVI;
McCulloch 1913: 334, fig. 45).

Supraorbital eave separated from postorbital lobe by a very
narrow fissure or completely unexpanded posterolaterally, armed
with a prominent preorbital spine or lobe. Rostral spines
moderately .tol.very Jong? sie fey Lee. a aks Oe eee me ee

Rostrum of two distinct, subparallel spines, each apically bifid.
Basal antennal article narrowed anteriorly. Carapace weakly
tuberculate. Ambulatory legs smooth . . Paranaxia Rathbun, 1924
Restricted to Australia; monotypic: P. serpulifera (Guérin,
1829); very large; SW, NW, N; sublittoral to shallow offshore
Reiepua 1924: 7, Montgomery 1931:417). Figured here, pl. xvii,

g. a.

Rostrum of two spines, contiguous throughout their length or
at most only apically divergent. Basal antennal article with
anterolateral angle forwardly produced. Carapace with groups
of distinct or confluent tubercles dorsally. Aina tary legs
tuberculate - » Tiarinia Dana, 1851 ....
Tropical Indo-West Pacifi; see Stimpson (1907), Sakai (1938),
Buitendijk (1939);

Rostrum with two or three lateral spines close to base. Carapace
bearing numerous coarse tubercles dorsally .....

T. angusta Dana, 1851

(= T. spinosirostris Haswell, 1882); medium; NE, N; Indo-

Malaya, Japan; littoral; further distinguished by 3 small, curved,
marginal branchial spines (Sakai 1936: 160, fig. 4).

Rostrum unarmed. ne smooth, uneven, or with distant
tubercles ye as a Lo LSE

Rostrum moderately long, about 1/3 postrostral portion of carapace

T. elegans Haswell, 1882

Medium; known only from off Broughton I., Pt. Stephens

(SE) in 25 fms; further distinguished by 2-3 conical submarginal

branchial tubercles (Haswell 1882c: 29). Figured here, pl. xvii,
fig. b.

Rostrum short, less than 1/5 postrostral portion of carapace ....

89

90

91

92

GRIFFIN 289

92(91) Carapace with distinct erect tubercles and granules dorsally,
branchial region with six obtuse tubercles laterally .. .
T. cornigera (Latreille, 1825)
(= T. mammillata Haswell, 1880); medium to large; NW;
Indian O., Indo-Malaya, Japan; littoral; carapace very wide—
width equal to postrostral length (Sakai 1965: 91, pl. 42 fig. 2;
Buitendijk 1939: pl. XI fig. 1).

—- Carapace with confluent depressed tubercles or smooth dorsally,
branchial regions with five, or fewer, acute tubercles laterally .... 93

93(92) Branchial regions with five large tubercles laterally. Preorbital
spine quite stout. Seventh abdominal segment in male wider
than long 2 T. gracilis Dana, 1852
(= ?T. depressa Stimpson, 1857): medium; SE, NE; Indo-
Malaya, Japan; littoral; further distinguished by 3 large, subequal,
blunt tubercles on posterior margin (Stimpson 1907: 12, pl. III
fig. 2; Sakai 1938: 321, fig. 49; Buitendijk 1939: 259, text-fig.
AAS TEMA ATE PY)

— Branchial regions with a single sharp spine at widest part of
carapace laterally. Preorbital spine very slender. Seventh ab-
dominal segment in male much longer than wide .
T. tiarata (Adams & White, 1848)
Small; N. Guinea; West Pacific; sublittoral; further distinguished
by completely straight rostral spines (Sakai 1938: 322, pl.
XXXVIII fig. 7).

Vil. ZOOGEOGRAPHY

Two features of the Australian majid fauna stand out—(1) the relatively
large proportion of species (31%) which have been recorded only once from
a single locality in Australia; and (2) the very clear partitioning of the
fauna into tropical and temperate components.

Of the poorly known species, 12 are not known outside Australia whilst
16 are very widely distributed species known from several parts of the Indo-
West Pacific. Ten of the species were recorded by Rathbun, either from the
“Endeavour” collections or from near Cape Jaubert (Rathbun 1918, 1924),
two were recorded by Whitelegge (1900) and two by Baker (1905, 1906).
Fewer species have been recorded from Western Australia than from eastern
coasts.

The geographical boundaries between the tropical and temperate faunas
are in the form of very broad transition areas (containing a mixture of tropical
and temperate species) extending from Shark Bay to Fremantle on the west
coast and from about Mast Head Island to Cape Howe on the east. Slightly
narrower transition areas between south-eastern and south-western provinces
on the one hand and between north-eastern and north-western provinces on the
other, appear to exist just west of Kangaroo Island in the south and around
Torres Strait in the north. The four faunal provinces which emerge here are in
general agreement with the findings of workers on other groups of marine
animals (see Bennett & Pope 1953). Two points should be mentioned here—
(1) the Spencer Gulf area of South Australia shows a very close affinity
with the rest of south-eastern Australia but possesses five species which are
tropical and not otherwise known from temperate latitudes (Oncinopus aranea,
Anacinetops stimpsoni, Huenia proteus, Schizophrys aspera and Micippa philyra);
(2) the Torres Strait fauna is a mixture of species otherwise known from
north-eastern and to a lesser extent north-western, Australia with very few
species confined to the region.

The tropical fauna is clearly part of that of the Indo-West Pacific region
and possesses few species restricted to Australia. The first feature is borne

290 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Oncinopus cronea

Schizophrys ospera

Poronoxia serpulifera
Hyostenus dioconthus P

d Chlorinoides spatulifer
Leptomithrax sternocostulatus ee

Noxio ourita

Achaeus fissifrons

GRIFFIN POT

out most strikingly by the fact that a larger proportion of it is shared with
other Indo-West Pacific areas than with temperate Australian provinces.
Thus, of the north-eastern species only 18% extend southward compared
with 50% which are shared with the Indian Ocean, 47% with Japan and
36% with Indo-Malaya. Similarly, for the north-western fauna, 28% extend
southward whereas 72% are shared with the Indian Ocean, 48% with Japan
and 60% with Indo-Malaya. However, the proportion of species which
are distributed throughout the Australian tropical area is not very high. For
example 42% of the species found in north-eastern Australia are shared with
north-western Australia and the proportion falls to 29% if Torres Strait is
excluded. Indian Ocean species are represented to approximately equal extents
(about 60%) in both the north east and north west but the Japanese species
are definitely best represented in the north east (also about 60%). Widespread
Indo-West Pacific species which are also widely distributed in the Australian
tropics include Oncinopus aranea, Menaethius monoceros, several species of
Hyastenus, Schizophrys aspera, two species of Chlorinoides, three of Micippa
and two of Tiarinia.

The low degree of restriction in the tropical fauna is evidenced by fewer
than 30% of the species in either of the tropical provinces which are not
found outside Australia and about 30% which are restricted to any one
province. Restricted Australian species found in the tropics include species of
Zewa, Hyastenus minimus, Phalangipus australiensis and two species of
Chlorinoides.

The temperate provinces contain fewer species and overall there is
a much greater restriction of these species both to Australia and to particular
provinces. Thus, only nine species are found in both south-western and south-
eastern Australia out of a total of 34 south-eastern and 20 south-western species;
40% of the south-eastern and 50% of the south-western species are not known
outside Australia. Eight species appear to be widespread temperate forms (two
species of Naxia, Ephippias endeavouri, Paratymolus latipes, two species of
Leptomithrax and Chlorinoides spatulifer). The relationships of the temperate
species are either with tropical Australia (e.g., species of Paratymolus, Zewa,
Huenia, Xenocarcinus, Hyastenus, Chlorinoides and Micippa) or with the Indo-
West Pacific (e.g. species of Achaeopsis, Platymaia, Cyrtomaia, Pugettia, Doclea,
Eurynome and Leptomithrax). The relationships with temperate regions outside
Australia are slight. Only one species which does not have a tropical distribution,
Achaeopsis thomsoni, is shared with South Africa. Five species, all of which
are found in south-eastern Australia, are shared with New Zealand. Of the
nine genera shared with New Zealand, seven are more or less widespread
in the Indo-West Pacific. The strong restricted element in the Australian
temperate fauna is exemplified by species of Naxia, Ephippias endeavouri,
Paramithrax barbicornis and Tumulosternum longimanus. Of the 37 species
restricted to Australia, 69% are temperate.

If only species which penetrate the transition zones between tropical and
temperate regions are considered, there is indeed only a very slight partitioning
of the fauna into eastern and western elements. Such eastern species probably
number no more than six (e.g. Naxia tumida and Notomithrax minor) and
western ones no more than five (e.g., Paranaxia serpulifera and Schizophrys
dama). If more stenothermal species are considered a division between eastern
and western regions is quite clear.

Distant relationships of the fauna are shown, at the specific level, by nine
species shared with South Africa, 10 with the Red Sea and eight with Hawaii;
one species, Achaeopsis thomsoni, is also found in the Atlantic. The vast
majority of these widespread species are represented in the tropical fauna
of Australia.

Figure 3. Known Australian distribution of eight species of majid spider crab.
(Each circle represents a single recorded locality).

292 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

The zoogeographical features shown by the species are strongly emphasised
at the generic level. Thus 58% of the 43 genera have widespread tropical
Indo-West Pacific representation. A further 16%, also represented in the
Indo-West Pacific, have wider relationships, four genera (Achaeus, Achaeopsis,
Eurynome and Maja) being found in the Atlantic and three (Pugettia, Herbstia
and Rochinia) in the eastern Pacific. An additional 7% (three genera—Picroceros,
Sargassocarcinus and Leptomithrax) are western Pacific only. Two genera, Naxia
and Notomithrax, both temperate, are mainly Australasian. Five genera (12%)
(Anacinetops, Ephippias, Paramithrax, Tumulosternum and Paranaxia) are
restricted to Australia; all are monotypic and part of the temperate fauna.
Evidence of bipolarity or antitropicality in the Australian majid fauna is,
I think, difficult to discern, although the genera Cyrtomaia, Zewa, Xenocarcinus,
Pugettia, Sargassocarcinus, Eurynome, Rochinia, Hoplophrys and Leptomithrax
may provide some evidence of such distribution patterns.

Of the other Australian crabs the two best known families are the
Portunidae (Stephenson 1962) and the Grapsidae (Tesch 1918, Banerjee 1960,
Campbell and Griffin, 1966). In both these families the existence of a
few more or less widespread temperate species, such as Leptograpsus variegatus
(Fabricius), Plagusia capensis de Haan, Macropipus corrugatus (Pennant),
Ovalipes punctatus (de Haan) (last two also bipolar) and Nectocarcinus
integrifrons (Latreille), should not be allowed to obscure the fact that the
temperate representatives as a whole relate themselves most closely to the
tropical faunas. These two families are proportionally less represented in
temperate regions of Australia than are the Majidae.

In conclusion it can be stated that the features shown by the Australian
Majidae are those shown by other Australian marine animals (see Ekman
1953). This is particularly true of the partitioning into a tropical fauna with
tropical Indo-West Pacific relationships and a temperate fauna related to the
tropical fauna of Australia rather than to temperate faunas outside Australia.
There is also agreement in the apparent position of transition areas and the
geographical extent of the faunal provinces; only the Peronian province (central
eastern Australia) (see Bennett and Pope 1953) may be of doubtful validity
for the majids. ©

Vill. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to thank first the Trustees and Director (Dr. J. W. Evans) of
the Australian Museum, Sydney, for providing a grant which allowed me
to examine much of the Museum’s collections of spider crabs in January
1963. I wish similarly to acknowledge the financing of those studies by a
Research Grant from the University of Tasmania. I am grateful also to
Drs. Daniélle Guinot and J. Forest (Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle)
and T. Sakai (Yokohama National University) for sending literature, Drs.
Isabella Gordon (British Museum (Natural History) ) and R. B. Manning
(U.S. National Museum) for providing photographs of type material in their
care, Messrs. Frank A. McNeill, Melbourne Ward (Australian Museum) and
Bruce Campbell (Queensland Museum) for discussion and aid with literature,
and Messrs. Athol Beswick and Anthony Healy for photography. The manuscript
was read by Drs. John S. Garth (Allan Hancock Foundation), R. W. George
(Western Australian Museum) and J. C. Yaldwyn (Australian Museum), all of
whom provided most helpful comments for which I am very grateful; this review
has also been considerably aided by Dr. Yaldwyn’s kindness in forwarding
material and literature.

GRIFFIN 293

IX. REFERENCES

Adams, A. and White, A. (1848). Crustacea. In A. Adams (ed.), Zoology of the
Voyage of H.M.S. “Samarang” under the command of Captain
Sir Edward Belcher, during the years 1843-46. London. Pp. viii,
66, 13 pls.

Alcock, A. W. (1895). Materials for a Carcinological Fauna of India. 1. The
Brachyura Oxyrhyncha. J. Asiat. Soc. Beng. 64: 157-291 pls. 3-5.

Alcock, A. W. and Anderson, A. R. (1897). Illustrations of the Zoology of
H.M. Indian Marine Survey Steamer “Investigator.” Crustacea
Decapoda. Pls. 33-35. Calcutta.

Baker, H. W. (1905). Notes on South Australian Decapod Crustacea.. Part 2.
Trans. roy. Soc. S. Aust. 29: 116-131, pls. XXI-XXIV.

— (1906). Notes on South Australian Decapod Crustacea. Part 4. Trans.
roy. Soc. S. Aust. 30: 104-117, pls. I-III.

Balss, H. (1929). Decapoden des Roten Meeres. IV. Oxyrhyncha und Schluss-
betrachtungen. Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wein. Math-nat. Kl. 102:
1-30, text-figs. 1-9, pl. 1.

— (1935). Brachyura of the Hamburg Museum Expedition to South-
western Australia, 1905. J. roy. Soc. W. Aust. 21: 113-151, figs.

1255) pls:

— (1957). Abteilung Brachyura, Borradaile, 1907. In H. G. Bronns,
Klassen und Ordnungen des Tierreichs 5 (1) 7, Decapoda 12:
1505-1672, figs. 1131-1199.

Banerjee, S. K. (1960). Biological Results of the Snellius Expedition. XVIII.
The genera Grapsus, Geograpsus and Metopograpsus (Crustacea,
Brachyura). Temminckia 10: 132-199, text-figs. 1-6).

Barnard, K. H. (1950). Descriptive Catalogue of South African Decapod
Crustacea (Crabs and Shrimps). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 38: 1-837,
figs. 1-154.

Bennett, I. and Pope E. C. (1953). Intertidal Zonation of the Exposed Rocky
Shores of Victoria, together with a rearrangement of the Bio-
geographical Provinces of Temperate Australian Shores. Aust.
J. Mar. Freshw. Res. 4(1): 105-159, figs. 1-5, pls. 1-6.

Borradaile, L. A. (1903). The Spider Crabs (Oxyrhyncha). Jn J. S. Gardiner,
The Fauna and Geography of the Maldive and Laccadive Archi-
pelagos 2 (10): 681-690, figs. 122-124, pl. XLVII.

Buitendijk, A. M. (1939). Biological Results of the Snellius Expedition.
VY. The Dromiacea, Oxystomata and Oxyrhyncha of the Snellius
Expedition. Temminckia 4: 223-276, text-figs. 1-27, pls. VII-XI,

Calman, W. T. (1900). On a Collection of Brachyura from Torres Straits.
Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.) (ser. 2) 8: 1-50, pls. 1-3.

—— (1909). On Decapod Crustacea from Christmas Island, collected
by Dr. C. W. Andrews. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1909: 703-713,
Digna 2.

— (1913). Note on the Brachyuran Genera Micippoides and Hyastenus.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (ser. 8) 11: 312-314.

Campbell, B. M. and Griffin, D. J. G. (1966). The Australian Sesarminae
(Crustacea: Brachyura): Genera Helice, Helograpsus nov.
Cyclograpsus and Paragrapsus. Mem. Queensl. Mus. 14 (5): 127-
174, 10 figs., pls. xx-xxiii.

Chhapgar, B. F. (1957). On the marine crabs (Decapoda: Brachyura) of
Bombay State. J. Bombay nat. Hist. Soc. 54: 399-439, 503-549,
3 figs. 16 pls.

Dana, J. D. (1851). On the Classification of the Maioid Crustacea or
Oxyrhyncha. Amer. J. Sci. (ser. 2) 11: 425-434.

— (1852). Crustacea. In “U.S. Exploring Expedition during the years
1838-1842 under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S.N.” 13.
a ca C. Sherman. Pp. viii, 1618. Atlas (1855): 27 pp.,

pls.

294 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Ekman, S. (1953). Zoogeography of the Sea. London: Sidgwick & Jackson.
417 pp., 121 figs.

Forest, J. and Guinot D. (1961). Crustacés Décapodes Brachyoures de
Tahiti et des Tuamotu. Jn Expédition francaise sur les récifs
coralliens de la Nouvelle-Calédonie. Vol. prélim: i-xi, 1-195,
178 figs. 7 maps, 18 pls.

Fulton, S. W. and Grant, F. E. (1906a). Some little known Victorian Decapod
Crustacea, with Descriptions of New Species. No. II Proc. roy.
Soc. Vict. 19 (1): 5-15, pls. I-V.

— (1906b). Census of the Victorian ‘Decapod Crustacea. Part 1.
Brachyura. Proc. roy. Soc. Vict. 19 (1): 16-20.

Garth, J. S. (1958). Brachyura of the Pacific Coast of America: Oxyrhyncha.
ate Hancock Pacif. Exped. 21: 1-854, 106 tables, 9 text-figs.,
82 pls.

Garth, J. S. and Holthuis, L. B. (1963). Stenorhynchus Lamarck, 1818
(Crustacea, Decapoda) : Proposed Validation under the Plenary
Powers with Designation of Cancer seticornis Herbst, 1788, as
Type Species. Z.N. (S.) 751. Bull. zool. Nomencl. 20(6): 424-428.

Glaessner, M. F. (1960). The Fossil Decapod Crustacea of New Zealand
and the Evolution of the Order Decapoda. N.Z. geol. Surv. paleont.
Bull. 31: 1-63, figs. 1-25, pls. 1-7.

Gordon, I. (1934). Crustacea Brachyura. Résultats Scientifiques du Voyage
aux Indes Orientales Néerlandaises de LL. AA. RR. le Prince
et la Princesse Léopold de Belgique. Mem. Mus. roy. Hist. nat.
Belg. Hors. ser., III (15): 1-78, figs. 1-37.

Grant, F. E. (1905). Crustacea dredged off Port Jackson in Deep Water.
Proc: Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 30) (2): 313-324, pl. x, x1:

Grant, F. E. and McCulloch, A. R. (1906). On a Collection of Crustacea
from the Port Curtis District, Queensland. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.
31 (1): 1-53, 4 pls.

Gray, J. E. (1831). Zoological Miscellany, no. 1 (February 1831): 40. London.

Griffin, D. J. G. (1963a). Notomithrax gen. nov. and the Status of the Genus
Paramithrax H. Milne Edwards (Crustacea, Brachyura, Majidae).
Trans. roy. Soc. N.Z. Zool. 3 (22): 229-237.

— (1963b). Redescriptions of the Australian majid spider crabs Lepto-
mithrax gaimardii (H. Milne Edwards) and Paramithrax barbicornis
(Latreille). Rec. Aust. Mus. 26 (4): 131-143, figs. 1-14, pls. 6, 7.

— (1964). A Review of the Genus Eurynome Leach (Decapoda, Majidae)
and a New Species from New Zealand. Crustaceana 6 (3): 195-
206, figs. 1-11.

— (1965). A Redescription of the Australian Spider Crab Eurynome
granulosa Baker (Crustacea, Brachyura, Majidae). Rec. S. Aust.
Mus. 15 (1): 29-37, 5 figs.

—— (in press, a). The Genus Chlorinoides (Crustacea, Brachyura, Majidae).
1. A Redescription of C. tenuirostris Haswell and the Status of
the Genus Acanthophrys A. Milne Edwards. Rec. Aust. Mus.

——— (in press, b). The Marine Fauna of New Zealand: Spider Crabs of
the Family Majidae (Crustacea, Brachyura). N.Z. Oceanogr.
Inst. Mem. 35

Griffin, D. J. G. and Yaldwyn, J. C. (1965). A Record of the Majid Brachyuran
Genus Achaeus from New Zealand, with Notes on the Australian
Species. Trans. roy. Soc. N.Z. Zool. 6 (4): 33-51, figs. 1-8.

Haan, W. de (1833-1850). Crustacea Jn P. F. von Siebold, “Fauna Japonica.”
Amsterdam: Muller. Pp. xvii, xxxi, 244, 55 pls.

Hale, H. M. (1924). The Flora and Fauna of the Nuyts Archipelago and the
Investigator Group. No. 16. The Crustacea. Trans. roy. Soc. S.
Austs::48:) 67-735 figs.. 1,2, ple 1.

-——— (1927). The Crustaceans of South Australia. Pt. 1: 1-201, figs. 1-202.
Adelaide: Govt. Printer.

GRIFFIN 295

Hale, H. M. (1929). Notes on the Fauna of Dirk Hartog Island, Western
Australia. No. 4. Crustacea. Trans. roy. Soc. S. Aust. 53: 67-70,

Diss

Hartnoll, R. G. (1964). Reduction of the gill number in Spider Crabs.
Crustaceana. 7 (2): 145-148.

Haswell, W. A. (1879). On two new species of the genus Stenorhynchus.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 3: 408-409.

— (1880a). On the Australian Brachyura Oxyrhyncha. Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S.W. 4: 431-458, pls. 25-27.

— (1880b). Notes on the Australian Maioid Brachyura. Ann. Mag.
nat. Hist. (ser. 5) 5: 145-147.

— (1880c). On two new species of the genus Paratymolus Miers
from Australia. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (ser. 5) 5: 302-304, pl. XVI.

— (1882a). On some new Australian Brachyura. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.
6: 540-551.

— (1882b). Descriptions of some New Species of Australian Decapoda.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 6: 750-763.

—— (1882c). Catalogue of the Australian Stalk- and Sessile-eyed Crustacea.
Sydney: Australian Museum. Pp. xxiv, 326, 4 pls.

Holthuis, L. B. (1962).- Forty-seven genera of Decapoda (Crustacea);
Proposed Addition to the Official List. Z.N. (S.) 1499. Bull. zool.
Nomencl. 19 (4): 232-253.

Laurie, R. D. (1906). Report on the Brachyura collected by Professor Herdman
at Ceylon in 1902. Rep. Pearl. Oyster Fish., Ceylon 5: 349-432,
figs. 1-12, pls. I, Il.

McCulloch, A. R. (1908). Studies in Australian Crustacea. No. 1. Rec. Aust.
Mus. 7: 51-59, pl. xii.

— (1913). Studies in Australian Crustacea. No. 3. Rec. Aust. Mus.
93832135355 opis x, 2x4:

Macleay, W. S. (1838). Brachyurous Decapod Crustacea. In A. Smith (ed.),
Blystrations of the Zoology of South Africa. 5. Invertebrata
: 53-71, pls. 2, 3. London: Smith, Elder and Co.

McNeill, F. A (1923). Crustacean Camoufleurs. Aust. Mus. Mag. 1 (8): 243-6,

——— (1926). ‘The Biology of North-west Islet, Capricorn Group. (J.)
Crustacea. Aust. Zool. 4 (5): 299-318, text-figs. 1, 2, pl. XLI.

—_——— age panel Notes. No. 2. Rec. Aust. Mus. 23 (3): 89-96,
pl. :

— (In prep.) Crustacea Decapoda and Stomatopoda. Sci. Rep. Great
Barrier Reef Exped. 1928-29.

Man, J. G. de (1888). Bericht tiber die von Herrn Dr. J. Brock im indischen
Archipel gesammelten Decapoden und Stomatopoden. Arch.
Naturgesch. 53 (1): 215-600, pls. 7-22.

Miers, E. J. (1879a). On a collection of Crustacea made by Capt. H. C.
St. John, R.N. in the Corean and Japanese Seas. I. Podophthalmia.
Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1879: 18-61, pls. 1-3.

—— (1879b). Descriptions of New or little known species of Maioid
Crustacea (Oxyrhyncha) in the Collections of the British Museum.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (ser. 5) 4: 1-28, pls. IV, V.

— (1879c). On the Classification of the Maioid Crustacea or Oxyrhyncha,
with a synopsis of the Families, Subfamilies and Genera.
J. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.) 14: 634-673, pls. 12, 13.

— (1882). On some Crustaceans collected at Mauritius. Proc. zool. Soc.
Lond. 1882: 339-343, pls. XX.

— (1884). Crustacea. In “Report on the Zoological Collections made
in the Indo-Pacific Ocean during the Voyage of H.M.S. “Alert”,
1881-2”: 178-322, 513-575, pls. XVIII-XXXIV, XLV-LII. London:
British Museum (Natural History).

—— (1885). On the species of Micippa Leach and Paramicippa M. Edw.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (ser. 5) 15: 1-13, pl. 1.

296 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

Miers, E. J. (1886). Report on the Brachyura collected by H.M.S. “Challenger”
during the years 1873-1876. Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zool. 17(2):
1-362, pls. 1-29. London, Edinburgh and Dublin.

Milne Edwards, A. (1865). Descriptions de quelques Crustacés nouveaux,
appartenant a la tribu des Maiens. Ann. Soc. entom. Fr. (ser. 4)
Se 33-147) pls: 3-5.

— (1872). Recherches sur la faune carcinologique de la Nouvelle-Calédonie.
Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist. nat., Paris. 8: 229-267, pls. X-XIV.

— (1873). Descriptions de quelques Crustacés nouveaux ou peu connus
provenant du Musée de M. C. Godeffroy. J. Mus. Godeffroy 1(4):
253-264, pls. 12, 13.

Milne Edwards, H. (1834). Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés, comprenant
TYanatomie, la physiologie et la classification de ces animaux.
I: i-xxv, 1-468. Atlas. Paris: Lib. Roret.

Montgomery, S. K. (1931). Report on the Crustacea Brachyura of the
Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the Abrolhos Islands under the
leadership of Prof. W. J. Dakin in 1913, along with other Crabs
from Western Australia. J. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.) 37: 405-465,
1 fig., pls. 24-30. ;

Ortmann, A. (1894). Crustaceen. In R. Semon, Zoologische Forschungsreisen
Australien und dem Malayischen Archipel. 5 (1): 30-80, 3 pls.
(Denkschr. med. naturw. Ges Jena 8: 1-80.

Rathbun, M. J. (1892). Catalogue of the Crabs of the family Periceridae
in the U.S. National Museum. Proc. U.S. nat. Mus. 15: 231-277,
pls. 28-40

— (1893). Catalogue of the Crabs of the family Maiidae in the
U.S. National Museum. Proc. U.S. nat. Mus. 16: 63-103, pls. 3-8.

— (1894). Catalogue of the Crabs of the family Inachidae in the
U.S. National Museum. Proc. U.S. nat. Mus. 17: 43-75, pl. 1.

—— (1897). A revision of the nomenclature of the Brachyura. Proc. biol.
Soc. Wash. 11: 153-167.

— (1906). The Brachyura and Macrura of the Hawaiian Islands.
Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm, 23 (3): 827-930, text figs. 1-79, pls. 3-25.

——— (1911). The Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the Indian Ocean
in 1905: Marine Brachyura. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (Zool.)
(ser. 2) 14 (2): 191-261, pls. 15-20.

—— (1914). Stalk-eyed Crustaceans collected at the Monte Bello Islands.
Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1914: 653-664, pls. I, II.

— (1916). Scientific Results of the Philippine Cruise of the Fisheries
Steamer “Albatross” 1907-10. No. 34. New Species of Crabs
of the Families Inachidae and Parthenopidae. Proc. U.S. nat.
Mus. 50: 527-559.

— (1918). Report of the Spider Crabs obtained by the F.I.S. “Endeavour”
on the Coasts of Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, South
Australia and Tasmania. Biol. Res. Endeavour 1909-14 V (1):
1-29, 15 pls.

— (1924). Results of Dr. E. Mjoberg’s Swedish Scientific Expeditions
to Australia 1910-1913. 37. Brachyura, Albuneidae and Porcellani-
dae. Ark Zool. 16 (23): 1-33, 1 pl.

—— (1925). The Spider Crabs of America. Bull. U.S. nat. Mus. 129:
1-613, 153 figs., 283 pls.

Sakai, T. (1932). Notes on some rare materials of Japanese Oxyrhyncha.
Sci. Rep. Tokyo Bunrika Daig. (B) 1 (4): 41-59, pls. II, III.

— (1934). Brachyura from the coast of Kyushu, Japan. Sci. Rep.
Tokyo Bunrika Daig. (B) 1 (25): 281-330, text-figs. 1-26, pls.
XVII, XVIII.

(1935). New or rare species of Brachyura, collected by the “Misago”
during the zoological survey around the Izu-peninsula. Sci. Rep.
Tokyo Bunrika Daig. (B) 2 (32): 63-88, text-figs. 1-17, pls.
VI-VIII.

GRIFFIN 297

Sakai, T. (1936). Report on the Brachyura collected by Mr. F. Hiro at
Palao Islands. Sci. Rep. Tokyo Bunrika Daig. (B) 2 (37): 155-177,
text-figs. 1-7, pls. XII-XIV.

— (1938). Studies on the Crabs of Japan. III. Brachygnatha, Oxyrhyncha:
193-364, text-figs. 1-55, pls. I-XLI. Tokyo: Yokendo Co.

— (1965). The Crabs of Sagami Bay collected by His Majesty the
Emperor of Japan. Tokyo: Maruzen. Pp. xvi, 1-206, 1-26
(English), 1-92, 27-32 (Japanese), 26 text-figs., 100 pls. (coloured),
1 map.

Sankarankutty, C. (1961). On some crabs (Decapoda-Brachyura) from the
Laccadive Archipelago. J. Mar. biol. Ass. India 3 (1 & 2):
120-1365) figs: 14 2:

—— (1962). On Decapoda Brachyura from the Andaman and Nicobar
Islands. 3. Families: Calappidae, Leucosiidae, Parthenopidae,
Maiidae, and Gecarcinidae. J. Mar. biol. Ass. India 4 (1): 151-164,
figs. 1-23

Stephensen, K. (1945). The Brachyura of the Iranian Gulf, with an Appendix;
The Male Pleopoda of the Brachyura. Danish sci. Invest. Iran IV:
57-237, 60 figs.

Stephenson, W. (1962). Evolution and Ecology of Portunid Crabs, with
especial reference to Australian Species. In G. W. Leeper (ed), “The
Evolution of Living Organisms”: 311-327, 3 tables. Melbourne:
University Press.

Stimpson, W. (1857). Prodromus descriptionis animalium evertebratorum, quae
in Expeditione ad Oceanum Pacificum Setentrionalem, e Republica
Federate missa, C. Ringgold et J. Rodgers Ducibus, observavit
et descripsit. III. Crustacea Maioidea. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad.
9 (25): 216-221.

— (1907). Report on the Crustacea (Brachyura and Anomura) collected
by the North Pacific Exploring Expedition. Smithson. misc. Coll.
49 (1717): 1-240, pls. i-xxvii.

Tesch, J. J. (1918). The Decapoda Brachyura of The Siboga Expedition. I.
Hymenosomidae, Retroplumidae, Ocypodidae, Grapsidae and
Gecarcinidae. Siboga Exped. Monogr. 39c (82): 1-148, pls. 1-6.

Ward, M. (1933). New genera and species of marine Decapoda Brachyura.
Aust. Zool. 7: 337-394, pls. 21-23.

— (1936). Crustacea Brachyura from the coasts of Queenslanu. mem.
Queensl. Mus. I1: 1-13, pls. 1-3.

White, A. (1847). Descriptions of new Crustacea from the Eastern wcas.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 20: 61-63.

— (1848). Descriptions of New or little-known Crustacea in the
Collections of the British Museum. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (ser. 2)
1: 221-226.

Whitelegge, T. (1900). Scientific Results of the Trawling Expedition of
H.M.C.S. “Thetis”, off the coast of New South Wales, in February
and March, 1898. Crustacea. Part 1. Mem. Aust. Mus. IV:
135-199, pls. 32-35.

Yaldwyn, J. C. (1964). The Ornamental Sea-toad. Aust. nat. Hist. XIV (11):
362. (see also: Anon (1965). Nature 205 (4977): 1163).

298 REVIEW OF AUSTRALIAN MAJID SPIDER CRABS

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate xv (a) Hyastenus auctus Rathbun. HOLOTYPE, male, carapace length
from photo (including rostral spines in all cases) about 30 mm. Sulu
Sea, Philippine Islands, Albatross Exped., U.S. National Museum
no. 48214 (Photo: U.S. Nat. Mus.).
(b) Hyastenus sebae White. LECTOTYPE (selected on the advice of
Dr. I. Gordon), dorsal view, female, carapace length from photo
about 11.5 mm. Corregidor, Philippine Islands, British Museum
(N.H.) no. 43.6 (Photo: British Museum).

(c) Hyastenus sebae White. LECTOTYPE, ventral view (Photo: British
Museum).

(d

~—

Huenia bifurcata Streets. Male, carapace length 22 mm., setae
cleaned from shaft of rostrum only. New South Wales, Australian
Museum no. P. 14961 (Photo: Anthony Healy).

(e) Huenia bifurcata Streets. Female, carapace length 21 mm, uncleaned.
Port Jackson, N.S.W., Aust. Mus. no. G.5102 (Photo: Anthony
Healy ).

Plate xvi (a) Schizophrys aspera (H. Milne Edwards). Dorsal view, male,
carapace length 60.5 mm. Lord Howe Island, W.R.B. Oliver
collection, Dominion Museum, Wellington (Photo: Athol Beswick).

(b) Schizophrys aspera (H. Milne Edwards). Ventral view of same
specimen (Photo: Athol Beswick).

Plate xvii (a) Paranaxia serpulifera (Guérin). Male, carapace length 102 mm.
Darnley Island, Torres Strait, Aust. Mus. no. G.2469 (Photo:
Anthony Healy).

(b) Tiarinia elegans Hasweli. HOLOTYPE, male, carapace length 14.5
mm. Off Broughton Island, near Port Stephens, N.S.W., 25 fms.
Aust. Mus. no. G.5140 (Photo: Anthony Healy).

299

OBSERVATIONS OF SOME AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

21. Hesthesis cingulata (Kirby) (Coleoptera: Cerambycidae), attacking young
plants of Eucalyptus pilularis Smith.

By K. M Moore
(Text-figs. 1-5)

SYNOPSIS

Some morphological characteristics of larvae, pupae and adults of
Hesthesis cingulata (Kirby) are described and figured, and damage caused
by the larvae to young plants of E. pilularis is figured and described. Some
biology of the species is given.

INTRODUCTION

To study the effects of various factors on certain tree species, numerous
plantings of many species of seedling trees have been made in experimental
plots on State Forests in New South Wales. During 1954 a 14 acre plot of
E. pilularis tubed stock was established on a marginal blackbutt site on
Olney East State Forest (Newcastle Forestry District: Wyong Sub-district).

When observations on the incidence of insect attack on trees within
the plot were commenced during March 1965, considerable variability in the
growth and health of the plants was evident throughout the plot, and death
and debilitation of several plants from 18 inches to 4 feet in height were
occurring.

Root and stem portions of 12 damaged plants which contained larvae of
various instars of H. cingulata were collected and examined during March,
May and July 1965, and bred to obtain a correlation of larval, pupal and
adult specimens for identification of the insect species concerned.

From a detailed examination of larvae, it was not possible to correlate
them with any known species, on the information published by Duffy (1965),
although it is indicated (p. 133) that larvae of the genus Hesthesis damage the
root area of plants of Eucalyptus and Leptospermum spp. Carter (1928) records
that H. cingulata has been bred from the roots of mallee (Eucalyptus spp.)

Larvae of H. cineulata cause damage of sufficient severity to be of economic
importance to forestry.

BIOLOGY

Oviposition occurs during October to January on the stem of the plant,
usually at the junction of a small shoot and the stem, from 2 to 8 inches
above ground level. One larva only, occurs in the damaged area of each
plant.

The first instar larva commences its gallery in the cambium region,
encircling the stem several times in a spiral manner as it works downward toward
the root area (Text-fig. 1). From the cambium region the larva then tunnels
deeper into the stem, so that no particular pattern or direction of tunnelling
may be evident. The outer sapwood region of the stem, at a distance of
approximately 4 inches above ground level, is then destroyed by the late
instar larva. Slight damage to the basal area of the bark which covers the
destroyed area also occurs, and the portion of the stem covering the destroyed
area becomes swollen and gall-like in appearance. The bark of the swollen
area may contain several small holes through which the excreta are extruded,
to collect in a heap on the surface of the ground around the base of the
plant stem.

300 OBSERVATIONS OF SOME AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

OVIPOSITION SITE

=

SPIRAL TUNNEL
IN CAMBIUM

HOLLOWED OUT
ATTACKED AREA

/}<#—— REGROWTH

WOOD SHAVINGS
LARVAL EXCRETA

Beste,
SESlts GROUND LEVEL__ka
Phir i aa ; 7
UPATION TUNNEL~, +2 7, =

;

US vie

x

t

=~

Text-fig. 1. Damage by larva of Hesthesis cingulata to stem and root of young
plant of Eucalyptus pilularis.

Text-fig. 2. Prothorax of last instar larva of H. cingulata (Dorsal).
Text-fig. 3. Prothorax of last instar larva of H. cingulata (Ventral).

Text-fig. 4. Spines on pupa of H. cingulata, on abdominal segments 7 to 9
(Lateral).

Text-fig. 5. Spines on pupa of H. cingulata, on abdominal segments 6 to 9
(Dorsal).

MOORE 301

Through the centre of the damaged portion of the stem a small section
of the wood is retained to form a relatively strong attachment of the stem
below the damaged area to that above the damage (Text-fig. 1). Detachment
of the upper portion of the plant from the lower portion is thus inhibited while
the plant is alive.

From the base of the hollowed out area, a comparatively large oval
gallery penetrates the centre of the remainder of the stem above ground level,
and the tap root for a variable distance. The depth of penetration is apparently
dependent on the diameter and length of the tap root of the attacked plant,
and may reach to 5 inches below ground level. A quantity of fine, moist, loose
eranular excreta is retained in the base of the working within the tap root,
and above which the larva reverses its position to pupate.

The extent and effect of damage to plants is variable, so that some plants
are killed before the adult insect emerges, or other plants may produce
numerous shoots of regrowth from the stem below the hollowed out area,
as the larva continues to tunnel in the tap root.

Adults emerge from the plants at above ground level during September
to December, and the species is univoltine.

DESCRIPTIONS

Last instar larva:

Creamy white; moderately hairy with short tan coloured hairs; prothorax
with a dorsal orange-red area as in Text-fig. 2, and paler orange markings
ventrally as in Text-fig. 3.

Pupa:

Creamy white; dorsal, lateral and ventral spines as shown in Text-fig. 4
occur on abdominal segments 7 to 9; large and small dorsal spines as shown
in Text-fig. 5 occur on abdominal segments 2 to 6; smaller spines are on
segs. 7 & 8. A small group, each of about 5 latero-ventral spines, is on each
side of abdom. segs. 4 to 7.

Adults:

The white markings on adult specimens are variable, from 1 to 3 ventral
anterior white bands occurring on abdominal segments 1, 2 and 3, although
en some specimens these white bands may be absent. Femora, or all of the
legs, of male specimens only, may be dark red-brown.

Specimens of larvae, pupae and adults are in the collection of the Forestry
Commission of N.S.W.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The writer is grateful to Messrs. K. G. Campbell and P. Hadlington
for their criticism of the manuscript.

REFERENCES

Carter, H. J., 1928.—‘Revision of Hesthesis, Together With the Description of
a New Genus and Species of the Buprestidae.” Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.
53 (5): 544-550.

Duffy, E. A. J., 1963——“A Monograph of the Immature Stages of Australian
Timber Beetles (Cerambycidae).” British Museum, London.

Authors alone are responsible for the facts and opinions contained in
their papers.

Oyxia intend (4 sides 7 ed de wu

ihe ae
mene ca

1 baveingag or

\

FRA sues | 2 h Viet ae ads Lait Mh ie dchsill bh fe

ET OS Ach GaN "dehileste ine eit 1 eoiara! bit eo Dae ix
mane fa ines ie 2 A

he meinem. \) ee OTR MENIENT oiths Me vrai es aaeelse ih o9
r ar aint 08 ane dint} a ty fait ek Vee, j Paitenh "a WT

| ®
! hg eee ae
4
+
e
~

Nat MER Sta RE a Saree hs Yara

, | Leer
eh | ae i 1 ta ean el ates on ter rarg eae fy
ye URES VW ai : hogel
el iy soir ty ‘AM easel Rs AP AA
y RS by ‘ |
: ripe HA WR Bb wilt a ied PY omy vot
i
aa ’
ry with ; iy
. ;

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol. XIII PLATE XII

FROG, HYLA

ot
oa

PLATE XIII

XII

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol.

SVINTAZOUKULS

‘

ATOS

Photo:—_G) We diurmer;
Australian Museum.

PLATE XIV

Xi

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol.

VENA “HStId dSVM

G. P. Whitley del.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol. XIII PLATE XV

SPIDER CRABS (for explanation see page 298).

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol. XIII PLATE XVI

SPIDER CRABS (for explanation see page 298).

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol. XIII PLATE XVII

SPIDER CRABS (for explanation see page 298).

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol. VIII PLATE XVIII

EXTINCT MARSUPIAL

(For explanation see page 230).

From the original in the Mitchell Library, Sydney.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, Vol. XIII PLATE XIX

EXTINCT MARSUPIAL, ZYGOMATURUS TRILOBUS OWEN.

Gerard Krefft’s illustrations of skull of holotype and his restoration of the
complete animal, from the Sydney Mail, June 8, 1872, page 713, figs. 1-2.

From the original in the Public Library of New South Wales, Sydney.

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

MEMBERSHIP
(The Society’s year commences on Ist July)

Fees are as follows:—

Class Amount of Subscription
Associate + Member eo) ct sae eh aes avs ore wes = 6) 2,0)-per- annum
Ordinary Member .... rg 4- 20.5. ¥
(Members joining Ist January in any year "pay one-half if subscription).

Life Associate Member .... .... 2 ... $21.00in one sum
LOE EE CST Ue tapas Slagle Ae i Se ST tod ee GE acon +94) | ae
Elected for services
Honorary Member .... ithe te ee ay a1 oe OMA NStrAlaAny LOOLOPY
Honorary Associate Member .... Py sent aOR, tO. the: SOcieLy
Junior Members (aged 16 or under) Renee tr gt ac SOLcents ) pers annum
TITLES

(Conferred by the Council)

(For valuable services

LECCE ait Seren Le SS a tent So eae, are neal ean ae ree to the Society or to
Australian Zoology

Associate Benefactor .. For contribution of $200.00 to the Society’s Funds

Benefactor .... MD. Te “4 $1,000.00 ,, _ ,, 7 a
Endowment Member ..__,, a $2,000.00 ,, ,, ss i
PRIVILEGES:

Members of all classes may attend all meetings of the Society and its
various Sections. Every member (other than an Associate, Life Associate
or Junior Member) receives a free pass to Taronga Zoological Park
and Aquarium, and twelve tickets each year, admitting 12 adults or 24
children to the Park only.

APPLICATION FOR MEMBERSHIP

should be addressed to the Honorary Secretary, Royal Zoological Society of
New South Wales, c/o Australian Museum, P.O. Box A.285, Sydney South,
New South Wales.

PUBLICATIONS

The Australian Zoologist, published at irregular intervals since 1914. Twelve
volumes to date.
Proceedings, published since 1933-34.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGICAL HANDBOOKS AND
SPECIAL REPRINTS.

“Bibliography of Australian Entomology, 1775-1930”, by A. Musgrave, 1932.

“A Check List of the Birds of Paradise and Bower Birds,” by T. Iredale, 1948.

“Revision of the New South Wales Turridae,” by C. F. Laseron, 1954.

“The Published Writings of Tom Iredale, with an Index of his new Scientific
Names,” by D. F. McMichael & G. P. Whitley, 1956.

“A Reclassification of the Order Odonata,” by F. C. Fraser, 1957.

“Dragonflies of Australia,’ by F. C. Fraser, 1960.

Orders and enquiries should be sent to the Honorary Secretary, Royal
Zoological Society of New South Wales, c/o Australian Museum, P.O. Box
A.285, South Sydney.

THE SOCIETY’S PATRON .....

COGGER: A new Hylid Frog from Australia ....
LINDGREN: Budgerigar ‘Surveyreeiss ay ces soe or ‘ na
WHITLEY: Some early references to the extinct marsupial, Pecomanens
WHITLEY: Genera Piscium: Work in Progress oe E
WHITLEY: Notes on some Queensland fishes ....

SCOTT: The genera of the Galaxiidae ....

Brachyura) .
MOORE: Observations on some Aviat Forest Insects. 21. Hesthesis
cingulata (Kirby) (Coleoptera, Cerambycidae) attacking

young plants of Eucalyptus pilularis Smith .

PLATES XII-XIXx.

a THE
¥ AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST

i Issued by the

» ay ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

.
’
'
.

nw &
wy
OW
WL
Wy
ni
\
~)
5
y
y
;

oO

VOLUME XIil — PART 4
DECEMBER 14, 1966

ify
nt 1
%
y Price: One Dollar 50 ($1.50)
Ni All communications to be addressed to the Hon. Secretary,

Wy Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,
c/o The Australian Museum,
P.O. Box A.285, Sydney South, N.S.W.

Registered at the G.P.O., Sydney, for transmission by post
as a periodical.

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES
Established 1879

Registered under the Companies Act, 1899 (1917).

Patron:
His Excellency the Governor of New South Wales, Sir Arthur Roden Cutler,
V.C:, K.C.M.G.,. C-B.E., Kt-St.J.

Vice-Patron:
Sir Edward Hallstrom, K.B., F.R.Z.S.

COUNCIL, 1966-67

President:
Basil Joseph Marlow, B.Sc.

Vice-Presidents:

John Cameron Yaldwyn, M.Sc., Ph.D.
Ernest Jeffery Gadsden, F.R.Z.S.
Henry John de Suffren Disney, M.A.
Ronald Strahan, M.Sc.

Hon. Secretary: Mrs. Leone Harford
Hon. Editor: Gilbert Percy Whitley, F.R.Z.S., R.A.O.U.
Hon. Treasurer: John Miles Campbell, J.P.

Members of Council:

John Miles Campbell Anthony Irwin Ormsby, LI.B.

Henry John de Suffren Disney Peter Edward Roberts, B.A.

Ernest Jeffery Gadsden Courtenay Neville Smithers, M.Sc.
Maxwell Hall Gregg Ronald Strahan, M.Sc.

Lawrence Courtney-Haines, A.Mus.A., Frank Hamilton Talbot, M-.Sc., Ph.D.
Ellis Le Geyt Troughton, F.R.Z.S.,

1 BAI Ny On Ee
John Hallstrom C.M.ZS.
Mrs. Leone Harford Gilbert Percy Whitley
Frank McCamley Mrs. Olive Wills
Basil Joseph Guy Marlow John Cameron Yaldwyn
OFFICERS

Honorary Solicitor:
Honorary Auditors: Messrs. Peat, Marwick, Mitchell and Company
Honorary Librarian:
Assistant Honorary Secretary: Mrs. Olive Wills
Assistant Honorary Treasurer: (Vacant)
Entomological Section: Junior Group:
Chairman: Mr. Rex Gilroy* Chairman: Mrs. L. Harford
Hon. Secretary: Miss Mary Long
Conchological Section: Ornithological Section:
Chairman: Mr. F. McCamley Chairman: Mr. P. E. Roberts*
Hon. Secretary: Mrs. O. Wills Hon. Secretary: Mr. H. Battam
* Mr. L. C. Haines was Chairman in 1965-66 of both Entomological and

Ornithological Sections.

-

<r;

aa eet T ae) a ae

7%

eS

ms

THE AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST

VOLUME XIil PART 4

OBSERVATIONS ON SOME AUSTRALIAN FOREST INSECTS

22. Notes on Some Australian Leaf-miners
By K. M. Moore

(Forestry Commission of New South Wales)
(Text figures 1-36)

SYNOPSIS

Information concerning Australian leaf-miners is limited, and in this paper
some leaf-mining species of Coleoptera, Hymenoptera, Diptera and Lepidoptera
bred from various host plants are recorded.

Although the extent of the biological studies of each species was necessarily
restricted, the observations recorded add to the knowledge of the various groups
of leaf-miners commonly encountered during forest entomological investigations
in New South Wales.

INTRODUCTION

Forest trees, amenity trees and shrubs, or agricultural plants, at times
may be severely attacked by leaf-miners, and the importance of damage caused
by these insects may be classified broadly as either economic or aesthetic.

Comparatively few Australian leaf-miners are of economic importance,
although a number of species associated with agriculture at times destroy
or severely affect crops of potential food value to man, or to those animals
on which man is dependent.

As most leaf-miners are minute insects, the effects of damage to trees and
shrubs are usually insignificant unless large numbers of a particular leaf-miner
species occur at the one time, when defoliation of trees over hundreds or
thousands of acres of forest may occur (Moore 1963; Newman & Clark
1945) or when amenity plantings are severely affected (Hadlington 1954).

The number of species of these small or minute insects which feed within
the tissues of leaves, is considerable, and most species belong to the order
Lepidoptera (moths), although a few belong to the orders Coleoptera (beetles),
Diptera (flies) and Hymenoptera (sawflies). They are called “leaf-miners”
because they feed on, and mine between, the leaf tissues situated between
the upper and lower leaf cuticles.

Some intensive studies of leaf-miners have been made in Europe (Hering
1951), America (Needham, Frost & Tothill 1928) and New Zealand (Watt
1924). This paper collates information on the biology, and illustrates some of the
mines, of about 120 species indigenous to Australia, and refers to literature
concerning introduced species.

LEPIDOPTEROUS LEAF-MINERS.

Evidence that lepidopterous leaf-miners occurred some 40 million years ago
is recorded by Freeman (1965). Some species of lepidopterous leaf-miners
complete their life-cycle within a few weeks, while others may produce only
one generation each year. Eggs may be deposited either on the outside of
the leaf cuticle or within the tissues below either the upper or the lower
leaf cuticle. A particular oviposition site may be constant for a given family

304 LEAF-MINERS

or genus of moths. The type of leaf tissue in which larvae at times may feed
and mine is sometimes associated with a discrete speices of leaf-miner or
even a particular larval instar, and the shape of some mines may be typical
for a certain genus, or species, of insect. Larvae may commence feeding in the
epidermal cells immediately below either the upper or lower leaf cuticle and/or
the palisade parenchyma; others may feed on the spongy parenchyma, or
consume one or more cell layers. Others migrate internally from one side of
the leaf to the other side, destroying only the epidermis in their early instars,
and the upper or lower parenchyma during later instars; some destroy all of
the parenchymous tissue, so that only the upper and lower leaf cuticles remain
above and below the mine.

Leaf-mining larvae are comparatively soft and are relatively secluded
in an area where they are surrounded by sappy plant tissues. During their early
instars they are usually found in the young tender leaves of new plant growth,
although leaves sometimes become fully developed before the larval stages
are completed. Larvae of early sap-feeding instars usually possess mouthparts
specialised for abrading the leaf cell walls (Moore 1953) to release the plant
fluids necessary for their growth, but chewing mouthparts are typical of later
instar larvae when the leaf tissues are ingested and the mine is considerably
extended and deepened. Larvae may pupate either within the mine, or in
cocoons spun on twigs or leaves, among debris on or near the ground, or in
the soil.

A number of lepidopterous leaf-mining species construct typical mines
differing in detail from those of all other species. The great diversity of mine
patterns and sizes is of particular interest, and sometimes is of value in the
determination of the imsect species. Host association also appears to be of
importance to some species.

Parasitism of leaf-miners usually occurs, varying considerably in the one
locality and sometimes causing complete mortality for a given species. Braconid
and chalcidoid wasps are the parasites most often reared from leaf-miners, and
ants and small birds appear to be the principal predators.

Mines may be classified broadly as:—

Blotch: These mines, usually about as wide as they are long, appear
as blisters on the leaf surface (Figure 4).
Linear: Larvae mine more or less directly forward (Figure 22).
Linear-blotch: Construction of the linear portion precedes that of the
blotch portion (Figure 2).
Serpentine: This type of mine is long, narrow and sinuous, and of
comparatively uniform width (Figure 14).
Serpentine- The serpentine portion is usually constructed by an early
blotch: instar larva, and the blotch portion by later instars (Figure 12).
Linear- Mines are at first linear, then expanded distally into a small
expanded: blotch-like area during the last instar (Figure 13).
Serpentine- As the previous type, except that the early portion is
expanded: serpentine (Figure 8).
Digitate: As the name suggests, mines are constructed in various
directions with the narrow prolongations appearing finger-like
(Figure 1).

A. Family Gracilariidae.

Mines constructed by species in this family appear to be of similar
general type and shape within each discrete genus, although they may differ
considerably between genera.

Mines of the various species in the genus Acrocercops are similar in general
appearance, and usually show characteristics distinct from those of other genera
in this family. Early instar larvae usually construct a narrow, more or less
linear type mine, although this portion of the mine is often obliterated during
later instars as the blotch is constructed in the same general area of the leaf.

MOORE 305

Acrocercops calicella (Stainton).
Mine type: Digitate-blotch (Figure 1).

Host: Eucalyptus acmenioides Schau.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.

Notes: Oviposition usually occurs on the upper leaf surface and the
early stage of the mine is constructed in the epidermal cells beneath the upper
cuticle. Larvae are similar in shape and habits to those of A. hoplocala. The
early instar larvae are sap-feeding and later instar larvae deepen the mine as
most of the palisade and spongy parenchyma are destroyed. The mines are
usually narrower and longer than those of A. hoplocala, and with the perimeter
sinuate or digitate.

Larvae emerge from the mines to pupate either on their outer surfaces or
along the leaf edge, when reared in jars. The cuticle of the mine is at first
silvery white, but later becomes more darkly stained with brown than the mine
of A. hoplocala. Granular excreta are distributed along the perimeter of the
mine.

The cocoons, golden in colour, are spun in positions similar to those
of A. hoplocala when held in jars. No globules have been found on or in
the cocoons of this species.

Figure 1. Mine of Acrocercops calicella on Eucalyptus acmenioides.

Acrocercops chionosema Turner.
Mine type: Linear-blotch.

Host: Macadamia integrifolia Maiden & Betche.
Locality: Sydney to Queensland.
Notes: This species is referred to by Cann (1965) as mining in

the upper surface of the leaves of the Queensland nut tree.

306 LEAF-MINERS

Mines occur on M. integrifolia during spring and autumn at Sydney. They
may be up to 60 mm. in length, with the blotch portion always across and
along the centre vein of a leaf. The blotch area has markings of a rusty red-
brown colour caused by the lines of excreta within the mine. Last instar larvae
deepen the mine, and affected leaves bear patches of brown where tissues
have died beyond the mine.

Acrocercops hoplocala Meyrick.
Mine type: Linear-blotch (Figure 2).

Host: Eucalyptus saligna Smith.
Localities: Sydney; Gosford-Wyong area, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae have been collected during March, May to September,

and November to January.

Oviposition always occurs on the upper leaf surface, and the egg is
visible as a silvery spot at the commencement of the linear portion of the
mine, or on the blotch portion when it has obliterated the commencement of
the linear portion.

The larva mines directly into the leaf tissues through the base of the
egg attached to the cuticle. The upper epidermis is destroyed during early
instars when the linear portion of the mine is constructed.

Both the linear and the blotch portions are white, but pale brown staining
from the excreta of the early sap-feeding instar larva is sometimes evident.
Larvae are similar in appearance to those of A. laciniella, with typical prognathous

Figure 2. Mine of Acrocercops hoplocala on Eucalyptus saligna.

MOORE 307

sap-feeding mouthparts during early instars, but with the more usual lepidopterous
mouthparts as the blotch area is constructed during later instars when portions
of the blotch are irregularly deepened and most of the palisade and spongy
parenchyma is destroyed.

The linear portion of the mine is completed in about 10 to 14 days, and
the blotch portion in a further 6 to 8 days. The larva emerges from the mine
through a semi-circular slit cut in the upper cuticle, and pupates in a white
to pale yellow cocoon which may be attached to the leaf or the blotch mine
cuticle when specimens are reared in jars. No globules have been found attached
to cocoons of this species although they usually occur on or in the cocoons
of some other species of the family Gracilariidae.

A single mine usually occurs in almost any position on the upper leaf
surface, but occasionally two mines may be present. The blotch sometimes
may be extended so that, when completed, only small lengths of the linear
portion are visible, but more usually, most of the linear portion remains.
The pellets of excreta voided by the later instar larva are distributed in a
broken line around the perimeter of the mine. A purplish discoloration is
usually present in the leaf tissues outside the perimeter of the mine on the
upper surface of the leaf, while a slight purplish suffusion on the lower surface
is often the only indication of the presence of the mine above.

During early spring, the time occupied from eclosion to pupation is about
3 weeks, adults emerging about 3 weeks later.

Larvae of the Braconini (Braconidae) are ectoparasitic on larvae of
A. hoplocala, and they construct silken cases near the centre of the mine in
which to pupate, and which are surrounded by a thin black line of lepidoptera
pellets.

Acrocercops laciniella (Meyrick).
Mine type: Linear-blotch.

Hosts: Angophora costata (Gaertn.) Druce; A. floribunda (Smith)
Sweet; Eucalyptus pilularis Smith; E. saligna; E. acmenioides.

Localities: Sydney; Lisarow; Gosford; Norah Head; Olney East State
Forest, N.S.Wales.

Some biology of this species, with figures of mines and details of larvae,
have been recorded previously (Moore 1963).

Acrocercops macaria Turner.

Mine type: Blotch (Figure 3).

Host: Euodia micrococca F. Muell.
Locality: Ourimbah State Forest, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae have been collected during September. During early

larval instars the mines are shallow, but they are deepened during later instars,
so that only the upper and lower cuticles of the leaf remain covering the mined
area. The lower cuticle of the mine is at first white, later becoming suffused with
pink. Excreta are distributed randomly throughout the mine.

Mines are comparatively small (about 8 mm. long and 5 mm. wide),
always occur below the hairy undersurface of the leaves, and are usually
bounded by the mid-vein, the edge of the leaf near its base, and two adjacent
secondary veins, although some mines occur further along the leaf toward
the tip.

308 LEAF-MINERS

Figure 3. Mine of Acrocercops macaria on Euodia micrococca.

Larvae are at first cream, becoming increasingly suffused pinkish orange,
and when about to pupate are pink with reddish transverse markings. They
emerge from the mine through a crescentic slit cut in the cuticle, usually at the
distal end of the mine, to pupate in silken cocoons constructed on the leaf
surface when held in jars.

The pupal exuviae is protruded from the cocoon before the adult emerges.
Adults emerged during October.

Acrocercops ordinatella (Meyrick).

Adults of this species were reared from larvae collected near Coff’s
Harbour, N.S.Wales, during February, mining in the leaves of a one-year-old
plant of Cinnamomum camphora (L.) Nees. Adult moths emerged during
February.

Acrocercops plebeia (Turner).
Mine type: Linear-blotch.

Host: Acacia podalyriifolia A. Cunn. ex G. Don.
Locality: N.S.W. and Queensland.
Notes: This species on the above host, and some of its biology,

is recorded by Froggatt (1927).

Mines may occur on both sides of the leaves and cover most of the
leaf surfaces, so that little of the linear portion of the mine is eventually
discernible.

Larvae collected during 16 February at Sydney, emerged as _ adults
on 3 March. Larvae constructed their deep cream cocoons on the base of
the rearing jar

MOORE 309

Acrocercops sp. near argyrodesma (Meyrick).
Mine type: Linear-blotch.

Host: Hakea salicifolia (Vent.) B. L. Burtt.
Locality: Ourimbah State Forest, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Foliage of the attacked shoots becomes brown and distorted,

with the death of some shoots occurring distally.

From larvae collected and reared during November and December, adults
emerged during December and January. The life cycle occupied about 5 weeks.
Acrocercops sp. nov. ? (in laciniella group)

Mine type: Blotch.

Host: Eucalyptus radiata Sieb.
Locality: Kanangra Walls, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae collected during August spun their golden-brown

cocoons on the cuticles of the mines when reared in jars, and adults emerged
during October.

The blotch mine is round to oval, white, and without brown staining,
and as many as 3 mines may occur on the one leaf. The linear portion is
usually obliterated by the blotch portion which may cross the mid-vein of the leaf.
Acrocercops sp.

Mine type: Blotch (Figure 4).

Host: Asterolasia correifolia Benth.
Locality: Ourimbah State Forest, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Several somewhat tortuous, silvery linear type mines in the

upper epidermis of a leaf sometimes radiate from the one centre of oviposition.
All the parenchyma is consumed as the blotch area is completed, so that most,
if not all, of the linear portion is obliterated by the blotch portion. The
mines always spread each side of the mid vein.

Larvae leave the mine through a crescentic shaped slit in the cuticle of
the upper leaf surface, to pupate on the leaf or on the cuticle of the mine when
reared in jars. Numerous globules may occur on the cocoon, and the pupal
exuviae is protruded from the cocoon before the adult emerges.

Figure 4. Mine of Acrocercops sp. on Asterolasia correifolia.

310 LEAF-MINERS

Pupation occupied about 2 to 3 weeks during October, and adults emerged
during October and November.

Braconid wasps were reared from larvae of this species.

Acrocercops sp.
Mine type: Linear-blotch.
Host: Pomaderris ligustrina Sieb. ex DC.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.

The biology of this species is very similar to that of the previously
mentioned species, but the mines do not always spread each side of the mid-vein.

Gracilaria xanthopharella Meyrick.
Mine type: Linear-expanded (Figure 5).

Host: Glochidion ferdinandi J. Muell.
Locality: Gosford area, N.S.Wales.
Notes: The mine of this species of Gracilaria has characteristics

distinct from those of the species studied in other genera of the family
Gracilariidae. It is at first white and tortuous, with the latter half of the
completed mine pale brown, and more or less extending into a blotch at
its distal end. Cocoons are spun on the leaf or on the container used for
rearing the specimens. Larvae were collected during August and September.

Figure 5. Mine of Gracilaria xanthopharella on Glochidion ferdinandi.

Figure 6. Leaf of Angophora floribunda showing mine and pupation site of
Parectopa ida.

MOORE 311

Figure 7. Leaf curled by larva of Parectopa ida.

Parectopa ida (Meyrick).
Mine type: Linear-expanded (Figures 6 and 7).

Hosts: Angophora floribunda; Eucalyptus acmenioides; E. gummifera
(Gaertn.) Hochr.; E. paniculata Smith; E. pilularis; E. robusta
Smith; E. saligna.

Localities: Sydney; Gosford-Wyong area; Norahville, N.S.Wales.

Notes: The mines and habits of P. ida are distinct from those of
the species studied in the other genera of this family.

In the Lisarow area, the host most heavily attacked was A. floribunda,
and larvae were collected during the months of March and May to November.

Oviposition occurs only on the lower surface of a leaf, the egg being
placed on the external leaf cuticle. After emergence of the larva, the more
or less oval chorion, about 0.6 mm. in diameter, is visible as a minute silvery
spot on the leaf surface at the commencement of the mine.

Larvae .emerge through that portion of the chorion attached to the leaf
cuticle, and so commence mining in the leaf tissues, thus obviating their
exposure on the leaf surface. Mines usually occur only in the comparatively
young and succulent leaves of epicormic, coppice and regeneration growth
of the various host plants.

During the first instar, when larvae do not possess the more usual
lepidopterous mandibles, only the epidermal layer of cells is destroyed. The
mandibles are flat, plate-like structures with rounded and serrated anterior
edges utilised for cutting and bruising the cells to release the fluids which are
conveyed along grooves on their surfaces. The head capsule is extremely
flattened dorso-ventrally, with prognathous mouthparts. Both types of mandibles,
which have been figured previously (Moore 1963), are similar to those of
A. laciniella. Laryae are thus peculiarly adapted to mine proficiently in a very
restricted area. The head capsule is protrusible anteriorly.

For about 11 days after eclosion, the larva mines forward to form a
narrow linear mine through the epidermal cells with only the thin cuticle of
the leaf remaining above it. The mine is visible as a silvery-white line which

312 LEAF-MINERS

is variable in length and position on the leaf. The linear portion of the mine
may extend for about 50 mm. to 60 mm., and gradually increases in width
from the diameter of the egg to more than 1 mm. where it adjoins the
expanded area.

On completion of the linear portion, the larva undergoes ecdysis, when
its mouthparts become the more usual lepidopterous type. For about 3 days
after the larva recommences to feed, it continues to mine forward, but the
resulting mine now becomes wider and deeper, assuming the form of an elongate
expanded area about 20 mm. long and 2.5 mm. wide. This area becomes tan-
brown in colour soon after the tissues are destroyed. On the upper leaf surface
opposite to the mine, is an elongate pale green or yellow-green to red-brown
area corresponding more or less to the shape of the mine below. As the
expanded portion is extended, the palisade and portion of the spongy mesophyll
of the leaf are destroyed, and a fine web spun over the internal upper surface
of the mine causes the thin “roof” of the mine to be raised for all of its
length into a gable-shaped ridge over the larva. When the young leaf is
actively growing, or when the mine is close to its outer edge, distortion of
the leaf occurs in that area. The larva then commences to deepen the
expanded area by consuming the remaining parenchyma. This may occupy
about 6 days, with a total of 9 to 11 days from the commencement of the
expanded area. Last instar larvae are pale yellow and about 8 mm. to 9 mm.
in length.

After the deepening of the expanded area, the larva emerges through
a round hole cut in the ridged cuticle near the end of that area. From
the mine, it moves to the leaf tip where it spins thick strands of silk
which adhere to the surface of the leaf. The tip of the leaf is thus
curled approximately twice, into a tube-like structure in which the larva
continues to feed on the ventral surface of the leaf forming the tube. The
leaf may also be cut by the larva, longitudinally from the tip, with the cut
forming one extremity of the tube and the leaf edge the other extremity
(Figure 7). Should leaves be in contact, larvae may tie them together
with silken threads and feed within that area, instead of constructing the tube.

Mines may occur almost anywhere on the lower surface of a leaf, and
the linear portion may cross the mid-vein, usually toward the distal end of
the leaf. The excreta of larvae during the early sap-feeding instars is
visible as a faint brownish stain on the cuticle, usually along the centre
of the silvery-white portion. When the larva attains its more typical lepidopterous
mouthparts and commences to ingest the tissues with the sap, the excreta
become granular and loose in the expanded area of the mine. The linear
portion of the mine is constructed by the first two larval instars, the remaining
two instars constructing the expanded area and curling the leaf.

When about to pupate, the larva leaves the tube and proceeds to the
edge of a leaf (not necessarily the one it has curled) where, by means of
a strong web of silk, a small portion of the edge becomes folded over to
form a shelter where the larva spins its cocoon of shiny white silk (Figure 6).
Attached to the internal or external surface of many of the cocoons is a
variable number of minute globules composed of a shiny white substance.
From eclosion of the larva to pupation is about 3 weeks.

The pupa fractures the cocoon by means of a series of spinous processes
on the anterior tin of the exuviae and which are similar to those on the pupa
of A. laciniella (Moore 1963, Fig. 5). The exuviae protrudes for about two-
thirds of its length from the end of the cocoon prior to the moth emerging,
about 3 to 6 weeks after the construction of the cocoon.

The adult moth, with a wing span of about 11 mm. and a length of 4 mm.
is prominently marked with red, yellow, black and white.

MOORE 313

The life cycle from the egg to the adult occupies about 6 to 9 weeks,
early instar larvae collected during July emerging as adults during August
and September.

Wasps of the Chalcidoidea and Ichneumonidae have been reared from
specimens collected at Lisarow, N.S.Wales.

Phyllocnistis diaugella Meyrick.
Mine type: Serpentine (Figure 8).

Host: Breynia oblongifolia J. Muell.
Locality: Lisarow-Wyong area, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Mines of species in this genus have characteristics distinct

from those in other genera of this family. All of those mines examined
were situated on the upper surface of the leaves, and the white silvery cuticle
of the mine was stained with a narrow pale to dark brown sinuate mark
caused by the larval excreta. A mine of this species occupies most, or all,
of the upper leaf surface.

Larvae were collected during September, and pupation occupied about
16 days during that month.

Figure 8. Mine of Phyllocnistis
diaugella on Breynia oblongi-
folia.

Figure 9. Mine of Phyllocnistis sp. on Hibbertia scandens.

Phyllocnistis sp. (probably sp. nov.)
Mine type: Linear-expanded (Figure 9).

Host: Hibbertia scandens (Willd.) Gilg.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae at first construct an extensive linear type mine in

the lower parenchyma, then migrate internally to the upper palisade layer
alongside the mid-vein near the base of the leaf, to complete their mines.
Mines are visible as a pale pinkish linear marking on the lower surface,
and a reddish-brown serpentine area more or less conforming to the shape of
the mine, on the upper surface. Mines are similar to, but usually larger than,
those of P. diaugella.

The excreta, which are deposited in a sinuate line transversely, stain
the mine cuticle dark brown, similar to mines of P. diaugella. The leaf is
drawn into a crease or fold along the distal portion of the mine where the
cocoon is constructed, and where the larva pupates.

Larvae were collected during September and February.

Pupation occupies about 12 days during September, and the pupal exuviae
is protruded from the extremity of the mine as the adult emerges.

314 LEAF-MINERS

B. Family Nepticulidae.

The mines of the various species in this family of moths are more
readily separable than are those of species in the family Gracilariidae, and
it appears that most species may be determined by the structural differences
shown in the mines. The species of leaf-miners occurring in this family
are among the smallest moths known, and adults are usually dark coloured,
sometimes with a metallic suffusion and a few white scales.

Nepticula phyllanthina Meyrick.
Mine type: Serpentine-linear-expanded (Figure 10).

Host: Glochidion ferdinandi.
Locality: Sydney; Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs on the under surface of a leaf, usually

close to the leaf edge, the larva entering the leaf through the chorion to
commence mining below the upper cuticle. When the mine is completed,
larvae cut an oval hole in the distal extremity of the mine on the lower
leaf Sa and fall to the ground where a minute white cocoon is constructed
in the soil.

10

Figure 10. Mine of Nepticula phyllanthina on Glochidion ferdinandi.

Larvae were collected during August, pupation occupying about 4 weeks
during spring, and the pupal exuviae is protruded from the end of the cocoon
before the adult moth emerges.

MOORE 315

Nepticula ? funeralis Meyrick.

Mine type: Serpentine-blotch (Figure 11).

Hosts: E. acmenioides; E. pilularis.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs anywhere on the upper leaf surface, and

larvae commence mining beneath the upper cuticle. The egg may be seen as
a brown shiny speck on the leaf.

11

Figure 11. Mine of Nepticula ? funeralis on Eucalyptus acmenioides.

The mine appears as a dark brown blotch on the upper leaf surface,
while on the lower leaf surface a brown area denotes its position. It is at
first serpentine for a comparatively short distance, then enlarges to form a
blotch, which is often restricted by the venation of the leaf. Larvae cut through
the upper cuticle at the distal end of the mine, and fall to the ground where
they pupate. Larvae leaving mines during July emerge as adults during the
following March.

Larvae are pale green, with a dark median stripe which is due to
the presence of recently ingested leaf tissues in the alimentary tract.

316 LEAF-MINERS

Nepticula sp. (in funeralis ? group).
Mine type: Serpentine-blotch (Figure 12).

Hosts: E. saligna; E. grandis; E. microcorys F. Muell.
Locality: Lisarow; Ourimbah State Forest, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs on the upper leaf surface. On leaving the

mine, larvae make an oval hole in the lower leaf cuticle, fall to the ground
and pupate in small golden-coloured cocoons under debris on the ground.

Position of the mine on the leaf is variable, but it usually occurs near the
mid-vein. The early portion is serpentine, with the blotch area superimposed
and extended laterally. Excreta are compacted along that side of the mine
nearest to the mid-vein.

Larvae collected during July emerged as adults during the following
March.

Figure 12. Mine of Nepticula sp. on Eucalyptus saligna.
Figure 13. Mine of Nepticula sp. No. 1 on Eucalyptus saligna.

Nepticula sp. No. 1 (near libera).
Mine type: Linear-expanded (Figure 13).

Hosts: E. saligna; E. acmenioides; E. grandis; A. floribunda.
Localities: Lisarow: Pennant Hills, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition and the mines occur on the upper leaf surface, up to

3 mines occurring on the one leaf. Larvae leave the mines at dusk through a
crescentic slit made in the upper leaf cuticle at the distal end of the mine.
Larvae have been collected during May to December, those collected during

MOORE 317

the first week in July emerging as adults approximately 7 to 8 weeks later,
and those larvae which emerge from the mines during May, become adults
during July. Last instar larvae are orange with the digestive tract green.

The mine is reddish-purple proximally, then reddish-pink to the expanded
portion from where it is cream-fawn in colour. Excreta may be seen through
the leaf cuticle as dark areas in the first portion of the mine, and later
fill the early part of the expanded portion. As the mine is expanded, the black
excreta appear at the side of the mine, and the line is forked distally near where the
larva emerges.

Pupation occurred in the soil when held in jars, and the pupal exuviae
protruded from the soil as the adults emerged.

Nepticula sp. No. 2 (near funeralis or melanotis).
Mine type: Serpentine (Figure 14).

Hosts: E. saligna; E. acmenioides; E. pilularis; A. floribunda.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Eggs are placed on the upper leaf surface. Unlike the

previous species, larvae leave the mine through a semi-circular slit made in
the ventral leaf cuticle. Larvae collected during September pupated and
emerged as adults about 6 weeks later. Some collected during July emerged
during August. Last instar larvae are bright green in colour. After leaving the
mine, larvae spin a flattened tan-brown cocoon on debris or just below the
soil surface, the pupal exuviae being protruded from the end of the cocoon
when the adult emerges.

14

Figure 14. Mine of Nepticula sp. No. 2 on Eucalyptus saligna.

318 LEAF-MINERS

Mines occur on the upper surface of a leaf, but their position is variable
on the leaf. The proximal portion of the mine is filled with excreta which
appear red-brown on the upper leaf cuticle, while excreta in the distal portion
are black, and placed centrally in the mine. There is a minute red area where
the egg is deposited on the leaf surface. During early instars, a silvery-white,
tortuous linear mine is constructed, and during the later instars the mine
appears creamy white with a central line of excreta appearing black on the
cuticle.

Five specimens of a chalcidoid parasite emerged from one mine during
August.

Figure 15, 15a. Mine of Nepticula sp. No. 3 on Eucalyptus saligna.

MOORE 319

Nepticula sp. No. 3 (near gilva).
Mine type: Serpentine-expanded (Figures 15 and 15a).

Hosts: E. saligna; E. acmenioides; E. pilularis.
Localities: Lisarow; Pennant Hills, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs on the dorsal cuticle of the leaf, and

larvae emerge from the mines through a slit cut in the ventral leaf cuticle.
They spin a tan-brown oval pupal case of coarse silk among debris on the
ground. Larvae collected during July emerged as adults about 12 weeks later,
the pupal exuviae protruding from the end of the cocoon after emergence of
the adult. Larvae have been collected during June to September, January, March
and April.

The peculiar shape of the mine of this species is distinctive. The early
linear portion is constructed in contiguous circles outward from the egg
capsule until the circular area is about 4 mm. to 5 mm. in diameter, so
that the egg capsule is thus at the approximate centre of the circular area.
In the circular area, mining occurs mainly in the palisade layer, but in later
stages all of the parenchyma is destroyed so that this portion of the mine is
translucent. The central circle of the mine is deep red in colour on the upper
leaf surface, but is seen as an irregular brown patch on the lower surface.
Position of the mine on a leaf is variable, and there may be several on one
leaf.

Larvae may be yellow-green, yellowish or pinkish-orange to bright purple
in colour.

Apanteles sp. (Braconidae) parasitises larvae of this species.

Nepticula sp. No. 4 (near caenodera or endocapna).
Mine type: Serpentine-expanded (Figure 16).

Hosts: E. acmenioides; E. saligna; E. pilularis; E. microcorys.
Locality: Lisarow; Olney East State Forest, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Eggs are laid on the dorsal surface of a leaf, and larvae

have been collected during April and June to January. Last instar larvae are

Figure 16. Mine of Nepticula sp. No. 4 on Eucalyptus acmenioides.

320 LEAF-MINERS

bright green with a black median dorsal marking, and they emerge through a
crescentic slit cut in the upper leaf cuticle. They pupate in the soil in white
silken cocoons, or on debris on the ground.

From pupation to emergence of the adult occupies about 8 weeks during
early spring.

Position of the mine is variable from the base to the tip of a leaf, and
its shape is distinctive. The palisade layer only is mined during the early
instars, but both the palisade and the spongy parenchyma are destroyed in the
expanded portion of the mine. When the upper epidermis and palisade, and
the upper and lower spongy parenchyma are destroyed, a network of small
leaf veins, and the oil glands, remain on the floor of the expanded portion
of the mine. The upper cuticle of the expanded portion becomes light to
tan-brown in colour, and black narrow lines of excreta are plainly visible adhering
to the upper cuticle of the mine. The early serpentine portion is red-brown
to black in colour.

A single braconid specimen, or 9 chalcidoid specimens, have emerged
from one larva of this species of leaf-miner

Nepticula sp. No. 5.
Mine type: Serpentine (Figure 17).

Hosts: E. acmenioides; E. pilularis.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: The transparent bright green or purple last instar larvae

emerge from the mine through the ventral leaf cuticle. Ingested food is
clearly visible through their cuticle as a red median stripe. Larvae pupate
in tan-brown silken cocoons just below the soil surface or on leaves, when

kre

Figure 17. Mine of Nepticula sp. No. 5 on Eucalyptus pilularis.

MOORE 321

reared in jars. The pupal exuviae is protruded from the end of the cocoon
at the emergence of the adult. The time from the spinning of the cocoon to
the emergence of the adult is about 8 months. Larvae were collected during
June and July.

The position of the mine on a leaf is variable, and more than one mine
may be found on the one leaf. Mines are tortuous, with the galleries contiguous,
and the egg capsule is visible as a silvery spot on the dorsal cuticle near the
centre of the mine. Mines are reddish-purple at first, later portions sometimes
being silver in colour. The restricted translucent area denotes the distal
end of the mine.

18

Figure 18. Nepticulid mine on Asterolasia correifolia.

Nepticulidae.
Mine type: Serpentine (Figure 18).
Host: Asterolasia correifolia.
Locality: Ourimbah State Forest; Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs on the upper leaf surface. Larvae have

been collected during September, and February and March, and they leave
the mine through a semicircular slit in the upper leaf cuticle. Mines are
to be found on the upper leaf surface, and a dark central line of excreta may
be seen in the mine.

Nepticulidae.
Mine type: Serpentine.
Host: Pomaderris ligustrina.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Mines of this species are similar to those of the previous species.

Nepticulidae.
Mine type: Serpentine-linear-blotch (Figure 19).

Host: E. acmenioides.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae were collected during July. Eggs are laid on the

dorsal leaf surface, and larvae leave the mines through the dorsal surface.

322 LEAF-MINERS

Figure 19. Nepticulid mine on Eucalyptus acmenioides.

Position of the mines on a leaf is variable, but usually close to the mid-vein
of the leaf. The early part of the mine is reddish-brown with the linear portion
light brown, the blotch area being darker brown. Frass is central in the
linear portion, then distributed in small groups in the blotch area.

Nepticulidae.
Mine type: Serpentine (Figure 20).
Hosts: E. acmenioides; E saligna; E. microcorys.
Locality: Lisarow; Olney East State Forest, N.S.Wales.
Notes: The pale to bright green larvae have been collected during

July, August, January and March. Oviposition occurs on the upper leaf surface,
and the larvae leave the mine on the lower leaf surface to spin small dark
brown cocoons on the base of the jar. The pupal exuviae is protruded from
the case at emergence of the adult.

Mines usually occur on mature leaves of E. acmenioides, and on semi-
mature leaves of E. saligna, and their position on the leaf is variable. The
serpentine portion of the mine is seen as a thin grey line, with the digitate
portion darker in colour. The distal portion is greyish-green, and the digitate
part appears to be constructed solely in the spongy parenchyma. Excreta
are seen as a black central line in the serpentine portion, and the edges of
the excreta appear to follow the contours of the digitate portion.

Up to 4 chalcidoid specimens of parasites have emerged from one larva.

MOORE 323

Figure 20. Nepticulid mine on Eucalyptus saligna.

Nepticulidae.
Mine type: Linear-blotch (Figure 21).
Host: Angophora floribunda.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition usually occurs on the dorsal surface of a

leaf, usually near the edge of the leaf. Last instar larvae make their exit
through a crescentic slit on the ventral leaf surface, at the distal end of the
blotch portion. Larvae were collected during October to December, and the
time from pupation to the emergence of the adult is about 6 weeks.

Position of the mine on a leaf is variable, but usually toward the
leaf edge. Up to 6 mines may occur on one leaf. Excreta of larvae may be
spread over the central portion of the blotch area with the edges of the
blotch remaining clear, and the mine perimeter is usually surrounded by a
narrow line of purple staining.

324 LEAF-MINERS

Figure 21. Nepticulid mine on Angophora floribunda.

MOORE 325

Figure 22. Nepticulid mine on Rubus moorei.

Nepticulidae.
Mine type: Linear (Figure 22).
Host: Rubus moorei F. Muell.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Eggs are deposited within the leaf tissues, and the early

portion of the mine is not visible on either leaf surface. The oviposition site
is denoted by a reddish spot on the dorsal cuticle. Larvae were collected
during September, mining in the dorsal area of a leaf. They leave the pale
brown coloured mine from the dorsal surface, to pupate in small whitish cocoons
on leaves or on the soil surface when reared in jars. Larvae are pale orange
in colour.
Nepticulidae.

Mine type: Linear-expanded (Figure 23).

Host: Banksia integrifolia Lf.

Locality: Boat Harbour (Central Coast), N.S.Wales.

Notes: Larvae leave the mines from the upper leaf surface.

326 LEAF-MINERS

28

Figure 23. Nepticulid mine on Banksia integrifolia.

Nepticulidae.
Mine type: Linear (Figure 24).
Host: Banksia serrata L.f.
Locality: Boat Harbour,
N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae leave the

mines from the
lower leaf surface.

24

Figure 24. Nepticulid mine on Banksia serrata.

MOORE 327

29

Figure 25. Mine of Heliozela prodela about half constructed on Eucalyptus
acmenioides.
C. Family Heliozelidae.

Heliozela prodela Meyrick.
Mine type: Linear-blotch (Figure 25).

Hosts: A. floribunda; E. acmenioides; E. saligna; E. pilularis; E.
gummifera.

Localities: Lisarow; Sydney, N.S.Wales.

Notes: Oviposition occurs in the mid-vein from 3” to 1” from

the tip of a leaf, and the site is denoted by callous tissue. Larvae have
been collected during May to July. First instar larvae mine along the mid-vein
toward the tip of a leaf, then back and forth across the tip in the secondary
venation; or they may first mine along a lateral vein toward the leaf edge,
then along the vein just inside the leaf edge, to return to the mid-vein and
then back and forth across the leaf tip 3 or 4 times in the secondary venation.
The mines become red and are prominently visible against the green leaf.
The area distal to the basal line of the mine becomes pale green to yellow.
The last instar larva mines down along the mid-vein for a variable distance,
then mines most of the parenchyma in the leaf tip, thus forming a blotch
mine. This area turns light brown dorsally, and from this area a small convex
oval case about 4 mm. by 2 mm. is cut out either on or near the mid-vein,
and within the area of previous mining, and shed from the leaf. The dorsal

328 LEAF-MINERS

x§

Figure 26. Early stage of heliozelid mines on Eucalyptus saligna.

side of the case is dark grey and the ventral side light grey on A. floribunda.
The internal surface of the case is covered with white silk.

The early portion of the mine may be destroyed as the blotch area is
constructed, and there is usually an area of staining around the mine. More
than one mine may occur on a leaf.

Cases may be constructed during May, June and January, so that there
appears to be more than one generation each year. From those cases constructed
during May, adults emerged during September. The pupal exuviae protrudes from
the end of the case as the adult emerges.

Heliozelidae.
Mine type: Linear-blotch (Figure 26).
Hosts: E. saligna; E. grandis; E. acmenioides.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs at the edge of the mid-vein on the

ventral leaf surface, where a swelling of the tissues may be seen. Up to 6
eggs may be placed more or less contiguously, resulting in an area of dead
tissue on the vein, and the base of the leaf below the mines becomes grey-green,
often to dry out before the larvae mature. Larvae commence mining in the
spongy parenchyma only, moving toward the leaf edge, then turn to cross the
mid-vein after about 7 days.

Early portions of the mines are constructed in a forward direction only,
and larvae fit closely in the mines which are not extended laterally until
the blotch area is commenced. The small, fine venation of the leaf is retained
on the leaf cuticle inside the blotch area, so that the pupal cases cut from
the blotch area show the darker green network of the venation against the
cream-coloured background. From the commencement of the cutting out of
the pupal case until its completion and separation from the leaf, occupies

MOORE 329

Figure 27. Heliozelid mine on Eucalyptus pilularis.

about 7 hours, and the time taken from the commencement to completion
of the mine is about one month during June and July. From larvae collected
during May to July, adults emerged during September.

Larvae are translucent yellow-green.

Heliozelidae.
Mine type: Linear (Figure 27).
Hosts: A. floribunda; E. pilularis.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs between the mid-vein and the edge of the

leaf toward its base, and the area is surrounded by a deep red, more
or less circular, stain. Larvae were collected during June and September.

After usually mining to the edge of the leaf, the larva continues to
mine along the edge for a short distance, then back to the mid-vein which is
followed toward the tip of the leaf for about two-thirds of its length. The
early mine appears as a thin red line and the mid-vein turns black. Young
larvae sometimes mine to the mid-vein before reaching the side of the leaf,
mine to its base, then turn upward toward the tip of the leaf. The entire
leaf becomes pink, and then yellow-pink, and falls to the ground.

330 LEAF-MINERS

Last instar larvae are deep pink, and construct cases by diverging from
the mid-vein for a short distance, constructing a restricted blotch area contiguous
to the vein, where a pupal case is constructed. This case is lined with silk
and is usually attached at an angle to an object by means of a small pad of
silk at the end of the case.

Figure 28. ?Heliozelid mine on Eucalyptus stricta.

? Heliozelidae.

Mine type: Linear (Figure 28).

Host: Eucalyptus stricta Sieb.
Locality: Kanangra Walls, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs toward the base of the leaf, between the

mid-vein and the edge of the leaf, usually two-thirds to three-quarters of
the distance from the tip to the base. Larvae were collected during August.

Mining toward the base of the mid-vein, the larva then crosses the
mid-vein and continues toward the tip of the leaf for a distance about equal
to that on the other side of the mid-vein, and so that the portion of the mine
each side of the mid-vein is equiangular to the mid-vein. An area of callous
tissue forms on the mid-vein. Two short lateral channels are also mined, one
on each side of the mid-vein.

Oval cases in which the larvae pupate are cut from the distal end of
the mine, and are lined with silk. Up to 3 mines may occur on one leaf.
Pupal cases are cream with a pale brownish suffusion.

MOORE 331

Figure 29. Mine of “Jinea’” sp. on Eucalyptus saligna.

D. Family Incurvariidae.

“Tinea” sp. (in spodina group.)
Mine type: Blotch (Figure 29).

Host: E. saligna.
Locality: Ourimbah State Forest; Lisarow; Gosford, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae collected during August and September emerged

during the following March. Larvae are cream in colour and pupal cases are
dark brown, almost rectangular in shape, with fine, dark transverse striations.

The position of the mine on the leaf is variable, and often the tissues
of the tip of the leaf are mined. More than one mine may occur on the one
leaf. The shape of the dark brown blotch area is usually oblong to square,
with distinctive darker fine transverse lines. The mined area is filled with
larval excreta around the perimeter, and an area of deep purplish staining
occurs around the edges.

332 LEAF-MINERS

Figure 30. Mine of “Tinea” sp. on Eucalyptus acmenioides.

“Tinea” sp. (near spodina.)
Mine type: Blotch (Figure 30).

Hosts: E. acmenioides; E. saligna; E. pilularis.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Oviposition occurs below the cuticle of the leaf. Larvae

are cream in colour, with the segments flattened laterally; the head is brown
and retractile into the prothoracic segment to the base of the mandibles.
They have been collected during June to early September, and those collected
during June and July emerged as adults during the following March, so that
a lengthy larval diapause occurs in the pupal case. Pupal exuviae are protruded
from the cases as the adults emerge.

Position of the mine on a leaf is variable, and there are often several
mines on one leaf. The outer edges of the mine are translucent, with particles
of excreta clearly visible. The centre of the mined area, which later
constitutes the case in which the larva pupates, is at first filled with excreta
and later covered with silk. This area is dark brown, and the outer edges
of the mine are surrounded with an area of reddish-purple staining.

Chalcidoid parasites which emerged by way of a small circular hole
cut in the centre of the pupal case, were reared during May.

“Tinea” sp. (near pentaspila Meyrick.)
Mine type: Blotch (Figure 31).

Hosts: Eucalyptus sieberi L. Jonnson.
Locality: Blackheath, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Position of the mine on a leaf is variable, and more

than one may occur on the same leaf. Mines are at first red-brown, then dark
grey-brown in a later stage of construction. The early mine is filled with

MOORE 333

excreta, while in the later portion it is scattered throughout the translucent
area. A more or less oval to pear-shaped pupal case is cut out from the
translucent part, and is shed from the leaf. Cases are about 5.5 mm. in length
and 3 mm. wide, grey-brown and lined with silk. A purple stain occurs
along the edge of the mine, and extends outward along the leaf venation.

km

Figure 31. Mine of “Tinea” sp. on Eucalyptus sieberi.

“Tinea” sp.

Newman & Clark (1945) record that hosts of this Western Australian
species are E. marginata Donn ex Sm; E. rudis Endl.; and the species is
accidental to E. gomphocephala A.DC., E. salubris F. Muell. and E. trans-
continentalis Maiden.

E. Family Tineidae.

“Tinea” nectarea Meyrick.
Mine type: Blotch (Figure 32).

Hosts: E. acmenioides; E. pilularis; E. saligna.
Localities: Lisarow; Sydney; Lawson, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae of this species pull around with them a case which

serves as their shelter when they are not mining. They have been collected
during August to April.

Prior to construction of the first case, two leaves of the host plant
are held together with strands of silk between which the larvae feed and from
which they extrude their excreta. The first case is cut from these two leaves
and larvae then move to a new leaf to which the case is attached by strong
strands of silk. Larvae then commence mining from the point of attachment
to the leaf. The point of attachment is later indicated by a small round hole
in the leaf cuticle through which the larvae mine the parenchyma between
the leaf cuticles, so that the mines appear translucent. Although larvae usually
attach their cases to the ventral leaf surface, some may feed from the
dorsal surface. While mining, larvae often leave the case to extend the mine
beyond their own length, but always return to the case to void excreta through
the posterior end of the case. The cases, later formed from the upper and
lower cuticles of the one leaf, are pale fawn, with a raised median ridge on each
side from the anterior to the posterior exits. Cases constructed by last instar
larvae are up to 10 mm. long and 10 mm. wide. The portion of the upper
leaf cuticle surrounding the mine may be partly or wholly stained with

334 LEAF-MINERS

Figure 32. Mine of “Tinea” nectarea on Eucalyptus saligna.

purple, but this does not occur on the lower leaf cuticle. The round entrance
hole to the mine is about 1.5 mm. in diameter.

Last instar larvae may move to the stem of the leaf. or to the twig,
to attach their cases with a circular pad of silk, in which they pupate.

There appear to be two or three generations of this species each year,
adults emerging three weeks after pupation during November, December,
February or May. The pupal exuviae is protruded from the lower end of the
case, and recently emerged adults cling to the pupal exuviae while their
wings expand and dry.

MOORE 335

F. Family Glyphipterygidae.

Eupselia sp. (near carpocapsella Walker.)
Mine type: Linear (Figure 33).

Hosts: E. saligna; E. acmenioides.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae have been collected during June to September, and

those found during July were in mines half constructed. When the mine
is completed, larvae leave it to feed externally during the last instar when
jagged-edged holes are eaten in the leaf. Last instar larvae are about 15 mm.
in length.

Mining commences near the mid-vein and extends towards the edge of the
leaf along the secondary venation. The early portion of the mine is dark
brown, and the later portions are pale brown. All of the parenchyma is
destroyed and excreta are voided from the mine through a round hole at the
proximal end of the mine. There may be 3 holes in the length of the mine.
After leaving the mine and feeding externally, the larva constructs a tube
on the surface of the leaf with leaf fragments attached to the leaf cuticle,
in which the larva shelters while not feeding. The open-ended tube is
completed in about 3 days.

Larvae pupate externally on the leaf surface, a pupa being attached
to a pad of silk by its cremaster.

Wa
BES feist ne iN

Figure 33. Mine of Eupselia sp. and area of damage on leaf of Eucalyptus
acmenioides.

336 LEAF-MINERS

Figure 34. Mine of Epiphthora sp. on Lomandra longifolia.

G. Family Gelechiidae.
Epiphthora sp. (=Apatetris of Meyrick.)
Mine type: Linear (Figure 34).

Host: Lomandra longifolia Labill.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae collected during September emerged as adults during

October and November. Larvae are dark brown, and leave the mine to pupate
in the soil in silken cocoons.

MOORE 337

Epiphthora sp.
Mine type: Linear.

Host: Dianella caerulea Sims.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae collected during September emerged as adults during

October and November. Oviposition occurs on the central leaf vein on the
upper surface, or near the edge of the leaf on the lower surface. The
mines are similar in appearance to those of the previous species. Larvae
are distinctive, with 4 broad dark transverse bands separated by broad pale
bands. Pupation occurs in the soil. At least two generations occur each
year, larvae also being present during January and February.

Gnoremoschema operculella (Zell.).

This species, commonly known as the “potato moth” attacking Solanum
tuberosum L. is well known, and the N.S.W. Department of Agriculture
has published information in Insect Pest Leaflet No. 90.

Gnoremoschema phasiosema (Turner).

Larvae of this species are reported as damaging stems of Lycopersicum
esculentum Mill., as well as the leaves of older plants (N.S.W. Agricultural
Gazette, Feb. 1954, pp. 105-6).

H. Family Cosmopterygidae.

Gen. et sp. indet.
Mine type: Linear.
Host: Gahnia melanocarpa R.Br.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.

Notes: Larvae were collected during September and emerged as
adults during October. They bear a narrow dark longitudinal stripe for
most of their length, each side of the median area. They attach themselves
to the leaves or other support with a thread of silk, and always pupate while
lying in a horizontal position.

J. Family Lyonetiidae.

Stegommata sulphuratella Meyrick
Mine type: Blotch (Figure 35).

Host: Banksia _ integrifolia.
Locality: Boat Harbour (Central Coast), N.S.Wales.
Notes: Larvae have been collected during April They are greenish-

white in colour, and are suspended inside the mine on the upper leaf cuticle
by silken threads, to pupate. A brownish blotch mine is formed at the distal
tip of a leaf to about half of its length. The base of the floor of the mine
is slightly concave and the upper cuticle forming the “roof” of the mine is
horizontal.

338 LEAF-MINERS

Figure 35. Mine of Stegommata sulphuratella on Banksia integrifolia, and
section showing suspended pupa.

Ke Family Tortricidae.
Peraglyphis atimana (Meyrick).

Larvae of this species mine in the leaves of Grevillea robusta A. Cunn. ex
R.Br., and have been collected during January and February at Sydney.

Most of the Lepidopterous mines studied are held between celluloid
sheets, in the collection of the Forestry Commission of New South Wales.

COLEOPTERA.

A. Family Curculionidae.

Larvae of Cydmaea diversa Lea, C. eucalypti Lea and C. luctuosa Pascoe,
have been reported as mining in the foliage of Hakea teretifolia, H. sericea and
H. teretifolia respectively (Moore 1964).

B. Family Chrysomelidae.
Halticorcus platycerii Lea.
This species was reared during September from mines occurring in leaves
of the indigenous Platycerium grande (Fée) J.Sm. ex Presl. (staghorn) occurring

at Lisarow, N.S.Wales. Some biology of the species is given in the N.S.W.
Department of Agriculture Insect Pest Leaflet No. 62.

MOORE 339

DIPTERA.

Family Agromyzidae.
Japanagromyza eucalypti Spencer.
Mine type: Linear-blotch.

Host: E. camaldulensis Dehn. (Specimen planted from nursery stock).
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales. ;
Notes: This species was first reared from very young foliage of a

host plant which had been transplanted from the Narrandera (N.S.Wales)
nursery of the Forestry Commission of N.S.W., to Lisarow. A larva collected
on 6th February, pupated on 7th, the adult emerging on 23rd February. Wasp
parasites emerging during February were also reared from larvae.

This species is the first true agromyzid recorded as feeding on any
species of Eucalyptus (Spencer 1963:309).

Melanagromyza atomella (Malloch).
Mine type: Linear (Figure 36).

Hosts: Angophora floribunda; Hydrangea macrophylla Ser.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: An extensive list of hosts is given by Spencer (1963). The

silver-coloured mine of the specimen reared from A. floribunda is reproduced
in Figure 36. Larvae were collected, and emerged as adults, during October.
They pupate at the distal extremity of the mine and adults emerge through
the upper cuticle of the leaf.

Melanagromyza phaseoli (Tryon).

This species is the common pest of cultivated beans, and some of its
biology is recorded by Spencer (1963).

Ophiomyia lantanae (Froggatt).

Although this species is not a leaf-miner, it is included here because
of its association with the forestry problem of the control of Lantana camara L.
on State Forests in N.S.Wales.

O. lantanae is common in coastal N.S.Wales, at least as far south as
Sydney, where numerous fruits of L. camara are attacked. Contrary to
Spencer’s comment (1963:324) it has been found to attack the seed within
the fleshy fruit, as well as mining in the flesh surrounding the seed, so
that the reproductive potential of the seed may be destroyed. Some plants
have been damaged to such an extent that almost every seed has been
destroyed, although control of the host plant in N.S.Wales by O. lantanae is
ineffectual.

Calicomyza humeralis (U.R.).
Mine type: Blotch.

Host: Erigeron bonariensis L.
Locality: Sydney, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Adults of this species have been reared from mines on the

host plant growing in Sydney streets during January and February. The
white mines in the foliage may occur anywhere on the upper leaf surface,
and several mines may occur on the one leaf. More than 60 mines have been
counted on the one small plant, and mines may be 5 mm. in width and up to
18 mm. in length.

A small brown or black spot on the cuticle of the leaf above the mine
indicates the pupation site of the larva within the mine.

A number of indigenous Agromyzidae not reared by the writer, are
given by Spencer (1963), and are listed in the appendix to this paper.
Introduced species are given by Spencer (pp. 306-7).

MOORE 341
HYMENOPTERA.

Family Argidae.

Schizocerella pilicornis (Holmgren).

Benson (1963) refers to this species as mining in Portulaca oleracea L.,
and as a species introduced from America.

Family Tenthredinidae.

Phylacteophaga froggatti Riek.

Considerable damage to several hosts utilised as amenity plantings, and
some of the insect’s biology, have been recorded by Hadlington (1954). Hosts
mentioned are:— E. maculata Hook.; E. citriodora Hook.; E. botryoides Sm.;
E. robusta; E. sideroxylon (A. Cunn.) Benth. partim; E. globulus Labill.;
E. ficifolia F. Muell.; E. cladocalyx F. Muell. Specimens have been collected
from Sydney, Scone and Tamworth, N.S.Wales. Pupation occurs within the
mine.

P. froggatti var.
Mine type: Blotch.

Host: E. saligna.
Locality: Lisarow, N.S.Wales.
Notes: Mines of this variety appear to be the same as those of

P. froggatti, and it has been observed that attack is confined to coppice,
regeneration and young stock up to about 10 ft. in height.

Larvae were collected during July to January, and up to 6 mines may
occur on the one leaf. A purplish staining on the upper leaf cuticle
occurs around the proximal narrow portion of the mine where oviposition
occurs. Blisters formed by mining larvae are dark brown in colour, and
always occur on the upper leaf surface.

Parasites reared from specimens include Bracon sp. (Braconidae) and a
species of chalcidoid, which is often numerous and exerts considerable control
of some populations.

342 LEAF-MINERS

APPENDIX.
Leaf-miner Association with Host species.

Leaf-miner Species Host-plant Species

ORDER COLEOPTERA

Family Chrysomelidae

Halticorcus platycerii ....

Platycerium grande

Family Curculionidae

Cydmaea diversa ....
C. eucalypti ....
C. luctuosa ....

Hakea teretifolia
H. sericea
H. teretifolia

ORDER DIPTERA
Family Ae te aan

Agromyza_ testacea

? Agromyza sp. zs
Calicomyza humeralis ..
Cerodontha australis ....
C. robusta

C. vittigera ....
Japanagromyza ewcalypti
? Liriomyza_ sp. :
L. australina ..

L. brassicae ....

L. caulophaga
L. chenopodii

helichrysi ..

obscurata .. ....
pallidicentralis ..
singularis ..

tricolor ;
elanagromyza albisquama
alternata .. ee
alysicarpi ..

apii ....

= Sy

. atomella ....

bowralensis
cassiae

M.
M.

M. centrosematis ..

?

Oplismenus compositus
Erigeron bonariensis

?

?

?
Eucalyptus camaldulensis
Billardiera scandens

?
Tropaeolum major
Gynandropsis speciosa
Raphanus raphanistrum
Diplotaxis muralis
CRUCIFERAE
CAPPARIDACEAE

?

Beta vulgaris

Spinacia oleracea
Stellaris media
Wallflower

Helichrysum bracteatum

SREP RSVAROSS)

?
Alysicarpus vaginalis
A. nummularifolius
Apium graveolens
Celery (cultivated)
Angophora floribunda
Barringtonia gracilis
Celastrus subspicatus
Doryphora sassafras
Hydrangea macrophylla
Marsdenia rostrata
Passiflora suberosa
Stephania japonica
Tylophora_ barbata
(see also Spencer 1963)

?
Cassia _bicapsularis
? Erythrina sp.
Centrosema_ pubescens
Glycine soja

MOORE

conspicua
dianellae

indigopherae

metallica
murrayae Epes
DAV,AITLONLO Vila cee rece
phaseoli ....

SSS5 5 S58

piliseta
DESH sere
. placida
. seneciophila
sojae

S SSS

M. specifica ....

M. trispina

M. verdescens

M. wilkstroemiace ..

Melanagromyza sp.

Ophiomyia angustilunula
O. australis .... ‘aay
O. goodeniae

O. lantanae ....

O. micra

O. solanicola .. a
Pseudonapomyza_ spicata

Phytobia caliginosa
P. humeralis ..

P. incerta

P. poemyzina Res

LO GGA TL aS OR ME a
Phytoliriomyza_ australiensis
Phytomyza atricornis ....

P. clematidicolla ....
P. plantaginis

343

COMPOSITAE
Dianella caerulea
Eustephus sp.
Indigophera australis
I. suffruticosa
? COMPOSITAE
Murraya paniculata
725

Phaseolus lathyroides
Cajanus sp.
Crotalaria sp.
Dolichos sp.
Soja sp.
Vigna sp.

?

Pisum sativum
?

Senecio vagus
LEGUMINOSAE
Cajanus sp.
Glycine sp.
Phaseolus sp.
Swainsona galegifolia

iP

?

?
Wilkstroemia indica
Pimelea ligustrina

Desmodium polycarpum
Senecio pterophorus
?

of

?

Goodenia ovata
Lantana camara

?
Solanum prinophyllum
Brachiaria miliformis
Elusine indica
Zea sp.
GRAMINEAE

?

Aster subulatus

Aster sp.

Erigeron bonariensis
?

? CYPERACEAE
? Juncus sp.
?

Bidens pilosa
Chrysanthemum maximum
Cirsium vulgare
Coreopsis sp.
Helichrysum rutidolepis
Senecio dryadeus

S. lautus

S. linearifolius

S. minimus

S. pterophorus
Sonchus oleraceus

Clematis aristata
Plantago spp.

344 LEAF-MINERS
P. vitalbae

?

?

?

Clematis aristata

C. montana

Cassinia aculeata

C. aureonitens
Helichrysum dendroideum
Goodenia ovata

Senecio sp.

ORDER HYMENOPTERA

Family Argidae

Schizocerella pilicornis

Phylacteophaga froggatti

P. froggatti var.

Family "Petithtedinidae

Portulaca oleracea

Eucalyptus botryoides

. citriodora

. cladocalyx

. ficifolia

. globulus

maculata

. robusta
sideroxylon

. saligna

tay Oey Oy BY Oy Dy Oy

ORDER LEPIDOPTERA
Family Cosmopterygidae

Gahnia melanocarpa

Family Gelechiidae

Epiphthora sp.
Epiphthora sp. ..
Gnoremoschema operculella

G. phaseosema 4 ees
Panily
Eupselia sp. nr. carpocapsella ....

Acrocercops calicella ....
chionosema
. hoplocala ..
. laciniella ....

De a

. macaria ....
ordinatella

plebeia y

nr. argyrodesma
Acrocercops sp. nav. ? ..
Acrocercops sp.
Acrocercops sp. nye:
Gracilaria xanthopharella re
Parectopa ida “te

Sean

Phyllocnistis diaugella ..
Phyllocnistis sp. nov. ?

Glyphipterysidae

Family Gracilariidae

Lomandra longifolia
Dianella caerulia
Solanum tuberosum
Lycopersicum esculentum

E. acmenioides
E. saligna

Eucalyptus acmenioides
Macadamia alternifolia
E. saligna
Angophora costata
A. floribunda

E. acmenioides

E. pilularis

E. saligna

Euodia micrococca
Cinnamonum camphora
Acacia podalyrifolia
Hakea salicifolia

E. radiata

Asterolasia correifolia
Pomaderris ligustrina
Glochidion ferdinandi
Angophora floribunda
E. acmenioides

E. gummifera

E. paniculata

E. pilularis

E. robusta

E. saligna

Breynia oblongifolia
Hibbertia scandens

MOORE 345

Family Heliozelidae

Heliozela prodela .... 0... 0 cc. cece eee ess ss ~Angophora floribunda
E. acmenioides
E. gummifera
E. pilularis
E. saligna
Heliozela sp. ? E. acmenioides
E. grandis
E. saligna
eliozela spy 2, Ge eee) eee ed ey en AreOpnora floribunda
E. pilularis
Heliozela sp. ? E. stricta
Family Incurvariidae
“Tinea” sp. (spodina group) E. saligna
“Tinea” sp. nr. pentaspila .... E. acmenioides
E. pilularis
E. saligna
“Tinea” sp. nr. pentaspila .... E. sieberi
“Tinea” nectarea .... E. acmenioides
E. pilularis
E. saligna
Family Lyonetiidae
Stegommata sulphuratella ................. ..... Banksia integrifolia
Baty Neplicuida
Nepticula phyllanthina .... ... e . ... Glochidion ferdinandi
Nepticula funeralis? .... .... 0... i... 1. KF. acmenioides
E. pilularis
Nepticula sp. (funeralis group) ...._.............. E. grandis
E. microcorys
E. saligna
Nepticula sp. No. 1... .... .... .... ... ..... Angophora floribunda
E. acmenioides
E. grandis
E. saligna
Nepticula sp. No. 2. .... A. floribunda
E. acmenioides
E. pilularis
E. saligna
Nepticula sp. No. 3. .... E. acmenioides
E. pilularis
E. saligna
Nepticula sp. No. 4. .... E. acmenioides
E. microcorys
E. pilularis
E. saligna
Nepticula sp. No. 5. .... E. acmenioides
E. pilularis
IVEPHERIGISP, (Mein oe hse. 5) co ce Asterolasia _ correifolia
INEDHCUIG Spin cane en en coe ee eomaderris, oustrina
IVEDUCHIANSDs \c7 Ge De ee cs ps Ue oe ae te Waemenioides
WNeplieulal sp. basa ON A ee cvs) Gy, SES aemenioides.
E. microcorys
E. saligna
Nepiiculaysps,. Wc e estat) le. se) beta) een WAngophora. floribunda
INepHCUIa SPs i. .i Ya es, ced, Week.) ee Rabus “moore
Wepnculasp, <n tie ae a) Re SoBanksia serrata
INepliculatsp: Sper Wek. eh cess se UB Manteprifolia

Family Tortricidae
Peraglyphis atimana .... .... 0... 2... «» Grevillea robusta

346

LEAF-MINERS

HOST AND LEAF-MINER ASSOCIATIONS

Host

Acacia podalyriifolia

Alysicarpus nummularifolius-

A. vaginalis

Angophora_ costata
floribunda ..
floribunda ..
floribunda ..
floribunda ..
floribunda ..
floribunda ..
floribunda ..
floribunda . sy
Apium graveolens: “=
Aster Sp. ....

Aster subulatus Pe
Asterolasia correifolia ....
Asterolasia correifolia ....
Banksia _integrifolia

B. serrata

Barringtonia gracilis
Beta vulgaris ....

Bidens pilosa .... 2
Billardiera scandens
Brachiaria miliformis
Breynia_ oblongifolia
Cajanus sp. ..
CAPPARIDACEAE
Cassia bicapsularis ..
Cassinia aculeata ....

C. aureonitens
Celastrus subspicatus ....
Centrosema pubescens ....

Spas anos

Leaf-miner species

. Acrocercops plebeia

Melanagromyza_ alysicarpi

. Melanagromyza alysicarpi

... Acrocercops laciniella ....
. Melanagromyza atomella

.... Acrocercops laciniella ....
.... Parectopa ida . :
... Nepticula sp. ‘No. 1

; NAOH sp. No. 2

Spee

tre Heliozela prodela ie

ie M Se orived apii

... Phytobia humeralis
... Phytobia humeralis
.... Nepticula sp. ....

. Acrocercops sp.

; SIRE sulphuratella

cs MALO OR Ee atomella
.... Liriomyza chenopodii ....
... Phytomyza _atricornis

. Liriomyza sp. ....

be Pseudonapomyza ‘spicata

... Phyllocnistis diaugella ....
... Melanagromyza_ phaseoli
... Lyriomyza brassicae

Ks MEIN BET OT a cassiae ....

2

.... Melanagromyza atomella
. M. centrosematis ....

Chrysanthemum maximum. ....
. Acrocercops ordinatella
... Phytomyza_atricornis
... P. clematidicollis ....
._ P. vitalbae

Cinnamomum camphora
Cirsium vulgare
Clematis aristata
C. montana ....
COMPOSITAE

COME See W ees.
Coreopsis sp. ....
Crotalaria sp. ..
CRUCIFERAE _....
CYPERACEAE ?..
Desmodium polycarpum
Dianella caerulea ....

Diplotaxis muralis ....
Dolichos sp. ....
Doryphora sassafras
Eleusine indica
Erigeron bonariensis

Erythrina sp.? .. Fe
Eucalyptus acmenioides

he Melanagromyza conspicua ee:
aie . Diptera ..

Phytomyza_ atricornis

... M. metallica ....
.... Phytomyza_atricornis
... Melanagromyza_ phaseoli
.... Liriomyza _ brassicae
. Phytobia poemyzina

? Melanagromyza sp.

. Melanagromyza dianellae

Epiphthora sp.

... Lirtomyza brassicae
.... Melanagromyza_ phaseoli
View atomellder... jes:

. Pseudonapomyza

spicata

. Calicomyza humeralis ....

Phytobia humeralis

.... Melanagromyza cassiae ..
. Acrocercops calicella

A. laciniella ....
Parectopa ida . RS one
Nepticula ? funeralis $i
Nepticula sp. No. 1

Order

.... Lepidoptera
.... Diptera
.... Diptera ..
.... Lepidoptera
.... Diptera .
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

4. Diptera. *.
... Diptera ..
= Diptera)
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
. Lepidoptera

Fepidopicrs

... Diptera .

= DIpterayre:

= Dipteray..

.... Diptera ..

.... Diptera.

Sik Lepidoptera

... Diptera .

.... Diptera -.
. Diptera ..

Diptera ..
Diptera ..

a Dipteraar:
= Diptera
uD iptera eae
Atice Lepidoptera
.... Diptera .
.... Diptera ..
. Diptera ..

Diptera ..

... Diptera =
.... Diptera ..
.... Diptera ..
.... Diptera ..
a) Diptera
.... Diptera :
Go Lepidoptera
.... Diptera .
.... Diptera ..
a ipterans.
.... Diptera ..
.... Diptera ..
2. Diptera).
. Diptera *:
ni Lepidoptera
. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera
Lepidoptera
Lepidoptera

Family

.. Gracilariidae
... Agromyzidae
.. Agromyzidae
.. Gracilariidae
... Agromyzidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Heliozelidae
... Agromyzidae
.. Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Gracilariidae
3 Lyonetiidae
.. Nepticulidae
.... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.. Gracilariidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
. Agromyzidae
.. Gracilariidae
... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.. Agromyzidae
.. Gelechiidae
... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.. Agromyzidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae

Eucalyptus botryoides ....

E. camaldulensis ....
E. citriodora ....

E. cladocalyx ....

E. ficifolia

E. globulus

E. grandis

E. grandis

E. grandis

E. gummifera ..

E
E

. maculata

. microcorys ..

. paniculata
. pilularis

ty ty

E. radiata
E. robusta

E. saligna

E. sideroxylon

E. sieberi ..

E. stricta .. , e,
Euodia micrococca ..
Eustephus sp. .... ...
Gahnia melanocarpa

... Phylacteophaga froggatti
... Japanagromyza eucalypti
.... Phylacteophaga froggatti
... Phylacteophaga froggatti
.... Phylacteophaga froggatti
... Phylacteophaga froggatti
.... Nepticula sp. (funeralis group)

EyNveplicula ‘spseNow leo. oe
9

.. Parectopaida.... ....
Heliozela prodela .... .
.... Phylacteophaga froggatti
. Nepticula sp. (funeralis etoup)

HS ees ida .. nd
. Acrocercops laciniella ....

.... Acrocercops sp. nov ? Lede
. Phylacteophaga froggatti

: Phylacteophaga “froggatti var.

.. Lepidoptera
. Lepidoptera

. “Tinea” nr. pentaspila ....
9

... Acrocercops macaria
. Melanagromyza dianellae
>

Nepticula sp. No.

Nepticula sp. No.

Nepticula sp. No.

Nepticula sp. No.
9

Heliozela prodela ....
9

MbWN

“Tinea” sp. nr. spodina ....
“Tinea” nectarea a.
Eupselia nr. carpocapsella a

nena sp. No. 4

Parectopa ida ..

Nepticula funeralis 9
Nepticula sp. No. 2 ....
Nepticula sp. No. 3...
Nepticula sp. No. 4
Nepticula sp. No. 5
Heliozela prodela ....

9

“Tinea”
“Tinea”

sp. nr. spodina
nectarea ....

Parectopa ida ..

Acrocercops hoplocala ....
A. laciniella ....
Parectopa ida ..
Nepticula sp. (funeralis group)
Nepticula sp. No.
Nepticula sp. No.
Nepticula sp. No.
Nepticula sp. No.
9

RWNR

Heliozela prodela ....

9
“Tinea” in spodina group ....
“Tinea” nr. spodina
“Tinea” nectarea

Eupselia nr. carpocapsella ie
Phylacteophaga froggatti

.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
... Lepidoptera

. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

. Lepidoptera
. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

. Hymenoptera
.... Diptera
.... Hymenoptera
... Hymenoptera
. Hymenoptera

Hymenoptera
Lepidoptera

.. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

.... Lepidoptera
.. Lepidoptera .
. Hymenoptera

Lepidoptera
. Lepidoptera
Lepidoptera

.... Lepidoptera

. Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera

. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

.. Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera

¥ Hymenoptera

. Lepidoptera
Hymenoptera

Lepidoptera
Lepidoptera

. Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera

.. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera
Lepidoptera

.... Lepidoptera
. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

ie Hymenoptera
. Lepidoptera

Lepidoptera

.... Lepidoptera
. Diptera ..

Lepidoptera .

.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Heliozelidae
. Incurvariidae
9

347

. Glyphipterygidae
Tenthredinidae
. Agromyzidae
Tenthredinidae
Tenthredinidae
Tenthredinidae
Tenthredinidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Gracilariidae
. Heliozelidae
Tenthredinidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Incurvariidae
.. Tineidae
. Gracilariidae
Tenthredinidae
. Gracilariidae
Tenthredinidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Nepticulidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Incurvariidae
.. Incurvariidae
.. Tineidae
_ Glyphipterygidae
Tenthredinidae
.. Incurvariidae
.. Heliozelidae
.. Gracilariidae
.. Agromyzidae
. Cosmopterygidae

348

Glochidion ferdinand. ....

Glycine sp.

G. soja

Goodenia ovata
GRAMINEAE
Grevillea robusta .... ....
Gynandropsis speciosa ....
Hakea salicifolia

H. sericea a

H. teretifolia ....

Helichrysum bracteatum
H. dendroideum

H. rutidolepis
Hibbertia scandens _.....
Hydrangea macrophylla ..
Indigophera australis

1. suffruticosa ....

Juncus sp. ? ....

Lantana camara ....
LEGUMINOSAE ....
Lomandra longifolia
Lycopersicon esculentum
Macadamia integrifolia ?
Marsdenia_ rostrata
Murraya_ paniculata
Oplismenus compositus ....
Passiflora suberosa
Phaseolus sp. ....

P. lathyroides ..

Pimelea ligustrina ....
Pisum sativum

Plantago sp.
Platycerium grande
Pomaderris ligustrina

Portulaca oleracea .... ....
Raphanus raphanistrum
Rubus moorei ae
Senecio sp.

S. dryadeus

. lautus

linearifolius ..

. minimus

pterophorus ..
pterophorus ..

VOSS ee

Soja sp. aah
Solanum prinophyllum sb
Se. LUDETOSUMM veo...
Sonchus oleraceus ....
Spinacia oleracea ....
Stellaris media
Swainsona_ galegifolia
Tropaeolum major
Tylophora barbata ..
Vigna sp.
Wilkstroemia
Zea sp.

AAnnAnt

indica

. Gracilaria xanthopharella

... Melanagromyza sojae ....

... M. centrosematis ....

... Ophiomyia goodeniae ....

... Pseudonapomyza_ spicata
. Peraglyphis atimana

LEAF-MINERS

Nepticula phyllanthina ....

.... Liriomyza_ brassicae
. Acrocercops nr. argyrodesma

ce Cydmaea eucalype
. C. diversa :

. Liriomyza helichrysi
?

... Phytomyza_atricornis

... Phyllocnistis sp. nov. ? ....
. Melanagromyza atomella
. M. indigopherae

.... M. indigopherae

... Phytobia

... Ophiomyia lantanae

.... Melanagromyza sojae ....
. Ephiphthora sp.

C. luctuosa

triplicata

. Gnoremoschema phaesiosema

. Acrocercops chionosema
.. Melanagromyza atomella

... M. murrayae .... ne
.... Agromyza sp. ? ....
.... Melanagromyza atomella
eS WHS KOA Pee htah Re
.... M. phaseoli see
... M. wilkstroemiae ....
ag pEST eee
.... Phytomyza plantaginis ser
.... Halticorcus platycerii

. Acrocercops sp.

.... Schizocerella pilicornis ine
.... Liriomyza_ brassicae
. Nepticula sp. ?
9

.... Phytomyza
... Phytomyza
... Phytomyza
.... Phytomyza

. Phytomyza

. M.

.... Melanagromyza seneciophila
... M. phaseoli ;

... Ophiomyia solanicola :
... Gnoremoschema operculella
... Phytomyza atricornis .... ...
... Liriomyza chenopodii ....
... Liriomyza chenopodii i
... Melanagromyza sojae ....
... Liriomyza_ brassicae

. M. atomella

Nepticula sp. ....

atricornis
atricornis
atricornis
atricornis
atricornis
? Melanagromyza sp.

M. phaseoli iG
wilkstroemiae ...

. Pseudonapomyza_ spicata

ee DIpteraea ce
ods: Tepisepier

. Diptera .
.... Diptera ..
.... Diptera ..
... Diptera ..
ce Dipteraue.

. Diptera .. .

: Lepidoptera

Diptera =
.... Diptera ..
Dipterar
.... Diptera ..
Se Diptera ce

_ Diptera ..

2. Diptera. ..
. Diptera .

. Diptera .

... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Diptera ..
2 DIptera
... Diptera ..
.... Diptera ..

. Lepidoptera

Diptera ..

Lepidoptera
.. Coleoptera
.... Coleoptera
.... Coleoptera
.. Diptera .

Diptera ..

Lepidoptera

no Pepidopiers

.. Diptera .

.... Diptera ..
... Diptera ..

. Diptera ..
Diptera
... Diptera =
... Diptera ..
.... Diptera ..

.. Diptera .

ra Coleoptera
.... Lepidoptera
.... Lepidoptera

. Hymenoptera
=) Diptera

. Lepidoptera

Diptera ..

Diptera ..

Lepidoptera

Diptera

.... Diptera
.... Diptera
... Diptera ..
.... Diptera
.... Diptera

. Diptera

Diptera

.. Gracilariidae
.. Nepticulidae
... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
.. Tortricidae
. Agromyzidae
.. Gracilariidae
... Curculionidae
... Curculionidae
... Curculionidae
... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
. Agromyzidae
.. Gracilariidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
.. Gelechiidae
.. Gelechiidae
.. Gracilariidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
. Chrysomelidae
. Gracilariidae
. Nepticulidae

Argidae

. Agromyzidae

. Nepticulidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae

. Gelechiidae

.... Agromyzidae
.. Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
... Agromyzidae
.... Agromyzidae
. Agromyzidae

Agromyzidae
Agromyzidae

MOORE 349

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The writer is grateful to his colleague Mr. P. Hadlington for his criticism
of the manuscript; to Mr. I. F. B. Common, C.S.IL.R.O., Canberra, for
identifications of most of the Lepidoptera recorded in this paper; to Mr. L. A. S.
Johnson, of The Royal Botanic Gardens, Sydney, for the identifications of the
botanical material; and to Mrs. J. Fitzell, Forestry Commission of N.S.W. for
typing the manuscript. :

REFERENCES

Benson, R. B., 1963.—“The Affinities of the Australian Argidae.” Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. Ser. 13, 5:631-5.

Cann, H. J., 1965.—“The Macadamia—Australia’s Own Nut.” Agric. Gazette
of N.S.W. (February) N.S.W. Govt. Printer.

Freeman, T. N., 1965.—“A Lepidopterous Leaf-mine from the Tertiary Period.”
Canad. Ent. 97 (10): 1069-70 (October).

Froggatt, W. W., 1927.—“The leaf-mining Moth of the Queensland Silver Wattle.”
For. Ins. & Timber Borers, pp. 36-38. N.S.W. Govt. Printer.

Hadlington, P., 1954.—“The Leaf Blister Sawfly.” For. Commn. Tech. Notes,
8 (1): 16-19. N.S.W. Govt. Printer.

Hering, E. M., 1951.—“Biology of the Leaf-miners.” Uitgeverij, W. Junk,
*s-Gravenhage.

Moore, K. M., 1963.—“Two species of Lepidopterous Leaf-miners attacking
Eucalyptus pilularis Smith.” Aust. Zool. 13 (1): 46-53 (September).

, 1964.—“Insects attacking Hakea spp. in New South Wales.” Proc.

Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 89 (3): 295-306.

Needham, J. G., Frost, S. W. & Tothill, Beatrice H., 1928.—“Leaf-mining Insects.”
351 pp. Bailliere, Tindall & Cox, London.

Newman, J. J. & Clark, J., 1945.—“The Jarrah Leaf-miner.” Aust. For. J.
9: 95-99.

Spencer, K. A., 1963.—“The Australian Agromyzidae.” Rec. Aust. Mus. 25
(15): 305-354 (July).

Watt, M. N., 1924.—“The Leaf-mining Insects of New Zealand.” Tr. N.Z. Inst.
55: 674-687. Wellington N.Z. Govt. Printer.

350

T. J. LEMPRIERE, AN EARLY TASMANIAN NATURALIST

By G. P. WHITLEY
(Plate XX).

“We are in hopes that the fish of Port Arthur have been
described at home from specimens of each kind collected by the
author for Sir John Franklin and sent home in spirits by His
Excellency to the justly celebrated Dr. Richardson.”

—T. J. Lempriere, Penal Settlements of early
Van Diemen’s Land, 1954, p. 64.

The skate, Raja lemprieri Richardson, 1845, appears to be the only species
of animal named in honour of Thomas James Lempriere (1796-1852) who
deserves fuller recognition as a naturalist and part-time scientist in the early
days of Tasmania. The following sketch of Lempriere’s career hardly does
justice to his many-sided nature but may serve as a preliminary outline for
future students to fill out and colour.

First a trader, then a military official, Lempriere had a pronounced
scientific bent. He carefully recorded weather conditions and was praised by
the Governor, Sir John Franklin, for his meteorological observations; he
devised chemical experiments; he tried to set up small museums in Hobart
and at Port Arthur. He collected fishes for John Richardson and mammals,
birds and insects for William Swainson; his correspondence with the latter
has been catalogued by Gunther (1900). Lempriere was an accomplished artist
who painted portraits of the identities of his period, also views of land and sea.
He took quite a time over these paintings, returning to them again and again.
He must have written voluminously though few of his manuscripts appear to
have survived and only a small amount has been preserved in print. In 1838,
he was making drawings for a book (probably autobiographical) he was
writing, which never seems to have been published, though he offered it to the
editor of the Tasmanian for the press.

Lempriere’s manuscript journal, or diary, for 1837 to 1838, the original
of which is in the Mitchell Library, Sydney, enables us to picture him as a
clever, cultivated, convivial, straightforward man. Life in Tasmania in the
convict days was eventful, but not perhaps as hectic as today’s modern pace.
The Sabbath was strictly observed, no work whatever being done. If the
weather was too bad, family prayers were held at home. Lempriere himself
officiated at the church, even delivering an Easter sermon; in those days it was
not necessary to have been ordained. He was very busy on military ration days,
but otherwise had enough leisure for riding, walking, hunting, fishing, boating
and sailing (though he suffered from seasickness), sketching, and visiting
friends (smoked a cigar at Benson’s or “took a chop with Mr. Poole”),
reading (“amused myself with Pickwick”—so soon after it was published!),
or playing games like cribbage, whist, vingt-et-un, loo, draughts, backgammon
and chess. He took his bugle into the empty New Church to try the sound,
which he described as “grand”. He was hospitable to the officers of visiting
French ships such as La Favorite and the corvette l’Heroine. At one ship’s party
his young son sang a French song and took one glass of wine; his father
perhaps took more than one glass since he left his beloved bugle on board.
T. J. Lempriere was a horticulturist, grafting fruit-trees, and an apiarist. He
taught his children to draw and to sing in French and English. He gave
lessons on French history, geography, geometry, etc. and was secretary of the
Mechanics’ Institution at Hobart. He was, at its inception, a corresponding
member of the Tasmanian Society (later the Royal Society of Van Diemen’s
Land, and of Tasmania). He was a Justice of the Peace and sat on inquests.
A portrait, believed to be of him, and bearing his signature, is in the Mitchell
Library, Sydney, and is reproduced here as plate XX.

WHITLEY 351

In 1823, he had married a Miss Charlotte Smith who, in the course of
a long and happy life, bore him six sons and five daughters.

Thomas James Lempriere was of Norman-Jersey descent and was born
at Hamburg on 11 February', 1796. His father, Thomas Lempriere, was
a London merchant. Hudspeth (1949) tells us that, while a banker on the
Continent in 1803, he and his family were taken into custody by order of
Napoleon Bonaparte and interned until 1815. In 1825,- Thomas, the father,
came out to Tasmania and received a grant of 1,000 acres at Mount Direction;
he died on 4th January 1829 and was buried in Hobart alongside his wife who
had predeceased him.”

Coming back to his son, Thomas James Lempriere, Hudspeth continues:
“When a mere boy he had an exciting experience. As already stated he was
interned on the Continent with his father and family. Under the regulations
then in force regarding internees, children of not more than 11 years of age
could be released from custody. Although young Thomas was 16 (apparently
an error as in 1803 he would have been 7—G.P.W.), he was dressed as a boy
of 11, and sent off alone to England, with a Passport which understated his
age, and carrying a trunk fitted with a false bottom and sides, in which were
concealed Despatches to the Horse Guards and Admiralty, as well as letters to
people in England. After an adventurous journey, he succeeded in reaching his
destination and in delivering the precious documents.” This episode is also
referred to in Men of the Time in Australia (1878), wherein T. J. Lempriere
is referred to as an officer who in the last war with France had after a nine
years’ experience as a prisoner of war, the honour and satisfaction of participating
as lieutenant in the waggon train in the victory of Waterloo.

Thomas James Lempriere lived in England and Europe. In December,
1882 he came to Hobart Town, Tasmania, on the ship Regalia and early in
1823 took possession of Mount Pleasant and its vicinity. The Hobart Town
Gazette of 1823 carries various references to the stores run in Elizabeth Street
by Lempriere & Co. Money must have been in short supply, since “Wheat, wool,
oil, seal, opossum, kangaroo rat and emu skins, with any article of Colonial
produce” were taken in payment for goods, at cash prices, and Spanish dollars
were also accepted. A wide range of goods was sold; imported articles,
“excellent Irish butter by the firkin”, saddlery, horses, boats, drapery, brushes,
Epsom salts, timber, books, etc. and warehouse storage was also offered. However,
Lempriere’s trade ventures were apparently not successful in the long run,
and he entered the Commissariat Department. In 1824 and 1825, Mrs. Lempriere
conducted a school for girls, helped by Miss Lempriere, her sister-in-law,
at Roseway Lodge on New Town Rivulet, Hobart. In 1826, T. J. Lempriere
and his wife were at Maria Island where he was in charge of the Commissariat
issues. In 1827, Lempriere left for another Tasmanian settlement, Macquarie
Harbour (Hobart Town Gazette, Nov. 1, 1827). There he offered to collect for
William Swainson in England. He had sent two ornithorhynchi. He was
appointed Clerk to the Market, Hobart (Australian newspaper, Oct. 10, 1828)
and was preparing a Universal View of Van Diemen’s Land which was intended
to be published in England (Australian, May 14, 1828 and Sydney Gazette,
May 16, 1828, p. 3, a). There are references to him, too, in Hist. Rec. Austr.
(3) iv, pp. 101 & 532, as a settler, storekeeper and a proprietor in the bank of
Van Diemen’s Land.

' According to his own manuscript Journal, 1838, p. 117, but other accounts
give January as the month.

2 Thomas Lempriere, T. J. L’s. father, was born at Faroun al Carkekin, Port
of Portugal, in 1757. He emigrated to Van Diemen’s Land from Whitby,
England. See Hobart Town Courier, 10 Jan. 1829; Sydney Gazette, 24 Jan.
1829, p. 2, col. 6, and Hudspeth, 1949, p. 27.

352 LEMPRIERE

Lempriere’s correspondence with Swainson continued from Hobart in
1830 and from Newport in 1831. In 1832, he was secretary to the Mechanics’
Institution at Hobart Town. Then according to the journals of George A.
Robinson, to which Mr. N. Plomley directed my attention, on March 17,
1833, Lempriere was to relieve Mr. Neill at Port Arthur. He was still there in
October 1833 when he promised to draw portraits of Tasmanian aborigines for
Robinson. In March and April, 1834, inspired by a copy of Swainson’s Zoology
which a friend had given him, Lempriere began sketching Tasmanian birds
as the commencement of a series of drawings, the first being of the native
sparrow. He also painted a transparency of his coat of arms at this time’.
In June 1835 he received a case of entomological instruments from William
Swainson and in 1836 Lempriere sent mammals, birds and insects to Swainson
from Port Arthur. Another manuscript journal of his, now in the Mitchell
Library (MSS., A.577) begins on 1st January 1837, evidently still at Port
Arthur, where Lempriere was Deputy Assistant Commissary General. On Aug.
7, 1838, “Got my Military Cloaths”, he wrote, and on Sept. 3, 1838, he was
gazetted a Justice of the Peace. He made several requests for increased pay
and promotion, but these were deferred or slow in coming; the Lieutenant-
Governor had allowed him 3/6 per diem for his observations from Port
Arthur but this was refused by military headquarters in England. Lempriere
seems to have been stationed for years at Port Arthur with occasional trips
to Hobart and elsewhere. In 1848, he was relieved by A. C. G. Browne and
Lempriere was transferred to Oatlands, Tasmania (Hobart Town Courier, July
29 and Oct. 18, 1848). In 1850, he was promoted to Assistant Commissary
General. His later career is not known to me, but in 1851 he was ordered
from Hong Kong to England for health reasons. He died at Aden on Jan. 5,
1852, aged 56 years, and was buried in the cantonment there with military
honours.

His widow, Charlotte Lempriere, died at Bellerive, Tasmania, on Sept. 27,
1890, aged 87 years. Their children were Edward Marsh Lempriere (1824-1847);
Charles Monteiro d’Almeida (a surgeon who was attacked by bushrangers);
Thomas Henry (1825-191-), who lived over 90 years; James Moodie (1835-59);
William George (18--- ?1887); John Everard Home (died in infancy, 1845);
Mary Earle (1829 or 1830-1847); Charlotte Sarah Harriet (1833-1885); Lucy
Maria (March 31, 1838-1928); Fanny Elizabeth (1840-1923) and Emily
(1842-7).

Early Tasmanian Museums

The Australian Museum, Sydney, commenced in 1827, is the oldest museum
in Australia, but only just, for Dr. W. Bryden (1963, p. 1), writing from Hobart,
stated, “As early as 1828, collections were being made with the thought in
mind that when a Museum was actually opened, those collections would
rest there. In truth, we should say that a Museum was founded as early as that
year . . . .” The Mechanics’ Institution of Hobart was founded in 1826. In
1838, “in the new Customs House now in progress, there was a room
constructed which was intended for a Museum . . .” Also Dr. John Lhotsky
made a collection for a “Franklineum” or museum, probably in 1837, but
earlier the Van Diemen’s Land Society was announced in the Tasmanian
Almanack, 1830, p. 63 as having been for the establishment of a Museum and
Botanic Garden. The foundation of Lady Franklin’s Museum on the Ancanthe
estate at Lenah Valley near Hobart was laid on 12th March, 1842. This charming
building still stands, though in 1853 the cases and fittings of the Ancanthe
Museum were removed to the Royal Societys Museum then situated in
Harrington Street, Hobart. Apparently T. J. Lempriere must now be given
the credit for establishing a museum (at Port Arthur rather than Hobart?) in
1837.

3 Lempriere papers, 1834-1849 (1), MSS in Mitchell Library, Sydney, A.3343.

WHITLEY 353

In T. J. Lempriere’s manuscript journal, as early as the 21st and 22nd
April, 1837, the entry occurs (p. 45), “Je me suis occupé a arranger notre
future Musée.” On May 25th (p. 55): “We go every evening to the Museum.
Niercer [?0r Mercer, the name is illegible but may have been the Christian
name of Lempriere’s sister] assists me and we gives them lessons in French
History, Geography, Geometry, &c. At 8 we make the observations and come
home. By the bye, talking of the Museum, I think I have not noticed that
since the first of this Month I have begun keeping meteorological Journals—
Internal [?] and attached thermometer, Barometer, Winds, Weather, &c. Dr.
Lhotsky’s old quarters is the site of the observations and of a museum we
are forming.” [Dr. John Lhotsky had stayed with Lempriere at Port Arthur
from February 18, 1837 to April 16, 1837 and Lempriere took him collecting
and used to beat him at chess].

Other references to his museum and his apparatus occur throughout
Lempriere’s journal, some pages of which are now illegible. A few examples
follow:

Page 57. May 31, 1837, “. . . picked up some specimens, found a
mineral, can’t say what it is. Skinned (very badly) a black cockatoo for
museum.” Lempriere skinned other birds and mammals and noted when whales
were seen in the bay.

Page 62. June 21, 1837: “Was at the Museum all night—after 12 o’clock
laid down in my rug between each hour. Edward ee company with me,
he did not go to sleep—sent him to his bed at 6 a.m...

Page 63, June 28, 1837: “for these few days past the Masons have
been at work laying the foundations to the increase to our quarters. . . all
in dust and confusion.”

Page 78. Aug. 31, 1837. “On Monday some rascal stole my thermometer
from the Museum. Capt. B.* gave the whole of any that were at work
there 6 months in the cells unless they produced it—no news of it though.”

Pages 101-102. Dec. 10, 1837. “Began arranging specimens on new
shelves in the Museum.”

Page 104. Dec. 24, 1837. “Mr. Parker killed a fine sword fish—15 feet
long—Cart got it. I had hoped to have the head and snout for the Museum
but Cart is too greedy.” [This is the first record of a swordfish (probably
Xiphias or peniaps Istiompax) from Tasmania. Mr. Cart was Superintendent
of Convicts.—G.P.W. ]

Page 110. Jan. 13, 1838. Owing to the arrival of an officer, the Museum
had to vacate the quarters it occupied. Lempriere removed the specimens and,
after dinner on Jan. 15, “laid out the curiosities in the New Museum.” A
Dr. Everitt called later in January and was give some specimens for himself
and some for William Swainson, whom Everitt was going to visit in England;
i was also requested to call on Lempriere’s relatives at Jersey in the Channel
slands.

Page 116. Feb. 6, 1838: “Arranging shells at the Museum.”

Page 120. Feb. 27, 1838: “The Museum being required as quarters for
Mr. Brooks had to move the collection to the stores.”

__ Page 123. Feb. 28, 1838: “Took the honey from a fine hive of bees
without killing them. Busy setting the New Museum to rights.”

* Captain O’Hara Booth (1800-1851). Lempriere’s portrait of the Captain,
painted in 1836, is reproduced by Giblin (1926, pl. xi).—G.P.W.

354 LEMPRIERE

Page 127. Lempriere and others caught snapper and salmon, some of
which disagreed with them. [This is the earliest reference to poisoning from
eating the fish, Arripis, a subject subsequently dealt with by McCoy in 1867.
Unfortunately no details are given by Lempriere].

Page 170. August 29, 1838: “Rainy day. Governor [Franklin] inspected
stores and museum—appeared pleased—promised to speak to Captain Montague
for a salary for Edward—called at our House, was pleased with the Portraits—
promised to sit for me. I called on Lady F[ranklin] to see whether she would
go round the workships—too wet—gave me some rare seeds...

Acknowledgements

For information about Lempriere, I am grateful to Mr. P. R. Eldershaw,
Archives Officer, State Archives, the State Library of Tasmania, Hobart,
and to the librarians of the Mitchell Library and the Australian Museum,
Sydney, and the National Library, Kingston, Canberra, A.C.T. Mr. Norman
J. B. Plomley, of the University of New South Wales, also kindly supplied
references.

Quotations from Lempriere’s journal of 1837 and 1838 are from the original
unpublished manuscript in the Mitchell Library, Sydney, which has also
permitted me to reproduce the pencil portrait ascribed to T. J. Lempriere
in its possession.

My thanks are tendered to all concerned.

References to published books and papers.

Bryden, W., 1966.—The Tasmanian Museum and Art Gallery: Historical Note.
Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 100, pp. 21-26.
Bryden, W., and others, 1963.—Centenary of the opening of the Tasmanian
Museum and Art Gallery Building . . . January—1863, pp. 1-48,
pls. i-viii.
Burn, D., 1842.—Excursion to Port Arthur. Tas. Journ. Nat. Sci., 1, pp. 265-295.
Dixson, W., 1921.—Journ. Roy. Austr. Hist. Soc., 7, p. 159.
Giblin, W., 1926.—Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1925 (1926), p. 158, pl. xi.
Gunther, A., 1900.—Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., 1899-1900, p. 43.
Historical Records of Australia, Series III, vol. 4, publ. 1921, pp. 101 & 532,
et hibias) Series! LL, svol. 55919225 p: 9331:
Hudspeth, W. H., 1949.—The Story of St. David’s Park (Hobart: City Council),
44 pages, illustr. (Lempriere, pp. 27-28).
Lempriere, T. J., 1842a.—Description of a Sea Slug found at Port Arthur.
Tas. Journ, Nat. Sci., 1, pp. 152-153.
, 1842b.—Meteorological Tables taken from the Observations made
at Port Arthur from ist July 1837 to 30th June 1841. Tas. Journ.
NatisSciz i apar22Zo-
, 1842-46—Account of Macquarie Harbour. Tas. Journ. Nat. Sci.,
1 (5), 1842, pp. 359-375; 2 (6), 1846, pp. 17-31; 2 (7), 1846,
pp. 107-118, and 2 (8), 1846, pp. 200-208.
, 1846.—Meteorological Observations made at Port Arthur during
the Year 1842. Tas. Journ. Nat. Sci., 2, p. 70. [Lempriere here
adds early phenological notes: “First swallow seen, Sth Sept... .
First Bees swarmed, 17th Nov.’ ]
, 1954.—The penal settlements of early Van Diemen’s Land, 112 pp.,
1 plate; published by the Launceston branch of the Roy. Soc. Tas.
Men of the Time in Australia, Victorian Series, 1878 (Melbourne: McCarron,
Bird), p. 103.

WHITLEY 355

Plomley, N. J. B., 1966.—Friendly Mission: The Tasmanian journals and
papers of George Augustus Robinson, 1829-1834 (Hobart: Tas.
Hist. Res. Assn.), 1,074 pp.

Richardson, J., 1839-1857.—[ Various ichthyological papers, listed by Whitley,
1964, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, 89, p, 107. Raia lemprieri was
named in Zoology of the Voyage of H.M.S. “Erebus” and
“Terror” . . . Fishes, 1845, p. 34, pl. xxiii.]

Royal Society of Van Diemen’s Land, 1853.—Report, 1852, p. [14].

Shaw, A. G. L., 1955.—Journ. Roy. Austr. Hist. Soc., 40 (6), p. 336.

Swainson, W., 1838.—Animals in Menageries, p. 344.

Whitley, G. P., 1933.—Journ. Roy. Austr. Hist. Soc., 19 (5), p. 311.

Whittell, H. M., 1954—The Literature of Australian Birds, p. 425.

Manuscript Sources.

Backhouse, James.—Journal (Mitchell Library MSS. vol. B.731), under date
27 Nov. 1833, p. 41.

Calder, J. E—Manuscripts of the 1830’s to 1310's in the Calder papers, 1055
pages (Mitchell Library MSS., A.605).

Havard, W. L.—Index (cards in Mitchell amen

Lempriere, T. J—Papers, 1834-1849 (Mitchell Library MSS., A.3343; primary
sources *5-108A). Include: (1) Diary, partly written in French,
Port Arthur, 23 March 1834 to 30 April 1836; (2) Diary, partly
in French, Port Arthur and Oatlands, Tas., 1 Feb. 1847 to 11
July 1849; (3) a fair copy, edited for publication, of Lempriere’s
Penal Settlements of Van Diemen’s Land; and (4) Document
from Sir John Wilmot, 25 May 1846, appointing Lempriere
coroner; and Document, dated St. James, 1 June 1846, appointing
Lempriere as Acting Commissary General, effective as from 1844.

Lempriere, T. J.—Manuscript diary, written in French and English, from
January 1837 to May 1838, 174 pages (Mitchell Library MSS.,
A.577).

Lempriere Family—Xerox copy of typed list of newspaper references, etc.,
kindly supplied by Mr. P. R. Eldershaw, State Archives, Hobart.

Robinson, George Augustus—Manuscript journals (Mitchell Library, A.7030,
part 7 and A.7031, parts 1-3).

Verreaux, J. P.—Photostat copy of manuscript journal, written in French
from 1842 to 1845. Original in Museum d’Histoire naturelle,
Paris. Mitchell Library MSS., 580; primary sources *5-132 B., 3
volumes. Ref. to Lempriere, vol. i, p. 41, dated 13 January 1843.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XxX.

Portrait of Thomas James Lempriere, or of an unknown person, by T. J.
Lempriere. It could be a self-portrait.
From the original in the Mitchell Library, Sydney.

356

WILLIAM GALVIN (1787-1873), AN EARLY AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM
CUSTODIAN

by G. P. WHITLEY

Accounts of the early history of the Australian Museum refer to a
custodian of the “Colonial Museum” named William Galvin, but no details
of his life or services haye been published hitherto. Now, as a result of
reading, in the Mitchell Library, Sydney, the manuscript Returns of the Colony
of New South Wales (in the State Archives) from 1822 to 1857, the Statistical
Registers from 1849 to 1861, and subsequent Blue Books, it is possible to
place him in his period and establish other particulars. William Galvin was born
in 1787.

The Historical Records of Australia (Series 1, vols. 15 & 16) list a William
Galvin as one of four convict petitioners to Governor Darling for conditional
pardon in 1829. They arrived in New South Wales in the ship Sir Godfrey
Webster in January 1826, having been convicted of manslaughter at Roscommon,
Ireland, 9th March 1825, and sentenced to transportation for life. They had been
attached to the Police stationed in the town of Athlone when a riot took place
and a man was stabbed with a bayonet. It was subsequently held that the blow
which occasioned the death for which Galvin and the others had been transported,
was inflicted by another man.

According to the Sydney Gazette, 7th October 1826, Galvin was sent to a
working party for six months. As Galvin’s conduct since his arrival in the
Colony was held to have been exemplary, he was eventually pardoned (con-
ditionally in 1829 and absolutely in March, 1832). There was also another
William Galvin mentioned in the Sydney Gazette in 1819 and 1821.

“Our” William Galvin, whosoever he was, was appointed as Messenger,
Executive Council, Sydney, on 23 June 1829. On 16 January 1834, he was
appointed, by the Governor, in charge of the Colonial Museum at an extra
£10 per annum, though a letter ' from Deas Thomson indicates that he
had been in charge since 1831. This infant Australian Museum consisted of
a collection of beautifully mounted specimens, particularly birds, prepared by
William Holmes the Colonial Zoologist who had died on 24 August 1831, 2? and
was housed in rooms which still exist in Parliament House, Macquarie Street,
Sydney. A convict, John Roach, was appointed at the same time as Galvin
to collect and preserve subjects of Natural History 3.

Galvin’s museum services were discontinued on 31st May, 1836, though
he continued as Parliamentary Messenger until he retired, due to advanced
age, in 1852, when he was 65. He lived long afterwards on a state pension of
£35/5/8 per annum, and died on 5th August 1873.

William Galvin was therefore the second custodian of the Australian Museum
(Holmes having been the first) and was still in charge of the specimens when
the Governor appointed George Bennett Curator on 1 October 1835.

1 See Australian Natural History, Sept. 1962, p. 100.

2 fide Return of the Colony for 1831 (manuscript, unpaged), not in 1830
as stated by Lhotsky and others.

3 Roach was succeeded by W. S. Wall as Collector and Preserver of

Specimens, Colonial Museum, on 1 August, 1840—Return of the Colony
of N.S.Wales, 1840, pp. 118 & 188.

357

GRACIUS JOSEPH BROINOWSKI: HIS BOOKS AND HIS
PROSPECTUSES

by K. A. Hinpwoop
(Plates XXI-XXIIT)

The place of Gracius Joseph Broinowski in Australian art, natural history
and ornithology, has been discussed by William Moore (1934), Gregory Mathews
(1942), Tom Iredale (1956) and L. Paszkowski (1962). In addition, a summary
of his life is given in the Australian Encyclopaedia (1958).

Broinowski was born at Wielum in Poland on March 7, 1837, the son of a
wealthy landholder in what was then Russian Poland. He was educated at
Munich University. Later, to avoid being conscripted into the army, he went
to Germany where he was robbed of all his possessions. With a fellow Pole
he made his way to London and there taught French for about a year; then,
tales of adventure prompted him to ship in a windjammer to Australia.

“The voyage took six months, and every day of it was made a hell for the
youth. He was bullied by both officers and crew, who jeered at him because he
was foreign. He had no hammock to sleep in, but was given one of the
whaleboats hanging on the davits, for a bed. It was a common joke on a
winter’s morning for an officer to tip the boat, so that the lad would fall on
the deck bruised and shivering. However the ship anchored at last in Portland
Harbour, Victoria. Broinowski was not allowed to go on shore, but in the
early hours of the morning he took french leave of the hated ship and swam
to land. He hurried through the town, and into the country, and after some
hours walking came to a little house by the road. Here he met with the first
act of kindness he had known since he left his home. He asked for a drink
of water, and an old Scottish lady asked him in, fed him with the best she
had, and sent him on his way with new courage” (Mathews, 1942, p. 196).

Broinowski worked for a few years in the country and then settled in
Melbourne, finding employment as a canvasser for a firm of publishers. Later,
he travelled widely in Victoria, New South Wales and Queensland painting
landscapes and scenes of various towns and promoting “art-unions,” with his
pictures as prizes.

In either 1879 or 1880 he settled in Sydney where he taught painting to
private pupils and at colleges, lectured on art and exhibited at various showings
of the Royal Art Society, of which body he was an active member. His
first commercial venture into the field of natural history seems to have been a
commission to supply the Department of Public Instruction of New South Wales
with pictures of the birds and mammals of Australia. These illustrations were
coloured lithographs mounted on boards and varnished, and were hung in
classrooms throughout the State. The project was commenced in the early
1880’s and, during the next few years, the Department took only 500 sets
of the lithographs instead of 1,000 copies of the series as originally arranged.
In the meantime Broinowski had a number of the sets bound with appropriate
text. The wording on the title-page of copies of this book in the Mitchell
Library, Sydney, and the National Library, Canberra, reads: “Birds and
Mammals of Australia. Issued under the Authority of the Department of
Public Instruction of New South Wales. Drawn, lithographed and described
by Gracius J. Broinowski. Sydney. Printed by G. Murray, 91 Clarence Street,
Wynyard Square.”

Another copy of the Birds and Mammals of Australia in the Mitchell
Library lacks the words “Issued under the Authority of the Department of
Public Instruction” on its title-page, but, on the verso of the title-page it has

358 BROINOWSKI

the following dedication not present in other copies mentioned: “To the Hon.
William Joseph Trickett, M.P., Minister for Public Instruction of New South
Wales, this work is respectfully dedicated as a mark of appreciation of his
successful efforts in the cause of Education, by his faithful servant, G. J.
Broinowski.” No date appears on the title-page. However, the dedication to
W. J. Trickett on one of the two copies in the Mitchell Library indicates that
the year of issue was either 1884 or 1885 because Trickett then held office as
Minister for Public Instruction.

During this period Broinowski was in correspondence with Henry Sotheran
& Co., with the object of bringing out a “small popular edition of the late
Mr. Gould’s Birds and Mammals of Australia.” This proposed work may have
been, in effect, the Birds and Mammals of Australia of which he had already
produced copies from his “Birds and Mammals” series of pictures mentioned
earlier.

Among correspondence in the possession of J. S. P. Ramsay of Sydney
are copies of letters dated November 7, 1884, from Henry Sotheran & Co., the
London booksellers, to Broinowski and to E. P. Ramsay (father of J. S. P.), who
was, at the time, Curator of the Australian Museum, Sydney. Both letters relate
to the proposed book.

Henry Sotheran & Co.
136 Strand,
London, W.C.
7th November, 1884.
Gracius J. Broinowski, Esq.,
171 Macquarie Street,
Sydney, N.S.W.

Dear Sir,

We duly received your esteemed favour of August 21st, written with a view
to ascertaining whether we should be willing to allow you to reproduce and
publish in the Colonies a small popular edition of the late Mr. Gould’s Birds and
Mammals of Australia, the copyright of which works we own.

Prior to receipt of your letter we had it in contemplation to produce
such a work and now we are in correspondence with another firm in reference
to it, the precise form and price are not yet settled.

Under the circumstances we regret we cannot at present entertain your
proposal—we gather from your letter that you had already made use of part
of the work—this we beg you will not issue as it might prejudice to a certain
extent our own contemplated work and lead to unpleasantness, which, as
matters stand, can now be well avoided.

We beg to remain, dear Sir,
Yours faithfully, etc.

Henry Sotheran & Co.

H. Sotheran & Co.,
36 Piccadilly,
London, W.

7th November, 1884.

Dear Mr. Ramsay,

_ I feel greatly obliged to you for drawing my attention to Mr. Broinowski’s
action and intentions. I had received a proposal from him a week or two before
your letter came to hand, to enter into some arrangement with him for the

HINDWOOD 359

re-production of Gould’s Birds of Australia. I think the protests you so kindly
made in my behalf, together with my communication to him this mail—a copy
of which I enclose—will effectually stop him from proceeding further with
the reproduction. But in the event of his persisting to publish, or to announce
any such work, I have acted on your suggestion of sending you, enclosed, a
power of attorney, to enable you to get an injunction forthwith. I here just
state that I have contemplated an issue, in some form or other, and it is possible
(if certain negotiations which are now proceeding are brought to a successful
issue) that I may bring out the work, in conjunction with a well-known firm
in a reduced form, so as to be popularised in the Australian Colonies.

By this mail you will receive Invoice of the “Gould’s Works” ordered by
you, which I hope you will receive safely and be bound to your liking.

“Audubon” as you know is exceedingly scarce—we cannot now find a copy
but have one in view—a fine copy in private hands which we hope to get into
our possession by exchange or purchase.

Thanking you again for your kindness and promptitude in the foregoing
matter and trusting that coercive powers may not be necessary and so give you
no further trouble.

Believe me to remain,
Yours very truly,
Henry Sotheran.

P.S. Power of Attorney will follow next mail—it is not ready this afternoon.

The “Birds and Mammals” series of pictures, which were also used (with
the addition of appropriate text) in the Birds and Mammals of Australia are,
generally speaking, based on the plates in Gould’s Birds of Australia and his
Mammals of Australia, but they are not precise copies from those sources. In
some instances it seems that the designs have been copied direct on to the
stone, with the result that the figures on the printed sheets face the opposite
way to those in the relevant Gould plates. In other cases attitudes have been
changed slightly, as have backgrounds. Nevertheless, the influence of Gould is
quite apparent, a fact that doubtless resulted in the decision by Sotheran & Co.
in the matter of copyright.

Presumably, on receipt of Sotheran’s letter, Broinowski ceased publication
of his Birds and Mammals of Australia which was thought to have been issued
in a limited edition for private circulation (Iredale, 1956, p. 14). In producing
this book Broinowski probably had in mind the marketing of the 500 sets of
pictures left on his hands by the Department of Public Instruction.

The Birds and Mammals of Australia contains 16 full-page coloured
lithographs of birds and 16 double-page lithographs of mammals !
together with related text. The few copies known are bound in full dark
maroon leather and titled in gold on the cover and the spine.

Assuming that the “small popular edition of the late Mr. Gould’s Birds
and Mammals of Australia” that Broinowski had in mind when he wrote
Sotheran & Co. in August, 1884, is the same item as his Birds and Mammals of
Australia, then the word “small” in the above context may have meant limited
in scope. Broinowski’s Birds and Mammals of Australia measures 14” x 103”, as
against 212” x 144” for Gould’s folios; also, it contains only 32 plates, whereas
Gould’s Birds of Australia comprises 681 plates (including those in the Supple-
ment), and his Mammals of Australia, 182 plates.

‘A copy of this work in the National Library, Canberra, lacks one plate,
that of the Wombat.

360 BROINOWSKI

It may be mentioned, in the matter of copyright, that soon after Gould’s
death in 1881 Henry Sotheran & Co. bought from his executors the remaining
stock of his works which consisted of many hundreds of parcels, weighing
upwards of thirty tons, containing original drawings, sketches, tracings, proof
and experimental plates and other material accumulated by Gould during his
long career as an ornithologist, author and publisher (Piccadilly Notes, No. 22,
n.d.)

In the circumstances, as detailed in the letters quoted, Broinowski did not
proceed with the issue of his “small popular edition” of Gould’s Birds and
Mammals. However, he had gathered, over a considerable number of years,
material for a folio work on the birds of Australia. A note announcing the
impending publication of this work appeared in the Sydney Morning Herald
of March 28th, 1887: it reads:—

“Mr Gracius Broinowski, an artist who has made the painting of birds
his study for many years, is bringing out a book upon Australian birds,
which will be most valuable to lovers of the feathered tribe. The work
has been a long time in preparation, but, as the result Mr. Broinowski
has made sketches of the whole of the existing birds of the country. The
book will be issued in parts. After being lithographed the illustrations
will be finished by hand painting, and every endeavour will be made to
keep true to nature. We have seen specimens of the work, and can speak
of it in the highest terms of praise. The birds appear true to life,
being carefully and accurately drawn and very artistically arranged.
Accompanying each will be a letterpress description of the habits, char-
acter, and nature of the birds. The descriptions we read were not of the
dry, technical nature, but more in a narrative form, giving every possible
information in connection with each group or species. The work will be
concluded with a number, which will give a thoroughly scientific
classification of the birds. It is expected that the whole will be
completed in 60 or 70 numbers. There will be about 300 plates, including
between 700 and 800 varieties, comprising all the known birds of
Australia.”

This newspaper report prompted Dr. E. P. Ramsay, who still held the Power
of Attorney given him by Sotheran & Co. in 1884, to write immediately to
Broinowski informing him “in a friendly manner” that no infringement of
Gould’s copyright would be tolerated. Ramsay’s letter is as follows:—

Australian Museum,
28th March, 1887.
Dear Sir,

As I see by the paper (Sydney Morning Herald, March 28, 1887) that
you are about to bring out a work on Australian Birds, I beg to say that
in conjunction with Mr. Sotheran, who has purchased Gould’s copyright, I am
writing a book on the same subject. I therefore wish to inform you in a
friendly manner that if any infringement either in description, nomenclature,
classification or otherwise takes place I shall be obliged under my Power of
Attorney from Sotheran & Co. to take proceedings against its issue.

ievams
Dear Sir,
Yours truly,
E. P. Ramsay.

Mr. Gracius Broinowski.

The illustrations in the Birds of Australia are based on drawings by
Broinowski himself and are not copies of Gould’s plates. Nevertheless, it
would appear, from the following letter among the Ramsay papers, that
Broinowski had been in touch with Sotheran & Co. over some aspect of Gould’s
copyright, and the use of his material.

HINDWOOD 361

Private.
54 Kent Street, N.,
Miller’s Point,
Sydney.
17th July, 1888.
Dear Sir,

tre Broinowski’s “Birds”

In our one or two conversations respecting the above work I omitted
to enquire particularly from you to what extent Gould’s work is protected
by copyright—taking it, of course, for granted that H. Sotheran would not
have especially empowered you to act for him in support of his interests in
Gould were they not copyrighted.

I hear casually today that Mr. B. has received a letter from Sotheran
which, if I am rightly informed, virtually accords him permission to make
all the use of Gould that he sought. This seems so opposed to your views
that I cannot refrain from acquainting you with the rumour—leaving you
to assess its worth.

I also hear that Mr. B., is, on the strength of Sotheran’s permission,
again canvassing for a publisher to proceed with his moribund publication!

Yours faithfully,

To Dr. Ramsay F. Ruthven

The Birds of Australia was commenced in 1887 but, through lack of funds,
had ceased publication in 1888 after the issue of only six parts. Broinowski
still had not disposed of the 500 sets of his “Birds and Mammals” pictures
prepared a few years previously for the Department of Public Instruction. In
an effort to realise on this “asset”, apparently now free of any restriction
of copyright, and so obtain funds for the continuance of his Birds of Australia,
he asked Edmund Barton to write to Sir Henry Parkes on his behalf in April,
1888. A few months later, in August, Broinowski also wrote to Parkes seeking
his aid in the same matter.

Edmund Barton, later to become the first Prime Minister of Australia and
to be knighted, had earlier lodged with Broinowski in Sydney. Sir Henry Parkes
was, at the time, Premier and Colonial Secretary of New South Wales. Among
Parkes’ papers is an unsigned and undated memorandum in which Broinowski’s
position is discussed. The letters, both from Barton and Broinowski to Parkes,
and the memorandum, are given hereunder.

Barton to Parkes. Parkes Correspondence, Mitchell Library, Sydney, Vol. 2, A872,
pp. 321-2.

Denman Chambers,
Phillip Street, Sydney
30th April, 1888.
Dear Sir Henry Parkes,

I am anxious to introduce to you a gentleman who has been involved
in much fruitless labour and heavy pecuniary loss in the preparation of a
scientific work at the instance of one of the Government Departments, which
is now unable or unwilling to accept copies to the number actually ordered. The
preparation of the balance over the number accepted has been the cause of
the loss to which this gentleman, Mr. G. J. Broinowski, has been subjected.
He is an artist by profession, and is also a Bachelor of Science of the University
of Munich.

The work is I believe of a high order of merit, both as regards its
scientific value and the taste, accuracy and elegance of its execution; and I
believe that the refusal to accept the remainder of the copies ordered does
not arise from any objection to the work itself.

362 BROINOWSKI

Mr. Broinowski believes that if you could afford him a short interview he
would be enabled to convince you completely that he has but carried out his
part of a plain agreement and that he is entitled to be paid for the labour,
research, and expenditure which he has been led to undertake.

As the final rejection of Mr. Broinowski’s claim may involve him in utter
ruin from that cause, and that cause alone, I venture to hope that you will
accede to his, and my, request, and name a time on any day this week after
Tuesday at which you may be able to give a little of your precious time to
the hearing of this gentleman’s grievance.

I am, dear Sir Henry Parkes,
Very faithfully yours,
Edmund Barton.

The Honble
Sir Henry Parkes, G.C.M.G., M.P.
Colonial Secretary.

Broinowski to Parkes. Parkes Correspondence, Mitchell Library, Sydney. Vol. 3,
A873, p. 504.
Sydney

28-8-1888.
To the Right. Hon. Sir Henry Parkes, G.C.M.G. etc. etc. etc.
Sir,
Knowing how precious your time is I venture to concisely present the
facts relative to my publication “The Birds of Australia” for your consideration.

1. I am the sole possessor of all the materials—acquired by 29 years
of labour—necessary for the publication of an exhaustive work upon
the “Birds of Australia.”

2. I have commenced the publication and six numbers have been issued
to the public. But owing to want of funds the work has come to a
stand-still.

3. The continuance and success of the publication would be assured if
you would sanction the further issue to the public schools of the
balance of the charts of Birds and Mammals of Australia left upon
my hands by the Department of Public Instruction contrary to an
understanding upon which the original order was executed.

4. I crave your powerful aid towards the publication, trusting that you
will consider the fact that Australia is the only civilised country
which has no popular natural history published, notwithstanding that
her fauna possesses the highest scientific value and ranks only second
in point of numbers to that of any other country in the world.
Moreover such a work will soon be difficult if not impossible to
accomplish as the birds of Australia are being wantonly destroyed,
and stuffed specimens at the Museums are perishable and unfit as
subjects for illustrations.

G. J. Broinowski.

Memorandum, unsigned. Parkes Correspondence, Mitchell Library, Sydney. Vol. 5,
A875, pp. 88-90.

Memorandum.

Mr. Broinowski is a foreigner—an enthusiastic Artist and Naturalist.
Upon some verbal arrangement he was led to produce 1,000 copies of his
“Birds and Mammals” for school use, by the late Government.

The price per copy or set was fixed upon the understanding that 1,000 at
least would be required and taken from him.

HINDWOOD 363

Up to the time of the late Government losing office they had only taken
one half of the order.

By the remainder being, so far, thrown upon his hands he has been placed
in a position of great pecuniary embarrassment. Relying upon the bona
fides of his claim he has partly prepared a long projected work upon the
“Birds of Australia.” This has only added to his troubles and for want of
funds he has been compelled to stop publication, as he can neither properly
canvas the work nor continue the printing and preparation of it.

If the Government take the 500 copies for their schools which he prepared
for them he can again start and continue to give employment to writers,
artists, printers &c, &c, who are necessary to its production and who have
been thrown out of employment by the suspension of publication.

Volume 3 was the first of six to be published because its contents were
in the most forward stage of production; of the six parts of that volume
appearing before publication was held over in 1888, parts 1, 2, 4 and 5 were
“Published by the Proprietor” (i.e. Broinowski), while parts 3 and 6 bear
the imprint of Charles Stuart and Co., who, obviously, must have been involved,
if only in part, as publishers of the project.

Early in 1889 Broinowski arranged with Charles Stuart & Co. to again
handle his Birds of Australia; this is evident from the following letter written
by M. A. Manning to Dr. E. P. Ramsay, of the Australian Museum.
Ramsay Correspondence, in possession of J. S. P. Ramsay, Sydney.

Stanbury, Marrickville,
February 7, 1889.

Dear Dr. Ramsay,

I have twice tried to find you at the Museum but each time unsuccessfully.
It was to ask the favour of your advice about a matter upon which no one
can advise so well.

Mr. Broinowski tells me that he has handled over his “Birds work” in
part to Stuart & Co., the publishers, who are to begin work again at once,
and that you have promised all assistance in your power.

He has offered me the Letterpress work again at the old terms—£8/0/0
a month—terms to which I objected before as being inadequate, but he says
Stuart & Co. refuse to give more, as they can get others to do it for less.
That the man White, who undertook before me, did it for half the sum and
was fully competent, being a member of the Linnean Society. I suppose I
ought to believe all this but somehow I don’t, in vulgar parlance “it won’t
wash.”

At the same time I know there are many educated and needy writers who
might be glad of such employment.

What do you advise?
I am sorry to have to trouble you to answer this but I am rather perplexed.
With many apologies,

Ib Art

Sincerely yours,

M. A. Manning.

364 BROINOWSKI

Prior to 1889 six parts only of volume 3 of the Birds of Australia had
been issued. Four of these parts (1, 2, 4 & 5) were issued by Broinowski
and each contained four plates, the price being five shillings per part. The
other two parts (3 & 6), of eight plates each, were published by Stuart &
Co., and were sold for ten shillings per part.

In 1889, when Charles Stuart & Co. resumed as publishers, the Birds of
Australia appeared regularly in parts, commencing at part 7 of volume 3, to
be completed, on the issue of the 40th part, in 1891. Parts were sold at 10/-
and contained either 6 plates (3 parts), 7 plates (1 part), 8 plates (30 parts)
or 10 plates (2 parts).

In most sets the title-page of volume 3 bears the imprint of Charles
Stuart & Co. and is undated. However, in an unbound set in parts in the
Mitchell Library and a bound set in the National Library, volume 3 is dated
1887 and the words “Published by the Proprietor” appear on the title-page.

The “1887” title-page was issued by Broinowski with the first part of
volume 3, but when Charles Stuart & Co. completed the volume they issued
the undated title-page, bearing their imprint, which is the one bound with most
sets. Probably Stuart & Co. issued parts 7 and 8 of volume 3 shortly after
February 1889, for it was then that they were “. . . to begin work again
at once” (letter, Manning to Ramsay, February, 1889, q.v.), so that the year
1889 may provisionally be quoted as the correct year for the completed volume.

Volume 2 is undated. However, Mr. L. K. Paszkowski of Melbourne,
informs me that, in the set of the Birds of Australia in the State Library of
Victoria, volume 2 bears the rubber stamp entry “10 Oct. 89”, a fact indicating
that 1889 is the year of publication.

The forty parts comprising the six volumes were published over a period
of four years—1887-1891. The title pages of the various volumes state that the
complete work contains 300 full page illustrations; the actual number is 303.
A note in manuscript appended to a printed prospectus of 1897 (q.v.) for another
book contemplated by Broinowski states that the Birds of Australia was “Published
at £19/0/0, and £24/0/0 bound in cloth. Ed. . . .” Elsewhere, in another
prospectus of 1910 (q.v.) Broinowski gave the ‘price as £19/10/0 unbound.

Some sets are bound in six volumes either in dark blue or dark brown
cloth boards titled on the spine and cover, which is stamped in gold in an
elaborate design embodying a number of bird species. Other sets are more
plainly bound in three volumes. The plates are printed in several colours from
the stone and are not, as far as I can ascertain, “finished by hand-painting”
(Sydney Morning Herald, 28/3/1887) or “washed over with water-colours”
(Mathews, 1942, p. 198).

In the complete set, in parts as issued, of the Birds of Australia in the
Mitchell Library the part and volume number, but not the contents, are
indicated on the printed covers. Parts 1 of volumes 1, 3 and 6 contain title-
pages to their respective volumes. No title-pages appear in any of the parts
of volumes 2 and 4. The title-page to volume 5 is included in part 6 of
volume 4, together with two plates and relevant text belonging to volume 5.
The plate numbers commence from 1 in each of the six volumes. The part
numbers on the wrappers agree with the run of plate numbers in all volumes
except volume 3, the one commenced by Broinowski and later controlled by
Charles Stuart & Co.

The unbound set in the Mitchell Library was transferred from the Chief
Secretary's Department in 1956. It was part of a collection associated
with the name Sir Henry Parkes. A full collation of this set follows:—

HINDWOOD 365
Volume Date Part No. Plate No. Remarks

1 1890 1-6 Contains title-page dated 1890.
7-14
15-22
23-30
31-38
39-46
47-52

NNANARWNe

2 N.D. (1889) 1-8 Contains undated title-page

NADAMRWNE
i)
i
Ww
N

3 218897 -4 Contains title-page dated 1887
-16 Cover marked “No. 2”
17-20 Cover marked “No. 5”
Cover marked “No. 6”
25-32 Cover marked “No. 4”
33-40 Cover marked “No. 5”
41-48 Cover marked “No. 6”

CIADAUABRWNH
)
ie
iS}
aS

+ 1890

DAuUpwVpe
N
7
io)
Ts

43-48 Contains title-page of volume 5,
dated 1891, and plates 1 and 2,
with text, of volume 5S.

5 1891

DAnAhWN-K
N
Th
Ww
oS

6 1891 1-8 Contains title-page dated 1891

AURWNH
nN
mt
Ww
i)

41-47 Contains Index pp. 1-30 and errata
sheet.

2 Parts 1, 2, 4 and 5 of this volume were published by Broinowski;
parts 3, 6, 7 and 8 by Stuart & Co., who issued a new and undated
title-page.

366 BROINOWSKI

Between 1887 and February, 1889, when publication of the Birds of
Australia was in suspense after the appearance of six parts of volume 3 (the
first to be issued), Broinowski published, in book form, the first 11 plates
and relevant text under the title The Pigeons of Australia; and the next 13
plates and text under the title The Cockatoos and Nestors of Australia’. Both
these books bear the year 1888 on their title-pages.

It is not certain whether the “Pigeons” and the “Cockatoes and Nestors”
were issued privately or placed on the open market. Only a few copies of
either book are known. Broinowski remarked in his letter of August, 1888,
(q.v.) that his Birds of Australia was then in suspense through lack of
finance. Perhaps he decided to issue the first 24 plates of volume 3 as two
separate books, thus hoping to obtain enough money to continue his main
work, the Birds of Australia.

BROINOWSKIS PROSPECTUSES.

Three known prospectuses, issued under the name of Broinowski subse-
quent to the completion of his Birds of Australia in 1891, are for books
that did not reach fruition. The earliest of the three is one dated 1897 that came
into my possession in 1965 through the kindness of Mr. O. Warland, who
obtained it from the Simmons-Bloxham Printing Company Ltd., when he
was employed by that firm in 1910. Broinowski may not have gone ahead
with this proposed book because of the financial depression existing at the
time; or, perhaps, the witholding of support for a work lacking in originality
may have been the deciding factor in the abandonment of the Avi-fauna of
Australia (1897) as the book was to be called. Had such a work been published
it would have been, in the main, an illustrated Gould’s Handbook, and its chief
use the handy quarto size of the colour-plates which are excellent examples of
chromo-lithography.

The 1897 Avi-fauna of Australia prospectus (another of the same title
was issued by Broinowski in 1910) is bound in dark-green cloth boards, with
a blind tooled border on the front cover and the words “The Avi-fauna of
Australia, Vol. 1” in gold on the spine. It contains a title-page, an “Advertisement”
or introduction, several pages of text and four plates in colour, but lacks
an imprint. The cover measures 113” x 9”, the spine is 2” wide, and the
sheetsare} Lil max SAce

In his “Advertisement” Broinowski states that “The contents of the
following pages are imitations, or more correctly, fac-simile reproductions of
Gould’s famous work, the “Birds of Australia,’ with additions of extracts
from the works of many other eminent Ornithologists, and original representa-
tions of the birds discovered in Australia since 1848.” He also reveals that
“As a further proof of the prevailing need of a comprehensive work on the
ornithology of Australia I may mention that in 1890, after varied experiences
in minor works upon the same subject, I issued a completed edition of
‘The Birds of Australia’. The work was complete, but it was an impared (sic)
completeness, owing, perhaps, to an error of judgment. The fear of failure,

3 Item 7457a in Ferguson (Bibliography of Australia, Vol. 5, 1963, p.
426) states, under this title, that the work contains 24 full-page
plates. In this case two separate books are involyed—the “Pigeons”
(11 plates) and the “Cockatoos and Nestors” (13 plates), both of
which are in the National Library, Canberra. The error in ascribing
the 24 plates to the one title was caused by inexact descriptions
having been given to Sir John Ferguson.

Volumes 5 and 6 of the Birds of Australia; both have the year
1891 on their title-pages.

HINDWOOD 367

on the score of expense, induced me to group the illustrations so as to reduce
the number of plates to three hundred. It was a mistake in more ways than
one. Nevertheless, the Australian public monopolised the whole edition of a
thousand copies, without so much as a single copy finding its way beyond
the Australian colonies.”

The four plates in this prospectus are printed in either five or six colours
by chromo-lithography; all, except the plate of Rawnsley’s Bowerbird, have
associated texts taken direct from Gould. According to Broinowski the illustrations
are “imitations, or more correctly, fac-simile reproductions’ of Gould’s plates.
But such is not precisely the case. Rather, they are either close copies of
Gould’s figures (Western Bower-bird, Rawnsley’s Bower-bird) or variants in
posture, or with the addition of other figures, as is the case with the plates
of the Pale-headed Rosella and the “Yellow-rumped Diamond-bird.”

The Pardalote figured is the Yellow-tailed species (Paradalotus xanthopygus)
yet the text relates to the “Yellow-rumped Diamond-bird” or Pardalote
(P. uropygialis) of Gould, which bird is quite distinct from the Yellow-tailed
Pardalote and is now considered to be a form of the Black-headed Pardalote
(P. melanocephalus).

Some 70 years after the preparation of the 1897 prospectus one of the
plates therein, that of Rawnsley’s Bower-bird, was reproduced twice. The first
time in People, a weekly magazine, on November 4, 1964, p. 17, to illustrate
an article by A. H. Chisholm titled “The Strange Case of the Blue Regent”
(shades of Sherlock Holmes); on the second occasion, in the Queensland
Naturalist (vol. 17, June 1965, p. 88) to illustrate observations, also by A. H.
Chisholm, on “Some Queensland Mystery Birds.”

Copies of the other two prospectuses mentioned are in the Mitchell Library.
Both bear the date 1910 but have different titles and imprints. At the time
Broinowski was 73 years old and had but three years to live. Mathews, in his
biographical notes on Broinowski, says of him that towards the end of his
life “failing health compelled his retirement from all forms of activity, and,
although he dreamed of issuing a new book on birds at popular prices (sic),
he no longer had the energy to do more than plan the work” (1942, p. 199).

One of the 1910 prospectuses has the same main title, ie. The Avi-fauna
of Australia, as the one of 1897 previously discussed, but differs entirely
in format. Five pages of text, printed on one side of the sheets only, and
a colour-plate, comprise the prospectus which bears the imprint of John Sands
Ltd., Sydney, as publishers. The colour-plate, from blocks, shows twelve species
of birds reproduced from paintings by Broinowski. The figures are in separate
panels, three across and four down, each panel measuring approximately
1” x 2”, the overall size of the sheet being 10” x 64”. The text is made up of
an introduction of two pages, notes on the Kookaburra or Laughing Jackass
(called by Broinowski the Gogobera) and two pages of observations on the
Superb Lyrebird; the whole on art paper.

On the title-page it is stated, among other things, that Broinowski is
the author of “Pigeons and Parrots of Australia”; no such book is known,
the title quoted is apparently an error for the Pigeons of Australia. His “Birds
and Mammals” series of pictures is given as “Birds and Mammal (sic) of
Australia for Public Schools.” The “Cockatoos and Nestors” is also noted.

In discussing his proposed Avi-fauna of Australia of 1910 Broinowski states:-
. . to portray from life the many hundreds of birds scattered over the length
and breadth of Australia, demands not only the labour of years, but entails
hardships and difficulties of which the lay mind can form no conception.

“

“It so happens, however, that this has already been done effectually—
how, or at what cost, need not be referred to. Suffice it to say that the
results, fully effective today as they have been before, are about to be utilised

368 BROINOWSKI

in the production of an entirely new and popular edition of “The Avi-fauna
of Australia.’ But, contrary to what has been done before, the book will be
published at such a modest price as to bring it within the scope of the sorest
need, in the confident hope that it may prove the saving grace of our
invaluable heritage.

“The accompanying plate (one of 54) is a specimen of the proposed work.
Should this meet with public approval and sympathetic interest, the work
will be faithfully carried out in accordance with the sample, and on completion
a select copy of the first edition, handsomely bound in cloth, will be forwarded
to every subscriber who has volunteered his help by sending his subscription
in advance. The Author.”

It would seem, from the above remarks, that Broinowski had prepared at
an earlier date the 54 plates he intended using in his Avi-fauna of Australia
of 1910; if such plates were then in existence their present whereabouts is
not known.

The other, and third, prospectus, is in royal 8vo and has a cover in
colour with the title Gould’s Birds of Australia, followed by the words
“Published in monthly parts, price 2/6.” The design on the cover shows a
Prince Albert Rifle-bird perched on a branch, with a background depicting a
tree-lined river. The attitude of the bird, presumgbly painted by Broinowski,
is similar to that of the same species appearing on plate 7, of volume 4, of
his Birds of Australia.

The title-page is dated 1910 and has the name of the Simmons-Bloxham
Printing Company Ltd., as printers below a space left blank for a publisher’s
name. It is stated on the title-page that the illustrations will be printed in
colour from “Tri-chromatic Blocks by Bacon & Co.”. The introduction occupies
one page and the text covers four pages for each of the two colour-plates.
Each plate depicts twelve species of birds of prey, three across and four
down on a sheet. The figures are numbered 1 to 12 respectively and are close
copies taken from Gould’s Birds of Australia.

In his introduction to this prospectus Broinowski states that “The work
will comprise upwards of 1,000 figures in colour, representing 694 distinct
species, all fully, if briefly, described as far as possible up to date. It will
be published in 30 parts of 24 subjects each (i.e. two plates) payable on
delivery. The last part will contain an Introduction, Indexes, Classification
Tables, and every other requisite to make the whole into a complete volume.”

At a later date someone has written the following words on the cover of
the prospectus: “This came to nothing. The Mitchell ought to bind this

’

‘specimen’,” remarks presumably meant to be facetious.

SUMMARY

In retrospect it is seen that Broinowski produced in the early 1880's a
series of large coloured lithographs of Australian birds and mammals for use in
schools. Sets of these illustrations, together with appropriate text, were bound
under the title Birds and Mammals of Australia and issued in the mid-1880's.

Broinowski’s main work, the Birds of Australia, in six volumes (some sets
are bound in three volumes) appeared between 1887 and 1891. Volume 3,
commenced in 1887 and completed in 1889 was the first to appear. The
first 11 plates and text of this volume were issued in 1888 under the title
The Pigeons of Australia. The following 13 plates and text appeared in book
form, also in 1888, under the title The Cockatoos and Nestors of Australia.
Only a few copies of these two works are known.

In addition, three prospectuses have been recorded. One bears the date 1897,
the other two were prepared in 1910, three years before Broinowski’s death.
None of these projects reached finality.

HINDWOOD 369

Acknowledgements

Sincere thanks for co-operation and advice are extended to Mr. J. S. P.
Ramsay and Gilbert P. Whitley, of Sydney; Mr. L. Paszkowski of Melbourne;
Mrs. Marjorie Hancock, Deputy Mitchell Librarian, Sydney; Miss Mary Davies,
Librarian, Australian Museum, Sydney; and Mr. H. L. White, National Librarian,
Canberra.

Permission to reproduce material in the Mitchell Library has been kindly
granted by the Trustees of that Institution.

References.

Iredale, Tom, 1956.—‘Broinowski’s Birds and Mammals of Australia,” Proc.
Roy. Zool. Soc., N.S.W. (1954-5), pp. 14-16.

Mathews, Gregory, 1942.—“G. J. Broinowski.” The Emu, vol. 41, pp. 195-9,
pl. 29

Moore, William, 1934.—The History of Australian Art, vol. 1, pp. 56-7.

Paszkowski, L., 1962.—Polacy w Australii i Oceanii 1790-1940, pp. 41, 91,
93-4, 181-3, 290, 332, pls. 48-9.

370

THE STATUS OF THE CRAB GENUS EUPLAX H. MILNE EDWARDS,
1852; AND A NEW GENUS AUSTRALOPLAX OF THE SUBFAMILY
MACROPHTHALMINAE DANA, 1851
(BRACHYURA: OCYPODIDAE)

By R. S. K. Barnes

N.A.T.O. Postgraduate Research Student, Zoology Department,
University of Queensland.

(Plate XXIV)

SUMMARY

The history and status of the genus Euplax H. Milne Edwards, 1852 are
discussed. E. leptophthalmus H. Milne Edwards, 1852, and E. boscii (Audouin,
1826) are referred to the genus Macrophthalmus Latreille, 1829. E. tridentata
(A. Milne Edwards, 1873) is referred to the new genus Australoplax. Comparison
is made between Australoplax and Macrophthalmus, and a key to the Australian
genera of the subfamily Macrophthalminae Dana, 1851 is given.

INTRODUCTION AND STATUS OF THE GENUS EUPLAX H. MILNE
EDWARDS, 1852

The genus Euplax was erected by H. Milne Edwards (1852: 160) to
receive the new species Euplax leptophthalmus H. Milne Edwards, 1852, collected
in Chile, South America. That author, in the same paper, also transferred
Macrophthalmus boscii of Audouin, 1826 to the new genus. A third species
was added to Euplax by McCulloch (1913) following suggestions made to him
by Rathbun. McCulloch sent material of Metaplax hirsutimana Grant and
McCulloch, 1906 to Rathbun, and she (quoted by McCulloch, 1913) showed
that M. hirsutimana was synonymous with Cleistostoma tridentatum A. Milne
Edwards, 1873 (b), and on comparing McCulloch’s specimens with material of
Euplax boscii (Audouin) suggested transferring C. tridentatum to Euplax.
De Man (1896) had earlier suggested the transference of that species from
Cleistostoma de Haan, 1835 to Chaenostoma Stimpson, 1858 (= Euplax H.
Milne Edwards). Three species have thus been placed in the genus Euplax.

The type species of Euplax, E. leptophthalmus, is known only from the
very brief original description of H. Milne Edwards (“Carapace presque aussi
longue que large. Podophthalmites médiocres, ne dépassant guére en longueur
la largeur du front. Hectognathes comme chez les Macrophthalmes. Chélopodes
courts dans les deux sexes” (referring to the generic characters) and “Podophthal-
mites trés gréles et beaucoup moins longs que les orbites. Front médiocre.
Carapace armée de trois dents latérales, large et relevées—Chili” (referring
to the specific characters) ) and from a male and female specimen deposited
in the Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris by H. Milne Edwards.
No further specimens have been discovered.

In Milne Edwards’ generic and specific descriptions no characters are
given by which Euplax can be distinguished from broad or medium fronted
species of Macrophthalmus. This, however, is not surprising since the only
broad fronted species of Macrophthalmus known prior to 1852 was M. boscii,
which was transferred by Milne Edwards to Euplax. Since 1852, however, many
broad fronted species of Macrophthalmus have been described, e.g. M. quadratus
A. Milne Edwards, 1873 (a); M. punctulatus Miers, 1884; M. erato de Man,
1888 and M. franchettii Maccagno, 1936. These species have sub-quadrate
carapaces, ocular peduncles approximately equal in length to the width of

BARNES 337/11

the front, and short, rather than elongate, chelipeds. Thus no generic characters
are given by Milne Edwards differentiating E. leptophthalmus from these
Macrophthalmus species.

Madame Guinot of the Paris Museum has kindly provided a series of
photographs of the type male specimen of E. leptophthalmus (see pl. XXIV,
figs. 3 and 4). This species appears to be closely related to Macrophthalmus
latreillei (Desmarest, 1817) and M. gastrodes Kemp, 1915 in characters of
the external maxilliped, epistome, abdomen, front, shape of carapace and
surface carapace granulation. It possesses no characters that do not occur in
Macrophthalmus species, and occupies a position well within the currently
recognised range of that genus (see Tesch, 1915; Sakai, 1939; Crosnier, 1965 etc.,
and the comparison between the genera Australoplax and Macrophthalmus
discussed later).

Many recent authors, including Kemp, 1919, Balss, 1935, Bernard, 1950
and Crosnier, 1965 have transferred Euplax boscii back to its original genus,
Macrophthalmus Latreille, 1829, and after the examination of South African
and Australasian material of that species by the author, no characters have
been seen which warrant the removal of M. boscii from the genus Macrophthalmus.

The third species, Euplax tridentata, however, exhibits many characters
which lie outside the range of variation seen in Macrophthalmus (discussed later),
and which warrant the placing of that species in a distinct genus, Australoplax
gen. nov.

SYSTEMATICS

AUSTRALOPLAX, gen. nov.
Type species:— Cleistostoma tridentatum A. Milne Edwards, 1873 (see pl. XXIV,
figs. 1 and 2).

Description and Diagnosis

Front: Broad, depressed; unconstricted between ocular peduncles; and with
obtusely pointed anterior margin.

Orbits: Short, but occupying whole of anterior border of carapace between
front and external orbital angles; upper orbital border sinuous, backwardly
sloping and without granules; lower orbital border projecting, smooth and with
small concavity in central region in males, regularly tuberculated in females.
Interantennulary septum: Narrow, but broader than in Macrophthalmus.
Epistome: Long and narrow; central region with sharply pointed lobe.

Anterolateral teeth: External orbital angle forms first lateral tooth; first and
second lateral teeth large, broad and rectangular; third lateral tooth very small.

Carapace: Subquadrate, but with greatest breadth slightly exceeding length;
depressed; with indistinct furrows, excepting circumgastric and circumcardiac;
with variable surface “hair”; lateral margins subparallel.

Ocular peduncles: Short and stout.

Chelipeds: Equal or subequal in both sexes. In males well developed; merus
triangular in transverse section; palm globose; index deflected upwards at tip;
no differentiated teeth on either cutting margin; latter obscured both internally
and externally by mat of hair. In females weak.

Ambulatory legs: Second and third pairs largest and subequal, fourth pair
smallest. Meri long and with small subterminal spine on upper margins.

Male abdomen: Composed of seven distinct segments, first two small. Fourth
and fifth segments with lateral margins strongly divergent towards fifth and
sixth segments respectively; sixth segment very large, with lateral margins
convergent towards small seventh segment.

External maxilliped: Merus large, subquadrate, subequal to, but slightly smaller
than, ischium. Ischium with transverse/oblique rows of hairs across base.

First male pleopod: Slightly curved shaft, but not recurved upon itself.

372 STATUS OF CRABS

Discussion

The following table shows characters of A. tridentata which differ from

those in Macrophthalmus.
A. tridentata

1. Chelae of male globose; with an
upwardly deflected index; without
any differentiated teeth on the
cutting margins of index and
dactylus; and with both cutting
margins obscured externally by
thick ‘hair.’

2. Male abdomen broad; with fourth
and fifth segmental lateral margins
strongly divergent towards fifth
and sixth segments; sixth segment
very large with lateral margins
strongly convergent towards
seventh segment.

3. Ischium of external maxilliped
with transverse/oblique row of
‘hairs’ across base.

4. Anterior margin of front obtusely
pointed.

5. Interantennulary septum broader
than in Macrophthalmus.

6. Central region of epistome with
sharply pointed triangular lobe.

7. Lower orbital border of males
smooth, without granules’ or
tubercles, and with concavity _in
central region.

8. Upper orbital border without
granules.

Macrophthalmus species

Chelae of male never globose; with
straight or downwardly deflected
index; with tooth on cutting margin
of dactylus, and often on cutting
margin of index; cutting margins
never obscured externally by ‘hair.’

Male abdomen narrow; with third to
sixth (inclusive) segments subequal;
lateral margins of fourth to sixth
segments (inclusive) straight or regu-
larly convergent towards morphologi-
cal posterior.

Ischium of external maxilliped with-
out any rows of ‘hairs’ across base.

Anterior margin of front straight
or bilobed, never pointed.

Interantennulary septum narrow.

Central region of epistome concave,
convex or straight.

Lower orbital border of males with
large pointed tubercles, never smooth,
and without central concavity.

Upper orbital border usually with
rounded granules.

Australoplax, however, shows closer affinities with Macrophthalmus than
with any other genus in the subfamily, and in particular with the broad-fronted
species of Macrophthalmus. These species, and Australoplax, both show a
subquadrate, depressed, carapace with three anterolateral teeth, the first two
large, the third small; broad front; short ocular peduncles; pereiopod meri
with small subterminal spines on the upper margins; second and third pairs of
pereiopods largest, fourth pair smallest; abdomen consisting of seven distinct
segments, the first two small; external maxilliped with subequal merus and
ischium; and a slightly curved (or straight) shaft of the first male pleopod.

Australoplax gen. noy. contains only one species, A. tridentata (A. Milne
Edwards, 1873).

Australoplax tridentata (A. Milne Edwards, 1873).

Synonymy:

Cleistostoma tridentatum A. Milne Edwards, 1873b: 82.

Chaenostoma tridentatum (A. Milne Edwards), de Man, 1896: 93-95, pl. 3,
fig. 5 (not fig. 4 as in text).

Metaplax hirsutimana Grant and McCulloch, 1906; 21, pl. 1, fig. 3.

Euplax tridentata (A. Milne Edwards), McCulloch, 1913: 321. Tesch, 1918: 59.
Rathbun, 1926: 177. Stephenson ef al., 1931: 42. Snelling, 1959: 70.

BARNES 373

Material examined: 107 males (2.7-15.3mm.); 66 females (3.9-14.0 mm.);
SE ge (8.3-13.2 mm.) (dimensions given are those of greatest carapace
readth).

Localities:

(a) Queensland: Cooktown, Cairns, Townsville, Yeppoon, Rockhampton, Glad-
stone, Port Curtis, Bundaberg, Noosa, Moreton Bay (Bribie Island, Sandgate,
Cribb Island, Brisbane River, Dunwich, Lota), Gold Coast.

(b) New South Wales: Brunswick Heads, Ballina, Trial Bay, Sydney.

Diagnosis and Abbreviated Description

It is not here intended to give a full specific description, since such has
already been given by de Man (1896), but it would not be out of place
to give a list of characters of this species regarded by the author as being of
a specific character.

Front: With smooth surface and wide median furrow.

Anterolateral teeth: External orbital angle large, pointed, directed outwards
and forwards; with straight anterior margin; slightly convex outer margin,
studded with few very small granules; separated from second lateral tooth
by small but distinct V-shaped incision. Second lateral tooth broad, directed
outwards, projecting beyond former tooth; with straight outer margin, diverging
posteriorly. Third lateral tooth pointed.

Carapace: Surface smooth, without granules, but with sparse, scattered,
short ‘hairs’ on_ branchial regions. Epigastric, gastric, cardiac and _ intestinal
regions raised. Greatest breadth occurring between bases of second pereiopods.

Male cheliped:
(a) Merus

All surfaces without granules, scattered ‘hair’ on inner surface only. Upper
and lower margins with longitudinal series of small granules; inner margin with
longitudinal series of large tubercles, distal angle convex and with six or
seven large tubercles along crest.
(b) Carpus

Smooth excepting a few granules on inner surface.
(c) Chela

Outer surface of palm smooth; inner surface smooth with mat of ‘hair’
mear base of dactylus and index; upper and lower margins with longitudinal
carinae, that of lower margin continuing along index.

Dactylus curved; inner and outer surfaces without granules; upper margin
with longitudinal series of granules.

Outer and inner surfaces of index without granules.

Ambulatory legs: Upper margins of meri, carpi and propodi heavily ‘haired’,
with mat or short brownish ‘hairs’ and sparse longer black ‘hairs’.

Male abdomen: Intersegmental margins sinuous; lateral margins with fringe of
sparse, long black ‘hair.’

External maxilliped: Merus subquadrate; internal margin convex; external
margin more or less straight. Internal and external margins of ischium straight.

Habitat: Littoral or supralittoral; in burrows in mud. Frequently estuarine.

Distribution: Eastern Australia (Grant and McCulloch, 1906; Rathbun, 1926;
Snelling, 1959), ? Samoa (A. Milne Edwards, 1873).

Discussion

A. Milne Edwards in describing the species gave Upolu, Samoa as the
type locality, but de Man (1896) in examining and redescribing the type material
states (p. 93) “Das aus Hamburg empfangene Exemplar tragt auken auf der
Etikette die Nummer 2429 und soll von Australien stammen, dagegen liegt
in dem Glaschen die Nummer 3666a; es bleibt also fraglich, ob es dort oder
auf Upolu gesammelt wurde.” Thus the type locality of this species is either
Samoa or Australia, which of the two, however, being open to doubt.

374 STATUS OF CRABS

Key to the Australian genera of the subfamily Macrophthalminae Dana, 1851

la. Pereiopods with ieulsy exseKOUHAUC row of large tubercles across lower
surfaces OL meni ... Leipocten Kemp, 1915
(One Australian species — L. sordidulum Kemp, see Snelling, 1959).
b. Pereiopods without any transverse or aes rows of tubercles across

lower surfaces of meri... .... RD
2a. Merus of external maxilliped tees ‘ier ischium; aegis min ee
triangular antero-internal protuberance .... sh
b. Merus of external maxilliped smaller than, or subequal to, ischium;
ischium without large triangular antero- internal protuberance .... .... 4.
3a. Carapace domed; front without well developed ‘horns’ at anterolateral
BVOYEES. seco! sobs: ... Cleistostoma de Haan, 1835

(One Australian ‘species — GC “wardi Rathbun, see Rathbun, 1926).
b. Carapace flattened; front with well developed anterolateral ‘horns’
Paracleistostoma de Man, 1895.
(One Australian species — P. mcneilli (Ward) comb. nov., see Ward,

1938):

4a. Cutting margins of dactylus and index of male chelae obscured externally
by dense hair; dactylus without differentiated tooth on cutting margin
Australoplax, gen nov
b. Cutting margins of dactylus and index of male chelae not obscured
externally by hair; dactylus with differentiated tooth on cutting margin
Macrophthalmus Latreille, 1829.
(Twelve Australian species at present under revision by the author).

Camptandrium Stimpson, 1858 and Tylodiplax de Man, 1895, the only
other genera in the Macrophthalminae, have been excluded from the
above key as they are not known from Australia and no_ species
attributed to them have been seen by the author.

Acknowledgements

I am deeply indebted to the authorities of the Australian Museum, Sydney
and of the Queensland Museum, Brisbane, for the loan of material; to Mr. N. E.
Milward, M.Sc. of the Zoology Department, University of Queensland for the
collection of material from Rockhampton; to Madame D. Guinot of the Muséum
National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris for her very generous assistance in providing
excellent photographs of the type specimen of M. leptophthalmus and for her
permission to publish some of them here; and to Dr. J. C. Yaldwyn and
Professor W. Stephenson for help and criticism.

References

Audouin, V., 1826.—Explication sommaire des Planches de Crustacés de l Egypte
et de la Syrie, publiées par Jules-César Savigny, membre de l'Institut;
offrant un exposé de charactéres naturels des genres avec le distinction
des espéces. Description de Egypte ou recueil des observations et des
recherches qui ont été faites en Egypte pendant l’expedition de l’armée
francaise Histoire naturelle 1 (4), 77-98. Paris.

Balss, H., 1935.—Brachyura of the Hamburg Museum Expedition to South
Western Australia. 1905. J. Roy. Soc. W. Aust. 21, 113-151.

Barnard, K. H., 1950.—Descriptive catalogue of South African Decapod
Crustacea. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 38, 1-864.

Crosnier, A., 1965.—Crustacés Décapodes. Grapsidae et Ocypodidae. Faune de
Madagascar 18, 1-143, 11 pl.

Dana, J. D., 1851.—Conspectus Crustaceorum quae in Orbis Terrarum circum-
navigatione, Carolo Wilkes e Classe Reipublicae Faederatae Duce,
lexit et descripsit J. D. Dana. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. 5, 247-254,
267-272.

Desmarest, A. G., 1817.—Crustacés fossiles. Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat., Paris,
ed. 2, 8, 495-519 (Goneplax latreillii, page 502).

BARNES 375)

Grant, F. E. & McCulloch, A., 1906.—On a collection of crustacea from the
Port Curtis district, Queensland. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 31, 2-53,
4 pl.

Haan, W. de, 1835.—Crustacea. In P. F. de Siebold, Fauna Japonica sive
Descriptio animalium, quae in itinere per Japoniam, jussu_ et
auspiciis superiorum, qui summum in India Batava Imperium tenent,
suscepto, annis 1823-1830 collegit, notis observationibus et adumbrationi-
bus illustravit. 1-244, pl. 1-55. J. Muller & Sons: Amsterdam.

Kemp, S., 1915.—Fauna of the Chilka Lake: Crustacea Decapoda. Mem. Indian
Mus. 5, 199-325.

, 1919.—Notes on Crustacea Decapoda in the Indian Museum. 13.
The Indian species of Macrophthalmus. Rec. Indian Mus. 16, 383-394,
pl. 24.

Latreille, P. A., 1829—Les Crustacés, les Arachnides et les Insectes, distribués
en familles naturelles. In G. Cuvier, Le Regne Animal, distribué d’aprés
son organisation, pour servir de base a VUhistoire naturelle des
animaux et d’introduction a l’anatomie comparée. 2me ed. 4, 1-584.

Maccagno, T., 1936.—Crostacei di Assab. Decapodi, Stomatopodi, Anfipodi
Spedizione del Barone Raimondo Franchetti i Doncalia. 1928-29. Ann.
Mus. Stor. Nat. Genova, 59, 171-186.

McCulloch, A. R., 1913.—Studies in Australian Crustacea No. 3. Rec. Aust.
Mus. 9 (3), 321-353, pl. 10 and 11.

de Man, J..G., 1888.—Report on the Podophthalmus Crustacea of the Mergui
Archipelago, collected for the Trustees of the Indian Museum. J. Linn.
Soc. (Zool.) 22 (136), 1-64, 3 pl.

, 1895.—Bericht Uber die von Herrn Schiffscapitan Storm zu Atjeh,
an den westlichen Kusten von Malakka, Borneo und Celebes sowie
in der Java-See gesammelten Decapoden und Stomatopoden. Zool.
Jb. Syst. 8, 485-609.

, 1896.—Veber neue und wenig bekannte Brachyuren des Hamburger
und Pariser Museums. Mitt. Mus. Hamburg 13, 73-118, 3 pl.

Miers, E. J., 1884.—Crustacea. Report on the Zoological Collection made in the
Indo-Pacific Ocean during the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Alert’, 1881-1882.
London. 178-322, 513-575, pl. 18-34, 46-52.

Milne Edwards, A., 1873a—Faune carcinologique de la Nouvelle Calédonie 2.
Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris, 9, 155-332, pl. 4-18.

, 1873b.—Description de quelques crustacés nouveaux du Muséum
Godeffroy. J. Mus. Godeffroy 1 (4), 253-264, pl. 102.

Milne Edwards, H., 1852.—Observations sur les affinités zoologiques et la
classification naturelle des crustacés. Ann. Sci. Nat. sér. 3, Zool. 18,
109-166, pl. 3 and 4.

Rathbun, Mary J., 1926—Brachyuran Crabs from Australia and New Guinea.
Rec. Aust. Mus. 15 (2), 177-182, pl. 14-16.

Sakai, T., 1939.—-Studies on the Crabs of Japan IV. Brachygnatha. Brachyrhyncha.
365-741. pl. 42-111. Yokendo Ltd: Tokyo.

Snelling, Barbara, 1959.—Distribution of Intertidal crabs in the Brisbane River.
Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res. 10, 67-81, pl. 1-3.

Stephenson, T. A., Stephenson, A., Tandy, G. and Spender, M., 1931.—The
Structure and Ecology of Low Isles and other Reefs. Sci. Rep. Gt.
Barrier Reef Exped. 3 (2), 17-112, pl. 1-27.

Stimpson, W., 1858.—Prodromus descriptionis animalium evertebratorum quae in
Expeditione ad Oceanum Pacificum Septentrionalem a Republica
Federata missa, Cadwaladaro Ringgold et Johanne Rodgers Ducibus,
observavit et descripsit. Pars V. Crustacea Ocypodidae. Proc. Acad.
nat. Sci. Philad. 10, 31-40 and 93-110.

376 STATUS OF CRABS

Tesch, J. J., 1915—The Catometopous genus Macrophthalmus as represented
in the Leiden Museum. Zool. Meded. 1 (3-4), 149-204, pl. 5-9.

, 1918.— The Decapoda Brachyura of the Siboga Expedition. 1. Hymeno-
somidae, Retroplumidae, Ocypodidae, Grapsidae and Gecarcinidae.
Siboga Exped. 39 C, 1-148, pl. 1-6.

Ward, M., 1933.—New genera and species of marine Decapoda Brachyura.

From the coasts of New South Wales and Queensland. Aust. Zool.
7 (5): 377-394, pl. 21-23.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV

Fig. 1. Dorsal surface of male Australoplax tridentata (A. Milne Edwards,
1873) from Rockhampton, Queensland.

Fig. 2. Abdomen of male Australoplax tridentata (A. Milne Edwards, 1873)
from Rockhampton, Queensland.

Fig. 3. Dorsal surface of holotype male Macrophthalmus leptophthalmus (H.
Milne Edwards, 1852).

g. 4. Ventral surface of holotype male Macrophthalmus leptophthalmus (H.
Milne Edwards, 1852).

Figs. 1 and 2 by Photography Department, University of Queensland, of specimen
with the Australian Museum Registered Number of P 15158. (Scale
lines 1 mm. apart).

Figs. 3 and 4 by courtesy of the Muséum National D’Histoire Naturelle, Paris.
(Specimen has dimensions of 19.5 mm. carapace length and 24.0 mm.
carapace breadth).

Fi

—_

377

NOTES ON THE BEHAVIOUR IN CAPTIVITY OF A PAIR OF
BANDED CORAL SHRIMPS, STENOPUS HISPIDUS (Olivier)

By J. C. YALDWyN
Australian Museum, Sydney

(Based on the observations of F. G. Myers)
(Plates XXV-XXVII)

In August, 1962, Mr. C. J. Lawler observed what appeared to be a single
specimen of the Banded Coral Shrimp, Stenopus hispidus (Olivier), while skin-
diving in Congwong Bay, near the mouth of Botany Bay, Sydney. The waving
of long, white antennae from a rock crevice surrounded by the large brown
seaweed Ecklonia, at a depth of about 18 feet, attracted Mr. Lawler’s attention
to a shrimp with a striking colour pattern of red bands on a white body.
After keeping the shrimp under at least bi-weekly observation in the same
crevice for eight months, Mr. Lawler brought it in to the Australian Museum
alive in April, 1963. As suspected from the underwater description, this was
a fine record of Stenopus hispidus, long known as a prominent and abundant
coral reef animal throughout the tropical waters of the Indo-Pacific and western
Atlantic regions, but rarely recorded as far south as Sydney.

After bringing the shrimp to the surface in a hand-net and examining it
in a glass container of sea-water, Mr. Lawler found that there was a small male
riding on the back of what proved to be a much larger female. The pair were
photographed extensively by Howard Hughes at the Australian Museum, but
these disturbances did not break up the association. The shrimps were then
placed in the aquarium of the Honourable Mr. Justice F. G. Myers, where they
were under daily observation until the death of the male three months later,
in June, 1963. During this period the pair separated and fed on small brittle-stars
and aquarium scraps. They moulted (the male three times and the female
twice) and at various times exhibited a wide range of behaviour, from mutual
hostility, through a distinct courting “dance”, to the characteristic “saddle”
riding as illustrated in a preliminary note on this association (Yaldwyn, 1964).

This paper presents a summarised account of all aspects of behaviour
recorded during the three months the pair were under observation in one or
other of the F.G.M. aquaria. This is preceeded by an outline of our knowledge
of the relationships, systematic position and fish-cleaning habits of the stenopodid
shrimps. A later paper will deal with the distribution of Stenopus hispidus in
the Australasian region, especially noting the numerous recent records from the
Sydney area and a ffirst record from New Zealand, and will give, as well,
extended notes on the colour and colour pattern of this species.

The detailed day to day diary observations and the correlated series of
Kodachrome photographs on which this paper is based were entirely the
work of F. G. Myers, while the interpretation and “break-down” given here is
mainly the work of the author, who takes full responsibility for the conclusions
drawn from the original observations.

Systematic Position and Australian Records of the Stenopodidea

Within the Decapoda Natantia, or swimimng decapods, the stenopodid
shrimps are a small group standing a little apart from the more familiar and
abundant caridean shrimps and penaeid prawns. These small to medium-sized
natants differ from the true caridean, or non-penaeid, shrimps and prawns in
having the pleura of the 1st abdominal segment overlapping the leading edge
of those of the 2nd segment and in having three pairs of chelate legs rather
than two. In both these features they agree with the penaeid prawns, though
they differ from the latter in having the 3rd chelipeds characteristically enlarged
and in lacking the distinctive penaeid sexual organ, or petasma, on the Ist

378 BANDED CORAL SHRIMPS

pleopods of the male. Unlike the penaeids, however, they do not shed their
eggs directly into the sea but retain them attached to the pleopods as do the
caridean shrimps. They are classified then by most authors as the section,
previously tribe, Stenopodidea, of equal standing with the Caridea and Penaeidea.

The classification of the section Stenopodidea has been critically reviewed
by Holthuis (1946, 1955). He recognised seven genera with a total of about
23 species. Only two species have been recorded from Australia, §. hispidus and
Microprosthema validum Stimpson. The Australian status and known distribution
of both species, the latter under the name “Stenopus robustus”’, have been given
by McNeill & Ward (1930). They record both from north eastern and eastern
Australian waters south to the Port Jackson area, New South Wales. Both are
found widely in the Indo-Pacific region; S. hispidus ranging from the Red Sea
and eastern Africa to southern Japan, Hawaii, the Tuamotu Islands, Lord Howe
Island in the Tasman Sea and northern New Zealand (new record, to be published
in a later paper), and M. validum from the Red Sea through Indonesia to
southern Japan.

"Fish-cleaning” in the Genus Stenopus

Recently it has been shown by overseas workers (Limbaugh, Pederson &
Chace, 1961) that the Banded Coral Shrimp, and its congeneric relative from
the western Atlantic, Stenopus scutellatus Rankin, both have the habit of cleaning
fish, a form of behaviour known for a few tropical shrimps and some tropical
fish. Pairs of S. hispidus have been observed in coral crevices and caves with their
antennae projecting and displayed in the sunlight. Fish are attracted to such
obvious features as the waving white antennae (6 rami to each animal, see
figs. in this paper) and remain still while the shrimp picks with its smaller claws
(1st and 2nd chelae) at parasites, injured tissue and fungal growths on their
bodies and fins. The coral crevices in which Stenopus spp. may be found
apparently become known to fish as they congregate around them in numbers
and some are cleaned.

As far as the present author is aware no observations have as yet been
published on fish-cleaning by S. hispidus in Australian waters, though the species
is well known and easily observed along the Great Barrier Reef and at Lord
Howe Island. A report of presumed fish-cleaning by this species in the Sydney
area, to be quoted in a later paper, is thus of double interest. It will be the
first from the Australian area and will extend the records of this habit to the
southern recorded limit of the species in warm temperate, rather than tropical,

waters.

Limbaugh et al. (1961) recorded, from underwater observations, that
juvenile S. hispidus appear to pair and grow up together, and that pairs attempt
to stay together when disturbed. Adults, as well as juveniles, were never observed
to move more than a few feet unless disturbed by an investigator. Undisturbed
pairs remained in the same restricted location for many months, possibly for
years. The observations published here, however, give full details of the first
record of a pair of grossly unequal size, the first record of a courting or nuptial
“dance” and details of the “saddle” riding already mentioned in the preliminary
report (Yaldwyn, 1964).

The Congwong Bay Pair in Captivity

On the day after capture (8-iv-1963) the female of the Congwong Bay pair
would have had a carapace length of 12 mm. and the large cheliped (3rd leg)
59.5 mm. long (measured from the cast shell of the ist female moult on
18-iv-1963).

The colour in life of the female to the naked eye was noted on 8-iv-1963
as follows: body and appendages transluscent white with broad transverse bands
of dark red on carapace, abdomen and enlarged 3rd cheliped; prominent patch of
blue and some red ventrally on cephalothorax extending from basal segment
of 3rd maxilliped to that of 4th leg. Transverse band of red present on anterior
quarter of carapace, extending over rostrum, eye-stalks and on to ventral

YALDWYN 379

surface, but not extending on to antennular or antennal peduncles. A _ less
regularly margined band of red present on 3rd abdominal segment, extending
a little on to 2nd segment. Another band of red on 6th abdominal segment
extending on to proximal third of tail fan. Tail fan otherwise with some orange
on either side of telson. Ist and 2nd chelae almost colourless, large cheliped
transluscent white with four distinct bands of red. One present on distal third
of palm extending a little on to proximal portion of both free and fixed fingers.
Another present on a little more than proximal third of palm; another band on
carpus (wrist) occupying centre third and some of proximal third. Fourth band
on merus occupying centre third and some of distal third. 4th and Sth legs
with some red on meri.

The bands of red on carapace, abdomen and 3rd legs described above,
contained not only red pigment but some dark pigment in addition, possibly
blue. The gut appeared greenish through the carapace.

The male on 8-iv-1963 would have had a carapace length of about 5 mm.
and the large cheliped 26 mm. long (measured from the damaged cast shell
of the Ist male moult on 12-iv-1963). The colour in life to the naked eye was
as described for the female. The distinctive, but apparently typical, Stenopus
hispidus colour pattern of this pair is recorded in black and white on the
photographs reproduced in the preliminary 1964 note and here on plates XXV to
XXVII.

The two F.G.M. aquaria (termed tanks A and B below), in which these
observations were made, were similar glass-sided tanks measuring approximately
21” long x 10” wide x 14” deep. During the period of the Stenopus observations,
each contained about 12” of sea water and three fist-sized stones on a sand
bottom. The water was not changed, though an airpump provided both bottom
filtration by suction down into the sand, and water circulation within the sand
itself. The stones provided had a natural growth of small brown seaweed
Pocockiella variegata (see Dakin, 1960: 109, pl. 16 fig. 1), with its associated
fauna of small ophiuroids, amphipods and other cryptic animals. The tanks
were placed out of direct sunlight, under cover but not in deep shade.

Summary of Activity Observed during Captivity
1963
April 7th (day 1) Stenopus removed from Congwong Bay crevice and
recognised as a pair with small male mounted on back
of large female.
8th (2) Mounted pair placed in Myers’s tank A.
12th (6) Male apparently deliberately separated from female and
cast shell (1st male moult); male later attempted to
remount female but was deliberately repulsed several times;
male placed in tank B.
18th (12) Female cast shell (1st female moult) during afternoon.
19th (13) Female placed in tank B with male; “nuptial dance”
observed; male mounted female again.
20th (14) Male accidentally dislodged from female, but remounted
again within minutes. Later male separated from female
and the latter deliberately stalked and repeatedly attacked
male; male placed back in tank A.
28th (22) Male cast shell (2nd m. moult).
May 14th (38) Male and female both cast shells during the night (3rd
m. moult; 2nd f. moult).
18th (42) Male placed in tank B with female; female deliberately
and repeatedly attacked male; male placed back in tank A.
22nd (46) Male placed in tank B with female; “advance and
retreat” behaviour observed.
24th (48) Male attempted to mount female, latter showed no
hostility but thwarted each attempt.

380 BANDED CORAL SHRIMPS

29th (53) Male mounted female for short while, later separated.

31st (55) Male repeatedly attempted to remount female, latter
thwarted each attempt without hostility.

June 2nd (57) Male living with female in same crevice of tank B.
13th (68) Male mounted female for short while, later separated.
14th (69) Male seen to remount receptive female (date of subsequent

separation not recorded).
19th (74) Male not observed outside “crevice” after this date.
24th (79) Male dead.
26th (81) Female killed.

Detailed Account of Selected Aspects of Behaviour

In the details given below I quote extensively and with freedom, but
without direct indication other than italics, from the F. G. Myers day by day
observational diary, using the day number in captivity (day 1 = 7th April;
day 81 = 26th June, 1963) of the observation, rather than the actual date.

1. Activity, “Self-cleaning’” or Toilet, and Home “Station.”

One of the first things noticed about these animals in captivity was their
habit of staying in the one place for long periods during the day and then
moving about actively, though slowly, at night.

By day 4 very little activity had been observed and the mounted pair had
hardly moved from the original position adopted when placed in the tank.
She does not seem to move at all unless I disturb her. She must have very keen
sight because she will withdraw or move away at movements a foot away, not
directed at her, e.g. picking up something outside the tank. Otherwise she stands
with her body arched downward and constantly appears to pick up fragments with
her small Ist and 2nd chelae and put them in her mouth. Occasionally she bends
down an antenna and draws it through a Ist chela, which she then stuffs into
her mouth as if she had scraped something off the antenna and was eating it.
This period of adjustment lasted to day 6, by that time Stenopus appeared to
be getting accustomed to extraneous disturbances. She does not retreat, but
turns or rears a little to observe movements outside the tank. She remains on
a smooth, flat stone in the aquarium and did not leave it even when I put my
hand into the tank and moved the stone about six inches.

That same day the male left the female and moulted, but on attempting to
remount later, was repulsed as described in the “Aggressive Behaviour” section
below, and finally had to be moved for safety to another tank. When alone the
female went over her whole head and body with her small Ist and 2nd chelae,
picking at it and transferring whatever she found to her mouth. She greedily
ate chopped periwinkle (Austrocochlea sp.) on day 6, but by day §& had settled
down again to virtual daytime immobility on her selected, flat-stone home
“station” (as seen in pl. XXVI fig. 1). The female remained in the same spot all
day; in order to test whether she moved some chopped periwinkle was placed
on the stone about six inches from her at 9 a.m. If it remained uneaten she
could not have moved, as she could only move in that direction. At 6 p.m. the
female was still in same position and the food was untouched. At 7 p.m. she was
standing over the periwinkle with her chelae brushing it from time to time but
she still ignored it. She was still standing over the untouched periwinkle at
Il p.m.

The male was already actively hunting and eating very small ophiuroids
at night by day 7 as described below under “Feeding.” But by day he was
inactive and on day 8 remained all day in the shelter between two weed-covered
stones. By 7 p.m. he was out foraging and I saw him eating a small brittle-star.
There were several in his tank, but now I cannot find any. He is a real hunter
and, if the female has similar habits, they do not need to depend on cleaning
fish for a living. The female’s inactivity and the deliberation and slowness of her
movements is in marked contrast to the male, who is noticeably more active.

YALDWYN 381

Neither captive Stenopus swam at any time while under observation and it
appears that S. hispidus may be incapable of deliberate swimming. Even when
startled, or pushed with a rod, they simply retreat on their legs. On day 10
after remaining inactive all day the female became restless about 5 p.m. She
wandered backwards and forwards in the tank and finally made a vigorous
attempt to climb the glass from a standing position. She then moved to another
place and after a while tried to climb the glass again. She put all her chelae
against it and standing upright clawed and scratched at it for some time. After a
further brief attempt to climb the glass, she sank down on the bottom resting on
one front chela, which was lying flat, and remained in this position for perhaps
three or four minutes. She then climbed onto a stone, appeared to feed for a
while and finally took up her old position on the smooth stone. At 8.45 p.m.
the female appeared to be perfectly normal and was slowly wandering over the
tank. She made one perfunctory effort to climb the glass, but gave up almost as
soon as she started. The male (in the other tank) is on his nightly prowl. By
10.30 p.m. the female had taken up a new “station” on a weed-covered stone
and the male had tucked himself under a little cave made by the overhang
of a stone. He backs himself in until only his antennae are visible. Next day
(day 11) the shrimps were still in their same positions and did not appear to
have moved when examined at 8 a.m. and later at 5.45 p.m.

Between 7 and 9 p.m. that same day the female was wandering slowly about
and appeared to pick up little scraps and eat them. I noticed a tiny animal,
no bigger than a pin’s head, come out from the weed and settle on one of
her antennae. It was certainly alive and moved a little way along it. She swung
the antenna round, ran it through one of her small chelae, which no doubt
seized the animal as she then put the chela in her mouth and moved her mouth
parts. This typical activity can be termed “self-cleaning” or toilet and was
often observed. It could be a short affair as described above or a much more
complete work-over with the small chelae as follows: she picks at every part of
her body, all down her legs, along all her antennae, her head, back, sides and
underneath her body, curling her tail under so that she can reach there. She
even picks on her eyes and around them. I have seen her spend 15 to 20 minutes
cleaning herself.

A final observation on attempted swimming records that on day 19 the
female constantly tried to climb the glass walls scrabbling with her chelae and
legs and beating her swimmerets at a great rate, but the best she could ever do
was to get momentarily about an inch off the bottom and then fall back again.
I feel quite sure she cannot swim.

The evening “walks” during which feeding took place were slow and
deliberate affairs though the male was always more active than the female.
Before starting a perambulation as late as 8 or 9 p.m. the female would remain
in the same place, in her “resting position” not moving except for an occasional
shifting of her legs. Her resting position is what I call her attitude when neither
moving nor feeding, legs spread fairly wide and her sternum (the lowest part of
her body arch) just clear of the ground (see pl. 1). When feeding, they seem to
do a small circuit within the tank until they reach the home area and then
stay there for quite a long time before starting off again. On day 27 the female’s
evening walk of 8 inches was timed as 55 minutes, on day 28 a circular walk
over the stones of about 7 to 8 inches took 45 minutes. J don’t suppose one
should complain about their near inactivity because it probably makes it much
easier to keep them in a small tank, but they can be boring to watch on a cold
night.

2. Feeding

For the first few days of captivity the feeding of the two Stenopus appeared
to be restricted to the random chelar picking of fragments and the self-cleaning
described in the above section. By day 7, however, after moulting the male was
demonstrating a very deliberate hunting and feeding technique with small
amphiurid ophiuroids (possibly an immediate source of calcium carbonate).

382 BANDED CORAL SHRIMPS

I have spent the evening watching the male Stenopus. He has been wandering
round the floor of the tank and appears to be finding food in the gravel. At all
events he constantly feels here and there with his small chelae and then pokes
them into his mouth. At one stage he picked up a young brittle-star, at least
% inch across. I thought it might injure him, but before I could do anything
it dropped down, leaving one arm in his chela, which he ate. A little later he
found another brittle-star, a little smaller and, using all four small chelae, he
dismembered it with remarkable speed and ate it. It is no exaggeration to say
that in a minute only two arms were to be seen. A series of photographs were
taken of this ophiuroid-eating sequence. In pl. XXVI fig. 2 the male’s left 1st and
2nd chelae (right on the photograph) are seen holding the disc of the brittle-star,
while the right 2nd chela (on viewer's left) is breaking off one arm. The right
Ist chela is carrying an arm fragment to the mouth parts and is thus out of
focus. Note the left large (3rd) chela is missing after the 1st male moult.

When feeding the male walks sideways as much as forward. When he finds
a fruitful place, he allows himself to sink down while his chelae explore and
then stands up again to eat. It looks like a rhythmical lowering and \ raising
of the body, until one observes him through a lens and sees the reason for
it. Again on day 9 the deliberate eating of ophiuroids was observed once more.
The male is out on his usual evening foraging expedition. When I first saw him
he was holding the body of a brittle-star, having presumably eaten the arms. He
took a couple of bites out of the body, just like a boy eating an apple, and then
stuffed the remainder into his mouth. He wanders continually over the floor at
night.

The female would take ophiuroids too, as on day 13, when, after her first
moult the day before, she was placed in tank B and almost immediately found a
little brittle-star, which she ate whole, spitting out the body, or test, when
she had finished. Although she would feed to a certain extent on chopped
periwinkle, fragments of mussel and scraps of fish introduced into the
tank, she seemed to find these more or less by chance, and her principal
food appeared to be organic fragments or small animals found by random
searching of the gravel or weed-encrusted stones. During the last hour the female
has been walking slowly round her tank, apparently picking up and eating scraps
all the time. Twice she passed near a piece of fish, took two scraps from it and
passed on. She seems to feed at random, poking all the time with her four
small chelae and eating anything they chance to grasp. I do not think she looks
for food at all. Her eyes and her chelae seems to work quite idependently. I
have several times attracted her attention by putting a rod in front of and above
her and moving it. She throws up her antennae and head and obviously watches
it. At the same time her chelae continue to search among the gravel or weed
and convey food to her mouth. When she reaches a piece of fish, a chela will
tear a scrap off, if it happens to touch, but, unless a chela lands on the fish again, it
is passed by. It does not seem that sight or smell play any part in this searching,
she appears to rely entirely on touch to obtain food.

The female Stenopus was quite capable of active gross feeding as shown on
day 20 when, on touching a piece of fish with a chela while walking in the
evening, she snatched it up to her mouth and chewed it for 40 minutes. It was a
large piece, about a third as big as her body and she ate at least half of it.
A little later she came across another small piece and ate that as well.

Fish pieces, stray small animals and random organic fragments remained
the food for both male and female during the balance of their captivity. The
choice at any one time appeared to depend on chance, availability, state of
moult-cycle and degree of sexual association. The smaller male was always
more active than the female and showed more dexterity in searching for edible
matter. He then hung upside down on a stone and appeared to be eating scraps
from the seaweed. Later he moved to the other side of the stone and hung there
constantly searching with his Ist and 2nd chelae. They both explore the weed on
these stones very thoroughly and seem to get a lot to eat from it.

YALDWYN 383

3. Moulting, Growth and Regeneration

The male moulted three times during the period of observation, on day 6,
day 22 and day 38. There were thus 16 days between both ist and 2nd moults,
and 2nd and 3rd moults. This spacing appears to be abnormal as no further
moults were observed for the 41 days till the death of the male on day 79.
(At 16-day intervals two more might have been expected, even at 32-day intervals
one would have been due by day 68).

The female moulted twice during captivity, on day 12 and day 38 (note
that both male and female moulted on that day). This single intermoult spacing
of 26 days may also be abnormal as another moult might well have been expected
before day 81. The death on that day was not natural; there was no evidence
that the female was unwell or otherwise affected in such a way that her natural
moult-cycle was interrupted. Possibly moulting is suspended during winter months,
in the latitude of Sydney at least.

The male remained mounted on the female from the first day of captivity
to day 6, then apparently left during the afternoon, moulted and later tried to
remount the female. The latter deliberately and aggressively repulsed him
several times (for details see below in “Aggressive Behaviour” section). As he
was a great deal smaller than the female (see pl. XXVII fig. 2, and Yaldwyn, 1964,
photos) and considered to be in danger in a confined space, he was moved to
another tank for safety.

During the afternoon (of day 12) the female sloughed her skin. She left a
complete skin on the floor of the tank, split transversely at the back a ‘little
behind the thorax. A left antennal ramus missing, presumably due to damage, at
the time of capture (see pl. XXV; pl. XXVI fig. 1; and Yaldwyn, 1964, photos)
was partly regenerated at this moult.

At the male second moult in captivity on day 22 a new large left cheliped
replaced the one lost almost immediately after the first moult on day 6 (pl. XXVI
fig. 2 shows the male with this 3rd chelate leg missing). It did not reach full
size, however, during this growth stadium, but after the third male moult on
day 38, regeneration was virtually complete and the limb was almost equivalent
in size and colour to the right member of the pair.

In a similar manner the female lost both left and right chelipeds at her
first moult in captivity. Both limbs failed to come out from the cast shell.
No splitting of the external covering of the cheliped takes place during the
moult, the entire hand is merely withdrawn from within the old shell. In this
case both chelipeds broke away completely at the ischiobasal articulation and
remained only half withdrawn from the cast shell. On day 35, three days before
the female second moult, an appendage appeared at the site of the missing left
limb and projected forward about an inch, being perhaps a little thicker than a
walking leg. Two days later (the day before the 2nd moult) this appendage had
enlarged and now had two red bands on it, the end being turned out and
bifurcated. The upper parts, or “thighs”, of her four walking legs (4th and 5th
legs) have become quite pink. After her first moult, the bases of her legs lost
their bright blue colour and have been more a magenta. However, they are
now becoming blue again. During the next day (day 38) it was noted that her
colours do not seem so bright and clear—i.e. the red and white—and the whole
area of her thorax has a bluish tinge. She is as active as ever, as far as she
can be called active. Perhaps she is getting ready to moult. That night the female
(and the male) moulted; next day it was seen that she had regenerated a
fairly long left cheliped, about half the size of the original and that the blue at
the bases of her legs was quite brilliant once again. By day 40 the regenerating
left cheliped, now clearly seen to be deformed, had been lost and no further
regeneration of this limb, or any regeneration of the right cheliped, was observed
during the remainder of captivity.

4. Association and “Saddle” Riding

The male remained mounted in the “saddle” formed by the female’s back
for a total of about 11 days of the 81 days of observation. The unequally-sized

BANDED CORAL SHRIMPS

384

ee ee

‘pojyeiouode1 Aj[nyJ snwier yeuusjue joy]
‘(Wu CE YIsUIT) JSO] J9}v] pue po
-WAOJAp jnq ‘poyerousde1 Ayjivd padipayo odie] IJ9T

‘QIQV[IVAR S]UdWOINSeIW OU
sng} [nour "J puz Jo}je yso] sovdeies Jo [[9Y4S
‘poyeiousse1 Apjivd snurei yeuusjue }JOT }[NOW “{
JS[ }@ SO] Spodijoyo odie] yYystI pue jo] YIOg

“SUISSIU SNUIeI [euUd}UR 1JOT

= ZI Z + q o3vjs o[eUlay
(gg <vp “nour *¥ puz)

= = I + q osvys ojewoy
(ZI fvp “ynour *F 4sT)

S'6S ia 74 cal q 98R)s ATVNAA

oe ———

“WU 6°17 YISUE]
‘payerouedser Ayjny ysowye podiyoyo sie, WoT

‘WU gy]
yisus, ‘poyesousse1 Apjied padiyeys adiey 39]

‘now “wi jsp je 4soT pedijeyo odie, qeT
‘oyeumrxoidde AjUO JUSWoINseOW sny}

qjnow ‘uw ysy je pajduinio sovdeivd jo ]]eYyS

SYILUIOY

S'0e or 9 € + ® odes aR
(gE Kop nour “uw pig)
$87 6 S Z + & o8ejs oe
(ZZ Avp nou “we puz)
97 8 S IT + 2 odvys ory
(9 dvp Ynow ‘Ww 4s] )
97 8 ¢ ‘xoidde eB osv}s FIV
eee ————— Sl
(WUuI) q)3sU9| (ww) Yu, (WW) YysU9T wipes YJMOID
1210} pueg sovdeieg

pedijeys ss1eT

ee
E961 ‘oung-|udy BsulINp sndouajg sanded UW sadueyD iNOW sulMmoys Iq",

YALDWYN 385

pair were associated in this manner when they were brought up from the
Congwong Bay crevice on the 7th April, and remained thus together for the
next six days despite photography, travel and transfer to an aquarium. The male
then moulted and was prevented from remounting by the female. After enforced
separation, a female moult, and a courting “dance”, the male mounted again
for parts of days 13 and 14. This period was terminated by vigorous hostility
from the female.

After further enforced separation, they were put together again and the
male attempted to mount on day 48, succeeded on day 53, later separated
and attempted to remount on day 55, succeeding finally for periods of days 68
to 70. No further association of this type was observed after that date.

The first two periods of “saddle” riding, and the period when the pair were
together after the synchronous moult of day 38, were all followed by intense
and aggressive hostility directed at the male by the female (for description
see section 6 below). This was quite distinct from the non-aggressive tactics used
by the female to prevent the male from remounting during days 48 to 55 (described
below in the present section). Two of the three female aggressive displays
followed shortly after male moults (1st and 3rd male moults; female did not have
access to male between his 2nd and 3rd moults), and it appears that this
Peraviout of the female might be related to the newly moulted condition of

e male.

Just the opposite reaction, however, was shown by the male to the newly
moulted condition of the female on day 13. When put together after the 1st
female moult of the afternoon before, the complex and distinctive courting
“dance”, described in the next section, took place and this led directly to the
male mounting on to the back of the female again and remaining in the “saddle”
riding position till next day. The male/female moult and riding relationship
can be followed in sequence from the “Summary of Activity” table given above
at the beginning of the behaviour section.

The riding position adopted is shown clearly from above in two photographs
Yaldwyn, 1964, cover and p. 286) and from the side in one (pl. XXVII fig. 2).
Though there was some variation in the angle which the male adopted astride the
female, he basically positioned himself in the “saddle”-like shape formed
by the dorsal surface of the female in her “resting position” (see pl. XXV and
pl. XXVI fig. 1). Except when at an unusual angle (e.g. 1964, cover), the male
rode with his 4th pair of legs straddling the posterodorsal part of the female’s
carapace, even sometimes resting on the basal portion of the latter’s 3rd or
4th legs (e.g. 1964: 286), and with his Sth pair of legs braced against the
proximal segments of the female’s abdomen (1964: 286; and pl. XXVII fig. 2
here). The large chelipeds of the male extended outwards and forwards to about
the level of the eyes of the female, while the 1st and 2nd chelae continually picked
at, and transferred scraps to the mouth from, the female’s dorsal carapace spines
and the general area of the anterior part of the female’s cephalothorax including
the eyestalks. In this position the antennular and antennal flagellae of both
animals (a total of 12 rami if none were missing) interlaced to a certain
extent to produce the explosive effect shown in pl. XXVII fig. 2. The male himself,
when mounted, adopted his normal resting position, similar to that of the
female, with his body arched downwards at the junction of the cephalothorax
and abdomen.

The sequence of events from day 46 to day 70, covering reunion after
separation, attempted mounting by male, non-aggressive action by female to
prevent mounting and finally successful mounting, illustrates association or
courting behaviour in marked contrast to the courting “dance” and aggressive
hostility of days 13 and 14 described in the next two sections. On day 46 the
male was placed in the female’s tank at about 6.30 p.m. after an absence of 4
days. It is now 10.30 p.m., there has been a constant pattern of behaviour.
The female advances a step or two and the male retreats. They then stay quite
still for varying periods, 5 to 15 minutes. The male advances a step or two
and the female retreats. They then fall motionless again. There is no sign of

386 BANDED CORAL SHRIMPS

aggression. By the next day they had settled down at opposite ends of the tank,
but on the following day (day 48) they started their evening activity at about
5.30 p.m. and soon met, stopped and looked at each other. The male then walked
up to the female and tried to climb on to her legs and thence, no doubt, to
her back. She showed no hostility at all, but just moved sideways or backwards
sufficiently to thwart him. At 6 p.m. he gave up attempting to remount his
restive horse.

At about 9 a.m. on day 53, the male was mounted on the female, but
was off again by I p.m. Since day 48 they have been living together in
friendliness with no sign of hostility on the female’s part. On day 55 the male
was attempting to remount for about half an hour, but without success.
The female did not appear to resent his efforts, but he would get one large
cheliped caught under one of her legs, free it and then find she had moved
just a little, try again and get his cheliped caught again and so on. He then
approached her from the front, but that was no use, then from the side and
she stood on her front legs with her body held almost vertical, then he went
round and faced her and apparently kept trying to climb over her head. She
eventually seized him, but he shook himself free and stood and looked at her
for about 15 minutes.

Within a few days of the above observation the male was spending the
inactive period during daylight with the female in her “home” shelter partly
under a projecting stone. They appeared to be quite accustomed to each other
and there was no observed change in their activity pattern till day 68. On that
day the male was seen mounted for a short while but later the pair separated.
On day 69 the only successful “saddle”-mounting to be observed during the
whole period of observations took place. The male approached the female from
tha side. He put his large chelipeds on her and almost stroked her. She turned
her back to him and sank down and he climbed on to her back. She then
stood up, walked a step or two and started to feed in an idle sort of way. After
15 minutes she was still standing and picking up scraps in a desultory way
and the male simply stood in the “saddle” of her back and did nothing (e.g. as
seen in pl. XXVII fig. 2).

At no time during the pairing or “saddle” riding was anything observed that
could be interpreted as copulation or attempted fertilization. The female produced
no eggs during the whole period of captivity and gave no observable sign of
developing eggs within the cephalothorax. (Eggs, as carried externally on
Stenopus females, are bright blue and should be visible through the carapace
internally in the ovary, at least in late stages of development). That this
association was sexual in nature is, I consider, obvious, but its full significance
in this pair is not clear to me.

5. Courting or Nuptial “Dance”

The day after the first female moult (day J3) the female was moved to
the tank containing the male (separated for safety on day 6) and, after finding
and eating a small orphiuroid as described above, she came face to face with
the diminutive male. She swept him with the tips of her antennae and then they
stood for a moment with their antennae touching and quite still. They rubbed
their antennae against each other for a little while and then the male moved
slowly sidewards. The female constantly turned so that she always faced him.
Then he ran a few \steps towards her and she quickly retreated. All the time
they kept their antennae touching. The male climbed a stone, so that he looked
down on her (pl. XXVII fig. 1), she retreated quickly. The male lost interest and
began to feed. After a moment or two, the female moved towards him and
brushed him with the tips of her antennae and the slow “dance” continued—
two steps to the right, with antennae touching, two to the left, with antennae
still touching, the male takes two steps forward, the female two steps back.
Suddenly the male made a short rush and they were no more than an inch
apart, antennae laced together, large chelipeds waving and at last it appeared
that the female would remain still, but she made two quick flips back till they

YALDWYN 387

were separated by the length of the tank. They then seemed to have lost interest
in each other; the above sequence was timed at about forty minutes.

Later that same evening the female found the male again and brushed
him with the tips of her antennae and their “dance” commenced once more.
For thirty minutes they moved sideways, forwards and backwards, ending with
a short rush by the male, then the same pause with interlaced antennae and waving
chelipeds followed by the final flips backwards on the part of the female
bringing the sequence to an end. They were still feeding at 10.30 p.m. and
showing no interest in each other. However, next morning at 6.30 a.m. the
male was mounted in the “saddle” of the female’s back as discussed in the
above section.

As far as I am aware such a complex courting “dance”, involving both
members of the pair, has not been recorded before in decapod Crustacea (fide
Schone, 1961). However the “dance” of the caridean shrimp Hymenocera elegans
as shown by Dr. R. L. A. Catala of Noumea in the 16 mm. colour film,
“Carnival under the Sea’, can be compared here (see also Catala, 1964: 89;
1966: front cover). Both members of the bisexual pair are shown involved in a
distinct, co-ordinated and complex dance, but this has not as yet been described
in any detail.

6. Aggressive Behaviour

As mentioned in several of the above sections, on the day when the male
dismounted from the female and moulted (day 6, Ist male moult), the female
demonstrated quite a different pattern of behaviour. At about 5.30 p.m. the
female appeared to be restless and moved off in the direction of the male. When
she approached him she opened wide the chelae of her large chelipeds and the
male darted back. She then turned away and for a little while he remained where
he was. He then followed her at a respectful distance and twice, when her
side was turned to him he moved towards her back.’On each occasion she
swept him away with an antenna, no doubt accidentally. After a time she came
face to face with the male and she stopped about 3 to 4 inches away. He then
approached her directly and she stretched out one large cheliped with a wide
opened nipper and advanced on the male. She struck at a rod held in the
tank (an attempt to protect the male) so quickly and savagely that it startled
the observer (F.G.M.) with its contrast to her previous slow and deliberate
movements. The female was then pushed away and the male removed to another
tank.

On the day after that on which the courting “dance” observations were
made (day 14), the male was accidentally dislodged from the female’s back.
He remounted again, but at about 7.30 p.m. the pair were observed separated
and facing one another. After a minute or two, the female began a slow,
menacing advance, her large chelipeds extended. The male held his ground
and suddenly she pounced. There was a flurry of legs and antennae and she
had him firmly. It was so quick that the observer scarcely had time to separate
them with a rod he had ready. The male flipped backwards to a corner partly
under a stone and remained there without moving for two or three minutes.
He then climbed slowly to the top of the weed, where the female saw him and
again made her slow, threatening advance. After the observer separated them
again, they both wandered about feeding, until the female saw him once more.
This time she rushed straight at him and was pushed away by the rod for a
third time. They settled down to feed for a short while but as soon as the female
came within sight of the male, she started to stalk him. The male was finally
moved to the other tank for safety.

No attempt was made to reunite the pair till day 42 (3 days after the
synchronous 3rd male, and 2nd female, moults). Then, after 27 days separation,
the male was put in the female's tank. After about 15 minutes they met and she
immediately attacked him. As often as the observer separated them she rushed
at him. The only thing to do was to put him back in his own tank again.

388 BANDED CORAL SHRIMPS

Summary and Conclusions

With the help of the F. G. Myers diary, the above notes have followed 81
days of captivity of a pair of Stenopus hispidus taken from a rock crevice at
Botany Bay, Sydney. These two unequally-sized animals were associated at the
time of capture, though it is not known if they were a mated pair, and the
large female at least had been under observation for eight months before
capture. Nothing approaching mating was observed during captivity, but complex
behaviour such as back-riding, nuptial dancing and aggressive hostility were
displayed by these two animals. The sequence of this behaviour appeared to be
linked to their respective moult cycles. Several moults took place during
captivity, but it is not considered that the stadia recorded here are of normal
lengths.

Both animals were seen feeding extensively during captivity and continued
with an established individual activity sequence till the male ceased to move
about on the 74th day. He died five days later for no obvious reason and the
female, before being killed and preserved for study on the 81st day, was still
as active and as normal as at capture. Whether the paired, “saddle” riding is
general, or merely an idiosyncrasy of this unusually matched pair, is not known.
It does not appear to have been recorded before and its significance is still
not understood. With one exception paired dancing, as distinct from unisexual
display, also does not appear to have been recorded before in shrimps, crabs or
other decapods. Though termed here courting or nuptial, this dancing may have
a mutual recognition, rather than a sexual, significance.

It is obvious that Stenopus, with its propensity for fish-cleaning, its complex
behaviour and its stable pair bond, is an important subject for future detailed
observation and investigation. Thus the Banded Coral Shrimp, so widely used
as a symbol of marine tropical pattern and diversity, should soon feature
just as widely in decapod ecological and behavioural literature. Its wide
distribution in both the Atlantic and Indo-Pacific, its abundance in shallow
reef localities and its stability in captivity, all indicate how readily it lends
itself to such investigations.

Acknowledgements

I wish to thank the Honourable Mr. Justice F. G. Myers for the detailed
observations and photographs without which these notes could never have been
written. I hope he feels that the long hours spent watching the slow but dramatic,
behaviour and relationship of this extra-ordinary pair of animals have at last
contributed significantly to our knowledge of the stenopodid shrimps. I only
wish that many more of his fine photogaphs of these two animals could have
been published here. I wish to thank Mr. C. J. Lawler for his initial observations
on this pair and for the care with which he brought these mounted animals
to the surface then to the Australian Museum; Mr. A. Healy for the excellent
black and white negatives he prepared from the original Kodachrome photographs;
Mr. R. Johnstone for his underwater observations on Stenopus in the Sydney
area; Miss Caroline Gow and Barbara Yaldwyn for preparing a typed extract
of the Stenopus observations from the original day to day aquarium diary, and
finally Dr. D. J. G. Griffin and Professor L. R. Richardson for reading and
commenting on this manuscript.

Literature Cited

CATALA, R. L. A., 1964.—Carnival under the Sea. R. Sicard, Paris. English

Edit., 141 pp., 27 pls.
1966.—The Aquarium of Noumea. Aust. Nat. Hist. 15 (5):142-146,

cover photo and 3 figs.

DAKIN, W. J., 1960. Australian Seashores. Angus and Robertson, Sydney.
Revised Edit., 372 pp., 99 pls.

GILLETT, K. & McNEILL, F., 1962 (Revised Edition). The Great Barrier Reef
and Adjacent Isles. Coral Press, Sydney. 209 pp., 168 pls.

YALDWYN 389

HOLTHUIS, L. B., 1946. The Decapoda Macrura of the Snellius Expedition I.
The Stenopodidae, Nephropsidae, Scyllaridae and Palinuridae.
Temminckia VII: 1-178, 11 pls.
1955. The Recent Genera of the Caridean and Stenopodidean Shrimps
(Class Crustacea, Order Decapoda, Supersection Natantia) with
Keys for their Determination. Zool. Verhand. 26: 1-157, 105 figs.

LIMBAUGH, C., PEDERSON, H. & CHACE, F. A., 1961. Shrimps that Clean
Fishes. Bull. Mar. Sci. Gulf Caribbean 11 (2): 237-257, 9 figs.

McNEILL, F. A. & WARD, M., Carcinological Notes. No. 1. Rec. Aust. Mus.
XVII (9): 357-383, pls. LIX-LXI.

SCHONE, H., 1961. Complex Behaviour. Jn WATERMAN, T. H. (Edit.) The
Physiology of Crustacea. Academic Press, New York. II: 465-520,
22 figs.

YALDWYN, J. C., 1964. Pair Association in the Banded Coral Shrimp. Aust.
Nat. Hist. XIV (9): 286, cover photo and 2 figs.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXV-XXVII

Plate XXV. Female Banded Coral Shrimp, Stenopus hispidus (Olivier), in the
typical “resting position” on a weed-covered, flat stone. (Carapace
length 12 mm).

Plate XXVI. Fig. 1. Female S. hispidus showing the dorsal “saddle” formed by
the angle between the carapace and abdomen in the “resting position.”

Fig. 2. Male S. hispidus (carapace length about 5 mm) eating a
small amphiurid ophiuroid. The left 1st and 2nd chelae (right in fig.)
hold the disc of the brittle-star, while the right 2nd chela breaks off
one arm.

Plate XXVII. Fig. 1. Male S. hispidus on right and female on left with antennae
touching and about to begin courting “dance.” Note that both female
large chelipeds are missing after 1st female moult.

Fig. 2. Male S. hispidus “saddle” riding on female. Note the 10
(theoretically 12) interlaced antennular and antennal rami.

(All photos are of the Congwong Bay pair and were taken in colour by
F. G. Myers in his marine aquaria. Black and white negatives were prepared
by A. Healy).

390

BOOK REVIEW

“Laboratory Techniques in Zoology” by R. Mahoney.
Butterworths, London. i-vi, 404 pp., illustr., 1966. Price $9.60.

This book is intended for use as a text for those engaged in instruction
in laboratory techniques in Zoology. It consists of a preface, eleven chapters
and an index. The first chapter, which occupies more than one third of the
text, deals with the animal kingdom phylum by phylum; these are briefly
characterised. In the larger phyla lower categories are characterised. Culture,
killing and preservation methods are given for the species most commonly
used in laboratory demonstration. Where special structures require special
treatment, e.g. staining to show protozoan flagellae, suitable methods are indicated.
Embedding and sectioning techniques are outlined where necessary under the
category headings. The first four pages of the first chapter are devoted to
explaining “classification.” It is felt that this subject is dealt with too briefly
to be of real value to anyone not already conversant with the principles involved.
The first chapter, as a whole, however, forms a very useful reference summary
of methods in common use. The second chapter, on aquarium and vivarium
management deals with an all-too-frequently neglected aspect of laboratory
technology. The subsequent chapters deal with histological techniques (including
embedding, sectioning and staining) and care and maintenance of microtomes.
The usual general stains are dealt with and indications are given of some
techniques for special purposes. Embryological techniques, fluid preservation
procedures and injection and corrosion techniques are also dealt with. The
organisation of a museum for teaching purposes is described and a chapter
on skeleton preparation (including transparency techniques) is included. Some
physiological techniques are briefly handled in a short special chapter. A useful
chapter on palaeontological techniques is included and the final chapter is devoted
to the presentation of useful data such as conversion factors, atomic weights
and composition of buffer solutions.

This book should serve the purpose for which it was designed and
written. It provides those responsible for training zoology technicians with a
framework on which to base a practical course of instruction and provides a
reference work in which most of the commonly used standard techniques can
be looked up. It should be available to all zoology laboratory technicians.

The layout of the book and the adequately comprehensive index make
it an easy work of reference.

The print is clear, illustrations are adequate although not numerous (this
is not a criticism as the subject does not require profuse illustration). The paper
and binding are of good quality.

C. N. SMITHERS

391

A NEW SPECIES OF MISSULENA (CTENIZIDAE - ARANEAE)

by
VERA LEvVITT-GREGG

(Figures 1-4)

This paper describes a mew species of spider of the genus Missulena
Walckenaer, 1805 (Ctenizidae - Araneae).

When right or left hand is mentioned it should be borne in mind that the
spider was examined facing away from the Observer, and the position calculated
when looking down on the dorsal surface.

MISSULENA PRUINOSA, sp. nov.
DESCRIPTION—

Holotype: ¢.

Cephalothorax broadly ovate, black, shining, devoid of hairs, finely
granular, rear margin slightly incised; 6.3 mm. wide x 5.5 mm. long. Thoracic
fovea strongly procurved, deep, with a shallow groove running from the fovea
to the posterior margin. Radial grooves wanting. Pars cephalica high, rising
steeply from pars thoracica.

Ocular area 4.0 mm. wide x 1.0 mm. long. Anterior median eye on
raised tubercle, each eye 0.4 mm. dia., half their diameter apart. Anterior
lateral eye elliptical, raised, their longest diameter 0.5 mm., separated from
anterior median eye by 1.5 mm. Posterior lateral eye slightly raised, elliptical,
longest diameter 0.3 mm. Posterior median eye rounded, but truncated posteriorly,
greatest diameter 0.2 mm., separated from each other by 2.1 mm. (Fig. 2).
Anterior row of eyes slightly recurved, posterior row strongly recurved. Anterior
margin of posterior median eye almost level with posterior margin of anterior
median eye.

Chelicerae black, granulated, shining, devoid of hairs on dorsal surface
except on apex, robust, curving downwards, with 3 small teeth followed by 5
large and 3 small on inner margin of furrow on ventral surface, and 9 very
small teeth followed by 2 large on outer margin, counted from the base towards
the apex (Fig. 1). Rastellum consisting of 10 large spines, concolorous with
chelicerae. Fang curved and shining, 2.5 mm. long.

Labium much longer than broad, 1.0 mm. wide x 1.8 mm. long, oval,
dark brown, devoid of spines but sparsely covered with brown hairs.

Maxillae almost square, with large lobe at anterior angle, dark brown,
with scopula of reddish hairs on anterior margin.

Sternum 3.5 mm. long x 3.6 mm. wide, dark brown. Posterior sigillae deep,
but ill-defined; remaining pairs of sigillae indistinct.

Legs relative lengths 4: 1: 2: 3, dark brown, with a scopula of light
brown hairs on ventral surface of both metatarsi and tarsi of legs 3 and 4;
3 claws on each tarsus, one or two pectinations on superior claws, the number
varying even on the same leg on the opposite side; inferior claw with one
pectination (Fig. 3).

Spines a distinct pad of spines resembling an accessory rastellum on
anterior side of patella 1, a smaller pad of spines on patella 2. Whole of
dorsal surface of patella 3 covered with spines; only one or two spines on
patella 4. All tibiae, metatarsi and tarsi with long spines. No spines on femurs.

Palpi dark brown, the tibiae having long hairs but no spines. Genital bulb
light brown, with style rounded, tapering and darker towards apex (Fig. 4).

392 NEW SPIDER

MISSULENA PRUINOSA, sp. nov.

Fig. 1. Chelicera showing dentition.

Fig. 2. Eye arrangement.

Fig. 3. Tarsal claws, 2nd leg on right hand side.
Fig. 4. Palp, palpal bulb and style.

LEVITT-GREGG 393

Abdomen 7.0 mm. long, obovate, overhanging base of cephalothorax,
whitish on the dorsal surface, sparsely covered with extremely short, dark brown
spine-like hairs on the anterior side, becoming longer towards posterior. Ventral
surface grey with whitish mottling, covered with long brown hairs; sides
concolorous with ventral surface.

Spinnerets superior spinnerets short, first segment longest, last shortest and
conical. Inferior spinnerets narrow, cylindrical.

MATERIAL EXAMINED—

Three specimens of this spider have been seen by me, but only one
is available for description. It was captured at Angurugu Mission, Groote Eylandt
in the Gulf of Carpentaria on the 23rd November, 1965, by Miss D. C. Levitt.

The Holotype is lodged in the Australian Museum, Sydney, registered no.
K. 68,593

DISCUSSION—

The specimen described above differs from all described species of
Missulena in colouring and in the pectinations on the tarsal claws, and from
all except Missulena bradleyi Rainbow in the hairs on the abdomen. It differs
from all except Missulena occatoria Walckenaer and M. bradleyi in the spining
of the legs. Although it is closest to the latter spider, it is distinguished by
the dentition of the chelicerae, and the spines forming the rastellum of M. pruinosa
are shorter than those of M. bradleyi.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT—

I wish to thank my husband, M. H. Gregg, for the drawings accompanying
this paper.

394

A NOTE ON ORGYIA ANARTOIDES (WALK.)
(LEPIDOPTERA : LYMANTRIIDAE)

by C. N. SMITHERS*

This note presents data on the life history of Orgyia anartoides (Walk.),
the Painted Apple moth or Vapourer moth. Although this species is common
and well known, little seems to have been published on its life history apart
from brief descriptions of the stages. The data presented were obtained from
specimens in Sydney, reared at room temperature and fed on geranium leaves.
Groups of larvae were reared in muslin-covered jars and individual larvae were
reared in similarly-covered glass vials, the size of vial depending on the size
of the larva. The moth is illustrated in Insect Pest Leaflet no. 112, Dept.
Agriculture, New South Wales.

The egg stage lasted from eight to thirteen days, most eggs hatching in
nine or ten days (see Table 1).

The number of larval instars varied from four to six. In males a few
larvae underwent only four instars but most had five. In females there were
five or six instars, more having six than five (see Table II). Causes of this
variation were not investigated.

The larvae of O. anartoides are well known and a full description will
not be given here. There are two recognisable forms of fifth instar one of
which (female larvae) is similar to the fourth instar, the other (male larvae)
being similar to the sixth instar (female) larvae. In the fourth instar, each of
the large dorsal tufts of setae on the first four abdominal segments is thicker
and more strongly developed than that of the following segment. This condition
is also found in fifth instar female larvae. In fifth instar male larvae these tufts
are very strong and similar to each other on each of the first four abdominal
segments. This condition is also found in sixth instar female larvae. The final
larval instar, of whatever stadium or sex it may be, has the dorsal tufts equally
well and strongly developed. (This applies also to those male larvae which
undergo only four instars). Using this character in combination with a measure-
ment of the width of the head capsule, as seen directly from above, it is
possible to recognise the fourth, fifth and sixth instars and to determine the
sex of the fifth and sixth, the latter always being female.

Key to late instar larvae

1. Dorsal hair tufts equally well and strongly developed on

abdominalliseements wy l=4:" ucse) oe aE ck, ak ee ee ee
Dorsal pat tufts progressively smaller on abdominal segments
2. Head capsule width 1:47-1:6 mm..... «=... .... \.. .. final’ 4th instar 3
Head capsule width 2.1-2.6 mm. ee tinallstheinstanec
Head capsule width 3.2 -3.6 mm. .... We eee linalle Otheinstanease
3. Head capsule width 1.4-1.6 mm. .... .... .... .... 4th instar (¢ or 2)
Head capsule width 3.2 - 3.6 mm. bipe pr Sth instar 9°

The first instar lasted five or six days, the second, third and fourth instars
were a little shorter and the fifth and sixth instars about seven or eight days
(see Tables HI and IV).

Larvae of O. anartoides have been recorded from a wide variety of plants
such as wattle, apple, apricot, cherry, geranium, rose and gladiolus. They
also feed on cotoneaster. The indigenous host plants are probably species of
wattle (Acacia spp.).

* Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.

SMITHERS 395

Spinning usually commenced about twenty four hours before pupation.
Males had a pupal stage lasting from seven to twelve days, most taking nine or
ten days; females had a shorter pupal period, mostly five or six days (see
Table V). Although females spend a shorter period as pupae than males their
longer larval life results in females from a given egg batch emerging later
than males from the same batch.

Unmated females lived from four to thirteen days, mated individuals
from six to thirteen days; unmated males lived from one to five days (see
Table VI). Time of death of females seems to bear little relation to the end
of oviposition.

In all groups reared males were more numerous than females the overall
sex ratio being about 3 ¢ 4: 1 6 (see Table VII).

Both sexes were ready for copulation almost as soon as they emerged.
Unmated females laid as many eggs as mated females, some starting to lay
within twenty-four hours of emergence. The rate of oviposition was usually
increased after mating. Unmated females laid from 114-746 eggs (average 380
in 9 specimens); mated females laid from 198-785 eggs (average 433 in 18
specimens). The overall egg production is not significantly different in mated
and unmated females: unmated females produce infertile eggs only (see Tables
VIII and IX). Oviposition took place over a period of three to six days in unmated
females and three to eight days in mated females (see Table X).

Acknowledgements

I would like to thank Miss J. Walsh, Miss L. Mulligan and Mrs. K. Kota
for eepigiee in rearing the specimens from which the above data were
obtained.

TABLE I
Duration of Egg Stage
No. of Eggs Length of stage (in days)
336 8
1,231 9
767 10
=< 11
275 12
8 13
TABLE II
Number of Larval Instars
é 6 oy"
No. of Larvae No. of Instars No. of Larvae No. of Instars
7/ 4 5

29 5 13

396 ORGYIA

TABLE IiIl
Length of Larval Instars — males
Duration Instars
(in days) Ist 2nd 3rd 4th Sth
3 1 2) 6
4 24 21 18 1
5 18 4 8 6
6 7 5 3 1 3
7 8 1 3 10
8 2 1 1 12
9 1 2
10 1 1
11 1
12 1
TABLE IV
Length of Larval Instars — females
Duration Instars
(in days) Ist 2nd 3rd 4th Sth 6th
3 2
4 13 3 8
5 6 4 10 2
6 10 1 1 5
7 1 3 3 5 3
8 3 3
9 2 2
10 1 1
11 1 1 1
12 1 1.
13 1 1 1
14
15 1
16
17
18
19
20 1
TABLE V
Length of Pupal Stage
Duration No. of pupae
(in days) é 6 OS
4 1
5 11
6 11
7 3 7
8 9
9 28
10 30
11 11
12 9

SMITHERS 397

TABLE VI
Length of Life of Adults

Duration Mated 2 2 Unmated 92 9 Total Unmated
(in days) iS) ras)
1 2
2 19
3 20
4 1 11
5 1 1 3
6 3 3
7 1 1 2
8 4 1 5
9 S) 1 6
10 1 1 2
11 2 2
12 2 2
13 2 1 3
TABLE VII
Sex ratio
é 6 g 2) ey 8
Individually reared December, 1965 17 10 leg) 8 ww)
Individually reared March/April, 1966 19 8 24 1:0
Group reared December/January, 1966 69 14 5.0: 1.0
Totals: 105 32 SescleO,
TABLE VIII
Rate of Oviposition — unmated 2 9
2 No. Days after emergence—No. of eggs Days Total
alive Eggs
1 Z 3 4 5 6 1 8 9
A 50. 661 0 3 4 114
B 0 0 0 261 474 9 1 1 12 746
(G: 28 ie eS D290 254: 5 467
D 0 Lr 1ON 48592292 1 357
E 0 Oe a2 16 19 10 547
F 0 0 0 Seenooeel as 2S4y | ii7 1 12 441
G Ones 52 296 0 9 9 360
H 14 99 1 13 114
I 0 0 0 62) 49) 110) 57 8 278

398 ORGYIA
TABLE IX
Rate of Oviposition — Mated 2 9
2 No. Days after emergence — No. of eggs Days Total
Alive Eggs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J 0 0 0 55 90* 306 1 8 452
K 0 3 0 OX S172 150 46 9 371
1b, 346* 25 10 3y7/ 12 11 430
M 401* 0 5 28 Ul 1 13 442
N DIDS 8 4 31 4 10 328
Oo AS ei75) 0 0 5 1] 2 13 198
12 0 23 22226 14 7 285
Q 0 0* O20 27 3 1 9 241
R Onn 4 8 Ose 53 8 3 9 565
S 0 D2 OF, 161 15 6 295
“1D 0 35 76* 256 7 6 374
U 4 38* 166 42 2 6 252,
Vv 0 0* Sy AK) 89 9 9 313
WwW O* 463 10 5 15 0 0 9 494
x O* 687 22 31 31 14 11 785
Ye 473* 13 45 23 10 0 4 8 568
UL, 2 23* 574 9 13 8 8 629
AA O* 667 12 48 28 12 6 8 773
* = mated
TABLE X
Oviposition period (in days)
Days Unmated Mated
Om. De
3 2 1
4 4 6
5 2, 4
6 1 4
7 2
8 1

399

A REDESCRIPTION OF SAPROMYZA CARINATA THOMSON, AND
A NOTE ON SOME AUSTRALASIAN DIPTERA DESCRIBED BY
FRANCIS WALKER (DIPTERA: LAUXANIIDAE)

by
B. R. STUCKENBERG
(Natal Museum, Pietermaritzburg, South Africa)
(Text-figures 1-4).

Thomson (1868, Freg. Eugen. Res., Dipt., pp. 563, 567) described two
species of Lauxaniidae from Australia, Sapromyza carinata Thoms. and Lauxania
melanogaster Thoms., both on material from Sydney, N.S.W. The latter has
since been recognised as a common species of the genus Steganopsis Meijere,
but the former seems not to have been recorded subsequently and was not
mentioned by Malloch in his various papers on Australian Lauxaniidae published
in the Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales during 1925
to 1928. Hendel (1908, Genera Insectorum 68, p. 34) noted that carinata was
“sicher keine Sapromyza-Art.”

During my recent visit to the British Museum (N.H.), Mr. A. C. Pont
obtained the type series of carinata on loan from the Naturhistoriska Riksmuseum
in Stockholm in order to ascertain whether the species is a muscid as the
description fits in a general way certain Australian species with a yellowish
body and carinate face; carinata proved in fact to be a lauxaniid and belongs
in the large assemblage of Australian species placed by Malloch in “Sapromyza.”
In Malloch’s (1928, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 53 (4), pp. 355-9) key carinata
runs out at mariae Malloch and clearly is closely related to that species.
Thomson’s material consists of six males and two females, one of the latter
labelled “Type.” He described two varieties, “Var. b” having the apex of the
abdomen black, “Var. c” having the abdomen black with yellow base (only
the “Type” specimen), the typical form being “rufo-testacea.” As no type was
designated by Thomson in his description, one of the males is hereby designated
lectotype and labelled accordingly; it is a specimen with largely yellowish-brown
abdomen, darkish brown on the apical two segments.

The classification of the Australian “Sapromyza’ species is very unsatisfactory.
Many, if not all, have little affinity with Sapromyza Fallén s. str. and require
relocation in new or other genera; some of the species indeed have the
definitive characters of Minettia R.-D. or Lyciella Collin, though they should
not be included in those genera. The morphology of all the species requires
thorough investigation, particularly with regard to points such as the develop-
ment of eversible glands in the abdomen of the female and variation in the
number of segments comprising the postabdomen. There are also many species
awaiting description.

It may be worth mentioning here that the following Australian species
described by Francis Walker belong in “Sapromyza’’ sensu Malloch (1927,
Ibid. 52 (4), p. 215); the types are in the British Museum (N.H.).

Helomyza pallida Walker, 1852, Insect. Saundersiana, 1, Dipt. Pt. 4, p. 405.

Stated to come from “Van Dieman’s Land”; the specimen marked as the
type of this species is labelled “Tasmania.” Sapromyza griseodorsalis Malloch
may be a synonym.

Helomyza rufifrons Walker, 1852, Ibid., pp. 404-5.
The specimen marked as the type is labelled “Tasmania” and is in poor
condition.

400 SAPROMYZA

Sciomyza lineata Walker, 1852, Ibid., p. 398.
Sapromyza bicoloripes Malloch may be a synonym

Sciomyza testacea Walker, 1852, Ibid., pp. 398-9.
Species near hirtiventris Malloch.

Sciomyza australis Walker, 1852, Ibid., p. 399.

The type is in poor condition and lacks the abdomen; a yellowish-brown
species with 1+3 dorsocentrals, intra-alar absent, and two strong ventral
bristles on the apex of the middle tibia.

Helomyza marginalis Walker, 1857, Trans. ent. Soc. Lond. 4, p. 220.

A specimen which may be the type of this species is in extremely poor
condition and lacks the head; it bears an almost illegible label on which only
the name can be made out, and another label in Walker’s hand reading “robusta
Walk.”

The type of Sapromyza tincta Walker (1852, Insec. Saundersiana, 1,
Diptera, Part 4, p. 371) is also in the British Museum (N.H.). It appears
to be a species of Homoneura V. d. Wulp, Homoneura tincta (Walker), NEW
COMBINATION. :

Description of Sapromyza carinata Thomson.

Diagnostic characters: A generally yellowish-brown species, fore legs largely
dark brown, middle and hind legs with dark brown markings; face narrow with
prominent longitudinal carina; 0+3 dorsocentrals, anterior pair well behind
suture; intra-alar bristle present; middle tibia with two strong dorsal preapical
bristles and four terminal bristles two of which are especially long and strong;
mesopleural bristle long and slender; ¢ genitalia as in figs. 2-4.

6 9. Head in lateral view shown in fig. 1. Frons a little longer than
broad, slightly convergent anteriorly, some brownish-grey dusting around anterior
margin of ocellar triangle; orbital stripes shining, brownish, converging a
little and departing from eye margin; interfrontal area matt, mostly blackish-
brown, anterior part of frons narrowly yellowish-brown. Face narrow, much
higher than broad, deeply emarginate below, epistomal margin at midpoint
being above level of lower end of eye, face carinate over entire length, profile
as in fig. 1, shining yellowish-brown with some infuscation at middle part of
epistome. Parafacials greyish-white pruinose. An almost linear depression extends
from antennal socket obliquely downwards onto and across parafacial, passing
close to eye margin, that part of parafacial thus affected closely following
carinate structure of face in contrast to remainder around eye. Antennae very
short, yellowish-brown, third segment broadly rounded; arista sub-basal, with
very short hairs. Occiput infuscated. Thorax yellowish-brown. Fore legs mostly
dark brownish, femur narrowly yellowed basally. Middle and hind femora
yellowish with narrow apical infuscation; mid-tibia brownish-yellow with
brownish apical quarter; basitarsus dull yellowish with apical infuscation,
remaining tarsomeres brownish. Abdomen rather variably coloured, in some
specimens extensively but irregularly yellowish-brown with some fulvous areas,
in others largely dark brown, one female with shining blackish abdomen
obscurely yellowish on sides at base. Wing unpatterned, yellowish tinge in
costal and subcostal cells; costa as in Sapromyza; r-m crossvein near middle of
discal cell, just beyond level of apex of first vein; costal index about 2.8: fourth
vein index about 1.3 (apical/preapical).

Frontal bristles rather small, reclinate, anterior pair before apex of
orbital stripes; ocellar bristles diverging outwards and slightly forwards, of
moderate size; gena with some short bristles and bristly hairs; 0+3 dorsocentral
bristles, anterior pair almost midway between scutellum and suture and much
shorter than second pair; a strong intra-alar bristle present; only prescutellar
acrostichal bristles present; mesopleural bristle long, slender, mesopleural hairs
rather weak (unlike mariae); two sternopleural bristles; propleural strong: fore

STUCKENBERG 401

Figs. 1-4. Sapromyza carinata Thomson. (1), Head of ¢ (2, 3). Hypopygium in
dorsal and lateral views, one of the cerci omitted from fig. 2. (4).
Aedeagus in dorsal view.

402 SAPROMYZA

femur fringed with short, fine hairs along most of antero-ventral surface but
no proper preapical comb present; fore tibia with fairly strong preapical;
mid-femur with row of strong, short bristles on apical half of anterior face;
mid-tibia with two preapical bristles, a slightly shorter dorsal one and a longer
somewhat antero-dorsal one, also two strong ventral bristles at apex and two
much weaker ones, one antero-ventral, the other postero-ventral. Hind tibia with
short preapical.

Wing length, measured from extreme base, 4.3-4.7 mm.

Acknowledgements

Thanks are due to Mr. Per Inge Persson for the loan of the material of
carinata and to Mr. A. C. Pont who referred it to me. Identifications of the
Walker types mentioned above were made originally by Mr. J. C. Deeming
and subsequently confirmed by me.

403

EDITORIAL NOTE...

For some of the period during which this part and the next of the
Australian Zoologist were being set up by the printers, the Hon. Editor was
absent from Australia on a trip to Japan and south-east Asia. He wishes to
acknowledge, with grateful thanks, the help rendered by Dr. J. C. Yaldwyn and
Mr. C. Smithers, with proof-reading and correspondence during his absence.

Mr. K. Hindwood kindly donated to the Society some of the blocks
illustrating his paper on Broinowski.

Authors alone are responsible for the opinions expressed in their contributions.

chant iy
ome i

ye

2 et tens i “ity sae a
ae ne: iieodt eke
1 ee Raa we BET eee Y
ewe Ant Neel ay
7 |. aad sn: anieety, seneceerns bie

iiginieetissal hs i sonia matt) oof pei

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, VOL. XIII PLATE XX

Portrait: Thomas James Lempriere

(For explanation, see page 355)

—From the original in the Mitchell Library, Sydney.

PLATE XxXI

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, VOL. XIII

‘DMO[LPAL, Palel-MO]JIA 94] Bulinsy ‘snjoadso.id
L681 ‘PypAsnp fo puNnDy-lAp dy) WOIZ LI

“snjoodsoid
L681 ‘VIvsNnp fo puNDy-1Apy ayy Jo aded app

“Loge

Ad GUNSIWAd

OR DY VVIVALSOY AO SLOWING ANY SOOL¥HDOD,,

GEVIIVILSOY dO SNOT, ,VIIVNISAY AO SaNIg ANT, AO wolLay

‘IMSMONION GT “ff +9) Atl TALIAST

‘Of$1 YADNIS SAINOTOD

NVIIVULSOV AHL NI GUNYAOOSIC SAMI VAHLO TIV UNV

‘VITVYLSNV SO SdYId S.ATNOD

ONTSPENOD

‘WIIVYLSAY dO WNAY-J-IAV

SLL

BROINOWSKI

PLATE XXII

XIII

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, VOL.

‘O16l ‘VIvUsny

{oO spug SpjnoH jo snjsadsoid ay) jo advd-aty

hol

TP VNv ane SEEN DOL IH

ul

SLaVd OF NI OAHSI ad

y ¥ VYUINALSOY AO SNOFPOd. *

VIIVATS IY dO SIVWIW WON Sadia VEINAES IS AO Sle AW

INSMONIONG ‘[ “D

4 O89N0ONN aa

SHIOMAS LONLLSIC Yet ONILNASANdHA “ANOIOD NI SHanolt AHAO

WHOA AIT VY OND NOL ONNOeddda A HWISS OVA ¥

VIIVULSNYY JO sayig
S.d1NOD

‘OL6L ‘VIPAIsnp fo spalg 8 pjnoyH Jo sujsadsoid ay} Jo 19A0D

YWITWALSOY
JO Saag

Sqd1009

oe?

BROINOWSKI

PLATE XXxXIil

XIII

VOL.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST,

(6% seid ‘%rel ‘Ip ‘mug ayy wor)
ETOI-LERT “Hysmouloig Yydesor snisriy

‘OL6{ ‘eyeasny jo vuney-lay ay] jo ased apy

CQILIWET SANWS NifOl

4 OSMUOLSIN CNV SOOLY AG

VetVeES IY fos bone
Vidyts bY TO TVS IV INN: SCTE VULYAEESOY 10) SOND TEED Wettig

IASMONIONA fT DO

Mi

CLAMS AC

CIV INdOd ONY SMAOTOD NE OCOLLVIObSoa a

VISA tO) VNGIVAS DAW ENG

BROINOWSKI

XXIV

PLATE

Xill

ZOGCLOGIST, VOI

IAN

\USTRAI

SHLUPDYIYAOAID JA

pur

YD]

10]DAISN &

see page 376).

(For explanation,

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, VOL. XII

(For explanation see page 389)

PLATE XX\

Shrimp

Coral

Banded

VUvyers

G.

I

Hon.

Photo:

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGIST, VOL. XIII PLATE XXVI

Banded Coral Shrimps

(For explanation see page 389)

— Photos: Hon. F. G. Myers.

AUSTRALIAN ZOGCLQGIST, VOL. XIII PLATE XXVII

Banded Coral Shrimps

(For explanation see page 389).

— Photos: Hon. F. G. Myers

ROYAL ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES

MEMBERSHIP
(The Society's year commences on Ist July)
Fees are as follows:—

Class Amount of Subscription
Psecinte Member sc hic oce. ota hal By co ... «. $ 2.10 per annum
Ordinary Member .. 20) 45) ”
(Members joining after Ist January in ‘any ‘year pay | one-half subscription ).

Life Associate Member ... ... SND oe pit in one sum
Life Member ... . ’ $8 eee , Ee ere pal. Zam hss
if Biedat a services
Honorary Member . “atch ARS DE aC .. ... 4to Australian Zoology
Honorary Associate Member .... bbe eases aon. to the, society;
Junior Members (aged 16 or under) RNY. Cande : $0 cents per annum
TITLES

(Conferred by the Council)
(For valuable services
LO Sea eee Peeper nt oe tee A ne OV ENECODCIELY : OF tO
{ Australian Zoology
Associate Benefactor .. For contribution of $200.00 to the Society’s Funds

Benefactor . iH y $1,000.00 ,, ,, “ 5
Endowment Member . Pe 3 2,000:00) 5; 5 4.
PRIVILEGES:

Members of all classes may attend all meetings of the Society and its
various Sections. Every member (other than an Associate, Life Associate
or Junior Member) receives a free pass to Taronga Zoological Park
and Aquarium, and twelve tickets each year, admitting 12 adults or 24
children to the Park only.

APPLICATION FOR MEMBERSHIP

should be addressed to the Honorary ‘Secretary, Royal Zoological Society of
New South Wales, c/o Australian Museum, P.O. Box A.285, Sydney South,
New South Wales.

PUBLICATIONS

The Australian Zoologist, published at irregular intervals since 1914. Thirteen
volumes to date.
Proceedings, published since 1933-34.

AUSTRALIAN ZOOLOGICAL HANDBOOKS AND
SPECIAL REPRINTS.

“Bibliography of Australian Entomology, 1775-1930", by A. Musgrave, 1932.

“A Check List of the Birds of Paradise and Bower Birds,” by T. Iredale, 1948.

“Revision of the New South Wales Turridae,” by C. F. Laseron, 1954.

“The Published Writings of Tom Iredale, with an Index of his new Scientific
Names,” by D. F. McMichael & G. P. Whitley, 1956.

“A Reclassification of the Order Odonata,” by F. C. Fraser, 1957.

“Dragonflies of Australia,’ by F. C. Fraser, 1960.

Orders and enquiries should be sent to the Honorary Secretary, Royal
Zoological Society of New South Wales, c/o Australian Museum, P.O. Box
A.285, Sydney South, New South Wales.

CONTENTS OF THIS PART

MOORE: Observations on some Australian Forest Insects.
22. Notes on some Australian Leaf-miners |.

WHITLEY: T. J. Lempriere, an early Tasmanian naturalist ....

WHITLEY: William Galvin Wer Na) an can Australian Museum
custodian

HINDWOOD: Gracius Joseph Broinowski: his books and his prospectuses

BARNES: The status of the crab genus Euplax H. Milne-Edwards, 1852;
and a new genus Australoplax of pect ey. Macro-
phthalminae Dana, 1851 (Brachyura: Ocypodidae) .. eda

YALDWYN: Notes on the behaviour in captivity of a pair of banded
coral shrimps, Stenopus hispidus (Olivier) .. ;

LEVITT-GREGG: A new species of Missulena (Ctenizidae - Araneae) ....

SMITHERS: A note on Orga’. anartoides Be al Ce DIS RUN
Lymantriidae ) ae

STUCKENBERG: A redescription of Sapromyza carinata Thomson, and
a note on some Australasian Diplers described by Francis
Walker (Diptera: Lauxaniidae) . epee’ i pit ape Pan Ere

Book Review: “Laboratory Techniques in Zoology”
Editorial Note
PLATES XX-XXVII

_ Page

303
350

356
357
370

377
391

394
399

390
403

Wholly set up and printed in Australia, for the Royal Zoological Society of

New South Wales by

Surrey Beatty & Sons, Rickard Road, Chipping Norton, N.S.W. — 602-7404

INDEX TO VOLUME Xiil
(1) INDEX TO SUBJECTS

Australoplax, new genus of crab ....
Bird paintings, The “Sydney”

Birds, Banded and Marked

Birds of Canada Bay, N.S.W. ....
Broinowski, Gracius Joseph

Budgerigar Survey ‘es

Butterflies ae

Caecilius eenorani

Castelnau, Count

Gercartetus @Tanus’ iw an
Coppleson, Sir Victor, obituary
Corrigendum ..

Crabs, Australian | ‘Majid Spider

Crabs, Brachyuran .... ...

Cutler, Sir Arthur Roden .... ne
Danaus plexippus, Note on Brenvintenne ne
Delias aganippe, an unusual aberration of .
Diptera described by Francis Walker ....
Earthworm genus Megascolex ....

Ecology of Lindeman Island, Queensland .
Euplax, Status of the Crab : :
Everitt, Theo Athol, Obituary ....
Fishes, Illustrations and Records of ....
Fishes, Notes on some Queensland

Frog from Australia, a new Hylid ....
Galaxiidae, The Genera of the ....

Galvin, William, an early Australian Museum custodian .

Gambusia, the fish destroyer ...._ ...

Gekkonidae, Systematic Status of ....

Genera of the Galaxiidae, The ....

Genera piscium: Work in progress ....

Glauert, Ludwig. Obituary

Hawk-Moths of Bandon Grove ....

Hylid frog from Australia, a new ....

Illustrations and Records of Fishes ....

Insects, Observations on some Australian Forest

Loyaojater, ese ieoy iw cee. eke | cage nore an eta eer

Larvae of Gynacantha.. . and ‘Hydrobasileus Te ats The i

Leaf-miners, Notes on some Australian .... hep
Lempriere, Te J., an early Tasmanian naturalist
Life History of the Butterfly Hesperilla mastersi ....
Life History of Pseudalmenus chlorinda chloris ....

WAND meD59:

Lindeman Island, Queensland, Notes on Marine ecology Ohaue

Lizards of the family Gekkonidae .... i:
Majid Spider Crabs, A review of the Anctatan ale
Marsupial, Zygomaturus, extinct ae
Megascolex .... ... Ae
Missulena, new species of .
Moths ere
Museum custodian, William Galvin
New Locality for Zizecria ....
New Locality Records of Butterflies
New species of Missulena ....
Obituary
Coppleson, Sir Victor ....
Everitt, Theo Athol
Glauert, Ludwig

e293 54.157

Observations on some Australian Forest Insects
NO 3510)! a a ee eee
(No. 1
(No. 1
(No. 2
(No. 2

Odonata

Orygia anartoides ae

Overwintering in Danaus plexippus oe

Patron, The Society’s ...._....

Pigmy Possum, Notes on .... ya

Queensland fishes, notes on some ....

Recommendations for Authors .... a Sey:

Rediscovery of Synlestes weyersi (Odonata: - Chlorolestidae )

Reviews:
“Australian Spiders”
“Jacaranda Pocket Guides” (Fishes)
“Laboratory Techniques in ee
“Spiders of Australia” ee
Runcinacea, Australian oe
Sapromyza carinata, Redesouption Oo ee
Shrimps, Stenopus hispidus, behaviour ....
Spider, Missulena ; om
Status of the Crab genus -Euplax is
Stenopus hispidus, behaviour ....
“Sydney” Bird Paintings sities Pea ke
Synlestes weyersi, Rediscovery of ae
Systematic Status of certain Australian Lizards
Tasmanian naturalist, T. J. Lempriere ....
Walker, Francis, Diptera described by ....

Zizeeria lysimon karsandra fe bss
Zygomaturus, early references toh

1)
4)
1)
2)

(2) INDEX TO AUTHORS

Barnes, R. S. K.
The status of the crab genus Euplax H. Milne-Edwards, 1852, and
a new genus Australoplax of the soeay Macrophthalminae

Dana, 1851 (Brachyura: Ocypodidae) ... .... 0... 1... 370
Burn, R.

Australian Runcinacea (Mollusca: Gastropoda) . iN el 9
Cogger, H. G.

A CW S ELV ecLOP a tLOM AUSITAlANe es eae A ree ee. 220
Crosby, D. F.

The Butterflies of the Mallacouta District .:.. ..- =<. =... ... .«.. 354

Dowling, M. J., and Haines, L. C.
Notes on the Hawk-Moths and Butterflies of Bandon Grove, N.S.W. 1

Edwards, E. and Edwards, E. O.
Life History of Pseudalmenus chlorinda chloris (Lepidoptera:

Lycaenidae) .... : erie Me at acon te (Reet ee BE OO
Edwards, E. O.
Life History of the Butterfly Hesperilla masteri .... .... ... ... ... 31
Some new locality records of Butterflies ... .... seat eet ae en)
(See also Edwards, E. and Edwards, E. Oo}
nrazer. b.. C-
The larvae of Gynacantha .. . and Hydrobasileus ... (Odonata) .... 23
The Rediscovery of Synlestes weyersi (Odonata: Chlorolestidae) ... 26
Gates, G. E.
On an Australian species of the earthworm genus Megascolex
Miemplciony Ih44iee cme Weyer se Geist ed ey cctv.) £213
Gregg, V.

(see Levitt-Gregg, V.)
Griffin, D. J. G.
A review of the Australian Majid Spider Crabs (Crustacea,

Brachyura) aes Fl eee BEG ete tee. Oe Ep Te ee
Haines, L. C.

The Birds of Canada Bay, N.S.W. .... Epes Sele tie ates hk 8

Some notes on the Moths and Butterflies . . . in the Haberfield

and Five Dock Districts, Sydney, N.S.W. .... tas) eel Lea Pe ey

(See also Dowling, M. J. and Haines, L. ©):
Hindwood, K. A.

Gracius Joseph Broinowski: his books and his Prospectuses PS SY/

Obituary—Theo Athol Everitt ... . 2 i ed

hess SVdneva PBILGebaINunesn eee are eel meses eta ee 1 OS
Kluge, A. G.

The Systematic Status of certain Australian Lizards of the Famaily

Gekkonidae st soe VA fies) aN : en
Levitt-Gregg, V.

A new species of Missulena (Ctenizidae-Araneae) ... ... .... .... 391
Lindgren, E.

Budgerigar Survey . aah) Se eeo® oe Oe eee a
Moore, K. M.

Observations on some Australian Forest Insects

GIN Ge TO) rene ae ee ee ey ree mre eh ee et ei NAO

(No. 11) PT IRE Fe Le ee hie AG

(No. 14) .... babes, Core nace MISS Tuk, Gee OME eee 69

QNow2) ye oe Wn es Os, n299

(No22)) Pe ge re Sem ee gi oe ie! 2 303
Myers, G. S.

Gampbustay the, fishy Gestloyers---) eee en ae LOZ
Perrers, C.

Notes on a Pigmy Possum, Cercartetus nanus Desmarest ... .... 126
Peters, J. V.

A new locality for Zizeeria lysimon karsandra Moore, 1865 ... ... 29

An unusual aberration of Delias aganippe .... .... .... .... ... ... 211
Scott, E. O. G.

hes cenera -OLstue Galaxiiddewesrmepe cae, ty ke ees es, 2AF

Smithers, C. N.

A bibliography of the Psocoptera (Insecta) . : hte Oe
Caecilius soehardjani, a new name for Caecilius ‘ferrugineus ee 136
A note on Orygia anartoides (Walk.) (Lepidoptera: Lymantriidae) . 394
A note on overwintering in Danaus 8 PIEMIPEUS @Uinnaens)' (Lepido-

ptera, yipnalicae) in Australia . Ee 135
Book Reviews .... _... SETS Scabies CAB Mas _ 210, oi. 390

Stuckenberg, B. R.
A redescription of Sapromyza carinata Thomson, and a note on
some Australasian Diptera described by Francis Walker Ore

Hawxanitidae)) sn ee. : es aE gy . 399
Talbot, FE: iH:

Reviews JacarandavPocketiGuidesiine) jcc eres see oes ese LT
Ward, M.

Notes on Marine Ecology of Lindeman Island, Queensland, with

special reference to the Brachyuran Crabs ...._ .... pnrarse qeey) 1V747/
Whitley, G. P.

Francois Laporte Count Castelnau (1810- 1880) ai At. SOS

Genera Piscium: work im progress ...... .... . et ee te) Oil

Mlustrations sand records Of atisheSwees ae) cecil een eS

INotes! on) some” Queensland’ fishes). -., =) cy ee ee

Obituary—Wudwir (Glauertye ee en eee es ee heen ee TL

Obituary—Sir Victor Coppleson .... bn) SEG

Sore early references to the extinct marsupial Zygomaturus h Sune O28

T. J. Lempriere, an early Tasmanian naturalist . 350

William Galvin (1787-1873), an early Australian Museum ‘custodian 356
Yaldwyn, J. C.

Notes on the behaviour in captivity of a pair of banded coral

shrimps, Stenopus hispidus (Olivier). .... .. fit Oe

DATES OF PUBLICATION

Barty ipa cesel=o 2 i plateSvi-Vilie ses ccts access cscnout ovat tardesornsecneye ss September 18, 1963
Part 25 PAPeSi8 5-2 1S lAteS VIN XE Ee coe etk anne cence oct nseecn tte soar Angust 10, 1965
Parties papese 29-30 2s mlates pe xii-XUK ii ponerse ties ncebcesinasnerencael July 6, 1966
Part 4, pages 303-404, plates XX-XXVIL .........c......eccceseeeeceosetoenes December 14, 1966

*

Printed and published for the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,
c/o Australian Museum, P.O. Box A.285, Sydney South

by
E. J. Miller & Co., Marrickville, New South Wales (Part 1)

Surrey Beatty & Sons, Rickard Road, Chipping Norton, New South Wales
(Parts 2-4)

4 i a i c is
== A iG ~ =
wv i uF :
“thy i a
Li
. r ie y re wohl
" at ats ‘i ey re ns ae
} i an if Week = ly
4, "y 1 he ie oT
if : ‘a
Dit

“00s Shae, ‘Vert Agus. Te. Vane th. an

ea Fe i ane va i f bie Sel iy a A ay Peet ates a % 9

acy Trans yet

: = E 5 E 3
E 2 WOE = E =
= <= Ss Ps ce - pes
: By. ee 5 : ; |
— yey hy es wn = ; w : 4
LIBRARIES) SMITHSONIAN NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uvUgIT
Z ae = < z < < /
= — =
pe 3 2 ANE S te 3
vei = = \S Zs = es
eee Phos z z i
NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31YVYGI1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION |
it & wl 2 us z
= = z — = = ;
a ar S o Faery =
<x fox - < S < e .
oc 4 ss = = _
a fe) am S) =a re)
ai 2 =) Zz as ; ae ; ;
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN, INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YWYaIT
i Z i
—_ (@) —. —_ NY
ow = aw = wo es
2 =) ae = ree 5
> Fy > = > =
fd i ie e 2 =
TION NOLLALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS | Sa luvud Feet BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN —
(oes < = = & = < :
a ee = 5 z= WS 5 z :
A = a (@) pa es “ (@) IN SS 2 ae ae fo) 3
w 2 a 2 RR” & 2
Sie F 27 = 2 F
8 = S = 2 z

" ‘ r a,
4Gi71 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT

— w > wo = ” :
o a OD Es a et
= e: = oc = ac :
¢ z S ce = a
2 oo = re] = oo F
oO = Ge: fe) = oO = (
Zz Sie 2 - Fal ere :
TION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYvVu¥dItT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
5 —* S EB z a i.
— wo — w ao Lp wo
5 2 = a 5 GL Ly»
Lira = st ze = Wi fale = :
- e = 2 -,&/ ae
” m A 2 m n° m :
= Wn ay = w = wn F
1917 ae B RARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOULALILSNI_ NVINOSHIUNS Se 1YVuyg 17.
; < ei = z ae = : < = Se
‘ toa | N = OL
G5 wz é t Uys : |
Loe Se » VSN S Ke S Wik x 3 6 " :
eee a SNR 2 FE TM La = Za t
' SS =e, pani Fe
an = = : : : :
TION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
” a fe z n 3S ¢
rs a = w e a F
~ = o = lead + = C
< = es c < = :
or a os 4 = 4 ;
2 fe a O a 5 kc
Ga vou tec ai z a | = ‘
4git LIBRARIE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S3lyvya iT
- a ii oa ag Zz
Pa Oo ee <tHISON Oo SV¥A sen wh" os (@) \HS¥AL
ow en aw fs a) = As w X = AS 5
ca =) S19 tp iy Ae = ay 7 KE R55 fF FA

P = ow — ‘ to _— w s
\\ 5 2 = Z Es) = 2 \

: . q Le > e > Ke > >t SS
S F 2 ee a = 2 WN
OA w n* w WSN

SS = m z m z= m “as

- wn = ; wn” = ”
AITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3!1uvygi7t LIBRARIES SMITHSOI

Zr 2) z 2) Se icae Qn

as = ° < = < =

z =| = = = =

oO a ip. O ae (@) ple,

2 Se ‘he, 2 g 2 SN 8

= Ny \S ie en = = RS =

Ae ieee 3 : we
JINOSHLINS S3!YVYG!I7T LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSH

Ss

NOILNLILSNI
NOILALILSNI

LIBRARIES

SMITHSO

Ha
Eb

SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSH

AITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVYUSIT LIBRARIES

Sa1uvual LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI

INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
S3A1YvVudit

(INOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT

NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIE

SMITHSONIAN

NVINOSHLIWS

*

SMITHSONIAN
2
NVINOSHLIWS

=z
<=
me
oO
”
ae
=
=
. é w
NTHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI, NVINOSHIINS S3IYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSO!
F = Ww =
& = = a) = WwW
ee « = ze = aM |
= < = & E Ve
@ : : : E : a
z ae; os eee Zz var 4
INOSHLINS S31YVYSI1_ LIBRARIES” SMITHSONIAN” INSTITUTION | NOILNLILSNI—NVINOSH
oO — fe) _ Oo ~ -
= 1e8) — Ly ow — w
5 cad 5 tip a = a
NY E > P AEE 2 :
AO" E a = Cee > = 2
NTHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS, $3 luvugia_LIBRARI ES.
se = < = =a =
za =| Zz = z +
(e) i FS) xz eS) x=
” 7) sue) a) St 122)

3 g = 2 Ee XO’ 2
INOSHLINS _LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSH.
Ww z Zz « Zz
: 2 = £%° E =

=e %, Pee aoe oc =
AV = = © Ul: < 2
“ 0 = raat ¢ Fe = a =
=z a) = ind a
RONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS S3l¥v¥diT LIBRARIES SMITHSO
= Su z i
Pas) Seaway o ASYM wo Ks o EL ioe] ISON =
Ne eB a BR g ”) S os ae |
= Ae} = KM 2A 5 & | Wa > GY

MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES

EA | a : ‘wi | | | MN
“¢ 4 wn Cnees ‘
‘
;

3 9088 01257 1741

conan